This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/
E-cUa^/T" \TiV. ^^^^^
HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY
THE ESSEX INSTITUTE
TEXT-BOOK COLLECTION
GIFT OF
GEORGE ARTHUR PLIMPTON
OF NEW YORK
JANUARY 25, 1924
Digitized
by Google
3 2U44 102855^
Digitized
by Google
1
I
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
f
t
Digitized
by Google
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
N£ W METHOD
OF LBABHIIW
THE FRENCH LANGUAGE;
Stno^tic mk Sgntlietic MUAt$ tif MtuUfutiM ;
A PIiAnr ASD PRAOnCAL WAT OF AOQUOtlNa THI AH
EEADING, SPSAKINQ, AND COMPOSING FBENCH.
OV tXX PLAV Of WOOBBVBTS MBTKOB WITH tfBBMAV
BY LOUIS FASQUELLR LL.D.
raorBMOB ow modbm LAii«VA«as la thb raivaaiuTT or miohioaji
TBIKIT-UOOND SDITION.
NEW YORK:
IVISON k PHINNBY, 821 BROADWAY,
(tVOCBttOBt or VABK ■. W B W M A IT * 00.)
CHICAGO: a 0. ORIGGS A Ga, 111 LAKE STREET.
BUPPALO: PHINKET * 00.
imnm: tMrmanm * ALWAXDk ODNBifXAn: mooxBi wiutaob, Km » oi^
NTBoiT : BATMon A mues. it. lovit : sim Ji woom.
**'*'** Digitized
by Google
V- c^ ^* f- T rr I 'r. . ^:'i -."^-^^
rMo coLirsc libraiy
6IFT OF
QEORGE ARTHi.-f; PLIHPTdM
We liave publishen Y)r the use uf Teacfaera^
*'A Esr TO TUK KxERoiHKs IN Fa8qubllb*8Nxw Frbnto
Method, with occasional Notes and Refereuces to the Rules, by
Louis FasqueU«,LL.D^ drc.'' PHceV^ets. Tbe^'Key'^obeseD
bv mail, by seadiBg the publisher the p riee ia P. O. stamps.
NCWMAN 6s IviBOH.
ERTSasP Meoidliig to Aet of CopgnM, ia Um j9u lOl,
BY LOUIS FASQUELLE,
» Gl«k*t Offlee of Um Ulitrtot Coort of Ibe United 8teU«^ Sir f
DlMrict uf UichiKU.
Digitized
by Google
{
f[)ft Xitini if tjit /nii| tsngsigt
AND LITEIIATURE,
TnKOIJOHOUT THB UNITED 8TATS8,
Cl|i0 bolsme
WPKCmTLLT MDIOA'
Digitized
by Google
WOODBURY'S 6EBHM SERIES.
^H » •» ^
I NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN.
S2S pp. iam«.— Prie<k $1 oa
H KEY TO NEW METHOD
80 pp. limo.— Prio«^ SOotnte.
m. SHOBTEB COURSE WITH GERMAN.
880 pp. 12mo. — ^Prioe^ 75 eentt.
17. SET TO SHORTER COURSE.
80 pp. 12mo.— Prices 60 cento.
y. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER.
850 pp. 18ma— Prioe, 75 oento.
YI ECLECTIC GERMAN READER.
280 pp. ISmo.— Pri««^ $1.
yn. QEBMM-ENGUSH AND EN6LISH-6EBKAK BEADEB.
70 pp. ISmo. — Pric«^ 85 oento.
vm. mpphlfutpH Sleue Vlttl^pht
tux Srletnttng bet englifd^eit ©j^ra^e*
a^rcU $1.
^ l> » >■ »
faBi\ntiit*B Sttntij 0tne0.
I FRENCH COURSE.
000 pp. ISato.— Prio*, $1 88.
U KEY TO FRENCH COURSE.
140 pp. 18mo^— Prioe» 50 cento»
m COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER.
860 pp. 12ma — ^Price^ 75 cento.
17. TiL^MAQUE.
890 pp. 18ma— Pricey 75 cento.
V. NAPOLEON.
874 pp^ ISmo.— Pric«^ 75otaft^
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
PBEFACE
Thb Qmrenafitjr of the Freneh hmgi jige ibnushtt suffideiit
poof of its utiHty. Tlironghout Europe, in many parts of Aaiai
AinoL^ and America, no education is complete without a knowledge
of that tongue; which in more than one conntiy of Europe ir
emphaticallj called ** the langttoffe,^ Its merits are becoming so
well appredatea in this country, that it is almost unnecessary to
partiddariae them, — ^to speak of its unsurpassed precision and dear-
nan, and of iti capability d expresnng eveiy idea in the m i^t
laeonic and in the most ornamental style. The language of
PVanoe, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and the
Teutonio elemoitB, is equally adapted to the lightest literature
and to the most profound diction of sdenoe. The ridi mmes of
Frendi literature, too long but imperfectly known here, offer in
every department of knowledge treasures equal to those presented
bj ^e litermture cf any other nation.
Many works have been published, in this country and in Bag
land, to fecilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but
daring his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the mod-
em lax^ruages, the author of this volume has in vain looked ibr
the appearance of a book which, like several of the French gram-
ouffs published in Germany, should unite in due proportions the-
&ry and practice. To the high merits of several of the iheoretioal
grsmmaiB, he bears lus ^ost dieerful testimony ; yet, the student
might go through them, and know but little of the idiomatic or
practical part of the language. Several of the practical works^
duyagh well executed acoordbg to the plans whidi their authors
kad hud, neglect grammatical rules, if not entirdy, at least, Uat
Ado much; and the student may, after having devoted a long time
to <he men memoriang of seBteneea, find hinoself in possesnoo cf a
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Tl PftBVAOS.
nixiober of set pbraseB, yaluabley-it is tnie, but irom wUch, destk*
tute of landmarks, the slightest deviation must lead him into
unknown regions.
A work which, unit/ng practice with theory, should attempt to
avoid tlie difHculties mentioned above, had been long contem-
plated by the auth<M: of these pages, when '^ Woodbury's New
Method with the German" made its appearance. Finding in that
work the two systems, the analydc and the synthetic, beautifully
blended and well ehiboratcd, he had no hesitation in adopting the
*' New MfixnoD," so sucoessfully applied by Mr. Woodbury to
the German, as the model on which to construct his long intended
treatise on the French. The result is the present work.
The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro-
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, mediala and
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar care
has been taken to render this part sufficiently full, to provide the
st«..lent with a satisfactory guide and ad\iser, in the prii^npal
difficulties of the Frendi pronunciation. The words presenting
pecuIiaritieB of pronunciation, are placed as exceptions to the rules
given in this part
In the coQWiencement of the First Part of this grammar*, the
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are grad-
ually mtroduced and explained ; copious references to the Second,
or more theoretical Part, render further information easily attidn*
able. After the rules of every lesson, comes a resunU of ex
amples in illustration of them, as also of preceding ones, con-
taining often new idioms and conversational phrases, llie
examples on the rules, the resumes and the French exercisea
to be rendered into English consisting almost entirely of ques-
tions and answers, combine, it is thought, all the benefits pre-
sented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the lessons,
and the ease with which reference may be had to the Second
Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treatises. It
will be easily seen that the teacher and student will find liere the
practice, with as httle or as much of tbe^ theory ma they may desire.
The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, so
■s not to* offer too many difficulties at once. Care has been
lakea not to present the rules as aUtact and aiUtniry hi«v«» while
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
flii ruMiUtiiMi m diftffMMi i£ (
f»BgnHf(» ii ctu«&iUy pointed maL
evei7 kiBOA. The nutteriib for them are found in Uie axaiuptev
to Om nile«» IB tb» rcaiuad^ in fti» Frtivk «MidMt and in dv»
TocabnUms ppeoedii^ the Muiie. BesidM idi tfak, in McordaHot
with an admimbla feature of Mr. Woodbuiy's systein, the ftudeat
IB furnished with/the means of carrying on in conneetion with Che
r^^ttku' wwm already indicaled, a series of exeicisea in FrtmA
eompositioB, at onoe eaiy, intereaiHig, and profitable iathe highesT
degree.
The grouping of the tencoe of the Terhe and the clasrificatfon
of the in^gnlaritiesy will^ it is h^ped, siaiplify this ]«ri of j
mar. In the former^ the stodent will see that by kamiag a 1
u one conjugation, he often leans it in the others; in the hrtler
he will pereeive that the deviations of the irregukv Tsrfaa are
oftcB veiy trifiiag and confined to partiealBr tenaea.
An attempt v^ made in the "Praolioal Beenm^'* Lessons W
and 90, to simplify as much as pessiUa ths aomewhat eonptar
Kubject of the past participle.
The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, aie dednoed from
the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by short
extracts from the best Frendi authors. This will, it is hoped,
while giving dassical autliority to the rules, inspire the student
with a desiro of beconrng more intimately acquainted with tho
authors from whose works the examples are taken. It will be
perceived, also, that the sentiments contabed in the extract;, have
not been overlooked.
In tlie Second Part, the verbs are given m their fullest farm.
The irreguUr, defective, peculiar (See § 40), and unipersonal
verbs are pUced alphabetically.
The author would here respectfully suggest not with a view of
offering advice to experienced teadiers, but as a mode which he
has feund beneficial in practice, that the student commence to
learn the verbs fi^m the paradigms in the Second Part as soon as
he has acquired some little knowledge of the p. onundatico, and
this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of tSe First Part
The verbs in the French, and in the other, so called Bomaaie
Digitized
by Google
liiyiiyii AM aiM6 wmpliMlBd and Mqure moie ftudy iSbtm Um
▼6rl» in tlie Qennan and other Teatonio langnageB. Bavmg in
thk nmner aoqdved aome Iroowledge of tbe Terba, die atodeat
wiU, by die time he, in hb progresa diroiigh the first part^ reachea
the groupings of the tenses mentioned above, be able to reoogniaa
the verba aa M frienda, and better to appreciate the dassificatioa
f the irregularities. This oonrse is advised not aa indispensaUe,
but as beneficiaL
The reading lesaons, m prose and in verse, extracted from the
best sources, and containing grammatical refarenoea to both parts
of the work, will not be unacceptable to the student A vocabu-
laiy for these lessons is placed immediately after them.
Among the numerous works which have been consulted during
the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention with
gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, Lemare,
Bescher, Oiraolt-Duvivier, Bonifiice, Beschere^e, Landais, etc
With a sbcere hope that the present volume mtj assist the
Ameriean atndent in obtaining a knowledge of tie beantiliil
hngaage of France, it is respeotftdly submitted.
Uarrxantr of ICichioak, )
Jbm Jbfb&r, Sepi. 160, Itfl. {
Digitized
by Google
GENERAL INDEL
AbbreTisaoDS, p. 275.
Accents, Lemon 2.
Achetor, tobvf,^ 49, (6) ; its goT^
emment^ L. 60, 1.
Accorder, s\ to agree; said also of
watches, L. 92, 8.
Active Tert>.^ 48, (2), (80
Actire Voice, used in French in
cases where the passive is used in
Eoglish, L. 86, 2} L. 46 8 • ^128,
(6T;Ul«.a)
A4}«ctives, i 14. (1). Qua^^'^ine
adjectives, ( 14, (2). Degrees of
ngnification, ^ 14, (2). Gender
and number of, ( 16. Formation
of feminine of, ^ 16, L. 18. Irregu-
lar adjectives, ^16. (8). Adjectives
having no feminine, 4 16, (9.)
Plural of, i 17, L. 14. Agre^
ment of adjective with nouns,
& 18; ^88; L. 18, L. 14. ReUt-
11^ to several nouns, ^ IB, (3);
L. 14, 1, 2. Betermiidng acyec
lives, ^ 19. Demonstrative, ( 20 ;
^98. Possessive, ^21; 4 94; Re-
marks on, ( 96. Agree with ob>
feet possess^ ^ 21, (2} ; L. 9, 8.
Numeral acQectives, ^ 22 ; place of,
I 96. Cardinal a(\jective, ^ 22, (1),
(2X (4); Variations o^ i^ 28 ; Ob-
servation on, ^ 24. Ordinal nunv-
T)ers,(28,(8),(D). Observation on,
4 25. Indefinite adjectives, ^ 80 ;
$ 97> Verbal adjectives, syn-
tax of; ^ 66. Remarks on feu,
au, &G % 84. Adjective used ad-
verbUUy, 4 6T, (8); ^ 84, (5).
Place of. ( 86; ( 86; L. 15. Ad-
Jective preceding noun, 4 85, (11).
Adjective different in meaning be-
fore and after, ^ 86. Reeimen or
fovemment of, 4 87 ; 4 88 ; ^ 89 ;
92; L. 79. Adjective requiring
a different preposition in French
and English, ( 90.
Adverbs. $ 67. Formed fh>m adjec-
tives, ^ 68. Deerees of significa-
tion, % 69. Adverbs formlnga
oopparison of themselves, (70.
Syntax of, (186. Placb of,( 186;
L. 84; L. 41. Obsenation oi^
( 187. Adverts of negation,
Jl88.
A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6.
A eauche, to the left, L. 70, 6.
A fleur de, even wUh, L. 80, 2.
A force de, by dint of L. 80, 2.
A r6gard de, wiQi regard to.h. 80, &
A raison de, at the rate of L. 80, 2.
Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2.
Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2.
Au dela, beyond, L. 80, 2.
Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6.
A la campagne, in the cou/nbry^
li. o4| o.
A la chasse, hunting, L. 84, 8.
A la p&.he,/.tAin^, L. 84. 8.
A I'anglaise, & la i jmcaise, after ike
English, Prenchfashi^ms, h, 69, 8.
A r6cole, al school; k FdgUse, a$
church, L. 26, 6.
A I'endroit, right side out; A Toiw
vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1.
A I'insu. uf^enown to, L. 82.
Alphabet, L. 1.
Alier, to go, used for proximate Ai-
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to
go to, L. 26, 8. S'en aller, to go
away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. Aller,
toJU, to sU,L. 4:1,2. AUerAiMed
li cheval, en voiture, to walk, ride,
go in a carriage, L. 62, Bxam-
Amis (un de mes), a friend of mne^
L. 67, 8.
Amuser, (s',) to take pleasure in, etc,
L. 88, 6.
Analogy between many French and
English words, ( 147.
Answers in French should be ex«
plicit, L. 24, 12.
Apporter, amener, to bring, carrfi
L. 44. 6.
Approcher, (s\) to drau near, L,
89,6.
Articles, ( 18 ; L. 4, 1, 2. Elision
of. L.4,2;U8,(7);U46. Oon-
tractionof : (18. (8) ;L.6, 1;L. 26,
6. Bngllsn artkae^ or an ( 14|
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
OBKBRAL IND t X.
i9). KecapitaUtioD of articles,
1 18. Syntax of, ^ 77. Use of,
I 77, (1). (2). (8). etc. Before
words ustifi in pcirtftlve sense,
78. (2), (8), (4), (6). (6), (7);
18 (10); L.6. 1; L. 7,6;L.8,
, L 12, 8 ; L. 29, 8. Article used
before words in ^neral sense,
and abstract noons. ^ 77. (1). (2) ;
L. 8, 2, 3 ; L. %% 11; L.29 and 80. ,
Article omitted before number of I
a soverdgn, L. 80, 8. Article le txsed
before parts of the body, L.68. 5.
Use of article instead of possessive
adjective; § 77,(9); L. 87. 1;
L. 68, 5; L. 66, 8. Repetition,
of <) 80. Remarks on nsc of, \
4 81. Idioms in which the article :
is omitted, ^ 82.
Aspirate K, L. 8. 11,— H not aspirate
in Iidroine, Ac., L. 8, 11, note.
Asseofr, (s',) to sU dmcn, L. 86, 4.
Assez, enough, ; its place, L. 84, 8.
Aojoord'htti, t4hday, its place, L.
An lien de, insUad of, L. 86, 4.
Au revoir, till I see you again, L. 89. 4.
Auxiliary verbs, '^ 48, (8) ; ^ 46.
Use of, ^ 46. Paradigms of, ^ 47. <
Avancer, to gain, said of clocks, etc.,
L. 92, 1.
Avant, before, prep. ^ 142, 1.
Avoir, to kave, used idiomatically
with juelque choset cAaud, froid,
4^., L. 8, 1. With cduiwme, oesoin,
4^., L. 21. 4. Used for the day
of the month, L. 19, 6; for age,
L. 20, 6. Avoir lieu, to take place,
L. 86, 8. Avoir mal, to have a
fofn^ etc., L. 66, 1. Avoirdeadon-
leurs, L. 66, 2. Avoir, to hold,
L. 66, 8. Avoh> chaud aux mains,
L. 66, 8. Avoir beau, to be in vain,
It. 67, 1. Avoir, nsed for dimen-
sion, size, L. 68, 1, Avoir, nega-
tively, ^ 47, (2). Interrogatively,
^ 47, (3). Interrogatively and
negatively, H7 (4).
BKiV, bel, handsome, fine, L. 18, 6.
OiriTiLs, use of, ^ 146.
Cardinal numbers, ^ 22, 2;.^ 24.
Variations of, ^ 28. Use of, after
names of sovereigns, L. 80, 8; ^ 26,
(3). For the day of the month,
Cases, ^2.
Ce, demons, pm. ( 87, (6) ; ^ 108
i 116; L. 81. Used for he, she
before 6lre, L. 82, 1. C est mol
L. 81, 1.
-, demons, adj., ^ 20, (1) ; L. 10, 1, 2.
Cedilla, L. 8, 6.
Ce que, what, L 81, 4.
Celui qui, Jie who, L. 81, 4.
Chacun, each one, ^ 41, (2).
Chaqne, each, ^ 30, f4).*
Changer d*habit, to change an^s coatt
changer de maison, to move, L. 68,
1. Changer, to exchange, L. 6S. 2.
Chez, prop, at the house of, § 142, (8);
L. 24. 9.
Collective nouns, ^ 8, (6), (6). dum-
ber of verbs after coUectivo nouna,
L.86.
Collocation of words, {144.
Combien de temps, ho2o long; com*
bicn de fois 1 how often ? L. 44, 1.
Combien y 9ri-[\lhowfar7 hom
long sinee 7 h. 57, 4.
Compai-ison of adjectives, L. 17.
Compound nouns, { 8, (7). {9: L.
69. Gender of, ^ 6, (15).
Conditional mode, { 45, 2d, (8).
Use of, { 125. Formation and
termination of, L. 62, 1., 2. Irre-
gularities of, li. 62, 4. Not used
after si, if L. 62, 8 ; { 125.
Conjugation of verbs. First conju-
gation, paradigm, { 48. Peculiari-
ties of some verbs, ^ 49. Second
coi\fngation, paradigm, { 60.
Third coi\jugation, paradigm, ^
51. Peculiarities of verbs ol
third conjugation, $49; { 62.
Fourth conjugation, paradigm. {
53. Passive verbs, paradigm, { 64.
Rule, { 55. Reflective verlw, para-
digm, ^ 56. Negative form of,
^ 57. Intcrrogntive form, ^ 68.
Interrogative and negative form,
^ 59. "Unipersonal verbs, para*
digm. ^ 61 , 2. Terminations of reg-
ular verbs. { 60. Table of irregu-
lar verbs, ^ 62.
Conuaitre, to be acquaintJtd with, L.
30, 6. Connaitre (jnelqu'nn li la
voix, to know some one by the voice,
L. 87, 4. Connaitre de vue, to
know by sight, etc, L. 87, 6. Be
connaitre k, to be a judge of, I^
87,6.
OoqibnetiGitt, % 78. Lliti oC 4f7%
Digitized by V^OCJ^JI^
OSKSRAL tVDXX.
2). Syntax of, ( 143. Goreni-
ment of, ( 127 ; ^ 143. Requir-
ing sulgunctive. ^ 143, (2) ; inflo-
itive, \ 143, (1); conditional or
indicative, ( 143» (8) ; bI if, « 126,
(3) ; L. ^. 6. Examples or ooa-
juuctions, L. 100.
ConTenir, Ufbe becomings L. 49, 2.
Goncher (ae), to retire, go to bed, L.
37,6.
Dax*, prep. fn,( 142» (2).
DavantASC, more, note, L. 16.
Day of month, week, not preceded
by preposition, L. 26, 10.
Degrees of comparison of adjectiTes
L. 16 ; L. 17.
Domain, ^mtfrrirw, its place, L. 41, 6.
Demander, to ask. Its government,
L. 50. 1.
DSmettre (se), le bras, dtc, to dulo-
etae om^s arm, Ac., L. 93, 1. To
resign a place, L. 93, 2.
Demonsitrative adjective, ( 20. See
Adjective.
Demonstrative prononn, ^ Zt, See
Pronoun.
D«p6cher (se), to make kasU, L.
40,7.
Devani, prep, before. ^ 142, (1).
Devenir, to lecemie, L. 86, 6.
Devoir, to ewe^ expressing Aitnro,
obligation, L. 36, 6.
Dimension, etc., L. 08.
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, 14.
Dont, pm. of toAom, of vhicA, L.
31,8.
Elibiok, ^ 146. Of artMe L. 4, 2^;
^ 18, (7). Of prononn je, L. 4, 6.
Of preposition </^, L. 6, 3. Of ne,
L. 7, 3. 0/ pronouns to, to, L.
Eloigner (s'), to gofrom^ to leave j L.
39,6.
Emparer (s'), to seLee, lof hold of L.
93, 3.
Bmpftcher (s*), to Wj», to preveTU
one's self L. 93, 4.
Emporter, Emmencr, to take away,
L.44,6.
En, pronoun, ^ 39, (17) ; ( 96, (6) ;
16, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past
Srticiple, ^ 136, (7) ; L. 42, 11,
. used instead of posioMiv
•4|e<sti^o.496.(6);L.96,l,a.
, En, prep. ( 142, (2) ; L. 84, 6. 6, 7.
Endormir (s*), to faU asleep, L. 39, 6.
I Ennuyer, to wary, L. 38, 4. Sen.
nu3'cr, to become weary, L. 38. 6.
Entendre parler, to kmr about, </, L.
36,7.
Entendre, to «fu&ritefk£,L. 96, 3. Se
faire entendre, to make one's self
understood, L.9fi, 4, Followed li^
another verb, L. 97, 4.
Envoyer chercher, to tend for, L.
^26,6.
Epouaer, to marry, said only of par*
ties, L. 07,2.
Essayer, to try mi, L. 47, 4.
Est-ce-qne, prefixed to the verb, i
.98; L.26. ^
Etre, conjugation of, ( 47, (6).
Number of 6tre after ee, ^ 1L6.
Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 6. For
to belong, L. 47, 6 ; L. 91, 2. Etre
riche de, to be worlA, L. 40, 6.
Etre en retard, to be tale, and
other idioms with dtre, L. Dl* 1.
Y 6tre, to be at home, in, L. 91,^.
Euphonic t, L. 4, 6.
fiveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 6.
Every day, tons Us jours, L. 26. 8.
FlcHRi (se), to fe or becomis angry,
L. 40, 4.
Faire, before another verb, to cause,
to have, L. 32, 3,4; L. 97, 4.
Faire faire, to have made, L. 32, 4 :
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to
have mended. Faire la cuisine,
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir,
to boil, L. 68, 1. Faire pcur, to
frighten; faire attention, to pay
attention; faire tort, to injure t
fku-e du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3*.
, used unipersonally, in speak-
ing of the weather, L. 33, 6.
Falloir, lobe necessary, L. 48.
Feminioe terminations, % 6, (2), (3>
Feu, a^j., iaU, $ 84, (1).
Future absolute, ^ 46, (2). Use ot;
^ 124 Formation of, $61 ; L. 60,
1, 2, 3. Irregularities of, L. Gl,
1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior. $ 46,
(2), 8. Use of, ^124. Fonna-
tion of, L. 60, 4. Future used is
French where the present is used
in En^ish, L. 61, &
:4«
Gender, (4* By the
By the temunatlon^ (1 t
gitizedbyVjOOQlC
dlirSRAl IVDBX.
S
Q4iier, <o ineommod€f irpuNe, &o., L.
88, 6. Se g^ner, to eons^ain or
irtmhU one's self, L. 88, 6.
Gens, people, L. d6, 2, 8, 4.
Govemment. See Rogimea
Or6, 101^ Bon gr6, inal gr6, &c.
L.88,5.
Guire (ne;, InU UtOe, L. 17, 6.
Hater (se), to hasten, L. 40, 7.
Hier, yesterday, its place, L. 41, 6.
Hoar of the day, L. 20 ; L. 02.
Impebatitb mode, ^ 45, 8d, (4). Use
of, } 126. Terminations of, L.
70, 1. Irre^olarities, L. 70, 8, 4.
Two imperatives coming toe^er,
} 100, (6). Imperative followed
oy a verb. L, 71, 1.
Iinperfect of indicative, ^ 45, (2), 2d.
Use of, ^ 119 ; L. 58. Formation
and termination, L. 53. Irregu-
larities, L. 54.
Imperfect of sul^jnnctive, ( 45, (5),
^. Use of, L. 75. Termlnationa
of, L. 75, 1, 2, 8. Formation of,
L. 75, 4. Irregularities, L. 75, 5.
Importer; n'importe, no matter,
qu'importe 1 what matters it? h.
94, 1, 2.
In, dans, en, d, L. 84, 5, 6.
Indicative mode, ^ 45, 1st, (2V
Indicative present, ^45, (2), 1. Use
ot, ^ 118. Terminations, L. 28, 5.
Infinitive mode, ( 45, 5th, (6). Use
of, ^128. Important rules, ^ 128,
(4), (6). Verb preceded by an-
other, put in infinitive, L. 21, 2.
In order to, ponAr, L. 28, 8.
Inqui6ter, (s'), to be uneasy, L. 93, 5.
Inteijectiond, ( 74.
Intenrogative form of verbs, L. 23,
9; L.26, 1; ^98, (5), (6).
Interrogative sentences, form of^ L.
6,4; ^76, (4), (5); L. 56, 1.
Irregriilar verbs, L. 24. Table of,
It, comirig before verb to be followed
by / & c. L. 81. It used absolutely
tiefore verb to fe, L. 81, 1.
jDt^c'od hmofar? L. 44, 8.
J^Hsq^'a, MntU, as far as, L. 44, 4.
Lahieu, io lea/oe,to%€gUei, to forget
to bring, L. 86, 4. FoUoweti by
•Qvthvr T«rb, L. 97, 4.
La pinpart, mcst, Number of Terl
iJter, L. 85, 8.
Le, meaning so, it, &c., L. 46, 4, 5.
Le mien, mine, die., L. 9, 6 ; L. 12, 6^
Lequel, 4tc., which, L. 18, 6 ; L. 81, 7.
Lever (se), to rise, L. 87, 6.
L'nn, Tautre, one another, ^ 41, (10) ;
L'un et I'autre. both, % 41, (11) ; L.
19,8.
Maoame, Mademoiselle, used beibre
names of kindred, L. 24, note.
Before tities, L. 29, 6. Plnral of,
L. 29, 7.
Mai, sore, pain, etc., L. 66. Mai da
dents, toothache, mal de t^te, head-
ache, L. 66.
Marcher, to vnUk, L. 86, 6.
Marier, to marry, to ve^form the eere^
many, L. 67, 2. 8e marier, to get
married, L. 67, 2. Etre mari6, to
be married, L. 67, 2. See l^pouser.
Measure, weight, price by, L. 68, 3.
M^me, same, even, drc., ^ 80, (5) :
^ 97, (2).
Mener, porter, to tfOce, to carry, L.
44,6.
Mettre, to pvion,h. 82, 1. Mettra
le convert, to lay the doth, L. 82, 1.
Mettre k mAme, to enable; mettre
Eied a terre, to aUght ; mettre i
k porte, to turn out of doors f met-
tre au ftdt, to acquaint, etc., L.
69, 1. Se mettre, td dress one'%
self to sit down, L. 69, 2.
Mettre 4 llieure, to set a watch, L,
92,2.
Midi, minuit, noon, midnight, L.
20,2.
Modes, ^ 45. Indicative, ( 45, Ist,
(2). Conditional, $ 45, 2d, (8).
Imperative, ^ 45, 8d, (4). Sub-
junctive, ^ 45, 4tii, (5). Infinitive,
^ 45, 5th, (6). Participle, ^ 45,
6th, (7).
Moi, toi, etc., used instead of nomi-
native pronouns, L. 17, 6.
Mon, ma, poss. ad)., agree with ob.
ject possessed, L. 9, 8, 4.
Monde, world, people, L. 95, 1. Tout
le mondo, every body, L. 95.
Monsieur, used before names of kin*
dred, L. 24, note. Before titlcsi
L. 29,6. Phuml of, L. 29, 7.
MonUi. day oi, L. 19, 6; L. 2^
10.
Uwt^falloif, 4bo^ L. 48; ( 62.
Digitized
by Google
eSNKRAL I Kb IX.
IfAmi, to bi bomj Je suIb ii6, I was
iamj L. 48, note.
Ne, negative, ( 188w Place of L. 7,
1. Ne--que, onlu, L. 19, 2. Ne,
idiomatic, ^ 127, 8 ; ^ 188, (4),
(6); L. 72, 9. Ne— plus, w—
mww. L. 17, 4. Ne— gaftre, L.
17.6.
Ni^ iteMer, nor, L. 7, 4. Article
used or n^t i^r i»i, L. 8, 8, 4.
Ni run, ni I'antre, nalhar, L. 84, 4, 5.
NegatiTO, second, suppressed after
certain yerlw. i 188 (2).
Neuter Terbs. % A (6). Their anx-
Uiary, L.48; ^ 46.
Nominative. Ste 8nly}ect
Non, no, Je dis one non, / say no.
L.82,8.
Notre, Toire, our, your, dec, L. 9, 5.
Le ndtre, onrs, L. 9, fk
Noon, ( 8. Proper, (3). Common,
(4). Collective, \ 8. (6), (8).
Compoond, ^ 3, (7). Taken in a
partitive sense, \ 18, (10) ; ( 78,
(1). (2); L. 6, 1; L. 29, 8.
Taken m a general sense, ^ 77,
(1), (2) ; L. 8, 2. Gender by the
' ^, ^ 6. Bj the termina-
tion. ^ 6. Plural of. ^ 8; L. 11.
Plural of compound, ^ 9 ; L. 69.
Syntax of, ( 76. Place of sub-
ject in affirmative and negative
sentences, ^ 76, (1). (2). In inter-
jected sentences, ^ 76, {S), In
mterrogative sentences, ^ 7o, (4),
(5); L. 6. 4; L. 66,1. Place of
rcghnen.^76, (6), (7), (8), (9);
L. 66. 2, 3. Respective places of
possessor and object possessed,
I 76. (10) ; L. 5, 8. Of object and
Its snbetance, ^ 76, (11) ; L. 6, 4 ;
L. 6^, 6. Of object and its use,
U6»(12),'(18),(14); L.69,7.
Nonveau, nouvel, new, L. 18, 6.
Nu, hare, adj., $ 84, (2).
Nul, no, § 80, (7).
Nuile part, no vAere, L. 26, 8.
Number, ( 1, (6). See IMfferent
Parts Oa' Speech.
Number. See Numeral Adjectives.
Ordinal adverbs of number, ^ 29.
Numeral collective nouns, ( 27*.
Numerals, fimctions, ( 28.
O^j^^PfPifi^A^^h (4). (6);
illB; L.86, 1. 2.
Ordteal numbers, ( 22, (8), (6). Not
used after nr»mes of sovereigns or
for days of the month. L. 80, 8 ; 4
^26,(1), (8).
Oter, to take off, to take away, L. 82, 2.
On. or, agreement of verb with
nouns connected by, L. 84, 2, 8.
Otti, yes, Je dis que oui, I say yes, h
82,8.
pAiADioMs of auxiliary verbs, ( 47
For others, see Coigugatlons.
Par o^ 1 which way 7 L. 44, 6.
Participle past, % 46, 6th, (7). With-
out an auxUiary, % 66, (8) ; L.42,
10; L. 98, 1. Accompanied by
Hre, \ 184, (2) ; L. 42, 6 ; L. 98, 8.
In reflective Verbs, ^ 186, (1), (2) ;
L.46,2; L.98, 6; L. 99, 4. In
neuter verbs, L. 98, 8. Accompa-
nied by avoir, f 184, (8) ; L. 42, 6 -,
L. 98, 4. Never agrees with indi-
rect regimen, L, 42, 9. Neuter
verbs with avoir, 4 186, (6) ; L.
99, 2. Of unipersonal verbs, L.
46. 6; L. 99, 8. Never agrees
with en, ( 186, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 12;
L. 99, 8. Followed by an iniSni-
tive, \ 186, (8) ; L. 98, 7 ; L. 99,
6. Of passive verbs, L. 46 ; L. 98,
2. FaU always invariable before
an infinitive, L. 68, 2 ; L. 99, 7.
After&|w»,^186, (8).
- present, ^ 64 ; L. 97.
Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L.
6.1; ^3,10; ^78, (1), (2); L.
29,8.
Pas, point, not, difference, % 138, (1).
Place of L. 7, 1, 2. Omitted whpji
a second negative occurs, % 188,
(3) ; L. 7, 4. Omitted after certain
verbs, ^ 188, (2).
Passer (se), to do without, L. 89, 1.
Passive Toice, $ 113 (1).
Passive verb, ^ 48 (4y ; L. 46. Con-
jugationof,^64. Rule, (66. Its
participle, L. 46, 2; L. 98, 2.
Past anterior, ^ 46, (2), 6. Use of
(122; L.66.
Past definite, ( 46, (2), 3. Use of
( 120; L. 61. Its terminationi
and irregularities, L. 62.
Past indefinite, (46, (2), 4. Usooi;
(121; L. 41.
Past of subjunctire, ( 46, (6), 8.
Pajrer, to pay, its govemmttit, L. (KH
Persenne. n0 JM^, (41, (6): L. T.T-
Persons, (81, (8).
Digitized
by Google
tfv
«SKBBA1» XITDBZ.
Place, respective, of noun, direct
tnd indirect regimen, L. 56, 2, 8 ;
4 76. (7). (8). (y). In inteijected
iientences, () 76, (3.) Of noun iu in-
terr*)gaHve sentences, § 76, (4),
(6); L. 60, 1; L. 6.4. Of adjec-
tive, L. 8 5; L. 15 ; ()85 ; (>86. Of
pronoun subject or nominative, ^
08. Of regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ;
L. 27; L. 28: ^ 101; ( 102.
Place of en and y,^ 104 ; L. 57.
Of adverb, ^ 136; L. 84 ; L. 41,
4.6. Ofverb, vl44.
Plairo (se), io take pleasure in, L.
40,6. Usedunipcrsonallly,comme
ii vous plaira. as you please^ L. 89,8.
Pleuvoir, lt> rain, L. 33, 8.
Pluperfect of indicative, ^ 45, (2), 6.
Use of, $123; L. 55 4.
— of sutrjunctive, ^ 45, (6),
4; L. 76. 6.
Plural of nouns, ^ 8 ; L. 11 . Of com-
Sound nouns, ^ 9 ; L. 60. Nouns
aving no plural, <> 10. Nouns
having no sinsfular, ^11. Plural
of adjectives, ^ 17 ; L. 14, 3. Moral
or physical properties of man,
single in the individual, not put
in the plural, L. 66, 6.
Plus de, more Ihany before a number,
L. 20 7.
Plusieurs, several, ^20, (9); L. 18, 7.
Pour, in order to, L. 28, 8.
Porter, to carry, lo wear, L. 28, 10 ;
L. 44, 6. 8e porter, to be, to do,
L. 86, 8.
Preposition, % 71. Table of princi-
pal, % 72 Eegimen or govern-
ment of, ^ 189. Qovemiog with-
out another preposition, ^ 189.
By means of de, % 189, 2. By <2,
% 139, 8. Rules or government
of, ^ 140. Repetition of, ^ 141,
Observations on, ^ 142.
Promener (se), to walk, nde, 6tc.,
for pleasure. L. 86, 5.
Prendre, to take, its government, L.
60,1.
Prendre garde, to take care ; prendre
le deuil, to go into mourning;
prendre la peine, to take ike trou^
bU ; prendre les devonts, to go be-
fore t prendre un parti, to take a
resoiution; prendre da tb6, du
cai%, to take lea, e>ffee,h, 71, 8.
Prendre le ih6, to take one's tea,
note, L. 71.
Pronouns, ( 81. PcnK>naI,^88. Re-
marks on, ^ 33. Use ofmM, toi^
instead of subject or nonitnalivc
pronouns, ^ 83, (8). etc. Reflective
pronoun se, ^ 83, (12). (18). 80%,
(14). Possessive pronoun, ^ 84.
Remarks on. ^ 85. Demonstrative
pronouns, ^ 36. Remarks on, ^ 87.
Ce, demonstrative pronoun, { 87,
(6); () 108; $116;L. 81. Used
for he, ske, L. 82. Celvi, ceOe, ce-
lui-ci, ulU-ei, ^ 20 ; L. 10. Cferf,
cda, L. 10; 6. Relative pronouns,
' 88. Remarks on, ^ 89. Rn.
39, (17); 4 96 (6); $110; ^108,
(I). Place of £;/*,$ 104. Y. 4,89,
(18) ; $ 103 (2). Place of y, $ 104 :
I 111. DinU, L. 81, 8. Syntax ot
pronouns, $ 98. Place of subject
or nominative, $ 98. Repetition
of, $ 99 ; L. 87. Place of regimen
pronouns, $ 100 ; L. 9, 1 ; L. 27.
Respective place of regimen pro-
nouns, $ 101 ; L. 28. Rule on this
subject, ^ 102. Repetition of regi- .
men pronoun, ^ 105; L. 27, 7.
Rules on possessive pronouns, ^
106. On demonstrative pronouns,
4 107. On relative pronouns, %
109.
QoE, rel. pm., % 109. Never rap-
pressed, L. 19. 1 ; L. 81, 8. Qm?,
interrogative, L. 18, 5 ; L. 81, 5.
Que, conj., never suppressed, L. 19,
1. Que, idiomatic. L. 82, 8.
Quel, which, what, ( 80, (10) ; ( 109 ;
Que'lque, \ 80, (12); ^7; L. 18,
7; L.88.
Quel — que, qnelque — que, govern
the sutjunctive, L. 88, 8.
Quelque choso, something, anything,
L. 7, 6. Require de mfore an ad-
jective, L. 18, 8. Not used in neg-
ative sentences, L. 7, 6.
Quelque part, somewhere, anywhere.
L. 25, 8.
Quelqu'un, § 41, 7.
Qu'est-ce-que. usedidiomaticaQj fbt
what ? L. 82, 2.
Quiconque, whoever, ^ 41, f 9).
Quitter, to leave, abando^k, 6us,t l^
86.8.
Quoi, what, L. 81, 6.
Qui, who, whom, used aDaoIutely, d
I 80»(6).
Digitized
by Google
osxfsBAi tirosaL
ta>pe1er (ae), <» remtfuber, receika,
Bi'Ading leflflons, p. 466.
B«^*vi»ir des nouvelles, U kearfratn,
L. 85 6.
BeAcctire verb9,_J 43, (6). Conjuga-
tion of, (\ 6C; L. 30. Oaen ii»<sd
to Fv'efxsh for the English passive,
L; 86, 2. Its aaxiliary is elre^ L.
46; ^ 46. Its participle, ^ 186:
L. 45; L. 98, 6; L. 99, 4.
Begardcr.toeemetni, L. 94, 6.
Ketuercier, to tMai^, Je vous remer-
de, cqaivatent to a refusal, L. 89, 2.
lUsomi of rules «n participlo past,
L.98; L.99.
Bien, noUung, etc., L. 7, 7; L. 18, 8.
B6sime, regimen or oi»ject, ^ 2.
fiinjct. ^ 2, (2); « 42, (4>; L. 66.
2,3; 06. Imlirect,^ 2. (8); ^
42,(5); L.66.2 8; $76.
Bcffimen or goTernmeBt of adjco-
6w«, ^ 87 ; L. 79. After ifre
unipersooal, ^ 87. (4); L. 79, 8.
Adjectiye followed by tfe, ^ 88.
By d, ^ 89. By different preposi-
tions in boC» languages, ^ 90.
Begimen of verbs, \ 129 ; L. 21, 4 ;
L. 80. Verbs fcSlowed by ijo
preposition. ^ 130; L. 76, 1. Vy
d,U31. By *fe. 182; L. 21, 4;
L. 77. By a preposition in French
and by none in English, L. 78, 1,
2. By a different prep, in both,
L. 78, 8. Begimen of prepositions,
i 139 ; L. 80. Important mles on
regimen, $92; $ 138: $ 140; L.
80.6.
Regimen of prendre, to take; voler,
to steal! acheter, to buy; deman-
der, to ask ; payer, to pay, L. 60, 1.
BAjonir (se), to rejoice, L. 40, 5.
Remettre, to set a disiocated bone,
&c., L. 93, examples.
Rep^tion of demonstrative adjec-
tives, $ 93. Of possessive a<|jec-
tives, ^21. (4). Of articles, § 80,
L. 6, 6. Of subject or nominative
prononua, $ 99; L. 87. Of reeimen
or objective pronouns, $ 105 ; L.
87. Of adverbs, $ 137. Of prep-
ositions, $ 141.
Kester, used unip. to remain^ to have
M,L.86,4.
R««tede,fe/i.L.85,4. . ^ .^ ^
Betarder, to lose, to put back, said of
wat€be^ &e., L. 92, 1.
Batoii, i0 know, and Qomiaitre, Co
be acquainted with, L. 80, 6.
Seoir, to mil, become, L. 47, 8. Used
unipersonally, L. 49, 1.
Servir (se), to use, L. 89, 2. Senrir«
to help at table, L. 89, 1.
S'il vous plait, if you jdease, L. 89, 8.
8i, coiy., ^ 125.(8). Should not pre-
cede conditional mode, I*. 62, 6.
Souvenir (so), to remember ^ recoUeclt
L. 37, 2.
So, rendered l^ ^, L. 46, 4.
Speech, parts of, $ 1. (I).
Stemofa verb, L. 28.
Sutgect or nominative, $ 2, (1) ;
^ 42 (2). Verb having several sub-
jects iu different persons, L. 88, 2.
Agreement of rerbs with subjects,
L.83, 1; L. 84; $114; $115.
Subjunctive mode. $ 45. 4th, (5).
ifte of, $ 127; $ 143 ; L. 72, 8, 9,
10. Pre8entof;^45, (5), 1. Ter-
roination of, L. 72. Sutgunetive
used after verbs expressing con-
sent, command, etc., followed by
que, L. 72, 8. After severaluniper-
sonal verbs followed by que, L. 78,
1. After certain conjunctions, $
148 ; L. 73, 4. After croire, vspi"
rer, dtc., iuterrogative or negative,
L. 74, 2. After another verb, un-
certain, and preceded by relative
. pronoun or a superlative, L. 74, 8,
4. Past of subjunctive, L. 72, 7.
Substantive. See Noun.
Saperlative absolute, $ 14, (U); L.
17, 1. Superlative relative, $ 14,
(9); L.17,2.
Syntax, $76. Of noun, $ 76. Artt-
cle, $ 77. Adjective, $ 83. Pro-
noim, $ 98. Verb, $ 114. Parti-
ciple,$134. Adverb, $186. Pro-
rKsition, $ 139. Conjunction,
143.
Taiuk, to conceclL.9Q,&. Se talro,
tvbesiUrU,L.96,b.
Tarder, to tarry, to long, L. 58, 8.
Tel, stich, $ 41 (12), (18). Monsieur
un tel, Mr. such a one, $ 41, 18.
Tenir, to hold, used in the sense of to
keep. Tenir sa parole, to keep
one's word, tenir la porte ouverte,
to keep the door open, etc., etc, L.
90, 1. Tenir un langage, to maki
use of Umguage^ expressions, etc.,
Iu 90, 2. Tenir. to be aUackod,
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
lyi
OIVIRAL IUDSX
0io., If. 90, a Fftire tenir, iofnt-
leor^ L. 90, 6. Be tenir, io re-
main^ t^ abide if, etc., L. 90, 6.
Tensed of verbe, ^45. Formation of,
(^61). iSee Different Tenees.
Terminatious of regnlar verbs, ^ 60.
Of indicatiye, L. 28, 6. Of imper-
fect of indicative, L. 68, 6. Of
rit definite, L. 61. Of ftitare,
60. Of conditional, L. 62. Of
imperative, L. 70. Of sukjunc
tive, L. 72. Of imperfect of sab-
Junctive, L. 76. Of infinitive, L.
21, 1. Of present participle, L.
28,8. OfpastparUciple, L.28,4.
Times, number of, in a given space,
L. 68, 4.
Tout, aU, etc., ^ 80, (15), (16) ; ( 97,
(*), (6), (6). Tont, every] L. 26,
8. Tout, Ike fohole, L. 26, 9.
Tout, entirdy, quUe^ variable by
euphony, L. 88, 4.
Tromper, to deceive y L. 88, 1. 8e
tromper, to be mistaken, etc., L.
88,2.
UN, une, «, an, one, \ 18, (4) ; (11) ;
L. 6, 2. Not used before nouns
placed in apposition, L. 80, 4.
Unipersonal verbs, ^ 48, (7). Para-
di^ of, ( 61-2. Auxiliary of
umpersonal verbs, L. 46, 8, 4.
Valoib, to be worth, h. 49, Z; to be
better, L, 49, 6.
Yenir, to come, used to indicate past
Just elapsed, L. 26, 2. Venir
trouver, to come to, L. 26. 8.
Verbal actives, ^ 66 ; L. 97.
Vfirbs, ^ 42. Subject or nominative
of, ^ 42, (2). Regimen or object
of, ( 42 (8). Different sort of
verbs, ( 48. Active, ^ 43, (2),
(8) i L. 48. Passive, 4 48, (4) ; L.
46. Neuter, ( 48. (6); L. 48.
Befl6ctive,H3, (6); ( 66; L. 86
2. Unipersonal, ( 48, 7; $ 61-1
Auxiliary verbs, ^ 48, (8). Use
of, ( 46; L, 43, 46. Modes and
tenses of, ^ 46. See Different
Modes and Tenses. Irregular
verbs, L. 24. Table of, ^62. Syn-
tax of the verb, 4 114. Agreement
of the verb with subject, ^ 114:
L. 88; L. 84; L. 86. Verb after
a collective noun,^ 116 ; L. 86, 1,
2, 8. Number of verb ailer ce,
^116. Verb after nouns in different
persons^ ( 117. Use of tenses,
^118. <SwDiffesent Tenses. Regi-
men or government of verbs.
See Regimen.
Veuillez,lie so Hnd, L. 70, 4.
Vocabulary to the reading lessons,
p. 486. -» -*
Voici, here is, L. 84, 4.
Voili, there U, L. 84, 4.
Voler, to rob, steal, its government,
L. 60, 1.
Vouloir dire, to mean, L, 82, 6, 6.
(en), to bear a grudge, &o.j
L. 94,6.
Vowels, L. 2.
What, rel. pm., ce que, L. 81, 4 : fiM,
L.81,6.
, interrogative, rendered by,
qu'est-ce-que, L. 82, 2.
Whole (the), U tout, L. 26, 9.
Will, used in the sense of wtjA, ren*
dered hy vouloir, L. 60, 6.
Words, variable, ^1, (8). Invariable,
^ 1. (4)-
T AVOIR, to be there, ( 61-2 ; L. 88, 4.
Used for ago, L. 41, 6. Y avoir t
followed by the present, when the
action continues, L. 67, 2.
T,pm.kadv.^ 89, (18) ; $ 108, (2)
Plaoeof,0O4; ^111: L. 21, 11
Digitized
by Google
NEW FRENCH COURSE
PABT FIBST.
LB880N L LBgOS L
iHB innBs.
Ihe Wmdi alphabet oontains twenty-fire ktten i —
A a
ah
ah
amas.
B b
bay
bej
bane.
G c
say
kei
cae^dL
D d
day
de{
danL
B e
a
a
eflet
F f
«S
fc
Mre.
H h
a*
fi-
C:
I
e
e
kUe.
K k
ir
t
a
L 1
en
fe
fit
M m
ionjn
me
mit
N n
eon
ne
natte.
0 0
o
o
owe.
E?
c
pere.
qnadre.
B r
•"t
re
rat
8 ■
se
Boie.
T t
<v
te
tort
U a
•t
Q
nme.
V ▼
X z
a
T
«5
▼ase.
rize.
H
vr
egrec
yeux.
rtle.
W, cafled in French <foMU«
r, might be added,
asnumy flir-
dgn irords which ha^ that letter have been adopted into tbo
mnch language.
* Like tin jriMMNV. * f lXt§gljVk»€rrtBL€rrwr,
t NoooneqwodlnffMiiiiidSBBiiglUh. jl Nawrlj like k In ^Itife.
(llev|f]lkeliaiid4<f in oOi andfra*. The e oT the ctbir M*
tere hae tfie Hune aovid.
f kie ^ ff iarvff.
^ Digitized by Google
18 IKSSOK It.
I.E880K a ijx;»N n
THX VOWKLS.
Vo\»eli» are rendered lon^ or short hj certain marks placed over
Ihem These marks, which are three in number, ans called a jocnta.
The acute accent (' ) is placed over the e to give it a shaip or close
sonnd. (See 4, 6.)
'J'he grave accent ( ' ) is placed over a, e, ti, to give to tliose vowels
a grave or open sound. (See 5, d.)
The circumflex accent ( • ) is placed over a, e, t, o, u, to give to those
letters a long and broad sound.*
1. a like a in mass, Ex. face^ face; bateau, ioa/; tableau, picture;
patte, pate ; mdode, sick,
2. ft like a in bar, far. Ex. ^gc, age ; chdteau, castle ; pdto, pa^ ;
bid me, blame; crlne, cranium,
8. e nearly like u in bud, and frequently silent at the end of poiy-
sylbibles. ,E.t. le, (he; me, me; ie, thee; qce,/^cx/; mfuble,
piece (ffumilwre ; peuple, people ; rime, rime,
4. ^ like a in fait, Ex. ^t^ summer ; amitij, frieiiiSkip , ^ev^
ratstti ; ^p^e, sword.
5. d like at in ;»tr. Ex. pin,faiker ; fr^ &rttfA«r ; m^, mother;
cleve, f ?<pt/.
6. 6 nearly like e in there. Ex. reve, ilraem ; extreme, extreme :
cr^me, cream ; crepe, crape ; torii, foresL
7. i nearly like i in pim Ex. mtdt, midday; tci, here; ft'nt, finished;
credit, cra/t(.
d. 1 like ee in 6ee. Ex. ile, island; gite, lodging; ^pitie, eputfe :
dimoi /(//te ; abime, abyss.
9. o nearly like o in rofr. Ex. robe, ro&e ; globe, globe • cachot, iip»-
^eon; haricot, bean.
10. 6 like o In (one. Ex. depot, cfeposi^ ; prevdt, provtot^ bicnt^t,
soon; suppot, supporter.
1. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng«
lish. The position of the lips in whistlings is very nearly the
position which Ihcy should have in emitting the French u. Ex.
iiroe, vrn; lime, moon ,- but,atm; tribt^^rtfre; tiibut, /rtliute;
^Itt, elected.
* This aceent Indicates the suppression of the letter s after the vowel
en which It is phuxd, thus: fUe, lite, bUe. were formerly written, fisfe,
*iste, bettet the s was not sounded, but gave to the preceding v^vwsl tkel
proloBfed sound now represented Vy the drcumfleft ieesBl»
Digitized
by Google
Lsssoir XX. 19
12b d 18 the Q with a prolonged sound. Sx. m^re, mulberry ; dH^
due ; criky growth; briiler, to hum.
13. y See 28^ y.
THB DXFBTHOKOB*
14. A vowel sormoanted by a disrewa (") cannot ft>nn a diph*
thong with another Towel, it is pronoanccd separately. Ex.
IvBkiT — Exception : e at the end of a few words, such as eigne,
henUock^ is silent| the u being pronounced like ft. — ^E accented
(e) and followed by a vowel, is pronounced separately. Ex.
obeir, to obey] geant^ gianL
15w ai, ei, preceding a liquid I (see Consonants, 13) do not form a
diphthong; a is then pronounced as in mam^ and e as at in
pair. The % seems merely to indicate the liquid sound of the
Z. Ex. patUe, straw ; oretlle, ear.
16. ai is like a m/aie. Ex. j'a^ / have; je fereu, ItnU make; baie,
bajf; mai, May; balat, broom.
'When the diphthong ai is followed by s, d, or t^ it assumes a
broader sotmd, resembling the French ^ or ai in the English
word pair, Ex. j'aVats, / had ; je Teraa^ / thould make ; la»t^
mOk; laid, ugly.
17. an nearly like ohi m. English. Ex. taux, raie; chaicd, warm.
e preceding aa is blended with that diphthong without cbang*
ing its sound. Ex. b«au^ htmdsome; chlteaw, casOe; tableau,
picture; eau^ water.
18. ei neariy like a in fote. Ex. heige, aerge; neige, enow ; mgh^
rye ; retne, queen ; p«%ne, eomb.
19. en approaches the sound of u in tub. Sx. jeu^ piay ; litfu^ place;
peu, UttU; peur, fear ; chalfttr, heat Exceptions, in eu, had ;
j'eos, ^, I had; j'eusse, etc,, I might home; eu is pronouneed
like If alone.
20. ia nearly like «a in miedidL Ex. il Ito^ ^ baumd; il maty Jiecried;
dialogue, dialogue.
21. ie like eeiahee. Ex. Ulie^he binde; U ttudis, hetMiee; haip*%
harpy; mie^ the soft part of bread,
22. oi nearly like 10a in was. Ex. opmx, eroee; il boit^ he drinke;
Toifking.
13. ou like 00 in eooL Ex. ddto, eofl; cdvp, bhw; nous, we; rom^
you; coUf neck.
Digitized
by Google
20
LI880K XL
S4. wt
S6. ae
SO. ni
87.
38.
no
y
La ^
0
mk
ti.
aa
D saliio, &e tdhUed; il remtM, ^ moved;
contiilnia, Ae eon/rt&u^
n saliie, he sahOesi il remue, he mooes; 3
oontrilwe, ^ contributes.
produit, produce ; condutte, condud ; lu % \»m ;
bruft, noise; il r^uit, ^ reduces.
duoj dusL
when initial, when coming between two ccnsonants, or when
forming a syllable of itself^ has the sound of the French i.
Ex. style, style; type, type ; yeux, eyes ; Fpres, Ypres ; y, (here ,
between two vowels y-has the power of two Tf, one of which
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the
following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between
the Ts. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean ;
citoyen, citixen ; abbaye, abbey ; these words are pronounced
as if they were written moirien^ essai-ier, nettouiery citoi4en,
Mai-ie. The words pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; pay-
tan^peasanti are pronounced pi-isy pi-isagey pH-san.
THB' VASAL B0UKD8.
The combination of the vowels with the consonant m or n,
produces what the French call le son nasals the nasal sound.
When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately foU
lowed by a vowel* the nasal sound does not take place.
Ex. innocent, innocenl ; tmmobile, immovable ; inutile, useless ;
iiiout, unheard of. The syllables in and im in the words in-
nocent and immobile, are pronounoed as in English ; the syl-
labie division of i-nn-ti-le and i-nou-l will explain the reason
of the absence of the nasal sound in those words.
ample, ompb; chamhTe^ chamber ; lompe,
lamp.
aS any year; banc, bench; dons, vit man-
'Ei teau, clock.
§ membre, limb ; emporter, to carry away;
H trembler, to tremble.
erty in; dent, tooth; prendre, to tefat;
reTidre, to render.
pronounced
anhj nearly
like an in
panL
^ The words enwid^ ewimytr^ emmener.enivrtryenorgueiUir, fonn ezoep-
tloDS to this rule. The first syllable of ennui, enmnyer, emmeter is nasal ;
stUorerMorgMeilUr are pronounoed en-niorvr, ei^-orgueUUr.
t Tnis combination, it seems to us, recders the Freobh nasal sound
mora accurately than ana, the g gtvfaig as unpleasant twang not < ' '
fa the Fmch nasal syllablei.
Digitized
by Google
LBSSPX llh
%l
ti» eo final is aometimM pronovnead like en In ihm, Ex» EcUi^
Eden.
iS. en in the third peraon plural of verba la aflent Ei. fla liaeii^
ila port«fit» lis donnent ; pronoonce ila liz^ ila porU ila dbmi.
'ttmbre, stan^; tmpoaaablft tmpomfrle; tm*
portant» tif^wrtaiit.
Itfi, Jlax ; pnty phm ; ertn» hormJutrir ; Yir
teine.
' tombef tomb; eomble, height; aowbre^ dark
iomher^ to faU.
mem, my; ton, ihy; aon, his; bond, h&und
ponif brit^^
aomewfaat f hiimble, ktanble; paiftim, petfume.
* like tm in / nn, one; chaoim, eaeh cne; Importim, iwu
hunting, [ portutiate.
U. im
in
S6. om
on
aomewhat
Iflte an in
crank.
pronounced
mhf nearlj
' like on hi
LESSON m.
LBgoN m
TBI OOKSOKANTB.
1. A final eonaonant la generally ailent
S» The lettera e, f; 1, r, however, when final, are gancroBy pro-
nounced.
8. Thefinalconaonantof a word ia generalfy carried to the next
word, when that word begina with a vowel or an h mute. (See
H,h.)
4. For illnatrationa and ezceptiona, aee the aeveral letters.
& B initial ia pronounced aa in Engliah. In the middJe of worda,
and at the end of proper namea,b ia aounded. Ex. aMiquer
to abdkate^ Jo&, Cale6, &c. B ia alao pronounced in radouft,
refuting of a veetel^ and rum&, (pronounced romb,) foimt cf th
eomjMMf. It ia ailent in plom&, had; aplomi^ perpendiadar.
When b ia doubled, onl j one of theae lettera ia pronounced*
Ex. bMj abbot; bMslU
& C haa ita proper sound (k) before a, o, u, I, n, r. Ex. eabane«
cottage; cou, neck; ^cu, crown; enclin, inclined; Cn^iua,
Cneius ; croire, to hdievt.
€ before e and i, and with the cedilla (9) before a, o, or u, haa
the aound oft; eeci, this; cendrea, tubei; ik^ade, fivni; fli-
0m fathion; re^UyfVXtvadL
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
tt tfeBsoir 111.
ch M protiounced like ah in sIib. Ex. cto, ear; d^loii,coafc
cAangemcnt, clutnge.
0 In (he M'ords xermicdU and vioUmceTle^ is pronounced like c)k.
eh is pronounecd lilte k in a few words derived from the Greeki
Ex. c/iaos, anacftronisme, c/tronique, patriarcAat, on:Acstrc, &c.
In iiatriarc/te, arcftevdqae, Ac/icron, ch is pronounced like sh.
In Blicftel-Ange, Miehael-Angeh, it sounds like L
c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, wtth;
UTCt bow; MCybag; wiejuke; Turc, Turk,
Exceptions : it is silent in aoeroc» rent ; hroe^ jtig ; clere, derk ,
estomac, stomach ; lacs, snarts ; man:, mark ; pore, pork ; tabac.
<o6acco— ch is silent in almanach.
c preceded by n is silent Ex. bane, betKh ; AanCyJimnL
c is pronounced like g in second, tecoad, and fecoaA,/ruilful
e final is seldom pronounced upon the next word
7. D has the same sotind as in English. Ex. dame, lady, D is pro
nounced in the middle of words. Ex. aJverbe, adverb ; vd-
mirer, to admire,
a is silent at the end of words, except in proper names: as in
Davie/, David; also in the word suc2, south, and in a few for-
eign words, as le Cid^ the Cid; le Talmuc2, the Talmud, &c
d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an
h mute, assumes the sound oft — un grand homme, is pro-
i^ounccd grand tomme; com^il, does he sew 7 vemUl, does He
sell ? are pronounced con-til, ven-til.
8. P is.pronounced as in English. Ex,fi^VTe,feter; fiacre, hackney-
coach. ^
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/, thirst; chef, chirf; s,\x\f,
iaUow,
Exceptions: clef, hey; chef-d'oeuvre, master-piece; 09ii/dar,
*«^ fgffi CBuyifrais, fresh egg ; baBuyifrais, fi^sh beef; bceu/1
sal^, salt beef. In the plural of tlie words gbu/ and locu/,/
Is always silent.
The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounds
like V before a vowel or h mute; neu/ livrcs, pronounce neu
Uvres — neu/ hommes, ncii/* enfants, pronounce neu-vomme,
neu'venfants,
9. G is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex.
gnrde, guard; gond, hinge; sdgu, acute,
g before e and i has always the soft sound, (that of s in plcisure).
Ex. ^rbe, sheaf; gtndre, son'in4aw ; g\h\cT,game ; ^ilet, vesL
goa, gut, gue» gtti, are pronounced gha, gho ghe, ghi^ L e^ tht
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
ikSSOll ttL
is
11 gt
II. a
■ is silent Ex. fl l^vo, he hequMlhed; \^wm!^ kt u§
bequeath; gverre, tear, guiiaiey guitar.
Sxeeptions : In at^tlle, needk, Gutfie, &c., the two TOwels
are sounded. The ue ofgue final ta mute, unless a dieeresis
is on tbe e, as in eigne, hemleck.
is pr >nounced like ni in ttnion, Ex. rd^e, rei^pt ; peig^ne*
comb ; daiofner, to deign ; sailer, to bleed.
Exceptions : Onide, Pro^i^, stagTiant, l^>7iee, &c.
final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute;—-
sang- humain, human bloody is pronounced san kumain,
ia mute or aspirate — h mute (having of itself no sound) when
preceded by a word subject to elision, Q 146) is treated as
a vowel-^h aspirate is always imtial, the breathing or aspi-
ration is very sligh^ but not entirely absent, as is advaneed
by some grammarians.
As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro*
nunciation of the last consonant of a wonl preceding A, to
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the
words which coiumence with h aspirate, omitting however
the derivatives and a few words seldom used.
Hablcur
Hacho
Hagard ^
Hate
Haillons
Haine
Hair
Haire
Halage
HAlo
Halle
Hallebarde
HalUer
Halto
Haroae
Hameaa
Hanche
Hangar
Hanneton
Hantor
Harangue
Haras
Harasser
Harceler
Hardes
Hardi
Harem
Hareng
Hardens
Haricot
Handelle
Haniais
Harpe
Harpie
Harpon
Hasard
Hater
Hausser
Haut
Haut-bois
Hautesso
Have
Havre
Havrcsac .
Hdler
Hennlr
Henri
H«rant
H6ris8on
Hdrisser
H6ron
H6ros»
Herse
Heurter
Hibou
Hideux
Hiirarchie
Hollandet
Homard
Honto
Horde
Hors
Hotto
Hottentot
Houblon
Hoiiille
Houletts
Houppe
Houri
Huuppelando
Hou»se
Honx
Hnche
Huie
Hngnenot
IhiTt
lliimer
Hiippe
Hure
Hurler
Uussard
19. J is pronounced like 8 in pleasure. £x.your,cI(iy;yamais, never.
* Thf- k of the other words hanng the same derivation, Urnne, kirv'
Itme. Hroitpie, &c., \n not aspirated.
t We say, however, du firomage d*Hollando, ihUek cheetei de la toUt
d'HoUande, Putch tin$7h.
Digitized
by Google
M I.B8SOV XIL
K BOiuidB like k in Engli«h. Ex. Xnm, kktm; jidlogranme, «
French tDeight.
43. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at
the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English
word hriUiant, Ex. pat2fo, gtraw; fiUe^ davghltr; bai2, hose
travail, labor.
Exceptions: fi2, ikrtad; Br6st2, BrazU; NO, me; mUKmiOit
ihf'usand; civt^ chil; profU, frofk; ▼iZfe, town^ &nd its derir
auves; tranqut/fe, tninqutttit6, dtc, quiel^ quietneis^ 4«.
I is silent in baril, barrel; cheni^ kamd; coutil, tiddng; fiis
son ; foumiZ, bakehouse ; fusi/, gun ; gril, gridiron ; outil, tool
j^eml^ parsley.
II in SuZ2y has the liquid sound — 1 is silent in ponfa, jntlse; and
genti/shommes, noblemen, .
The 1 marked as sQent in the words above, is never carried to
the next word.
14. M > initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in
16. N ) combination with the vowels, see nasal sounds, (page 30.)
Final consonants after m and n are generally silent Ex. temfs
toeaiher ; je rom;», je prenis, / break, I take,
m is silent in condamner, to condemn ; autornne, autumn,
n final, and not belonging to a noun, is corned to the next word*
when this word begins with a vowel or anji mute, if the two
words are closely connected. Ex. un bon enfant, a good child,
mon ami, my friend; pronounce bon nenfantj man nami
16. P is generally sounded aa in English. P is however silent in
bajitdme, baptism; baftiser, to baptize; com/ite, aecounl;
dom;;ter, to subdue ; exempt, exempt ; sejyt, seven ; septidme,
seventh,
p final is silent Ex. coup, blow ; drap, cloth.
Exceptions: cap, cope; and proper names generally,
p final is not carried to the next word.
7. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. question, ^ues/ton; qtd^uikt
^ualit^ quality ;— oie final is silent after q. Ex. pratique, pra
tioe.
Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in a;^tiqu<3,
^fuateur, 6^estrc, 6^tation, ^^uation, in-^uarto, li^^fifi,
^vadrag^naire, ^^adruple, fuadrup^e, Quinte-Curee, Qidiw
tilien, ^ntuple, ^rinal.
q final is sounded. It is however mute in co^'Inde, tm^key;
and in cin^, jSve, when followed by a word commencing with %
•onsonant
Digitized
by Google
tt. k The IVneh r b pmiMmoed with gTMMT IbiM tfatt Ite
SugUab.
ir ki pranoniieed like r. £k. airber, lo «rrtec; armgirt ^ «^
lUeepdons : in the futnre and eoBditionel of aeqiiArir, to aom
quire; courir, to rtin, end mourir, to die^ the two r'e are dis-
tinetly eonnded. Ex. je eourrai, je monrru, je covrndi, Je
moarraifly facquerriue, dco.
I final is pronoanced when preeeded by a* i, o» n. Ex. ear,/>r ;
fintr, tofinuh; cor, hunting horn; pur, pure.
Exoeption: Monsieur, Sir.
t preeeded by e is genendly sounded in monosyUables. Ex.
fer, iron; eher, dear.
V preeeded by e is lulent in words of more than one syllable,
Ex. perler, to wpeak; manger, 0 eat; chereher, to seek.
Exoeptions: r is sounded in amer, belvi^er* canoer« eniller,
6ther, enler, htver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister.
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the nest
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally
earned to the next word.
19 B has generally the same sound as fai English.
a between two vowels is pronounced as in the English wordi
foae,jwvM«. Ex. base, hose; vtat^vase; paufe,|NR<t0; chose,
thing.
Exceptions : s in words composed of a partiele,or an acyeetfve,
and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing sound.
Ex. para«ol, parasol ; vrai^mblable, likely ; d6sn6tude, dbue*
tude; preseance, j)rececibice, dtc.
ae is pronounced as in English. Ex. seandale, soamdal; seienee»
eeb k pronounced like sA, in the words seMsme, leMsmatiqne,
scMste, scA^rif, seft^ik, «dielling*-It Is pronounced sk la
scft^me.
• final is generally silent Ei^. pas, tUp ; mais, InU ; )ut,^tttot
Exeeptions: s is j^ironounced In aloAs, ahes; atlas, atUs^
hh^ns^Uoekads; cent, eeneus; en sut, besides; gratis, gr»-
^; bpi*! lapis; iris, iris; mats, motst ; mcsurs, manners i
fvovpeetvLSy prospectus; Rheims, ISAetms ,- vis,icm0; and In
Latin and Greek names ending in s— D61os, Romulus, Ice
e Is carried to the next word when the word commences with
a vowel or an h mute; it has Ihen the sound of s-4>oiis
amii^fOttiyriiiMb, Is pronounced ^saiiti Ui eonversatlos
9
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LISAOtf III.
• of vmIm m imI gMOfally CMoie^ to the nuA
word.
M. T i» pnwoBiiced like t in tiib:s. Ex. tord, laU; tfi/rt, yr*mt.
t has the sound of the English e in cedar^ in the eomhin&Uobs
/ioi, M, tkdu final or in the middle of words, fix. par/ial,
jKnioJ ; easeiidel, esaenlial ; observation, ob§ervaium» Words
in which those terminations are preceded by s or z« are ex«
eepted; the t therefore hi basdon, qnecfion, million, &o.
retains its proper sonnd.
i has the sound of c m cedar, in the words inepde, ^ibsurdUy ,
mmnde,. tnintUia ; proph^de, prophecy ; and in words ending
in otw, deriv^ed from the Greek, and having in English the ter-
mination cy, aristocratie, d^mocnMie, &«. ; also in inider, ta
Ln Other wcwda ending in tie, and in those eodiog in ti6 and
tier, Uie t has its proper sound. Ex. garande, ^rtMtran/fle ;
moid6, AoJT; sauMj friendskip ; cbander, dodc-ff^urd; meder,
trade,
tk sounds always like t alone. Ex. tk/kj tea ; ^so, ikesis.
t final is generally silent. Ex. but, aim ; mof, word ; sor/, fatts
Exceptions: t is sounded in bnu, chni, correct, do^ direef,
d§fici^ Uty eauot^ net, pr^teri^ suspect, sixki, ^le,
i in sq^huit, vingt, is sounded except when it eomes before
a consonant
t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in et (and) is always
sHent.
fii. V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. viande, meat ; voile,
vea.
d^ W which is found only in foreign words, is jM-onounced like v.
Ex. Wurtemberg, Westphalie. In a few other words it has
the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig^ tdhisL
SS. X imtial, which In French is only found in a few words, is pro-
nounced like gz. Ex. J7lon, eotton^lant ; Jfayier, X&nophon.
Xante, Xantippe.
Xecxds is pronounoed gitercest,
X foUowing an mitial e, and preceding a vowel or an h, is also
sounded like gz. Ex, ttcil, exUe ; eoramuier, to examine ; ea>
hiber, to exhtbiL
t not following an initial e,'bui coming between two voweis,
sounds like ks. Ex. axe, axis ; loa^ husury ; Alexandre,
AJkxmnder; maxiae, sisxtm ; sexe, sex
ff sounds like ss in the foUowing words; six,, fix dix, l«i.
Digitized
by Google
LBM0V tt%^
AuBuen^ProTenee.
In witee, dBrntat. dwiriiii^ tmmpl, JMmit, Hx-nrnfj
it is prononneed liiw • in mm.
fimd is gidnenlly ailent Ex. ^rix^ price; crc>, eroct; Toijr»
JEIxeepiions: z is sonnded like ks at the end of namei of
Greek and Latin origin. Ex. AJaar, Styx,. etc. In AixJaXSia.
pelle it has the same sound.
The z of -deiKT, sior, dix» coming before a consonant is sflenti
ezcept in the cases mentioned above ; i. e.| ip dix-aept, di»-
huit, dir-neuf.
z when carried to the next word, sounds like z.
14. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. £z. sdle, sm) ,
zenith, xKnUk,
s final is generally silent Ez, nez, note; chex, mik^ ^ ,
allezy go,
Exceptions : gaj^ ga$. In Met;^ Suez» &c. it sounds like ss.
z final is generally carried to the next word when that word
commences with a vowel, or an h mute.
!&cxBCi6k 1.— Tmi Vowkls.
(a) Table, table ; fable, fable ; chat, eal ; Mtii, apkador ; aibre,
tree; Uid^Jate; balle, MZ.
(ft) ftme, $oul; bl&me, blame; bAtir, to bfwSd; pAte, jmMs; ftge^
4|g»; xiAi,masL
(a) me, me; de, <f; que, <to; elle, s&ei malle, nml.; parle,
fpeoi ; fottrche,yarfc ; salle, kaXL
{k) pre, meadow ; alle, ^««e ; donne, gkem ; |Mws6, passie, foet^
^av6, ratMcI; arm^e, army.
(A) trds, very ; aprSs, efier ; achate, Auy ; mhf^ mother ; eqr^
hope; Uve, ratae; ehdre,/anB; ehivfe,|riMi/.
(6) mfime, 5am6 ; carSme, Lent ; airfit, flrr«fl.; temp^tBt^ni^ieit ;
i^\je,liead; bSte, iaoft
0) lit,M; dit,«itc2; due, Co soy; liie»toi«MM{; UmeijIZe; eire,
eoasB; rite, rile.
(i) diner, lo dine; tie, tsfe; dime, ftt&e; abtme, a^af ; 6pltre»
ejna^ ; gite, lodging.
(o) mot, iiH>nI; oaehoi, Atf^rean/ repos, t«il; 4Mt, (ntf ; globe^
globe ; earrosse, ooodL
(ft) ttt,aoon; plutM, retOter; rftti, roast meat; dfipftt, Ajpotir;
pr^vftt, jTCfvosL
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
tt LStSOir III*
Cu) bUy iftwik; era, btHnei; di, of Ae; #«,
mtnute; pr6ni,ybf«teefi ; 6ea, erown.
(t) ehote, fiOl; hrtloU Jktsk^ ; ato, r^; dftmenti ifad^; 11
f Ot, A« might be ; noiu ffime&i we wen.
The Diphthongs.
(ai) Je doiuiai» I gave; je parlerai, I will speak; j'allai^ Iweni;
je cherchai, I sought; je menai, /ioj; firai, IwUlgo,
(ais) je donnais, / imm giving ; je parleraia, i wouU «ped(; ; j*allaifl|
J iros ^oingr ; je cherchaia, / was seeking ; je menaia, J was
leading ; j'irais, / toould go.
(an, ean) mauz, evUs ; chameau, come/ ; chevaux, horses ; bean,
handsome ; noaveau, new ; troupeau, Jbck,
(eO neige, snow ; veine, vein ; reine, ^veen ; Selne» Seine ; j»
peigne, / comb ; aein, bosom.
(en) pea, ZittZe; pear, /ear; lear, 2%tftr; il meort, he dies; aotar,
sts^er ; ceuf, egg ; laeur, lighL
(ea) like t^ Peaa, I had; ta eus, <%ou hadst; fl eat, %£ Aotf ; eii»
(ia) llant, HnJtT^ ; 11 lia, fte bound; partial, partial; H eria,ft«
cried; il nia, Ae <feniei{ ; il pria, he prayed,
(ie) garantie, guarantee ; il prie, he prays ; il lie, ^ binds ; il ria
he may hmgh ; il nie, he denies.
(oO loi, law ; moi, me ; il voit, ft« sees ; il bolt, ^ drinks ; ro!,
Mt^ ; droit, right ; il croit, he believes.
(oa) boat, en({; il coad, he sews ; il mond, he grinds ; coupe, ct^,
loap, t0o|r; coap, frioto ; eroate, crust
(oa) noage, doud; nuance, shade; il aaloa, he sabOed; fl romiia,
%< moved ; fl contriboa, ^ contributed.
(oe) nne,c2otiif; lue,f. mu^; re9iie,f. received; fl aalne, fte to^
lutes; a Twmnet he moves.
(ui) loi, Atm ; luiaant, shining ; coire, to bake ; cnit, ftofcei ; noire,
to t9{^'iif« ; prodnire, to produce,
(y) ihyno, thyrsus ; type, type; style, afyfe; yeiuc, eyes; YTStot,
YveM; payer, to foy; envoyer, to aeiui; abbaye, 4t5&e|r,
easayer, to try; pays, oounlry; paysage, lanubM^ ; paysf^
RxKWOisK 2^^Thb Nasal SomnM.
iO> lniioceiit,tftiio0ni<; inutile, iseless; diner, Jti»Mr;
tsMwrtsJ; iiiie,onf; lone, flRoon; donssi limpiis.
Digitized
by Google
L%9nnv III. n
tl. aa Mib», mtlber; chamhnt ekmabir ; AiiMntAdami nrnp^tfU
enef; nm^waKfiUs lampe»teip.
«a Unto, mmu; muAma^ do&k; plant fitan; pkachflr, /oor;
niig» fwnlr; ung^ bloud; enfiuity c&tUL
•n rampiir» 10 >0; t«ffip1e» UmpU; temps, toestfter; aaiwiiibl^e^
auembiy; iitmhleff to tremble ; membra, {ttnfr.
CB seniir, to feel; teste, f<fi<; pente, iiedti%; je rend^ / roi*
dtr; je pfende, I take; je eena, I,/^
BSL «B emeiit miKn; speeimeii, specimen; ezamen» examauUiorL
33. en fle donnent, they give; ils pnrlent, they epeak; ila toiTeoti
ihey write; lie eberehent, i^ seek,
S4. im aimplet eimpU; timbre, stamp; deim, ieer; fiUm, Ikvi^^cr ;
impostenr, impostor; important, importanL
in fin,,;Efie; pain, bread; demain, to-morrow ; erin, horseJunr; TiB|
wtne ; bain, baih ; teindre, to die ; peindre, to paint,
J5. om aombre, dark; noro, name; ombre, shadow; tombe, tomb,
nombre, number ; comble, height,
on pont, bridge; honte, shame; montre, lotticb; faiatfn, reason;
maison, house; fondre, to meli; non, no,
Sd. am tumble, Aiim^2e; j^iom, petfume ; humblement, AtimftZlf.
nn lundi, Monday; bran, brown; alun, alum; emprunter, la
borrow; Important importunate ; on, one.
ExsRciBB 3. — Tub Covbovants.
(Jk) banme,&a2fam; blesanre, wound; bran, brown; absolution,
absohaian; abstrait, abstract; abbaye, o^&ey ; Jacob, JoeoA.
(e) eacher, to cunce(U; coin, comer; d^nple, decuple; cin^
wax; ciniyjive; chercher, to sedc; je cache, I conceal; pa.
triarcbe, |KiAnarc& ; patriarchat, po/rtarcAo/e ; chambre, cAam-
ber; arche, arch; changer, to change; orcheatre, orchestra;
eharbon, coal ; aac, bag ; buc^ juice ; clerc, clerk ; banc, bench ;
HanCjJIank ; aeeond, second; tecond^ fruitful ; tk^on,fashion ;
le^n, reoetvedm
(d) daim, deer ; don, gift ; admirer, to admire ; bord, border ; nord,
north; and, south; Obed, Obed; Talmud, Talmud; grand
^ge^advancedage; rend^iljdoesherenderJ prendAhdoeshetake)
(f) foin, hay; faim, hunger; froid, cold; bref, short; Boif^ thirst;
•uif, talUno; clef; key; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master^
piece; osaT.^g; c^VLh^eggs; <BvdfniBy fresh egg; bcBuf, or,
beef; boeufa, oxen; nenf maisona, nine Aou^i ; neuf chevaaz»
ittne horses; neuf amis, nine friends.
<g) mS!»f <0 to; soaier, Aroo/; gn»er,^aM; fvid^ X«ii»;
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
'so LBf foir tti
ligae, liagne; il Hgtn^ he leagKed; ne«» ligntfo^wehagv^,
aiguille, needle; aiguinon, g'lNul; tiga^ hemioekj digii€^
Vforthy; r^gne, ir^; Eapagne^ fifpotn; PolofB«» JFVfancI ;
brugiiOB, necUarine ; sotgnant, toX»f^ core; jmgBaai,jaim^gi
atagnanl^ ttagnard; rang honorable, ]kofwra&Ze nmk
(h) h&te, ftofte-; Yioxite, ihame; hmt^ High; herbe, Aerdfl^e; al<
monaeh, nJmanoc.
(J) jujabe, j^vbe ; jeune, ycwig ; jvger, to judge ; jortr, to noeor
joDC, rus^/i ; joindre, (ojoin ; d^ftner, to breeitfasi^ Joi^ Jew,
jeu, play,
(1) lame, &2a<fe; loi, 2aio; illegal, t2fii^«^; illioite^ «ni(if^,
paille, sfrmo; 8oleil,ncn; pareil, eimUar; bail, teii; aaillec^
to rail; aontller, to eoil; eaille, quaU; caaaiUe, riMle; villot
town; Tillage, mUage; mille, mUe, tkausaifd; p6riJ, periZ;
pointilleaz, punctilious; baril, barrel; fiiail, gtdi; gentil-
homme, no&JoiMm; genttlahommes, lu^tomn; bontatlie, botUiL
EacxROUx 4. — Tbb Cohsonahts CoxTuruju).
(nm) inon,my; marge, nuxf^n; nom, name; champ, /fi2tf; moine,
moni ; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn ; {aim, hunger;
aon argent, his money ; bon app^Ut, ^ooi app^iie ; lien ^troiti
dose connection,
(p) partir, to go away; coup, blow; tempB, weai3ier; dnqs eZot^;
aept, aevra; baptSme, bc^ism; cap, cape; Alep, AZcppo.
(q) qu4rir, to fetch; quitter, ro leave; muaique, mime ; logique,
logic ; qwunnie^ forty ; qnoi, what ; aquatique, aquatic ; Qain>
tilien, QuintUian; cinq,/ve; cinq livre8,/ve bocks.
(r) ranger, to arrange; errer, to err; arriver, to arrive; Terser,
to pour; je oourrai, IwiU run; je courais, I was running;
Jouir, to e7i;oy ; car, /or ; plaisir, pleasure; amer, frt^/er ; parlor
to speak; changer, to change; for, iron; hiver, winter,
(■) silence, silence; soin, care; sans, without; base, ftose; rose,
rose; chose, ^tTtg; observer, to observe; toeoit, razor ; para
sol, parasol; science, science; schisme, schism; scie, saw
scheme, scheme; gras, yb^; pas, step; lambris, wainscot;
Barras, Barras; Romulus, Somos; tous avez, you have;
nous aimons, we love,
(t) tiers, third; tiare, iiara; tort, wrong; portion,* portion;
* T, in the English words eorreqxmding to the French words, in whidi
ttala letter is pronounced Ukis c in oedar, has generaVj the sound of ib{
la In aotSoB, partial, Ac
Digitized
by Google
LBVS'es IT. M
•anetioii* sanction; essentiel, essential; partlaUt^, jNiftiaZt^;
MCtion, section; qaestioiif question; iMistloii, bastion; oh^ei*
valion, observation ; minntie, mimUia ; democsatie, deniocrac^;
uadti^firiendsk^; JaituUion, inUiation; mot, word; lot, iot;
Rept, seven; sept livras, seven books; et» and; vingt linea,
twenty books,
voir, tosee; yn^go; Idve, raua; lever, to nitw; Ti8Jige,/ac6
TiTe^ f. iioely,'
Westphalie, Weimjur, Worms, Wurtemberg.
xylon, oo0on plant; X^Dophon; eziler, to exile; ezeaser, to
excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maximei
maxim; soiximtidme, sixtieth; six, six; sixidme, sixth; six
Uvres, six books; Bruxelles, Brussels; Aix-lsrChapelle ;
dix, ten ; Phenix; Ajax; deux hommes, two men; diz amis,
Unfriends.
Md^ teal; lone, tone; xoologie, zoology; toos Iltex» you
read; nez, nose; Metz; alles-y, go there; venex iei,60fiM
Here*
LESSON IV. LEgON IV.
1. Ik Freoeh the article [( 18, (3.)1 lu«> in the singular, a dia.
■net oim for eadi gender. Ex.
le ins, O^ son: La flUe, the daugUer, the girt t
hdtc^te^tkebrtftkeri htk smvn^ the sister.
S. fiefora a word conmieneing with a vowel or an h mote, [I* 8» 1 1,]
die article is the same for ^th genders. [} 13, (7.)] Ex.
Vaieul, tie grandfather f • VtAerde, the grandmother f
L'hote, the landlord ; L'hdtesae, the landladi\
. 8. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the
feminine. [{ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders.
Masc. Vhotame, the mans he lion, the Hon s
Le livre, the books Le papier, the paper;
VsLTheii, the trees Ja hois, tke woods
Fan. la feame,tke woman s La lionne, £&« r&MM»i
U Uble, the tabu s I* fe«J^l«» ^ W^»
U plume, Oejmii La portoi Ms ^m".
Digitized
by Google
M
&>•&«« tt»
4. Afr/OLj TO BAYS, I» THE PRJHWNT OF TB« IVDXOAnW.
JJEmutft^y.
Ha.
fiUea,
Tons avez,
Us ont, m.
Klles ont, f.
Ikave;
Tkouhadf
He has;
Wthavet
You have f
TTheyhave;
TVieyhave:
JtUnfrognitvd^t
Ai.je1
HaveZ?
AA-tuI
HaAu\4m1
A-M11
HaiheJ
A-t^Ue1
Has the?
ATODsnousI
Hdvewcf
Avez Tons 1
HaveyoK?
Ontilal m.
Havethefff
Qntelleslf.
Havelktyf
6. The e of the pronoau >e is elided when that pronoun comes
before a vowel or an & mate. [} 146.]
6. In interrogative sentences, when the third person singular of «
•^rb ends with a vowel, and is immediately followed by a pronoun, a
4 calUd euphmiCi must be placed between the verb and the pronoun.
A-t-ai Hash€? A-1reUel Has she?
EtBJJKA OF EzAMPLXa.
Lt) pere a la viande, vons avez le
cafS, et j^al I'eau.
L'bomme ale pain, renfiint a le sel,
et nous avons le poivre.
T%e father has the meat, ptm have the
coffee, and J have the water.
The man has the bread, the child has
the saltf and we have the pepper.
EXBROISE 5.
Madame, Madam ;
Mademoiselle, Miss ;
Meunler, m. miller t
Monsieur, Mr. Sirs
Non, no ;
Oui, yes ;
Pain, m. bread ;
Plume, f,pens
Qui, who;
Sel, m. sail ;
Seulemcnt, only ;
Table, f. table f
Thi, m. tea ;
Viande, f. meatf
Vin, m. wine ;
Yinaigre, m. visiegm^.
Avoine, t. oats ;
B16, m. wheat ;
Boucher, m. bvkhers
Bouliingcr, m. baker ;
Cheval, m. horse;
Et. and;
Farine, f. fUnvr;
Frdre, m. hrother ;
Livre, nL book ; •
1. Qui a le pain? 2. Le boulanger a le pain. 3. A-t-it la farine ? 4.
Oui,Monsieur, il a la farine. 6. Avons nous la viande ? 6. Oui, Monsieur,
reus avez la viande et le pain. 7. Le meunier a la farine. 8. Le
boulanger a la farine et le bl6. 9. Avons nous le livre et U
plume 1 10. Oui, Mademoiselle, vous avez le livre et la plume.
11. Le boucher a la viande. 12. Le meunier a la viande et j*ai
le cafe. 13. Avez vous Teau et le sel ? 14. Oui, Monueur, nous
avons Teau, le sel et Tavoine. 15. Avons nous leth^? 16. Non«
Monsieur, la fille a le the, le vinaigre et le sel. 17. Ai-je levin)
18. Non, Madame, vous avez seulement le vinaigre et ^a viaada
19. Avex Yom la Ublel 90. Oni, Madame, J's' la tablar
Digitized
by Google
^'
iBlsoir ▼• It
EZXRCISB 0.
1. Hsre yott the wheat 1 2. Yes, Sir, I have the wheat 8. ^Vho
turn the meat? 4. The batcher has the meat and the salt 5. Has
he the oats? 6. No, Madam, the hone has the oats. 7. Have we
*Jie wheat! 8. You have the wheat and the fiour. 9. Who has the
laltl 10. I have the salt and the meat 11. Have we the vinegar
the tea and the coffee ! 12. No, Sv, the brother has the v]nega»
13' Who has tho horse? 14. The baker has the horse. 15. Have
we the book and the pen 1 16. No, Miss, the girl has the pen, and
the miller haa the book. 17. Have you Ihe table, Sir t 18. No, Sir,
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table ? 20. We have the
table, the pen, and the book.
^ LESSON V. LE9ON V.
1. The article le^ with the preposition de preceding, must be eon*
tneted into iii, when it comes before a word in the ma$euUne siog«*
kr, commencing with a consonant or an j^ aqpirated. [L. 8, 11. { ll|
C«.) (9.)
Pu fi^re, of the hrotheri Du chateau, of tht casUe ;
Dn htroe, oftkt hero / Du chemtn, «f (he wmf.
2. Before/emtntntf words, and before masculine words commencing
with a vowel, or an fr mute, the article is not blended with the pre»
position.
Pe la dame, tofthM ladys De Tamie, f. of the ftmak fritnd 9
De I'aigent, m.oftke money ; De Thonnenr, m. of the honor.
3. In Frendi, the name of the possessor follows the name of the
object possessed. [\'t^{lO,y\
La maison du mSdecin, T%e physician's house ;
L'arbre du Jsrdin, The tree of the garden t
La lettre de la soeur, 7%e sisters kUer.
4. The name of the material of which an object is composed follows
always the name of the object; the two words being connected by
tfe preposition de, (tT before a vowel or an }k mute.) [} 70. (1 1.)]
LliabH de drap, Ilk doth coaig
La robe de sole, The siXk dress:
Lamontred'or, lUgeUi '
Digitized
by Google
Lxisoir ^^
R£sum6 of Examples.
L« taiUenr a lluOril de drap da
m6decin.
Tons ftTea la .ettre de la soeur da
ThM tailor has (Ac ^ystcuw'f cMk
coal.
Ytm have the baker's sisier^s kUer,
{thtldiero/tkesiMUroftiuh^^A
A-t-Ulaffrndeladamal - Has he tJU lady's book?
Exercise *I,
Argent, m. sUver.money ,- Conteau, m. kmi/e ; Porte-crayoD, m. jwao^
Bu, m. stocking ; Coir, m. leather ; case ;
BoiB, m. 1000^ ; Dame, f. lady; Bobe, f. inos;
Cbtpeaa, m. ha^t DntPi m* c^oU; Satin, m. M(iii;i
Charpentier, m. caarpeU' Foin, m. ^y; Soear, f. sister;
ter; Habit, m. coat; Soie, f. 5t2^;
Cordonnier, m. shoema- Laine, f toooZ, loooilam; SooUer, m. shoe;
ker ; Mais, but ; Table, f. tabU ;
Coton, m. cotton; Or, m. ^02<^; Tailleur, m. tailor,
1. Avez vons la montre d'or? 2: Oni, Madame, j*ai la montre d'or
et le chapean de soie. 3. Monsieur, avez vous le livre du tailleur 1
4. Non, Monsieur, j'ai le livre du mMecin. 6. Ont lis le pain da
boalanger? 6. Ds ont le pain du boulanger et la farine du meunier.
7. Avez vouB le porte-erayon d'argent? 8. Oni, Monsieur, nous avona
la porte-crayon d'argent 9. Avons noue IVivoioe du chevall lOi
Voua avez Tavoine et le foin du cbevaL II. Qui a I'habit de dn^
du charpentier? 12. Le cordonnier a le chapeau de sole du tailleur.
13. Le tailleur a le Soulier de cuir du cordonnier. 14. Avez vous la
table de boisi 15, Qui, Monsieur, j'ai la table de bois du charpentier.
16. Ont ils le couteau d'argenti 17. lis ont le couteau d'argent
18. Le frdre du m^ecin a la montre d'argent 19. La soeurdu
cordonnier a la robe de soie. 20. A-t-elle le Soulier de cuir? 21. Non,
Madame, elle a le Soulier de satin. 22. Avons nous le baa de laine t
23. Non, Monsieur, vous avez le bas de soie du tailleur. 24. Qui
ale basde cotont 26. Le m6decin a le bas de coton. 26. La dame
a la Soulier de satin de la eosur du boulanger.
Exercise 8.
1. Have you the tailor's book 1 2. No, Sir, I have the phyaidan'a
watch. 8. Who has the gold watch ? 4. The lady has the gold watch
and toe silver pencil-case. 6. Have you the tailor*s shoe ? 6. 1 have
the tailor's olotu-shoe. 7. Have we the wooden table? 8. Yes, Sir,
you have the wooden table. 9. Have they the silver knife ? 10. They
have the silver knife. 11. The lady has the silver knife and the
gold penoil-caae. 12. Has she the satin dressi 13. The phyaioian*a
deter has the satin dnm 14. Who has the wood! 15. The ea^
Digitized
by Google
L£8»Oir Tt 96
pentor^B brother hut the wood. 16. Have yoa the woollen stock-
iDg? 17. No, Sir, but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the
baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's
floiir« 20k Have we the horse's hayt SI. You have the horse'a
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat ? 28. Yes, S:r, yon have the
tail<H^s silk hat and the Shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have yon the
sloth shoe of the physletan's sister I 25. No, Madam, I ha\ ^ the lady's
•ilkd/ess^
LESSON VI. LEgON VL
1. The article, preceded by or contracted with the preposition cfe^ '
•ecording to Rales 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before
words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally be
known in English when $ome or any is or may be prefixed to them
[} 18, (10.) {78,(10]
Ba pain, Breads or aoma brtmdt
De la viands, MeiU^ or tomM meat;
De I'aigent, Msney, or soms montp,
3. The French numeral a4jective, nn, m. une, /., answers to the
Knglish indefinite article, a or an. [} 18, (4.) (11).]
Un homme, A mani
Une femme, A woman,
8. The e of the preposition tk is elided before un and une. [} 148.1
D'un llvre, m. C^ or from a books
D'nne maison, f. Of or fiwn a ktut^
4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is
a noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after
the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses,
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender,
mimber and person. [{ 76, (4.) (5.)]
Le m4deoln a-t-il de rar^ent 1 Bos thefkyddam money 7
Le bottcher art-il de la viande 1 Has the IvteMer meat ?
Le libraire a-t-il du papier 1 Has the bookseUer fopor 7
La dame a-t-elle de la soie 1 Has the lady silk 7
R&3UM& OF Examples.
Avez vous du pain 1
VooB avez du pair.| du beurre, et
dufromage.
Votrs Mrs A-t-il one Uvre de
i1
Have you bread 7
You have bread, butttr, euU
Boi yowr brother a powndtfkMmf
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LSttOV Tt.
NOf J have a Uuly*s book.
Has the physician's sister paper
ink?
Aum rotm !• lin» d'mi Ubndre 1
Non, J'ai le livre d'une dame.
Iia Boenr du m£decin a-t-elle du
papier et de Tencre 1
5. It will be seen by some of the above etamplea, that tho tf
tide must be repeated before every noun used in a partitive eenae
EXBRCISB 9.
AcaJOQ, m. mahogany s Encre, f ink; Livre, f pound f
Acier, m. sled ; Epicler, m. grocer ; Moroean, m. piece /
Ai:doiird'hiii, ^^; Fils, m. Jo»; « Papier, m. paper /
Beurre, m. buUeri Fonrchette, tfork ; Plume, tpent
Bi&re, f beer ; Fromage, m. ekeese ; Sucre, m. sugar •
Boeui; m. beeff Gant, m. glove ; Yin, m. vfine ;
Gaft, m. coffee} Libraire, m. bookseller i Yotre, yews
Cuiller, f 5^00111 Lirre, m. &wi(; ; Th6, m. tea.
P6, m. thimbU;
I. Avez voua de la viande? 2. Qui, Monsieur, fai une livre de
viande. 3. Votre fils a^t-il nn morceau de pamt 4. Oui, Madame,
il a nn morceau de pain. 6. Le libraire a-t-il un livre? 6. II « d«
I'encre et du papier. 7. Votre sceur a-t-elle une montre d^ort 6.
Elle a une montre d'or et nn d6 d*argent 9 Le boulanger a4-il du
vin on de la bidre? 10. Le boulangera du th6 et du cai%. 11.
Votre frdre a^t-il du fromage? 13. D a du fromage et du beurre.
IS. La dame Spl^elle une cuiller d'argent? 14. La dame a une
cuiller et une fonrchette d'aigent 15. Le boucher a-t-il de la
viande aujourd'huil 16. Oui, Monsieur, il a un morceau de boeuf.
17. Le charpentier a^t-il one table? 18. Oui, Monsieur, il a uno
table d'acajou. 19. Avez vous le livre du m^ecin? 20. Non,
Madame, mais j^ai le livre de votre soBur. 21. Qui a du caf6 et du
■ucre? 22. L'^picier a du caf6 et du sucre. 23. La s<Bur da
libraire a-t-elle un gant? 24. Non, Monsieur, mais elle a un livre.
85. A-t-elle une plume d*acier ? 26. Non, Monsieur, elle a une plume
d'or. 27. Vous avez le porte-crayon du m^decin.
Exercise 10.
I. Have you any tea? 2. Yes, Madam, I have a pound of tea
8. Who has bread ? 4. The baker has bread, butter, and cheese
5. Has the tailor cloth ? 6. The tailor has a piece of cloth. 7
Has the physician gold? 8. Yes, Sir, the physician has gold and
mlver. 9. Has the lady a silver watch ? 10. Yes, Miss, the lady
haa a bili^er watch and a gold pen. 11. Has yonr sister silk ? 12.
Yea, Sir, she has silk and cotton. 13. Have you a knife ? 14. YeSf
ar» I have a steel knife and « silver fork. 15. Have you meat
to^y, Sit ? 16. Yes, Sir, I have a piece of b<e£ 17. Hat yew
Digitized
by Google
IMBnOW Tib 91
a mahogmy iftble? 18. Ym, Sir, he has a mahogany
table. 19. Has your sister a glove? 20. No, Sir, your sister has a
silk glove. 21. Has the bookseller's son a gold peneil case? 23.
Yes, ^r, he has a gold pencil ease and a steel pen. 23. Wlio has
year sister's watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the
iOk hat 26. We have gold, silver, and steel (See Rule 6.)
V
LESSON vn. LEgoN va
1. To render a sentence n^atitre, tie is plaeed before the verb, an4
pat after it
^e n'al pas le cheval. / have not tkt horse,
V Tons n'aves pas la maison. You have not the koum.
%, When the verb is in a compound tense [\ 45, (8.)] the first
negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between
the auxiliary and the participle.
Je n*Ai pas on le cheval. / have not had the horse.
Yous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house,
8. I» will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided,
when the verb begins with a vowel. [} 146.]
4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, tiadhmg ; jamais, never ; per*
Sonne, tio onej nobody^ occur, the word ne only is used, and those
words take the place of pas, [} 41, (6.)]
Je n*ai ni le livre ni le papier. / have neither the book nor the paper,
^CAvez vous qvelquc chose 1 Have you any thing ?
7QT0QS n'avons rien. We have nothing^ or not any thing,
yVenoaae n'a lo livre. No one has the 000k,
yYous B*avez Jamais le conteau. You never have the knife,
5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1), and being
the object of a verb, conjugated negatively, should not be preceded
h} the article, but by the preposition de only. [} 78, (7.)]
Nous n'evons pas d'argent We have no money,
Yous n'avez pas do viande. You have no meat,
6. Quelqn*un, some one^ am/ one; [{41, (7.)] quelque chose, s tm^
diing, any thing ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga*
tiro sentence, or in a sentence which is negative and interrogative at
the same time.
Avons nous quelqu'nn 1 Bave we any one?
Avesvoos quelque chose ? Bamyoumnytkiiuf?
WflMaooapasquelqneebosel One wt noi eometkimg f
Digitized
by Google
t8 I.S80OH Til.
7. Ib ft Begaiiv« Motenee, ne— {teraoime, mgmUm fioMy, rwi «fif
My; and ne-— rien, nothings not any thing.
Je u'ai penonne. / have no one, not aiMf m/e.
Voofl n'avez rien. Yem, have nothifig, or not am^ ihmg.
8. Avoir, to have, in thb Pkesent of the Indicativi.
NegaJtxody. NegaHvdy and Ii^errogatwdy,
Jen'aipas, 1 have not} ITaiJepasI Have I not?
Tun'aBpaSi TMuhastnot: N'astnpasl Hast thou naf
Iln'apas, He has not i N'art-ilpast Has he not?
Bile n^ pas, She has not s NVt-ellepaal Hasshtnot?
Nous n'avons pas, Wehavenot; N'aTonsnonspaslHizMioefui^?
Vous n*avez pas, You have not / N'avez vous pas 1 Have yon not?
Os n'ont pas. They m. have not; ITont ils pasi Have they m.notf
fiUes n'ont pas. They f. have not ; N'ont elles pas 1 Have they t nd?
RtisuMi of Examples.
. Le taillenr a-t-U le bonton 1
Le taillenr n'a pas le bonton.
U /a ptaip le drap.
n h'a en nile drap nl le cuir.
Ai-jefaiayiandet
Vous n'avez pas de Tiande, (R. 6.)
A^ons nons quelqne chose 7
Nons n'avons rien.
^Kons n'avons jamais dpLCaft, (B. 5.)
Has the tailor the button 7
The tailor has not the button.
He has not had the cloth.
He has had neither the doth nor Ik
leaiher.
Have I meat?
You have no meat.
Have we any thing ?
We hone nothing, or not amy 1/dng.
We never have coffee.
EZSRCISB 11.
Ami, m. friend; Drap, m. doth; Personne, m. nobodty;
Angleterre, f. England ; Dn tout. ad^. at all ; Qnelqne chose, m. some»
Auisi, also; France, f. France; thing, any thing;
Antre, other ; Histoire, f. history; Qnelqu'nn, m. sonu one,
Chapelier, m. hatter ; Libraire, m. booksdUr ; any one ;
Ghien, m. dog; Marchand, m. merchant; Sole, f. silk;
Coton, m. cotton; Mon, m. my; Velours, m. velvd;
Cousin, m. cousin; Ni, coqj. neither, nor; Voisin, m. neighbor.
Denx, two;
1. Le chapelier a-t-il de la sole? 2. Le chapelier n'a pas de aoie
mais il a da velours. 3. A-t-il du velours de coton ? 4. Non, Mon
aieur, il nV pas de velours de coton, il a du velours de sole. 5. Ayes
vous de la viande? 6. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai de la viande. 7. Le m6^
deoin n'a pas d'argent 8. Qui a de I'argent? 9. Le marchand n'a
paa d'argent, mais il a du drap, du velours et de la soie. 10. Aves
vous quelque chose! 11. Non, Monsieur, je n*ai rien du tout. 12. La
tailleur a-t-il deux boutons d'argent t 13. Non, Monsieur, il a denx
boutons de sole. 14. Qui a votre chien t 16. Le voisin a le ohien d«
non oonsin. 18. N'a-t-Q pas votre eheval aasii? 17. Non, Moniiew
Digitized
by Google
B a 1e cjovat de TOira ami. 18. Atoz vom lliiatoire de Fmaoef
19. NoDf Madame, je n*ai nl l*hi8toire de Franee ni lliistolra d'An^e-
tam. 20. NTavez Tom ni le livre ni le papier t 21. Non, Mademoi*
Mile, je n'ai ni Tun ni Tautre. 22. Qui a dn papier? 28. Le libraire
n'a pan de papier. 24. Qaelqa'un-a-t-fl nn livre? 25. Pereoniie n'a
de livie.
EzSROISB 12.
1. Haa the baker velvet t 2. No, Sir, the baker has no velret.
8. Who haa aUk velvet? 4. The hatter haa silk velvet and a silk haL
6 Have yon two ailver buttons? 6. No, Sir, I have a cloth coat, a
■ilk hat, and a vdvet shoe. 7. Ha^^ your neighbor a wooden table I
8. Yes, Sir, he haa a mahogany table. 9. Haa your couain a history
of England? 10. No, Sir, he has a histoiy of France. 11. I have
neither the cloth nor the velvet 12. We have neither the meat nor
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book? 14. Your cousin has a book,
a velvet coat, and a ailk hat 16. Have you the phyaician's book?
16. Yes, Madam, I have^the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen.
17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he
has money. 19. Who haa your neighbor's dog? 20. Nobody ha»
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has any one my book? 22. No one haa
your book. 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, Silt
he has nothing 25. Who has your friend's book ? 28. Your brother
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat? 28. He has not
the tailor's eoat 29. We have neither the cloth nor the ailk.
LESSON Vm. LBgON VHL
1. The verb ancir is used idiomatkaliy in Freneh; with tiie w«da
fuelqae efaose, chaud, froid, faim, honte, peur, jaison, tort, soif, som-
aieil.
J'ai quelaue chose. SemeHiing is the maUtr wUh m^.
II a <Uiaua. He is warm.
Kile a fitim. She is hungry.
Nous avons honte. We are ashamed.
Tons avez peur. You are afraid.
Us ont tort. They are terong.
Avez vous raison 1 Are you right 7
J'ai sonmieiL / am sleepy.
2. A noun, whether taken in a general or hi a puticttlar
lii in Freneh, commonly preoaded by the vtkh Zi^ in ita
U 77,(1.) (2.)]
Digitized
by Google
40
Z.I08OV ▼fit
La pain eit n^eesniie.
II A le pain.
Brtkdis meesmnfi
He has the bread.
8. A noun, preceded by the mrtlcle Uy retains thai article ofl^? ni|
fi0r, nekhtr ; but a noqn taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, 1,] takes
after m^ neither article nor preposition.
/e n'ai ni Tarbre n! le jardin.
ous n'sTODS ni arbre ni jardin.
/ have neither the tree nir the rofSeni
We have neilker tree fur garden^
4. A nouni taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjee*
tive, takes merely the preposition de. [J 78, (3.)]
6. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noni .
Beau, handsome g Cher, dearf Jeune, young g Meillenr, better i
Bon, good I Grand, great^ large; Joli, pretty ; Petit, smaU ;
Braye, wrtky; Qros, large; Mauvais, bad; Yieux, old;
Vilain, ugly.
RfiSUMA OF EZAMPLSS.
Avei voQS auelqne chose 1
Je n'ai rien, (UteraUy, I have nothing.)
Votre fr^re a-t-il chaud 1
n n'a ni fh>id ni chaud.
Votre soeur a-t-elle fitim on soif 1
SUe n'a pas faim, mais honte.
Votre ami art-il sommeil 1
Uon ami n'a ni sommeil ni peur.
Avez vous raison ou tort 1
Avez vous du latt ou du vin t
Je n'ai ni lait ni vin, [R. 8.]
Avei vous le lait ou le vini
Je n'ai ni le lait ni le vin. [R. 8.]
Avez vous de beau drap et de bon
cafti
Is anff thing the matter with fou ?
Nothing is the matter vrith me.
Is your brother learm ?
He is neither warm nor cold.
Is your sister hungry or thirsty?
She is not hungry^ but ashamed.
Is your friend sleepy ?
Myfriendisneither sleepy nor afraid.
Are you right or wrong?
Have you mdlk orvrine ?
I have neither milk nor wine.
Have you the milk or the wine?
I have neither the milk nor the wine?
Have you handsome cMh and good
coffee?
EZBROISV 13.
An oontraire, on the eon- Fusil, m. gun ; Petit, small, Utile;
trary ; Froid, m. cold ; Peur, f fear, ofraid i
Bouton, button; Gros, large; Quel, ukat, which;
Capitalne, captain; Honte, f. shame, ashamed; Raison, f. reason, right t
Cousin, m. ceusin; Mais, M; Rien, nothing;
Chaud, m. heat, warm; Marteau, m. hammer; Tort, m. wrong;
Faim, f. hunger, hungry; Menuisier, m. joiner ; Sel, m. saii ; '
Ferblantier, m. tinman; Poivre, m. pepper ; Bommeil, m. sUep, deepy
1. Qui a sommeil? 2. Mon frdre a faim, mais il n'a pas sommeiL
8. Avez vous raison ou tort? 4. Pai raison, je n'ai pas tort 6. Avez
vous ie bon fusil de mon fr^re? 6. Je n'ai pas le fusil. 7. Avez vous
froid aujourd'hui? 8. Je n'ai pas f^oiu, au contnure, j'ai chaud.
9. Avez vous de bon pain? aO. Je n'ai pas de pain. 11. N*av«i
▼iHis pu fUmt 19. Je n'ai ni fidm ni soil 18. Avez vous hontef
Digitized
by Google
i4. 3% a*al ■! kwU oi penr. 16. Atods now da peitro on da tell
18. VooA a'avez ni pohre ni teL 17. Quel livre av«s toobI 18. J'ai
to Ihrre de moo eoaaiiL 19. Avez Tons le mtftefto de tet ou le oiar-
tMn d'afgent ! 20. Jo n'ai ni le martoan de fer ni le marteau d'aigenty
fai lo marteaa de boia da ferblantior. SI. Area rooa quelqao choet!
39L Jo n'ai rien. 2d. Avez toos Io grot iivro da libraire f 24. Je n'ai
ni le groB fivfo da libniro, ni le petit livio da menaiaior, f ai io bcs
lirre da ca^tatno.
EXXRCIBX 14.
1. Are yon sleepy, Sir! 2. No, Sir, I am not sleepy, bat I am
hongry. 3. Hare yoa pepper or saltf 4. I have neither pepper nor
aalt: I have cheese. 6. Is yoar brother thirsty or hangry! 6. My
hfother is neither thirsty nor hongiy. 7. Is your sister right or
wrong! 8^ She is not wrong, she is right 9. Is the good joiner
afraid? 10. He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Hare yoa milic or
cheese ? 12. 1 have neither milk nor cheese, I have batter. 13. Haye
yoa the line cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth
nor the good tea. 15. Is anytliing the matter with yon, my good
friend? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good Sir. 17. Havo
yon no bread? 18. Yes, Madam, I have good bread, good batter, and
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy? 20. The carpenter is not
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. 21. Have you the tinman's wooden
hammer ? 22. 1 have not the wooden hammer. 23. Which hammer
nave yoa ? 24. 1 have the steel hammer. 25. Have yoa a good cloth
eoat? 28. No, Sir, bat I have a sOk dress. 27. Has the tailor the
good gold button? 28. Yes, Sir, he has the good gold button.
99. Who has my brother's gold watch? 30. Some ooe has the gold
WitdL
LESSON IX. LEQON IX.
1. The pronouns lo, Urn, it ; la, ^, if, are, in French, placed before
the verb.* These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns wliidi
they represent
Voyez vous le oouteau? m. Do you tee tkt kmfe?
Je le vois. IseeU.
YoyoDS nous la fourchctte ? f. Do we see the fork 7
Nous la voyons. WeseeiL
* Except in the sscond person singular, and in the flnt and
one ploral of tho imptiallvo osed aflinutivily.
Digitized
by Google
4S I)tftf801t IJL
3. ne vmie} of' the protioane le and ]% is dMttd befem * t«i%
•omsieDeiDg witii a vowel or an ^ route. [} 146.]
Aycz yotu le baton 1 m. Have you Me stick?
Je VaL I have it,
jUroDS nona k canne 1 £ &ai» we tkecaae 7
Nous ravens. We Aave U.
8* The posaesaive adjectives mon, m. ma, f. my; ton, m. ta» £ t^y,
Bon, m. sa, f. his, het, a^rree in gender with the object possessed, thai
ia with the noun following them. [{ ai» (1.) (2.)]
Mon pupitre, m. My desk ;
Avez vous mA lettre 1 f. Have you my leiter 7
n a son fusil, m. He has his gun.
11 a sa cravate, t He has Ms cravat,
4. Before a feminine notm In the singular, commenciiig witti a
vowel or an % mute, the maaauline fbrm, morit tm^ son fanaml
J'ai mon tip6e, f / kave my sword.
G'est son habitude^ t Itiskisorker habit.
Le g6n6Ma a son aiui^e, £ The general has his a/rmy.
6* The a^jeetivea nolie, <wr; votre, your; leuTi ^Aetr, ara naad
without variaftbn beforo a; voui of either gender, in the dngolan
Notre argent, m» Owr sihor.
y otre canne, £ Your cane,
Leur terra, £ T%eir land,
& The posaeasive pronouns le mien, nt hi mienneȣ mtne; la
tien, m. la tiennei £ ikine ; le sien, m. la aienne, £ li%$ or hers^ eaa
never be prefixed to boujbm. The article preceding those pronoun^
and fomiog an indiH^^naable part of them, takes the gender of the
object posseased ; mien, tien, aien, vary for the feminine—- n6tre and
v6tre uaed aa prononna have the circumflex accent.
J'ai votre livre et le mien. / have yowr hook and mine .
Elle a sa robe et la mienne. She has her dress and mine,
Vous avez voire plnme et la ndtre. Vim have yowr pen and ours,
SfiSUKfi or EZAMPLEB.
Votre ami a*t-n le mouton T
D Fa, eUo Ta.
II ne I'a pas.
ITavez vous pas I'enciier d'argent 1
Kous ne I'avons pas.
Avez vous votre f\isil ou le mieni
Je n'ai nl le vdtre ni le mien.
fikm 6pouso a-t>elle sa robe oula
vdtrel
EUo n'a ni la sienna ni la v^lM^
Has your friend ike sheep or muttanP
He has Ut she has it,
HehasUnot,
Have you not the siher mkstandf
We have it not.
Have you your gun or mine 7
I have neither yours nor mine.
Has his loife her dress'or younf
She has neither hers ntf yMV f.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Yatxefi^reiielVtpflpMl f Ma9n0if(mr bntktrUt
EXERCISS 15.
Aniette, f. plate ; Gny^on, m. /mki; ; Parent, vbL reUdim $
BiMmit, m. biscuU ; Cnisinier, m. cook ; Plat, no. dvk ;
Boenf xn. der/* ; Fonrchette, f fork ; Poisson, m. Jlsh ;
Boncber, m buUker ; Matelot, m. sai^; Porcelaine, f. china t
Commode, f. ekest of Mouion, ■>» miMon^ Sofli, in. 5o/^a ;
draversf sheep; Tout, a22;
'Coatcaa, m. ibity^; Miroir,m. looking-glass s Yean, m. -peoZ, ax(^.
1. Avez V0U8 la fourchetie d*argentt 2. Qui, Monsieur, je fai.
a^ Lb OBiaiiiier a-Ul le boBuf ! 4. Non, Monsieor, il ne Ta pas. 6.
Quel nn^rton avez youb 1 6. Jfai le boa monton et )e bon veau dn
l>0Qcher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, Moneieur*
fl ne Ta pas. 9. A-til mon poiaaon t 10 Qui a toot le biecoit da
boalangert 11. Le matelot n'a ni sen pain ni son biscuit IS.
A-t-il eon couteau et aa fonrchette f 18. II n*a ni son couteau ni sa
fourchette, il a son aesiette [R. 4]. 14^ Quel jiok sMll 16. H a
le joli plat de porcelaine. . 161 Avez resa le mien oa Ic nen f 17.
Je n'ai ni le Ydtre ni le den, j'ai le ndtre. 18. Avez vou? pear,
Monsieur? 19. Non, Madamoi je n'ai pea peur, j'ai faim. 30.
Qnelqa'on a^t-il ma montre d'or ! 21. Non» Monaiettr, personne ne
I'a. 93. Qu'avez vone, Monaieur ! 38. Je n'ai rlen. 34. Avezvona
lesofa d'acajou de mon menuieier? 35. Non, Mooaieor, je neTai
paa. 36. J'ai son joli miroir et son bon crayon.
EXEROIBS 16.
1. Have yon the silver pencil case t 2. No, Sir, I have it not 8.
Have yoa my brother's pUte? 4. Yea, Madam, I have it 6. Hoe
the batcher the good biscuit f 6. He has it not, he has the ^od
beef the good mutton,- and the good veal. 7. Have you my knife
and my fork ?* 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 9.
Who has the good sailor's biscuit 1 10. The baker has it, and I have
mine. 11. Have you mine also? 13. I have neither yours nor hia»
13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty and sleepy.
16. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I
am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong? 18. My relation is
right. Sir. 19. Has he my china diali or my silver knife ? 30. He
has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has your china
ylate. 31. Has any one my silver pencil-case? 33. No one has it,
* The possessive adiective most In French be .repeated before ereiy
t<2l,(*.)}
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
44 I.S8SOII t,
bat j<mT brother hat jronr cloth coat. 23. Hare yoa mine or Hial
SU. I have yours. 36. Haa the baker the mahogany c Beat of draw*
era? 26. He haa it not, he haa the mahogany sofa. 27. Hsa the
tinman my plate 1 28. He haa not your plate, he has mine. 2^
Whieh sofa have you! 30. I ha?e my brother's aofa. 31. i ham
ueithar hia nor youra, I have mine.
LESSON X. LBgON X
1. The demonstrative a^jeetivBa ce, m. eette, f. ikis or thai are al*
ways placed before nouna; they agree in gender with theae nouna.
H 30,(1.)]
Avei Tous ce paraphiie'? m. Have fou this or tkat umhrdla?
Vous n'avez pas eette bouteille, f. You have uol ikis or that boUU,
2. Before a word masculine aingnlar, commencing with a vow^l, or
an h mute, cei takes the place of ee, [\ 20, (1.)]
K'av«4 Tous pas cet argent 1 Have ytnt nU this or that moneif 7
V JOB avez eu oet honneur. You kuve had tkU or thai honor,
3. When it is deemed necessary to express in French, the differ-
•nee existing in English between the words <Au and ihai^ tlie adverbs
ci and U may be placed ailer the nouna. [{ 20, (2.)]
Je n'ai pas ce parasoUci J*ai ce pa- / Aave uat ikis parasol, I have ihaL
rasol-1^ parasol,
4. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, m. celle, f. thi» or ihat^ art
used to represent nouns, but are never joined with them like acyoo*
tives. [J 3<>, { 37, (1.)]
J'ai mon parapluie ct cdul de votie / Aatv my umbrtUa and ifowr broiktr*s,
tVdre, i. e., ihai of paw brolher,
Vons avez ma robe et celle de ma You have my dress and my sister's^ i. e.^
soeur, that of my sister,
6. The pronouns celui, celle, with the addition of the words ct and
Id, are used in the sense of this one, that one^ the latter^ the former,
[} 37, (4.)] They agree in gender with the word which they repre-
sent
Vous aves celnl-d mala vous n'avez You have this one {the latler), bid you
pas celui-l&. have not thai one {the former),
6. The pronouns ceci and cela. are used absolutely, that is, without
a noun, in pointing out objects.
Nous n'avoDS pas oed, nous avcais We have not tMs, we .V»c thai
eela.
Digitized
by Google
tsMair X
HAsumA or SxAiiPuu.
Afw TMH le line de eet hamoMl
7e D'ai dm son livrep J'ai to mien.
h& caisinicr a-t-il oe pantpluiel
II n*a pas ce parapluie-ci, U » oe
parmpiuie-la. (R. 8.)
Ares Yoiu oelai de voire fr6re1
Je ii*ei pas oehii de mon fliie, J'ti
oeini de ma soBiir, (R. 4.)
Avee Toiti oelnl-ci on oe1ni-U 1
Je n*ai ni oelni-ci ni celui-Ii.
Qoelle robe ayes vousl t
J*Ai oelle^L
Avex Tons oed on oelaf (B. 6,)
Aivtf )ii0« £U< month's i0§^?
lAave not kUbook, Ihtnemme,
Has the cook thai umbrdla?
He Aaswt Ois wmbrdla, Ik.kmt tf«l
Have you yawr broUiMr'i? (AtU of yam
I hope not my hroiker*s, I have my
listor'si L^,iktaofmybroaer,aa
of my sister.
Have you tkis one or thalone?
I haoeneUker the laUer nor (h€ former,
Which dress have you?
I have this (jme,)
Have you this or that?
EzBRCISK 1*1,
hetttt, t letter t
Halle, f. truMtks
Parasol, m. parasot ;
Ponlet, m. chicken /
Plomb, m. leadf
Vlus, no longer I
Bnerier, u. inkstMndt
Etraa^, bl drmig^t
foretgnen
tMit,m.miik:
Paimplnle, m. umkrdtat
\o]»&i»,t poultry.
ArdolM, f. tUOe;
Balai, m.hroomf
Bols, m. wood;
BoQteUle. f. bottle i
Dame, t ladyi
Fnmiage, m. cheeses .^.. ,
Jaidinier, m. gmrdenerf Salidre, t salt stands
1. Voire Mre a-t-il son encrier d^argentt 3. II ne Pa pins il a no
enerier de pIomK 8. Avons nous la lettre de retnnger f 4. Oni»
Monsieiir, nons avons eelle de Tetranger [R. 4.]. 6. Votre Meur n'ft
pas son aidoiserinais elle a son cbapeau de satin. 6. Le mennisier
a4-il Totre bois on le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a eelvi
dn jaidinier. 8. Avez vooa mon bon pafaplnie de soiet 9. J*ai
Totre porapluie de sole et votre parasol de satin. 10. Aves voasnui
boateille! U. Je n'ai pas votre bonteiUo) j'ai la malle de votre
soenr. 13. Le domestique a^-t-il cette sali^ref 13. II n'a pas eette
aalidre^i, U a celle*!^ 14. Avez vous le bon on le manvais poidet !
18l Jen'ainieelai-cinieelQi-liu 18. Qaelpouletavezvoast 17. J*ai
ealtti da cuisinier. 18. Le bonlanger a-t-il de la volaille! [L. 8
E. 1.] 19l Le bonlanger n'a pas de volaille, il ado lait [L. 7. R. 6.]
30. Avez vevs votre fromage on le mien 1 31. Je n'ai nl le vMre nl
le mien, j'ai celni da matelot 33. Qnelqa'un a-t41 faimt 38. Peiw '
Sonne n'a fiura. 34. Avez vonsqaelqne chose? 36. Non, Momfeori
Je n'ai rien.
ExBHcnie 18.
1. Haa your brother thai lady's umbrella? 3. MjteothArhasthal
hdfs omkaUik 8. Hmm yon this psiaaol et that om! 4 I hatvt
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
4A »0#»jr,si.
neither this (one) nor that (one). 6. Have yoa the stranger's goti
watch? fi. No, Sir, I have the baker's. 7. Who has mj slate 1
8. I have your slate and your brother'a. 9. Has the cook a silTor
aalt stand ! 10. The cook has a silver salt stand, and a silver diuh.
11. Has the cook this poultry or that? 12. He baa neither this nor
that 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this ncr
that, he has the baker^s good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para-
sol? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your ailk pansoL
17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? 18. The gardener has a leather
trunk. 19. Who has my good cheese? 20. Nobody has your
eheese, but some one haa your brother's. 21. Have you mine or
his? 22. I have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 28. Has
the cook this bottle or that broom? 24. He has this bottle. 26. Have
you a lead inkstand? 26. No, Sir, I have a china inkstand. 27. Haa
the stranger poultry? 28. The stranger has no poultry, but he haa
money. 29. Your brother is hungiy and thirsty, sfraid and aleepy.
80. la any one ashamed ? . 81. No, Sir, nobody is ashamed. 82. If
your brother right or wrong? 83. My brother is right, and yonrs la
wroi^. 84. Your aister has neither her aaiin hat nor her velvet hat*
LBSSON XL LEgOK XL
FLUBAL OF NOUKS (§ 8.)
1. The plnrsl In French is generally formed, aa In English, by the
addition of « to the singubir.
Un homme, nne femme, A num. a v»man ;
Deux hommes, deux femmes, 7\po flie», two wnnm.
The form Ze of the artksle beeomea plnnl by the addition of §,
and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender.
Les hommes, les femmes, 7^ men, ike tOMwu.
2. 1st ExcEPnoir to Ruli 1. Nouns ending in i, «, » remaii
WMslianged for the plural.
Le bas, les bas, 71^ Ooeiinf, ike ttoekk^ f
La voix, les voix, TV vmos, /A« twttfti ;
Lc nea, les nes, 7^ note, the nous.
8. 2d ExcBPTioR. Nouns ending with ou, and sm, take « for tbf
plural
Le bilsni, les bateanx, T%thMa,1keko^f
Lo1Is«,)wU««Pe, (|Viriaff,iWjrifm
Digitized
by Google
LSJtSOS XL
n
A, ad JBaoEFXiav. The foUowioff BpmB» mdsBg n Mi»lafct «ibr
ttie plunlt bijoii,/inoe2; caiiloUijRe&Us; ehmi, cabbage; genoii,lmM»
biboo, O10I ; joujoa, pi^yrtiiy.
Lbb bUou, let caillpuz, ies cboiijk, Tie jewOs, Me jieMfey, <A<? oiAi^tt /
Lea hibonx, ks genoux, Ies joujoox, 71U 9ta2s, Me kneesj ike playtHngi,
6. 4th EzcsFTiON. The following nouna ending in ail change thai
tonniiifttioii into aux for the plorel ; bail, Imu; corail, corai ; ^mail
miamel; aonpinuly otr-ftofe; soos-bidl, vacfer-tase; travail, 2a&or.
Lm bans, lee cocaoz, lee emanx, The leaau, the corals^ the enameUj
LcaaoapiranXylestrayaiiXilesBone- The air-koUs^ the laborij tAe under*
banx, leases.
6. 5th ExcsFTioir. Nonne ending in dl form their plural in aux.
he cbeval, lee chevanx, The horse^ the horses ;
Le general, lea gen^ranz, The generaly the generals,
Bal, haUs eamayal, eamhfols chaeal, ^adtalf rtgal, kieai, fbUow the
fneralmle.
7. Cth EzcBmcnr. del, heaven; euL, etfe; and aieiily oiMHtor*
foim their phural irregolarly.
Lee deux, lea yenz, lea aienx. T%e heavens^ the eyes, Me amcetior^.
For fdrUier mlea eee { 8, J 9, and } 10 of the Seeond Part.
RfiSUlfi OF SZAHPLBS.
Lee Aqglaia on( lie lea chefanz
dag6D6ral1
Lee generaux n'ont paa lea bijonx.
Lea enfanta ont Ha lea caflloux t
Lee yeux de Tenftnt.
Lee taUeaux de cette ^liae.
Ayes yooa lea oiaeaox de ce boia 1
Aves Toua lea encriera d'argent de
J'ai lee bijovx d'aigent et d'or de
retraoger.
Lea roia n'ont Qa paa lea palaia de
marble'?
HavetheBni^khUiegemraffzkerealf
7%e generals have not thejewds.
Have the children the pebAes 7
The iAUePs eyes.
The piduees of thai church.
Have you the birds of that wood 7
Have you my sister's silver inkstands?
I have the gold and silver jewds of ihk
foreigner.
Have not the kings the mar9k pah*
aees?
EzzROisv 19.
Barfl. mk. barrel j CMniral, m. general f Heanier, aa. mitterg
Baa. m. slocking s GUet, m. waistcoat; Moroeau, m. piece i
Chocolat, m.<&colaie! Qnxid,tLdi. large, great fOlaesai,m, bird f
«»— m^jetvelf Jardfai, m. gardens Petit, a^J. smaUg
Joi^oa, m. jdaythingf Paire, t pair;
L^me, m. vegeladle ; Poivre, m. pepper $
Marchand, m. merchant / Qa', qae, what;
UmMba^VLhiaeksmiihi Rien, nathit^.
Matrnda^ e, bad;
,m. cabbages
Sana, In;
Xnftnt, m. ehUds
far, HL irons
Wiley m. em;
L ATVS^valeamarteaiizdiicharpentier! 8.Noii8aTonalMiiBar
Digitized
by Google
40 ftsftsoir XV
tMitdc in nartehal f 8. Les marteluraz out 111 dma huoMkox 4/t
boitt 4. lit ont deux martMuz de fer. 5. Les g^n^nmz ontik
los chapeaiu de soie de Tenfant ? 6. lis ont les bgoux et les jo^wa
de Teafsnt 7. Les enfants ont ils les oiseanz de votre bois 1 8. Ila
n'onl pas les oiseanz de mon bois, mais ils ont les chevanz de moo
g^n^ral. 9. Le mar6chal a^t-il nne paire de bas de hdnet IC. Le
marechal a deuz paires debas de laine. 11. Monsieur, n'ave:^ tous
pas froid? 12. Non, Monsieur, j'ai chaud. 13. Avez vous d« eaft
ou du chocolat? 14. Je n'ai ni cafi^ ni chocolat 16. N'avez vous
pas les chonz de mon grand jardinf 16. Pai les legumes de votre
petit jardin. 17. Voire fils, quVt-iU 18. Mon file u'a rien.
19. Avez vous deuz morceauz de pain? 20. Le mennier a un mor-
ceau de pain et deuz barils de farine. 21. L*^picier a^t-il du cafe, du
tb6, da chocolat, et du poivret 22. II a du th§ et du cafi^, et le cho-
colat et le poivre de votn* -^archand. 23. Qui a de Targent? S4. Je
a'al pas d*argent, nuns f ai du papier. 96. Avez vooa de bon papier f
28. Pai de manvais papier.
EZBRCISX 20.
1. Have yon my brother's horses! 2. I hare nd your brother'a
horses, I have your cousin's hats. 3. Have the blacksmiths good
Iron ? 4. The blacksmith has two pieces of iron. 6. Have you two
pairs of stockings 1 6. I have one pair of stockings and two pairs
of gloves. 7. Has your sister the gold jewels ? 8. My sister has
the gold jewels and the paper playthings. 9. Have you the cabbages
in your garden f 10. We have two cabbages in our garden. 1 1. Haw
you tihe silk hatat 12. The generals have the silk liats. 13. Have
you coffee or sugar? 14. We have neither coflee nor sugar.
16. Is your brother ashamed? 16. My brotlier is neither
ashamed nor afbiid. 17. Who haa two barrels of flour ? 18. The
miller has two barrels of flour. 19. Have the birds bread ? 20. The
birds have no bread. 21 . Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar and
pepper ? 22. He has sugar and pepper, but he haa neither tea nor
chocolate. 23. Whit haa your sister? 24. She has nothing. 2flL
What is the matter with your brother? 26. Nothing is the matter
with him. 27. Is he not eold? 28. He is not cold, he is warm.
29. Is he wrong? SO. He is not wrong, he is right. 81 . Have yon
two cloth coata? 82. I have only one cloth coat, but I have two
satin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter? 84 Your ite-
tor has it 86. Year aister baa it not
Digitized
by Google
Lis'^ir xtt
LESSON XH LEgOS XLL
U The plural form of the pronouns le, km or ii ; Ik, her di ft^h
Im, ihiemt for both genders. Its place is also before the rerb.
Tons lea avez. Les avez vonal 1^ haw them, Haive you Mk f
Hoas ne les aTons pas. We have them net,
2. The plural of the article, preceded hj the preposition de» of; or
from^ is des for both genders.
Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the hoolu, ofthevens /
Des frftres, des Boenrs, O/otfremthehrotherSfPf the sisters,
8. The same form of the arlide is plaeed before plural nonni xtM
in a partitiTe sense. [L 6, R. 1.]
J'ai des habits. / haoe detkes,
Yoos aves des malsons. Ytm have houses,
4. Rnle 6, Lesson 7, and Ride 4, Lesson 8, apply Also t» plval
nonns used psrtitiTely.
Noos tt'sTODS pas de Uyres. V^e have no hooks,
Yoos avea de boos crayons. You kaoe good fencUs,
5. The plnnd fbim of the possessiTe apcyeethresi men, ton; i»bi$
Botrei votro, lenr, is mes, my; tes, thy; ses, hiSt her; nos, wr; roa^
H&ur; leurs, Oefr, for both genders.
Mies fibres, mes sceurs, My brotherly my sitters $
Hos ttrres, nos plnmes, Our hooks^ our pens.
^ The possessiTe pronouns, le mien, la mienne, etc. [L. d^ R. 6^1
fohn their plural as follows :
JMu. Fern, Mas. JPVm.
Les miens, Lesmlennes, smm; Lestteos, Lestiennes, thine'i
Iissriens, Lesdennes, hiswhersi Lesnfttres, Lesndtros, oursi*
IiasTdtres, LesTdtres, yours i Leslems, Lesleurs, tketrs.
Vos maisoDs et les mlennes, Your houses and msnei
Yob champs et les siens, Your fidds and hue
Lesneii%iesT6tresetlesnAtrss: His, yours and ours,
7. The demonstrative adjeetiTes, es, cet, ceUe, have ee$ tot thd'
plniaL
06S hommes, oes femmes. These men, these women,
8. The demonstrative pronoun, eelni, m. this, or ihat^ makea ceux in
the pluraL The feminine form, celle, merely takea the f in the
pluraL
MM^a&deKers(m.)etoeuxdeTos atjtamdietliekt and thm rf pout
frifes. brothers.
Yes ^titadMkkit) el esBei denes Tour candles emdtksst^ mat urigf^
bors,
8
Digitized
by Google
50 LMBBOH Xir
IUsumA of Examplius.
Votre frtro o-t il mes chevaus 1
n n'a ni les votres ni les siens.
A-t-il ceux de nos voisins t
II ne les apasl
Has your brothct my horseiJ
He has neither Vinton nor Au.
Has he those of out ndghlon f
He has them not.
Ma soar a-t-elle tos plumes on ' Hat my sister your peris ur my cmm-
^lles de ma coosine 1 I in' s,'t.? (or those of my i^usin).
Ene n'a ni les miennes ni celles de
ma cousiiie, elle a les siennes.
Avons nous des marteanx 1
Vous n'avez pas de marteaux.
Vous avez de Jolis crayons.
Avez vons les habits des enfants 1
Jo n'ai pas les habits des enfants.
Vous avez les cbapeanx des dames.
Avez Tons ceux-d on ceux ]k 1
She has neither mine nor my cousiWt
she has her own.
Have we hammers?
You have no hammers.
You have pretty pencils.
Have you the chUtlren^s dothes ?
J have not the children's clothes.
You have the ladies' hats.
Have you these or tk/ote 7
ExsROisi 21.
Aoajon, m. maho^nyt Chandelle, f. candle: Fusil, m. gun;
Anbergiste, m. mnjteep- Cousine, f. cousin f Laine, f. wool;
er\ Qriik, m. horse-hair ; Marbre, m. fltar6^ ;
Blanc, he, vokUe ; Eb^nisto, m. caJnneU Matclas, m. mattress /
Chaise, f. chair ; maker ; MelUeure, a^- f- ^^^ ;
Chandelier, m. candle- ^erhlunc, m. tin f Ouvnert vou workman ;
stick i Ferblantier, m. Hnman ; Voyageur, m. traveller.
1. Avez vous lea marteaux deu mar^cbaux 1 2. Oni, Monsienr, je
lea ai. 8. Ne lea avez vous pas! 4. Non, MoDsieur, nous ne lea
avons pas. 6. L'ouvrier les a. 6. L'aubergiste a^-t-il vos chevanx !
7. L'aubergiste n'a ni mes chevaux ni les v6tres, 11 a les siens. 8.
Le medecin a^t-il des livres ? 9. Oui, Monsieur, il a de bons livres.
10. N'avez vous pas mes meilleures plumes 1 11. Oui, Monsieui^
j'ai Yos meilleures plumes, les miennes et celles de votre cousine
12. Le voyageur art-il de bons fusils 1 13. II n'a pas de bons fusils,
11 a des fusils de fer. 14. Le matelot n'a^t-il pas mes matelas de
crin? 15. line les a pas. 16. Qu'a^t-il? 17. II a les matelas de
laine de I'^b^niste. 18. L'6b6niate a^t-il des tables d'acajou? 19.
Qui, Madame, il a des tables d'acajou et des tables de morbre blano
20. Avez vous mes chaises ou les vdtres? 21. Je n'ai ni les v6trea
cii les miennes, j'ai celles de Teb^niste. 22. N'avez vous pap som-
lueil 1 23. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai ni sommeil ni foim. 24. le feN
Llantier a-t-il vos chandeliers de fer ? 25. Non, Monsieur, il a ceux
dumar^choL
EzKECisa 22.
1. Have yon my tables or yours! 2. I havA neither y^vis nor
mine, I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ! 4. No, Sir, I have
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LS90OV lerri. 61
ftiMm aol & Bam your Bister my bonesf 0. Yes, flir, ehft hae
your two horses and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong 1
8. I am right, I am not wrong. 9. Has the tinman my silver oan-
dlesticks or yours? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor
mine. 11. What has he? 13. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs? 14. No, Sir, he haa my
white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those ? 16. I have
neither these nor those, I have the Cabinet-maker's. 17. Have you
good pencilrcases ? 18. No, Sir, but I have good pencils. 19. Has
the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, Sir, he has mine, yours, and his.
SI. Has he not your brother's? 23. He has not my brother's. 33.
Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, Sir, he has them.
35. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has mine
and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes? 38. Yes, Madam,
I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat? 30. I have my
cousin's, f. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother ? 33.
He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, Sir, I have
two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one wool
LESSON Xm. LBQON XIIL
AeRXBiiBxrr or adjbotitss — nxaavm of ▲djiotivsa.
1. The adjective m French, whatever may be its place,* agrees io
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [J 15, (1.) (3.)].
& Adjectives ending with e mute, i. e. not accented, retain th^
termination for the feminine.
Un gallon aimable. An amiable b<y ;
Une fiUe aimable. An anUaik girk
Z, Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine.
Un gar^on diligent, A dUigeni boy ;
Une fiUe diligente, A diligent girL
4. ExcEPnoKs. Adjectives ending in e2, ei2, en, ef, on, as, and #•
double the last consonant and take e for the feminine.
Mbu.
Bimtlel,
Vermeil
Anden,
. fkm.
essentielle,
vermeille,
andenne,
eseenHalf
vermilums
andenii
Mas,
Sqet,
Bon,
Bas,
Fetn,
sqjette,
bonne,
basse,
• For the place of a4iectlveB see I.. 15, sndBule 6^ Ii. a
Digitized by CjOOQIC
if
WQW mttn
(k A4telivM.«iiAii9iit/diaqgv1te/faitaw7
ohang* that letter into » fiir the fendniiia
Ulrhsbit neiif; Une nrtM nettve;
AnewctitUf Anevdresss
Un bomme heurenx, Une fsmme henreua^
A happy man ; A happy woman;
0. The adjectivee bean, tokisome; foMy foolish; mou, sq^; nonveam
new ; vieux, oH become bel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, before a none
masculine commencing with a vowel or an /^ mute; the last conso
nant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, Ex,
belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille.
7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, } 16 of the
Second Part of this grammar.
8. COVJUOATZON 07 THB PaXflXNT 07 TBS IlTDIOATZVB 0»
£111X9 TO ^>
Ami?
Artthim?
Is he?
bshe?
Ar€«€f
Are you 7
Arethey?
Are they?
RiaxmA of Examples.
Jeids,
Tnes,
nest,
SUeest,
Nous sommes,
Vousdtes,
Us sent, m.
EUessontf.
lam;
Sois-Jel
TkMtaet;
Es-tui
He is;
Estrfll
She is;
Estellel
We are;
Sommes nous 1
Etes Tous 1
You are;
'I%eyare;
Sent lis 1
T%eyare;
Soutellesi
Ares Tous ua gar^on diligent et une
flilediligentel
Hon gar^on est diligent, male ma
fille est paresseuse [R. 5.]
Cette coutume est elle aodenne 1
Gette coutume n'eet pas aadenne,
elle est nouvelle [B. 6.]
Votre plume /. est elle bonne ou
mauvaisel
Ma sosur est trte vive, [R. 6.]
Yotre maison est tiUe meiUeive que
la mienne 1
La maison de ma sceur n'est pas si
bonne que la vMra.
Hofoe yon a dSUgeiU bey and ndtk
gentgirl?
My boy is dUagent, bui my damgkim
is idle.
Is this custom andent 7
This custom is not anemU, itisnem.
Is your pen good or bad?
My sister is veryHvdy.
Is your house bdUr than msne?
My sister's honm is not S0 good M
yours.
Beau, bel, belle, hand^
Bon, m.gooi;
Content,-e, phased;
Chmvate, f. eraiMa;
Bame, £ lady ;
Xocrier, m. inkstaneL
Bxoellaiti-eb tKotOmti,
Ezx&oisx' 23;
FUle, f. daughter;
Habit, m. coat ;
Heureux,-8e, happy;
Id, here;
Meilleur, e. better;
Neuf,-ve, new ;
Panq[ihiie« n
Parasol, m. parasol ;
Petit,-e;jmaU;
Paresseux,-se, idle ;
Porcelaine, f. dUnmg
Que, than;
Vieux, vieille, old;
; Vif, Vive, quicks Uitly.
Digitized
by Google
1. Csita duM Mt elle eontentof 3. Non, Monuevr, ottto dftiM
ft'estpos eantente. 3. Votre fiUe est elle'vivef 4. Hon fils esiMs
vif ei ma fille eat paresBease. 6. N'a^t-elle pas tort? 6. Elle n'a
pasraisoxL 7. Votre couBine eat elle heareuae? 8. Oai, Madame, ell*
est bonne, beUeethenreaae. 9. A-t«Uedeaai&ia? 10. Oni, Monaienr,
eUeadespawntaetdeaamia. 11. A<*t-elle vnetrolie neuveetdevieiiz
aooliera 1 12. Elle a de vieux sottliers et une vieiUembe. IB. Votra
fr^re n'a441 pas mi bel habit [R. 6.] ? 14. H a «n bel habit et une
bomie erarate. 15. Avez Tona de bonne viande, Momieur ? 10. Pal
de la Tia^ide ezeellente. 17. Cette viande-ci eat elle meillenre q^e
eelleJif 18. Celled estmeQleare que oelle-lA. 19. Votre ami a4-ille
bel encrier de poreelame ? 20. Son enerier est bean^ mak 11 v'eat
paadepoTcelaiiie. 81. Qiietqii*mi a t-il fidmf aa-PenomieiiViiam.
83. Lea g^6niix sent ila ici t 34. Lea g6n6raiix et lea mar6cfaavz
aont ieL 25. Pai voa pafaaola «t Toa |MKra]^iiiee, «t eeiK de Toa
enfiudta.
ESCBRCIBB 24.
1. la your little aister pleased t 2. Yes, Madam, she is pleased.
3. Is that little girl handsome? 4. That little girl is not handsome,
bnt she is good. 5. Have yon good cloth and good silk ? 6. My
eloth sod* silk are here. 7. Is your sister happy? 8. My aister ia
good and happy. 9. Has that physician's sister friends? 10. No»
Madam, she haa no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat
is good but my cheese ia better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand^
some china inkstand? 14. He has a fine silver inkatand and a pair
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols ? 16. I have your
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome? 18. My
brother baa a handsome coat and an old silk eravat 19. Have you
relations and fnends ? 20, I have no relations but I have friends.
21. Is that handsome lady wrong ? 22. That handsome lady is not
wrong. 23. Have yon handsome china? 24. Our china is hand-
some and good. 25. It is better than yours. 26. Is not that little
girl hungry? 27. That handsome little girl is neither hungry nor
thirsty. 28. What is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re-
ktions nor friends. 80. Is this gold watch good? 31. This one ia
good, but that one is better. 32. Have yon it ? 33. I have it, but I
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mihe, I have
your mother's..
* The article, the possessive and the demonstrative a^JectlYO are i»>
pealed before every noon. Mon frdre et ma sob v, mf knihtr amd tUUr.
Digitized
by Google
64 hmwBOMXir.
LESSON XIV. LEgON XIV.
AOIUBEMENT OF ADJECTZVB8 — PLURAL OF ADJECTIYSa.
1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more aingoUi
nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun or nomi*
and is put in the plural.
Les arbres et lea fhiits sent beaux. T%e trees andfiuUs arejine,
Les fleurs et les plantes sent belles. T^ /Ufwers and platUs arejine.
Vos Jardins sont tr&s beaux. Yovr gardens are very fiM,
2. An a4jective qualifying two or more nouns of different genden
is put in the plural masculine (} 18.)
Mod frftre et ma soBur sont contents. Mf brother and tuUr are pleased,
lie canif et la plume sont bous. Tne penknife and pen are good.
8. The plural of the feminine of a4jectivea is invariably formed by
the addition of an s.
Yoos a*, ez de Jolies mateons. You kaoe pretty houses.
Oes demoiselles sont attentiTes. Those yowng ladies are aUenOve.
4. The plural of the masculine of adjectiyes is generally formed by
the addition of an s,
Gea 6colier8 sont attentift. 7%fse scholars are aiteniive.
Yos bois sont magnifiques. Yovr woods are magnificmi,
6. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu-
line.
Nos flmits sont mauvais. Our fruits are bad,
Vos oiseaux sont hideux. Yowr birds are hideous.
6. To the termination eauy x is added for the plural masculine.
Vos champs sont tris beaux. Yourfidds are very fine.
7. The termination a2 is generally changed into aux for the plural
Biaseuline [} 17 (3.)].
Les hommes sont 6gaux. Men are equal.
8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions, see } 17, Second Part
9. Prebbnt of the Indicative of btre, to de.
Negalive^^. Negatively and InterrogaHvdy,
Jenesuispas, lamnUf Ne suis-Je pas 1 AmlnU?
Tu li'es pas, Thou art not ; N'es tu pas 1 Art thou not )
Iln*c8tpas, He is not; N'estilpasi Is he not?
Slle u'cst pas, She is not: N'est elle pas ^ Is she not?
Nous ne sommes pas, We are not ; Ne sommes nous pas ? Are we not?
Vous n'^tes pas, You are not; N'dtes vous pas 1 Are you not?
Us ne sont pas m. Thjey are not; Ne sont lis pas rm. Are they naif
SUes ne sont pas f. T^ohcimI; Nesontellespas) £ Arethiyncif
Digitized
by Google
LBttOV ZIT.
BtoUM£ OF ExiMPLXS.
A-Teis Toot des Aooliers attentifti
Mcs Woollen et mes icoli&res lont
trhB attentift et trte studienz.
Ces demoiaeUet aont elles studi-
enaesl
EUes ne soot paa trta stadiexues.
Oes r^Ies sont elles gi^nirales 1
Ces prineipes soot gi6n6raiix.
Lean habillements sont superbes.
Avez Tous poor de ces chevauz
r6Uft1
Vo8 montres d'or tont ezcellentes.
Les mienDes soDt ellea meillearei
que lee rdtres 1
lies vMres soot meilleares qae les
Have you aUetUive Kkoiam ?
My scholars {male and femM) mt
very attentive and very stfudvf.a.
Are dose young ladies studious 7
They are not very studious.
A re those rules general 7
Those principles are general.
Their clothes are su^rb.
Are you afraid of those restive konu ?
Your gold watches are excdkni.
Are mine better than yours 7
Yours are better than mine
Souyent, often ;
Travail, m. labor i
TtU^very;
Utile, useful f
Velonn, m. velvets
Vif, re, quickf hvdy.
EXXRCISB 25.
Aer6able, agreeable; ManTals, e, badg
A1116, e, elder; Male, f. mule;
AUemaode, f. Cfcrmoii; Oisif, Te, idle;
Jamais, never ; Pantoufles t. sHppers \
iDduIgent, e, indulgent; Penoime, m. nobody;
Laine, f. toooly women; R6tif, ve, restive;
Maroqain, iil morocco;
1. Les chevaoz de notre ami sont ils r^tifs? 2. Ses chevaox ne
Bont pas r^tifs mais sea mules sont trds r^tives. 3. Les chevaox et
les mules de votre fr^re sont excellents. 4. Vos soenrs sont ellea
trds vives ? 6. Mes frdres et mes sceurs sont tr^s vifs. 6. Sont ils
vonvent oisifs t 7. Non, Monsieur, mes soeurs ne sont jamais oisivea.
9. Avez vous peur de votre fr^re ! 9. Non, Monsieur, je n*ai penr
de personne. 10. Ne sommes nous pas indulgents? 11. Vous ^tes
indulgents, et vous avez raison: 12. Ai-je vos livres? 13. Vooa ne
les avez pas, vous avez ceux de mon frdre ain^« 14. Ne les avez
vous pas ? 15. Je ne les ai pas. 16. Avez vous une bonne paire de
baa de laine ? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez vous
!e3 bonnes maisons ou les mauvaises? 19. Je n*ai ni les bonnes ni
les mauvaises, j^ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le travail est il agr4-
able! 21. Le travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avei vous mes
beaux souliers de maroquin T 23. Je n'oi pas vos beaux souliers de
moroquin, j*ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 24. Avez vous les
panLonfles de votre soeur, ou les miennes ? 25. Je n*£i ni les v6treb
111 celles de votre soeur, j'ai celles de TAllemande.
ExxRCisB 26.
1. Are your brothers and sisters very (Hen) quick 1 (Note, p. 680
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
^0 LMMpOJf XT,
9. My brothers are quick, but my litten are not qnieL 8.Hayeyo«
not two restive horses ff 4. No, bnt I have a restive mnle. 6. Have
yon not two good pairs of sOk gloves? 6. 1 have a good pair of
eotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves. 7. Are yon not afiraid
of your friends ? 8. No, Sir, I am never afraid of my Inends. 9. I
am afhud of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong? 11. lam right
12. Have yon my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip^
porsT 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers.
14. Are those ladies pleased T 15. Those ladies are pleased and they
are rig^t 16. Has the German lady your father's shoes or mine 1
17. She has neither his nor yours, she has my sister^s. 18. Has
your elder brother good houaes or bad ? 19. His houses are better
than yours and than mine.* 20. Are his houses old? 21. His
houses are old, but they sie good. 22. Have you them ? 23. No,
Sir, I have them not, I have no houses. 24. Have you my brother's
or my sister's ? 25. Your sister has hers and my mother's. 26. Are
your scholars attentive ? 27. My scholars are very attentive and v^
studious. 28. Are those Germsn ladies studious? 29. They are
very studious and very attentive. 30. Are you often wrong? 31.
Yes, Sir, I am often wrong. 32. Is labor agreeable ? 33. Yes, Sir,
labor is agreeable and useful. 34. We have them and you hav»
them not
LESSON XV. LBpON XV.
FLACB OF TBB ADJBCTIVX8. — ^BXLATXV|B PJ^ONOUif W.
1. The adjective in French, follows the noun much more fire*
quently than it precedes it [\ 85, (1.)]
Tons avesE des amis fiddles. Tou have faithful friends.
Ma Boeura des livres instructif^. My sister has instfudive books,
2. Those adjectives which generally precede the nouns, have beei
entioned [L. 8, R. 5.], and will be found [} 85, (11.)]
Nous avoDS de belles maisons. We have beautiful houses,
Yotre Jolie petite flile est studieuse. Your pretty Utile girl is studious,
3. The adjectives which are placed after nouns are : — 1st, All paib
ticiples, present and past, used a4jectively.
* Que meaning v^ich and pte ooi\inDCtion are never undcntood in
French, they must be repeated beibre every noun, pronoun and veitb
Bee L. 19, B. 1. ^Hee JEtnle 6 of next L.
Digitized
by Google
XiBBtOH XT. iV
Nodi sv«m ime hlftoiraiatireannta. We have mmintereftkig Uttagy,
Tool Kftm des enfknts polio. Ycu kave poUU ckitdttn,
4. 3d« All such as eiipress form, color, taste ; sueh as relate to
hearing and tooehing ; sach as denote the matter of vrhich an objeot is
ecmposed ; as also such as refer to nationality, or to anj defects of
tLebody. [}85,(4.)(6.)(6.)a.)l
Kos parents oot dee chapeaoz noixa. Our teUUians kave bku.k hate.
Vaaa a^ez des pommes aoaces. You kave sweet apples,
VoUk de la cire moUe. There is iofi wax.
Gette dame e^agnole a nneniluit Thai Spanish iady has aUmeehSd,
6. 3dy Afanoet all a^jectiTes ending in a2, oMe, i&2e, ique and if,
Oes hommesGb6ranx sont almfo. TlUm aberal iii«» are ttrnd,
Yoila nn esprit ralsonnable. Thai is a reasonable mind.
7oi]& nn esdave fugitif. T%aiis a fugitive dove,
6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to theit
position before or after the noon. [} 86.]
Un brave homme, a worthf maa, Un homme brave^ a brave fiura,
7. En ia used for the English words some or any, expressed er
understood, but not followed bj a noun; en has also the sense of
of ilf ff them, thereof , generally understood in Englisli senteneesi
particnlarly in answers to questions. [} 89, (17.) } 104, { 110|
<a.) (3.)]
Atcz tous des soullers de cuir 1 Have fou leather shoes?
J'ea aL I have same^ I have {pfthtm),
y otre fils en-a-t-il 1 Has yowr son awif 7
8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive signifiea*
tion (in a sentenee eontaining the pronoun en), must be preceded by
the preposition de in the same manner as if the noun were ezpreaeed.
[See R. 4. Lesson 8.]
Avez Tons de bonnes plumes 1 Have you rood pens?
Non, maia J'en al de mauvaiscs. No, but I lave had ones,
Utawt OF Examples.
Avez TODS de beaux Jardins 1
Oul, j*en ai de beaux. [R. 7.]
Votre fr^re n'a-t-U pas des souliers
noirsi
n n'en a pas, maia ma soeur en a.
K'a-t-elle pas auasl une robe
blanche 1
Out, elle en a unc.
Son, elle n'en a pas.
Qui en a une 1
Qitin*e«apas1
Have foufijie gardens 7
YeSj I have fine ones.
Has not four brother Madt shorn?
He has none, but txy sister heu some*
Has she not also a while dress 7
YeSj ske has one.
No^ she has none,
Whohasone?
WhahoM nam?
Digitized
by Google
i% 1X88 011 XT,
Has not a£ butcher fitA
Le biiQcher n trt-fl pas de ]a riande
fraiche 1
n en a, il n'en a pas.
B en a beanconp.
II n'en a gudre.
II en a deux livres.
He has sov^t^ he has none.
He has wiick {of U\
He has but Uu/e {of U).
He has two founds {of it).
ExsROlSB 27.
Amusant, e, amna^ ; B!Jon, m. jewel ; Laine, f. vhhA ;
Am^ricain, e, American ; Bianc, he, vihiU ; Mademoiselle, f. I^Hss ,
Anglais, e, English; Brave, brave, worthy s Monsienr, m. Sir^ Mf^
Arabe, AriUnan ; Gbftle, m. shawl ; Gentleman ;
Aubergiiste, m. innkeep- Coutean, m. knife ; Parent, dl relation t
erj Fran^ais, e, FVenchs Soldat, m. soldier g
Beaaconp, much, «UMiy;Gudre, UlUe, bid little i Terre, f. land.
Beige, Belgian ; Qoitare, f. guitar ;
1. Avez Y0U8 une bonne guitare? 3. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai una
guitore excellente. 3. Avez vous de bona habits ? 4. Oui, Madame,
j'ai de bona habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Voire mdre
li*a-t-elle pas un ch&le de sole t 6. Oui, Mademoiselle, elle en a un
de soie et un de laine. 7. Uaubergiste a-t-il de bons chevauz
anglais? 8. L'aubergiste a des chevaux anglais, fran^ais et
•rabea. 9. II en a de superbes. 10. L'ami de votro fr^re a-t-il dea
bijoux d'or? 11. Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 12. A-t-il aussi des bijoux
d'argent? 13. II en a aussL 14. En a-t-il beaucoupt 15. Non,
Monsieur, il n'en agudre. 16. Voire ami a-t-il des parents? 17*
Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 18. Ce Monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume
d'acier ou une belle plume d'or? 19. II en a une d'ocier et nous en
avons une d'or. 20. Le g^n^ral n'o-t-il pas de bons soldats? 21.
n en a de tr^s braves. 22. Les Am^ricains n*ont ils pas de bonne
terre? 28. Ils en ont d'ezcellente. 24. Le marchand a-t-il des cou«
teanx anglais ou fran^ais? 25. Les eouteaux du marchand ue sent
ni anglais ni fran^ais, ils sent beiges.
EXERCISB 28.
1. Has your brother Arabian horses? 2. Yes, Sir, he has some.
8. Has he handsome ones? 4. Yes, Sir, be has handsome ones.
5. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No, Miss, they are not
wrong, they are right 7. Have you a French shawl ? 8. Yes, Sir,
I have one, I have a handsome French shawl. 9. Has your innkeeper
your silver knife or mine? 10. He has neither yours nor mine, ha
bas liis sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian a good
guitar? 12. He has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has an ex«
eellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books? 15. Yes, Sir
he has two. 16. Has the general French or Arabian horses! 17
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LXBBON ZYI. 09
Ho has neither Frenoh nor Arabian horsea, he has English horses.
18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has tome. 20.
Has the Englishman any ? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has
joor friend's sister a good steel pen ? 23. My friend's sister has
one, bat my relations ha^e none. 24. Are yon not wrong. Sir f
25. Yes, Madam, I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English? 27.
Ko, Sir, they are Belgian. 28. Have yon relations ? 29. I have
two, and they are here (ici). 80. Has the Eaglish butcher meatf
81. Yes, Sir, he has much. 82. Has ha much money 9 83. He has
Imt little. 84. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 85. Yes,
Sir he has good ones.
LESSON XVL LE9ON XVL
PLAN OF THE EXERCISES m COMPOSING FRENCH.
Hitherto the stndent has been occupied exolusivrely in acquiring
fiusta, forms and principles, and in transiatinff^ by the aid of these,
French into English and again English into French. Following still
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the jiigher business of
endeavoring to eompow in French. With this intent, let him take
some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 267,
and seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The
words taken from the lists- are to be used merely as things suggeat-
ive of thought The^brm which, in any given case, the sentence
ffisy assame, should be determined by the models found in the Le^
sons preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mas-
tered in the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a
models on which he may at pleasure build other constructions of hia
own. Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that
is, shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms pecu-
liar to a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of tpeahing €md
urUing that langaage well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along
in the ordinary course of tlie Lessons, should frequently be found
applying hb knowledge in the way of actually composing independ-
ent sentences. In this way, he will soon acquire a fiioility and ao«
curacy in the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all*
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
LXeeOH TTI
COUVASOBOS.
1. A^ectives and adrerbs are alwaya compared Ui Freiidh, |M
lliey often are in English, by means of adverbs.
Fhis bean, pins eonTeat» More beatOffiil, o/toMr.
2. Thefint part of the comparison for the degree in quality ia
made by :
Auflfli, at, or as much;
Plus, more;
Pas aossi, pas si, no^ m>| na< as;
Mx3iaM,le$8;
Anssi grand, a* iaJL
Pas aossi grand, no< ae iaJL
These adTerbs come almost always be-
'ftwe an a4i«<^v^ ^ partialis, or an ad-
verb,
Fiua grand, foOer.
Moins grand, Uee taU, not ae taXL
8. For tiie degree in quantity we nse:
Antant de, ae mu^ a» many;
Plus de, more;
Vea fntant dfi^noiae m^eh or of moinr/
1|[oiBS de^ keej fewer ;
Autant de Uvre^ w many J>Qok8,
Pins de oeuz-ci, more of ifieae.
Ooming almost always bsftre a
nonn, an acyeotive nsed *8td^
stantivdy, era possessiTe or de-
monstrstiye pronoun*
Autant de bons, ae many good pimsl
Moins des miens, leee qfnine.
4. The eecond part of the comparison is expressed by :
Qoe^ Mf than : when it does not precede a word expressing a quantity
compared with the word following the first adverb of the comparison.
Autant de livres que votre fr^,
Tout antant d'or que sa soeur,
Plus diligent que sa soeur,
As many hooks as your hroffier.
Quite ae much gold as his sister.
Afore diligeat than hie sister.
Qoe de^ <w, thorn: before a word expressing a quanUty compared witli
that expressed by the word following the adverb of the first part
Plus de livres que de malsons^ More books than houses,
Autant d'or que d'argent, As much gold as silver,
J^ai tout antant de auore que de Jhaoequ^iptjuBtjasmuGhougaroB
ca% coffee.
RteUMft OT ExAMFLia.
Avea-voas autant de livres angli^
que de livres italiens ?
J'en ai tout autant
J'ai autant de ceux-<n que de ceux-
a
B est anssi henreux que vous.
Avea Tona phis d'astfettea qua de
plats?
Have you as many Bn^iOi hooks e
Italian hooks t
I have Just as many.
Ihom as many of then as qf those.
Be is as hojppy as you.
HMfe votf m/oreplties fksm d^keef
Digitized
by Google
L9980V ZVI.
61
J'ld Bins de oenx-cl oae de ceoz-li.
Bst-fl plus compUuaant qae ses
Aiftresl
Le FraiifttB a-t-fl moioi de Ugmnes
qne de frnite 1
J1 a moixis de liyxes que de manu-
•crits.
n n'a pas aotant de cenx-ci que
de oeux-Ui 1
Ed a-t-U moioB que rotre fVirel
II ec a toQt antaat
h he more obliging than his irotktn f
Has tki Prmckmon fewer vegHmUa
than fruits 7
He has fewer books ihan manuscripts.
He has net so ffUMif of tkem «s t/
those.
Has he less (of them) than wow
brother?
EXBRCISX 29.
Fer, m. iron / ManiiBcrit, m.
Framaee, m. cheese ; script ;
Hollandais, m. I>u/cA-Maricbal,m.d^adtjiitaft/
ffum ; Modefiie, f. modesibif ;
Italien, ne, RaUan ; Boie, f. sOk ;
Bteii,e,Mf«;
Conrage, m. eowage ;
Dayantage,* more ;
Drap, m. cloth;
Snneinl, m. enemf^s
!l^pagnol, e, Spaniard ; Jardin, mi garden ; Trte, very;
Xatampe, f. eng^ofoing ; Hantean, m. c^ooA; Verre, m. glass,
1. £te8 vous aassi content que votre fr^re ? 2. Je snia ausai con-
tent que votre fr^re. 3. Votre p^re e-t-il autant de courage que de
modestie? 4. II a moins de modeatie qne de courage. 6. Le
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrita que d'eatampea? 6. II a plus de
cellea-ci que de ceux-U. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis?
8. n a plus de ceuz-ci que de ceux-lk. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que
de fromage? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-U.
11. Le marechal a^t-il plus de chevaux que votre frdre? 12. II en a
plus que mon p^re et plus que mon fr^re. 13. N'avez vous pas
froidt 14. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai pas froid, j'ai trds ehaud. 15. Avez
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve-
lours bleu. 17. N^avez vona pas plus de verres que d'aaaiettcs?
18. Nous en avona davantage.* 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer
que d'acier? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ei que de celui-ldu
21. II a moins de celui-ci que de celui-l&. 22. Les Hollandaia ont ik
de beaux jardins? 23. Leurajardins sent tr^s beaux. 24. I^ea
jardins des Italiens sont ploa beaux que cenx dea Eapagnola.
EXERCISB 30.
1. Are you more attentive than your sister! 2. 1 am not so atten-
tive as your brother. 8. Have you more courage than my brother!
4 I have quite a8 much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as
von! 6. He hass more of the latter than of the former. [L. 10, R. 6.]
* Davantage meanasMrs. It can never be placed Mbce a noon; it anqr
be used histead of plus, at the end of a iwitwwfc
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
6d LK 88 OH XVII.
7. Has he more moddsty than the Spaniard! 8. He has more. 9. Hie
has more than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, Sirl
11. No, Sir, hut I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman
more cheese than the Italian? 13. He has more cheese and more
money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk? 15. I
have more of this than of that. 16. Who has more friends than the
Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as mach
of your money as of his? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 20.
Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks? 21. We have more of
these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks? 23. Yes, Sir, I
have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you
more plates than dishes? 25. I have not more plates than dishes;
hut I have more glasses than plates. 26. Are you* not very cold!
27. No, Sir, I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter
wood? 29. Yes, Sir, he has wood, money, cheese and meat 30. Who
has more money than the carpenter? 31. The Dutchman has more»
82. Who has more engravings than hooks? 33. The hookseller has
more of these than of those. 34. Are you as attentive as your
friend! 35. I am more attentive than mv friend.
LESSON xvn. LEgoN xm
GOMPARISON, — ENCORE, AC.
1. The superlative absolute is formed by placing tr^s, fort, or bieii»
very, before the adjective. [} 14, 11.]
Ces chandeliars sent trds utiles. 7%tse candlesticks are very usefnL
Notre tailleor est bien obligeant. Our tailor is very obliging.
2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article le, U^
lee, to a comparative. [{ 14, (9.)]
Votre neveu est le plus savant de tons. Your nephew is the most learned ofoU,
3. Encore is used in French in the sense of morct some more^ «Nf
f?ior«, stilly — used affirmatively and interrogatively, hut not nega--
tivdy.
Avez Tons encore du caffi 1 Have yo^i any more coffee 7
J'ai encore du caiS. / have more (or some more) cofie,
J'en at encore. / hav^ some more^ or some left.
4. Ne — plus is used in th£ tense of not any more, and no more^ m
Je n'ai plus de Hvres. / have no more books.
Je n'ai pint de choci^tat. / have no choctiaU 1^.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LSBBON ZTIZ*.
M
ft. No— gn^re means but little^ hUfno^
Je n'ai gndre d'amis.
Je n*en ai gu&re.
6. The pronounft moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of tie nomi
native pronoans jts to, 11, lis, after the que of a comparison, and when
the verb is understood.
/ have but few friends.
J hem kulfew—bul Utile.
Vons ^tes plus beureuz que moi
Vous aTos plus de m^rite que lui.
You are happier than /.
Y<m have mare merit than he.
R£snM£ OF Examples.
^ >tre marchand est bien obligeant
T.>iU le meilleur de ces gar^oos.
Nous avails esoofe des amis.
Vous avez encore du cr6dit.
Avez vons encore une piastre 1
Le ma9on a-t-il encore des briquesi
n n'en a plus.
n n*a plus de briques.
n n'en a guire.
n n'en a plus eahre.
Je n*ai gndre de livres.
Avez vous plus de courage que lull
II a inoins de courage que moi.
Combien de p!at.tres avez vous en-
core 1
Your merchant is very cNigtng,
That is the best of those boys.
We have some more (or still) friends.
You have stili (or yH^ credit.
Have you a dollar lejt?
Has the mason more bricks?
He has no 7nore—he has none left.
He has no more bricks.
He has but few.
He has but few left.
I have but few books.
Have you more courage than he?
He has less courage tSan /.
How matiy dollars have you stUL or
have you left?
EzxRCisX 81.
Connect, e, correct; Neveu, m. nephews Soeur, f. sister t
Qitdit, m. credit s ^ihcOj f. niece ; Qa]Bde, t salad i
Beaucoup, muchf NouveUes, f. netosg Tante, f. auiUi
Boyer, Bayer; Quel, vdiich^ which one; Tons, aU;
Pictionnaire, m. dtction- Savant, e, learned; Villo, f. lawn, city,
ary:
1. Votre dictionnaire est il tr^s correct ? 2. D est plus correct que
celui de Boyer. 3. Votre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tons.
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces.jardins? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de
tons lea jardms de la ville. 6. Avez vous encore de Targent? 7. Je
n*ai plus d*argent»mais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons nous encore de
Ir saiade? 9. Nous n'en avons pins. 10. Nous n'avons plus de
Tiande. 11. Qui en a encore? 12. Mes frdres et mes sceurs en out
encore. 13. En avez vous encore beaucoup? 14. Je n'en ai pins
gii^re. 15. Votre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre ni^ce? 16.
£Ue n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Votre neveu est il plus savant que
TOtre niScel 18. U n'est pas aussi savant qn'elle. 19. Elle est plus
•avante que luL 20. Avez vous encore froid ? 21. Je n'ai plus froid,
j*ai bien chaud. 22. N'avez vous plus de nonvellest 28. Je u'an ai
plna. 24 £s |.ves voua beaneonpt 26. Je n'eo ai garret.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LSSSOV ZTI1I«
EXSROISB 82.
1. Has your brothflr a yerj good dictionary t 2. His dietionary k
not very eoirect 8. Haa your Ikther more courage than he t 4. lie
has maeh mora eonrage than your nephew. 6. Have your brothera
eradit ? & They have bnt little credit, bat they have money. 7. la
our aunt obliging? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you atill
ooke, pens, and paper? 10. 1 have no more books, but I have still
good pens and excellent English paper. 11. Who has still paper?
12. I have no more, but my brother has some mor*;. 18. Have you
any news, Sir? 14. No, Madam, I have none to-day. 16. Have yon
as much wood as my brother's son ? 16. 1 have more than you or he.
17. Are you still wrong? 18. No, Sir, I am no longer (plus) wrong,
I am right 19. Are your sisters still hungry! 20. They are neither
hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 21. Is your nieee as
learned as he? 22. She is more learned than he and (que) his aunt
28. Have you no news, Sir? 24. No, Madam, I have no more newa
25. Who haa news? 26L I have no more. 27. Have you them alii
28. Yes, Sir, I have them alL 29. Has your aunt mueh of it left!
80. She has but little more of it 31. Has your brother any more
English horses ? 32. He has no more. 83. He has two more. 84i
Have you a handsome French shawl left? 35. 1 have no more French
shawls, but I have an English one.
k
LESSON xvm. LEgoN xvm.
1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, haw much^ hoto many; tro/i
iM> mueh, too numy; beaucoup, muekj many; assez, encugh ; pen, liu
tl^tfew; gudre, hut little, few; and the word pas, meaning tio, when
coming before a noun or an a4iective, are followed by the propose,
tion de,
Combien de flenn avez vous 1 Bow manyfiawers have yoi?
J'ai beaucoup de fleura. / have manyfiowers.
VouB avez trop de loisir. You ham too miuk Uisute,
Votre soeur a assez de temps. Yowr sister has time enough.
2. The adverb bien, used in the sense of beaucoup (muck^ niimyy) m
fidlowed by the prepoaition da, joined t« or blended with the artiok
U»la,lea. [L. 6.] '
Tons avea blen de Is cemplaii tnce^ Tiw hofoe muek kln^hiao,
Ble a btea doa amia. AM hm mrnm^frimis.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
|.|l##0#;^T^I,L
t. Qnelqua thorn, towrtfcwyyiwty Oliy [L % 6.\ and iiwi,'iio<liiy,
Ml «ny (Ui^y take ife before an a^jaetiTa.
Votre ami a qnelqiia dioae d'agr^ Yimrfrimd has mwMnMg jUmmn^
able.
ATesTouaqnelqiiechoeedabon} ffave you 4imf iking gwd?
Je n'ai rien de bon. / kavi lutkimg (nai any tM^g)jgfm4'
4. Quel, m., qaeUe,/) qnela, i». p., qQattea,/.p., are need inCaan*
gatively for whiek or what before a noon.
QaeUeaerrietteaveayoQal WkatcftwkUknofHnJUneyou?
^oeUes boQEMa TOtre ami apt*fl1 WkaifmrMtkasyomrfiimd?
6. Qne ia need for toto before a verb.
Qu'aTesTOiul What U ike nuUUrwUkytm?
6. Leqael, m^ laquelle, /, leaquela, m. p., leaqnellea, /. p., are
need abaolntely for the word wKichy not followed by a noiii^ and
equivalent to vikick one^ uihick one*.
Lequel Totre fils a-t-il 1 Which {one) has yaw ftm 7
Lesquelles ayons nous 1 Which {ones) have we 7
7. Qnelqnea is nsed before a plnral noun for afew^ aonie; quelqnea
nna, m., qnelqnea nnes,/, are nsed absolutely, with the same mean
Va^ — Plusieura means Meveral^ and ia invariable.
La Panois art-il qnelqnea pommea ? Has the Dane a few offkff
U en a qnelqnes unes. He has a few,
n en a plnsienrs. He has several
BteUMt OF EXAMPLKB.
Combien de poirea aves vooal
Nons avons beauconp de poirea.
Kens en avons beanconp.
Nons avons assea de cerises.
Noos n'en avona pas assea.
Vons n'avex gain de paches.
Votre Jardinier a bien des p^ches.
N'avez vons pas de p6cbes 1
J'ai beanconp de pAchea et d'abri-
cots.
Le boucher a-t-fl qnelqne choae de
bon.
D a qnelqne chose de ban et de
manvais.
n n'a rien de bon.
QaeUes pinres /. avea vonsl
lions avons oelles de votre amnr.
Quel habit m. avea vons 1
Nons avons celui dn taillenr.
Qn'avez vons de bon 1
Leqnel avea voua 1
tiesqnels votre frare a-t-fl 1
raidnfrnitmArl
How many pears have you ?
We have many pears.
We have mawy [of them).
We have cherries enough.
We have not enough {of iktm).
You hone hi few peaehes.
Your gardener has many jwocJUa.
Have you no peaches 7
I haive mamy peaches and 4
Has the butcher aifiy thing goad f
He hat JOWUthinM good and AaA
He has not aniu thing (nothsng)goai
What cft whuh ^ears have your
We have your sisUr's.
Which or whal coat hai9eyou7
We have the tailor's.
What have you good?
Which (one) have you?
Which lones) has yomrhmHtrf,
JhaiveripefrviiL
Digitized
by Google
66
liBtsov zrxxi.
EZBBCXBB 33.
AMoot, m« c^cfft ; Fleur, tfiower; Pommes, t tifjph t
AnaxtAj m. pineapple ; JAgvLmej m, vegetable ; Pomme-de-teire, f. f»>
Beurre, m. buUeri Magasin, m. roarehouse; tato;
Cerise, f. ckemj; Oncle, m. wnde; Pnme, f plum;
tpicier, m. grocer; Poire, f. pear; Sucre, m. 5ii^f«r/
tranger, e, foreigi\ ; Poivre, m. pepper ; T W, m. Ua.
Jardin, m. garden ;
1. Combien de pommea-de-terre votre fr^re a-t-il ! 3. II n'en a
pas beaucoup. 3. L'^picier a^t-il beaucoup de sucre dans son ma-
gasin ? 4. U n'en a gu^re, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivie.
5. Votre jardinier a^t^il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. II a plus de cerises
que de prunes. 7. Les prunes sent elles meilleures que les cerises t
8. Les cerises sont meilleures que les prunes. 9. Avez yous quel-
ques poires m(ires? 10. Nous en avons quelques unes, nous avous
aussi beaucoup d*ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a^t-il quel*
que chose de bon dans son jardinl 12. II a quelque chose de bon
et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles fleurs. 14. Avez
70US des fleurs 6tiangdres ? 15. J'en ai quelques unes. 16. Les-
quelles avez vous 1 17. J'ai celles de votre frdre et celles de votre
jardinier. 18. N'avez vous pas aussi les miennes? 19. Non, Mon-
sieur, je ne les ai pas. 20. Qui en a beaucoup? 21. Personne n'en
a beaucoup. 22. Ten ai quelques unes. 23. Avez vous assez de
th6 ? 24. J'en ai assez. 25. J'en ai plus que lui.
Exercise 34.
1. Has your gardener many vegetables? 2. Yes, Sir, be has many.
8. How many gardens has he? 4. He has several ^rdens and seve-
ral houses. 5. Have you many books? 6. I have but few, but my
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother? 8. He has a good
eloth coat 9. Has your uncle many peaches? 10. He has but few
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has the
tailor? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth and silk. 13. What
silk has your friend the merchant? 14. He has a great deal (6eati<
emip) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any
thing good *n {dans) his garden? 16. He has many pineajplca.
17. Has he more vegetables than fruit? 18. He has more of this than
of those. 19. Has your uncle many pears and cherries ? 20. He has
a few, and he has many apples and plums. 21. Have you a few?
32. I have still many, but my brother has no more. 23. Which
peaches has he? 24. He has large (grosses) peaches. 25. Whkh
(one^) have you? 26. I hav) the best peaches. 27. Has the mo^
Digitized
by Google
Lxseov SIX
67
4iaiit anythiii^ goo« In his warehonseT 38. He has nothing good in
bis warehouse, hut he has something good in his garden. 39. How
many potatoes has the foreigner? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he
good vegetables? 33. He has good Tegetables. 83. Is he right or
wrong? 34. He is right, bat you are wrong. 85. He has neither
this book nor that» he has the bookseller's.
LESSON XIX.
LEgON XDL
1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, tokiehy that, and the eonjune*
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, aud must be repeated he-
fore every verb depending on them. [} 109. j
Lea crayons que j'ai sent meilleurs The pencils (wkieh) I have, are better
que ceux que vous avez. than those {which) you have,
3. Ne, before the verb^ and que after it, are used in the sense of
Je n*ai qu*un ami. / have biU one friend,
3. L'un et I'autre, means hoih ; les nns et les autres, these and
thm, the latter and the farmer. [(41,(11.)]
Yoos avez Tun et I'autre. You have both,
4. Cardikal and ordinal numbers as par as twentt. [§ 22, 23.]
First,
Second,
Fouarth,
Fi/i'
Cardinal.
Ordinal
Un, m. I ne, f.
One,
Premier, m. e,/.
Beux,
Two,
Second, m. e,/.
Pcuxidme,
Trois,
Three,
Troisiime,
duatie.
Four,
Quatriime,
Cinq,
Five,
Cinquidme,
Six,
Six,
Sixidme,
Sept,
Seven,
Septi^me,
Huit,
Eight,
Huitiftme,
Ncuf,
Nine,
Ncuvidme,
Dix,
Ten,
Dixidme,
Onze,
Eleven,
Onziftme,
Dowjo,
Tteelve,
Douzidme,
Troize,
Thirteen,
Treiziimc,
Qnatorze
Fourteen,
Qaatorzi6me>
&•
Fifteen,
Sixteen,
Quinzidme,
Seizidme,
Diz-sept,
Seventeen,
Dix-septiime,
DU-huit,
Biz-neuf;
Eighteen,
Dlx-huiU^me,
Nineteen,
Dix-neuvidme,
VIngt,
TSoenty.
Vingti^me,
Seventh,
Eighth,
Ninth,
ThUh,
Elevcjith,
Ticelfth,
Thirteenth,
Ftmrteenth,
Fifteenth,
Sixteenth,
Seventeenth,
Eighteenth,
Nineteenth,
Twentktk.
by Google
Digitized
tB i.»M4>jr xxx.
(L Tbe flwdiiud nmnben jve nsfld* in Frenoh} for Iha day of Um
.month, except the ^rst, lor which the ordinal number premier ia
•ubstitnted : —
Le dix aoi^t» le dnq jnUI«b, The Untk o/Augud, tk^JlfiM afj^,
Le premier dn moii prochein, TheJirU of next mtnUk,
6. The verb avoir, to Imm^ ia aaed actively, [{ ae, (1.)] for the d^
of the month. The verb dtre may alao be used: —
Qnel Jonr dn mois avons nona 1 Wh/U da/if of the month isUf
Nous avons le vinft JtistJie tioeniieih.
O'esta^jonrdlmilediz. TYhday is the tenth.
7. Before the word onze, the article le or la ia not elided. [{ 146.] :—
Nona avoDs le onae de d6cembre. We have {U is) the IIU of December,
RteUHft OF EZAHPLXS.
Xi'onvrier art-il lea ontils qne voiis Has the workwum the tools which jvm
aveal have?
Les maisons que J'ld sont elles anssi Are the houses fohich I have as good
bonnes que ceHes que vona avea 1
Combien de francs avez voos 1
Jen-ai qne dix francs, mais men
ftire en a plus de vingt.
Avons nons le qnatoiae da mois 1
Non, Monsienr, nons n'avons qne le
onze.
Lequel de ces denz volumes avea
vous'?
J'aii'unetrautre.
Avez vous la premitoe place on la
deuxidme 1
J'ai la premiere, et mon frtee a la
as those iohieh you have ?
How many francs have you?
I have only ten francs, fnU my brother
has more thorn twenty Mthem),
Js it the fourteenth day of the
mon^?
No, Sir, It is ontiy the
WhiA of those two vehma have you?
Ihavehoth,
Have you the first or the second
place?
I have the first, amd my brother hat
deuxidme. I the second.
EXSROISB 35.
Ai4onrd*hui,'(<M2ay; F6vrler, m. F^Aruary; Ontll, m. toolt
Canelle, f. ctiMkim^n ; Franc, m.A-anc ; Onvrage, m. i00rlr/
Centime, m. centime — Histoire, fAis^ory; Oeuvres, f. tcorlu;
the idOth part of a Italien, m. Italian i Place, f. place;
franc i Kilogramme, m. kilo' Q,'aBxt,m. quarters
Oombien, how much, how gramme— about two Septembre, m. Bepitm^
many; pounds; oer; ^
Oravate, f erarati Menuisier, m. joiner; Volume, m. vokMm.
Demi, half: Housseline, f. muslin ;
1. Le cheval que vona avez est il bon? % U est n\einenr que ceim
qne vona avea et qne eelnidenotre ami. 8. Combien d^enfiuits avei
vona? 4. Je n*en ai qn'nn, maie lltalien en a pins que moL 6. Avona
Dona le dix aeptembret Q. Non, Monsieur, none avona le nenf
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
fiifrier. 7. 4vm voiis ma eimTate de tote ou mft cnTate de rnomt^
liiief & Twl rone et raatra. 9. At«z toub huii kilognuuDM d«
Munelle? 10 Non, MoiMffenr, je n*en ai qo'iui demi kilognattme. U.
Combien de fimoea avez vona, Moriaieur ? 12. Je D'ai qu'im.demi frano,
maia mon ami a nn firanc et demf 13. Votire soiir a^t-elle vingt cinq
eentimesf 14. Oiri, Monsieur, elle a un quart de frane. 10. N'ayona
Bona paa le premier aoftti 16. Non, Monaienr, nona avona le six sep
tembre. 17. Est-ce anjourd*hai le diz ? 18. Non, Monsieur, o'est to
onze. 19. Votre fi^re a-t-il la premiere place? 20. Non, Monsieur,
Daladixidme. 21. Votre menuisier a-t-il beaucoup d'outilsl 22.
Ooi, Monsieur, il en a beaucoup. 28. Get ouvrage a-t-il dix volumea f
24. Non, Monsieur, il n*en a que neuf. 25. J*ai le sizidme volume
dea oeuTrea de Moll^re et lo premier volome de llilatoire de Fnmea
de Michelet
EzzBOiax 80.
1. la that cinnamon good! 2. That cinnamon ia better than youia
and your brother^a. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day T
4. It ia the sixth. 6. Haa your father twenty francs T 0. No, Sir, he
baa only aiz Ihmca fifty centimes. 7. How many yolnmea haa your
woric ? 8. It haa many, it haa fifteen. 9. Haa the joiner read Qu) the
•eeond Yolume of MJchelet's history of France ? 10. Yea, Sir, he haa
read the second volume (of it). 1 1 . Haa your fHendiMoli^re's workil
12l He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have yon my cloth coat
or my velvet eoatl 14 We have both. 16. We hav» this and that
16L How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes:
18. How many centimea has the merchant? 19. He haa twenty-six.
20. Have yon the third or the fourth place? 21. I have neither the
third nor the fourth, I have the tentii. 22. Are you not aahamed to^
day t 28. No, Sir, I am not ariiamed, but I am afraidL 24. Hare yon
aqoarterofafWmct 25. No, Sur, but I have half a fhme. 36: la
it tibe aizth of July? S^T. Ko, Sir, it ia the fourth of Muwh.
28. Haa yow node aix ohildren? 29. Noi Sir, be haa only one
8a Have you ten kilogiammea of meat? 31. I have only five kilo
granunesb 82. Is the butcher's meat good ? 33. It (eOe) ia not vei>
good. 84. Hoif many kilogramuea have yon (of it)? 85 I hM*
•oly tw«H bnt my hiother haa fouv.
Digitized
by Google
To LBSfOV zx.
LESSON XX. LEgON XX.
1. For the time of Uie day, the verb dtre, is used anipersonallj n
French, in the same manner as the verb to be is used in English foi
tiie name objecL The word heure, sing, heures, plur. represents
the English expressions, dcUxkf or time, and must always be ez
pressed*
Quelle heure est ill Whai o*dock {tims) iiii?
II est une heure. II is one o^clock.
n est dix heures. It is tm^ it is ten o'clock,
d. Midi is used for twelve o^cJock in the day, and niinuit, for mid'
raghty or twelve at night, Douza heures is never used except in the
sense of twelve hours.
EstUmidil Estilminuiti IsUnoon? bUmidnigkt?
3. Et quart, et demie, [( 84, (2.)] answer to the English expre^
lions, a quarter^ half-past^ after, &>c
n est neuf heures ei quart It is a mtarter after nine.
n est midi et demi. It is half after twelve.
n est une heure et demle. It is ha^ after one.
4. Moins uu quart, moins vingt minutes, answer to the English
expressions, a quarter beforej twenty minutes before, Slo.
XL est diz heures moins nn quart It wanis a quarter of ten,
II est neuf heures moins dix mi- It is ten minutes be/ore nine.
nntes.
I
6. The word demi, preceding the word heure, does not vaiy
Placed after it, it is variable. [} 84, (2.)]
Une demi heure. Ealfan kawr.
Une heure et demie. An kour and a kalft
6. The verb avoir, is used actively [} 48, (3,) (8,)] in Freneh in
peaking of age, and the word an, year, is always expressed.
Quel Igo avez vous 1 How M are you? 1 e., R'to ^ge
haveyou?
J'ai plus de vlngt ans. lam more than twenty.
7. Plus de, moins de, are used for mare than, less dusn, before a
number.
Avoos nous plus de diz metres de Have wemt*retkan tenmetres of HUs
oette toUc d'Hollande 1 EoUand {ffoUand Unen) f
Tcfos en avei moins desizauneB. You have less than sixelUofiL
Digitized
by Google
KX.
71
RteuMft or EzAMPLifl.
n *.'•»! p«s encore denz henres.
Est il OHO lieure et demie 1
U est midi et quart ou midi etdemi.
U est huit heureft moins xax quart
Qr»\ ige Totre ills a-t-ill
U D'a qoe dix-huit ana.
Votre beau-fr5re nVt-ilpasplna de
diz-neuf ans 1
Ma belle aceur n'a pas mollis de dlz-
buit ans et demi.
Bst il plus de diz heures d votre
montrel
n n'est que neuf benres d mon
borlofi;e.
Totre fits est il plus Ig6 qne le
mienl
n est plus Jeane que le T6tre.
Itisnoiyei two c^ctcek,
2s il half'Tpaal one 1
His a guarUr or kalf-patt i
II wants a quarter of eight.
How old is your son ?
He is onhf eighteen years old.
Is not your brother-in-law more tkem
nineteen years old?
My siMer-iurlaw isnotlessthan eigkf>
teen years and a half.
Is it more than ten o'clock by yom
watch?
It is only nine by my dock*
Is your son older than mine?
He is yownger than yowru
ExxRCisB 37.
A^, e, olds Cela, that ; Jour, m. da/y ;
Anne, f. eU ; Cinquante, fifty ; Maintenant, now ;
Bean-Mre, m. ^0<A<r- Cousin^^rmam, m./rit Mars, m. AfarcA ;
in-laws cousins Mfttre, m. metre^ a
Bean-fils, m. son-in-laws Enfknt, m. child s French measure ahtni
Beau-pdre, m. faJQwr-xn- F6yrier, m. February ; ikree FVenrk feet g
laws Korlogo, t. dock s Mow, m. months
Belle-m&re, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cat- Rnban, m. ribbon s
laws icos Tvrd,t€Ues
Belle^soeur, f. sister-u^Jeuod^yowngs Yerg^, t. yard,
laws
1. Votre beau-frdre est il plus ftg6 que le mien ? 3. Le y6tre est
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel ftge a votre belle-m^re t 4. Elle
a pr^s de cinquante ans. 6. Quelle heure est il maintenant I 3.
n est six heures pass^cs. 7. £tes vous certain de cela? 8. Oui,
MoDsieor, j*en suis certain. 9. Est il plus de deux heares d votre
montre? 10. II n'est que midi it ma montre. 11. Avez vous plus
de cinq ans, mon enfant? 12. Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 13,
Avez vous plus de six verges dMndienne? 14. Pen ai moins de trois
mdtroe. 15. Combien d'aunes de ruban votre bean-pire o-t-il ? 13.
D D*a gnire de ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Esl il mid(
moins un quart ? 18. II est plus tard, Monsieur, il est midi et quark
19 Quel jour du mois avons nous ? 20. Nous avons le six octobre*
SI N*est-ce pas le huit fevrier que...? 33. Non, Madame, c'estlehufi
BiaTSb S3. Combien de jardins a votre cousin>germain ? 34» H n'c^
i qu'nn, mais il eat trds beau. 35. D en a pliu de dix.
Digitized
by Google
It irftfoTiT i'i'i.
St.
1. How old i»7oar brothoMo^Uiw? SL He is fifty ymn oU. 3l
It your tiBter-in-UW older than mine? 4. No, Sir, my rf8CeNi]i;-Uii^
is younger than yours. 6. Is your son twenty-five years old t 6.
No, Madam, he is only sixteen. 7. What day of the month have we
to-day t 8. We have the eleventh. 9. Have yon the twentieth vol-
nme of Chateaubriand's works? 10. No, Madam, we have the
eleventh. 11. What o'clock is it, Ski 13. It is only twelve o'cloek.
18. Is it not later? * 14. It wants a quarter of one. 16. It is a quar-
ter after five. 16. How many yards of this holland (ioUe J^HdU
lande^ f.) have you 1 17. I have ten ells and a halil 18. I have six
metres of it, and sixteen yards of Italian silk. 19. Is your mother-
in-law younger than your father-in-law? 30. She is younger than
he. 31. Are you twenty years old? 33. No, Sir, I amonlynine>
teen and a hal£ 38. Are you sure (si^r) that it is ten o'cIocIe. 34.
Yes, Madam, I am sure of it 35. Is it twenty minutes of ten ? 36
No, Sir, it is a quarter before twelve (midi), 37. How many houses
have you ? 38. I have only one, but my sister^m-law has two. 39.
Have you niine (f.) or yours ? 30. I have neither yours nor mine, I
have your son-in-law's. 81. Has your mbtheiwin-law five yaids of
that printed oaUeo? 83. She hato only twy> yaids of it 83. What
o'elock is it by (d) your watch? 84. It is half-past fo^ by oty
watfih. 85. It is more than seven o'clock by mine (d la tmenne).
LESSON iXL LEgON XXL,
THB rOUB OONJUaATlbNS OF YSRB8.
r. The four dassee or conjugations, into which the French veitw'
anr divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the In*
fidftlve [{ 44]. The first conjugation etads in er ; as chauter, to stig ;
doHher, to gitt; parler, tb speak; chercheir, to seek
Hie second conjugation etids in ir ; as, ch6rir, tb cheHsk ; puilir, tb^
yanXHih; lAnnir, to provide; finir, toJbvidL
rhe termfaiation of the infinitive of the regular verbs of the thM*
ennjtxgation, is Bvoa ; as, devoir^ u> owe^; recevofa*, fo r teem; that of
ihe irregular verbs itrozR, as vtdoir, to he worth.
TUe fontth conjifgatSeti endar in sr : aa, reiid^ tb render; fbn^
t0 9tilk; tendre, to MtNttJt; vendre, to tdt
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LBSftOM XXV
n
% A iwb pnMdid by another verb (otber thaQ tlie MndUariit
•?oir and Atre), or by a preporition (other than en), is pat in the praaeni
of the infinitive.
n Ta trayaOIer on lire, Ht is going io vmk tr to rtad,
8. In French, verbs are often connected with others by prepoaitiona
not anawering literally to those which accompany the same verba in
English. They also often come together without prepositions. The
ctaduit wiU find in { 139, and the following sections of the Second
Piurt, liata of verba, with the prepositions which they require after
4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when
they come before a verb : (} 132) avoir besoin, to warU ; avoir coft*
tome, to be aecuUomed ; avoir dessein, to intend^ to design ; avoir envie^
to have a wishf a desire; avoir honte, to be ashamed; avoir intention,
or,rintention, to intend; avoir le tempa, to have time or leisure; avoir
le courage, to have courage ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; avoir raiaon, to
be right ; avoir regret, to regret ; avoir tort, to be wrong ; avoir aiget
to have reason; avoir aoin, to take care.
Get enftnt a bern^ de donnir,
Tons area honte de conrir,
T%ai child uwUstotletp,
You are ashamed of running.
"RASfJUA of EZAMPLBS.
Avez vaas quelque chose k dire 1
Jen'airien^'dire.
Votre BQBiir tt'a-t-eDe rlen i 6erire1
EUe a devz lettres & terire.
A-t-^Ue le temps de les 6crire 1
Bile n*a pas dessehi de les torire.
Slle n'a paa T intention de les terire.
XHb n'a pas envie de lea 6orire.
Avez vous pear de danser 1
Je n'ai pas honte de danser.
Totre cousin a raison de sortlr.
K'av«E vous pas soin d'tcrire 1
Aves vous le courage d'aller & la
Have you any thing to say 7
I have nothing to say.
mM^tm wfrw^r ^^^9W rl^^W^Wjj 99 Wmwa^9 W
Shekastwo letters to foriie.
Has she ^me towrite them?
She does not design to write Umi.
Bhe does not ieUend to mite ^am.
&e has no desirs to write them*
Are you afraid to dance 7
I am not ashamed to danoe»
Your eousinis right to go ouL
Do you not take care towrite?
Have you the courage to go to thew^ 7
EZIRCISB 80.
jr, Ubufg Faire, to make; Marcher, towedkt
ChaoBp, VLfdd / Fatigu6, e, tired^ weary ; Mars, m. Mar^ ;
Siaiiaer, to donee ; Gasette, f. newspaper ; Ne~^^, natMng /
]>e borne heure, earliy ; Juillet, m. July / S^, f. page /
JHmnir, to sleep; Juin, m. Jume ; Seize, siateen t
Jferire, towriUi Lire, to reads Travail]er,toiMrl;,Mpr.
1. Votre belle-mte a-t-elle qoelque choae & fkire ? 9. EUe nV rin
4 fiJK«. t. A-t-elle deux pagea i 6erire1 4. Non, Monaiear, alto
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
74 LBSBOir AXI.
u'enaqu^une. 6. Avezvousrintentionde lire cette gazetted 0. Oui
Madame, j'ai rintention de la lire. 1: Avez vous raison d'achetcr ua
habit de velours? 8. J*ai raison d^en acheter un. 9. Votre petite
filie lut-elle besoin de dormir ? 10. Oui, Monsieur, elle a bescin de
dormir, elje est fatigu^. 11. Avez vous penr de tombcr? 12. Je
n*ai pas peur de tomber. 13. Le jardinier a-t-il le temps de travailler
"dans les champs ? 14. II n*a pas envie de travailler dans les champs.
15. Vo3 champs sont ils anssi grands que les miens? 16. Ilssont
fiVLA grands que les y6tres. 17. Avez vous honte de marcher?
18. Je n'ai pas honte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. Quel
Age a votre fils? 20. II a seize ans. 21. Avons nous le deux mars
ou le cinq juin? 22. Nous avons le vingt-huit juillet 23. Est il
midi? 24. Nod, Monsieur il n*est pas encore midi, il n'est que onze
heures et demie. 25. D est encore de bonne heure.
EZBROISB 40.
1. What has your brother-in-law to do ? 2. He has letters to
write. 3. Does he want to work? 4. Yes, Sir, he wants to work.
6. Does he intend to read my book? 0. He does not intend to n$ad
your book, he has no time. 7. Is your sister ashamed tp walk?
8. My sister is not ashamed to walk, but my brother is aafaamed-to
dance. 9. Has your cousin any thing to say ? 10. My cousin has
nothing to say, she is afraid to speak (parler). 11. Is it late ? 12. No,
MadsiD, it is not late, it is early. 13. Have yon a wish to read my
sister's letter (f.) ? 14. Have you the courage to go to the war ? 15. I
have not the courage to go to the war. 16. Is your sister right to
buy a silk dress (£) ? 17. Yes, Sir, she is right to buy one. 18. Does
that child want to sleep? 19. No, Sir, that child <loei» not want to
sleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to
work ui my garden? 21. He has a wish to work in (dans) mine.
22. How old is that child? 23. That child is ten years old. 24. What
is the day of the month ? 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you
afiaid to walk ? 27. I am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 28. Have
yon time to read my brother's book? 29. I have time to read his
book. 80. Has the joiner a wish to speak? 31. He has a wish to
work and to read. 32. Is your son afraid of fiJIing? 38. He is not
afraid of falling, but he is afraid of working. 84. AVhat o'i lock is it *
8A. It is twelve
Digitized
by Google
Lxvaov jczx^ H
LESSON xxn. LEgoN xxn.
1. The expressions avoir beaoin, to want ; avoir soid, to take core ;
•voir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir pear, to be afraid, require also ths
preposition d€|^ before a noon. Those idioms mean literally, to hav
need, to have care, die.
Aves Tous besoiD de votre frdre 1 Do you tPoaUyour brother f
J'ai soin de mes effets. / take care of my things,
II a honte de sa coodaite. He is ashamed of his conduct.
Bile a pear da chien. She is afraid of the dog,
3. As these expressions reqnire the preposition de before their ob>
jeet, they will, of coarse, require the same preposition before the
(vonoun representing that object
J'ai besoin de voos. I want you,
J'ai soin de lui. / take care of him,
De qui avez voos besohi 1 Whom do you want 7
De qaoi a-t-elle besoin 1 What does she want?
3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned before
flie pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de* and that of the
pronoun refH^senting the object.
Ave* vous besoin de votre cheval 1 Do you want your harm?
J*en ai beaoin. / want it,
4. The expressions 6tre ftch^, to he sorry ; Mre 6tonn6, to heme*
iomsked ; ^tre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de bc»
fore a Doan or pronoun. [{ 88.]
Je sois ftch6 de son malheur. / am sorry far his misfortiume.
Je snis 6tonn6 de sa conduite. lam astonuhed at his eendfuU.
Je snis ocmtent de lui. / am pleased with him,
fi. Eire fSich^, in the sense of to he angry, requires the prepofitte
Vota Ates ftch6 contre moi. You are angry with me,
fi. For rules on the government of adjectives, see } 87, and foU
lowing Sections.
RteUMft 07 EZAHPUW.
Aves vons beaoin d'aiigenti
J*ai besoin d'ai^nt.
Je B*en ai pas besoin. [R. 8.]
In aves vous besoin 1
^en ai besoin, et mon frftre en a
beaoin auasL
Afw TOW besoin de votre ftire 1
Do you want money?
I want money,
J do not want amy.
Doyouwantany?
Jwantsome^and my brother
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
n LMtOV XZtl.
J'tlbMolirdeliiL*
De qnoi aves tous betolal
J'ai bosoiD d'on dictioimairo.
Avez Tons floln de votre liTre 1
J'en ai aoin.
ATes Tons soin de TOtre pire 1
J'ai win de lui.*
Votre frftre est 11 flchd oontre moi 1
D oBt ilcM contare Totre aasva.
Aves Toos peur de ce chien 1
J'en ai peur.
De avd avez toqb hcmte 1
Je n ai honte de penonne.
ATei Toiu betoin de qaelqne
chose 1
Je n'ai beaoin de rien.
What da ytmyMuUf
J vfant a dieUoiutry.
Do you UUee eatrt of fomr k$0k7
I tdic€ care of U.
Do you take care of yourfmihmf
1 take care of him.
Is your broiier angry wUk mg?
He is angry with your suter.
Are you afraii oftkisdog 7
lam afraid of him^
Of whom, are m, aakamed 7
I am ashamed of noMy,
Do you vwni any thing 7
EXXROIBE 41.
Beeoin, m. iMfif, needs Fatlga6, e, weary, tiiredsVeaiev, to ^eaki
Condnite, f. conduct ; Ghir9on, m. boy ; Reposer, te rest ;
Domeitiqiie, m. servant iJevaie homme, ULyowngBoiikt m. care ;
lEttl6ti, m. things, clothes; man; TrmXHer, to work i
BtoimA, e, astonished; Lire, to read; Vienx, old,
FichA, e, sorry, angry;
1. Qui a beaoin de pain? 3. Penonne n'en a beaoin. 8. N^avei
Tona pas beaoin de voire domeatiqaet 4. Oui, Monaieor, j*ai beaoia
de lui.* 6. Votre jaidinier a-t-il aoin de yotro jardini 6. Oai,
Madame, il en a aoin. 7. A-t-il bien aoin de aon Tieoz pdre? 8. Ooi,
Monaienr, ii a bien aoin de luL 9. Votre garden ap^il honte de aa
eondnite ? 10. Oai, Monaieor, il en a honte. 11. Area vooa poor
de eecheTal-ci on de celiii-U ? 12. Je n'ai penr nl de celoi-ci ni de
eelni»li)u 18. Notre domeatique a-t-il aoin de voa eflfeta ? 14. II en
a bien aoin. 10. Avea vona peur de parler ou, de lire ? 16. Je n'al
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. £tea voua 6tonn6 de cette aflkiref
18. Je n*en aula paa 6tonn6. 19. En dies voua fteh^l 30. Qui,
Monaieur, j'en auia bien f9u:h6. 31. Avez Tooa beaoin de ce garyoni
82. Oui, Madame, j'ai beaoin de luL 23. N'avez Toua paa beaoin de
■on livret 24. Je n'en ai pas beaoin. 25. Avez youa envie da
traTailler on de liret 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de Ure,
f al envie de me repoaer car je auia fatigu6.
EzxBcisx 42.
1. Do 70U want jour aervantf 2. Yea, Sir, I want him. 8. Does
jreur brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brolher.f
* The word en ahonld be avoided as mudi as poaalUe in relatioii tm
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LsesoH xzitL 9t
A. DoM be not want noney ? 6. He does not wint money, he hat
enough. 7. Is your Iirother sorry for his eondnctt 8. He is very
sorry for his condaet and very angiy against you. 9. Does he take
good flBP care of his books 1 10. He takes good care of them.
11. How many volumes has he ? 13. He has more than you, h^ naa
more than twenty. 13. What does the young man want? 14. He
wants his clothes. 16. Do you want to rest (vous repoier) ? Id
b not your brother astonished at this t 17. He is astonished at it
18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books? 19. I have a
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ?
21. I have time to. work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the
young brother take care of his things ? 23. He takes good care of
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog? 26. He is not aflraid
of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread? 27.
I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother*s con-
duct ? 29. I am pleased with it 80. Has your brother a wish to
read my book? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he Is
weary. 82. Is that young man angry with y6u or with his friends!
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you want
my dictionary ? 36. I want your dictionary and your b vther's.
LEESON XXTH. LBpON XXIIL
1. If the ending or distinguishing charaeterstic of the eo^jugmtiott
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re-
maining will be the stem of the verb: —
Chanter Fin-ir Bec^voir Rend-rs
2. To that iTfrn are added» in the diffennt simple tenses of a reg»
alar verb, the teiminations proper to the conjugation to which it bf
onga [{ 80.]
8. PABnoiPLX Prxskkt.
Chant-aat Fin-issant Reo-evant Rend-ant
Smgirig FHTUskiiig Recearing Rtndtrwg
4. Pabxioxfui Past.
€amnt4 Ffai-i Re^-u ReodHi
Bm^ PifUtitd BunMd Rgndm^
Digitized
by Google
7ft
LBSSOV ZXIII.
Tn
n
Hoot
Vons
Us
5. Tebmikation or thb Pbssxnt of the Insicatiyx.
chant -e
pari «e
pari
MMteff
donn
cherch
•eek
port
fin -18
finish
ch6r -is
ekeritkMt
fourn -it
fundskeM
pun -f
aim -ent
-iasent
re^ -oi«
receiv9
Rper9 -oia
ffruivett
per9 -oit
gaikert
oonc -eTQDB
d -eves
dif -oivent
rend
remder
rend
•eUtai
tend
entend -om
kMtr
perd -ei
mord -cnl
6. The present of the indicative has but one form in French, ther»-
fore Je chante, may be rendered in English by, / sing^ I do sing^ or
I am singing.
7. The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from
the participle present by changing ant into oiu, ez ent, £z : chantant,
nouM ekanUms; finissant, not» jinusoTis ; recevant, nous rectwms;
rendant, nous rendons,
8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but in almost
all the irregular verbs.
9. Verbs may be conjugated interrogatively in French (except in
the firfft person singular of the present of the indicative,) [( 98 (4.) (6.)*]
by placing the pronoun after the verb in all the simple tensea, and
between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses.
Do you sing wdL 7
Have you sung well ?
Have you not sung well ?
Chantez vons bien 1
A vez V0U8 bien chant6 1
N*avez vous pas bien chant6 1
[L. 7, R. 2.]
Ne chantez vons pas bien 1 Do you not sing well 7
Votre p6re parle-t-il bien 1 [L. 4, B. Does your father speak well?
6— L. 6, E. 4.]
10. The verb porter means to carry. It means also to loear, in
vpeaking of garments ; apporter means to hring^ and emporter to carry
away; aimer means to lote^ to like^ to be fond qf, and takes the prepo-
sition d before another verb.
Quel habit portez vonsl
Je porte un habit de drap no!r.
Yotre ft-dre qu' apporte-t-U I [L. 4,
B. 6.J
II apporte de Targent a son ami
What coat do you wear?
I wear a coat of black cloth.
What does your brother bring?
He brings money to his friend,
11. A noun used in a general tense [} 77 (1.)] takes the article !«,
la, r, or lea.
Aimes Tons 1e bosuf ou le mouton 1 Do you Ukebeefor wuUen 7
Jen'aimenlleboBafnilAmanUm. iUksntWmbsrfmgrwsMMam
Digitized
by Google
LJI880V ZZIII.
R£suM]fc OF Examples.
ChftDtes TOBB one chanson iUr
Nous chantoDfl des chansons alle>
mandes.
Fortes vous oe livre a rhomme 1
KoB, je le porte a mon frdre.
Emi)ortez vous tout votre ar^gent 1
J 'en eroporte seulement une partie.
Finissez vous YOtre lecon aujoai^
d'huH
Kous la finissons oe matin.
N'aimes vous pas les enfants atten-
ti&l
Je lea aime beaucoup.
N« reoevea vous pas beaaconp de
lettreal
Kous en recerons beaucoup.
Vendez vous beaucoup de marchan-
diseat.
Nous en vendons beaucoup.
Votre frire aime le.bosuf et le mou-
ton.
Do you sing an Italian sang 7 •
We sing German songs.
Do you carry this book to tU flura?
No, I carry it to my brother.
Do you carry away all your money ?
/ carry aieay only a part of it.
Do youJinisA your lesson to-4ai^ 7\
We finish ii this morning.
DoyounolUke attentive ckilirm 7
J like them much.
Do you not receive numy UUtn7
We receive many letters.
Do you sell many goods 7
We sell many.
Your brother tikes beef and mMtten
ExzRCiSB 43.
[We shall hereafter put a hyphen between the stem and the terminaiwn aj
Vu verbs placed in the vocabularies. The number indicates the conjugation.^
Non seulement, not only ;
Lecture, f. reading ;
Faille, f. straw ;
Perd-re, 4. to lose ;
Fort-er, 1. to carry, to
Rec-evoir, 8. to receive ;
Souvent, often ;
Totyonrs, akoaiys!
Aim-er, 1. to love, to Donn-er, 1. to give;
tike, to be fond ofs Pin-ir, 2. to finish ;
Autre, other ; Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish /
Aasez, enough; Gard-er, 1. to keep ;
Chapeaa, m. hat ; Gu6re, but tittle g
Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; Habits, m. p. clothes,
Chercb^r, 1. to seek, to garments:
look for t Mais, but ;
Comiwgnon, ul compare Maison. f. house;
ion ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Travail, m. labor ;
Dame, t lady; Marchandises,f.p.^M><24;Trouv-er, 1. to find;
De bonne heure, early; Neveu, m. nephew ; Yend-re, 4. to sell.
D-evoir, 3. to owe;
I. Votre m^re aime-t-elle la lecture ? [R. 11.] 2. Oui, Mademot
sella, elle Faime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau voire
neveu porte-t-il ? 4. II porte un chapeau de soie, et je porte nn cha-
peau de paille. 6. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants? 6. Oui,
Monsieur, elle lea ch^rit 7. Fournissez vous des marchandises a
eea marchands? 8. Je foumis des marchandises i ces marchands, et
lis me donnent de I'argent 9. Vos compagnons aiment ila les beaux
habits? [R. 11.] 10. Nos eompagnons aiment lea beaux habits et
les biins livres. 11. Cherchez vous mon fr^re? 13. Oui, Monsieur,
(e le ehenhe mais je ne le tronve pas. 13. Votre Mre perd41 son
Digitized byCjOOQlC
80 LKBSOir ZZXIL
temiw. 14. D perd son temps et son ai^nt 16. Peidons nou
toujoon notre temps f 16. Nous le perdons trds sou vent 17. De-
Te% TOQS beauconp d'argent? 18. Pen dois assez, mais je n'en doia
pas beauconp. 19. Vendez vous vos deux maisons k notre mede-
oin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde I'autre pour ma belle-soenr.
21. Reeevez vous de I'argent aujourd'hui ? 22. Noos n*en reeevona
gudre. 23. Yotre menuisier finit il son travail de bonne heuref
!I4. II le finit tard. 26. 1 quelle heure le iinit ilt 26. II le finit ^
midi et demL 27. Nous finissons le n6tre It dix heures moins vingi
minutes.
■ ExBRCisx 44.
1. Does your companion like reading! 2. My companion does
not like reading. 3. Does your father like good books f [R. 11.]
4. He likes good books and good clothes.* 5. Do you owe more
than twenty dollars? 6. I only owe ten, but my brother owea more
than fifteen. 7. Are you wrong to finish your work early? 8. 1 am
right to finish mine early, and yon are wrong not \o (de ne pat) fin-
ish yours. 9. Do you receive much money to-day ? 10. I receive
but little. 11. Do we give our best books to that little child ? 12.
We do not give them, we keep them because (parceque) we want
them. 13. Do you sell your two horses? 14. We do not sell our
two horses, we keep one of them. 16. Do you finish your work
this morning (nuUin) ! 16. Yes, Sir, I finish it this morning early.
17. Does your brother-in-law like fine clothes ? 18. Yes, Madam, he
likes fine clothes. 19. Do you seek my nephew ? 20. Yes, Sir, we
seek him. 21. Does he lose nistime? 22. He loses not only hia
time, but he loses money. 23. How much money has he lost to-
day ? 24. He has lost more than ten dollars. 26. Does your joiner
finish your house ? 26. He finishes my house and my brother^s.
27. Do you sell good hats? 28. We sell silk hats, and silk hats are
good. [R. 11.] 29. Ho^ old is your companion ? 30. He is twelve
years old, and his sister is fifteen. 31. Does your brother like meat?
2. He likes meat and bread. 33. Do you receive youi goods at
two o'clock? 34. We receive them at half after twelve. 36. Wt
fMeire them ten minutes before one.
* Repeat the article.
Digitized
by Google
LBSSOV ZXIT. 81
LESSON XXrV. LBgON XXIV.
1. There are in French, as in other laognagea, verbs which are
cai^led iiregnlar, because they are not conjugated according to the
iBle» or modei verb of the conjugation to which thej belong. [} 62.]
2. Many inegular verbs have tenses which are conjugated rego^
lady.
3. The singular of the present of the bdicative of the uregular
verbs, is almost always irregular.
4. In vwbs ending in yer, the y is changed into % before an e mate.
ri4».]
5. FiuuBirr of thb Indicatitb ok thb Ibbsottlab Ykkbb.
Aiojea, 1. logo; Bnvotbr, 1. to tend; VsNia, 2. to eMM/
Je vais, / go^ dogo^ot J'envoie [R. 4.] Isaul^ do Je viens, / covu, do «Mn#,
am goings ' tend^ or am sending i or am coating :
Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens,
B va, II envois, 11 vient,
Nous sHoiis, Nous envoyons, Nous venons,
Vous alles, Vous envoyez, Vous venes,
lis vont,' Ds envoient [B. 4.] Us viennent
6. All verbs ending in erdr are conjugated like venir.
7. The student will find in } 62 the irregular verbs alphabetieally
ananged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with
an irregular verb.
8. The expression, it la maison, is used for the English at Aonm; ttl
ki$ or her house^ &c.
Lechirurgien est i]& la maison 1 Is ike surgoon al home ?
HonfMreest&lamaiBon. Mjf broiMer is al home.
9. The preposition chea, placed.before <* noun or pronoun, anaweqi
to the English, at the houm qfj with (meaning ai ike resideme ef)^
among, etc. [} 142, (3.)]
Ches moi, ches lui, ches elle, At my houm, ai his hm»y ai her houm,
Ches nous, chex vous, chez eux, m. At ow house, ai your houet, at thak
chea elles, f house.
That is literally, at ihe haute qf me^atthe house of him, &c.
Chea mon p6re, ches ma sflsur, Ai my father's, ai my sister's,
10. The word avec answers to the English wiih^ meamng neitly
In the company of.
Tenea avec nous, ou avec luL Come vrith u$, or with hloL
11. The word y meana to it, at it^ at that fHace. iham. It ia §mm
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
8S tMB%0± XXIT.
■Uj platted before the verb, and refers always to sometliiDg maa
tioned. [} 39, { 103, } 104.]
Votre Keor est elle chez toub 1 Is yow tutor al yow kmue?
Oui, MoDsieur, elle y est y», Sir^ she is lAere,
12. la French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of
an auxiliary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do
you come to my house to-day? / do. Have you books? / have.
The sentence in French must be complete ; as, / ^o there; I Aom
toin^. The words oui or non, without, a verb would however soffiet.
Tenez vous chez moi ai\)ourd'hui t Do you come to my house Uhday ?
Oui, Monsieur, firal Yes, Sir, I wUL
Avez vous des livres chez vous 1 J%n» you books at hems 9
Oui, Monsieur, nous en avons. Yes, Sir, toe have.
BtajmA or Examplkb.
Od est le colonel 1
Q est chez son fr5re ah)6.
N'est il pas chez nousi
Noel Monsieur, il n'y est pas.
Madame votre mire est elle k la
maison 1*
Kon, Madame, elle n'y est pas.
Allez vous chez nous, ou chez lui 1
Nous aliens chez le capitaine.
K'est il pas chez votre flire 1
Kon, Monsieur, 11 est chez nous.
N'euToyez vous pas vos habits chez
vossosursi
Je les envoie chez elles.
N'allez vous pas chez oe monsieur 1
Je n*y vais pas, Je n'al pas le temps
d'y aller ai\jourd'hui.
Where is the colonel?
He U at his ddest brother's.
Is he not at-our house ?
No, Sir, he is not.
Is your mother at home 7
No, Madam, she is noi.
Do you go to our houm, or te Ut
house?
We go to the captain^ s.
Is he not at Your brother's 7
No, Sir, hetsat our house.
Do you not send your clothes to four
sisters' t
I tend them to their house.
Do you not goto that gentleman* s 7
I do not, [R. 12.] I have not Hme te
go there to-day.
EXXRGISE 45.
All-er, 1. fr, to go; Horloger, m. woteA-mo-Belieur, m. book-binder t
krsA, m. friend ; keri Best-er, 1. to remain^
As8oci6, m. partner; HoUandals, e, Dutch ; live;
Capitafaie, m. captain ; Macasin, m. warehouse ; Ruase, Russian ;
]>eineur-er, 1. to lire, Maison, f. house; Ven-ir, 2. ir, to comet
dwell; Matin, m. morning; Yoisin, e, neighbor.
Gilot, m. waistcoat ; Peintre, m. painter ;
1. Od allez vous mon ami ? 3. Je vais chez Monsieur votre p^ro,
est il ^ la maison 1 3. II y est ce matin. 4. D'oi^ venez vous 1 6.
Nous venons de chez vous et do chez votre scBur. 6. Qui est ehei
* The French in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix tlio
word Monsieur. Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representinf theii
'-^Aerioentors ralsaons, or fiiends.
Digitized
by Google
Lsssojr zxiv. fi8
I? 7. Mod Toiun y est aujourd'huL 8. Oii avez youi TinteR-
tion do porter ces livres ? 9. Tai Pintontion de lea porter chez le fila
dn tn^ecin. 10. Avez voaa tort de reater chez voua? II. Je &*a]
pas tort de reater di la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnea
montrea chez lui? 13. II n'a paa de montrea chez lai, 11 en a dana
aon magaain. 14. Chez qui portez voua voa livreat 15. Je lea
porte chez le reWeur. 16. AUez voua chez le capitaine hoUandaiaf
17. Nona n'allona paa chez le capitaine hollandais, noua aliens ehez
le major ruase.^ 18. Est 11 chez vons on chez votre frdre? 19. 11
demeare chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons nous pas chez votre tail.
leur? 21. Vous y demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'oii vient iHt 23.
II vient de chez son associ^. 24. Oi^ portez vous mea aouliera et
xnon gilet? 25. Je porte vos soullers chez le cordonnier et votre
gilet chez le tailleur.
ExsRcisB 46.
I. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. 6. J to
your house or to your brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to
your partnered ? 4. He intends to go there, but he haa no time to-day.
5. What do you want to-day ? 6. I want my waistcoat, which (qui)
b at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's! 8. They are
not there, they are at the tailor'a. 9. Where do you live, my friend ?
10. I live at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at hornet 12.
No, Sir, he is not 13. Where does your servant carry the woodt
14. He carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman
who (qui) is with your father live at hia house? 16. No, Sir, he
lives with me. 17. Is he wrong to live with yon ? 18. No, Sir, he is
right to live with me. 19. Whence (d'oH,) comes the carpenter?
SO. He cornea from his partner's house. 21. Has he two partners?
93. No, Sir, he has only one, who lives here (iei), 23. Have you
time to go to our house this morning ? 24. We have time to go
there. 25. We intend to go there and to apeak to your sister. 26.
la she at your house ? 27. She is at her (own) house. 28. Have yoo
bread, butter, and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butter
there. 30. We have no cheese there, we do not like cheese. 31.
Is your watch at the watchmaker'a ? 32. It (eUe) is there. 33.
Have you two gold watchea ? 34. I have only one gold watch. 85.
Who intends to go to my father's thia morning ? 86. Nobody !»•
tends to go there.
Digitized
by Google
84 LBtSOir XXT
LESSON XXV. LE9ON XXV
1. In the first person sin^lar of the present of the indicative of
almost all those French verbs, which in that person have only one
syllable, the cosunon interrogative form [L. 23. 9.] is not allowed.
To render the verb interrogative, the expression esUce qus is prefixed
to the affirmative form. [} 98, (6.) (6.)]
Sst-oe que je vends dn drvp'i Do IMdMkl
Est-ce que je Joue souvent 1 Do 1 jiay often 7
2. The first person singular of the indicative of avoir, to Aove;
4tre, to be; aller, togo; pouvoir, to he able; devoir, lo owe; aavoir,
to krunOf etc., may, however, be cox^ogated interrogatively according
to the general rales.
Ai-Je voe monchoirs 1 Have I ytm' JUrndkerckiefs 7
Combien vous dois-je 1 Hout muck do I owe you 7
Z. The form fl^l-ce que is slways allowable, and s<mietimes prefe&*«
able, when the first person singular of the present of the indicative
of a verb has seversl syllables, [{ 98, (6.)]
£st€e que Je vous envoie des livres 1 Do 1 9B%d y&u books7
Est-oe que Je commence ii parler 1 Do I begin to apeak 7
4. Est-ce que may, in familiar conversation, be used with all Ue
persons of those tenses susceptible of being conjugated inteiroga-
tively :— Qu*eBt-ce que vous lisez 1 may be said, instead of^ que lises
Toost What do you readi
h. iNnRROOATIVB FoRM OF THX InDIGATIVS PRSaBHT C/
Allbr, to go, Envotes, to aend. VfiNia, to come.
Sst-ceque Jevaisi <i0 J Est-ce que J'envoiel do Est-ce que je vfenil de
gOf warn I going? Isend^oramlunding? leome,ocamIco^mg%
Vas-tui Envoies-tui Viens-tul
Vt^t-ill Envole-t-iU Vient-ill
Aliens nous 1 Envoyons nous 1 Yenons nous 1
Alles vous 1 Buvoves vous 1 Venes vous 1
Tout Us 1 Snvoient lis 1 Yiennent ils 1
8. Tlie article le, preceded by the preposition ^l is contrscttd failo
M before a noun masculine commencing with a consonant, or aa Jk
aspirate ; and into aux before a plural noun. [} 13, (8.)]
AUea vous au bal on au march61 Do you go to ike baU or to mm*et7
7. A r^glise means a< or to ekurck ; it I'^cole, at otto eckoot^ —
HoQS aUons k I'lgUse et k TAoole. We go to ckunk and to etkoU.
a. Quelque psrt, means eomoAer^ anywken; oolk part, no^
Digitized
by Google
txsBov zzy«
S5
Yitn nermL 06 est U1
D eel qnejane pari,
n n'ert nmie part
Whereisyour
He is tomewktre.
He is nowhere.
R^BCHi or EZAICFLSS.
bt^ce irae je Tais k r6oole 1
Voos altez a r^glise aigonrd'hui.
fistrce que je commence mon tra-
Efi-ce que je park anglaia 1
£st-ce que j'enyoie oe livre k mon
Mrel
ADes vons an march6 demain 1
J'y Tais apfto-demain.
Savoyez vons vos enfants a I'Scole 1
Je lea envoie chez le professeur. .
Je lefl y envoie cette aprds-midi.
T08 habits oik sont ila)
Us sont quelqne part.
Us ne sont nulle part
Sst-«e que Je demenre chez Tons 1
*" » qneje mange tropi
Zhigototckeoi?
You go to church to-4af.
Do f begin my work ?
Do I speak English ?
Do I send this book to my brothir?
Do you go to market ttHnorrowf
I go there the day afur to-morrow.
Do you send your children to KhuAf
I send them to the professor's,
I serul them there this afternoon.
Where are your clothes 7
They are somewhere.
They are nowhere.
Do I live at your house?
Do I eai too much?
EZBBCISB 47.
Cnir, m. leather t
Pepnis, since s
£cole, f. school f
ficoUer, m. scholar ;
Eglise, f. church i
March6, m. market f
Noir, e, black;
Permqmer, m. hear-drt^
sen
Point, noit
Poete, tpost-^jfUet
Rouge, red;
Village, m. village g
Vert, e, green.
Absent, e, absent;
Adresse^ t address;
Banqae, f. bank;
Baaqnier, m. banker;
Billet^ m. note; ticket;
Chapelier, m. hatter;
Concert, m. concert ;
Covp-er, 1. to cut;
1. Ok est-ce que je vaia! S. Voub allez chez le chapeliet. 3. EsUw
que je vais k la banque? 4. Votts allez k la banqae et au concert
6. £st-ce que je coupe voire bois? 6. Vous ne coapez ni mon bois
ni mon habit. 7. Eat-ce que je porte nn chapeau vert? 8. Vous ne
portez pas nn chapean vert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Voire
holier v»>t>il quelqne part? 10. II va k T^glise, k I'^cole et au
mazche. 11. Ne va-t.il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nulle
part 13. Ne portez vous point des boties de cuir rouge? 14. Pen
porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez vous pas chez le banquier? 16. Je
ne vaia pas chez lai, il est absent depuis hier. 17. Vieni il k la
banqae ee matin? 18. II a Vintention d'y venir, sMl a le temps.* 19.
A441 envie d'aller au concert? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, maia
B n'a paa de billet 31. Demeurez vous dans ce village? 2% Oni,
* The • of ft ia elided before fl, Us, but fai no other case.
wOf luitenfffi of the elMon of i.
Digitized
Thilii th«
by Google
86 . I.IB80B ZZTZ.
Monaieiir, j*jr demenie. 3i. Envoyez vous oe l^Uet i la postot 95.
Je Fenvoie k son adresse.
EzsRCisx 48.
1. Do I wear my large black hat? 3. You wear a handsome green
hat 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning? 4.
He goes there this morning. 6. Does he intend to go to the bank
this morning ?• 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time.
7. Do you send your letters to the post-office ? 8. I do not send
them, tiiey are not yet written (jecriles), 9. Do I send you a note!
10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert
11. Does your brother go to school to-morrow? 12. He goes (there)
to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13. Do I go there? 14. Yoa
do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go? 16. I am going to
your brother's, is he at home? 17. He is not at home, he is absent
since yesterday. 18. Does your brother live in this vilbge? 19. He
does not, [L. 24. 12.] he lives at my nephew's. 20. Are you wrong
to go to school? 21. No, Sir, I am right to go to church and to
school 22. Do you wish to come to my house ? 23. 1 like to go to
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to
our house? 25. To-morrow, if I have time. 26. Does the banker
like to come here ? 27. He likes to come to your house. 28. Is the
hair-dresser coming? 29. He is not yet coming. 30. What are yon
sending to the scholkr ? 31. 1 am sending books, paper, and clothes.
82. Where is he ? 33. He is at school. 34. Is the aehool in the vU-
Isge? 85. It is there.
LESSON XXVL LEgON XXVL
1. The verb aller, is used, in French, in the same manner as th«
verb to go, in English, to indicate a proximate ftiture.
Allcz vous 6crire ce matin 1 Are yqu ^aing to toriie this nwrni^g t
Je vais 6crire mes lettrcs. / am going to write my letiers. .
2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to Indicate a
past just elapsed. It reqnupes, in this signification, the prepositloo
de before another rerb.
Je Tiens d'toire mes lettres. / have just written my ietiers.
Nous Tenons de reoevoir des lettres. We have just received Utters.
S. Aller trouver, venir trouTer, are used in the Moee of le ^ 1^
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
LBSSOII ZZTI. 8T
tQ emm its in eomieetioii with nouns or pronoonB reprasenting par*
Alles tronrer le ferbUmtier. ChtoUu Unman,
J'ai enrie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to goto jUm.
Venez me trouTer a dix heures. Come to me at Un o'clock.
4. Aller ehercher, means to gofor^ to go and fetch : —
Alles ehercher le midedn. Ch and fetch the pkysidan.
Je vaia ehercher du sucre et da cafiS. / am gotitgfor coffee and sugar
6. Envoyer ehercher, means to sendfor, to send and fetch :-«
SnToyez ehercher le marchand. Send for the merchant.
J*envoie ehercher des Mgumes. / send for vegetables.
6. The first and second persons of the plural of the imporatir*
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, sre not
used with the imperative.
7. Plural of thb iMPsiUTiyE of Aller, Enyotbr, anb
Venir,
Allons, let us go i Enroyons, let us sends Venous, let us eowu ;
Alles, ^; Envoyez, J09K2; Xenez, come.
8. Tons, m. t jutes, t followed by the article les and a plural nottn»
are used in French in the same sense as the word every in English.
Votre frftru vient tons les Jours. Your brother comes every dof.
Tons allez & I'^cole tons les matins. You go to school every momxng.
9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by le or la and the noun in the
singular, are used for the English expression the whole coming before
m noun.
11 reste ici toute la Joum6e. He remains hen the whole da/y.
10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as tho timt
of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a praposi*
tion in Freneh.
Tenez Inndi on mardl Cam/e on Monday or Tuesday.
Tenez le quinse on le seize avriL Come on the jifieenth or sixteenth
of April,
11. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, the
article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day.
11 vlent nous trouver le lundl. He comes to us Mondays.
U va trouver votro pdre rapr6s-midi. He goes to your father in the afternoon^
BAsuvA of Examples.
Je ^:als parler k M. votre pdi«. 1 1 am going to speak toyourJMer.
Konsvenonsdereoevoirdersrfent We have just received money.
ituveneavonadsftirsl \ What ham yem put danet
Digitized
by Google
88
LISBON XXVL
Je Tleiii de d6clilrer moo habit
Yotre fiire va-t-il troover son ami 1
n va le troQver tons les Joan.
II vient me trouver tous les landis.
Allez Tons chercher de I'argeiit 1
Je n'en vais pas chercher.
£nvoyez yoas chercher des livres
arabesi
JJles Tons ches cette dame Imidi 1
J*ai I'intexition d'y ailer mazdi.
J*7 vais ordinairement le mercredi.
n Ta & r^glise le dimandie.
/ havtjmt torn my «Mi.
Does your brotker go to Ain/HnM /
He goes to him every day.
He comes to me every MontUty.
Do you go and fetch vumey 7
I do not. [L24.12.J
Do you sendfo?' Araiic hooks 7
Do you go io that ladiffs koum #•
Morulay?
I intend to go there on THiesdaiy,
1 generally go there Wednesdays,
He goes to c^M^ch Sundays.
Mardi, m. TSiesdayf
Mercredi, m. Wednet^
day f
Musique, f. mwie ;
Prochain, e, next;
Vendredi, m. PrUaiy;
Best-er, 1. to rtmam^
Uve;
Samedi, Satwrday ;
Teinturier, m. dyor.
EZBBCIBE 49.
Auito, f. year ; Dimanche.. m. Sunday ;
Apprend-re, 4. ir.toUam; ficotnais, e, Scotch ;
Aprds-midi, f. afUmoon ; ficri-re, 4. ir. io write ;
Commenc-er, 1. to com- EnseigD-er, 1. to teach ;
m/ence ; Excepts, except ;
Gompagne, f. c0fyi|Mm- Jeudi, m. Thursday;
ion J Joum6e, f. day ;
Comuusaanoes, t o^ Irlandats, e, /risA ;
quaintances; 'LxoAi^m. Mon4ay s
Demain, Uhmorrow $ Malade, sick;
1. Qu'allez voua Dure? 2. Je vais apprendre mea lemons
8. N'allez voua paa 6crire & vos connaiaaances? 4. Je ne vaia 6crir«
IL peraonne. 6. Qui vieDt de voua parler ? 6. L'lrlandaia vient da
noua parler. 7. Quand Tficosadae va-t-elle voua enaeigner U mu-
aiquel 8. Elle va me Tenaeigner Fannie prochaine. 9l V»>t-ella
eommeucer mardi ou mercredi ? 10. Elle ne va commencer ni mardj
ni mercredi, elle a I'intention de commencer jeudi, ai elle a le temps.
11. Votre compagne va^t-elle k F^gliae toua leadimancheaf 13. Elle
y va toua lea dlmanohes et toua lea mercredia. 13. Qui allez voua
trouver? 14. Je ne vaia trouver peraonne. 16. N'avez voua pas
Tintention de venir me trouver demaini 16. J'ai I'intention d'aller
trouver votre teinturier. 17. Envoyez voua chercher le medecini
18. Quand je suis malade, je I'envoie chercher. 19. Reste-t-il avet
voua toute la joum6e? 20. II ne reste chez moi que que^ques
minutes. 21. Allez vous & T^cole le matin? 23. Py vais le matin
et Tapr^a-midi. 23. Y allez vous tous les jours? 24. J'y vais tous
lea jours excepts le lundi et le dimanche. 26. Le samedi je reste ehex
noua, et le dimanche je vais k Teglise.
EZERCISK 60.
1. What is the Irishman going to do? 3. He is going to toeeh
8. Has he just conmeaoed his work? 4. Hs has just coJSi
Digitized
by Google
LlttOV XXTXt. et
BMiMfd it A. Who haa just written to you f G. The dyer has Just
written to me. 7. Does yoor little boy go to church every day!
8w No, Sttf he goea to church Sundays and he goea to school every
day. 9. Do you go for the physician? 10. 1 send for him because
(jpareeque) my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician or to
yours? 12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13 W^ere is he?
14. He is at your father's or at your brother'a. 16. Do you inten
to send for the phyaician ? 16. I intend to aend for him. 17. Am I
rigr.it to send for the Scotchman? 18. You are wrong to aend for
him. 19. Do yon go to your father in the afternoon? 90. I go to
Dim in the morning. 21. Doea your brother go to your uncle's every
Monday? 22. He goea there every Sunday. 23. Are you going to
learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time.
25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are going to read to
morrow. 27. Doea he go to your house every day? 28. He cornea
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He comes at a
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for
wine, bread, butter and cheese. 36. What do you go for? 36. We
go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want augar ewrf
morning.
LESSON xxvn. LEgoN xxvn.
PLACK OF THB FBONOimS.
1. The personal pronoun used aa the direct regimen [} 2, (2.) {4S|
(4.)] or object of a verb,* is m French placed before the verb, except in
the second person singuUr or in the first and second persons plural
of tiie imperative used affirmatively.
n me voit^ il I'alme. Be sees me, he lovei him,
n nous aime, U vous aime. Be loves ut, he loves you,
2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the
v«rb, li 2, (3.) { 42, (6.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and to
the indirect object of the English with the prepoution to ezpreaaed
CMT understood, is also in French placed before the verb :^
^ The young student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used
aa the direct regimen of a verb, by the fhct that there la in Bi^^Usb no
prqxNrfttoii between the verb and this pronoun.
Digitized
by Google
•9 LS880V ZXVIZ.
n meiMtrle, il Ini parle. He speaks toine,ke jpcoAs to Urn
II nous donne une fleur. He givts us afloteer*
II voos parle, il leur parle. He speaks to you^ he speaks to tken^
3. The personal pronoun is generally placed after the following
rerba: aller, to go; acconrir, to run to; courir, to run; venir, to
come; penser k, songer i, to think of: —
n vient a moL He comes to me.
n peose k voua, a enz. He thinks ofyov^ of them,
4. In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow tlift
?erb: —
Aimez lea, parlez leur. Love them, speak to them.
6. The words en and y follow the above rules, except the dd.
J*en parle, J'y pense. / speak of U^ I think of il,
6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the genL
tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which in
English is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to^ it
in French always placed e^ter the verb : —
Je parle de lui, d*elle, d'euz. / speak of him, of her, of them,
Je reste avec vous et avec eux. / remain with you and with thnu,
7. All pronouns used as objects of verbs, must be repeated : —
Je les aime, Je les respecte, Je les / love them, respect and honor them
honore.
R£suMfi ow ExAicPLBS. — See § 32.
M*entendez tous 1
Je ne vous entends pas.
Les entendez vous 1
Je les vols et Je les entends.
II nous aime et il nous honore.
Me parlez vous de votre ami 1
Je TOUS parle de lui. [R. 6.]
Kous parlez vous de ces dames 1
Je vous parle d'elles.
Ne leur parlez vous pas 1
Je n'ai pas envie de leur parler.
Parlez lui^ — ne lui parlez pas.
Allez a lui, courez a lui.
Parlez leur,— ne leur parlez pas.
Do you hear or understand me ?
I do not understand or hear yotL
Do you hear them ?
I see them and understand them.
He loves and honors us.
Do you speak to me ofyowfriendf
I speak to you of him,
Doyou speak to us about those ladies t
I speak to you of them.
Do you not speak to them?
I have no wish to speak to them.
Speak to him or her— do not speak i$
him.
Oo to him — run to him.
Speak tothem, — donotspeaktotheam.
EXSRCISB 51.
Aftiire, f. affair ! Oompagnon, m. compan- Nouvelle, f. netos;
Arbre, m. tree ; ion ; Pens-er, 1. to thinks
Avis, m. advice ; D6ja, already ; Poirier, m. pear-tree ;
Qerisier, m. cherry-tree ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. ^ torite; Pommicr, m. appie-4reei
i lommnniqu-er, 1. to com* Ezemple, m. example ; Respect-er, 1, to
* The prepodtioQ to is understood. He gives ajtower to tub
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
IiBSSOV ZZTIX. M
1. AUez YOiis hii ^rire ? 3. Je vais lui 6crire et lai eommiiniqiier
eette nouvelle. 3. Allez vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par*
ler de voua ct de voire compagnon. 5. Leur envoy ez vous de beaux
arbrcs ? 6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, ct des cenfiiers 1
7. Ne m'unvoycz vous pas des cerisiers? 8. Je ne vous en envoie
pas, vous en avez dej^ 9. Avez vous raison de ieur parler de cette
affaire? 10. Je n*ai pas tort de leur parler de cette affaire. 11. Ve-
nez k. nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous trouver, cette apr^s-midL
13. Ailez vous les trouver tous les jours? 14. Je vais les trouver
tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez vous de bons avis? 16. Je leur
donne de bons avis et de bons ezemples. 17. Nous porlez vous de
Yos 8<Eur8? 18. Je vousparle d'elles. 19. Nenousparlez vous pas
de nos fr^s? 30. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne les aimez von*
paa I 22. Nous lea aimons et nous les respei-^ions. 23. Pensez vou
4 ee livre ou n'y pensez vous pas? 24. Nuus y pensons et nous en
parions. 26. Nous n'y pensons pas.
ExsRCiSB 52.
1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going
to write to him to-morrow morning. 3. Do you intend to write to
him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 5«
Have you a wish to speak to hir:^ to-day ? 6. I have a wish to speak
to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his house.
9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, Sir, I speak to them about (de)
this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice? 12. They give me
good advice and good exan^les. 13. Do you go to your sister every
day?. 14. I go to her every morning at a quarter before nine. 15.
Does she like to see (ootr) you ? 16. She likes to see me and 9(10
receives me well. 17. Do yOu think of this affair? 18. I think of it
the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with (avec) your brother?
20. We speak of it often. 21. Do you send your compiyilon to my
house? 22. I send him every day. 23. Are you at home every
day? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 25. Do you like
to go to church ? 26: I like to go there every Sunday and every
Wednesday. 27. Do you speak of your houses ? 28. I speak of
them (en). 29. Does your brother speak of his friends? 30. Yes,
Sir, he speaks of them (d'eux). 31. Does ho think of them ? 89.
Yes, Sir, he thinks of them (A eux). 33. Does he think of this newsf
84. Yes, Sir, he thinks of it (y). 86. I love and honor them.
Digitized
by Google
M LBssoar xxmi.
LESSON XXVIEL USgON XXVIE.
RB8PKCTIVS PLACS OF THX PRONODKB. See ^101
1. When two pronouns occor, one used as a direct regimen or ob>
Jeet (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object
^dative)^ the in<iUrect object, if not in the third person singular or plu*
fal, must precede the direct object [} 101, (1.)]
Je Tous le donne. Igiv* it to fou,
n me le donne. lu gives it to me,
n noos le donne. He gives Utous.
% When the pronoun used as an indirect object [datire, Rule S
L. 26.] is in the third person singular or plural, it must be placed
after the direct object. [} 101, (2.)]
Nous le lui donnons. We give it to Am.
Nous le leor donnons. We give U to them,
8. The above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used
negatively : —
Ne nous le donnez pas. [R. 1.] Do not give Utous,
Ne le lui donnez pas. [R. 2.J Do not give it him.
4. With the imperative used affirmatively, the direct object pr»
eedes in all cases the indirect object. [} 101, (6.)]
Bonnes le nous. Give it to us,
Montrez le leur. Show it to them,
6. En and y always follow the other pronouns : —
Je lui en donne. ^ I give him somi,
II nous y envoie. He sends us thither,
6. Preskmt of tbk Indicativb of the Irreouulr Vxrbs,
YoiRj to teeg VovLOiRy to wiU^ be wit- VovYoim^ to be aUe g
Ung;
Je Tois, Isee, dosee^ or Jt^ veux, / viU or am Je puis, / can^ I mof, i
am seeing ; witting ; am oMe ;
Tu vols, Tu veux, Tu peux,*
II volt, II veut, II pent,
Nous voyons, Noua voulons, Nous pouvons,
Vous voyoz, Vous voules, Vous pouvez,
lis volenti lis veulent, lis peuvent
7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb.
8. The preposition, pour, is used to render the preposition to, wh«r
the latter means in order to.
Je Tsls ehez tous pour parler iL vo- I ro to ytmr house to speak 9o yum
tre firftre et pour vous voir. orother and to see you,
* After the verbs poured, to be abtei oeer, to dan lavoir, to kmem
ttM negative pas may be omitted.
Digitized
by Google
LBASOir XXTXXX.
JU batoto dWjjicBi pour acbetar / immI m&mi§ U {fm mriUi f^ kt§
das marclMMidiiei. goods*
BteJMt OF Etampubs.
ITaoiei TCV8 acnu le domiBr 1
Je venz toub le prdter.
Poarez Tons me lea donner 1
Je ne pais Tons les donner.
Vntn Mre pent 11 le loi envoyer 1
n ne Tent pM le Ini envoyer.
Qai rent le leur prfttert
Penoone ne vent Id leor pr5ter.
Snvoyei les nous.
Ke Dons lee enyoyes pM
Bonnes nous en.
Me leor en envoyez pM.
8n?oyeB le leor, poor let oonJenter.
Jt pnla TOII8 Vy envoyer.
WUlytmgiveUUw?
IwiUlendUio you.
Can you give tkem tonuf
J cannot give them to you.
Can yowr brother tend U to hum}
He vnll not send U to kim.
Who wiU lend Uta tkem?
No one wiU lend U to tkem.
Send tkem to us.
Do not send tkem to us,
CHve us some {of U),
Do not tend tkem any.
Send it to tkem {in order) to tati^
tkem,
Jean send U to you tksro
EXBRCIBB 63.
Ckmmls, m. derk ; Qnire, but little ; Polsson, m. fisk ;
Connuannoe, f. acquain- Marchande de modes, f . Polog;ne, f. Poland t
tanosi manner ; Prftter, 1. to lend $
Croi-re, 4. ir. <» bdins g Montr-er, 1. to show ; Semaine, / vteek ;
Dotte, f. debt ; Oabli-er, 1. to forget ; Sbuvent, often ;
D-eroir, 8. to owe ; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, dl jomrnay,
1. Vouiez Tooa domier ce livra i mon frdre I 3. Je puis le lul
prater, maia je ne puis le ^ni donner. 3. Voalez voiia noua lea eiw
▼oyert 4. La marchande de modea pent voua lea envoyer. 6. Let
loi montrez vonaf 6. Je lea voia et je lea Ini montre. 7. Avez vooi
peur de noua lea prater! 8. Je n'ai paa pear de Tona lea prater. 9
Ne pooTez vooa none enToyer da poiaaon ? 10. Je ne poia roua en
eoToyer, je n*en ai gadre. 11. Voalez voaa lenr en parlerT 13. Je
venz leor en parler, ai je ne Tonblie paa. 13. Venez vona aoavent
lea voir I 14. Je viena lea voir totta lea matina, et toua les aoira. 15.
Ne leor parlez vona point de votie voyage en Pologne ? 16. Je lenr
en parle, niaia Ha ne vealent paa me croire. 17. Est-ce qae je roia mee
eonnaiaaanoea, le lundif 18. Vona lea voyez toua lea jonra de U
•emaine. 19. Voaa envoient ellea plna d'aigent qne le oommia da
notre marchandl 30. Ellea m'en enroient plaa que lai. 31. En
envoyez vooa an libraire ! ' 33. Je lai en envoie qnand je lui en dole.
S3. N'ftTez ▼ona paa tort de lai en enroyer 1 34; Je ne pida avoir
tort do payer mea dettea. 35. Da vona en dcmnent, oi lb voqo wt
fiilaiii qnaad vona on aves boaoiB.
Digitized
by Google
M LBBflOV XXXX.
EzxRCiSE 54.
1. Will you send as that letter! 3. I will send it to you, if you
will read it 3. I will read it if (st) I can. 4. Can you Ic nd me youf
pen ? 5. 1 can lend it to you, if you will take care oflt. [L. 22, (3.)]
6. May I speak to your father ? 7. You may speak to him, he is
here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I am
not afraid of forgetting it 10. Will y >u send them to him ? 11. 1
Intend to send them to him, if I have time. 12. Do you speak to
him of your journey 1 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I
speak to them of it 15. Can you communicate it to him? 16. I
have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac-
quaintances every Monday ? 18. 1 see them every Monday and every
Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them ? 20. I intend to
see them at your brother's and at your sister's. 21. Can you send
him there every day? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if he
wishes (i^U le veil/). 23. Can you give them to me ? 24. I can
give them to you. 25. Who will lend them books ? 26. No one
will lend them any. 27. Your bookseller is willing to sell them
good books and good paper. 28. Is be at home ? 29. He is at his
brother's. 30. Are you wrong to pay your debts ? 31. I am right
to pay them. 32. Will you send it to us ? 33. I am willing to send
it to you, if you want it 34. Axe you willing to give them to as I
85. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances.
LESSON XXIX. USgON TYlT.
U8B OF THB ABTIOUB (^ *J*J.)
1. The article le, la, les, as already stated, is used in French befort
110WIS taken in a general sense : —
Les iardins sent les omements des Gardens are ike ornaments of vH
vuiages f ( des campognes. iages and of rural districts,
2. The article is also used in Freneh, as in Englisli, before nouni
* taken in a particular sense : —
lies Jardini de ce village sont sa- T%e gardens of this village are ««.
perbes. perd,
8. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs and a4Joctivei
«aed tabetantively :<*-
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IiBSSOB ZZXZ.
lA parMM est odieaae.
^oiMsae
Idleness is odious.
cK
n'est pas toijoiin do- IToutA is not aiwafstracUMs^
Le liolre et le manger Boat nfices- fialing and drinking are necessary U
salres a la vio. ' Ufe.
4. The article is used before the names of eountries, proTiiiee%
xivers, winds and mountains : — [{ 77, (3.) (4.)]
Ia Jrancd est plus grande que France is larger tkan ItabM,
ritaiie.
La Normsadie est trto fertile. Normandy is veryferUk,
5. The article is used before titles :^-
Le g6n6ral Cavaignae.
I^ marichal Ney.
General Cavaignae.
Marshal Ney.
6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, JIfoimeur, M^
dttme^ Mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of
relatioDship : —
Monsieur le president
Madame la comtesse.
Mademoiselle votre soBur.
(Mr.) President,
{ Madam) Countess*
(Mtss) fowr sister.
7. The plural of Monsieur, Madame and MademxMeUe, is Measiewn^
Mesdames, and MesdemoiseUes.
8. The student should be carefhl to distinguish a noun taken in a
general or in a particular sense from one taken in a partitive i
«■»•]
Cfeneral or particular sense. Partitive setise.
Nous aimons les lirres, Nous avons des livres,
We Wsebooks. We have books i. e. some hooks.
Nods avons les livres, Vous aves 6crit des lettres.
We hone the ioeku Yon hav^ written leiterSfL e>
leUers.
RisuiiA OF Examples.
la modestie est aimabla
Le courage est indispensable au
giniraL
Les flenrs sont Tomement des Jar-
dms.
Las fleurs des jatdins de be chfttoau.
Avez Tous rintention de visiter la
France 1
^ai rintention do visiter Htalie.
Le capitaine Dnmont est fl ici 1
Lo miyor Gnillaume est chez lul.
Vojes voos Madame votre mArel
#0 vols Monsieur votre Mre.
Ite Mra B'aime pas les kmaBfoa.
Modesty is amioNe.
Cowrage is indispensable to thegem'
raL
flowers are the omament ofgarden»$
TV flowers of the gardens of lUf
Do you intend visiting F^-muif
J intend visiting Italy,
Is captain Dumn^ here ?
Major WUUam is at home. '
Do you see your mothet 7
I see your orother,
MySretherunHfondeffnmm
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
EzxROzsx 56.
Alm-er,!. to be fond of,l>em!&Ta-%r, 1. ta dvfell,UK;wBM,m,v^g9tmKi4
UfHkes Huei hxAn^frrf
Ai>port-er, 1. to bring i fitudi-er, 1. to study; Laudi, m. Mendmft
Bois, m. wood, forest ; Fleur, f. flower ; Pdche, £ foaeh ;
Oapitame, m. captain ; Fraise, f. strawberrvf Prone, t plum,
Caporftl, m. corporal; Framboise, t raspberry /
1. Aimez voas 1« pain on la viande ? 2. Paime le pain, la viandBi
et le frnit 9. Avons nous dea ptohes dans notre jaidin? 4. Nona jr
avons dea p^chea, dea fraises, dea firaoiboiaea et dea cerises. 6. Mon-
aienr votre fr^re aime-t-il lea cerises t 6. II n'aime gu^re lea cerisesi
11 pr6f^re les prnnea. 7. Avez vooa dea ISgnmes? 8. Je n'aime
point les legumes, b. Nous n^avona ni legumes ni fruits. [L.8. 3,4.]
10. Nous n'aimona ni les legumes ni les fruits. 11. Allez vous tons
les jours dans le bois de Monsieur votre fr^et 12. Je n*y vais paa
tona les joura. 13. Votre soeur apporte-t-elle lea fleura t 14. EUe
lea apporte. 16. Madame votre m^re apporte-t-elle . dea deora!
16. Elle en aj^rte tons lea lundis. 17. Voyez vous le g6n6ial Ber-
trand ? 18. Je ne le vols paa, je vols le caporal Duoh^ne. 19. Mea*
demoiaeliea voa sceura aont elles fatigu^eal 20. Mes aoeura aont
fiitigueea d'6tudler. 21. Monsieur le president eatJl chez loil
29* Nom Monaieur, il eat chez Monsieur le colonel Dumont. 23. De-
meure-t-il loin d*ici? 24. D ne demeure paa loin dMcL 26. Oh
demeure-t-ilf 26. II demeure chez Monsieur le capitaine Iiebnin.
SzsitoiSB 56.
1. Does yonr aister like flowem? 2. My aiater likea flowera, and
mif brother la fond of books. 8. Is he wrong to like books t 4. No,
Sir, he is right to like books and flowers. 5. Have you many flowen
in your gardens? 6. We have many flowera and much iVuil 7. It
your couain fond of raspberries ? 8. My cousin is fond of raapberriea
and * atrawberriea. 9. Is the captain fond of praises ? 10. He is noi
fond of praises. 11. Haa the gardener brought yon vegotablea^
12. He has brought me vegetables and fruit* 13. Is he ashamed to
bring you vegetablea? 14. He is neither ashamed nor afraid to sell
Tegetables. 15. Is your mother tired? 16. My mother is not tired.
17. la your brother at colonel D'a? 18. He lives at colonel D*s, but
he is not at home at present (d priserd). 19. How many peaehea
have you? 20. I have not many peaches, but I have many plnma.
81. Doea Capt B. like peaehea? 22. He likes peaches,* plam%
• ThesfeoAsntniaMaotftiieilbattliearltototoxepeaiMbelbreefViiy
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
» iod Btmwberrief . 33. Are yon gofnig into (dmu) yow
lirolher^s wood! 24. I go there every morning. 26. Is general L
heret 26. No, Sir, he is not here, he is at year eousin*s. 27. I>oes
your friend, General H. live far from here? 28. He does not live far
Irom here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in
yonr garden? 30. We have very fine flowers; we are fond of
flowers. 31. Do yon give them to him ? 32. I give them to yon.
33^ I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some.
ML Do not give us any.
' ^ "^ —
LESSON XXX LEgON ttt
USB or THB ABTIOLB COHTiHUEP.
1. Acyeetives of nation will, aoeording to R. 3 of the last
be preceded by the article :—
n apprend le fVaocais, Vanglais, He teams S)rtnckt SngUtk, Cfermmm
rallumand et ritalieu. and ItaUan,
3. Alter the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad-
jeetive of nation, taken substantively:—
YOreflfi^reparleeqMigttolet porta- Your hratker ipeois Spamitk mU
gais. PortugwM,
8. Hie artiole is not used in French before the number which fol-
lows the name of a sovereign. This number, (unless it h^JttU and
Moond) must be the cardinal, and not the c^dinal : — [{ 26, (3.)]
Tons aves lliistoire de Henri qua- You have tke kiOarp of Btnff ikt
tre. J!\mrtk,
4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not In
French preceded by un, une, a or on, unless it be quidified by an ad-
jective or determined by the following part of the sentence.
Totre ami est m^decin. Your friend is a pkfiician,
Kotre fHre est avocat Owr trotiter is a iarrister,
Yotre ami est un bon m6decfai. Your friend is a good pkffddam,
Kotre fif^ftre est un avocat o61ibre. Qw frotker is a cMraUd odooetAn*
5. Prxsxiit of thx iNDiCAnrs of tbb Ibrsoular VnM;
AmaNnas, to&orift; GoNNAtTas, t9l:fi0i0; Savois, I0 linow;
ra^rends, / Umm, do Je ocvmais, / Mmw, or Je saia, / knm^ m 4o
liam^wamieamingf do know t knowi
Tuapprends, Tuconnais Tusals,
n apfwend, II ccmnalt, n salti
Vous apprenoBs, Nous connaissoiiB, Nons savea%
Tons Apprenoi, Vous connalssea, Vous savei,
Hi apmmsttt Ds comaiasent Ds savent
Digitized
by Google
LBBSOB XXX.
6. Connattre means to hi acquainted with ; savoir, to hunot is uNI
only of things.
Oounaittez voos ce Fran^ais, cot
Anglais, cet Allemdod, et cet
EsiMgnoll
Saves Tons le ftan^is, Taoglals,
i'aHeinapd, et respagnol 1
Do you know Hat Frtnckman^ I.Ul
Engliskman, Uuu, German^ ami
that Spaniard ?
Do you know French, Enghshf iMr^
man, and Spanish ?
R£8UMd OF Examples.
Le capitaine O. sait il le fran9ais 1
II ue le sait pas, mais il I'apprend.
Counaissez vous le Docteur L. 1
Je DO le connais pas, mais Je sais oik
il demenre.
Ge monsieur est il peintre 1
Non, il est architecte.
Ce monsieur est un architecte dis-
tiogui.
Ce Fran9ais parle grec et arabe.
n parte le grsc. I'arabe et I'itallen.
hrez Tons vn Charles dix, frire de
Lonisdiz-hi^tl
Does captain O. know French?
He does not know il^ but learns iL
Do you know Dr. L. ?
I am not acquainted teiih him, but A
know where he Uves.
Is that gentleman a painter?
iV0, he tsan archiieet.
7%at gentleman is a distinguitUd
arduteet.
That Frenchman speaks Cheek and
Arabic.
He speaks the Greek, Arabic, and
Italian languages.
Have you seen Charles the T^enth, m
brother of Louis the Eighteenth?
ExsRonx 57.
Allemand, e, Chrman ; Hongrois, e, Hungarian ; Qnatre, fimr ;
Ancien, ne, ancients Langne, f. language; Russe, Russian
Anglais, e, En^Ush; Modeme, modem i Su6dois, e,
Chinois, e, Chinese ; Polonais, e, Polish, Pole ; Swede ;
Danois, e, Danish, Dane ; Quatorse, fowrteen ; Tapissier, m. uphotderer.
Grec, que, Greek i
1. Connaissez Yousce Monsieur? 2. Oui, Madame, je le connais
fortbien. 3. Savez vous de quel pays ilest? 4. II est hongrois.
6. Parle-t-il allemand? 6. II parle allemand, polonais, russe, sud-
doisy et danois. 7. N'est il pas m^decin? 8. Non, Monsieur, avant
la rcTolution, il ^tait capitaine. 9. Avez vous envie d'spprendrt. Ic
russe t 10 J'ai envie d'ap* rendre le russe et le grec modeme. 1 1.
Connaissez vous les n> 'ttsieurs qui pcrlent ^ votre sceur? 12. J*
ne les connais pas. j3. Savez vous oii ils demenrent! 14. lis de-
meurent chez le tapissier de votre frdre. 15. N^avez vous pas This*
toire de Louis (\uat«rze, dans votre bibliothdque ? 16. Je n^ai ni
eelle de. Louis quatorze, ni celle de Henri quatre. 17. Avez voua
tort d*apprendre le chinois ? 18. Je n'ai pas tort d'apprendre le eht*
nois. 19. Vos compagnons apprennent ils les langues anciennes f
90. Us savent plusieurs langues anciennes et modernes. 31. ParUi
voua angbuaf 32. Je sais Tanglais et je le parle. 28. GoimaiaMB
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Lftitoir xtzi. M
vmM PAngljufl que nous vojronftt 94. Je ne le eonnaia pas. S& L
ne me coonait poa et je ne le connaia paa.
ExsRCiBS 58.
1. Does oni physician know French ? 3. He knowa French, En^
liafa, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician? 4. He
kDOWs him yery well. 6. Are you acquainted with that lady? & I
am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede ? 8.
She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do yon
intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in (en) English.
II. Does she know English? 12. She knows several languages;
die speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your
brother a colonel? 14. No, Sir, he is a captain. 16. Is your up-
holsterer a Dane ? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are
yon a Frenchman? 18. No, Sir, I am a Hungarian. 19. Do yon
know Chinese? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modem Greek.
21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to
learn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who lives at
your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 26. I am not ac-
quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of
books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian I 29. I have no de*
aire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31.1 have but little
time. 32. What do yon learn ? 83. We learn Latin, Greek, French,
and German. 8^4. Do you not learn Spanish? 86. We do not
leamit
LESSON XXXI. LEgON XXXl
RBLATHTK PBONOUK8, (} 38).
1. Qui, used as nominative, may relate to persona or to things :—
Les fleurs qui aont dans votre Jardin. Thejlowers wkich are in your garden,
2. Qui, used as the object of a verb, can only be said of persona.
It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition :—
Qui Totrc fVftre voit in Whmndoesfour hrolheraee?
Do qui paries vous ce matin 1 Cfwhom do you apeak tkU morningt
8. Que may be said of persons or things. It can never be undei*
atood, and must be repeated before eveiy verb. [L. 19. 1.]
Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see.
Lea langnes qne nous apprenons. Th£ languages which we le^Nrn,
4. Ce que is employed for that whiclh or its equivalent wto.v—
Ce que vous apprenes est utile. Thai wkick you team is utMU
TroiveB vooa oe que vooa chercbes. DoyonfindwheAyeutiekJU t
Digitized by LjOOQ IC
100
itftsoir xxxh
& Qqa aiwweri to the Engltili proaoim uJmi^ vaed abaolvCdy W
foro ft veib: —
Qne penaoz toiis de oelal What do you think ofikmL7
6. Quoi, when not used as an exclamation, is generally preeedad
ly a preposition, and relates only to things :—
De qnoi youlex Tons parler 1
A qnoi penses tousI
^wkatdoytmwiskiotipMk?
Of what do you think ?
7. Lequel, m., laquelle, €, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, f. p., tohichy ui
which one^ [L. 18. 6.] or which cnes^ relate to persons or things. Thej
may be preceded by a preposition :~^
Lequel arez Tons apportd 1 Which one httve ffou ir&ughl 7
Duquel parlez yens % Of which one do you ipeak ?
8. Dont, of tohidty or cf tohcm^ tohogCy may relate to persons or
things, in the masculine or feminine, singular or plural. It can nevor
be used absolutely and must always be preceded by an antecedent*
It is preferable to de qui or duquel, &c.
Lea fleurs dont yous me paries. T%eJUnoers of which you tpeak to sm.
Les demoiselles dont votre sceur tous The young ladies of whom your ntW
parle. spooks to you.
0. PrBSSNT 07 THK IlfDICATiyX 07 THB IbRBQULAR VkBBSi
Di-EE, 4. to say. Fai-rc, 4. to make^ to do. Hbtt-rk, 4. to puL
Je dis, Isay, do say^ or Je fltis, / make or do, J Jemets, Iput,dopmi,m
am saying. am making or doing. amfipuUi<tg.
Tudit,
Ildit,
Nous disons,
Yous dites,
nsdisent
Tufltis,
Ufklt.
Nonstkisoos,
Yous fkites,
Us font
RASUMft 07 ExAMPLxa.
Tnmets,
Umet,
Nous mettons,
Yous mettes,
nsmettent
qui
Connaisses yous le monsieur
parte k notre cousin 1
Je connais oelul qui lui parle.
Coraprenez tous ce que je vous d!s1
Qui vova a parl4 de cette afikire 1
L' Anglais dont tous paries est id.
L'Espsgnol dont la sobut est id.
Que AUes tous oe matin 1
Que dites tous k notre ami 1
Nous fklsons ce que tous nous dites.
Pour qui fkites tous cet habit 1
De quo! parWz tous k Totre ttkre 1
Nous fidsoos oe que nous pouTons.
Moos parlous de ce dont tous parks.
Do you know the gentlewtam wkt
spooks to otvr courin 7
I know him who speaks to Aim.
Do you understand what I saytomm7
Who has sffokon to you of this afirirf
ne Englishman of whom you spook
is here.
The Spaniard whose sistor is here.
What do you do this moming7
What do you say to ourfriend7
We do that which you say tons.
Fbr whom do you make this €oot7
Of what do you speak to your krotktrt
We do what we can.
We speak of that ofwueh you spook.
Digitized
by Google
tBStov xatzt 101
BxxBdss 59.
Antf'et,l.i0mnwtg Habillement, m. inesr, P1aiiir,ir.jAkitw«i
Avec,iPiU; clothes t Protquo, o^nmu^I
Cofline, m. trunk; HoIlaDdals, e, Dutch i Rien, wlhing;
Commftnd-er. 1. to order f Linge, m. Unen ; Soulier, m. mm/
fioosaais, e, Scotch s Monsieur, m. gentknumi Vrai, e, true.
Sofiuitk m. chiidg Mym, m. name;
1. Qui eonnaistez toqs? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandius doni
^ous nous parlez. 3. Quelles k9on3 apprenez vons 1 4. Nona ap-
prenoaa lea le^ona que voua ndua recommandez. 6. Ce que je TOiia
dia eat il vrai ? 6. Ce que voua nous ditea est vnL 7. De q«i nom
paries voua? 8w Noua voua parlous des ficoaaaia qui viennent d'ani*
ver. 9. Savez vouaqui vient d^arrivert 10. Je saia que le monaienr
que votre fr^re connaH vient d'arriver. 11. Voa aoaura que font
elles? 12. Ellca ne font presque rien, ellea n'ont presque rien k faire.
13. Que mettez vous dans votre coffre? 14. Nous y mettons ce que
nous avona, noa habillements et notre linge. 16. N*y mettez voua
paa voa souliers? 16. Nous y mettona les souliers dont nous avona
besoin. 17. De quoi avez vous besoin? 18. Noua avona beaoin de
ce que nous avona. 19. Get enfant salt il ce qu'il fait? 20. U salt
ce qu'il fait et ce qu^ii dit. 21. Ne voulez voua pas le leur dire?
22. Avee beaueoup de plaisir. 23. Faites vous ce que le marchand
vous commande ? 24. Nous faiaona ce qull nous dit. 25. II parte
de ce dont voua parlez.
Etkrcisb 60.
1. Have you wbat (ce dont) you want? 2. We have what we want
8. Is the gentleman whom you know, here? 4. The lady of whom
you speak is here. 5. Is she just arrived ? [U 26. 2.] 6. She is just
arrived. 7. Do you know that gentlemwi ? 8. 1 know the gentleman
who ia speaking with your father. 9. Do you know hia name ? 10. 1 do
not know his name, but I know where Ins lives (demeure). 1 1. What
do yon do every morning? 12. We do almoat nothing; we have very
ittle to do. 13. Does the tailor make your clothes? 14. Ho makea
my clothes, my brother*s, and my cousin's. 16. Do you know what
yon say? 16. 1 know what I^say, and what I do. 17. Do you know
the Scotchman of whom your brother speaks ? 18. 1 know him well.
19 What does he put into bis trunk? 20. He puts his clothes.
21. Is that which you say, true? 22. What I aay is true. 23. Do
yoQ understand that which I say to you? 24. I understand all thai
you aay. 26. Of whom does your brother speak ? 26. He apeaka of
the gentkauui whoae aiatar k here* 97. Ia your brother wrong to
Digitized
by Google
UM Litsoir xxxtu
do what he dotdvf 38. He eannot be wrong to do it 29. What »■
yoQ doing? 80 I am doing that which you do. 31. Where do yoa
put my books! 83. Into (darui) your brother^s trunk. 33. la your
Arother here ? 34. He is not here. 35. He is at my brother^a, or at
uy fiither'a.
LESSON xxxn. LEgoN xxxn.
!• The verb mettre is used in the same sense as the English to put
mif in speaking of garmenta. Mettre le couvert, means to lay A§
dotk, ortetthe table:^
Quel chapean mettes tous 1 What hat do yen put on?
Votre frAre met son habit noir. Y(nvr brother puts on his blaek coaL
Le domestique va mettre le couvert The servant is going to taiif the etoilL
3. Oter means to take off^ to lake atoay, to take out :~^
Mod domestique 6te son chapeaiL My servant takes off his kal.
Otez CO livre de la table. Take away thai book from the taHe.
N'a-t-on pas 6t6 le diner 1 Have they not taken away the dinner f
. 8. The verb^faire is used before another verb, in the sense of to
ftave, to cause.
Yotre frftre fait il bitfr une maison 1 Does your brother have a house bmU ?
D en fait bltir plus d'uno. He has more than one bmlL
4. It may be used in the same sense before its own infinitive >—
Je ihis fairs nn habit de dn^). / have a doth coat made.
Vous fattcs fiiire des souliers de cuir. You have leather shoes made*
6. Vouloir [L. 38. 6.] followed by dire is used in the aense of to
fiieavi.*— »
Que vonlez vous dire 1 What do you mean ?
Votre soenr que veut ello dire 1 What does your sister mean 7
RfisuMjft OF Examples.
Ne mettes vous pas vos habits 1
J'ai peur de les giter.
Ke portez vous jamais votre habit
noirl
Je le mets tous les samedis.
Pourquoi n'dtez vous pas votre
manteau 1
J'ai trop frokl, J'ai peur de I'dter.
Faites vous raccommoder vos sou-
liers 1
Je fkis raccommoder mes habits.
le (his ftire one pairs do bottea.
Do you not put on yo¥.r dotka 7
I am afraid of spoiling them.
Do you never wear your black coat 7
I put it on every Saturday,
Why do you not take off your doak f
lam too cold, I am afraid to take tt
off.
Do you hone yowr shoes mended7
I hone my clothes mended.
Digitized
by Google
LSSBOV XXXIL,
IM
!• IUh ereiaer nn pirits.
Voire ftrire que veut il dire 1
Que ret2t dir^ cela 1
OgU Be yeut rien dire.
Otez VOI18 vos aoulicrs et TO0 bu 1
Jo n'dte ni les uhb ni les autres.
Le dimsi est pr^t ; le domestique va
mettre le couvert.
Voulez YOUB 6ter le convert 1
Je Tais mettre le convert
Je vaia dter le convert
/ kaive a loeS duf.
What does yowr hrether 1
What does thai mean 7
Thai means nothing.
Do you take off your shoes and stoek*
ings?
I take off neither these nor those.
Dinner is ready: the servant U
going to toy the clcth.
Will you take awa^ the things fi om
ihetabU?
I am going to lay the elath
J am going to take away the thmgs.
1. to
Prftt, e, ready s
Raccommod-er,
mend;
Tout-a-l'henre, immedi*
ately;
Uniforme, m. uniforms
Velours, m. vdvn
EzsRCiss 61.
Apothicaire, m. drug-Qit-er^ 1, to spoil ;
gist ; Gilet, m. loaislcoeU ;
Apr^f after; Grand, e, large, very;
Cave, f. cellar: Manteau, m. cloak f
Creua-er, 1. to dig ; Noir, e, black ;
Pimanche, m. Sunday; Pantonfle, f. slippers
Viner, ta. dinfier ; Pourquoi, toAy;
F&cbd, e, sorry, angry;
1. Le general N. met il son nniforme! 2. lime le met point
8. Pourquoi ne portez vous point votre manteau noir f 4. J*ai penr
de le g&ter. 5. Mettez vous vos souliers de satin tons les matins?
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanehes. 7. II est midi ; le domestique
met il le convert? 8. II ne le met pas encore ; il va le mettre tont-^
llienre. 9. Le diner n'est il pas pr6t ? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-il
le convert? 11. H ne I'6te pas encore, 11 n'a poa le temps de r6ter.
12. Otez vous votre habit quand vous avez chaud ? 13. Je Tdte
quand j'ai tr'op chaud. 14. Faites vous faire un habit de drap? 15.
Je fais faire un habit de drap et nn gilet de satin noir. 16. Ne faites
vous point raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites
vous pas creuser une cave? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave.
19. L'apothicaire que veut il dire? 20. H veut dire qu'il a besoin
d*argent 31. Savez vous ce que cela veut dire? 22. Cela vent dire
que votre fr^re est f^h6 centre vous. 23. Avez vous envie de met-
tre votre manteau ? 24. Joi Tintention de le mettre, car j'ai grand
iroid. 25. Je vais Tdter, car j'ai chaud-
ExsRCiBS 62.
1. Do yon take off your coat ? 2. I do not take off my coat, I put
tt on. 8. Do you take off your cloak when you are cold ? 4. When
I am cold I put it on. 6. Does your little boy take off his shoes and
stockings ? [} 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put
Unm on agaia (fwmtire). 7. Does that Utile girl lay thoelotfa I 8.
Digitized
by Google
ID4 ifittotf txxtth
She laya theeloth everydflcy at noon (ffiuK). 9. Docs she taloe awsy
the things after dinner? 10. She takes away the tilings every day.
11. Do yoa intend to have a coat made I 13. I intend to have a coal
made. 13. I am going to liave a coat and a vest made. 14. Does
yonr. brother have his boots mended? 15. He has them mended
la What does your son mean ? 17. I do not know what he means.
18. Is he angry with me or with my brother? 19. He is neither
ngry with yon nor with yonr brother. 30. Is he afraid to spoil his
coat? 21. He is not afraid to spoil it. 23. Does the dmggist want
money? 23. He does not want money. 34. Has your sister taken
my book from the table? 26. She has not taken it away. 26. Why
do yon take off yonr shoes? 27. I take them off because they hart
me (jrinenl), 38. Do you intend to have a house built? 29. I in-
tend to have one built 30. Does the tailor spoil your coat?. 31.
He does not spoil it 32. Who spoils your clothes ? 33. No person
spoils them. 34 What hat do you wear ? 35. I wear a black hat
LESSON XXXm. LEgON Tcxxm
VKIPXRSONAL VXBnS.
I The unipersonal verb is conjugated only in the third person
shigular of a tense. Its nominative pronoun il, it, is used absolutely,
i. e. it represents no noun previously expressed.
n pleut ai\jourd'hui. Il rai?ts to-^y.
2. The unipersonal verb assumes the termination of the class or
conjugation to which it belongs. Some verbs are always uniper*
sonal, and will be found in J 63. Others are only occasionally so,
and if irreguhir, will be foi^iQd in the personal form in the same } 62.
8. Pkxssnt Of THS Indicative of ths Unipxbsonal VsKBa,
T Avota, to be there: Pleutois, to rain : Njeioek, to sn&m:
II y a, there is, there are, II pleut, U rains^ it is li nelge, it snows, U U
raining. snowing,
GaiLBB, to hail. Oeler, to freeze, Dkobles, to thaw,
n ^le (^ 40.) U haiis, U D ^le (^ 49.) U freezes, H d6gdle (^ 49.) U aaws,
u hailing. U is freezing, it is thawing,
4. n y a, means ihere is, or there ore, and may be foLowed ny a
lingular or plural nonn» [} 61, 2.]
n y a da gibier an march6. There is game in the markei.
nyadaspomnMsdaasvotieJardiiL 7%ere are applet mymrgm^m
Digitized
by Google
ittteii zxxixi.
10ft
Al In rdaiioD to tiie weather, the verb fiui* k vm4 xmlipmmmXtf
In the eame nuuiner as the English verb to ie.
It is Jim PiMlkgr ir-iof.
It is warmt it is coU,
n Ikit beaa temps aujourd'hiii
Uikitchaud,ilfiiittroid.
R£8UM£ 07 EZAMFLKS.
Plent il ce matin 1
II ae pleat fKU, il neige.
11 va plcuvoir ce matin.
He g61e-t-il pas ce matin 1
11 ne ^lo pas, il fait du bronillard.
Y a-t-il dn sacre chez vous 1
n 7 en a beanoonp chez mon flr^re.
Y a-t-il plusleors personnes chez
moil
D 7 a plus de cent personnes.
N'7 a-t-il personne a I'^glise 1
n n'v a encore personne.
KstUtroptdtl
An oontraire, il est trop tard.
Fait il ft-oid on chaud ac^nrdlini 1
n fait chaud et hnmide.
Fait il dn vent on dn broulllard 1
II fait UD temps bien dtagrteble.
Does il rain this morning 7
It does not rain^ U snows.
It is going to rain this moming.
Does it not freeze this morning 7
It does notfreexe^ it is foggy-
Is there any sugar at yow house 7
There is a great deal at mybrother*s»
Are there several persons at nuf house 7
T%ere are mote than one hundred
persons.
Is there nobody at church ?
There isasyetTut one there.
Is it too soon ?
On the contrary, it is too late.
Is it cold or voarm tO'day7
It is warm and damp.
Is it windy or foggy ?
It is very
EzsRClSB 63.
Assemble, f. assemUyf Convert, e, dondy^ Mannscrit, m. amwi^
party; ficurie, f. sto^e ; script;
Biblioth^ne, f. Ubraryi fipais, se, thick ; Veau, dl veali
Bronillard, m.fogs Foin, m. hays Vent. m. winds
Chambre, f. room ; Gibier. ul gam£ ; YolalUe, f. poultry,
Cinquante, Jlfty ; Hnmide, damp ;
1. Qnel temps fait il aujourd'hni? 2. D fait un temps snperba.
3. Fa\ il tr^s beau temps aujourd'hui? 4. II fait un temps couvert
et hi jnide. 5. Plent il beaueoup ce matin ? 6. II ne pleut pas en-
core, mais 11 ya pleuvoir. 7. Fait il du vent ou du brouilkrd? 8. H
ne fait pas de vent 9. Le brouillard est trds epais. IG. Combien
de personnes 7 a^t-il k I'assembl^e ? 11. II 7 a plus de deux centa
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. N'7 a^t^il pas beaueoup de manuscrita
dans votre biblioth^que? 13. 11 n'7 en a pas beaueoup, il n'7 en a
que cinqnante-einq. 14. Fait il trop froid pour vous dans eette
chambre ? 15. 11 n'7 fait ni trop froid ni trop chand. 16. Y a-t-il
beaueoup de foin dans votre 6curie ? 17. II 7 en a assez pour mon
cheval. 18. Restez vous k la maison qnand il pleut 1 19. Qnand il
^nt je leate k la maison, mais qnand il fait bera tempa jo vaiii choi
eonabL 80. Y a.t41 da laviande an marcMt 91. Df «■ n
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IM I.B0SOV XXZIT.
biUKOs^ 11 y a amal du giUer. SS. H y a d« vean, dn mouton •!
delavolailld. 23. N*ya-t-il pas anaal des legumes etdes fhuta*
S4. n n*y eaa pas. 26. II y en a anssL
Exercise 64.
1. Are yon cold this morning t 2. I am not cold, it is wsrm this
morning. 8. Is it foggy or windy ? 4. It is neither foggy nor windy,
It rains in torrents (d verse), 5. Is it going to min or to snow ! 6.
It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and foggy. 8.
Is there any body at year brother's to-day 1 9. My brother is at
nome, and my sister is at church. 10. Is there any meat in the mar-
ket! 11. There is meat and poultry. 12. Is it too warm or too
cold, for your sister, in this room? 13. It is not so warm in this
room, as in your brother^s library. 14. Are there good English
books in your sister^s library ? 15. There are some good ones. 16.
Are there peaches and plums in your garden? 17. There/ are many.
18. Do you remain at your brother^s, when it snows? 19. When it
snows we remain at home. 20. Are there ladies at your mother's t
21. Your two sisters are there to-day. 22. Have you time to go
and fetch them? 23. I have no time this morning. 24. Is your
horse in the stable ? 26. It is not there, it is at my brother's. 26.
Does it hail this morning? 27. It does not hail, it freezes. 28.
What weather is it this morning? 29. It is very fine weather.
80. Is it too warm ? 81. It is neither too warm nor too cold. 82.
Is it going to freeze? 83. It is going to snow. 34. Does it snow
#very day ? 86. It does not snow every day, but it snows very often
(iouven/).
LESSON XXXIV. LEgON XXXIV.
PLACE OF THE ADVERB. (^ 136.)
1, In simple tenses, the adverb generally follows the tcrb, ind la
placed as near it as possible :~^
Votre commis ^crit trte bien. Yowr dtrk writes very leeU.
Cette demuiBelle lit trds mal. T%ai young lady reads very Utdly,
2. Wjen a verb is in the infinitive, the two negatives ne and paii
fte a«id rien, should be placed before it:—
M» pas partoTp ne pes Ifare. Na to speak, mai ie rmd.
Digitized
by Google
Lsssoir xzxxr. 10)
8. Th« adTerb anez, enough^ tolerably^ priwedes genemlly Uw
other adverbs. It precedes also adjeetives and nouns :~^
Vous ficrivez asst^z correctement. Ycu write mtUy comtCbf.
Yous avez asstiS de livres. Ycm havt looks ewntgk,
Cet enfant est assez attentif. That child is atUnlive enough.
4. Voici means, here is ; voillL, there is ;—
Void le livre qne tous aimez. Here is the book which you Uke,
YtMk le monsieur dont tous parlez. There is the gentleman of wham ym
b. Dans is used for in or into, when the noun which follows it is
preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral
adjective. [} 142, (2.)] :—
Le crayon est dans le pupitre. 7%« peiieU is in the desk,
Mettez oette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trunk.
6. En renders <o, in, or into, coming after the verbs to 5e, to gOj to
reside, followed by the name of a part of the earth, a country, or
province :—
Notre ami est en France. Our friend is in Prance.
Vous allez en Italic. You go to Italy.
7. The preposition & is used for the words at or to, in or into, b^
fore the name of a toMm, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men-
tioned above : —
n va & Paris le mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month,
8. The same preposition is used in the expressions, di la campag]ie»
4 la ville, ^ la chassei k la p6che, &c.
Nous aliens k la campagne. We go into the country.
Vous n'allez pas h la \ille. You do not go to the aty.
Je vais k la chasse et Ula pdche. / go hunting and fishing.
9. Ikdicatiys Pkessnt ow tbs lRR£auLAB Verbs,
CoNom-as, 4. to conduct. ficai-RS, 4. to write. Lz-se, 4. to read.
Je Gondnis, / conduct^ i^ J'teris, / write, do write^ Je lis, / read, do read or
conduct, or am con- ox am, writing ; am readings
ducting i
Tb conduis, Tu ^cris, Tn lis,
n conduit, II 6crit, D lit,
KoDS conduisons, Nons 6crivons, Nous lisons,
Vous conduisez, Vous ficrivez, Vous lisei,
lb condnlsent lis icrivenk Us lisent
RftSUlCfi OF EXAMPLSS.
Votre parent Mii U bieni
XI tait assez bion ot asses vlte.
leva ttvODS assea da Uvies.
Does yew relation write weU?
He writes well ementgh emd ryiii%
enough.
We hene ho$ki em^K
Digitized
by Google
lot
liVttOV JBXSIT*
VOQS MMBOI UMt irttOltlft 4 MM
lecons.
Voila la demoiaelle dont vous parlez.
Voire cheval n'est H pM dans le
champ 1
II n'y est pas, i1 est dans le Jardin.
Allez V01U en France cette aim6e 1
Noiis aliens & Paris et k Lyon.
Ou condoises yom oe Jeune homme 1
Je le condais en Alleraagne.
Demeurez vous a la ville 1
Nons demearons k la campagne.
Allei Tons souvent k la chasse 1
Nous alloDs qaelquefois a la p6che.
sons.
There is tJu yaun^ ladf of lekm jwti
spuUc.
h not your hcru va ike fiild?
It is fu4 there f Uisinike garden.
Do you go to Pranee tkis year?
We goto Paris and to /jyons,
Wher< do you take this young wimnf
I take him to Qermany.
Do you live in the town 7
We live in (he country.
Do you go often kuniing?
We sometimes go fishing.
Anoctt, m. partner f
Canif, m. penknife;
Campagne, f. country;
Chasse, f. hunting ;
Commls, m. derkg
EXSRCISE 05.
Port, very;
Pdche, tjlshing;
Prusse, f. Prussia;
Rapidement, rapidly;
Bend-re, 4. to return;
Bxdaae, f. SkrtlxerimUi
Terre, f. /arm, estatoy
T\\\e,t town, city s
Vite, quUkiy;
Voyage, xa.jowrr^.
1. ficrivez vous encore la m6me leyon ! 3. Je n^ecris pms la m&me,
j*en 6cri8 nne autre. 3. Votre eommia 6crit il rapidement 1 4. n
^rit fort bien, mais il n*^rit pas ylte. 6. N*avez vona paa aaaei
d*argent pour acbeter cette terre ? 6. J'ai asaez d'ai;gent, mais j'ai
rintention de faire un voyage en France. 7. VoiU votre livre, en
avez vona beaoin? 8. Je n'en ai paa besoin, j*en ai on autre. 9. Avez
T0U8 encore beaoin de mon canif? 10. Je n'en al plna beaoin, je vaia
▼Otts le rendre. 11. Notre cousin demeure-tol & la ville? 12. II ne
demenre plus k la ville, il demenre k la campagne. 13. Aime-t-il k
aller k la chasse? 14. II n'aime pas k aller k la chasse. 15. II va
tons lea joura k la p6che. 16. Notre associe eat il & Paria ou ji
Rouen? 17. II eat k Marseille. 18. OOi avez vous Tintention de con-
duire votre fils? 19. Je vais le conduire en Italic. 90. Demeurez
vona k Milan ou k Florence? 31. Je ne demeure ni k Milan ni k
Florence, je demeure k Turin. 23. Votre ami demeure-t-il en Suisse?
83. II ne demeure plna en Suisse, il demeure en Prusae. 34. Votre
domoatique eat il ^ T^glise? 36. Non, Monsieur, il eat ^l T^cole.
ExsRCisx 66.
1. Doea your clerk write aa well aa jour bob? 3. He writes toler-
abij well, but not so well as tny son. 8. I^ave jou books enough
in your library? 4. I have not books enough, but I intend to buy
flome more. 6. Here ia your aiater'a letter, will you xead it? (X. I
intend to read it 7. Doeayonr aim Uke togoMiing? 8.Ba1ikat
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
U gB nMng mod kmitiog. 9. When does be like to go fiehiiif t
10. When I am in the country. 1 1. What do you do when you are
in the eity ? 12. When I am in tlie city, I read and learn my leasou.
13. Do yoQ intend to go to France this year? 14. 1 intend to go to
Gennany. 15. Will yon go to the city if it (s'il) rains? 16. When it
isins I always remain at home. {R. 1.] 17. How many friends liave
yon in the city? 18. 1 have many friends there. 19. Are there many
English in Fkanee ? 20. There are many English in France and in
Italy (Xfoite). 31. Are there more English in Germany than in Italy ?
93. There are more English in Italy than in Germany. 23. Is it fine
weather in Italy ? 34. It is yery fine weather there. 25. Does it
often freeze there? 36. It freezes sometimes there, but not often.
37. Does that young lady read as well as her sister? 28. She reads
better than her sister, but her sister reads better than L 29. Is there
any one at your house? 30. My father is at home. 31. Is your
brother-in-law absent? 32. My brother-in-law is at your house.
33. There is no one at home to-day.
LESSON XXXV. LEgON XXXV.
1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in Engiiao.
It may be rendered by one, toe, ihey^ f0op2^ ^^v according to tl%
context On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a
partiealar person, [; 41, (4.) (6.) } 113.] :—
On doit hoDorer la vertu. We should kcmor virtue.
On nous apporte de I'argent Money is brought to %s.
2. As may be seen in the l&st example, on is often the nominative
of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive^
U 113,(1.)]:-
Cm dit que votre 6poufle est ici. tt is said that your tnfe is hert.
On raoonte des bistoires singulidres. Singular histories are reUUed,
On r6colte beancoup de bl£ en Mu£h wheat is harvested (grown) m
France. JFYance.
8. Avoir lieu, answers to the English exptession, to tdke fiace >^
Ccla a lien tons les Jours. That takes place every day,
4 Aa lieu de, answers to the English, instead of. The veib whidi
MItfwa it must, warding to Rule 2, L. 91, be pat m the iBfinitm>—
AvHrad'MwIier.flJoiie. HtteadeftMying,kefUty$,
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
110
L«8B0R XZXr.
6. DoToir, to ove^ is used before an mfinittve, like Ihe Engfifih Teib.
iobeyio express obligation :^-
Je dois III! 6crire domain. I am to wrile to Mm to-momno.
Nous devons j aller domain. We are to go there to-morrow.
6. Recevoir des nottvelles, means, to hear from : —
DercE voos recevoir des nouvelles Are ^ow to kearfrom your sister?
de votre soenr.
7. Entendre parler» answers to the English phrase, to hear cf oi
tAout.
£ntendei Tons sonvent parler de J>o you often kem of yemir fritmisf
V08 amis'?
RfisuM^ OF Examples.
Qnc dit on de nous dans la tUIc 1
On ne parle pas de tous.
Ne mange-t-on pas tons les Jours 1
On mange qusnd on a faim.
On trouve beaucoup d'or en Cali-
fomie.
Dit on (|uelque chose de nouveau 1
On ne dit rien de nonreau.
A-t-on re^u des nouvelles de Qeoigel
On n'a point entendu parler de lul.
On n'a point recu de ses nouvelles.
Devez vous 6cnre a notre ami 1
Je dots hii 6crire demain.
Le concert doit il avoir lieu ce soir 1
U doit avoir lieu ce matin.
Je viens au lieu de mon fVdre.
II danse au lieu de marcher.
What do they say of us in the city?
People do not speai of you.
Do not people eat every day ?
People eat when they are hungry.
Much gold is found in California,
Do they (people) say any thing new?
Nothing new is said.
Has any thing been heard from
George?
Nothing has been heard of him.
They have not heard from him.
Are you to write to our friend?
I am to write to him to-morrow.
Is the concert to take ptaet this i
ing?
It is to take place this morning.
J come instead ofrmy brother.
He dances instead of walking.
Part-ir, 2. ir. to depart, te
set outt to leave ;
Prochain, e. next ;
8av-oir, 8. ir. to knowg
Voyage, m. j(wm«y.
ExxRCiSB 67.
AfHque, f. Africa ; Foum-ir, 2. to furnish ;
Alger, Algiers ; Habits, m. p. clothes ;
Apport-er, 1. to bring: Malade, sick ;
Pemain, to-morrows Mois, m. months
Piamant, m. diamond ; Or, m. gold ;
1. Vous apporte-t-on de I'argent tous les jours? 2. On ne m^ea
apporte pas tous les jours. 3. Vous foumit on des habits quand
vous en avez besoin ? [L. 22.] 4. On m'en foumit toutes les foia
(ecery iimi) que j'en ai besoin. 6. A-t-on besoin d^argent quand on
est malade t 6. Quand on est malade, on en a grand besoin. 7.
Avez vous re^u des nouvelles de mon fils ? 8. Je n*ai point re9n de
sea neuveCles. 9. Ne dit on pas qu'il est en Afrique? 10. Chi dit
qu'il doit partir potur Alger. 11. Quand doit il conunencer son
voyage t 13. On dit qu'il doit le oommeocer le mois proehain. VL
Digitized
by Google
LStSOir ZZXTI. Ill
Ce manage a*t-il liea a^jourd'hiil on demAin ? 14. On nous dit quU
doit avoir lien cette aprds-midL 16. ifaura lieu k ciDq heures ot
demie. 16. Avez vous envie de venir au lieu de votrefr^re? 17.
Mon frere doit venir an lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez vous Tin-
tention de lui dire ee quMl doit faire? 19. II sait ce quL doit faire.
SO. Savez vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne ditriende
noQveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Califomie 1 23. C^n y
en trouve beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on ausai dee diamantaf 26*
On n*y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de Tor.
Exercise 68.
1. What do people say of met 2. People say that you are not
very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found in
Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in California. 6. Do they
bring you books every day ! 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2.]
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one do
(dnit anjaxre) virhen one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physician.
9. Do you send for my brother ? 10. I am to send for him this
morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day? 12. I hear
from him every Ume that your brother comes. 13. Does the sale
(ven^ f.) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. \h.
At what time (Aeure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at half
after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother ia siok.
18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, who,
it is said {dit on\ is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa? 21.
He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your fiiUier ?
23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert take place
this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 26. Do you
know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before five. 28. Is your
brother coming? 29. My brother is not coming, he has no timo
80. Are you angry with your brother? 31. I am not angry with
him. 32. Is any thing new said? (Is there any thing new?) 33
There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him? 86. Nothing i
■aid of him.
LESSON XXXVL LEgON XXXVL
REFLECTIVE VERBS. (§ 43, (6.) ^ 66.)
1. A verb ia called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjagaled
vitk two proaonna of the tame persony i. e., the vsiuil nominatlfe
d by Google
Digitized t
lis isitoir iszTL
pronoQn tnd the pronomiB me, te, se, &c. [} 66.] la tlMM Torbt tUt
aubjeot is represented as acting upon itself: —
Je m'applique a r^tnde. / apply (mfself) to study,
Je me propose de voyager. J propose {to myself) to innd, L e. 0
is my intention to travel.
In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective
pronoan direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and S, Lesaoa
27, is placed before the verb.
2. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently
used in French than in English, oilen answers to the passive form
■o common in the latter language :*-
Oette marchandise se vend (kdle- Thai merchandise is easily sold.
menk ( Thai merchandise sells itself easily,
CelaseihitamsL [Thai does itself so.
8. The verb se porter, literally to carry one^s self, is used idiomati*
eally for to do or to be in speaking of health : —
Comment vous portes vous 1 How do you do 7
Je me porte trds bien. / am very weU,
4. S*asseoir, [4. ir. see { 62.] to $it down, is also a reflective v^>«
Voire flrdre s'assied. Your brother sits down.
5. Se promener means to wdBct to ride, &c for pleasure, or health :^
Je me promine tous les Jours. I take a walk every day.
Je me promftne k cheval. / take a ride.
6. Marcher, aller ^ cheval, aller en voiture, signify to walk or ta
ride, when we wish to express simply, the manner of progressing >—
Marches vous beaucoup tons les Do you walk much every day?
Jours 1
Je vais k cheval et en voiture. I ride on horseback and in a carriage,
7. Conjugation of the Prksknt of tbb Indicativb of tbs
Rbflectiys Verbs,
8s POKT-BB, I. to be CT Br promen-eb, 1. ^woMrS'AssB-oiBi 8. ir. t# Ml
dj f or rides down ;
Je me porte, lamotdofJe mo promftne, I take aJe m'assieds, I sit down.
walk or ride; or am siUing dawn /
Tu te portes, Tu te promtaes, [( 49.] Tu t'assieds,
n se porte, II se promine, II s'assied,
Nous nous portons, Nous nous promenons, Nous nous ssseyons,
Vous vous portes, Vous vous promensz, Vous voos assejes,
nsteportoit. Usee prominent Us s'asieient.
t. The fiflMtivv proaomiB in Um imptoMv of itflaetiFe verpi^
Digitized
by Google
Aittoir zxzTL
lit
' Eola 4, of L S7 aiid Riil«i t, 4, of Lmmb f8 and alM, 1 100.
K«
lUsUMft 07 EXAIIPLBS.
A 4«ol Tou sppU^Mi ▼<ms1
Je m'oQcnpe do metaffidrM^
Je m'sdrene a mes amis.
Tons adrenez toub k Totre pirei
Je m'adMM ahi! [% 100, (i.)J
Comment w porta Monsieur votre
pirel
n M porte paasablement bien.
Ponrqnoi ne vom asseyez voos pas 1
Je m'aasieds qnand Je suis fatign6.
Je n'ai paa 1e temps de m'asseoir.
Yons promenez vons tons les Jours 1
Je me promdne en yoitnre an-
jonrd'hul.
Vos amis ae prominent lb k cheTal 1
ITaimea vom pas a marcher ^
J'aime beanooup Waller k chevaL
Aimez Tons a yous promener 1
Asseyons nous, s'il vons plait
Ne nous aase jons nous pas 1
Ne noQs aaaeyons pas, U est trop
tard.
Combien ce drap se Tend H la*
verge t
U se vend vingt-cinq fhuics le
m&tre.
Comment eela a'appelle^t-H 1
Comment vons appelei [( 40, (4.)]
VQQSl
niffkai do fm apflf ffmtOff
Iafieumfmf.il/wuk mifajfamt^
I apply to mjf/ritndt.
Do fou appip to f/ourfaiktrf
I oppbf to hM,
Bino is yowr faiktr7
He is toUraUy wdl.
Why do you not sit dow%?
I sU down ieA«j» / am weary,
I have no time tosU down,
Doyou take a walk every day!
I take a ride to-day (in a earriagf).
Do your friends take a ridef
Do you not Uke walking?
J Uke riding muck.
Do you Ukewaiking {for pUaoure) 1
Let us sU down^if you pleam.
Do we not sU down?
Let us iwtsU dowUf it is too lato.
How much is thai elotk wld dymrdf
It is sold iwenliy-Jlve frames tha
WiCtre.
How is that eatbd? What i$ tk$
nasneof that?
What is your nam$? How do you
call yourself?
EZXBOISB 60.
Banqnier, m. banker i Hagnifiqne, magyuJUenti Pied, m. foot ;
Comment, howg Matin, m. momingi Port-er, to awry, wemrg
Cheval, m. horse f Mieux, better t Qnelquefois, somotisnai
Drap, m. doth ; Oblig4, e, obUged ; 4oitt-er, 1. to leave ;
f adgn4, e, weary, thred ; Part-ir, 2, \r, to sit end i Voitore, t carriage.
1. Comment ee monsieur s'appelle-t-il 1 2. Je ne aaia comment
. s*appelle. 8. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t^Iie pas L.? 4. Non,
Madame, elle s^appelle M. 0. Monsieur votre pdreseporte-t-ilbicn
ee matin t 6. H se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait il beau temps
tnjonrd'hai? 8. H fkit an temps magnifiqne, n'allez vons paa voaa
* TheSQdlibaor«»belbrea
iraolele,orla»Ao.
if rendered into FranehbjflM
by Google
Digitized t
114 LSSftOll ZXXTXl.
promenarl 9. Nous n'aTons ni cheval ni voitare. 10. Ne pouves
votts marcher ? 11. Je suis trop fatigud pour marchei. 12. N*allez
voas pas k cheval tons les matins? 13. Je me prom^ue toua lei
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez tous? 16. Quelquefois h
pied «t quelquefois en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez vousquand
Tous nvcz besoin d'argent? 17. Je m'adresse & mon banquiert
18. Ne voulez vous pas tous asseoir? 19. Nous vous sommes bion
oblig6u. 20. Ce drap se vend il fort bien T 21. II se vend fort cher.
22. Ne devez vous pas aller k Ja campagne, sHl fait beau temps f
.23. Votre frere doit il quitter la ville aujourd'hui ! 24. 11 doit partlr
demain matin. 26. Ma sceur se prom^ne tous les matins.
Exercise 70.
1. Does.your sister walk every day ? 2. She takes a walk every
morning. 3. She likes riding on horseback and in a carriage.
4. What is that little girl called ? 6. She is called L. 6. Is not that
gentleman called L. ? 7. No, Sir, he is called G. and his cousin is
called H. 8. How is your brother ? 9. My brother is very well, but
my sister is not well. 10. How are your two daughters 1 11. They
are tolerably well to-day. 12. Will you not sit down, gentlemen!
13. We are much obliged to yon. Madam, we have not time.
14. Does that book sell well? 16. It sells very well. 16. Howls
that silk sold an ell (Vaune) ? 17. It is sold six francs an ell.
18. Is it fine weather to-day? 19. It is very fine weather, will yon
not take a walk? 20. I have no time to walk. 21. To vihom does
your brother apply? 22. He applies to his brother. 23. Is his
brother at home ? 24. No, Sir, he is at Paris. 26. When does he
intend to go to France ? 26. He intends to go to France in one
month. 27. Is your sister to leave to-morrow morning ? 28. She
is to leave to day if (s'U) it is fine weather. 29. What do people
say of this ? 30. Nothing is said about it [L. 35]. 31. Are you too
fflueb fiitigued to walk? 32. I am not too much fatigued, but I have
no wish to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding? 34. I like
Eidiug, when I have a good horse. 35. I do not like walking.
LESSON xxxvn. LEgON XXXVIL
1. The reflective pronoun is often used to express possession, in-
stead of the possessive a4jective. In such cases the article takes th«
pkoe of this a^jeotivei before the noun. [{ 77, (9.)]
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LBB0OV XZXTIX.
114
VoLB chaHflfes Tons les pieds 1 Do ym wa*m ytmr fstt 7
Jd mc cbaufib les mains et les pieds. / toarm my hands and feet.
a. Se souvenir [2. ir. See \ '62.], se rappeler [\ 49, (4.)]i eorrespond to
ihe English verb to remember, Se rappeler takes a direct object, tluit
lb, no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if the
I be a noun or a pronoun : —
Vons rappeleas vons oes demoisellesi Do you remember those young Indus f
Je ne me les rappelle pas. I do not remember them,
3^ Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the preposition
6e between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive : —
Nous ce nous rappelons pas d'en We do not remember having been de*
avoir £t6 privis (Condillac). prived of it,
4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun
as well as before an infinitive : —
Tons sonvenez vous de cette afikire 1 Do you remember that affair?
Je DC m'en souviens pas. / do not remember U,
Je me souviens de lui avoir 6crit / remember having written to htm.
6. Se coucher, corresponde to the English verbs to retire, to go to
bed:^
Je me couche de bonne heure. / retire early,
6. Se lever [} 49, (6.)] means to me, to get up,*-^
Je me 16ve au poipt du jour. I rise at the break of day»
HABVMA of EZAIIFLES.
Vous eoupez vons les ongles 1
Je me coupe les ongles et les che-
▼eux.
Vons eoupez vons les doigtol
Jo me coupe souvent les doigts,
quaud je taille ma plume.
Tous rappelez K) 49, (4.)] vous les
maiheurs du frdre de votre ami 1
Je me rappelle ses maiheurs.
Je me les rappelle distinctement.
Je me rappelle de I'avoir vu.
Vons souvencz vous de cela 1
Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout.
A quelle heure vous couchez vous 1
Noas nous couchons tous les jours
an coucher du soleil.
Runs nous levons de meilleure heure
que vous, — au lever du soleil.
H oe live a cinq heures djx matin, et
il se couche a dix heures et de>
mle du soir.
Do you cut your nails?
I cut my nails and hair.
Do you cut yowrjMgers ?
J often cut my finger s^ when 1 mena
my pen.
Do you remember the misfortumet of
your frhemCs brother ?
I remember his nUsfortunes,
I recollect them distinctly,
I remember having seen htm.
Do you remember that ?
J do not remember it at all.
At what hour do you retire ?
We go to bed every day at sunset.
We rise earUer than you^-^ ftM*
rise.
He rises at five o^dock in the fMm-
ingj and goes tobedai half afle^
ten in the eventng.
Digitized
by Google
lie trB»fto« x^xrtu
EXXRCIBI 71.
AnocIA, m. ;NKfifi«r; De meilleare henre, Terraqiiier, m
Boh^m.woodf earlwr; dresser j
Boucher, ULhUckeri Doigt, m. finger; Po61e. m. steves
8«» brikl-er, 1. re£ <o Fer, m. irani Pouce, m. thwnh;
bum one's wdf. Fen, m. fire ; Proroesae, f. promiut
durpentieryin. carpen- Main, f. Aa»</; Be souvenir, t& renun»
ter. S'oocaper, 1. to occupy ber hoe Veiur,(63.}i
Bo chauff-er, 1. re£ to on^'s sdf. Travaill-er, 1. io wort,
p^rm one's self. Parfaitement, perfeeOfg
1. Lo pemiquier ae ooupe-t-U le ponce ? 2. Non, Monsieur, 11 ■%
eoupe les chevenx. 3. Le eharpentier ne se eoupe-t>il pas la main f
4. U ne se coupe poa la main, il coupe le bota. 5. Ne vous nippelex
vons pas cette dame ! 6. Je me rappelle cette dame et ces messieurs.
7. De quoi vous occupez vous ? 8. Nous nous occupons de nos af-
faires. 9. Vous sou venez vous des fusils qu'a votre p^l 10. Je
ne m*en souviens point du tout. 11. Cette petite fille ne se brille-t-
elle pas? 13. Elle ne se brdle pas, il n*y a pas de fen dans le po^le.
13. Pourquoi le boucher ne se chanfTe-t-il pas? 14. Parcequ*il n'a
pas fVoid. 15. Ces enfants se Invent ils de meillenie heure que mot!
16. lis se couchent de bonne heure, et ils se Uvent tons lea matins i
■ix heures. 17. Vptre associ4 ne veut ilpas s'asseoir? 18. D n'a
pas le temps de s'asseoir. 19. Vous souvcnez vous de vos promca-
aes? 20. Je m*en souviens parfaitement 21. Ne vous chauiTez
Tous pas quand vous avez froid? 22. Je ne me chaulTe presque ja-
mais. 23. Ne se couche-t-on pas, quand on a sommeil ? 24. On ao
couche quand on a sommeil, et on mange quand on a fium. 25.
Quand on se porte bien, se I^vo-t-on de bonne heure? 26. Quand
on se porte bien, on doit (should) se lever do bonne heure.
EZBRCISB 72.
1. Do yon rise early when you are well t 2. When I am well, I
rise every morning at five o'clock. 3. Do you remember your cousin
L.? 4. I remember him perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early?
6. We go to bed at ten o'clock. 7. Doea not the tailor bum his
fingers? 8. He does not bum his fingers, his iron is not worm. 9l
Does the carpenter cut his thumb? 10. He cuts neither his thumb
nor his hand. 11. Why do you not warm yourself? 12. I do not
warm myself, because I am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day ?
14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Doea your hair-dresser rise at
•onrise ? 16. The carpenter rises at snnrise and goea to bed at saa-
Mt 17. Doyonriaeearliwihani* !& We ziae evory morning aS
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
fh9 hnak of daj. 19. Do yov out your li»ir oftoa! M. I snt ny
nair and my nails every month. SI. Do you remember tliat gentle*
iimii 1 22. 1 remember him very well. 23. I do not remember him.
24. Do yon snt yoar fingers when you mend a pen? 26. I cat my
band when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. 1
do not remember all that (tout ce que) I learn. 28. Do you know if
your father is well? 29. He 'is very well to-day. 30. Is not yovr
mother well? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember
your friend's misfortunes? 83. I remember them. 34. I remember
LESSON xxxvm. LigoN xxxvm.
1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, eorresponda to the Ei^
liah verb to deenve ;^
U trompe tout le monde. Be deceives every My.
3. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken ; lit**
rally, to deceive one's self: —
On le trompe bien souvent One is often mistaken,
8. Ennnyer, [{ 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weeury the mindi U
tease^ to bore :—
Cet homme emmie ses aaditeurs. 7%at man wearies Ms hearers.
Yons nous ennuyea par vos do- You teaee^ or vieary us by your pies*
mandes. tians,
4. S*ennnyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signiftM
generally, to be or to become mentaUy weary cfany thing or fiaee >^
Kous nous enanyoDS id. We are weary of being here.
Yous ennuyez vous k la campagne 1 Are you weary of being in the eawUry 7
Je m'ennnie partout I find no amusemerU anywhere.
5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, l«tm menidUy tdeory, I want change^
eanusement^ oecupation, dec. : —
6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse ont^s aajf
to take pleasure tn, to spend tmis time in^ to find amMsement tn, It
e^'oy one*s self: —
Nous nous amusons Ilia campagne. We ei^ oursuves in the ce%msrf»
Yobs vous amusei Sides bagatelles. You spend yeoi time in iri^
BAaXJUA OF EXAUPLBS.
On se trompe souvent soi-m&me en
diereha&t k tromper les autres.
Totre oommis ne setrompe-t-U pas 1
Qaetnmpebien
We often deceive eurstives tMuv sssth
ing to deceive others.
Is noi your aerk mistakenf
Osisveryrmreiyx
Digitized
by Google
Ill
Lit toir xxxrttx^
Ne Tovs trompes tou pu (Mqaem-
Aiont 1
Tout le mondo est scyet h se trom-
per.
Ce niarchaod trorape tout le monde.
0a cotivcraation nous ennuie.
Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos
plaiDtes.
Est-oe que je ne voos ennuie pan 1
Vous ennuyez vous chez nous 1
Je m'ennuiea la ville et Je m'amose
& la campa(^.
A quo! Tons amnsez vons 1
Je m'amttle k lire Talleniand*
ArtfounaifitquemMi^wiiUlmkenf
Every oneiscpltobe lAislaken.
Thai merckanf' deceives every body.
His conversatum wearin us.
You weary your friends ky your com
plaints.
Do I not weary you 7
Areyouweary of remaining witk us f
J become weary of the city and find
amusement in tke country.
In what do you amuse ^ouiseif?
I amuse myself in reading Ckrman,
ExsRCiSB 78.
Apprend-re, i. ir. to Entend-re, 4. (<t ^ar ; Qnand, irAe>»;
team ; Ennnyer, 1. Siee ( 49, (2.) Quelquefois, sometimes /
Banquler, m. bankers Langue, f. language; Reo-evoii, 8. to receives
Client, m. client^ cus- Malade, sick ; Kev-enlr, 2. ir. to corns
tomers Mimoire, m. bill s back;
Demeur-er, 1 . to dwell ; Pr6ftr^r, 1. io prefer ; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive,
I, Aimez vous k deraeurer 4 la campagne? 2. Je pr^f^.re la cam-
pagne k la ville. 3. Vous ennayez vous souvent k la canipagne t
4. Qaand je m'ennuie k la campagne, je reviens k la ville. 5. Refoit
on des nouvelles da Gi.n§ral L. ? 6. On n'entend pas parler de luL
7. Vous trompez vous quelquefois ? 8. Tout le monde se trompe
quelquefois. 9. Le banquier trompe-t-il sea clients? 10. II ne
tat)mpe ni ses clients ni ses amis, il ne trompe personne. 11. Ne
vous trompez vous paa dans ce m^moire ? 12. Je ne me trompe pas.
13. Vous amusez vous k lire ou k ^crire? 14. Je m'amuse k ap-
prendre Tallemand et le fran9ai8. 15. Avez vous tort d'apprendre
leslanguest 16. Tai raisou deles apprendre. 17. Vous ennuyez
vous souvent? 18. Je m'ennui^ quaiid je n*ai rien k faire. 19. A
quoi vous amusez vous quand vous ^tea k la campagne ? 20. Noua
nous promenous le matin» et nous travaillons le reste de la joum6e
31. Vous portez vous toujours bien? 22. Noua aommea qoelque*
fkM maladea. 23. Envoyez vona chercher le mddecin 1 24. Nous
Teniioyona cherrher. 26. Je vaia le chercher.
ExxRCiSE 74.
1. Are you not mistaken! 2. I am not mistaken. 8. la not tht
banker mistaken? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly
(certainement) mistaken. 6. Does he not decuve you? 6. He does
not deceive me, ho deceives nobody. 7. Are you not wrong to d«-
etiveyourlklher? 8. I do not intend to deceive him. 0. Doaenot
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
toe mereluuit make a miataket 10. He makes a mistike in Uie bill
whieh lie writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city? 13. I
prefer the city ; I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not
Ihateliild weary you by his questions? 14. Dees not that long story
(rieit^ m.) weary yon? 15.' It does not weary me, it amuses mo.
16. Do yon amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. I
amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18. Are you not weaiy
of remaining at your uncle's? 19. I am never weary of remaining
there. 20 Is your brother often mistaken? 21. Every body is
sometimes mistaken. 32. Does his conversation weary you! 28.
On the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from ?
26. Nothing is heard of him. [I* 35.} 26. Is your sister well ? 27.
No, Sir, she is sick. 28. Do I weary you? 29. You do not weary
me. 30. Ami mistaken! 81. You are not mistaken. 82. Is he
often mistaken ? 83. He is often mistaken. 84. Do yea not riae
late! 36. No, Sk, I rise early.
LESSON XXXEL LBgON XXXIX,
1. The reflective verb, se passer, ia used idiomatically in the Sevte
of to do wiikouL It is followed by the preposition de, when it
fomes before a noun or a verb :—
Tous passes vous de oe livre 1 Do f&u do wUkavi thai book 7
Je ne puis m*eu passer. / canmU do wilhout U,
2. Se servir [2. ir. see { 62.], to use, also requires the preposition
de before its object : —
Je me sers de votre canif. / ute yaw penknife,
Je ne m*en sers pas. IdonoineeU.
8. The second example of the two rules above, shows that, when
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence
fay the pronoun en: —
Je m*en sers, Je m'en passe. I use U^ I do vriikoul U.
4, The pronoun* used as indirect object of a reflective verb» if rep»
leaenting a person, follows the verb [} 100, (40] : —
Je puis me passer de lui. I can da teiikaut Aim.
Je m'adrease a vous et k elle. / appfy to you and to her,
6. S'endormir [2. ir. see } 62.]; to faU asleep^ an I s'^veiller, to
, are also reflective.
• The rule does not apply to the reflect ve pronoun, whVcl is i
an indirect old«iet
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
ito
liSllftOV KXtiM.
couche.
Je tn'uveille k six henres da matin. / owolw a/ sir o^doek in the manung,
6. S'approcher, to come near^ to approach ; a'^loigner, to draw back,
to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, whea
a pronoun, is aubject to Rules 3 and 4 above :—
Votre flls a'approche-t-il da feal Does your ton draw near the fire f
n ne 8*en approche paa. He does not came near H.
U a'AIoigne ae moi e( de toob. Be goes from mc aindfrom |iMk
BAbumA of Examplb8»
Vooa aertes Tona de ce conteau 7
Je ne si'en aera paa, il no coupe paa.
De qaela conteauz voua aervez voual
Noua noua servona de couteaox
d'acier.
Pouvei voua vooa paaaer d'aiigentl
Nous ne poavons nous en passer.
Vous passes voua de votre miitre 1
Nous nous passons de lui.
Vous adressez vous a ces messieurs 1
Nous nous adreasons a eux et k
vous.
Vous vous endormea fiiicUement
Je m'6veille de trfts bonne heure.
Pourquoi vous approchex voua da
feul
Je m'en approche paroeqoe J'd
froid.
Nona nooa Aloirnona da fba.
Noua nous en fioignons.
Koua noua approcbona de notre
pdre.
Nous nous approcbona de luL
ExxRCiSB 75.
Aoiai, «b»; .. ^Bocre, f. »»l:i . .
Au8sit6t— qoe, as MmFen6tre, f. windows
ast Feti, m./f«;
Canif, m. penknife s Fourchette^ f. fork ;
Demoiselle, ffoung lo/fy; Heure, f. houTy o^doeks
Domeatique, m. jcr-Moins, leu, before i
vanii • OhllgB, e,oU(f^edi
1. PoQvez vooa voua paaaer d*enera? 3. Nooa poavona nont mt
paaaer, noaa n^avona rien k ^rire. 3. Voua aervez vooa de vote
plume 1 4. Je ne m'en aera paa ; en avex vooa beaoin ! ft. Ne vouIm
vooa paa voaa approcher da fea I 6. Je voua aaia bien oblig^, je ii*ai
paa froid 7. Pourquoi oea demoiaellea a*61oignent ellea da la feaA-
tte! 8. EUea a'en 61oignent pareeqo'il y fWt trop frpid. 0. Ctt
a a'adreaaant ila paa 4 vooa^ la Ik t^adfaaaant k m/d
Do yon nse thaiknift?
What knives do yon urn?
We use steel knives.
Cam ytm do wiihout wioneyf
We cannot do wilkoul il.
Do yon do without your teaeker?
We do without kirn.
Do yon appby to thorn gentlemen^
We apply to them and to yon.
Yon go to deep easOy.
I awake very early.
Why do yon eonu near tkefireX
I come near ft beeaiuM I am eeid»
We go from the fire.
We go from U.
We go near ou/r father.
We go
QvdlM^ramM&k
^yi
Plume, f pen ;
Pourquoi, fsAv;
Pr6t-«r, 1. to Undt
Quart, m. quarter ;
TaiU-er, 1. to mend.
Digitized
by Google
•I i mom Mn> 11. A quelle lieiirs toob 6Tei]les tou U matint
15. Jem*^Teille ordiniiirement & six heares moint un quat IS.
Voiis leres vons anssitAt que voas vous 6veillez I 14. Je me Idre
AuaeitM que je m'6veillQ. 16. De quels livrea tous aervez voua*
16. Je me lera dea miens et des v6trea. 17. Ne tous senrez voaa
paa de eeoz de Totre fr^re ? 18. Je m*en sen auaal 19. Lea plnmea
d^nt [Lb 31. R. 8J voas voua aenrez aont ellea bonnea t 20. Pour-
qiioi votFB ami a'61oi^e-t-D du feu! 21. II s'en 41oigne parcequ'il
% trop chand. 22. Pourquoi Totre domestiqae e'en approche-tol?
28. n a'«D approche povr ae ehaoffor. 24. Vona enniiyez vooa iait
•& Je ne m'ennnle paa.
EzBBom 76.
1. Will yon lend me yonr penknife ? 2. I cannot do without
M^ I want it to mend my pen. 8. Do yon want to use my book f
4. I want to oae it, will you lend it to me? 6. What knife doea
yoor brother use ? 6. He usee my father's knife and my brother'a
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? 8. We are much obliged
to yoUf we are warm. 9. la that young lady warm enough? [L, 34»
8.] 10. She ia very cold. 11. Tell her (diUs lui) to come near iht
fire? 12. Why do you go from the fire? 13. We are too waroL
14. Doea your brother leave the window? 15. He leavea the win-
dow because he ia cold. 16. To whom doea that gentleman apply ?
17. He appliea to me and to my brother. 18. Why doea he not ap-
ply to me? 19. Because he is ashamed to apeak to you. 20. Do
you awake early every morning ? 21. I awake early, when I go to
bed early. 22. Why do you go to sleep? 23. I go to aleep becauae
I am tired. 24. Are you afiraid to go near your father? 26. I am
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can yeu do without ua? 27. Wa
cannot do without you, but we can do without your brother. 28.
Do you want my brother's horae? 29. No, Sir, we can do without
it 80. Do you intend to do without money? au. You know very
well that we cannot do without it 82. Ia your brother weary of
being here? 83. He ia not weary of being here. 84. Come near
Haa fire» mr ehiUL
LESSON XL. LEgON XL.
1. The verb aller (1. u*. } 62.), eo^jngated refieetively, ai^l ff
by the woid fl(D, L e. a'en aller, eoffe^onda to ike Bn^lih enk
ia#a «*^ ^ tevtA—
• Digitized by Google
m
unsupM \h
2. lETDICATIVi PfiESXKT OV THJB VbR^ S^EIT AlXElt, TO Go AWaY'
Je m'en yais,
I'a t'en yas,
Iroawayf
Tnou art going _ Ions,
listen Ta,
away I
He goes awa/ff t
Noas D0U8 en al- FF^^tf aieayi
Ions,
VonsToiueDallefe, Yo% arc goii^g
awavt
Sb B'en Yont, 7%0y go awmf,
3. Thx SAMS Tbnsx Conjugated IivTBEROOATivKLr.
Est-ceqndje m'en Do I go away! Nons en allons Do we go away?
TidB 1 nona 1
l^'en vafttill Art thow going Vomi en aOes Dofimgoawa^f
away? toils 1 Are they goimg
S'enTa-t-il1 Jb he going away? B'enrontils? aicay?
4. Se ftcher, to be or became angry^ requires the preposition contn
or de before the noun or pronoun following it:-^
Be flche-t-il oontce Totee frdre 1 Doe* ke geta/hgrywUhycv/rbroih&rf
il se ftche oontre lui He is angry with him.
Y0118 Tons fichez d'un rien. You get angry at nothing.
5. Se r6jouir, to r^oice^ is followed by the preposition de : —
Je me r6jouie de votre bonheur. / r^oice ai your happiness.
6. Se plaire [4. ir, see^ 62,] to take pleasure^ to delight in any thvng
to like to be ina plaoe^ takes k before its object : —
/ Uke to be in the countfy,
I take pleasure in studying ^ in reudmg,
7. Se d6p6cher, se hiter, to make haste, take de before their ol^
•ect:— .
D6p6chez Tous de finir vos lemons. Make haste to finish your lessons,
Poarqnoi ne vous d6p6chez voua posl Why do you not make haste ?
R£8uicfi of Examples.
Je me plais k la campune.
Je me plais a 6tudier, a lire.
fce marchand s'en ra-t-Il at^Jonr-
. d'huil
Nons nons en allons demain.
Je m*en vals qnand Je snis fatignd.
Ponrquoi Tons fSUihez vous contre
lull
ti so plait h. jouer, il n'6tudie Ja-
mais.
y cos plaisez vous chez vos parents 1
De quo! tous rijouissez vousl
Nous nous r^ouiasons de votre
BUCCdS.
Nous nous en r6}ouIflsoQS.
Pourquoi tous d6pdchez tous 1
Nous nous d4p^chons d'6crire.
Nbvs nous pkisons en Angleterre.
Kqiis bo ncUs plaisons pas a Paris.
Does the merchant go alway khiay?
We are going away to-morrow,
I go away when I am tired.
Why do you get ^Mgry with him?
He takes pteaswre in piayingj he
studies.
DoyouliketobeatyournkOimt^f
At what do you rejoice?
We rejoice at your success.
We rejoiu at it.
Why do you make haste?
We make haste to write,
WeHketobeinKn^amd,
We dona like to be in i^Kn»^
Digitized
by Google
VoDS plaiaei toos a New Yorki Do yim like to be in New Ymll
RoQi nous 7 plaisoDS. | WkWutoheV^ere.
Bcthmubh 77.
Ambuaodenr, m. am- Joner, 1. topUn/; Prochaln.^, neaoii
li«lh€vr, iL rnhfauhmej Betouni-^r, 1. to n
boisadort
Arriv6e, f. omeo^; W^xa^bttUr^ ' SemaiDe, f/iosei/
Aatnii, m. others ; Midi, iimw; Tante, f. aunts
Cour-ir, 2. ir. <0 run; Paroeque, because s Tore, turque, Turkiak,
Jamais, ii«iwr;
1. Vou8 en allez vons bientAtI a. Je m*exi vais la semaine pro-
ebaine. 3. Povrquoi toqb en allez vous ? 4. Paroeqne je ne me plait
poa id 6. Vous plaisez tous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici? 6. Je
m'y plais mieuz. 7. N'avez vons pas tort de vous en aller si t6t t
8. Pai laisoB de m^ea alter. 9. Ne vo«8 vejouiBez vons pas dea nsd-
henrs d*aatrui? 10. Nous neBOua ea WtjoaiaMna poiat 11. €dt
hdnme aa Atohe-t-il contre to Jaidinier ? IS. U ae ftohe oontre Ivi ftnm
qu*il ne vent pas se d^p^cher. 13. Se f^Lche-t-il ^en Boav«nt1 14. II
ae Hu^be it to«t moment^ il se fiche d*nn rien. 16» Ne vona d^ptehez
vons jamais? 16b Je me depiohe toujoors qnand j'ai quelqne ohose k
fiure. 17. Ne vous plaisez vous pas ^ courir et k joaer ? 18. Je me
plais ^ joner et mon frdre se plait ^ lire. 19. Vons r^ouiasez vous
de Tarriv^e de rambassadeur tnrc ? 20. Je m*en r^jouis. 31. Ne vous
plaisez vona pas en Am^riqnel 92. Je m*y plais beancoup mieoz
qn'en Fraaoe. 33. Votre 4colier oe ae plait il pas chez vons f 94. 11
ae plait chez moi, mais il desire retoumer ehez son p^re. 96. I>6p6*
chez vonai il eat dlj^ midL
EzsRonsx 78.
I« At what hour does jovr frieiid go away! 3. He ^ms away
ereiy monting at nine e'elock. 3. Do yon go away with (omct) him 1
4. I go away with him when I have time. b. Will you make haste
to finish your letterl 6. 1 make haste to finish it 7. Ooaa the gaiw
dener get angry with his brother? %, He gets ai^fry agaiaat him when
he does not make haale. 9. lliak« haats, my friend^ it is 4en o'doek
10. WlijydoyoanoimakehaBU? 11. 1 like to j^, but I do not lika
to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my bouse ! 13. I like to stay
there. 14. Are you rejoiced at the asrival of your mother? 10. I
njoice at it 16. Is no4 your brother wrong to go away so soon ?
17. He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 18. Do you
rejoice at other people'a misfortune8b?v 19. I do not rejoice at them,
10. I j»j«iee at your auooeas. 31, Does not your brother draw near
thefiM? 33. He goes from the fire, he is too warm. 98. DMa4faat
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
1S4 ^iBfBOir XLL
jrom^ lady get aagiy against yen! 24. She gels angry at liitei (i§
rien). 26. Do yon like to be in Paris? 26. I like to be there. 37.
Can you do- without me to-day? 38. We cannot do without yon-
make haste to finish your work (mtvrage). 39. Do yon want your
penknife? 30. I want to use it 31. Make haste to rise, it is six
o'deek. 33. Is it fine weather? 33. No, Sir, it lainsw 34. Is yrvur
frther wen this morning? 36. Yes, Sir, he is very weU.
LESSON XLL LEgON XLL
TBB PAST INDSFimTB. [§ 121.]
1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the indicatrre
of one of the auxiliary Terbs, avoir and ^tre [} 46, (8.)], and the paiw
tkiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, } 47 and
following sections:-^
J'al parI6, Je suis arrivii. - / have spoken, I am orrivetL
3. The past indefinite is used to express an action entirely com*
pleted, but performed at a time of which a part is not yet elapsed,
or at a time entirely past, but not specified. [} 121, (1.) (2.)] :—
J'al vn votre p^re oe matin. I have seen your faiker tku mormng.
Jene vousai pas encore par]4. I have nai fsi spoken to fon, -
8. The past indefinite may also be used, when the time is ipecl*
fied [t 121, (3.)] ^—
Je Itti ai 6crit la senudne demidre. I wrote to Mm lad leeek,
Je lul at envoy6 une lettre le mois I sent him a leUer last month,
dernier.
4. In this tease and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gene-
ndly placed between the auxiliary uid the participle [{ 138, (3.)] '^—
Vous nous avez souvent parl6. You have often spoken to «f .
Je ne Tai pas encore vu. J have not yet seen kim.
6. The adverbs aujourdliu], to-iay ; domain, to-morrow ; hier, yeHer*
day ; polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in nisitf, and long adverba
generally, do not come between the auxiliary and tiie participle, but
follow Rule 1. L. 34. See } 138, (6.) >*
Tons area lu demiAremeni Yon read latdy,
8. The unipersonal verb y avoir, [L. 38. R. 3. 4,] placed before a
word expressing time, corresponds with the English word, ago:^^
J'ai rofu une lettre, fl y a huit Jours. I received a later eight days ago.
Tonsavosachet6unemai8on,ilya Yonbenightakanseaymirago^
Digitized
by Google
hMBBOM Silt.
Itt
RfiflVMft 07 EZAlfPLXS.
V<M neTimx nous out parl6.
Nous EYons parl£ a votre pdre.
Le Ullleur a-t>a fidt mon hubit ?
La bonlsnger a mis sod cbApean.
Le oordonnier a 6td ses aooliers.
Voire fVire a dit quelque choee.
Votre WBor qn'a-t-elle dit 1
ITaTes TooB rien dit a mon oonsin 1
Je He lui al rien dit
Je ne Tai Jamais reDcoiDtr6.
Je ne lenr ai Jsmais parM. -
Qn'avei Tons fUt anjoord'hoil
Eier, nons n'avons pas trayaiI16.
» 186.1
Lenr en aves Tons souTent parU 1
Je lenr ep ai souvent par16.
Je ne le lenr ai pas encore dit
ITaTei Tons pas asses 6crit 1
n m'a 6crit, fl y a longtemps.
0 noos a r6poDda, il j a nn mois.
Your nephews s^kt to ui.
We spoke to ytmr J'alker.
Has the tailor mail mf eottif
'ne baker has pui on kskaL
The shoemakerkas taken Ms thm$ eg,
Yowr brother said something.
What did yoiiw sister soy?
Have you told miff eonsin notkmg 7
I have told him nothing,
Ihaveneu. ^Hhim,
I never spoke to them.
What have fon done to-day?
We did not work yesterda/y,
Bave you often ^ken to them mbmtt
U?
I have often spoken to them about U.
I have not yet said any thing to them
about U.
Have you notwritten enough? -
He wrote to me a long time ago.
He replied to us a nSnth ago.
EXXBCISB 19,
Gar^on, m. boy ;
Hier, yesterdays
Jomnte, f. diiys
Ln, from lire, read ;
Ministre, m. mimsUr;
Mis,yr0m mettre, put on
Plant-er, htoplintt
Poirier, m. pear-bree t
Sooiier, m. shoe ;
Yxij firom Toir, i
Arocat, m. barrister s
Cela, eed^ that, this I
Pit, from dire, saidi
fitndi-er, 1. to study;
Qtaxt, UL glove ;
1. Qui Tons a dit eela? 3. L*aTocat me Fa dit 3. Lni avez vou
parl6 de ceitte affaire ? 4. Je ne lni en ai pas encore parl6. 6. L'avez
vons Tn demi^rement ? 6. JeTai vu il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez
Tons pas toit hier 1 8. Nous aTons la et ^rit tonte la jomii6e. [L
36, (9.)] 9. ITaTex Tons pas 6tA vos gants et tos souliers? 10. Je
n'ai pas M mes gants, maia j'ai 6t6 mon chapean. 11. Le taiUeur
n*a-t-]l pas mis son chapean 1 12. Oni, Monsieur, 11 a mis son oba^
pean. 1 3. Qu'avez tous fint iL ce petit gar^on ? 14. Je ne lui ai rien
fiut 15. Ne lni aTez tous point ^t que je snis ieil 16. Je ne le lui
ai pas encore dit 1 7. Qu'aTCZ vous ^tudie ce matin 1 18. Nons aTons
4tndi6 nos lemons et nons aTons In nos liTres. 19. Le jardinier du mi-
nistre a-t-il plants le poirier ? 20. D Ta plants 11 y a plus de hni: jours.
91. Atcz vons achet6 un habit de drap noir? 22. Ten ai achet6 nn«
98. L'avez tous port6 aujourd*hui1 24. Je ne Pai pas encore pork6.
tf. Noos s;Tona mis nos soullers et nos bas ce matin.
EXEROISB 80.
1. Have you studied to-dayl 2. We hsTo no tin« to stndj, w»
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Hi Ir^BtOH ZLII.
]uiT» mad a page. 8. Have yon not written to my brother? A, I
have not yet writton to him. 5. Has not the German written to my
mother? 6. He has not yot written to her. 7. Have yon told (d)
my mother that I have taken (prit) thU book ? 8. I have not yet
teen your mother. . 9. What have ypa done this morning? 10. We
have done nothing. 11. Have yon taken off your coat? 12. I have
not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the book8ell<;r writ>
ten to your brother? 14. He wrote to hfim a long time ago. Ifli
Did he write to him a month ago ? 16. He wrote to him more than
A year ago. 17. H^ve you planted a pear-tree ? 18. We have {Wanted
several 19. Is it too cold to (pour) plant trees? 90. It is too warm.
91 . What has the gardener done to your little boy ? 29. He has done
aotiung to him. 23, Has any one done any thing to him ? 9i. No
one has done any thing to him. 26. Is any thing the matter with him ?
96. Nothing is Uie matter Mrith him. 27. Has your father put on hie
black hat? 28. No, Sir, he has not put on his block hat 29. What
has yom brother said ? 30. He has said nothing. 31. Has your sis-
ter told you that? 32. She told it me. 33. Did you not work yes*
terday ? 34. We did not work yesterday, we liad nothing to do.
86. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. «
I*ESSON XTiH. LBgON XLIL
TBB FAST PASTIOIPLS. [( 184.]
1. The past participle, whkh in Freoeh forms apart of everycom*
pound tense, [{ 46, (8.)] is susceptible of changes in its termination.
9. The student will find in the table of the terminations of the
vegnlar verbs [} 60.], the different changes whksh the past participle
of those verbs undergoes. The feminine tenninations of the past
participle of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical
table, \ 62.
8. The last latter of the feminine termination is always an e mute.
4. The plunL of a past participle not ending with an s, is formed
by the addition of that letter to the singuUr, masculine or femi*
nine.
6. The participle past, aooompanied by the auxiliary avoir, nevtf
agrees with the nominative or subject [( 134, (3.)] :—
Lea demoiselles out chants. The young ladies sang,
0eBttenfeuzsoiit]atoute]aJoitn]6e. Tk^egitUkmenrtadSk^oMeimk
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
XB880VXL1S. 117
A ne partfdple pssft, haviDg ^tre aa its aiudlUay, aasinnM in ite
toimiiiation the gender and number of the sabject [j 134,' (3.)] ' —
Ma flUe est arTiv6e ce matin. My daughter arrived this nufrtDingf
Nos frdrea ne aoot pas vemia. Our brothers are not come,
7. Tlie participle, accompanied by the auxiliaiy avoir, agrees in
gendei and number with its direct object or regime direct, [{ 2, (3.)
1 42, (4 )] when that object precedes it [} 134^ (4.)] :—
Let dames que nous arons vues. The ladies whom we have seen.
lies lettres que nous avons lues. T^ letters which we hope read,
8. When the regime direct or objective (aeeueative) follows th«
partieiplei no agreement takes place [{ 134, (6.)] : —
AvesTOQs vules dames 1 Huite you seen the ladies? '
▲voosnoaslules lettres 1 Ha^wereadtkslitters7
0. A participle past never agrees with its r6gime indirect, or indi«
net object (dutive or ablative) [\ 2, (8.) } 43, (6.)] :1-
Lea dames 4 qui nous avons parU. Tlie ladies to whom we have spoken,
10. The participle past used adjectively, that is, without an aux
iliary follows the rule of the adjective, [{ 66, (3J \ 134, (1 ) | :—
Des livres bien imprim^ WeUyrinUd hooks.
. U. The participle, preceded by the reUtive pronoun en,, remains
invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural
won [} 135, (7.)] .—
Avez Tons apportd des plumes t Have you brought pens 7
J'en ai apport4. / have brought some.
18. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement
of the participle, when it ia preceded by a direot regimen [} 185|
(7.)]>-
Les plumes que j'en ai iq[>port<es. The pens which I have brought fromii,
BjtSUUt or EXAMPLBB.
Yos Boeurs ont elles 6crit 1
Elfes n'ont pas encore 6crit
Les lettres que nous avons 6crites.
Avez votis 6crit vos lettres 1
le les ai lues, je les ai Sorites.
Lee aves vous apporties 1
Jo ne les ai pas apport£es.
Aves vous appeld ces dames 1
Je ne les ai pas appe14es.
Qui aves vous vu ce matin 1
Nous avons vu ces demoiselles.
Nous les avous vues.
Kous ne leur avons pas parl6.
^TW vo«B dee Uvnis relite 1
Bave your sisters written?
They have not yet written.
The letters which we have wrtUen,
Have you wriUen your letter t 7
Ihttveread them, I havewnaen them.
Have you brought them ?
I have not brought them.
Have you caUed those ladies 7
I have' not called them.
Whom have you seen this marmngf
We have seen those young ladies.
We have seen them-
We have not spoken to tkta^
Bave fim bofmd bookiJ
Digitized
by Google
m LBBtOV LXIL
Arei vma achett des pomnMt 1
J'eD ft! flehet6.
Koiu en •▼ons acfaett.
Nous 1m «a wroDM jMrraidte.
catferSj) books.
Bav€ you bought appia?
I Have bought samt.
Wo have wmghl mmm,
Wt ha/fM firsiuadtd (ktm cfU.
EXXRCIBI 81.
A6het-er, 1. to buf, [^49, Doim-er, 1. to givos Ckvd-er, 1. to kttpt
(5.)] VM^ from Dire, 4. far. OraTure, f en^ainn^ /
Apport-er, 1. to brvM; udd; Onbll-er, 1. toforgHf
Appellor, 1. to eaU. [V^, Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Bec-eToIr, 8. to roowKi
(4.^] £xamin-er, 1. to oxomr Reli-er, 1. to binds
Brocn-er, 1. tostUeh; ine ; Reveiiiis, m. p. vnamet
Bonne, f. pwntf Exprfts, on purpose i Tasae, f. eupf
Cass-er, 1. to break ; Flepr, f. JUwer ; Vu, from voir, 8. Ir. aem.
Commiaaion, f. errand;
1. Nona avez yova apport6 noa habita 1 2. Nona ne lea avona paa
encore apport^a. 3. Lea avez voua oubli6a 1 4. Nona ne lea avona
paa oubU^a, maia nona n'avona pas en le temps de les apporter. 6
Ponrqnoi n*avez vona paa appeI6 lea marehands 1 6. Je lea ai appelea,
mais ila ne m'ont paa entendn. 7. Avez vons entendu cette mu«
aiqnet 8. Je Tai entendne. 9. N'avez vona paa vn lea jolies fleura
que j'ai apport6es? 10. Je lea ai vnea; ^qni lea avez vona don*
n^eal 11. Je ne lea ai donn^ea ii peifeonne, {e les ai gardes ponr
vons. 12. Avez vona bien examine cea gravnrea? 13. Je lea ai
bien examin6ea. 14. Lea avez vouaaohet^ea. 16. Jene lea ai point
achet^en. 16. N'avez vona point regn voa revenns? 17. Je ne lea
ai point encore re9ns. 18. La domestiqne a-t-elle caaa^ cea taaaea?
19. £lle lea a caas^a. 20. A^t-elle caaa6 dea tnaaea expr^s? 31.
Elle n'en a paa eaaa6 exprda. 22. Avez voua achetS des livrea re*
li^a on broeh^a. 23. J'ai achet6 dea livrea retina. 24. Noua aves
voua dit cea parolea ! 26. Nona vons les avona ditcs, maia voua lea
avez onbli^ea. 26. Je n'ai paa oubli6 votre commiaaion.
ExsRCiSB 82. »
^ 1. Have yon aeen my cupa ? 2. I have not yet aeen thesL 8.
Have you brought me my booka ! 4. I have not forgotten them» I
have left them {laiss-er^ 1 .) at my brother's. 6. Has your mother called
your aiatera ? 6. She has not yet called them. 7. Has the servant
told you this news ? (mmveSf.) 8. She has told me this news. 9.
She haa told it me. 10. Have you forgotten my errand 1 11. Wis
have not forgotten it, we have forgotten your money. 12. Where
liave yotf left your puraet 13. We left it at the merchants 14.
Have you boi^t the beantifti} (fteOw} engrt ringa wbieh I «Mf it
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
&BftOS XhUh It^
jpowbookaaHer'sl 16. 1 hftT« not seen tlMiii. 18. Hw yoir moihflr
bongfat tbem 1 17. She has bought books, but she has bought no
engiuvingB. 18. Has that little girl broken my cups? 19. She has
broken them oo purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income
erevy month t 31. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the
house which you have bought large? 23. I have bought no house.
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re-
teived a letter f^m him four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to
those ladies 1 97. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given
them flowers! 89. I have given them some (en), 80. Are the
bodu whieh you have bought bound? 81. No, Sir, they are in
paper eoYers. 32. Have yom eiamined that house ? 33. I have not
•Tsmined iL 84. Your brother (an) has examined several (plimeuri)
LESSON XLEDT. LEgON XLIIL
ms or TBM AUnT.TARIBS (( 46).
1. The active verb [{ 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which haa
or may have a direct regimen or ol^eot, always takes avoirt » ^ta
■Miliary [({46,(10] :—
Koua aroDs terit a notre banquier. We have written to our hoinker,
2l Almost all neuter verba, i. e. verbs which cannot have a direel
eljeet, take the auxiliary avoir, when they express action:—
Nous avoos oouru, march6, parM. We have run, walked, spoketi.
8. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs, expressing action,
are, however, conjugated with ^fv— aller, 1o go ; arriver, to arrive ;
ehoir, tomber, tofdU; decider, mourir, to die; naltre, to he bnm;
vemr, to come; parvenir, to succeed; devenir, to heoome; revenir.lb
A quelle heure Ates vous venu 1 At what hour did you come ?
Je snis * n6 en France. / was bom t« FVaaue,
4. A few neuter verbs [( 46^ (a)] take avoir, when they
aotion, and 6tre, when they express situation : —
* Otaenre thai when the person spoken of is ttiw, the FrsBoh use ike
pnseoi and not tl^ past of the auxiliary with the past partidple of
batre, to be bom f^Cfette dame es< n6e en Angteterre. i%al lady (is)
mm bom umglamd;^Uimfk^nes$ri6€afnooB, MfbtM^{k)mm
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IW
hMBkOS XtllS,
Voire fttto est ilB>rti1 J$ your broikgr gone aia?
5. The past indefinite of the verb ^ire, [4. ir.] (Pal 6t6, iio) k
used instead of the preterite Indefinite of aller (Je suisall^j) when
speaking of a phu^e where one has been : —
he mMedn a 6t6 li Paris. Tie pkyddan ku been mi Pans.
J*ai 6td a Tiglise ce matin. / toe^U to church this monUng,
6. When, however, we are still in a given place or on the read
towards it, the expression, Je suis all^ &g^ is used >-
Le n^dectn est alU k Londrea.
Votre 8(Bur est aU6e a I'^lise.
1^ fh^fsiekH is gene te Lendem
Your sister is gone Ic ckiureh.
RteuiEit or EzAiTPiBS.
Avez vons 6t6 an bal bier an soir 1
Nous n*y avons pas 6t6.
OtL oette demoiselle a-t-elle 6t61
£lle a 6t6 chez son fiire et chez
noos.
Ot votre stenr est ette sH6e ce
matin 1
£Ue est aI16e troaver ta consine.
N'avez vous pas sorti aigourd'hnl 1
Je n'ai pas encore sorti. *
m est Monsienr le g6ndral 1
Jt ne sais pas^ Monskenr, 11 est
sorti.
Od ce monslenr est 11 n6 1
II est nA k Paris on k hytm,
Yotte nidee *-t-eUe StA voir son
frftrel
SUe a €t6 Id vofa* hier.
SUe est all^e le voir hier.
Did you go to the haU lad evening?
We^didne^ro.
Whither did that yewng lady go?
Ske went to her brother's and to aw
house.
Where is your sister gone this mom*
in^?
iSke ts gone to her musin.
Did you not go out to-day?
I have not yet been out.
Where is the general?
I do not Jbmo, Str^ he is gone Ml..
Where was that gentleman bom?
Be was bom in Paris or Zjyims.
Didyourmeoe goto visit her bnther?
She went to see hxm yesterdav (and
isbacky '^ --s^v
She went to see him yesterday (and is
naback.)
£XBS0I8JB 83.
BQoaterie, f. jewdryt Ma^on, m. mason t Orftvre, m. goldsmith t
Chapelier, m. hatter ; Magasin, m. warehouse ; Part-ir, 2. Ir. to set emti
fit^i (from 6tre, 4. ir.)Malade, ^iot:; Eetonm-er^ \, to wo'
been ; Marchandise, f mtr(hanr turn ;
Bspagne, f. Spain ; ^se ; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out ;
Horlsfec, m. watch^m4^JSi^ from Naitre, 4. Ir.Vena, from venir, %
ker; to be bom: ir. come,
i. A quelle heure votre soBor est elle venue 1 9. Elle est vesiM
k'iaui beores mollis un qtnrl 8. €es demoiaellea soul eUw ndos i^
Bonen on ^ Caen? 4. Biles ne sont n^es ni i Ronen id i Cua^
•Um sont A6eaitStraaUHUq8f- ^* I«harl<)ger oatll oh|^ luif . 6. Jfoo,
Honsieur, 11 eat all6 k son magasin. 7. A4^ M k9^A^
Digitized
by Google
ainfie ! 8. Oui, Madame, 11 y a 6te. 9. Y a^t-il achet6 des mareliaii«
diaea ? 10. 0 j a acbet6 de la bijouterie. 1 1. Aves youa M trourer
mon pdre? 12. J'al 6te 1e tronver. 13. Yotre chapelier a-t>il aortJ
aiijottrd*hiii? 14. n nVi ]»» aorti, il eat malade. 16. Le ma^on eit fl i
lamaiaon? 16. Non, Madame, 11 eat sorti. 17. Quand est il aorti f
18. 11 eat aorti il y a une beure. 19. Votre chapelier est il arrii6
anjourd'hm ou bier? 20. II eat arriv^ bier ^ quatre heurea du auttin.
91. Notre taitlemr a-t41 M Toir aon p^ aigourd'hoi? 9Sl D eat
parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfdvre de mon coaain n'eat 11 paa parti
pour rEapagne? 94. Nod, Monaienr, il eat retown^ en AUemagae,
25. Ma acBur a 6t6 ^ T^gliae ce matin, et elle eat all^ k T^colOt 11 y a
nne demi>heare.
EzsftciSB 84.
I. la the pbyaieian at home ? 2. No, Sir, be ia not at homo ; he la
oat. 3. Have you been out tfaia morning! 4. No, Sir, I have not
beao out; I am aick. 6. Ia your aister'a little girl ontl 6. Yea, Sir,
she Sa out, ahe ia at my brother'a. 7. At what hour did the hatter
arrive! 8. ifis arrived Uet evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go to
Paiia or to Lyona tfaia year! 10. He went to Parle aix moatha age«
bnt he ia baek (dls retaur). 11. Did you go to my brother or to my
■iaterf 12. 1 have not had time to go to tbem. 13. Where waatha^
gentleman bom ! 14. He waa bom in England, ia Exeter or in Porta*
month. Ifi. Waa not your aiater born in Paria! J18. No, Sir, ahe
waa barn in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did yon tell me that yov brother
haa bought a good houae ! 18. He has bought a very good houae in
London. 19. Do you know at what time the watchmaker arrived ! 20.
He arrived this morning at a quarter before five. 21. Haa be brought
much jewelry ? 22. He haa not brought much jewelry, bnt he haa
bfougfat many watahea (montrey £). 23. Haa he be«i in Franco or
in Germany! 24. He haa been in France, in Germany, and in Swlt-
serland (Suisse), 25. Ia your aiater in (d la matson), Sir? 26. No,
Sir, ahe la out; ahe ia gone to church. 27. Did ahe go to aehool
yesterday * 28. She went to school and to church. 99. Ia ahe thpje
now ! 80. No, Sir, ahe ia back. 31. Ia the hatter arrived! 32. Yea,
^ he ia arrived. 33. When did he arrive! 84. He arrived yeater-
iaj At nine o^cloek in the morning. ;
Digitized
by Google
ISf
tlttOV X&IT»
LESSON XLIV.
LEgON XLIV.
1. Combien de temps corregponda with the Engtiah ex|icef«ioi^
kowlong,
Combien de temps ayes Tons de- Howhng ^dyimlivem MUUff ^
menrS en Italie %
9. Combien de foia answers to the English,' hmo cfient hmo nua^
Combien de Ibis y stos toos 6tA1 Bow mamnf Hmetlumfom htmUtemf
5. Jnsqn'oti is used for howfoTy what Hsianeej &o.
Jnsqn'oJi ayes Tons 6U 1 Bnofar ka/ve f9u been 7
4. Jnsqu'i quelle heure (JtiU what hour^ meana also, haw late,
Jnaqa'd, quelle heure area tous at- Bow late did you waU7
tendtti
6. IVoii means whence; par oQ, whidh way^ in u^utt Hreetian,
lb*otL yenez Tons mon ami 'i Whence d» you came, my friend 7
Par oOi yotre ami est il aM 1 Whickway is your fiienagone7
6. Mener [{ 49.], porter, to take, to carry ; amener, apporter, to bring
l9 take with one ; ommener, emporter, to take, to carry away. We uao
mener, amener, emmener, for to take, to bringy to take away, in the
sense of conducting, hading,' guiding, on foot or in a vMde. Porter
iqiporter, emporter, mean to carry, to bear, to carry away, 4^
Menez yotre soeur k T^cole. Tiake your sister to sekool.
Portes oe livre li yotre scrar. T\tketkishoak to your t '
RfisuMft OF Examples.
Jusqu'oii yotre flrftre est 11 all4 1
Jl est aU4 josqu'a Paris.
Combien de temps ya-t-il y rester?
n ya 7 rester juBqu'au printemps.
Combien de temps avoz yous 4o-
meur6 a Londres 1
Nona y ayons demeur6 six ana.
Josqu'oik ayes yous 4t4 1
Nous ayons 6t6 juaqu'auz Champs
Elys6es.
Jnsqu'^ quelle benre ayes Tons
4crit1
J'ai 6crit Jnsqu'a minuit.
P'ou yiennent ces Allemandes 1
XUes yiennent d'Aix-la-ehapelle.
Par oh sent elles yenues 1
SUes sent yenues par Brozelles.
*^ TOOS oette petite fflle k
How far is your brother gone7
Be is gone as far as Paris.
Bow lon^ is he going to stay tkere7
Be is going to Say SerewUil^mng
Bow long did you Uve in London^
We Uved there six years.
Bow far did you go ?
We went as far as the Champs ESy*
sSes,
Bow late didyouwrite7
I wrote until midnight.
Whence come those German kuUes7
They come from Aiz-la-chajMe^
Whuh way did they iXfm€7
They came by Br%Mds,
Doyau take (lead) that liUk gki Is
Kkeel7
Digitized
by Google
i¥»tov xhtr.
IIS
est tn>p petite pour marcher.
Ameoez voiis Toe enfknis 1
Portes TO u une lettre a la potte 7
J'emmftne moD cheval, j'emporte
na monfo.
I do nU lead her ihtn^ / amy hm
there; she is too itnaU to walk.
Do fou bring four children?
Do fontake a letter to the pwtt^iffia?
I bring away my horse, J bring awaif
myvHUch'
ExSBOisx 85.
IcJ, here; Pi«d, m. foot ;
Loin, yar; Quitt-er, 1. to leant;
Magiuflqae,fiui^t/ceii<; Soieries, f. p. silk goods;
Midi, iu»99i; VoMxix^, t. carriage;
NouYeUe, f. news; Voyagenr, m. ^oveAfr.
Bmit, m. noise;
Jh9sp,tn,doth;
El&re, m. pupil;
Pils, m. son;
Tm^^,fine;
1. Le jenne homme est il all6 loin 1 2. H n'est pas alld bien loin,
il n'est alU que jusqn*^ Paris, 8. Vos eofants font trop de bruit,
poorquoi ne les emmenez vous pas! 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu-
rent marcher. 6. Comment les avez vous amends ici ? 6. Je les ai
amends en voitnre. 7. A quelle heure amenez vous le medeein t
8. Je I'amdne tons les jours k midi. 9. Combien de fois par jo or
menez yous yos 61^ves ^ Tcglise? 10. Je les^ m^ne k I'^glise deux
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez vous ^t6? 12. Ty ai k\Jk
plasieurs fois. 13. Par od ces voyagenrs sont ils venus ? 14. lis sont
?enus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'oCk apportez i^ous cette nou»
telle t 16. Je Tapporte de Cologne. 17. D'oi^ avez vous amend
ees superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amends d'Angleterre. 19. Si vous
quittez la France, avez vous Tintention d'emmener votre fils? 20. Tui
rintention de Temmener. 21. Qu'avez vous apportS de France? 22.
Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps fins et des cha-
peaux de Lyon. 23. Avez vous amene votre fille 3l pied ou k cheval ? 24.
Je I'ai amende en voiture. 25. Vos fr^res nous ont apport6 des livres.
EzsRCiSE 86.
1. How long did your son Uve in London t 3. He lived thort
ten years. 3. How far is the physician gone ? 4. The physician
is gone as fiir as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him f 0.
He has not taken him. 7. How have yon brought your two little
giris? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 9.
Is she too little to walk? la She is not too small to walk, but she
is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse] 12. We have brought
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro>
0iiaed me \promis) ? 14. I have forgotten to brmg them. 15.
Has that lady brought her eldest (mni) son? 16. She has brought
lU her children. 17. How did they come? 1$. They came in %
eaniage. 19. Which way did your brother come from Gcrmaaj^
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
194 LSBSOV XL?.
BO. He cama hy Aiz-lit-Chapelle and Brassels. 21. Do jt*n intend
to take your ^loo to school Uiis afternoon ? 32. I do not intend t«
take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick */> walk t
S4. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 35 Why do
you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother has taken my
horse away. 27. Have you brought the physician 7 28. T have not
brought him, no one ia ack at our house. 29. Will yo« take this
book to ehnreh ? 80. I have another, I do not want it il. Hav«
Tou taken my letter to the post-office ! 32. I have forgotten ik
83. How late did you write ? 34. I wrote until midnight (imnuiO*
V^ Whence do your sisters come t 36. They come from Paria.
LESSON XLV. LEgON XLV.
(See Lesson 86.)
1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes dtre as it^
auxiliary [} 46] : —
Voire cousin s'est promen6. Tour cousin has taken a walk.
Nos amis se sOnt flatty. Our friends kaveJUiUered themsdves.
2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated
with ^tre, it agrees with its direct regimen, when that regimen pre-
cedes it, and is invariable when the regimen follows it The student
should be careful to see, if the reflective pronoun be a direct or an
indirect regimen [{ 135.] : —
Voos voua 6tes flatties, Mesdemoi- You have fiaUered yourselves^ young
selles. ladies.
Elles se sont donn6 la main They have given (to) each other the
hand.
It will be easily perceived that se in the first sentence is a dtreei
regimen, and that the same word in the aeoond represents an indu
reel object
3. Verbs essentially unipersonal, L e., verbs which cannot be ooOi
jirgated otherwise, take avoir as an auxiliary :—
- U a plu, H a neigA, Q a ge\€. It ratned^ it snowed, UJrosx,
• 4. Verbs oci^aionally unipersonal, take 6tre as an auxiliary:—
II lui esl arrjvg nn tnalheur. JL misfortune has happened to him,
5. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonally, and Y avoir, to be theret ttk»
the auxilkry avoir : —
t|^ fUt bc^ti temps te mois pa8s6 1 Was UJlne weather last menA?
M en beaueoop da mondel Were mere many peopU tker^f
^ Digitized by CjOOQ IC
istfiio'lr tLT/
iMr'
4. I^w particfple {Mttt of a nnipenonal rerb k always fnvaiJiM*
[J 135,(8.)] :—
htt ploies qull y a ea cet 6t6. T%e raint which we have had tkb
BiamA ov ExahplkSp
Im ItaUemiea ae aont elles prome-
Om, Hondeor, ellei le aont prome-
Notts nous sommos apei^ns de cela.
Votre mdre a'est eUe bien portte 1
Yos sceurs ae aont elles assises 1
Oeite marcbandise s'est elle bfen
veadael
Vos en&nts so soot ils appUqn^s k
Yiiude 1
nsiTysont appI!cni6B.
Nous noDB somnief dofanft da la
peine. [4186,(1.)!
Qael temps a-tril mi ce matin 1
N Vt.fl pM fkit beau temps %
Qaal uiattioiir Tons est U arrh€1
Yens est il arrive qaelque chose 1
n ne m'est lien atriyd.
Did the ItaUan ladies waik?
yke, SiTy they have taken awalk.
thai, wweiook naUee
Weperoei
ef IkaL
Has yowrmother beeniDtU?
Did yov/r sisters sit dcvm?
Did that merchandise sell todl 7
Did your ckUdren ofpkf ta study ?
T%ey applied to U.
We gave (J9) oumhfes wmch tnmlk»
What weather was it this morning 7
Was it mot fine weather7
What misforlnime has ha^fpemd ta
yon?
Has any thing happened to you 7
Nothing hashappened to me.
ExBROiss 87,
Adar, m.j£fe2; Chti-er, 1. pec eoAoflf 8atn»np»er, 1. nClsli
ffadrsaa-a^l. letteop-HoQaDdalSye. ZhcAcA; mistaken:
fiys Neig-er. 1. pec to snow; Se serv-ir, 2. ir. ref tp
l^apero-eroir, 8. ref. <9 Peine, f. trovUes use;
perceive ; Pin, fitm plenvoir, msa- Se Tandnre, 4.n£.ia§dL
S'asse-oir, 8. ir. ref. to ed;
sit down; Plume, tpen;
8'emray-'er,l.pec[^9.]8e port-er, 1. ref. to he
to grew weairy^ or doi
1. A qui T08 aoBnra se aont elles adress^es? 2. Elles se sont
adress^s ^ moi. 3. Ne se sont aUea paa tromp6es? [L. 38. 1.] 4.
EUea so aont tromp^es. 6. Yons dtes voos aper^u de votre erreurt
6. Je ne m'ei^ enis pas apergu. 7. Youa ^tes vous ennay6s & la
eampagne? 8. Nons nous y sonunes ennuy6s. [L. 38. 4.] 9. Ces
demoiaellea ae sont ellea eimuy^ ohaa ▼oos? 10. Elles s'y sont
ennnySea. 11. De qnoi vous dies vous servie pour ^crire, Mademoi*
sellef [L. 39. 2.] 12« Je me suis servie dhine plume d'or. 13.
Caa ^eoli^rea ne se aont elles pas aerviea de plumea d'acierl 14.
Elles 86 aont servies de plumea d^argent. 15. La HoUandaise s'eat
i% 16. Ella ne a'aat point aaaiaa. IT LiU eat i* arrive w
Digitized
by Google
IM- tBttoir xhrv
aa&enrt 18.IliielmeBtTie&aniv6,eUeneMportopAiUao» 10
No ft*e8t elle pas donn6 [} 135, (1.)] de la peine pom rien? 9a
Cotte Boie ne a'est elle pas bien vendue 7 21. £11e s'est tr^s bien
Tendne. 2d. NVt-il pas fait beau temps toute la journ^f 23.
Non, Monsieur, il a plu, il a neig6 et il a grel6. 24. N*e8t41 rien
«rriv6 anz deux dames que nous avons vues ce matin ! 26. Noih
Madamei il ne leur est rien arriv6.
BzsBOiSB 88.
h Has it rained to-day ? 2. It has not rained, but it has bailed
and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little boy t 4.
Nothing has happened to him, but he is sick to-day. 5. Did yoni
lister sit down at your house ? 6. She did not sit down, she waa
lick. 7. Did that cloth sell well 1 8. It sold very well, we have sold
it alL 9. Did you perceive your error (erreur) ? 10. We perceived
it. 11. Were not your sisten mistaken in this affair? 12. They
were not mistaken. 18. Were not your cousins weary of being in
the country? 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 16.
What have you used to write your exercises? 16. I used a gold
pen, and my brother used a silver pen. 17. Have yon used my pen*
knife (canif) ? 18. I have used it 19. What has happened to you 1
20. Nothing has happened to me. 21. Has your mother been well ? 22.
She has not been well. 23. Did your brothen apply to their studies,
at school t 24. They applied to their studies and have finished their
leesons.. 26. What weather was it this morning ? 26. It was very
fine weather. 27. Has your sister taken much trouble in this affiurf
28. She has taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did the Dutch
ladies walk ? 80. They walked this morning. 31. How far did they
walk ? 82. They walked as far as your brother's. 33. Have you
given each other the hand? 34. We shook handa 36. Those ladiea
flattered themselves very much (beaucaup).
LESSON XLVI. LEgON XLVL
THB PASSIVV VERB () 64).
1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb ^<fe in aQ
ita tenses, the past participle of an active verb. See model, { 64
% This participle must agree in gender and number with thu ^b-
JMt U 184, (2.) L. 42. R. 6.]: —
Digitized
by Google
ifiiftoji xhrv
in
Cm TMItidff font nipeetfo. TVir M fMn «« iwjmcM.
Cm enfanti tont ttaoM de tout to TVsr<AiUm»arv20Vfi<^fMr3fM||^
mondo.
8. Tfaa feniuB of the French language Beems to prefer the aeti?e
to the passive voice. Many expressions which are in the passive Ift
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or m
flective [t 138, (6.) { 113, (1.)] :—
Cette maison est k loner on & vendre.
'Ifa iosnr est & pbdndre.
Get homme est k. cndndre.
Get homme s'appelle H. TL. 86. R. 2.]
Oet homme se trompe. [L 88. R. 2.1
Qnditqaecelaestamsi. [L. 86. R. 2.]
On nons a dit oela. [L. 86. R. 2.]
'that house is to be l€i arttU,
^tisUristobefritUd.
That man is to be hand,
T%at man is eaUed H.
Tkat man is mistaken.
It is sidd that itisse.
We have been told that.
4. In an answer to a qneation [see L. 34. R. 13.], the pronoun la
eoneq;N>nd8 in signification with the English word so^ or «^ exproaoed
or understood. Le refers then to a noon not determined (not pre*
eeded by an article or a possessive acyeetive), to an acy active, to a
veib or even to a whole sentMice >—
Ges enflmts sont Ha dfanfel
Bs ne le scot pas.
Ges demoiselles sont elles scenis t
EUes ne le sent pas.
Are those ehilaren loved?
7TI<y are not (so\
Are 'those young ladies sisten?
They are not.
6, When le refers to a determined nonn, it often corresponds in
■igniOcation to the pronoun ke^ sAe, or ihey^ which may or may not be
expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender
and number of the noun to which it refers.
Atesvooslai
Jelasnia.
rde
Are you the stster qf miy fiiendf
J am (she).
RtauMft OF Examples*
Lenr coodnite est elle appronv6e 1
Rile n'est approuvte de peisomie.
Gette dame est elle estlmte et res-
pected
Slie n'est ni estim4e nl respect6e.
Ges marehandises sont k vendre.
Ges cnfknts sent bien k plaindre.
A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frftrel
On ne lui a rien dit.
Savez vons comment cda s'appelle 1
Madame, btee vons maitresse ici 1
Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur.
Etes Yous la maitresse de la mal-
scqI
JelasiJa.
Is their conduct approved f
It is approved by nobody.
Is that lady esteewied and tespettsdt
l^ is neither esteemed nor respeded.
Those goods are to be told (for as<f>
Those children are to be pitud.
Has any thing been said to my brothel
Nothing hasoeen said to him.
Do you know how that is called?
Madame^ are you mistreuhere?
I am not («o), Sir,
Are yo^ the mistress of the kmmt
I em {she).
Digitized
by Google
EzEROiss 89.
B'Appel-er, 1. pec ta AfCroi-re, 4. ir. to bduves Pim-ir, 2. to^^umAi
called [^ 49, (4.)] ; £ooUer, m. sckalar; Barementi selfUmt
Auteur, m author ; Jardin, m. garden ; Helieur, m. bookbinder ,'
BUm-er, 1 . to blame ; Lou-er, I. to let, to praise; Boa vent, often ;
Oar, foTf Mftra, f. moiier ; Us-er, 1. to laear ou$$
Condoite, f. conduct; Pareaseuz, se^ idle; Yend-re, 4. to sell,
U Voire m^re eat elle aim6e de aa aceurl 3. £Ue eat atm6e db
■on fr^re et de aa aoBur. 3. Lea Italiena aont ila aim6s dea Frangaia 1
4. Yoa teoliera ne aont ila paa bl&m^a t 6. ILb aont bllm^a qnelqne*
foia. 6. Sont ila aonvent punis ? 7. Qa aont rarement punia. 8.
Par qui dtea vona pani quand voua ^tea pareaaeuz ? 9. Je ne aaia
Jamaia pnni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle M appronv^e? 11. Elle a
4t6 ufipfowhe de tout le monde. 12. Elle a 6t6 approuv^e par* aea
amia. 13. Get auteur eat il eattm^ ! 14. D eat eatim^ de toot le
Buonde. 16. Le jardin dn ralteur eat il k vendre ou k louerT 18.
On dit qu'il eat k loner. 17. Le menuisier ft-Uil iait Cure un habit I
18. U en a fait faire deux. 19. Lea Imbita que voua avez acliette
aont ila ua68 (room out) t 20. Ila sont us^ j^en ai fait faire d'autrea.
21. Dit-on que noa amia aont aimds de tout le monde ! 22. On ne le
dit pas, car on ne le croit pas, 23. Lea dames que nous avons vuea k
r^glise hier au aoir, aont ellea soBurs ? 24. Elles ne le aont pas, on
dit qu'elles sont couaines. 26. On dit que Toffic^er qui Went d'ar*
fiver a'appelle 9.
EXKRCZSB 90,
l.Aie yoa blamed or praised? 2. I ap neither blamed nor
praised. 3. Is not youreouain esteemed by every body! 4. She ta
esteemed by nobody. 6. What has been said of my brother? 6.
Nothing has been said of him. 7. Do you know if your broth'v'a
house is to be let ? 8. I have been told (on nCa dit) that it is to be
sold. 9. Is not an idle person to be pitied? 10. The idle man is to
be pitied. 11. Is your son sometimes punished at school? 12. He
a always punished when he is idle. 13. Are your scholars praised
when they are diligent {diligent) ? 14. They are praised when they
are diligent^ and they are blamed when they are idle. 16. Is that
lady esteemed and respected? 16. She is loved, esteemed and re-
spected by every body. 17. What has been told you ? 18. We have
been told that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam,
are yoa Mr. S.*a aister? '20. No, Sir, I am not. 21. Madam, ara
« The prepositions (20 sad par are used Indiflbrently after many pasriv*
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LBSSbir'XIryiL lt#
f oil pleased with your son's conduct ? 5^ No, Sir, I am not, for he
b blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ?
24. It 18 said that le is ealled H. 26. What is your brother's namet
36. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother
is arrived? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods whicfi
your brother has brought, for sale 1 30. They are not for sale. 31.
Has the bookbinder had a coat made t 32. He has had a coat made.
38. Is hit other coat worn out ! 34. The coat which he bought last
year is worn oul
LESSON XLVn. LE5»N ZLVIL
1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go awa^
[L. 40. 1, 2.], the pronoun en will of course keep its general place,
after the other pronouns and before the auxiUary. It must nevec
eome between the auxiliary and the participle: —
Jem'ensmsall^, /lam^otMy; Nous nous en WewefUawayi
lalUs,
Tut'enesalM, 7\m loenteU Vonsvoosendtes YouwejUawaijft
aufoy i allte,
n s'en est alM, HiwefUauHUff Ds s'en sont all^s, Tl^f loria «iMHr
Les dames s'en sont all6es. Tki ladies are gone away.
Les messieurs s'en sont all^s. The gerUUmen are gone away.
2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the
English toJUy to sit : —
Hod habit va bien. My coal fits or siU vdk
3. Seohr [8.ir. see UUe { 82.] a&swers to the English to mit^ to
oecofne'"'^
Ge chspeau ne vous sled point. That hat does not become you.
4. Essayer (^49,) corresponds in signification to the English to
try on: —
rai essays mon gilet, 11 me va bien. / have tried my waieteoat, U /ts ma
yrelL
6. ttre is often used in French for appnrtenir, to belong [{ 108,
% , , ^^ , . i 7\f wham does that house belong f
Aqoieetoettemaiseiit \ Whose kamee is tMf
FlleestiiiuoDOOUsia MUmy0nsisi>'s,
Digitized
by Google
140
LBdtov xhriu
RtiaUM* OF EZAXPLIB.
A quell* boiire tobs en dies Tons
Je m'en rais aU6 & neaf heures.
Tons en dtes yons aU6ee trop tdt,
MestUmeB?
Nous noofl en lommes alltee trop
tard.
Cette robe yone yft-t-eUe bieni
Elle ne me ya pas bien.
Get habit yons sied il fort bien 1
Je Tai essays, maia il ne ya pas
bien.
n liii ya bien (r6^me Indirect),
n me gAne, il me serre tiop.
Cette robe ne lui ya pas bien.
Ces Uvres sont its a yons ou a moi 1
lis ne sont ni a moi ni & yons.
A qui sont lis done 1
Len liyres de qni, ayez yons appor-
t6s1
J'ai apporti oenx de mon tk^xe.
AiwkaikmwiU^g9
I went awof at nine $^cUek.
Did fou go awaf too Moon, ladkif
We wtnt awtuf too late.
Does that dresfJU you wdl7
It does not Jit me wOL
Does that coat become yon venfWeAf
I have tried u on^but it does not ft
me,
nfls him VfeU,
R hurts me, it presses me too mnek.
That dress does not fit her toeB.
Are those books yours or mine?
T%eybetong neither to me nor to you.
Whose are they then?
Whose books have youbrougkt?
I ham brought my brother't.^
Nenf, ye, newf
00^ where;
Serr-er, 1. to press #
Ten-ir, 2. ir. £0 hoUt
Vers, towardSj about.
ExsBClBS 91.
Bean-fbdre, m. brother'in- Fono6, e, dark ;
laiwg Cttn-er, 1. to hurt,
Botte, f. bootf press;
Olair, e, Ught; Gilet, m. waistcoat;
Court, e, short f Large, widet
Etroit, e, narrow, tight; Mieoz, better;
1, Yoabottes ne yont elles pas bien? 2. Elles ne meyontpaa
bien, elles me serrent trop. 3. Sont elles trop ^troites ? 4. Elles
Bont trop 6troitcs fit trop courtes, elles me g^nent 5. Le cordonnier
&*en est il all6 1 6. H ne s'en est pas encore all6. 7. A quelle heure
les compsgnes de yotre soenr s'en sont elles all^s? 8. Elles s'en
aont all^s yers six heures de Taprds-midi. 9. L'habit que vons
tenez, est il ^ yous on ^ yotre iHre ? 10. II n'est ni ^ lui ni 4 moi,
fl est i mon beau fr^re. 1 1. Lui yspt-il bien ? 12. II lui ya fort bien,
et il lui sied bien. 13. Oii Pa-Ul fait fiiire! 14. II I'a fiiit &ire en
France ou en AUemagne. 15. A qui sont les livres que lit Made-
moiselle yotre scBurl 16. lis sont It moi. 17. Yotre gilet va-t-il
mieux que celui de yotre beau-fr^rel 18. II me ya beaucoup mieux.
19. Yotre habit ne yous g^ue*t-il pas? 20. II ne saurait (cannct)
me gdner, il est de beaucoup trop large. 21. Ayez yous essay^ yotra
habit neuf ? 22. Je Pai essay^, mais la couleur ne mo sied pas.
28. Est elle trop claire ? 24^ EUo est t x>p foncM. 26. Lea eonloim
fone6es ne me sitent jsmak
Digitized
by Google
LSttOV rXTIIL 141
EZIKOXBS 02.
1. An ) our fH« ids gone away ? 3. They are not yet gone away,
fliey are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away ! 4
She w«iit away early this morning. 5. Did yonr little sister go away
late T 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new dresa
beeome her? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why doe& it not be
come her? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light colors
become your brother's vrife ? 12. They becdtaie her very well. 18.
Are your new boots too narrow or too widel 14. They are neither
too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does yonr brothei^s
waistcoat fit him ? 16. It fits him, but it does not become him. 17.
Light colors never become him. 18. Does yonr coat press youf
19. It does not press me, it is by fiur too wide. 20. Whose house is
that? 21. It is my father's and brother's. 22. Whose books have
yon brought this morning? 23. I have brought my brother's and
my sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those? 25. They are my mo-
ther's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are not thoee Germaii
books yours? SH. They are not mine, they aro my friend's. 28.
Are those pens yours or mine ? 29. They are neither yours nor
mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat fit you? 31. Yes,
Sir, it fits me, but it does not become me. 32. Is your hat too
small? 33. It is too large (grand), 34. Are your gloves too laige*
36. They are too small, I cannot put them on.
LESSON XLVUL LBpON XLVm.
1. The verb lalloir [3. ir.], to he necessarfy is always eoxjugated
nnipersonally. See table, } 82.
n fiint, 11 a tkllu. Bisneeessaajt it was or kat Asm n^
ctssarf,
D fiiut etudier tons les Jours. His necessary to siudf everf daif,
2. As faUoir has slways a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative
or subject, a pronoun In the indurect regimen (dative— me, te, luit
nous, voos, leur), plaoed before the verb, will oe equivalent to the
proDoon used aa nominative to the English voibe muai, to k
Miged, &e..'—
U me fknt 4crire nn thime. i m/iut wnie m^ atmsu
OftMiistatllallert Wkmmmdmgof
Digitized
by Google
149
J,MBIiOW -fihrilh
B. Falloir 11 luedin the signifieation of to want, $o medftoU umim
the necessity of having: —
n me faui an livre. / need a book.
n lui fkut de I'argent Be is in want ofmoiuy.
4. When must is used in the last acceptation, and has a noun ae
its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence should
be in the indirect regimen preceded by d : —
n fant on Hvre a ma soeur. Mv sister must hixve a bcok (naeA «
RteUM£ OF Examples.
Pour apprendre une langne 11 fkut
Itudier.
n (kut aUer k I'^ise et a Fficole.
H fkat rester k la matson.
n ne flmt lire an boo livre *
n lui fkut aller voir sa mdre.
Que nous faut-il faire 1
Que leur flrat-il lire 1
Que tear fant-il 1
II leur ikutde I'argent ou dn credit
Tons firat-fl dnqoante ftancs t
D me faut cinquante-oinq francs 1
Combien d'argent faut-il a votre
pirol
n lui en fhut beaucoup.
Nous avons oe quil [R. 8.] nous faut
To learn a language it is necessarf
to study,
B is necessary to go to ciurck aetd t»
school
It is necessary to remain al home,
Iwust read a good hook.
She must go and see her mother.
What must vfe do?
What must they read 7
What do they wani or need?
They 'need or must have money or
credit.
Do yarn umU or must yen have Jtfiy
francs?
J must have or Ineedf fly-five francs.
How much money does yowr faiket
want?
He wants mtuch {of it).
We have what we want.
* EXBBOIBS 98.
Aller trouyer, to go to a Dayantage, nurre ;
Fort, very, very mucki
persons
IMsir-er, 1. to wish, de- Modisle, milUner;
Chirargien, m. surgeon ; sire ;
Contime, m. IQOthofa Dette, f debt;
fruThc; Snyoy-^, 1. ir. [^49,
Combien, how much, (2.)], to send;
how many ? Fin-ir. 2. to finish ;
Ouvrage, m. work;
Payer,l.pec.K49,(2.)],
iepay;
Peine, f. troiMeg
Quand, when, •
1. Que faut il faire aujourd'hui? 2. Aujourd*hui il faut travailler.
8. A-t-il fallu travailler fort pour finir Touvrage ^ temps? 4. D a
flilln trayaiDer toute la joum^. 6. Quand faat il 6crire k notre
ami ? 6. II iatit lui eerire aujourd^hui. 7. Me favt 11 aller trouver
Mon p^rel 8. II vous faut aller le trDayer,il d^re vons parler. ii
A-t-ti besoin de qoelque chose 1 10. II lui faut des livres, des plamoa
et de Tencre. 11. Ne lai faut il pas aussi de Targent! 13. II hu en
* Another oonstnustioa of these scatenoBS will be iomd Lomao SSL
1, SL ^
Digitized
by Google
tot teneonp pour payer tea dettea. 18« Yoiib faat-il eaeore qvelqu^
rhosel 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ee qu*ii me fkut 16.
Ne iaut il pas du papier k votre soeur? 16. II ne lui en faut paa da-
yantage* 17. Que faut il envoyer au chimrgient 18. II faut lui
ettvoyar de rai|s«iit^ il en a grand beaoin. 19. La modiste a-t«ll€
tout ee qn'il lui faut? SO. EUo n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui fan! 91.
Conbian voas faut il? 22. U me faut cinq franes. 23. Ne voua
faut il pas davantage ! 24 11 ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui
tot il poor aa peine! 26. II denande un franc vingt^cinq centimes
ExKROISK 94.
1. What must we do ? 2. You must bring your book and leani
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to wnte to your brother to-day ? 4
It is not necessary to write to him. 6. Has it been necessary to
apeak to your father? 6. It baa been necessary to speak to him. 7.
Is it neceasary to go to D. to^y ? 8. It is necessary to go thera
Of), 9. Must I go to your sister? 10. You must go to her, she
wif|iea to speak to you. 11. How much money must your brother
have ? 12. He must have ten francs fifty centlmea. 13." How many
books does your sister want? 14. She must have many books, she
reads (lU) much. 16. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We
must send him our horse ; his own (le sien) Is sick. 17. Must he
not have paper? 18. He must have some ; he ha» letters to write.
19. Must he have much? 20. He must have a quire (maint f). 21.
Do jrou want any thing move? (See No, 18» in the French exercm
above,) 22. I peed something more. 23. I need nothing more.
24. Mna^ yon have one hundred francs? 26. I must have ten dol-.
lars. 26. What does the aurgeon want? 27. He must have money
to (pour) pay his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants? 29.
He has. not ali that jie wants. 30. The milliner has received all that
she wants. 31. Wh^t must you have for your trouble ? 32. Ijfow
much do you want? 33. Hof much do we want? 84. What must
Id)? 3d. You must write a letter. 36. What must she writel
87. She must write four jiages. 38. She must go to church.
LESSON XUX. LBgON XLDL
1. The verb seotr [3. ir. LeaMm 47, B. 3.], is also used unipai^
■onaily:^ —
D ne voQs sied paa de parler ainsi. Jt don not beeomt fou to ^eak tku,
* TUi a4Terb can never be plaaed befhia a lubstaatiTa.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
U4
XiSfttOV XX.ZX
5. The T«rb eoiiTenir [d. ir. i« } 02.], to tuUy it at timea i
penonolly. It then MgDifies to he iuitable^ advisable^ &c. t—
n coovieDt de lai 6crire. li i$ advisable to wrUe to km.
3. The irregalar verb valour [see table, { 62.] correeponda in ■!§•
nification to the English expre88ion».to be worth : —
Cettemaisonvaatclnqmille francs. T%at house is worth Jive iknuand
francs.
4. Ne rien valoir meana to he good for notidng; ne paa valoif
grand'chose, to be worth Ultle^ not to be good for fMich.
Ce drap ne vant rien.
Notre maison ne vant pas pnnd'chose.
6. £tre riche de . . . meansto bewcrtht to possess; when a
ia the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in thia sense.
Gette personne est riche de dnq
miUe* piastres.
6. Valoir mieux, conjugated unipersonally, meana to be better:
▼aloir la peine, to be worth the whiie >—
n vaut miens travaHler que d'6tre It is better to labor than to^ idle,
oiBif.
n ne vant pas la peine de parler It is not worth the while tospeak ukm
quand on n'a rien a dire. one has nothing to say,
Steuicft OF Examples.
T%U doih is good for nothing.
Our house is not good for much.
That person is worth Jive thousand
dollars.
n ne vous sled pas de nous faire des
reproches.
n ne vous convient pas de parler de
la sorte.
n ne nous convient pas d*j aller.
Combien votro Jardin vaut il 1
II vaut beaucoQp plus que le vdtre.
11 ne vaut pas autant que le mien.
Notre maison ne vaut rien.
Votro habit ne wut pas grand'chose.
Cela ne vaut pas la peine.
Ce ehAteau pent valoir cent mille
francs.
De combien votre onde est il riche 1
D est riche de deux cent miUe francs.
Ne vaut il pas mieux lire que Jouer 1
It does not become fou to reproach «a
It is not suitable for fou to speak ee.
It does not suit us to go there.
How much is your garden i(wri47
// is much more vahtable than youew
It is not worth so much as mine,
Owr house is good for nothi$tg.
Your coat is noigoodfor mtuh.
That is not wor& the while.
Thai villa may be worthone hundred
thousand frana.
How mmch u your undo worth?
He is worth two hundred thoutastd
francs.
Is U not better to read than to pimff
EXBROIBB 95.
As8ur-er, 1. to aseuee g Cass-er, 1. to break t Conteau, m. knifsi
Att Juste, j^reetaefy; Centaine, f. abouiahue^ Harch6| ol eunMi
Autre chose, something dred; Ittrit^F, 1. 1# '
Digitized
by Google
ltato». £ imM; F«nP0ir» S. ir.40 A« «0le/7a«t m {Ana, M mmii
Wiiaeonco, t ntgleet f Reproeh-er, I, to m- Ta^/r^m tIlor,<9 j^/
H«gocUnt» merc/umt s proack t Vi>aine/. dftiwir tiMi4r.
1. Vowtsied-il de nous reprocber notre n^Ugmeel 3. H nw
fried de yoqs faire des reproches quand voua le m^ritez. 3. Vons
eonTieDt il d'aller trouver mon fr^re? 4. II ne me convient paa
i*«Uer le troaver, j'ai aatre chose k fiure. 6. Combien ce champ
peut il Taloir! 6. Il peut yaloir one vingtaine [J 27, (2.)] de mille
ftanes. 7. Valez tous mieux que votre frdre. 8. Mon fr^re vaat
beancoup mieux que moL 9. Ce conteao ne vaut 11 pas plus que le
v6tre? 10. Lemlen est meilleor, il vaut davantage. il. Combien
Totre montre vaut elle? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand^chose, elle no
Ta pas bien. 13. De combien le n6gociant, est il riche ? 14. Je ne
puis vons le dhre au juste, il est riche d*une centaine de mUle frtAies.
15. Ne vaut il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marchS? 16. S
vaut mieux aller au march6. 17. Votre chalne d'or vaut elle plus
que la mienne? 18. Elle vaut toutautant 19. Elle ne vaut pas
grand^chose, elle est cass^e. 20. Cela vaut il cinquante franca!
21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs I 22. Aves vous demands
•a maiehand oe que cela vaut 1 23. Jene le lui oi paa demands 24.
II jto'nwMre qve cela vsnt une centaine de fianea
SXXBOISB 96.
1. How nraeh is my house worth? 2. li la worth about twenty
thousand franca. 8. Is that horse worth as much aa this one? 4.
lUs horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred.
5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother? 6. It is not worth
the while. 7. Is it^worth the while to go out when one does not
wish to walk? 8. It is nbt (n'en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit
you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg*
lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (JMmer) yon when you deserve it
18. What is thai nan worth? 14. 1 cannot tell you exactly, about
fifky»thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good ? 16. No, Sw, ft is good
for nothing. 17. Is your gip worth as much as mine? 18. Ves, Sij,
it ie worth more. 19. Will ^u go to my father's? 20. No, Sir, I
have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to market Obrly -
than kte? ^. It is better io "go early. 23. How much may Vour
kenebewnrtli? SM. It^ is not worth much, it is very oU. 2k I»
your watdf belter than ndne? 26. It is not worth miieh, it doMTnol
«a. 97. Is that^liook worth two franeaV 28: It is wortli eiie,«l
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
110 tMtov U
most 99. Have yon asked Toor rieter what that book ia worth'
80. I have not [L. 24, R. 1Q.'l 46, R. 4.] 31. Wliat muai I dol
32. You must apeak to your father. 33. Must he have money ? 34.
He must have some. 35. Has he npt sold his horse ! 36. lie has
•M it, bat it was not worth much.
. LESSON L. LEgON.L.
1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. see } 62.], to take; voler, to rob
to steal; acheter, to buy; demander, to asJ^for; payer, topatfj are fol-
lowed by one regimen only, or by several regimens in the same rela^
tion; these regimens, if nouns, roust not be separated from the verb
by a preposition ; if pronouns, they take tho form of the direct rcgt*
men, le, lOy les :—
Avez vous pris 1e livre ? Have you taken the book 7
Avez vous pay£ le libraire 1 Have you pai/l the booksdfer 7
Avez vous demand6 votre argent 1 Have you asked for your money 7
li'avez vous demaud6 1 Have you asked for him 7 ^
2. When the verbs above mentioned are accompanied by several
regimens holding different relations, the regimen representing the
thing or object will be direct, and come under the above rule, and
that representing the person, will, if a noun, be preceded by the
preposition d, and, if a pronoun, assume the form of the indirect
regimen : lui, to him, to her; ieur, to them : —
J 'ai pris le livre a mou Mre. / have taken the book from my brolhet ,
J'ai payi !e livre au libraire. / have paid the bookseller for the book,
Je le lui ai pay6, dtc. / have paid him for U,
3. Demander is used also in the sense of to inquire for^ to cuft
/or.—
J-ai demands oe monsieur. / asked for thai gentleman,
R£6Um£ or Examples.
Vous a-t-oQ vol6 vos livrcs 1
On me le« a voMs [L. 85. 1, 2].
A>t-on pay6 les souliers au cordon-
nlerl
On ne les lui a pas encore payto.
QuVt-on pris k votze p^re 1
On lui a pris son ai^gent.
Ne voQS a-tron rien pay 6 1
On m'a pay6 presque tout.
J'ai acbett des lines aa libraire.
Mas any one stolen your book* fiem
you 7
Tney have been stolen from me.
Has the shoemaker b^tn paid far the
shoes 7
He has not yet been paid for them,.
What has' been taken from yau)f
falher7
ifis money has been taken fivn Alsf
Has nothing been paid you 7
I have been paid tUmast aU.
I bought booktfr&m ike bntkidkr
Digitized
by Google
LBSIOV lib
147
Qid 9,re% rooa demani^l
^'•i dcnuuide mon fViru lUn^.
Avcz vous demandi dc Targent a
votix; ami 1
J« ne lui en ai pas demands.
Wham have ^ou asked for f
I inquired fvr my eldest brotknr.
Haze you asked your friend fm
money 7
I haw noi asked JUm for Qmi9*
Exercise 97.
CliapcUer, m. kaUers
Crayon, m. pencil;
]>cniear-«r, 1. ta dvx&s
Fcnetre, f. window;
Frapp-cr, 1. to knock;
L6jfume, m. vegetable;
Renseignements, m. p
in/oTmation ;
Revenn, m. incowuf
Tout, 6, all;
Yoyageur, m. trofodler.
Loyer, m. rent ;
Pantoufle, f. slipper;
Paysan, m. peasant;
Propri^taire, m. land'
lord;
Rend-re, 4. to return;
1. Que V0U8 B^tron prist 2. On m*a pris mes livres, mes crayons et
mon eanif. 3. Savez vdus qui vous les a pris ? 4. Je ne connais pas
eehii qui me les a pris, mais je sais quMl demeare ici. 5. Avez vous
demand^ vos livres? 6. Je les ai demandes k mon cousin. 7. Vous
les a-t-il rendus t 8. 11 me les a pay^s. 9. Vous a-t^on vol6 beaucoup
de fruit cette annle? 10. On m'a voI6 des legumes, mais on ne m'a
point vole de froit. 11. Avez vous pay6 votre chapeau an paysan?
12. Je ne le Ini ai pas pay 6, je I'ai pay6 an chapelier. 13. A qui avez
vous demand^ des renseignements ? 14. Pen ai demand^ au voyageur.
15. Savez vons qui vient de frnpper k la porte ? 16. C'est M. L., qui
vous demande. 17. Qui avez vous demande? 18. Tai demand^ votza
fir^re. 19. Voire fr^re »-t-il pay6 toutes ses dettes? 20. II ne les a
pas encore pay^s, parce qu'il n'a pas re9u ses revenue. 21. Lui avez
vous paji;,e ce que vous lui avez achet6? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 23.
Ne lenr avez vous pas pay6 votre loyer? 24. Je le leur ai pay6. 26.
Ub nous ont payd notre maison. ^
Exercise 98.
1. Have you paid your landlord? 2. I have paid him my reut 8.
liave you paid him for the windows which you have broken ? 4. I
have psiid him for them. 5. Has the hatter paid for all his hats ? 8.
He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (d eridil).
7. Do you pay whait you owe, every day? 8. I pay my. butcher
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat? 10. I have paid
him for iU 1 1. For whom did you inquire this morning ? 12. I
kiquired for your brother. 13. Why did yon not inquire for my
father? 14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the
hatlcr been paid for his hats ? 16. He has been paid for them. 17.
Han yonr money been taken Arom yon? 18. My hat has boon stolen
fh>m me. 19. Have yon asked your brother for your money? 20.
I hove asked him for It, but he eaimot letam H to me. 21. Has 1m
M money f 92. He has just paid all his debts^'SBd he has no moaey
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
149 LflASOir 1.1.
left (is nm). tB. Hare you asked yonr hAhn fbr money t ML I
imve not asked him for any, I know that he has none. 36. From
what bookseller have you bought your books t 36. I bought them
from your bookseller. 27. Are you wrong to pay your debts? 38.
I am right to pay them. 29. Who is inquiring for me ? 80. The
physician is inquiring for you. 31. Who knocks? 83. Your shoe-
maker knocks.
LESSON LL ^ LEgON LL
THE PAST DBTOTITB. (^ 120.)
L The past definite may be called the narrative or historical tense
el the French. It is used to express an action entirely past, definite
and complete in itself. The time must be specified, and evei^ por«
tion of it must be elapsed. One night at least should have ooeuired
■inee the action took place.
Hon ft^re partit hier pour Paris, iify bndher left yesiardaiffor Paris,
3. The student will bear in mind ti»t the past indefinite [L. 41.]
may be used for the past definite. The past definite, however, may
never be used for the indefinite. In conversation the indefinite b
often preferred to the definite, as the latter would at times appear
too formal [} 131, (8.)] :—
8. The past definite may generally be rendered in English by the
simple fbrm of the imperfect, or by the same tense- conjugated with
HtL The past definite can never be rendered in English, by the par*
lieiple present of the verb preceded by was,
J'aUai k r^gllBe hier matin. I went, or did go to ckmrch ynterdmf
morning.
4. TvBMiirATZONs OF Tms. Pabt Dsfinitx of the Fouu
CoNJUOATiONB. See L. 23, and ^ 60.
Je chant -al fin -is re^ -us rend -is
TtL pan -as di6r -is apero -us vend -is
noUai thtritkedtt prniecnMM »Mmt
D donn -a foum -it per^ -nt tend -it
gw flmn$ktd gu$k€Mi tmdti
Nous cherch4me8 pun -imes oon^ -iJUnes entend-imce
Torn port 4tM bsIs -ites d -^^et perd 4ioa
ns aim -erent uu -irent ddc -urent mord -iient
6. ItwiUbe seen that tbetetniiiaaona c/theteoond andlbutk
Digitized
by Google
&««§«v %u 149
RteUlll OF EZAMPLIS.
Ob DOM pirift 46 rom hier.
Le banqtder nooi domw de Taifeiit
l*aDn6e dernl&re.
Le banqnier nous « domift de Var-
geni.
Le profesfear aooi parU de roue
TanDfie dernlire.
D none a parM de les amis et des
ndtrea.
Pendanl notre Toyafe, U nou ra-
ooDta Mf aventaraa.
D none a racontt Phiatoire de la
Tie.
7%e bamiktrgam nt m^^Ud |iMr.
The banker hat given ut menep.
T%e profeetoT ^pnfce te «# ^AemJt fern
last year.
He spoke to w efkis friends ami of
curs.
During our joumeiy ke relaied to m
his adventures.
He related lowihe history of his 1^.
EZBROISS 09.
Aiii6, e, dder^ ddesis Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise; Rcmerd-er* 1. to thmUti
Avec, wUk f Loncioe, when ; £Uyoar, m. stay:
8e ooadi-er, hrttto jr^Nenf, ve, new ; Semaiaei C weekt
to bed; Ordinairemcnti general^ Boldat, m. soldier $
Dernier, e, last ; ly ; Tard, late $
B'6ehapp-er, 1. re£ I^Petxlant, dm/ring ; Trap tftt, too toon.
escape ; Pri-er, I, to beg;
Habniement^ m. dress ; Propri6t68, f. p. property;
1. Le iMuiqnier re^ut il beaucoup d'argent la aenmine dernidTO?
2. n en re^nt beaucoup. 3. AusaitAt que vona apercOtes votre fr^re,
ne Ini parl&tes vons pas? 4. Dte qne je Taper^ua, je lai pariaL 5.
Arez voiia d^jk port6 vos habillements neofa? 6. Je ne les ai paa
eneore port^a. 7. Quand il vons donna de I'argent, hier, le remer-
ci&tea vons ? 8. Je le remerciai et je le priai de voua remercier. 9.
Avez Tons troav^ voa livres? 10. Je ne les ai paa eneore trouv^a.
11. Lorsque voua vlntes noua voir ne finltes vons pas vos affairea
avee mon p^ ? 13. Je lea finia alora et je le payoL 13. N'avez
vons pas vn voire scBor ain6e pendant votre sljour & Lyon ? 14. Je
ne Tai pas vue. 15i Ne vous couchfttes vons pas trop t6t hier au
oir 1 16. Je me coucbai tard. 17. A quelle heure vons dies vous
ev6 ce matin? 18. Je me suis lev6 a einq heures; je mt l^ve ordi-
nairement de bonne heare. 19. Ne cherchites vous pas k voua
kbapper de votre prison I'onn^e demi^re 1 20. Je n'ai jamais eherch6
k m*echapper. 31. Avez vous vendu vos propriet^s? 23. Je ne
lea ai pas venduea. 33. Qu'avez vous donn6 an soldat 34. Je ne
lui ai rien donn6. 36. Pendant son a^iir k &« nona hd donnAaea
livft oe quHl vonliit
Digitized
by Google
IM i.a««os tiik
EXKRCISB 100.
iT Wbat did yoa leeeive last week ? 2. We received fifty fronot
from your friend, and twenty-five from your brother. 8. Did you
take your son to church with you yesterday? 4. I did not take him
there (y). 6. What did you lose last year ? 6. We lost our moneys
our clotlies and our horses. 7. Have you looked (dterclUs) for them I
8. I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they speak of
your brother yesterday ? 10. They spoke of him and, of you. 1 U
What did the physician give you? 12. He gave me nothing. \X
At what hour did your sister rise yesterday? 14. She rose at five.
o*clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning? 16. We rose aV
half-past six. 17. lias your cousin sold all his property? 18. He
has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has the trav-
eller related his adventures to you ? 20. He related them to me. 21.
Did tliat manliy {eJiercW) to speak to your father ? 22. He tried to
speak to him. 23. Did tho professor speak of your brother during
his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. 25. Has your friend
worn his new coat ? 26. He has not worn it yet 27. Have you'
thanked your brother? 28. I have thafiked him. 29. What have
you given to your eldest sister? 80. [ have given her nothing,^-
have nothing to give her. 31. When your brotlier gave you a book
last year, did you thank him ? 32. I did Jiot thank him. 33. Is it
late. 84. It is not late, it is only six. 35. Is it fine weather or bad
weather? 86. It is very fine weatlier.
LESSON LIL LEgON LIL
1. The terminat^ns of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel-
dom arbitrary,* but an irregular verb of one conjugation will some-
times, in thid tense, assume the terminations of another eonjugntion.
In a few instances the stem [L. 23.] of the verb is enUroly changed.
Avom, to have ;
Ktbb, to be;
Voir, to see /
Lire, to read;
r 0 -us
f -us
V -is
1 -us
Tu 0 -ns
f -us
V -is
I -ns
11 e -ut
f -nt
v-it
1-ut
Nous e -i^raes
f -Cimos
V -imes
1 -i^lnes
Vous e 'Mm
f'HUSB
V -ites
1 -i^tes
Us e -urent
f -urent
T -irent
1 -ureni
« This termination is arbitraiy only in verbs ending In enir in whUk
n r, eomm afUr the t of the terufaiation : vbmes, /Iimms, A&
,/^Digitized by CjOOQ IC
^
LBSBOV LII.
151
± Avoir and dtre, t will be percaiTed, take in thia tense a new stem,
» as, /-us; 6tre and lire, though belongin"^ to the 4th conjugation, take
the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes the toiw
minations of the 4th.
. 3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops sdme o{ its letteni
and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs
CraINOBE, CONNAiTBB, CONDUISS,
to fear ; to know ; to condiuL
craign -is conn -us condnis -is
crajin -is conn -us conduis -is
craign -it conn -ut condnis -it
craign -imes conn -Ames conduis -Imes
craign -ites conn -Ates conduis -ites
craign -irent conn -urent conduis -irent
4. Like vcnir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain-
dre, eonnaltre, and conduire, those ending in indre^ ailre and uire ,
and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com-
prendre, surprendre, dus.
6. We wonid at all times refer the student to the table of irregu
lar verba» { 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs with which ha
18 not familiar.
R£8um6 of Examples.
Vbxik,
Prbnore,
to come;
to take;
Jo V -iDS
pr -is
Tu V -ins
pr -is
U V -Int
pr -it
Nons V -inmes
pr -Imes
Vous V -intes
pr -ites
Us V -inrent
pr -irent
Ne condafsites vons point votre fils,
en Ssqpagne l*ann6e demiire 1
le Vy conduisis et Je I'y laissai.
Aussitot que vous vites votre (Vdre>
ne le reconnAtes vous pasi
Je le reconnus aussitot que Je
Faper^us.
lie pbarmaden no vint-il pas vons
voirl
n vint me voir ; il Ait bien 6tonn6
de trouver chez mof, un de ses
anctens amis.
Ne prites-vous pas cong6 de vos
amis, hierl
Je pris congfi d'enx, ct Je les priai
de m'6crire.
Did you not take four son to Spmn
last year ?
J took Urn thUker and left him.
As soon as you saw your brother, did
you not recognize him 7
I recognized him as soon as I per-
ceived him.
Did not the apothecary come to set
you?
He came to see me; he was much
astonished to find one of his oU
friends at my house.
Did you not take leave of your
friends yesterday ?
I took leave of them, and begged
them to write to me.
Exercise 101.
Accompagn-er, 1. to a«-De men mieux, as irrf/ Histoire, f. history;
company; as I anild; Inform-er, 1. to inform*
A la fin, fli last; Be d6p4ch-cr, 1. ref. <oNotairo,m. fwtary;
Amicalement, kindly; make haste; Lu, from lire, 4. Ir. to
Arrivec, f. arrival; Dds que, as soon as; read;
Aitend-re, 4. to waiifor ; ficolicr, m. scholar ; Peintre, m. /wwtor i
An seconrs, to Vu a«ii-S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. to i^Sans, wWumlt
iance; come weary; Becour-ir, 2. Ir. to Ms-
Congfi, m. leave; Be htt-er, 1. iwf, to €9ur.
ffour-ir, 2. ir. to raw; hmsint
Digitized
by Google
169 1.1#«0« ttL
1. Nos tayOen •^ennnydrent-ils hier, d*atton4rB d longftemptf
t. fis Ibrent oUig^ d'attendre si longtemps, qu'k la fin Us perdirent
IMdeDco. 3. Ne re^&te&>voi» point votre parent amicalement lors*
qa*il vintTouavoir? 4. Je le re^us de mon mieux. 6. NelOtes-voua
paa la lettre de votre fir^re avant hier ? 6. Je la liia et je i'envoyai ^
mon ooele. 7. Ne courCitea-voua paa au aecours de yolre fr^rt
aasaitdt que vous le vltea en danger ? 8. Je me h&tai do le aeeowir.
ft Ne votts dtea-voQS paB dep^ch^a de venir ? 10. Nona nous sommea
d^pdch^a. 11. Att88it6t que vous eOtea aper9u mon fr^re ne ilfin-
fonnltea-vooa paa de son arriv^e! «12. Je voua en informal. 13. A
qudle heure votre aoeur est-elle venue aujourd*hui? 14. Elle eat
venue i midi. 15. Voa compagnona vinrent-ils hier vous prier de
les accompagner ? 16. lis viurent me voir, mais ils me quittdrent
Bans me parler de leur voyage. 17. Ne peignltes-vous pas un
tableau Tannee demidre? 18. Je peignis un tableau d'histoire.
19. Le peintre italien a^t-il fini son portrait? 20. II le finit hier.
SI. U Ta fini ce matin. 23. J>hs que j'eua re9U cette nouvelle.
j'envoyai chercher le notaire. 23. Ce jeune iiomme a^t-il pria cong£
de son p^re. 24. D a pria cong6 de luL 25. U prit coxig6 de lu!
hier.
EXBROISX 102.
1. Did the notary accompany you yesterday? 2. He accompanied
ne aa far as (Jusque chez) your brother's. 8. Did your companion
ta}ce leave of you yesterday ? 4. He took leave of me this morning.
6. Did you read yesterday, the book which I have lent you? 6. I
read it the day before yesterday (avant hier). 7. At what time did
the painter come this morning? 8. He came at half-past nine.
9. Has he finished your father's portrait? 10. He painted all day
yesterday, but the portrait is not yet finished. 11. Did you not run
to your father's relief when you aaw him in danger ? 12. I hastened
to succour him. 13. What did you do when you came? 14. At
Boon as I came I sent for my brother. 15. Did you take your aiater
to Germany last year? 16. I took her there this year. 17. Did you
take your children to school yesterday^ 18. I took Ihem to my
brother's. 19. Do you paint a historical picture ? 20. I painted last
year a historical picture. 21. Did your sister beg you to accompany
her ? 22. She begged me to accompany her. 23. Did you send for
the notary as soon as you heard from your father ? 24. I sent for
him. 25. When did the notary take leave of you? 26. He took
leave of me this morning at nine. 27. Ha9 ^he apothecary finished
Ua letter? 28. He has not yet finiilMd it 291 Wtn jon not
Digitized
by Google
LBSSOV bit]. 15$
utonialiisd yeeterday to see that lady! BO. I was not aatoaiafacd to
•ee her. 31. Did you make baste to read your book last n!gbt
{hier au 9oir) ? 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have you finiahed
it? 84. I have not yet finished it /
LESSON LIIL LEgON LIU
THB DCPBRVCT. (^ 119.)
1. The imperfeet or simultaneous past tense may be called tho
deseriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itsel£ This tense
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined.
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary tMs, dte. and the
participle present of the verb [{ 119, 120.] : —
J'6crivaiB oe matin quand vous dtos / was wrUing this morning token you
entr6. coMe in.
Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- / was passing yesterday when you
pelites. called me.
2. The imperfeet is also used to express an action which is cus-
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by
the word, used to, pUeed before the verb :—
L'ann^e demi&^, j'allais tons ks Zast year, I went {used to go) every
Jours a Tecole. day to school.
Quand nous demeuridns i la When we were (used to be) in the
campagne, nous nous couchions country ^ we used to go to bed at nine
ordinairement a neiif heures. o^clock,
8. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past
tense which takes <lu2* as an auxiliary. The past d^nite never
eorresponds in meaning to the English imperfect composed of the
auxiliary ** wu^ and the participle prtsent. It cannot be rendered
by the verb preceded by " used to,^^ ^:^
J'allais k la chasse hier matin I wasgoidtg hund-ng yesterdaiy mam-
quand oons nous rencontrlmes. inig when we met (did meet).
J*uuai a la chasse hier matin. / loent (did go) hunting yesterday
morning.
4. The imperfeet is formed from ihe participle present, by changing
oitf into oti, die. } 61. It may also be fbrmed by adding au, etc. to the
♦ BxoBpt when, In Interrogative sentences, did is used as an anzflkry
to mmi Is eKprscid or undersiood.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IM
LB8809 till.
«tem of the verb for the 1st and 4th conjugations, itsotf, etc. foi
the 3d, and ecais^ etc for the 3d.
5. Tkbuinations or the Imperfect of the four CoarjuoA*
TIOKS.
Je chant -ais
/ wat tingimg
Tu pari -ais
Tkou watt speaking
JX douD -ait
Nous cherch -loos
W§ were eetking
Voos port -iez
Teu wereeartjimg
Us aim -aient
7)l4f w§reU9ing
fin -tssais
weJMehinjf
ch6r -issais
wast ekerieking
foam -issait
was furnishing
pun -issions
were pnnisking
sais -issieis
were setting
nn -issaient
were mailing
rec -evais
wasreeeining
apcrc -evais
waet perceiving
perc -evait
was gmtkering^
cone -€vions
were cmumvii^
d -eviez
were owing
d6c -cvaient
were deceivit^
rend
ala
ring
vend -an
wast selling
tend -alt
was tending
entend -ions
wereksarint^
perd -Tea
wereiesing
mord -aieot
wtreHIn^.
RftsuMt OF Examples.
Je chantais qoand on m'apporta
voire lettre.
J*aimais autrefbis & lire les pontes
anglais.
J'itais dans votre chambrc lorsque
vous dtes entr6.
Comment votre pdre se portait-il,
lorsqae vons domenriez enFrancel
Aves vous pay6 a mon pdre ce que
vous lui deviez, et ce que vous lui
aviex promis?
Je parlai hier toute la matin6e.
Je parlais hier k votre pdre, lorsque
votre ami nons rencontra.
Je cherchais votre p6re.
/teas singing when tkey brought wu
your UUer.
I used to like formerly to read tki
English poets,
I was in yqur room when you cmM
in.
How was your father when you Used
in Prance?
Have you paid my father what you
owed him, and what you had prom"
ised him?
I spoke yesterday the whole morning,
I was speaking to your father w&k
your friend met us yesterday,
J ioas looking for your faXhar,
Exercise 103.
Autrefois, yvrmerZy; ficolier, m. 5cAo2ar; Presque pas, ahnasi
Brun, e, brown} Noir, e, btack; nones
Chambre, f. rooms M6ritrer, 1. to deserves Betrouv4r, 1. to find
Crayon, m. pencils Pantonflc, f. slippers again s
Demeur-er, to live,dweUsVsirchemin, m. parch- Thhrne^ m. exercise s
De nouveau, again s ments Vert, e, green.
1. De qui parliez-vous ce matin quand je suis venu vons trouvcr?
2. Ma cousine parlait de son fr^re et je parlais du mien ? 3. N*aimtoz«
vous paa roieux le bceuf que le mouton, autrefois? 4. J*aimai4 le
boeuf, mais je n*ai jamais aim^ le mouton. 5. Ne vendiez-voua pas
beaucoup de livres, lorsque vons demeuriez ^ Paris? 6. J^en vendaia
beaucoup parceque j^^taia libraire. 7. Le llbraire a-t-il vendu beau*
eoup de crayons ce matin? 8. U a vendu beaucoup de crayoni ao-
joord'htti. 9. Vendiez-vons beaucoup de parohemin lorsque voua
4ties libraire t 10. Je n*en vendaSa presque paa. IL Votre ti^
Digitized
by Google
LBS809 LXII. f5d
portait-fl un habit vert loraqu'il demeurait ^ Londrea? 12. H portait
Bn habit brun et des pantoutles noirea. 13. Que chercliiez-vous?
14. Je cherohais mon livrc. 15. Depuis quand Taviez-rouB perdu?
16L Je l*avais perdu depuis hier. 17. L^avez-voua retrouv^t 18. Je
Tavais retrouv6, mais je Tai perdu de nouveau. 19. Co boulanger
V0U8 fouraiasait-il de bon pain ? 20. U noua en fonmiaaait d*excel*
lent 81. Puniaaiez-Yous aouvent voa deoUera? 22. Je lea puniaaaia
quand ila le m^ritaient 23. OH etiez-voua ce matin quand je voua
dierehaia? 24. Tetaia dans nui chambre. 26. Je finiaaaia mon
thtoe.
ExERCias 104.
1. Who waa at jour houae thia morning! 2. My friend G. was
there, and waa looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this
morning! 4. I waa not looking for you, I waa looking for your
aeholar. 6. Did you apeak to my father yeaterday ! 6. 1 waa apeak*
ing to liim when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you uae to
sell much meat when you lived in B. ! 8. I sold much meat becauae
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father uae to wear a white hat when
he lived in London ! 10. He uaed to wear a black hat, and my brother
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came!
12. No, Sir, I was finishing my exerciae. 13. Had you loat your
pencil thia morning! 14. I had loat it, and was looking for it when
you apoke ta me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed?
16. He has not paid for hia coat 17. How waa your mother when
ahe lived in Italy ! 18. She was very well. 19. You uaed to like
reading, (la lecture), did your sister (use to) like it also! 20. She
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning when I waa
looking for her! 22. She was at my mother's. 23. What aong were
you singing this morning! 24. 1 was singing an Italian song. 25.
Have you been afraid to speak to me ! 26. I have never been afraid
to apeak to you. 27. Have you brought my book ! 28. I have not
brought it 29. Of what were you speaking ! 30. 1 was speaking of
nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother! 32. I was not
giving him any thing. 33. What were you carrying! 34. I was
carrying a tree. 85. Where were you carrying it! 86. I waa carry*
mg it home.
Digitized
by Google
LESSON UV. LEgON LIV.
THE UfPERFECT — CONTINUED.
1. The impeifect of the indicative of every Freneh verb» regular 99
irregular, ends in ats, ais^ ait^ ions^ ieZf aient,
3. No verb of the first cox^jugation er, is irregular in this tense.
3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of tiie seeond
Cf^i^ugation ib, is that, to form the imperfect, the stem of these verfoif
takes at5, du;., instead of issais : as, ven-ir,^> ven-ots, cour-ir, Je ecu*
rats; cueill-ir,^e cuet7Z-ats. Exception: Fuit, to fleece fuyais'
4. The irregular verbs of the third conjugation oir, change thai
termination (oir) into ais, etc, like the regular verbs of the same:
as, 8av-oir,j'e sav^is; av-oir,/iiv-ats. Exceptions: se-oir, to become^
voir, to see, and their compounds, and d^choir, [see } 62.]
6. The changes which the stem of the irregular verbs of the foorth
conjugation undergoes, in this tense, are too various to admit of a
complete classification. We, however, ofier the following : —
PscNDac, to tak«, ficaias, to wriJU, Cbatndrb, tn ftar,
Je pren -ais, etc. 6criv -ais, etc. craign -ais, etc.
CONNAiTBS, to hWW. CONtoUIRB, tO COUduCt,
Connaiss -ais, eta Gonduis -ais, etc.
6. Like prendre and 6crire are conjugated, in this tense, those verbs
In which frendm and cn'rs appear in composition : as, comprendre,
j$ comprenait ; souserire, j'e gouscrivais. — ^Like craindre and con«
naltre, those ending in indre and aUre; teindre,jre teignais ; parattr«»
j^pwraisuris. — ^like conduire, those ending in tre; as, lire,^> lisais ,-
Uxtty j€ fatiaais ; luire,ye lutsatM; dire, ^e dtsais^ etc. — ^Exceptions:
rire, traire, ^rire, and their compounds.
7. Mettre and its compounds, and £tre are regular in this tense.
8. The participle present from which the French grammarians de^
ma the imperfect, presents of course the same irregularities, as; ve»
lumt, valant, prenant, 6crivant, craignant, connaissant, conduisant
Kxeeptions: avoir, oyan/ ; savoir, sac^a^^
R£sum£ of Examples.
De quel notre ami avait-il peur 1
II n'avait peur de rien.
N'avie?.voii8 pas besoin de mon
frfire]
Nous avions besoin de Ini.
Le marchand n'avalt-il pas besoin
d'argenti
n en avait grand besob
Of what was eur friend cfrcid 7
lie was afraid of nothing.
Did you not want my brother?
We wanted kim.
Did not tke nurckani wamt wionty f
Hthadgntttimdt'U.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LSSIOII tiv.
ut
Quell* Tfl^^sn ooBdiiiii«i-T(mB 1
Pour qui me prenlez-Vons 1
Je renais vous tronver quand Je
Tons reDcoutmL
A qui teriviez-Tona ce matin 1
rteriTab k ma soenr et i mon
IHre.
IF%a< cemiagg w€n feu drivmg?
Fbr whom were you taking me 7
I was coming to you when I met you,
T\> whom were youwriting this mert^
ing?
I was writing to my sister and to my
brother.
Autremcnt, otherwise;
CMv-er, 1. to break;
Chasse, f. hunting g
Dire, 4. ir. to say;
Montre, f. watch ;
Moins, (an) at least;
Mort,e, dead;
Offens-er, to offend;
ExsRCiSK 105.
Oubli-cr, 1. to forget ; Telnd-re, 4. ir. to dy^
PAche, f. fishing; Teinturier, m. dyer;
Peind-re, 4. ir. to paint; Toito, f. linen doth;
Beven-ir, 2. ir. to re- Rencontr-er, 1. to maet;
turn ; Y al-oir, 8. ir. to he worth ,
Sav-oir, 8. ir. to know ; Yen-ir, 2. ir. to come, to
Se tromp-er, X. to be have just;
mistaken; Yite, quickly,
1. Ponrquoi n'toiviez-Youa pas plus vite ce matin ? 2. Parceqa*
favais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-voos pas d'offenser
eette dame ? 4. Je craignais de I'offenser, mais je ne pouvais fsire
antrement? 6. Que peigniez-vous ce matin? 6. Je peignais nn
tableau d'histoire. 7. Votre teinturier que teignait-il ? 8. II teignait
da dnip, de la sole et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait
il ? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert 1 1.
Conduisiez-vous le jenne Polonais k T^cole lorsque je vous ai rencon*
tre? 12. JecondniaaismonfilsainS^r^glise. 13. Que lisiez-YousI
14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 16.. Ne saviez-Tona
pas que ce monsieur est mort? 16. Je I'avais oubli6. 17. Combi«ii
la montre que vous avez cass^e yalait*elle % 18. Elle valait au ndlM
deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieuz rester ici que dialler ^
la chasse ? 20. II valait beaucoup mieuz aller i T^ole. 21. Votra
ami que vous disait-il? 22. U me disait que son frdre est revenn
d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vons pa» k la chasse tous les jours laraqne
Tous demeuriez k la campagne? 24. J'allais souvent ^laptehei
25 Mon fr^re allait tous les jours k T^cole quand ii 4tait id
EXSRCISB 106.
1. Were you a&ald this morning when you came to our house !
2. 1 was afeid. 3. Of what were you afraid? 4. I was afVaid of
the horse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? {de tomXm^
Sse L. 21. R 2, 4.) 6. He was not afraid of falling, but he wan
ilkaid of making a mistake {de se tromper. See 2. in Exercise above),
X Were y 3a not afraid of offending yonr brother! 8. I was afraU
•f edkodJOBLg him. 9. Were yen ^jJung yoor son to sehooU 10.
Digitized
by Google
168 LISBOir LT.
was condacting him to school. 11. Was the dyer dyeing yonr eoat
12. He was not dyeing my coat, he was dyeing silk. 13. What color
was he dyeing the silk ? 14. He was dyeing some red and some
green. 15. Was he dyeing his linen cloth black or green !
16. He was neither dyeing it black nor green, he was dyeing it
pink (rose), 17. Were you aware {suviez vous) that your uncle is
dead? 18. I did not know it (imperfict), 19. What was the gen-
tleman reading? 20. He was reading a letter which he had just re-
ceived. 21. Were you cold when you came here ? 22. I was cold«
hungry and thirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your conduct
(coniuite), 24. f was ashamed of it 25. Were you not in want
of money? 26. I was not in want of it 27. Did you not want
your father 1 28. We did not want him. 29. Whither were you
going when I met you? 30. I was going to your house. 31. Were
you driving your brother's carriage ? 32. I was driving my own (la
mienne), 33. Were you writing to me or to my father? 34. I was
writing to your friend's cousin. 35. Your friend was taking me for
your eldest brother.
LESSON LV. LEgON LV.
' TBS PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. (^ 122, 123.)
1. The past anterior is formed from the past definite of the auz*
Diary and the past participle of the verb : j'eus parl6, / had spcken^ Je
fus venu, I had come.
2. The past anterior expresses generally a momentary action,
which took place before another action. The latter immediately
follows the former, and often depends upon it The action ex-
pressed by this tense is not a customary one. The past anterior is
often preceded by k peine, scarcely; dds que, aussitdt que, as soon
as; quand, lorsque, when; [{ 122. } 123, (3.)]
06s que J'eus flni ma t&cbe Je m'en As soon as I had finisAed my task
aliai. toefU away.
3. This tense partakes of the nature of the past definite.
4. The pluperfect is composed of the imperfect of the auxiliary,
and the past participle of the verb ; j 'avals parle, / had spcken, j'^taia
venu, / had come,
5. To this tense might be applied nearly all the rules on the use
of the imperfect The action which it expresses, or the situation
which it depicts, is iVeqmnty a onatomary one, or on« often rs
peated^—
Digitized
by Google
LBBBOV LT,
IM
DIs que
m'cn
le J'l
'ETsIt fin! ma tftche Je
iU soon as my taskwujhrisktdl used
to go away.
R£suii£ of Examples.
ArioA-TouB en soin de vo6 efiets 1
J'en araia eu so'm.
N'ariez-voas pas eu besoin de moi 1
J'avais en beaoin de vous et de votro
frfere.
K'aviez-voos pas en riQtentioD de
me parler 1
Kons avions ea enrie do dormir.
Dds qne vous eAtes fini Totre lettre,
De ia port&tes-vous pas a la poste 1
Dis que 70us aviez fini vos lettres.
ne If s portiez-vous pas a la poste 1
Dte que TouB r&tes arrive, ne oom-
men^tes-Yons pes a dcrire 1
Dds que vous (Sticz arrlv6, ne com^
menfiez-vous pas k dcrire 1
Had you taken care of your ikhgs?
I had taken care of tkem.
Had you not wanted me ?
J had wanted you and your brotkmr.
Had you not intended to speak to msf
We had had a wish to sleep.
As soon as you had finished youtr letter
did you not carry U to tkeposl-ofieef
As soon as your tetters were Jlnuhed,
did you not (commonly) take tkem
tothepost^ffice?
As soon as you had arrived did you
not commence writing ?
As soon as you used to arrive^ didyou
not (generally) commenu wriHng f
EXXRCISB 107.
Arr^t-er. 1. to stof, ;
Bal, m. baU ;
Boarsc, f. purse;
figar-er, 1. to mishys
Invit-er, 1. to invite;
8e lev-cr, rcf. to rise;
Perd-re, \. to lose;
Bemont-er, 1. to wind
Be ooucher, 1. ref. logo Malade, sick; Betrouv-er, 1. to fmd
to bed; Mnsicien, m. mttsioan; again;
Dangereusement, dan^ Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go cut g
gerously ; Partrir, 2, to set out; Spectacle, m. p&y.
Dmer, m. dinner;
1. Ne saviez-Tons pas oil le musicien 6tait aU6t 3. Je savaia
qifil 6tait all6 ^ Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on paa dit que votre fr^re
est mort? 4. On m*avait dit qu*il 6tait dangereusement malade. 6.
Ne Tons couchiez.>vou9 pas ordinairement, d^s que vous aviez fini vos
lemons ? 6. Dhs que je les avais finies, j'allais an spectacle. 7. D^s
qne vous eiktes fini vos lemons, que fltes-vous hier au soir? 8. Aus-
8it6i que je les eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite fille n'avait*
elle pas envie de donnir? 10. Elle avait plus envie de dormir que
d*etudier. 11. Qu^aviez-vous fait de (vfiih) votre livre qunnd je vous
Icdcmtmdai? 12. Je Tavais^gorc. 13. Oi!k Taviez-vous ^gar6 ? 14.
Je Tavais oublid dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre 4tait-
elic arr^t^e ? 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 1 7. L'bor*
loger ne I*avait-il pas remont^ t 18. II avait oubli6 de lo falre. 19.
N*aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse ? 20. Je Pavais peraue, iiiais je
Toi retrouv^e. 81. Votre coasin ^taitol parti? 22. D n'eUit paa
•neora parti 23. Etaitpil aortit 24. U 4tatft aorti avae m
Digitized
by Google
160 LBtt^V LTL
3d. Oh 6tAit.il alMt 96. 11 6tait alU ehez mon Mn, qui r«fa|
invito u diner.
EXERCISB 108.
1. Had you not intended to speak to my brother? 2. I had in-
tended to speak to him, but he was gone. 3. Did your sister go t^
bed lost evening as soon at she had read (lu) her book ? 4. She
went to bed as soon as she had read it 6. Did she usually go to
bed as soon aa she had read her book ? 6. She generally went to
bed as soon aa she had read six pages. 7. Were you told that your
sister was sick? 8. I was told that she had been dangerously sick.
9. Did you know what you had done with your pen? 10. I knew
that I had mislaki it 11. Had your sister mislaid hers? 12. She
had left (laissie) it in my room. 13. How many of your books have
you mislaid ? 14. I had mislaid five, but my brother has found them.
16. Where had you left them? 16. I hod left them in the garden.
17. Was your brother's watch stopped? 18. It was stopped. 19.
Why was it stopped ? 20. He had forgotten to wind it up. 21.
Had he not lost his key? (clef, f.) 22. He had not lost it, 23. Had
you wanted my father or me? 24. I had wanted your little girl.
25. Was she out? 26. She was out with your brother. 27. Waa
she gone to my sister's ? 28. She was gone thither. 29. Waa the
dyer gone ? 80. He was not yet gone, he intended to leave at five.
81. Had you spoken to him when I oaaM yesterday? 32. 1 had
spoken to him. 33. Had you told him thiit my sister is here? 84.
I had told him. 85. Is he still here ? 86. No, Sir* he is goi«e, h»
wiant this morning at six.
LESSON LVI. LBpON LVL
1. We have given [L 6. R. 4, and { 76 (4.)] a rule for the place of
the noun, subject or nominative of an interrogative sentence. T«
avoid confusing the student, we have hitherto refrained fVom intro*
dueing another constmotion which is often used by the French^
instead of that given in the rale. When a sentence commences
with od, where; que, tahat; quel, tohieh; combien, how muchf how
nutny; and quand, when; the noun may be i^aeed immediately aftat
the verb. This construction is rimilar to that of the English int«v»
rogative sentence when the verb has no auxiliaiy [{ 76, (6.)] :—
M sent nos amis etnos parents 1 meremaow/nerMMUnMiMWl
4D'4erllTotvseonespoiM«it1 Wktt vmim fmm t mntfmUbiUf
Digitized
by Google
iBtt«M f.Tt. 161
fl. Wkm ^bm[% an in a Fraicli atntMica ^« ngia^as of a^^
length, tha direetahaiild praeada tha indiceat [{ 76, (7.)]:^
Atm-toiis doniii lot Jonats 4 Ten- Have fou given ike ckUd tke plofm
ftnll things?
ATet-Tooa doiiii4 cetta lettra k Have yai^ given Human that UUer 7
rhomma 1
3l Tha r^ma indiract precedes tha direct, when the latter is fol-
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other worda qualifying it, and
rendering it much longer than tha indiieat [} 76, (8.)]. The indirect
regime should alao precede tha direct^ when tha aantenea would
otb^rwiaa be equivocal [} 76, (9.)] :— -
▲Taz-TOusdonnA k Tanfiuit, leajoueta Bmse ym jrtm the ekUd, ike pUegm
^ueTousloiaTiezpromisl things which you had premted
him?
RfiSUMft OF EXAMPLXS.
How M is tkai fetmg laif?
What do those gentlemen mean 7
Where are your brothers gone 7
How matvy children kea tkaigetiA^
?
QwBl ige a eette dtfuoiaelle 1
Qua Teulent dire ces messieurs 1
Oft sont aU6s messieurs yds IVdres 1
Combien d'enflmts a oe monsieur 1
Atcs tous pay6 cet si^geni au mar-
chand 1
J'ai payi mon habit au taiUeur.
Vous aTez payA au taiUeur, le gilet
que vous avez achet6.
K'avlez-vous pas demands cela k
renfkntf
Have you paid the merchant thai
money?
J paid the taiiorfor mm eooL
Ym have paid the tailor for ike coai
which you have boughi.
Had you notasked theckOdfor thaif
EZXBCISX 109.
▲ocompagn-er, I, toac- Chalne, f chain; Dernior, e, tof ;
company: Chapeau, m. half bon^'Pr^, near, neaHy f
Aiai, e, etdest t nets Rend-re, 4. to rrtera
Ajsoci6, m,;ioKntfr; Cinauante, f. >S/2]f; QemneTj UL locksmith g
Aohersiste, m landlords Clef, f. keys Serviette, f. napkin,
Boateifle, f. bottle / Commis, m. derk ;
1. Od etaient vos parents I'ann^e demidre! 3. Hs 6taient an An*
gleterre. 3. Od sont restSs les messieure qui vous accompagnaient
ce matin ? 4. Da aont rest^s chez leura associ^s. 6. Que lisaient
vos amies lorsque vous lea avez quitt^ea? 6. Biles lisaient les non-
velles qu*elles venalent de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur votra
p^.'e ? 6. II ne dit rien. 9. Quel &ge a ce monsieur! 10. D a pr^a
docinquante ana. 11. Quel Age ont vos enfants! 13. L'ain6 a dix
ana, et le plus jeune a aix ana. 13. Avez-vous demand^ votre ehalna
d'or k ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demand^e. 16. Avez-voua
rendu an commis, ]*argent qu'il vous avait pr^t6 ? 16. Je le lui al
landu. 17. Aviez-vona anvia d^ai^voyar voa clefa auaamciert 16.
Pavaia aniia da laa lal anToyar, aar allaa aoni taaaiin Id AviM'
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Tons oubli^ de payer fotre habit an tailleur? 20. Panus Dublin da
le lui payer 21. VidaiUl la peine d'envoyer ces plumes k V^eoMotl
22. U ne vtdait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avail d^autrea.
23. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer ces bouteilles a Taubergiste ] 24. 11
valoit la peine de les lui envoyer, car il n*en avait pas. 25. Avez*
vous demande des serviettes k voire p^re ? 26. Je n'al pas voulu
hii on demander.
EXBRCISS 110.
1. What does the tailor mean ? 2. 1 do not know what he means.
8. Where is your eldest sister? 4. She is at my brother's, or at
my sister's. 5. What was the locksmith saying to youl 6. He was
saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many letters have you
carried to the post-office ? 8. I have carried seven, three for you,
and four for my father. 9. Have you given n^y sister the letter
which I have written? 10. I have not given it to her, I left it upon
my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen-
knife? 12. He lives at my father's, do you wish to speak to him?
13. I wished to send him a letter which I brought from England.
14. Have you returned to that man the money which he had lent
you ? 16. I have returned it to him. 16. Has your moUier paid the
milliner (modisle) for her bonnet? 17. She has not yet paid her for
it 18. How old is the shoemaker's eldest son? 19. He is twenty-
one. 20. Had you a wish to send your brother the key of your
room ? 21. I had a wish to send it to him. 22. Was it worth the
while to give your brother that book ? 23. It was worth the while
to give it to him, for (car) he wanted it. 24. Was it worth the while
to send these bottles to the druggist (apothicaire)! 26. It was
worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the landlord ?
27. He is in England. 28. Is your sister at home? 29. Nc Sir,
she is gone out. 30. How many children has the locksmith ? 31.
He has ten. 32. How many books has the physician ? 33. He has
five hundred volumes. 34. Have you given the gentleman that let*
jcr ? 35. I have forgotten to give it to him.
LESSON LVIL LEgON LVIL
I. The French avoid placing the verb at the end of such scntencM
m the following, when Uie nominative is a noun : —
Dites moi ou demeure M. H. 7WZ me lohfre Mr. ff. lives.
Je no sals ou est mon pire. i do not Itnow where myfatMer is,
8aTea-T*iis oil est Qmi* 1 Do fom kitom wUre Gifgt tf7
Digitized
by Google
LBttOV l.Tft>
10a
S. Li cpeaking ot a state, condition or aetion, eommenoed in the
past, b>it still continuing, the French iihc the piusent of the indica-
tive. The post is commonly used in English in similar cases : —
Ck»mbien de ten ps y-a-t-il qu'il est Haio long has he been ken 7
icil
H 7 a dcnz hcures qu'il £crit. Ik has been writing these troo hours.
n y a un mois qu'il demcure a Paris. He has lived in Paris tme nunUA,
II y a deux aiis qn'il est mort lie has been dead these two years.
8. When however the state no longer continues^ the post may be
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in EngUsh : —
Gombien de temps avcz-yons de- How long did you live in L, ?
meur6 a L. 1
OombicD de mois aves-yons appris Uow many months did you team
rallcmand? German?
II y a unmoisque je ne Tai vn. I have not seen him this month,
4. Combien y a^t-il . . . Combien de mi]*es y a-t-il . . . Quelle
distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far , , ,
How many miles is it , , . What is the distance^ d&c.
Combien y a-t^U de Paris k Londres 1 How far is it from Paris to London 7
RfisuMfi OF Examples.
Combien de temps y a-t-il qne vons
aveK cctte maison 1
n y a deux ans que nous I'avons.
Combien de temps avez-vous eu
cette maison 1
Noiui Tavons ene dix ans.
Combien de temps y a-t'il que votre
fr6re apprend le grec 1
n y a six ans qn'il I'apprend.
Quelle distance y apt-il de Calais d
Boukignti 1
n y a Imit lieues de Calais h. Bon-
logue.
How long have you had that house ?
We have had it these two years.
How long did you have that house 7
We had it ten years.
H010 long has your brother been
learning Oreek?
He has been learning it six years.
How far is U from Calais' to BoU'
loptc?
It is eight leagues from Calais to
Boulogne.
KXERCISB 111.
AiRche, f. ^iff ; J)emx, o, half ; Morceau, m. ;yteer ;
An, m. ann^e f. year ; Fatigu6, e, lircd; N^, from naitre, 4i.tobe
Atteiid-rc, 4. to expect^ to Imprimeur, m. printer ; Horn ;
waitffT; Linne, f.' league ; Ynrger, m. orchard i
Comimgnic, f. company ; MsLinUimkni, tww : Vicnno, Vienna
Copenhague, Copcnha- Mois, m. month ;
gen;
1. Combien de temps y Srt-il que M. L. demeure k Parist 3. B y
a 6ix ans qu*il y demeure. 3. N*a-t-il pas demeur6 k Lyon ? 4 H y
a demettr6 autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire oA est !e fila dii
mftaixf. ^ D y a un an qn'il eat en Angleterre. 7. Savex-vooa oi
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IM tattoir LTSL
dMisure 1LR1 8. OdeibeiinitMitMfob I^Rofaeii; je M«aispMo&
0 demeure laaintemmt 9. Y tMl longtemps qn^ vons ^tes ieil
10. 1) y a plus de deux moitqne nons aommeB id. 11. Combien de
tempB y A-t>il que voas avez ce veiger! 12. U yannaii que noua
A*avona. 13. Od cet imprimenr est-il ii6? 14. II eat n6 k Falaiae.
46. Savez-Tooa combien il y a de Paria k Vienne? 16. H y a tr^ia
cent aix lieuea de Paria & Vienne et deux eenta lienes de Vmne h
Copenhagoe. 17. Y a-t-il longtempa que ia oempagnie est Teoue I
18. II y a plna de deux heurea qa*eUe eat icL 19. Y a^t-il leng*
temps qne vona avez lu oette affiche. 20. II y a plus de troia
heures que je Tai lue. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d^nne demi-henre que
votre sceur lit ! 22. 11 y a si longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est
fiaigu6e. 23. Y a4-il longtempa que vous attendei ce morcean de
mnsique ? 24. II y a plua d*un iln que je Tattenda.
EZXRCISK 112.
1. How long has the printer been here t 2. He haa been here
more than a year. 3. Do you not know where my father lives! 4.
1 know where he lives, but I have no time to go to his house to-day.
5. How long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived there
ten years. 7. How long did he live in England t 8. He lived in
England six years and a half. 9. Can you tell me where the lock-
smith lives 1 10. He lives at my brother's. 11. Have yon been
waiting long for this book? 12. I have been waiting for it more
than a year. 13. How long has your son been learning Greek ? 14.
He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sister
bom in Falaise ? 16. No, Sir ; she was bom at Paris. 17. How long
has your brother had this orchard ? 18. He has had it more than
six months. 19. How for is it from Paris to Lyons ? 20. It is one
hundred and pixteen leagues from Paris to Lyons. 21. Is it farther
(plus loin) from Lyons to Geneva than from Lyons to Turin ? 22. It
ia farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to Geneva. 23.
How long did your father live in Germany ? 24. He lived in Ger-
many two years, and in England six months. 25. How long have yon
lived in Paris t 28. We have been here six months. 27. How long
did you live in Rome? 28. We lived there more than a year. 29.
How long has your brother been gone? 30. He has been gone
these two years. 31. Have you been learning German more th^m one
fear ? 32. I have been learning it more than four '"eaia. 83. Yoni
aiater baa been leammg mnaie one year and a ftalt
Digitized
by Google
ftBSVOV LTTIX. IW
LEssoir Lvm EE50N tvin.
h Changer [1. fee}49, (DliUaed in the aenseof toc&m^«,lo26A»
om iking for anoiher, is followed by the preposition de: changer
dliabit, de ebapeau, etc^ to jmi €n another coat, hatt ^. ; changer
d'avia, to change ant^s mind; changer de maiaon, to move, to chang
fcoH^et; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de dimat^ to go
fc another jfkux, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change emit
name. The student will perceive that the nonn following t^hanger, ia
sot preceded by a possessive adjective, like the noun of the Engllah
sentence:—
Toulez-TOQS changer d'babit 1 WiSl fan change your coat 7
Ce monsteor % chimgfi de nom. T%al gentteman has changed his name,
2. Changer contra, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change
for^ to get change for : —
Voules-Tons changer votre chapean Will you exchange your hat for wUae f
centre Ic mien 1
Cbanges co billet poor de Tai^nt ChangethatM for siher,
3. Tarder means to tarry, to he long in coming. Tarder, used
miipersonally, and preeeded by an in&eet object, means to long, to
wishfiir: —
Votre BOBur tarda bien k venir. Your sister is very long eemisig.
D me tarda de la vofar. I long to see her.
BMuuA of Ezamplxb.
{Tavvc-Tous pas ofaangift d'apparte*
mentl
Kbus avotts change de rnalson.
Votre Mm a chang6 de oondnite.
Cette dame a changft de religion.
CoBtre qnoi avez-vonschang6 votre
chevall
J'ai besoin de moonale, pouvea-vous
me changer cette pi^oe de vingt
fhines 1
Ce garden a beaucoup taid&.
n nous tardait d'arriver.
n leur tardait de revdr leurs amis.
Have you not taken amtker <
ment?
We have chanaed houses.
Your brother has changed his eot^
ducL
T%at lady has changed her reUgioti,
For what have you exchanged yomr
• horse?
I want change, can you dkange nm
this twenty franc piece?
T%at boy tarried very i
We longed to arrioe.
They Smged to see their frkoA
again.
J long to see F^ranoe ogam.
Umfr tarda de revoir la Fnmoe.
EXXBCIBI 113.
Ahr, m. airs Blanc, che, wkUei Chis, e, grayt
Avis, m. mMi awM- Combat, m. eomtet / €hdiife,f.giriM»#
m^ Caadui^Aawdim; Umm^.yoamgs
Digitized by VjOOQ I
m tB«80V I.TtlL
Mattre, m. master f PaaaA, e, pott, last; Vie, f. life, imdiad t
Manteau, nL c^mii;; Pays, ra. cmin/fy; Tisa^, m. efniii/tfiMiih;^
Monnaie, f. change, Buiitr-cr, 1. to come in face,
Mo\x\\l6, e, inet ; again;
Parccque, because;
I. Get homme n*a-t-il pas change de viet 3. II a chang6 do con-
duite. 3. Cette grande maison nVt-elle pas change de maiUef 4.
Elle a change de mattre, le capitaine G. vient de I'acheter. 5. Voos
£tes mouille, pourquoi ne changez-vous pas de manteau? 6. Patce*
que je n*en ai pas d*aatre. 7. Voire cousine ne change-t-ello pas
souvent d^avis? 8. Elle en change bien sottvent. 9. Pendant le
combat, ce jeune soldat nVUl pas chang6 de vintage? 10. II n*a
point change de visage. 11. Ce malade ne de\Tait-il pas changer
d'air? 12. Le mMecin lui reconimande de changer de pays. 13
Oi^ est voire cheval gris? 14. Je ne I'ai plas, je Tai change contra
nn blanc. 15. Avec qui Tavcz-vous change 1 16. Je *ai changd
avec le jeune homme qui demeurait ici le mois passe. 17. Le mar-
chand peut il me changer cette pi6ce de quarante francs? 18. II ne
saurait {canmt) vous la changer, il n'a pas de monnaie. 19. Avez-
vous la monnaie d*une guinee (change for a guinea), 20. Combien
de schellings, y a-i-il dans une guinee? 21. II y en a vingi-et^un.
22. Votre petit gar^on ne tarde-t-il pas k rentrer ? 23. II iarde beau-
coup. 24. Ne vous tarde-t-il pas d'aller en Italic ? 26. II me tarde
d'y aller.
EXSRCISB 114.
1. Why do you not change your coat ? 2. For a very good rea-
son, (ration, f.) because I have no other. 3. Has your father changed
bouses? 4. -No, Sir, but we intend to do so (de le /aire) to-morrow.
5. Has thai child changed his conduct ? 6. He has changed his con*
duct, he is very good now (mainfeyiaTit). 7. Have you changed your
religion ? 8. No, Sir, I have not changed my religion. 9. Do you
not change your place very often ? 10. I change my place when I
am tired. U. Does not your sister change her mind every day?
12. She does not change her mind every day. 13. Was not your
broilier afraid, did not his countenance change? 14. His counte-
nance changed, but he was not afraid. 15. Have you not changed
rooms (chambref f.) ? 16. I have not changed rooms, my room is
very good. 17. Do you not long to be in Franee? 18. I long to
be there. 19. Does not your mother tarry too hng? 20. She is
very long in coming. 21. Have you changed the forty franc piece?
22. I have not changed it yet 23. Why hove you not changed it?
SM. Because your fiitiier has no change. 26. flave you the ehaagv
Digitized
by Google
LSBtOV XIOC 167
for a gniBMif 36L No, Sir, I have only twelve ahillinga. 97. How
many cents are there in a dollar ? 28. There are one hundred. 29.
Has that gentleman exchanged that horse 1 30. Yes, Sir, he has cx-
ehangcd it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for
miiie ? 32. No, Sir, your bat is too smaH for me. 33. With whom
hare yon exchang<!d your horse? 34. I hare exchanged it with my
bnther. 35. I have exchanged it for a white one.
LESSON LIX. LEgON LIX.
1. We have given, in Lesson II, rules for forming the plural of
nouns, but have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns.
2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan-
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu,
des chefs-lieuz, a chiefpiace^chirf places; un gentilhomme, des gentils-
hommes, a nobleman, noblemen [} 9, (1.) (3.)].
3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the
first only becomes plural: Un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d^oeuvre, «
masler-pieee master-pieces [{ 9, (2.)].
4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or advqrb,
the noun only becomes plural; Passe-port, passe-ports, jxissporty
passports [}9, (6.)].
6. Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb, an adverb, and a
preposition, are invariable: un passe-partout, des passe-partout^
master-key^ master-keys [} 9, (8.)].
6. We have seen [L. 5. R. 4.] that the name of the material al-
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united by the
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation also fol*
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition
4e connects the two : un maltre dWmes, a fencing master ; un mattre
de dessin, a drawing master ; un marchand de farine, a dealer inflour
[{76,(120} 81, (4.)].
7. Tlie name of a vehicle, boat, mill, ^., always precedes the noun
describing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to
which It is adapted; the name of an apartment, that of the nse to
which it is appropriated. The connectinf preposition is d : un monlin-
iovapeur, a steam mill ; un bateau-3uvapenr, a steamboat ; on moaUn-
A^eao, a waier-miU; la 8alle-St.4iiaiiger, the iimng'Toovn [} 76 (18.)
C14)i81,(4.)Ci.;J.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
viPM0y »f&
Rfisuict OF Example*.
Lille et Arrf « soot los cheA-lieuz
des d^partcments da Nord et da
PiM^e-OaSaiff.
lies chemSns-do-fer et lea bateaux-
ci-va|)ear sont trte nombreox en
AmArique.
CdttemaisoQContieatun salon; one
8aIle-4-manger, one Gaisine et plu-
sioors chambres-a-coacher.
ItQB nfoulina-i-Feiit sont plus corn-
mans en France que lea moulins-
. i-eau on Orvapear.
Li3l€ and Arras are tU (
of Ike deparlmenls of lite J
efike Pas^dt'Cakus.
RaibrotuU and sUamboaU atte tMry
numerous in America.
T%U house conidins a drm$ingyre&mf
a dining-room^ a kileken^ tfnd m*-
ral bed-rooms.
Windmills are more common ui
FYance than water or steam^miUi.
Armes, t, ^
Bit-ir, 2. Uf
BonteiWe, f. bottle !
Cabriolet, m. gig ;
Chat-bnant, m. ovA ;
Gbaovo-souris, tbats
ExsaciSB 115.
Des8in> m. drawif^ ; Ordinaii«, ^tsmait
BDgaf^, 1. to engage , Bone, f. tohed ;
Falre bit-ir, 2. to hitve Voya^-er, I. to travel t
bmU; Voile, f. salL
8e munir, 1. ref. to proi-
vide one^s sdftoith;
1. Faut-il avoir un passe-port pour voyager on Franee ? di II &at
en avoir un. 8. Les Anglais ae mnniasent-ils de paase^porta pout
voyager en Angleterre? 4. On nV pas besoin do poase-port en An-
gleterre. 6. Aimea-voua ii voyager aur les chemina-de-fer? &
Paime mieox voyager but les chemtna-de-fer que aur lea chemint
ordinairea. 7. Avez-voua a|^rte voa passe-partout? 8. Je n'ai
point de paase-partout, je n'ai que dea clefa ordinairea. d. Votre
fr^re est-il venu dana un b&teau-k-vapeur ? 10. II eat venu dans un
bAiteau'^voiles. 11. Avez-vous une voiture i quatre chevauxl 12.
Non, Monsieur, noua n'avons qu'un cabriolets un cheval. 13. Votre
fr^re a^t-il bMi un moulin-k-vapeur ? 14. H a fait b&tir deux moulina,
Tun k vent et Tautre k eau ? 15. Votre compagnon »-t-i1 engage un
mattre d*armea ? 16. Non, Monsieur, il a dej^ un maltre de deasin
et un mattre de danae. 17. Combien de chambres-^^coacher avez
voua? 18. Nous en avona deux. 19. Avez-vous une bonteille de
Tin ! SO. Non, Monsieur, mais j*ai une bouteille-^vin (mne-botUe)
[{81.]. 31. Voyez-voua les chata-huants ? 22. Non, malt je toIi
let chauvea-aouria. 23. JTai une voiture k quatre roues.
BXBRCTSB 116.
I. Is your father in England? 9. No, Sir, he is in France wftb
my brother. 3. Have they taken paasporta ? 4. Yes, Sir, they have
taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer
feat 9. No, 8lr, but it is neeeasaiy tb have one to travo) in Italy.
% U there s' cteaaboat ftoni OUdr to Dover (Dauvm) 1 8. TImm
Digitized
by Google
liltSOV LX. IM
m a0f«nL d. U th«n» a nihroad from Paris to Bnisaab (Am.
JMlfet} I 10. Ther0 is one from Paris to Bnissela, and one from Pufo
io Tours. 11. Has your brother bought a wind-mill! IX No» l^«
bat he has built a steam-mill. 13. Are there many wtiMl-fliflls in
America 1 14. No/ Sir, but there are many water and steam-mills.
lA. Have your sisters a dancing-master ? 16. They have a daneing-
BMater and a mnsic-master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing ?
Mw He does not learn It, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is
the fencing-master in the dining-room! SO. No, Sir, he is in the
dwwing-TOom. 31. Is your cousin in his bed-room ? 32. No, Sir,
he is out (sorti), 28. How many rooms are there in your house.
84. Five ; a kitchen, a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed-
rooms. 86. Are there owls here ! 86. Yes, Sir, and bats too. 87.
Have you seen those master-pieces ! 28. Yes, Sir, I have seen them.
89. Have you sent them to the chief place of the department ! 80.
I have sent them there. 81. Have you a two-horse gig! 88. I have
a fourJiorae one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage ! 84
He has a two-seat carriage (d dnus iUges).
LESSON LX. LE9ON LZ.
TWO FUTUBB8, SDfPLB AKB ▲VTKRIOIl. (^ 124.)
1. The future of every verb in the French language ends with nri,
rss, ni, nifu, rex, nmt
8. This tense, in all the regular verbs, as also in the irregular verbs
not mteitioned in the next lesson, may be formed from the present
of the infinitive by changing the r of the Antt and second conjug»>
tions, and the oir and re of the third and fourth, into the tenniBatieui
already given and here again repeated.
3. Ck>HJUOAnON OF THS FlTTUBS S|1IPI<« OF THX RsOULim
Verbs.
Je ehante -rsl flid -ral reoev -rsl rend -rsl
wa^kif wiUJbuah wiUrtesht wiUrmtitr
Tu parie -ras ch4ri -rat ajpetoev -rss vend •ras
wUttpmk wUtekeridi wHtftremw wUt jttt
n dcone -ra tinirtA ' -ra perosv -ra tend -ra
OiMgi— wUifmwUk wai0€tkm' wiU t§Md
Vovscfaerehe-rooi puni -rons conoev -rons entend -row
wa9mk thMytmisk wiU tmmim wiUktar
ToMporle -rea laisi -res dev -res perd -m
mUlumn wlUstis$ wiU§m wOtUM
Di afane -fciit uni -root d4oev -rout moid -foal
Digitized
by Google
4. The ftiture anterior is merely the past partieiple of the Tetb^
conjugated with the fttture of one of the auxiliaries avoir, itre:''^
J^aami fini; Je me serai flatt6. I;shaU havedoTie, I skaU kene JLatieren
myself,
5. The student, when rendering Bngh'sh into French, should be
careful to distinguish wiUy talcen a*! an auxiliary, from the same word
employed as a principal verb. In this latter £ase, it is always equiva-
lent to the verb, to wish, or to he unUing, and should not be rendered
by the future of the verb, but by the present of vouloir : —
lie vooles-voua pas lui 6erire 1 WiU j/im not {an yon not mlUng) to
wnUtohitii?
BAsumA of Examples.
Quadd parleres-vomi h, ce monsieur t
Vous foumlra-t-fl des provisions 1
lis ne recevront pas leurs revenus.
Ne vendrez-vous pas vos proprid-
t6sl
Que voules-vous avoir t
Que veut lire votre frdre 1
Apportere^-vous des pommes ?
Nous amtaerons nos enfknts
Vous apporterea des legumes.
When wiU ytm tpeak to that gmU^
man?
WiU hejymish you provisions 7
They will not receive their income.
Will you not sell your property ?
What do you wish to have?
What will yowr brother read V
Will you tiring appUs 7
We will bring our children*
You will bring vegetables.
EXERCISB 117.
Abrenvoir, m. watering Ohfttcau, m. 'trilla ; Men-er, 1. \^ 4tf, (6.)J to
pla4X ; Colporteur, m. pedlar, take^ to lead;
Appel>er, 1. [% 49, (4.)] hawkers Se promen-er, 1. rof.
to call ; Bonner a manger, to [^ 49, (6.)] to walk or
Apr&s-midi, f afternoon ; feed ; ndefor jdeasiire ;
Avoine, t oats ; ficurie, f. slabU ; Ricoltrer, 1. to harotsl ;
B16, m. wheat ; Foin, m. hay ; Sem-er, 1. [( 49, (d.)| to
Cacliet-er, 1. ft 49, (4.)]Geler, 1. [§ 49, (6.)] to sow.
to seal,. freezes
1. M^nerez-vous vos enfonts ^ I'^colet 2. Je les mineral &
'6coIe et ^ r^glise. 3. Le jardinier app^rtera-t-il des legumes aa
march6? 4. II y en apportera. 6. Oi^ indnerez-vous ce chevalt
6. Je le mineral & Tocurie. 7. Lui donnerez>vous k manger?
8. Je lui donnerai du foin et de Tavoine. 9. Lui donnerez-vous d:
I'ean ? 10. Je le m^nerai & Tabreuvoir. 1 1. Paierez-[} 49, (2.)] vous
oe que vous devez f 12. Ne voulez-vous pas vous promener ? 13. Je
me prom^nerai cette apr^s-midL 14. Vous prom^nerez-vou? a pied
ou k eheval 1 16. Je me prom^nerai k cheval et ma scmr se prom^
nera en Toitnre. 16. Maioherec-vooa beaueoi^ dans vobre voyagt
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
lB«tOV t.SI. Ifl
I^IWtf 17. NoM ne maieheroiM fiAS da tMt It. ITqpptllflma.
[{4d,(4.)] TOW pu, 1« colporUnr? 19. Je m rappellani pa&
90. H'aeheteres-U 4ft» (5.)] vow pM oo efafctcwL 81. Nous Tach^
terons ti nous poiinNM. iKL No gMori*t.iI piw [{49, (6.)] cotto
Doitf 23. Je ne le crois pM» il fiut trop ehaud. 'IL No •(^norox*
[} 49, (6.)] vow pw tout le bl6 fno vow reeoltorozl 25. Je a'en
■dmeiai qn'mio pwtio, je vendni lo losto. 26. Jo OMhettemi nee
lottreo ot je loo portoimi & la poote.
EXXROIBB 118.
1. wax not the gentleman call hia ohildiont 2. Ho will eall hia
children and his aister'a. 3. Will you not bring your children t
4. I cannot bring them. 6. Will you not take a ride thia afiomoon ?
8. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will yon not buy my
' fathor'a horses t 8. I shall not buy them ; I have no money. 9. Will
you not call the p^lar ? 10. I do not wish to call him ; I do not wish
to buy any thing. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will pay him
for my coat 18. Will it not freeze to-morrow I 14. It will freeze
to-morrow; it is very cold. 16. Will you not sow oata in this field
(champ) 1 16. I will not sow oata ; I will sow wheat there. 17. Will
you take your sister to school? 18. I will take her there this after-
noon. 19. Will you not take your son to market? 20. I will not
take him there. 21. Will not the gardener take his horse to the
watering pbce? 22. He will take him there. 23. Will you give
oata to your horse? 24. I will give him hay. 26. Will yon bring
your son with you? 26. I will bring him to-morrow. 27. Will he
bring his horse ? 28. He will bring hia horse and carriage. 29. Why
do you carry that little child? 30. He is too sick to (pour) walk.
31. Will your brother sell his property ? 32. He will only sell part
of it 33. Will not your servant carry the letter to the poat-offieo t
34. I will seal it and give it to him. 35. Will you feed my horae?
36. I will feed him and give him some. water.
^1 o ■»
LESSON LXI. LEgON LXL
IRREOULARinra OF TRB TUTUIIB.
I. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation alter, to go, and
tfivoyor, to gend, make in the f^iinre firaUferaerrai [lef } 62.] ^—
& All the verba of the second conjugation, whkh end in enir^ chaago
tttti tanDinatien into teNtfrea» 4m., ibr the fntore: «% tnii^ lo koH
Digitized
by Google
11% LBIHIOir LZL
tenlr, to amm ;/f tiaidraitje viendraL Aequftrir, to mcquin ; eonqvMr
lo conquer ; reqn^rir, to require ; monrir, to die ; and^ eowir, to rwn^ and
its componndB, doubli) th« r in the fatore 'j^aeqtum^jt mownoi^
/e eawrroL Caeillir, logather^ and its eomponndiiB, eiisnge the t pi^
eeding the r into 0.'-^6 cueUJeraL
5. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit doum, and aeou*, to n^
makeytf nCaseiirai and je siiraL Fallotr, to he neceseary^ Youloii, to
be wUUng^ and yaloir, to be worthy make U fauira,je voudrai, and Jo
vavdraL Voir, to see, and reroir, to see again^ make je verrm, jt
reverrm. PouToir, to be aMe, makes je poumn^ and pourvoir, to ffro-
rideje pourvoiraL Saroir, to knowt and avoir, to have^ makeje saurmif
and/ourai.
4. &tre, to be, faire, to make^ and its compounds, are the only verba
of the fonrth eonjogation, which are irregoUr in the fotore :— ^e sera%
jeferaxy &&
6. The fotures, simple and anterior, are used in French after an
adverb of time, in cases similar to those in which the English use
the present and perfect of the indicative, with Kfuiure meaning:—
Qoand vous verrez ces messieurs . . Whxn you see those gentlemen . . .
Pds que vous aurea re^u oette As soon as yon Mve reotwed tkU
lettre ... letUr . . .
IUsumA of Ezamplxs.
Irez-vous en France cette annie'l
Nous irons en France et en Italie.
Nous vous enverrons chercher.
Ne viendrez-vouB pas nous trouver.
Ne nous assi^rons-nous past
Quand lis viendront, j'aurai ma
lettre.
Cela vaudra-t-il la peine 7
Get habit ira-t-U bien 1
D fbudra leur envoyer de raigent
SiaU you go to hyante this yeor?
We shaU go to Pra/nee and holy.
We shall send for fow.
WiJOL you not cotne to us?
ShaU loe not sit down?
When they comSf I shall have my k^
ter.
WUlthatbetoorththewhOe?
WUl that coatJU weU?
money,
EZEBCISK 119.
AveC) vrilk ; Lentement, slovfk ; Permett-re, 4. Ir. I0 per-
Bientdt, soon g March-er, to toalk, to go mU;
Connait-re, 4. ir. £9 on foot 1 Plaisir, m. ;40«wr«/
knows Md-m6me, myself s Pr6t-er, 1. to lends
Demeure, t dwdUng ; Oil, where ; 8ort-ir, 2. Ir. to go out.
Fraise, C strawberry s Part-ir, "Z.ir.to set ouly
Onitarei f. gtdtar ; to leave ;
1. Ne viendre7*vous pas nous voir domain! 3. Pirai vous voir, si
le temps le permet 8. N'enverrez-vous pas chercher le m^dedn, 4
▼etre file est makde? 4. JeTirai chercher moi-mdme. 5. Quand je
■end iktiga^yjemaicherai plus lentement 7. Quand voua oonnaitrea
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
umtBom hXh 178
m deaenre irei-TOiM le Toir? 8. Tini le Yoir anBsitAt que jo laiiiii
oA il demeure. 9. Ne le venrez^Tons pas anjoardliai ? 10. Je le
femi eette aprd»-midi. 11. Ne pourrez-vous point nous accoin-
pagner ? 12. Je le fend avee beaueoup fi» plakir. 18. Ne lenr eii«
verrez-Toue point dee fraisesf 14. Je lenr en envernil quand led
miennes aeront m&rea. 16. Ne faudra-t-il pas leor 6crire bient6i1
Id Quand nooa aurona re9a dea nouvellea de lenr parent, il fkudra
lenr terire. 17. Qne feronfr-noua domain? 18. Nous irona k la
ehaaae. 19. N^z voua paa ohez votre p^rel 20. Nona irona eer-
tainemeni. 21. Qjoand votre guitare sera arriT^e, la prftterez-Tonaff
22. Je ne pourrai la prdter. 23. A quelle henre partirez-vous ^
main? 24. Je partirai k cinq heures du matin. 25. Ne sortirez-TOUS
paa oe aoir? 26. Je ne aortirai pas, et je me eouoherai de bonne
henre.
EZBOIBB 120.
1. Will you send for the physician? 2. I will send for him thia
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples? 4. She
will send for some. 0. Will you not sit down when you are tired?
6. We will not ait down, we have no time. 7. What will your
brother do when he is tired? [R. 5.] 8. He will do what [ee que]
lie can. [R. 6.] 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to 1dm t
10. It will not be worth the while, for (car) he will not come. !!•
Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant? 12. It will not
be necessary to speak to him. 13. Will it be necessary for ua to
take passports? 14. It will be necessary. (U lefaudra.) 15. Will
not your little boy walk more slowly when he is tired? 16. When
he is tired, he will sit down. 17. What will your sister do to-mor-
row ? 18. She will go to church and to school 19.. Will she not
come here? 20. She will not be able to come. 21. Will you walk
or go on horseback, (Irez vous A pied ou d chewdt) 22. 1 shall go on
horseback. 23. Why do yon not go in a carriage ? 24. Because my
carriage is in London. 25. When will you see them ? 26. I shall
ee them as soon aa I can. SH. Will they come to our house to-
morrow? 28. They will do so with much pleasure. 29. When you
see that gentleman, will you speak to him ? 30. I will not speak to
him. 31. When you have written your letters, what will you do?
32. 1 shall come to your house. 83. When you have read that book*
frill you send it to me ? 34. 1 will send it to you. 35. Will you send
tt to-day? 3a I will send it to-morrow. 87. They will come to yon
t»-aorrow.
Digitized
by Google
IVi
tB«S09 LSIt.
LESSON Lxn. LE9ON Lxn.
TUB TWO OONDITIOKAU. (} 125.)
1. The conditional present may be formed from the future, by
displacing the terminr»tion8 at, as, a, ons, ez, onlt and aubstituting
those of the imperfect of the indicative, ais, ais, ttit{tonSy iez, aienL
2. Every verb in the French language, regular and irregular, haa
in this tense tiie above terminations.
8* COMJUOATION OV THB CoKDITIONAIi PkXSBKT OV TBI RbOV*
larVbrbs.
Je chanter -aSs
Tn parler -ais
n donner -ait
•ktmUgiw
K0U8 che. Cher -ions
wmld t§ek
Vous porter -ies
aimer -aient
mmUdla94
flnir ^ia
to0iiU Jhtith
cbirir -ais
w0mU*teknri$k
foumir -ait
akomld/umith
punir -ions
BkouUpunUk
saisir -lez
unir -aient
sknlduiutB
recevr -ais
rendr -ais
apercovr-aia
wvmtdgt ptrceive
percevr -ait
toauldgttktr
coDcevr -ions
wnUd e§neeiv»
devr- -iez
gkouldow
d6cevr -aient
vendr -ais
W9»Udtt Mtf
tendr -ait
entendr-ions
perdr -lea
mordr -aient
8k0mldkiU
4. The irregularities of the conditional appear not in the termina*
tions, but in the stem of the verb. They are precisely the same as
those of the future. Those irregularities will be found in the last
lesson, and need not be repeated here. The conditional of any irregw
nlar verb may be formed by placing after the last r of the future, the
terminations of the imperfect of the indicative.
ft. The conditional past is formed from the conditional present of
one of the auxiliaries avoirs ttre, and the past participle of the verb
[J 126,(2.)] :-
J*aurais 6crit, je me serais flattS. / should have vrriUen^ I should kavs
JUUlered myself.
6. The two futures aiid th<) two conditionals should not be usee
after the conjunction si (if). But in such case, the present and thf
roperfect of the indicative should be used : —
B'il pouvait quitter son p5re, il vlen- If he could leave his father, he womU
drait. come.
8i J'4tais k votrs place, j'hfais. If I were in your place, I would go,
R&BVUA OF EXAMPIBS,
Vons irions k la chasse, si nous I We would go hutUing if we kadUm
avions le temps. |
^ttr^,slJ'avaisdesUvresid. 1 1 wouU read tf I had books here.
Digitized
by Google
LSI80V LZII. Its
/tinieralf mleiu ftller & pied qii*a
cheval.
7otre miro se portenit mieox a
Paris.
Kous nons passerions fiicilement de
He vandrait-tl pas mienx lai€crire 1
Nc laadrait-il pas lui terire 1
Jc m'assi^rais si J'itais fatiga6.
Cet habit m'irait blen, sll 6lait
large.
I would prefer walking to ridimg.
Your mother would be better in Pans,
We vUghi easily do wiUuriU that book,
WoulditnotbebeUertowritetohwif
Would Uiufi be neeetsary to write to
him/
J would sit down if I were tired.
That ohU would JU me well if tt were
broad enough.
Exercise 121.
ffamns-er, 1. ref ta Interromp-re, 4. ir. (0 Se tromp-er, 1. raCltf Ac
amuse on^s sdfs interrupt; mistaken ;
B'^proch-er, 1. lef. <plii?it-€r, 1. to inviUs Se por-ter, 1, rtt to be
come near ; Mett-re, 4. ir. to fnU on; or do f
8'61oign-er, 1. ref. to ^oMoaiU-er, I. to wet; Voyage, ULJowneff.
from ; Ot^r, 1 . to take off;
BVnnny-er, 1. ref. [( 49.] Peat4tre, perhaps g
to be or become weary ; S^ch»er, 1 . to dry ;
1. Quel lialNt mettriez->voa9 si vous alliez iL la ehasse? 5L Je
mettrais un liabit vert 8. N'6teriez-voa8 pas tos bottes, si elles
^taient monill^es? 4. Je les 6terais, et je les fends s^her. 6. Si
▼ous aviez froid, ne vous approcheriez-vous pas du feu? 6. Je m*en
approcherais certaiDement. 7. Votre petit gar^on oe s'en 61oigne*
rait.il pas, s*il avait trop cbaud? 8. II 8*en ^loignerait bien vite. 9.
Vous ennuieriez-vons ici? 10. Je ne m*ennuierais pas, je m*amuse-
rais ^ lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal-
eul? 12, Je me tromperais peut^tre, si j'etais interrompn. 13.
Viendriez-vous si on vous invitait? 14. Je viendrais avee beancoup
de plaiair. 16. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieuz, si vous lisiez
moins? 16. Je me porterais beaucoup mieax. 17. Ne fiiudrait-il
pas lui parler de votre affaire? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19.
Combien d'argent vous faudrait-il ? 20. II me fitudrait mille francs,
si je faisais ce voyage. 21. Ne vandrait-il pas mieux lui parler que
Ini ^crire ? 22. II vaudrait mienx lui ^rire. 23. Si vous 6tiez \
ma place, que feriez-vous? 24. Si j*etais 2L voire place, je lui paierais
•e que je lui dois. 25. Si j'avaift le temps, je porterais volontiers
vos lettres '1 la poste.
Exercise 122.
1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. I would read two
hours every day if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother
put on if he went to church ? 4. He would put on a black coat 6
Would you* put on a black luu 6. I would pat on a stew hat
Digitized
by Google
176 LBIION LXIIL
•
(chafemt 4e vmOe) if it wu warm. 7. Would yon not draw [L. n%
6. ] near the firs if you were cold ? 8. We would draw near it
9. Would you not take off your coat? 10. I would take it off, if it
were wet. 1 1. Would you go to my &ther's if he inyited you ! 12
I would go to hia house and to your brother's, if they invited me.
13. Would you put on your boota, if they were wet! 14. If they
were wet, I would not put them on. 16. How much money would
you want, if you went to England! 16. We would want three
thousand firaoca. 17. Would you not be better if you lived (i29.
meurer) in the country ? 18. I should not be better. 19. Would
it not be better to write to your brother ? 20. It would be better to
write to him. 21. Would you read the book if I lent it to you ! 22.
I would certainly read it. 23. If you were in his place, would you
go to school ? 24. If I were in his place, I would go. 25. If you
were in my place, would you write to him? 26. I would write to
him every day. 27.- Would your sister be mistaken? 28. She
would not be mistaken, she is very attentive. 29. If you rose every
mommg at five, would you be better? 30. I should not be better.
31. Would you prefer going on foot ? 32. I would prefor going on
horseback. 33. Would you not sit down ? 34. I would sit down
if I were tired.
LESSON LXm. LEQON LXm.
1. The verb faire (4. ir.) is used in the formation of a number of
idiomatic sentences. See L. 82. R. 8, 4. Faire iaire, to hate maie^
to bespeak; faire raecommoder, to have mended; fiure la cuisine, to
cock ; faire euire, to ooak, to bake ; faire bouillir, to boil ; faire r6tir
to roasl ; faire chauffer, to toarm (in speaking of food) ; faire bonne
eh^re, to live weU:—'
Nous avons fldt fUre des habits. We have had dMa mad*.
Vons avea fait raecommoder vos Youkaoe AadyowrwauteoaUmeiukd
gilets.
2. The past participle of faire never varies, when it precedes an
infinitive:-—
Les Uvres qua voua avez fait venir. 7%e books wHch fou have sent for,
3. Faire peur, to frighten; faire attention, to pay aOenlum; faire
tort, to injure ; faire mal, fiure du mal, to hurt^ take d before a
noun.^—
Nous avoDs fkit peur k ces enfknts. We have frigktefud ikosi ekUd^m^
Vona leur avea fkit mai Vm kam kmri Mmi.
Digitized
by Google
LBBtOK LXIIX. in
4. The kst example wiU Hhow that, when a noun pteeeded by 1^
■iprceaed or understood, is replaced by a prononn, ihat*pronoan wiU
take the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to
the roles for the place of personal pronouns, when fatre attention
has for its indirect object a prononn r^resenting a person, that pro-
noun follows the verb : —
Nous fhroDS attention k lui. We ioiU pay aUenUon to him»
6. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article
le^ Is, fefy &c^ instead of the possessiTe adjectiTe [} 77, (9.)] when
the poesesaion is expressed by a reflective (JL 37. R. 1.) or other per-
sonal pronoun or by some other word in the sentence : —
Vous m*aTez fidt mal k la main. Ybu have hurt my land.
Le bras lui fidt maL EKs arm hfiurts or pains Mm,
RftSUlfA or EXAMPLKB.
WiU fou lUwe your Mkees mended?
Feres-Toas lacoommoder tos sou-
liers?
Je fends ftiire un habit si J'aTais do
rargenti
n ne sait pas ihire la cuisine.
Ates-voos fidt cuire votre Tiande 1
Ferez-Tous chauffer Yotre bouillon 1
Vons lui avez fidt mal an coude.
Vons m'aTes fidt mal an pied.
VoQs arez fidt peindie yotie mai-
son.
I would bespeak a new coat if I had
money.
He does not understand cooking.
Have you cooked yow meat ?
Will you warm yow hrotk 7
You have kwrt kis elbow.
You have hurt my foot.
You have had your house painted.
EXBROXSX 128f
^tr\r, 2. to Mid ; Gravure, f. en^ot^-Poignet, uli^HM/
BoniUoii, m. ^<i^A; ings ThtOjt head g
Bras, m. arm; Ma^on, m. «kz«m ; Tout-lkrl'heure, by-amd'
Cnisiuier, m. cookf March-eri to step, tread; byg
SpKoiie, t. shoulder r 0^, where; Travafl, m. work^ Uh
GigoMe-mouton, m. k^Plod, m.fooi; bar.
of muitoni
1. Quand ferez-vona bflitir une maison? 2. Jen ferai bitir une
Pann^ prochaine, si je re^ ois mon argent 3. Avez-vous fiut bouil-
lir ee gigot do mouton ? 4. Je Tai fait r6tir. 6. Le cuisinier a-t>il
ikit chaufier votre bouillon t 6. 0 ne I'a pas encore fait chauffer, mala
Q le fera tout-^rheure. 7. N^avez-vous pas fidt venir des livrea?
8. Nous n*en avons pas fiut venir, mais nous avous fait venir dos
gra?ursa. 9. N'ayez-yons pas fait peur & cea petifces fiUesT 10.
Nous leur avons fait peur. 1 1. Ferez^vous attention k Totre travail I
13. Py &rai attention. 18. Avez-vous fiut nud ^ cette petite fillet
14 Je ne lui ai pas fidt mal. 16. N'avez-vous pas &it mal ice
•hieni le. Jeloiaifhitmal. 17. CM avez-vous fait mal itolra file f
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
lT8 LB8B0V LZIT.
1& J« Ini al liyt mai aq bnt et l U mtin. Id. No lai avei-TOiis pu
fiat mal an pied! 20. ie lui ai fait mal 2l I'^paale. 31. A qui ct
ma^en a-t-il fkit mal t 29. fl D*a fait mal k, peraoime. 9S. Vouaai-ja
fttt mal aa pied? 24» Voua m*avez march6 aur lo pied et vena m*avei
fait mal. 26. La t^te, P^paule, le bnw, le poignet et la main me font
mal. [R.6.]
EZBRCIBS 124.
1. Wni yoQ have your coat mended? 2. I will not hare it
mended. 3. Will your broths have his houae painted ? 4 He will
have it painted next year. 6. Will you not have a coat made ? 6. I
would have one made if I had money, 7. Have you hurt your
brother? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped upon hia foot 9.
Does his arm pain him? 10. Yes, Sir, his shoulder, arm and wrist
pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 12.
He will pay attention to it, he has nothing else (rien auire chote) to
do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow? 14. You have
hurt my fingers (doigis), 15. Does your cook understand cooking?
16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of
mutton? 18. He has boiled it 19. Has he not warmed it? 20.
He has not had time to warm it 21. Has the physician sent for en-
gravings? 22. He has sent for books. 23. Have you hurt hia
elbow? 24. I have not hurt hiselbow^but his hand. 26. Have I
not hurt your fingers? 26. You have hurt my wrist 27. Where
have you hurt your son ? 28. I have not hurt him. 29. Would the
cook boil that meat if he had time ? 30. He would not boil it, he
would roast it 81. When will he warm your broth ? 32. He will
warm it by^nd-by, if he has time. 33. If yon had stepped upon
my foot, would you not have hurt me? 34. I should certainly have
hurt you, if I had stepped upon your foot
LESSON LXIV. LEgON LXIV.
1 . Faire connaissance, to become or get acquainted, takes the frtfpo*
sHion avec before ita object Faire un mille, &c, faire nn voyage,
tairo un tour de promenade, mean to g<s or travel a mikf dte., toge
en ajmnmeiff to iiAe awalk:-^
Nona ftvona fkit vingt millea k che> We travdled twemim mln #» hane^
val back,
% MnaeaMdiaiiz,fiuMiiMienplette8,lhimdMpiogrte,lk^
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LBStOZr LZIT.
1^0
/ bidfareioeU to my fdatUms,
Havt you made a Jin in my nam I
^iifl«tioiiB, fiire da fen, correspond in sigBification to the Enfiliah
ezpresfiionfl, to hidfaretoeU, to make purchases, to improve or progrese^
to ank questions^ to make a firt i-^
VsX fait mes adieox i mes parents.
ATez-TouB fait du fea dans ma
chambrel
3. Faire aortir means, to send oviy or to order otU; faire entier, to
let tn^ to bid come in ; faire attendre, to keep toailing :—
Toos lea area fait eatrer dans ma You made them ame into my twmi.
diambre.
Yous avez fait attendre mon pdre. You made my father wUL
4. Faire son possible, to do <m£s 6est, takes the preposition pour^
Faire semblant, to pretend^ fiiire usage, to make use, are followed by
Nous avons fiiit notre possible. We have done our best.
RtBiTM^ OF Examples.
Nous aTons fait connaissance avec
eux.
Yoofl avez fait vingt lieaes en dlx
heares.
Nous ferons on tonr de promenade.
^e Ini ai fiiit plnsiears questions.
Us nous out fait lears adieux.
Vous nous avez fait attendre.
Get enfant fait semblant de dormir.
Yens fkites semblant de lire.
Nons ferons notre possible poor le
TOfa".
We became acquainted with them.
You iravdled twenty leapsee in ten
hours.
We shall take a walk. **
/ asked him several questions.
They have bid us farewell.
You have made us wait.
T^M child pretends to be adeep.
You pretend to be reading, ot do as
if you were reading.
We loill do our best to see kim.
EXBBCIBB 125.
Aise, glad;
Aliment, ULfbodi
CMi%,m.credU,'
Itaand-er, I. to ask;
Dorm-ir, 2. ir. to sleep;
Rtnde, f. study g
8e fich-er, 1. ref to be- N^gociant, m. merekamt;
came angry; Quart, m. quarter i
Faire I'aumone, to give Rarement, seldom t
alms ; Rinas-ir, 2. to succeed ;
LaiBR-er, 1. to leave, let; Biz, m. rice.
MendJant, m. beggar;
1. Seriez-vons bien aise de faire connaissance aVee ce monsieur?
2. Pen serais bien aise. 3. Ce cheyal fait-il nne lieue en nn quart
d'henre? 4. D a fait ce matin une lieue en douze minutes. 6. Lear
avez-vous fait des questions ? 6. Je leur en ai fait.* 7. Quelles
questions leur avez-vous faites? 8. Je leur ai demand^ s'ils avaicnt
fiutdes cmplettesi 9. Vos dl^ves font-ils des progrds dans leurs
I ! 10. lis Q*en font pas beaueoup, ils viennent rarement iL Pfoole*
•8eaI..4a.ll,«Ddiiaft^(7.)
Digitized
by Google
180 iBtBOir txtw.
II. Si Tons ^dez ehez tom, fmecTOUs lembUmt de d^mirt 15L J«
ae fenia oertainemeot pas semblant de dormir. 13. Poarquoi iM
faites-vous pas entrer ce mendiant ? 14. Ma m^re vient de lai tain
raiim6ne. 16. Le n^g^ociant falt-il usage de son credit? 16. II en fiul
usage. 17. De quels aliments ee malade fait-il usage? 18. 0 fSnt
usage de riz et de bouillon. 19. Faites-voiis votre pofsible pour
r^ussir? 20. Je &is tout mon possible. 21. Avez-Tous fait entrer
ees enfants, ou les avez-vous £ut sortir ? 22. Je les ai laisa^s oH lis
6taient 23. Vous avons-nous fait attendrel 24. Vona nous avex
fidt attendre plusieurs heures. 26. Si vous faisiez aUendre ees
dames, elles se f^cheraient
EZBBCISK 126.
1. Does that child pretend to read? 2. He pretends to read. 8.
Does not that gentleman pretend to sleep? 4. He does not pretend
to sleep, he sleeps really (riellement), 6. Will you take a walk this
morning ? 6. I would do so with pleasure, if I had time. 7. Have
you become acquainted with the physician ? 8. I have not yet be-
come acquainted with him. 9. How many questions have you asked
(d) the child j 10. 1 asked him many questions. 11. Have you asked
him if he had studied his lesson? 12. 1 did not ask him. 13. Will.
not that little girl do her best to learn her lesson ? 14. Sh'e will do
her best to learn it. 15. Of what food do you make use when you
are sick? I16. We make use of bread and rice. 17. Have' you for«
gotten to bid ikrewell to your mother? 18. I had not forgotten it;
I intended to go to her house this afternoon. 19. With whom have
you become acquainted? 20. With the bookseller. 21. Do you not
keep those ladies waiting ? 22. 1 do not keep them waiting, they are
not ready (pretes), 23. Do I make you wait? 24. You do not make
me wait 26. Have you left your children in your room ? 26. ( have
not done so (le). 27. Have you sent them out ? 28. 1 have not sent
them out, I have let them remain where they were. 29. Have you
made purchases this morning? 30. I have made none, I have no
money. 31. Has the servant made a fire in my room ? 32. He has
made one. 33. Will you do your best to come to-morrow ? 34. I
4riU do my best to come early. ZS^ We trsvelled yesterday forty
\ In sixteen hours.
Digitized
by Google
I'sttov zxr.
181
LESSON LXV.
LEgON LXV.
1. Faire is also used in the tense of playing tiie part q^, wprHmi^
mgtoU:^
D fUt le giraad seignenr. & plays the great lord,
± Faire also means to matter^ to ooncem^to hdp>^
Cela ne fliit rien. T%at is no matter,
Cela ne Tons fldt rien. THatisnotJdngtofou, does not eotueru
you.
Qa'eitp«o-qTie cela nous ikit 1 mat is that to us?
Je ne puis qn'y &ire. I cannot kdp it.
S. Se fairo mal conjugated reflectively, means to hurt on^s se^.
8e fiure is osed refieetiyely in the sense of the English verbs, to &»-
come^ to turn. It is, also, nsed with the signification of the words
estfse, have, get, ^c Se fiure takes etre as its auziliaiy. [} 46.
L46.]:—
Ihaioe become a pkysidan.
I have had a pair of boots made fee
me,
I have had my board shaved.
We have had our hair cut.
Je me suis fiiit m^decin.
Je me suis fait fliire nne paire
debottes.
Je me suis ikit raser.
Nous noQs Bommes fliit oonper les
chevenx.
Je me sois fait mal an dolgt
/ have hurt my finger,
4. Besides the instances mentioned, [L. 83. R. 6.], faire is used
onipersonally in many idiomatic expressions :—
nfaitjonr, Ufaitnnit.
n ikit de la booe, U fait de la
ponssiftre.
n ikit eteir de lane, il fkit obscor. // is moonlight, it is dark.
n Ikit boQ Id, il fait Cher id. n is eomfortabU hen,it is dear here.
n is dayUghtj it is night.
jB is muddy , it is dusty.
R£8UMfi or EXAMPLSB.
Oe Jenne homme ikit le savant
Cela ne me fkit rlen.
Que ponvoDS-nons y fkire 1
Hon flr^re s'est fait orf^vre.
Ponrqnoi vous ikites-vous raserl
^e me feral couper les chevenx.
Je me sais fait bfttir une maison.
Nous nous sommei fait mal IL la
tdte.
n commenoe k se fkire tard.
Fsit-U Cher vivrei Paris 1
U hH beanoom de
T%at youmg mat^plays the »mimet
man.
7%at is nothing to me.
What can we do to U?
My brother has turned goldsmitk.
Why do you get shaved?
I vriU have my hair cut.
I have had a house built fot Mt,
We have hurt our heads,
R is beginning to grow laie.
UU dear lioSigta Pmi$7
Digitized
by Google
189 LSVBOH LST.
EzsRCisx 127.
Absolnmentk absouUily ; fitadiant, m. student ; Peintre, m. patnterf
Artisan, m. mechanic ; Fou, foUe, /<wj, smp2e- Penonne, m. nabodfi
fiUoutier, m. jewetteri ton ; Tannenr, m. tanner;
Bon march6, cheap; Impertinent, e, imper- Vigneron, m. vine-dtm
Ciiag:rin6, e, vexe^; tinenti ser.
Penr6e8, f. p. provisions ; Oayrier, m. toorknum ; Vitrier, m, glazier.
1. Pourquoi cet ouvrier fait-il le malade? 2. II fait le malads
parcequMl n*a pas envie de travailler. 3. Cet 6tudiaDt ne fiut-i]
paa le savant? 4. li ne fait pas ie savant, il fait le foa. 5. Sied-il
9i ce jeune homme de faire le maltre ici ? 6. {1 ne sied k personne
de faire Timpertinent. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose? [R. 3.] 8.
Cela ne fait absolument rien. 9. Cela peuUil faire quelque chose 4
CCS vignerons? 10. Cela ne leur fait rien du tout 11. N*&tes-voiiB
pas bien chagrines de cela? 12. Nous en sommes bien ^h6s, mais
nous ne pouvons qu'y faire. IS. Votre associe ne s'est-il pas £ut
bijoutier? 14. Non, Monsieur, il s'est fait peintre. 15. Cet artisan
ne s'est-il pas fait vitrier % 16. II s'est fait tanneur, et son fr^re s'est
fait soldat 17. La modiste ne s'esUelle pas fait couper les cheveoz f
18. Elle se les est fait couper. 19. Ne vous levez-vous pas aussitdt
qu'ii fiutjour? 20. Qui, Monsieur, je me Uve de tr^ bonne heure.
21. Ne fait-il pas clair de lune ? 22. II fait tr^s clair, mais il ne
fait pas clair de lune. 23. Fait-il bon vivre en Am6rique ? 24. D
fait tr^s bon vivre en Am^rique, les denr^es y liOnt ^ bon march6.
ExKRCias 128.
1. Does not that gentleman play the learned man! 2. He plays
the lord and fool at the same time (d la fois), 3. Does not that boy
pretend to be sick 1 4. He pretends to be sick, he does not wish to
study his lessons. 6. When you have no wish to work do you pre*
tend to be sick ? 6. I never pretend to be sick. 7. Is it muddy to*
day! 8. It is not muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight this
evening? 10. It will not be moonlight, it will be very dark. 1 1. la
it comfortable here ? 12. It is very comfortable. 13. Is it too warm
or too cold? 14. It is neither too warm nor too cold here. 1ft.
Will you have your hair cut ? 1 6. 1 had my hair cut yesterday mom*
ing. 17. Will you not go home, it is beginning to grow late ? 18.
Is it not very dark out ? (dehors,) 19. It is not dark, it is moon,
light 20. Has not the glazier turned goldsmith? 21. He has not
turned goldsmith, he has turned soldier. 22. Does that concern
^our brother? 28. That does not concern hun. 24. Are you not
- iony for thatt 2ft. I am sorry for it, but I cannot help it 26. Why
Digitized
by Google
io Ton get iluiTedt d7. fieeanae I eannot dwra mjtM, 98. liava
70a not hurt those children! 29.. I have not hurt them. 80. Have
yon hurt year arm! 31. No, Sir, but I have hurt my head. 33.
Haa not yoor aiater hurt her hand ! 83. She has hurt her hand, and
my mother has hurt her elbow. 84. Have you not hurt your head!
85 I have not hut my head, but I have hurt my hand.
LESSON LXVL IJE5ON LXVL
1. Avoir ma], means to have a pain or ache^ a tore. When used
in relation to one of the limhe, it means generally, to have a sore^ a
hruisey a eutj &c. The name of the part of the body is preceded by
the preposition d and the article [Seeh, 63, R. 5. { 77, (9.)] i —
N'avez-vous pas mal au doigt 1 Have you not a yrrefi-nger 7
^ n'ai pas mal a la tAte. JIfy Mead does no^ mckt.
3. Avoir une douleur, or des doulenrs, corresponds to the Engliih
to fttfre a fain or pains :— •
TtX une dott!3ur au bras. / have a pain vn my arm.
3. The construction mentioned in R. I,i8 used aAcr avoir, taken in
the sense of tenir, to hoU and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud [L.
63, R. 6.] :—
YoQS arez les armes k la main. You have your anns in your hands.
J*ai chaud aux mains et auz pieds. My hands and feet are warm,
4. The article 2e, &c., is used before words indicating moral and
physical properties, in cases where the English use a or on, or omit
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the nonn, tm, vne^
or dcj deSt are at times used : —
Cette dame a Tesprit juste. T%at lady has a correct mind* ^
Votre sceur a les yeuz noirs. Your sister has black eyes,
6. A moral or physical property, which, in the individual is single,
is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num
ber of individuals ; —
Cos dames ont Tesprit Juste. Those ladit *ave correct minds,
Ces garfons se sont flut mal ^ la tdte. Those boys u ^e hM-t thatt heads,
RteuiiA or Examples.
ITavea-vous pas mal au pied 1
Cette demoisene a le mal de tftte.
If'aivoavonspaa mal anx dental
Mod Mrs a le mal de denta.
If on ooostn a mal au 06U.
Have you not a sore fool?
Thai young ladf has the i
Do not your teetk ache?
M^ brother has tho toothache.
B^ consist hu a pain in his mdo.
Digitized
by Google
184
LBsaexr i.zrz.
n a des dovleon da poitrtna.
Oa'arez-youa k la main 1
Je n'ai lien k U maiiL
J'ai chaud anx mabui et fMi aux
pieda.
Vos MB1IT8 out le co&t d61icat
Ces meisieiin ontle nez aquilin.
Be haspaimiin kit ekut,
' What have you in your immd f
What is the nutUer with wm
hand?
I ' / have nothinft in my hand,
< Nothing is tks matter with wtf
My hands are warm and «y fm
cold.
Your sisters have a ddicaU taste.
Those gentlemen have Roman nam.
EZERCISK 120.
Mai de gorge, m. sore Pied, m. foots
throat: Presqne, almost;
Mai d'oreflle, m. ear- Teint, m,eomiplexionf
aches Vuage, m^face;
Nitee, f. nieoes Ywa^from ail, eyes,
Noir, e,Uaeks
Bleu, e, bines
Bouche, f. mouths
Dent, f.<o0a;
Doi^VLfingers
Gorge, f throat ;
M^moire, f. momorys
1. Ce jeune homme a-t-il mal k la gorge? 2. Oui, Mooaieor, U
J a deux joara qu'il a le mal de gorge. 3. Avez-Yous soavent mal
k la t^te ? 4. Pal le mal de t^te presque toua lea jours. 5. N'avez-
voua pas mal au bras 1 6. Tai mal au bras et k la main. . 7. Voire
amnr a-t-elle le mal d'oreille. 8. Oui, Madame, elle a le mal d*oreille
et le mal de dents. 9. N'avez-vous paa froid k la t^te. 10. Non,
Monsieur, mais j'ai froid aux doigts. 11. N'avez-vous point froid
au visage. 12. Non, Monsieur, je n'y ai point froid. 13. Ce mon-
sieur a-t-il le nez aquilin? 14. II a le nez aquilin et la bonche
grande. 16. Cette demoiselle a-t-elle de belles dents? 16. Elle a
de belles dents et de beaux yeux. 17. Ce petit gargon a-t-il lea
pieda petits ? 18. II a les pieds petits et les mains grandes. • 19. Vo-
tre ni^oe n'»-t-elle pas les yeux bleus? 20. Non, Monsieur, elle a
les yeux noirs. 21. Vos ^oliers se sont-ils fait mal au visage ? 22.
lis se sont fiiit mal k la poitrine. 28. Vos filles ont^lles une bonne
m6moire ? 24. Elles ont la m^moire excellente. 26. Cea Italiennes
n'ont paa le teint frais.
EZXRGIBB 130.
1« Wliat 18 the matter with your hand ? 2. I have had a aore hand
theae ten days. 8. Has your brother sore fingers? 4. He has soro
fingers and a aore hand. 6. What haa yonr brother in his hand ?
«. He has a pen in his hand. 7. Haa your little boy a aore tlu^Mit ?
8. He haa a aore throat. 9. Haa not your elcleat slater the tooths
aafae? 10. She haa not the toothache^ but ahe haa a aora finger.
11. Why does not the soldier walk ? 12. He cannot walk, ha haa a
Digitized
by Google
attov KZTtt tM
■on foot 18. HftTO yoQ not sore foot! 14. My foot are not oore.
16. If your fingeiB were tore would yoa write? 16. If I had aoro
fingers I should not w;^. 17. If yonr brother had the headache
would he study hia leaaon f 18. He eouLl not atudy his lesson if
he had the headache. 19. Haa not that gentleman paina in hia ohest I
20. He haa paina in hia chest and in his side. 31. Haa your little
girl bbck eyes or blue eyea? 82. She has black eyea and a fresh
complexion. 28. Haa not your daughter the tooth-ache! 24. She
has the tooth-ache and the ear-ache. 26. Are not your hands and
feet cold? 26. My handa are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Haye
not those ladiea aquiline noses? 28. They hare aquiline noses and
a £ur complexion (le ieirU beau), 29. Haa your sister large hands f
80. No, Sir, my sister haa small handa. 81. Haye not those little
girls hurt their heada t 32. They have not hurt their heads, they
haye hurt their faces. 83. Tliat little boy haa black hair (ckeveux).
LESSON LXVn. LEgON LXVIL
1. Ayoir bean— Vons ayes bean, corresponds in signification to the
English expression, ii u inwrin farfouta It must be followed by
theinfinitiye>—
Tons ayes beau dire, fl ne yiendra Misinvainf0rjfmtaspuU[,kiwitt
2. fipouser, marier, to tnarry, have, in French, a diiforent mean-
ing. JMorter, conjugated actiyely, can only haye aa ita nominatiye
the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the
parties in marriage; ipouier takes, aa ita nominative, the contracting
parties only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se
marier, to get tnarried, and marier, conjugated passively, take the
same nominative as ipouser,
M. L. a mari6 sa fllle aveo M. Q. Mr. L. lUu married ku dtmghJter te
Mr. G.
M.G.a^ua61afi]le deM.L. Mr.a.hasmafrUdMr. L.'sdamgk^
ter.
M. G. et MU«' L. soDt mari^ Mr. a. and MUsZ^mre married,
Man frftre va ae marier. Afy indker ie going to be marri^
8. Un de mea amia, ia equivalent to the English, a friend cf
wwne!—-^
Tobe ami a 4poiia6 vne de mea Towrfirimd hoe married ^fiimdef
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
tM
LVtsair &XTIL
BAsumA ov Examples.
Of ont Ixan dire et bean faire, fls
tie rempAcheroiit pas de ae mi-
rier.
Vous avez beau lui faire des re-
montranoes.
Ii'6Ydqae de B. a marU ma acenr. '
lie capitaine G. a 6poas6 ma coa-
sine.
Qaand il se mariera, U nous inTitera
a la n6ce.
Totre coosine est marine avec mon
ooQsin.
Voire caQsine a ipofisi nn de mes
cousins.
Le colonel a ^pousA une de mes
Bosurs.
Whalever they may say or d^^ Aey
will not yrevofU iU martfmg,
II is in vain for you to rejnonstr^Ut
with him.
The bishop of B. has married «f
sister.
Captain O. Has married my cousm.
When he marries^ he will iiwite «#
to the wedding,
Yow cousin is married to myc&usistk
Tour sousin has married aoousin of
miru.
The colonel has married a sister of
EzsBCiss 131.
Aiii6, e, ddery eldest; Devoir, 8. ir. to owe^ to Parent, o, relation f
ArcboTdque, m. archr be about; "PnnceaaOj f. princess ;
bishop; fipouz, pi. couples man Prochain, e, next;
Cadet, te, younger; and wife; Savoir, 8. ir. to know;
Demoiselle, f. young Infanterie, f. infantry; R6giment, m.regimenlf
lady; fivdque, m. bishop; VioiUard, oidr—
1. Votre nidee Be va-t-eUe pas se mariert 2. EUe se mariera
Tann^e prochaine. 3. Qui ^pousenut^lle 1 4. EUe 6pouaera le fils
aia6 du g6ii6nd M. 5. Savez-vous qui a marid ces deux 6poax1
6. L*archev£que de Paris les a mari^s. 7. N*iut-il pas aussi marie
Mile. L. ? 8. II I'a mariee avec M. G. 9. Qui votre demoiselle a-t-
elle 6pous^ ? 10. EUe a ^pousS M. L. capitaine au 2d*m« regiment
d'infaQterie. 11. Ce vieillard n*a-t-il pas tort de se marier? 12. II
n'a pas tort de se marier, mais il a tort d'^pouser cette demoiselle.
13. Quand ces princesses vont-ellea se marier? 14. Ellcs se ma-
rieront le mois prochain. 15. Qui les mariera? 16. L'^v^que
d'Arras les mariera. 17. Qui doivent-elles 6pouser? 18. L'aince
doit 4pouser M. W. et la cadette M. G. 19. Le capitaine G. nVt-U
pas 6pous6 une de vos parentes? 20. Oai, Monsieur, il a 6pous6
uoe de mes cousines? 21. Qui est cctto demoiselle! 22. Cost
une de mes soeurs. 23. N'avez-vous pas un de meslivres? 24. TtX
un de vos llvres et une de vos plumes. 25. Je viens do parler k uoe
de vos sodura.
ExsRCisx 132.
1. Is your brother goiog to marry Miss Lf 2. Yes, Sir, it is in
viin for us to speak to hin^be wiU marry her. 8. WUl not yow
Digitized
by Google
Mmt BMtfi^ /onr siater to Mr. G.f 4. No, Sir, he will mtawy h&r
to Mr. L. 6. Is Captain H. married? 6. No, Sir, he ia not yet mar-
ried, but he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he intend to
marry 1 8. He intenda to marry a eouain of mine, who ia at my
hr&ther'a. 9 Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother intenda
to marry theoL 11. Ia your youngest aiater married? 12. No, Sir,
ahe ia not married. 13. Ia she going to be married] 14. She will
marry when ahe ia [L. 61. 6.] old enough (assez agie), 16. Whom
did Colonel J. marry ? 16. He married a aiater of mine. 17. How
long have they been married [L. 67. 2.} ? 18. They have been mar*
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married?
SO. She ia wrong to marry, ahe ia too young. 21. Who married
General S. and Miss N.? 22. The bishop of Arras married theoL
23. Did not the arehbishop of York marry tliat couple ? 24. The
archbishop of Paria married them. 26. Will not your aunt marry ?
26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home? 28. No,
Sir, ahe ia with (che%) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your
house? 30. No, Sir, he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he
married? 32. He ia not married. 33. Is Captain H. married? 34
He was married laat week. 36. He married Miss H.
LESSON LXVUL LEgON LXVm.
DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC.
1. The verb avoir ia used in expressing the site of an object The
preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there ia no
verb in the sentence, the preposition must be placed before the Bum
ber, and again before the noun of dimension :^-
Cette muraille a dix pieds de That vnUk is Unfed high.
hautenr.
Ce puita a cent pieds de profondeur. That v)dl is one hundred feet deep
Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A taltle four feet Umg.
guear.
2. In sentences, where sizes are compared, and the verb 6tro ia
used, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the
ixeeis : —
Vous 4tes phxa grand que moi de You are talkr than I iff two inches,
deuxpoucea.
3. When the price of an artide ia mentioiied, the article le is uwi
helbra the nonn expreasiiig the m^aanre, w^;ht| &o. Whaa Um
Digitized
by Google
IM
LSlflOV hXYtlL
iCBiuMratioii, or renii &«. for a definite apeee of ttme ie Bentfone^
the preposition par (per) is need ;—
Le beurre te Tend nn iVmiic la livre. BuUeriswidafraincapaMmL
UsafiHieiix francs par jour. Mt earns six froMcs per dof.
4. The same preposition is used, wlien we speak of the number cf
times any ooeurrenee takes j^aoe in a given space of time >—
Je Tais ^ la posts deux fois par IgotoUepott^q/Uekrieeadof,
Jour.
BteUMft OF EXAMPLU.
La esneUe se vend deux francs la
livre.
Oetie soie vaut six francs le mitre.
Ce docher a dnq cents pieds de
hauteur.
Oat €tang a huit pieds de profon-
deur.
Une chambre de quinze pieds de
loD£:neur, sur dix-liuit da largeur,
et huit de hauteur.
De quelle taille est Totre frere 1
8a taille est de dnq pieds huit
pouces.
Notre ami est-fl grand on petit 1
n est de taille moyenne.
Votre maison est plus haute que la
mienne, de cinq pieds.
Je vais k T^cole deux (bis par jour.
II nous paie huit francs par semaine.
dimamenis sold tmofrtmaapmmL
That silk is vorik six francs a Wietre,
That steeple is Jive hundred feet high.
That pond is eight feet deep,
A room ffleen feet long by eighteen
feet broad and eight fiet high.
Hew taUis your brother 7
Bis height isfivefeei eight inches.
is our friend taU or short?
His height is middling.
Your house is higher than mine h§
Jive feet,
Iro to school twice a day,
^pays us eight frattcs a week.
EzERcms 188.
Profondeur, t, depths
Pouco, m. inch;
Semaine, f, weeks
Taille f height, sixes
Veige, t perch, y^d, rod.
Bon march6, cheap / Grandeur, f nze ;
Cassonade, f brown jv- Hauteur, f. heights
gar s Largeur. t breadth ;
ftcosaais, e, Scotch; Longueur, f. lengths
fipaiaseur, f thieknesss Loyer, m. rent ;
fitoffe, f. stuffs
1. Votre maison est-elle grande! 3. Elle a dnquante pieds de
long et vingt-einq de large. 3. Combien de longueur votre jardin
a^Un 4. U a vingt-einq verges de longueur et douze de largeur.
A. De quelle grandeur est celivre! 6. n a dix-huit pouces de longueur,
treize de largeur et trois d^^paisseur. 7. Votre maison est-elle plus
longue que celle-d? 8. Elle est plus longue de deux pieds.
9. Quelle profondeur a ce puits ? 10. De quelle hauteur est ee
elocherf 11. 11 a trois cent einquante-trois pieds de hauteur. 12. De
quelle taille est eet oiBcier! 13. II est de haate taille. 14. De
eomlnen eet ftcossaia est-il plus grand que son frire? 16. II estj^ua
gnod de tonte la tAte. 16. liTAtes-vons pa^ de beanooup plus grand
que molt 17. Je enis plus grand que vona ds trois poneea
Digitized
by Google
KBtBOV LXIZ. IM
I& CooMen eeftle Hoft m Tond^Ue la TWgef 19. Elto m t«id
trois francs 13 mdtra. dO. La caaaonade ne le rend-elle pas ebetf
SI. Eile 86 Tend k bon march^. SS. fombien de lettiea toiTes-roiia
pv Mmainet 28. Je n'en teii que aix par ■emaine. S4. Combien
pafes-TOBs par aemaine poor Totra loyerf 86. Je na paia que diz
fbnea par aemauid.
BoEHOias 184.
1. How large is your fkthei^s garden! 3. It ia twenty-Are roda
feogand ten broad. 8. Is your coushi'a honae large 7 4. It ia fifty*
liz feet long and forty broad. 6. Ia your bonae larger than mine?
d. It ia larger than youra by ten ieet 7. Do you know how deep
that well iaf 8. It ia twenty^five feet deep and six feet broacL
9. How ia that eloth aold a metre ? 10. It ia aold forty-five fianca a #
metre. 1 1. How much do yon receive a week for yoor work ? 12. I
receive fifty fmnca a week for my work. 18. How much doea yoor
friend pay a month for hia board (pension, t) 1 14. He paya aeventy
franca a month. 16. Are yon taller than your consin? 16. I am
taller than he by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than
your aon ? 18. He ia taller than my aon, by three inchea. 19. How
large ia thia room! 20. It ia aixty feet long by forty. 21. What
lize ia your brother? 22. He ia tall, he ia taller than I. 23. How
many booka do yon read a week? 24. I read ten volnmea a weeL
26. How ia butter aold a pound ? 26. Butter ia aold two franca a
pound. 37. Do you know how much your aon eama a day?
28. He eoma aa much aa youra, he earns ten franca a day. 29. How
Bmeh ia that ailk worth a metre ? 30. It ia worth aix franca a metre.
31. Oar friend^a atatnre is middling. 82. Do you go to church twiee
a day ? 88. I go to church once a day. 84 Doea your aon go to
the post-ofliee every day ? 86. He goea thither aix timea a day.
LESSON LXnC LBgON LXIZ.
1. Mettre (4. hr.) forma, in French, many idiomatic expreaaieiia.
Metfre k m6me de, to enabUe ; mettre pied k terre, to alight, to land;
■lettre le pied, to Met oiyit fool; mettre \ la porta, to (tent ottf </
iwn; mettre au fiut de, to ac^tiatitf loitii; mettre \ Tabri, to Mbbet^
iNttre ^ I'ombte, to jnK m tiU aknfe; mettre nn habit i reBdroit, i
Wen» to ^ on a oMtf r(gM mU oitf , wrmg $ii$ omi 4«. ^-
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IM iivatoir ftziz.
OAltre la tMU.
n a mis cet iiisolent a la porte. He turned thai imoUnt person out
« of dmrt.
3. Mettre conju^ted reflectively, i e. «• mettre, means to plaoi
mt/?$ tetf^ to dress on^s ulf; se mettre H table, to tit down to table i
se mettre en colore, to become angry^ to jnU on^s self into a passion »
n 86 met k Tombre, an Bolell. Be places himself in tke shade, in the
swn,
S. Sa oMtlNv followed by an infinitive, means to etmmenoet to he-
Ha se mirent a plenrer. TIU^ eemmtneed foeqring.
A Panglaiae, k la fnui^aise, are used elliptieally for k la mode
llnm^se, k la mode anglaise, tfier the Freneh, after the Engiiek
lUsUlfi or EZAMPLSB.
Ce cavalier a mis pled k Isrre.
Vons n'osez mettre le pied chez loi.
Mettez ces enAmts & Tabri de la
plnie.
Vous avez mis votre mantean k
I'envers.
Oe monsiemr se met toqJoarB k V$tk-
glaise.
Hier nous nous mimes k table a diz
heures.
Pourquoi vous mettez-Toiis a Tom-
brel
Ces cnfants se mirent a rire.
Ponrquol ne vous mettez-vous pas
k I'ouvrage 1
Je vab me mettre en pension.
Nous allons nous mettre en voysge.
T%U horseman is came damn from
his horse.
Yon dare not set your foot inside his
house.
Shelter those children from the r
Yon have put your doak inside out.
That rentleman always dresses after
the SrigUsh fashion.
Yesterday we sat down to taUe at ten
o'dock.
Why do yon go into the shade?
T^hose children commenced laughing.
Why do yon not set yourself to work f
IwiU commence boarding.
We are going to commence our jmt-
ney.
EXBRCISB 185.
A ritalirane, o^ the Mf^nd-n, 4. to forbid i fitndi-er, I. to study i
Italian fashion ; Effbts, m. p. things g Mlse, f. mettre, dressed ^
A merveiUe, exceedingly £ntr-er, 1. to come in ; Pluie, f. rain ;
wells fitonrdi, e, giddy per- Rire, 4. ir. to laugh g
Gouvert, See L, 82, 1.; song Tablier, apron.
1. Avez-vons d^endn 2l eet homme de mettre le pied chez vona I
8. Je le lul ai defenda. 3. Avez-vous mis ces effets ii Tabri de la
plnlof 4. Je lea ai mia k I'abri de la pluie et dn vent. 5. Avez-voM
miavotrefr^aQ&itdftooUeaffidraf 6. Jonel'en aipaa mis an
Digitized
by Google
IBSBOir LXIZ Uti
ftit 7. Ne rsrez-TOUB pas mis ^ m6me d'^toaierl 8. Je Fsi mis
i m^me de s^nstraire, 8*il desire le faire. 9. V^/iiles-vons mettre
eela de c6te? 10. Je vais le mettre aa soleil. 11. Voire ami nVt-il
ptsTOttIa entrer? 12. II n*a point voulu mettre pied a terre. 13.
Votre teioturier nVt41 pas mis son tablier k renders 1 14^ Noi^,
Monsieur, il Ta mis k Tendroit 16. N*avez-voaa pas mis oet ^toordl
ft la porte? 16. Nous loi avons ferm6 la porte an nez (in kis fau),
17. A quelle heure toss mettez-yons k table? 18. Anssitdt que le
eouven sera mis [L. 61, (6.)]. 19. Get homme se met-il bien? 30*
D se mel toujonrs k Fanglaise on k Titalienne. 21. Ces enfauts ne
•e mircnt-ils pas k pleurer ? 22. An lieu de se mettre k pleurer^ ils
se mirent ^ lire. 23. Pourquoi ne vons mettez-vons pas k 6crire ?
24. II est temps de se mettre ^ table. 25. Ces Siciliennes sont-elles
bien mises? 36. EUes smit mkes k merveille.
ExKRCiss 136*
1. Did the gentleman aligbt this morning! 2. No, Sir, he would
not alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person
out of doors t 4. No, Sir, but I forbade him to set his foot in my
house. 6. Did you shelter those little children from the lUn? 6b I
sheltered them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled
your son to study medicine (la m6decine)1 8. I enabled him to
study medicine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Haye you put on your
eoat inside out? 10. I hare not put it on ioside out, but ri^t side
out 11. Did you put yourself in a passion! 12. No, Sir, I did
not become angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock
yesterday ? 14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 16. Do yon
mtend to csommence boarding? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L.
{eke% M, Xk) 17. When do you commence your journey ! 18. We
commence our journey to-morrow monung. 19. Did your son com-
mence langhing? 20. No, Sir. he commenced weeping. 21. Why
do you not commence working ? 22. Because I am going to com*
mence reading. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion
24. She dresses after the Italian fashion. 26. Are those ladies wol.
dressed? 26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not
place yourself in the shade ? 28. I will place myseU in the sun, I
am very cold. 29. Is your coat inside out? 30. No, Sir, it is right
side out. 31. Is this the right side of this cloth (Cendroit) ? 32. It
b the wrong side (renters). 33. Are you not dressed after the Eng-
lish fashion? 34. I am dressed after the Italian fashion. 36. Yoi
■re well dressed.
Digitized
by Google
LB880N LZZ. LBgON LXX.
TBB nCPE&ATlVS.
1. CoNJueATXov or nn LmBAnvx of thx Rboulab Vi
Chant -• flu -is re^ -oia rend
nmg Jtnisk newH rmitr
Qa*ll pari -e cb6r -laM ap^r^ -oive vend -«
uonn -ons fourn -isaone perc -eTons lena -ons
Cborch •«£ pun -iaaes oonc -erei entend-ez
Qn'flBport -ent Bsis -usent d -oivent perd -enl
UttUmemrr9 l$ttktu9tU$ McAmimm UttUml^M
3. The second penon ungolar, and the first and second persons
piaral of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular,
and the first and second persons plural, of the present of the Indica-
tive. The pronouns are dropped.
Je parle, park ; Je tn%Jinis. I speak, ^eak ; / finish, finish,
3. Exceptions — ^Avoir, to have, makes in those persons of the im-
perative, ate, ayons, ayex; 6tre, to be, sots, iotfonsj sayez; eavoir, to
knowj ioehe, aachons, sachez ; and aller, vo, and vos before y not fol-
lowed by an infinitive.
4. Vouloir haa only the second person plural, veuillez, have ike
goodness to. . . .
5. A third person singular and plural is given in the imperative by
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong
properly to the subjunctive, as they express rather a strong wish than
a command. The English expressions, let him speak, that he may
speak, are rendered in French by qu'il parle.
6. A droite, 2l gauche, corrrespond in signification to the Engliah
tc the right, toihel^
AUez a drdte, k gauche. Ch tc the righi, totheUfi.
7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with the Impend
tive, see L. 27. R. 1, 4 ; L. 2a, R. 1, 9, 3, 4.
RteUMtf of EZAMPLSS.
Let US takeOe first siree^iotherigkL
Frenons ia prvmito rue it droite.
Ke cherches plus it le tromper.
Sachons nous contenter du nices-
saire.
Faftes bien attentioc k oe <|ue vous
iites.
Dites toiOours la v6rit6.
Ailoos! Messieurs, d6pAchez-vou8.
Tenes, Monsieur vuiliL votre argent.
VeoUIea acoeptai oe present.
Sede no longer to deceive him.
Let us know how to content onrsdioet
with neoessaries.
Pay great attention to what you say.
Always tOL ike truth.
Come t gentlemen, make haste.
Here, Sir, here is your money.
Be so kintt as to aeeept tUem/weeKt*
Digitized
by Google
tMB$o}r xxt, HM
Bznom 187.
Ckf,f.keyt Pronett-re, 4. Ir. <« pi0- ]l«DTOj-er, 1 l» amd
CimjoB, m. jwaeC; nutt bmckf
Iwtitatrke, f. te«Aer / Bappoit^er, 1. to bring Sftos tkoto) wiikmUfmli
Ob6-ir 2. to ok^; tad:; 8e Berr-ir, 2. reC to icj« /
Partie, f. foH; Remett-re, 4. Ir. to ^Tien, m. M«nf;
PMoeptour, m. MMir«^ Uoert Verres, 8. ir. /m» roir,
tor; to «e.
1. Envoyez chereiMr le m6deeiii, votre petit gur^on est malade.
S. Nona TaToua d^ji envoys efaereher. 3. Vona nVex pea beaoia
de Totre crayon, pr6tez4e-moi [L 27. R. 4 ; L. 28. R. 4]. 4. Je no
aanraia rona le prater, je m*en aera. 6. Donnez-le-moi on me lo
prdtez [{ 100, (&)]. 6. Je Tai promia k rotre inatStntrioe. 7. K
▼one ne le Ini avez paa dit, di tea-le-lui auaaitdt qne poaaible. 8. Ne le
Ini ditea paa eneare. 9. Parlez-lni-en [} 39, 17.] la proohaine foia
qne vona le venez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, votre pdfe ne tar-
dera paa i ▼enir. 11. Ob^iaaez k votre pr^ptenr. 13. Jo Im
ob^ia tonjOnra^—Donnes-lni-ennne bonne partie. 13. Je Ini en ai
dej^L donn6 plna dea denx tiera. 14. Avez vona port6 cette clef an
aermriert 16. Pal onbli^ de U Ini remettre. 16. Portez-la^lni aana
lante cette apr^a-midl 17. Veuillez me dire' oil demenre M. G
18. Prenez la premiere me k gancbe, il demenre dana la denzi^me
maiaon & droite. 19. Allona, Meademoiselles, d6p4chona-noua. 20.
]fenez-lea-y le plna t6t poaaible. 21 < Ne me lea rapportez paa. 22.
Renvoyez-lea-moi domain. 23. Portona-lea-y. 24. Ne lea y portona
pea. 26. I¥dtez-lea.]ni, maia ne lea Ini donnez paa.
EzBROiss 188.
1. Give a book to the yonng man. 2. I have already given him
one, and he doea not read it 3. Lend it to him, if yon will not give
it to bun. 4. I will not lend it to him. 6. Make haate, yonng U-
dies. It ^B ten o'clock. 6. Have the goodneaa to give me a pen. 7.
I have givep one to yonr brother. 8. Obey your father, and apeak
ko yonr aiater. 9. Will you not aend for the letter! 10. 1 will aend
ibtr it 11. Send for it aa aoon aa you can. 12. Do not do ao (to),
but write to my couain. 13. Pome, children (tnes enfiBmis\ learn
jonr leiaon. 14. Give him aome [} 89, 17], or lend him aome [( 100.
(a)]. 16. Do not make haate, we have (k) time. 18. Have pa.
tienee, my child, the merchant will aoon come. 17. Send it to him,
if you cannot g*ve it to him. 18. Write to him thia afternoon witb>
Mt fiuL 19. I would write to him if I had time. 20. Let na take
lU IhnI atreol to the loft 21. Take the aeeond atreot to the riglO.
^ Digitized by VjOOQ IC
194
LStaovi^sxi.
S3. Pay attention to what yonr brother says. 23. Let as tell the
truth. 24. Let us read that book lo^ay. 26. Pay Jour debts as
soon as possible. 26. I^t us obt7 our instructor. 27. Carry the
key to him. 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent yoa.
29. Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have
patience, we Bbail soon have money. 81. Let us speak to them, they
are at my father's. 82. Tell them that I intend to write to them to*
morrow morning. 33. Go to church this^aftemoon. 34. Bring me
buck my letters. 86. Do not canry them there, but bring tbeo to
mn aa soon as possible.
LESSON LXXL
LE9ON LXXL
1. A verb following another verb in the imperative, is pat in toe
inlinitivC) (according to general Rule L. 21. 2.) The conjunction
which olien comes between the two verbs in English, is not used in
French:—
AUez psrler an musicien. Oo and speak to ike wundank,
Alles &ire votre ouvrage. Go and do your %oork,
Courez voir ces messieurs. Run and see those genllemen.
2. Prendre garde, to take care, to take heed; when followed by aii«
other verb in the infinitive, means to take care not to:—^
Prcnez garde de tomber. Take care not to fall. -
3. Prendre le deuil, means to go irUo mourning ; prendre la peine, to
take the trouble ; prendre les devants, to go on before ; pi^endre an
parti, to take a determination^ prendre du cafe, du the, &c., to Uiht
cojfee, tea, Alc
Rj£sum£ of Examples.
Envoyez cbercber le tapissicr.
Allcs chercber votre parapluie.
Courez voir votre i)irc.
PrenoDS garde de uous blesser.
Prcnez garde de dichircr vos habits.
K'avez-vous pas oris le dcnil ?
Prenez la peine ae vous asseoir.
Prenez du th6 ou da cai^.
Quel parti avez-vous pris 1
Send for the upholsterer.
Go andfctdi your umbrella.
Run and see yourfalher.
Let us take, care not to hurt eurtetpu
Take care not to tear your dUk^
Rave you not put on mourning ?
l\ike the trouble to sit down.
Take tea or coffee.
What resolution hate you tahtn ?
EXERCISB 130.
Attend-re, 4. to expect, Gftt-er, 1. to spoil; Robe, f. drejs;
to wait fort Qonvenieur, m. govern- 8t>ln, ro. care ;
Choooiitit, m. ehocolate ; or; ......
Gourrier, m. courier ; Lorsque, when ;
Crol-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Port-er, I. to toear;
D6cbir-er, V to Hart Quelquefols,
Tomb-er, 1, /«>U{;
Tacher, 1. to ^tom, It
spot;
t 8etai-ie,4.lr.ftfciflML
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
JkltftON LXXI» IM
1. AHei roir moB Mre, 11 a qnelqiie cboM i Tom eomiiiiiiii^Mr.
2. Courez tcnr dire que jo les attends. 8. Moa fi^re a bten prii
garde de declurer eea habits. 4. Votre coustne a-t-alle f«ris garde
de tacher sa robe 1 5. Elle a pris garde de tomber, car en tombent
elle Taurait g&t^e. & Ces petites iilles ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7.
ElJes vienncnt de le prendre. 8. Pour qui prenez-vous le denil ? 9.
Je porte le deoil de ma mSre. 10. Prenez-vous du th6 ou du caf&
le matin? 11. Nous prenons du the et du cafe. 12. Ne prena^
^ous pas quelquefois du chocolat? 13. Nous n*en prenons que lofa«
que nous sommes malades. 14. Quel parti le gouvemeur a-t>i] pris 1
16. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti (my
fkiri) ou celui de votre fils? 17. Je prendrai le vdtre, si je crois que
vons avez raison. 18. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas la peine de lire
aa Icttre ? 19. Parce qu*elle n'cn vautpas la peine. 20. Votre conr*
rier a^t^il pris les devants T 21. II n'a pu prendre les devants. ^ 22.
N'avez-voua pas tort de prendre son parti ? 23. Je n'ai pas^ort de le
prendre. 24. Avez-vous pris le the* (your tea) ? 25. Noos n^ayona
pas pris (our) le the, nous avons pris le cafe 1
ExxBCisx 140.
1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his hat? 2. He has
taken care not to spoil it, he has only one. 3. Go and speak to your
sister, she calls you (appeUe), 4. Will you not take a cup (iasse)
of tea ? 5. I have just taken my tea. 6. What have you said to
your little girl ? 7. I have told her to take care not to tear her dress.
8. Let us take care not to tear that book. 9. My son has just brought
it 10. Has he taken his tea? 11. He has not yet taken tea, it is
too early. 12. At what hour do you take tea* at your house ? 18.
We take tea at six o^clock, 14. Do you take tea* or coffiee for break*
fast (d xotre d^e&ner) ? 15. We take coiTee. 16. Is your eourier
gone on before? 17. He has not been able to go on before. 18.
What resolution have you taken? 19. I have taken the resolution
iO study my lesson. 20. Have yon taken care not to teaz your
lK)oks? 21. I have taken care not to stain them. 22. What has
your brotlier determined ? 23. He has determined to remain silent
24 Have you taken my part? 25. I have taken my brother's part
26 Are yon right to take his part? 27. I am right to take his part,
because he is right 28. Are you not afraid to take his part? 29. I
UB not afrud to take his part 80. Will you take your ■istei's part
• jMibk,tkMm€4U€aUtdUag du th4, M« Jmmmvs caflW Im»
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IM LBtSdV LXXIL
or Brino? SI. 1 will take my Bistorts put. 83. Go and nod jtrnt
lK>ok, yon do nofc know yow leaaon. 38. I know my leaaon, aJid
I know also thai you are my fiiend. 84. Let ua go to onr father.ho
LESSON LXXn. LBfON LXXIL
THS 8T7BJUKCTXVX.
1. All the French verba, regular and irregular, end in thia tenaa
with ^ es, Ci tont, iea, ent:-^
2* CONJUOATION or THX PRESENT 07 THE SuBJUKOTlTX Of TBI
RSOUULB VXBBS : —
Qneje chant -e fln -iase re^ -oIto rend -9
Thatlmtiif&img mmif Jbtitk maifreceht awy rmiiar
Que tn pari -et cb6r -issca aper^ -olvea vend -ee
ThattMaumdfcrtwpmk tiUftst ehetitk wUfeMtptreeim wtmffut §9lt
Qn'il donn -e foam -ifise per^ -oive tend -e
Tkatkemofgn* muf finmisk wtmgptrtnv^ wutftmd
Que nous cherch -iona pun *ia8iona cone -eviona entend -iooa
Tk»t\ffiUf»^tk wuif funisk mM^fc^uenve Mcy Jkaar
Que T0U8 port 4ez sais -issies d -eyiez perd -lei
7*A«<yMi«Mf Mrry «MfM<r« nicy mm «M|r/«M
Qu'ilsaim -ent nn -iaient di^ -oiTent mord -ent
Tk»t tkqf mmif h99 VMywute wiap itemv mtif biU
8. In the firat conjugation, the subjunctiTe ia in the aingolar, aimi-
lar to the preaent of the indicative. Eicception : aller— je vaia, qui
fame.
4. The firat and aecond peraona plural of the subjanctire, in the
fonr eonjngationa, are the aame aa the correaponding peraona of the
imperfect of the indicatiTe. The third person plural ia like the cor*
reaponding peraon in the indicative preaent Exceptions: avoir i
aubjunctive, noua ayonsy vout aye%y Usaient; aavoir: noia gachions,
vous MacMetfUs saehenl; ^tre, nous soycns^vous soyeZf Us soiaU; fair%
%ous feunons, vous fiutiex, Us /assent , aller, t^ €nUefU ; vouloir iis
veuiUent ; valoir. Us vaiUenL
6, The aabjonetive may alao be formed from the participle present,
by changing ant into ^ es, e, tons, tex, en< ; aa, chantant, je c^nte;
finiaaanti^e fiwuse; reeevant, je regoive; aaehant, je sache; eimi.
gnant, je cntigne.
6. llie verba preaenting exeeptiona to thia laat rule are the foU
lowing, which the student will find eoiyugated in the Second Pftit
of thia gnuBinar, } €8 }---
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
I.IR«8X»lf IrKXIX.
19V
Aeqntfrir Coneeyoir Monrir Prendre,
AOer Dteevoir Moavoir (and
Aperoerolr Deyoir Percevoir its com-
Avoff Etre Poa^oir poondi)
Boire Fftire Pomrdr Recevolr
Swroir Yenlr
Tenir (and (and
its oom- its oom-
ponnds) jponnds) .
Yaloir voulolr —
7. The past of tlie subjanctiTe ia formed from the aubjiiiietife
present of one of the anadHaries, ownr, itrty and the past participle of
a verb [} 46.] :—
QiieJ*ide paitt, qneje sols Tenn. Thai I mofhuvi spoken^ thai I auqr
hace cotM,
8. A verb ia pat in the sobjonctive, when it is preceded by the
eonjnnetion que^ and another verb expressing consent, command*
doubt, desire, sniprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen-
aion, dtc. [J 127, (2.)] :—
Je Tenx qne roos Ini parlies.
Je d6sire qne toos arririez a temps.
I with you U speak ia Am».
/ wish ftm to arrive in time.
9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb
preceded by ^ue, must alao be preceded by ne^ which, however, haa
no negative sense [{ 127, (3.) { 138, (4.) (6.) (6.)] >^
Je crains qn'il ne tombe. / am afraid lest he faU,
19, After craindre, to fear; apprehender, to apprehend; avoir peufy
to be qfrmid; trembler, to tremble, pas is used in connection with the
ne, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur*
rence expressed by the second verb [} 138, (7.)] : —
Je tremble qn'il n'arrive pas i i tremble that he foajf not arme im
time.
RfiSUld^ OF EXASIFLBS*
Le m^decin veut-fl que Je boive de
reani
Je eonsens que vons alliea le voir.
Nous dontoos que vous arriviez k
temp.
Je crains que votre midtre ne vous
punisse.
Jd crains que votre maitre ne vous
punisse pas.
Je m'Stonne qa*U ne sache pas cela.
J'ezige que vous lui donnies oela.
Toalez-votts qu'il aiJle a la chassel
Que voules-vous que je dise 1
J'aiae mie-ix que voos me
paylea.
Does the physician vish ms to drink
rooter?
I consent thai you go to ue A»ia.
We doubt your arriving in time,
I fear lest your master maf punish
you.
I fear thai your master may not
punish you.
I am astonished thai he does not
know that.
I require yfu to give him thai.
Do you wish him to go hunttrnM.
What do you wish me to ^hai i
sh0utd)say?
/ would rather ham ym k jMy
Digitized
by Google
196 LSttHV I.ZXIL
EZXRCISB 141.
Arilwi. m. m xkame ; SmpAch-er, 1. to prevents MoiiIin-a-«cie, smw^mQl
Atelier, m. workshop ; Fortement, vtrif miu^ ; Ob6-tr, 2. io obep ;
An demA, above i Force, f. sUenfik ; Rempl-ir , 2. to fiUJU /
Bracelet, m. ^race2e^j Maeasin, m. K?areA/m«; Rue, f. x^tw/;
D^Ja, already ; Mabain, e, vnheaUhy ; Tomb-er, 1. to faU.
1. Que Yonlez-vouB que nous fassioos! 2. Je desire que Tout
Ikssiek attention k tos Etudes. 3. Ne craignez-voas pas que la plaie
ne vous emp^he de sortir ! 4. Nous craignons fortement que la
pluie ne nous emp6che de rcmplir nos engagements ? 5. Doutez-vons
qu*i] soit chez lui maintenant? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, II est ddjii
dix iieures. 7. Exigez-vous qu*il parte de bonne heureT 8. Je
m'etonno qu'il ne soit pas dejk parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieuz que
je vous rende ees bracelets t 10. Taime mienx que vous me les payiez.
1 1. Votre voisin craiLt-il que son enfant ne sorte ? 12. II craint qn'51
ne tombr dans la rue. 13. Ne d^sirez-vous pas que vos ^l^ves vous
ob^issent? 14. Je souhaite qu'ils m'ob^issent et qu'ils ob^issent i
leurs professeurs. 15. Ne craignez-vous pas que cet artisan ne
tombe malade? 16. Je croins qull ne tombe malade, car son atelier
est tr^s malsain. 17. Ne regrettez-vous pas qu*il soit oblige ^ tra^
vailler? 18. Je regrette qu*il soit oblige de travailler au dessus de ses
forces. 19. Ne dSsirez-vous pas qu*on lui apprenne cette nouvellet
20. Je desire qu'on la lui npprenne le plus t6t possible. 21. Votre
pdre ne veut-il pas que vous nehetiez un magasin ? 22. II vent que
f achate un moulin-^-scie. 23. DSsirez-vousque je vousquitte? 24.
Je desire que vous restiez avec moi. 25. Je veux que vous parties
ce matin.
EZKRCISB 142.
I. Do yon wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to
tell him to (de) come liere to-morrow morning. 8. What do yon
wish me to do ? 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not
wish me to read your letter? 6. I wish you to read it and (que)
give it to my sisters. 7. Does not your sister fear lest the min may
prevent her going out? 8. She fears that the rain may prevent our
going out. 9. Do you doubt that your father be at home now ?
10. I doubt his being there. 11. Do you require me to do my work
now I 12. I wish you to do your work before going out (acaiU dt
sortir), 13. Do you not regret your being obliged to work? 14, 1
do not regret my being obliged to work. 15. Are you not astonished
that he knows thai? 1& I am astonished that he knowa eli
Digitized
by Google
LXftSOX LXXIIX. m
17. Bfi you raqQve me to pay him to-day ? 18. I wish yoa to pay
bim to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See N<k 1, of
the abne exerciui)'! 20. I will have you pay him immediately.
SI. Do you fear lest the master punish your son ? 22. I fear that he
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say? 24. I
vrould have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you
to buy a house 1 2& He wishes me to buy a storehouse. 27. Do
ycu wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to*morrow
29. Do you wish me to stay with you ? 30. I wish you to stay
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish you
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their
teacher? 34. I wish them to obey him.
LESSON LXXm LEgON LXXIIL
USB OF THJ6 SUBJtJKCnVK— CONTINUED.
1. A verb' preceded by the conjunction que and one of the uni-
personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary; il importe, i^ maUerSyit is
importani ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieuz, it is
better ; il plait, i7 pleases^ suits; il se pent, il pent se faire, it may be^
il est juste, it is just ; il est bon, it is proper ; il est n^eesaaire, i7 is
necessary; il est important, it is important; il est temps, it is time;
a est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est k propos, it is proper ;
O est fiicheux, it is sady it is a pity; il est urgent, it is urgent^ or by
another verb or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety,
must be put in the subjunctive [i 127, (4.)] : —
II faut que vous rcstiez ici. Ytm mutt remain here,
II est juste que vous soyez ricom- // is just you be rewarded,
peiia6.
2. The unipersonal verb, il est, governs the indicative present or the
future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que^ coming
ai\er one of the adjectives, siir, sure; certain, certain; vrai, true;
demoutre, proved ; incontestable, incontestable ; Evident, evident, and
others having a positive and affirmative sense: —
n est nrtain qu'il vicnt ou qu'il It is certain that he comes or will umte,
viendro.
3. When however the verb, U est, used in the above eonnection ia
3egative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive :—
D n'est nnUement certain qu'il Bis by no mta>n$ certain that kewO
Digitized
by Google
soo
I.BIS0V LXZIII
4. Aftff* eirtaiB eonjvnotioiis, afin qiia» m cfitr AM; ^aoiqva
cttJk<n^A, 4«. [fe»/ii22 Zu<» { 143, (2.)] the sabjonctive Ualwaytiiaed
Qaoiqii6Toii8iSuries,qaoiqiie70fis WkMevtr ypu fltajf <29, i0*««cwr yM»
diues. may My«
6. Otber important rales on the i^yeniment of eonjiinetione wiD
be fonna in aaid } 143.
BfieUMl OF EZAMPLBS.
Qne fliut-D que rotre bobut tkase 1
Fsat-il que je Ini icrivel
II egt D^ceasaire que Tons lal
6criviez.
II est temps que youb lui domiiez
SOD argent.
N'est-il pas ftchenx qu'il soit arriT6
sitard'?
B O0t certain qn'il est arrirA.
n n*est point certain qa'il se soit
blos86.
Bestez ici jnsqn'i-ce-qn'il arriye.
PouTU qne toiis flnissiea a temps.
What must jfowr stsUr iaf
MHttlvniUtokiM?
Jtisntcessaryfifryouto wrUetokmL
It is time that ffou should give Jdm kU
money.
Ms U not a pity that he arrived so UtUf
It is certain that he is arrived.
It is not eeriain that he has hurt him-
self.
Remain here until he com/es.
Provided that you finish in time.
Exercise 143.
Affliire, f. affair ; 8e ler-er, 1. ref. to rise; Point, m. point, degree /
Ainsi,fAtts; Lingo, m. linen ; Pourvn qne, provided
CHsmAst, m. creditor I Manqn-er, 1. toioant; thatf
Be conch-er, 1. ref. /^Ntoessaire, m. n^oesso- B£gl-er, 1. to regulate;
retire ; ries ; Satisfai-re, 4. ir. to «tfts-
Emprnnt-er, 1. to ior-Ordre, m. order; fy;
row; Onbli-er, 1. to forget; Tcttei «««*.
Fonm-ir, 2. tofwrnish ;
1. Que fiint-il que je dise 1 2. II fiiut que vous disiez ce qne vona
ayez entendu. 3. Ne fant-il pas que je iinisse cette histoire ? 4. II
n'est pas n^essaire que vous la finissiez. 5. N'est-il pas & propos
que je satisfasse mes cr^anciers ? 6. 11 est k propos que vous lo fassicz.
7. N'est-il pas juste que je vous pale ee que je vous a! empruntS t
8. II est juste que vous me le payiez. 9. Se pent-il que votre fr^re
ait oubli6 sa famille? 10. II ne pent pas se faire qu'il I'sut oubIi6e.
11. Est-il certain que votre fr^re se soit oubli6 & nn tel point!
12. 11 est certain qu'ij s'est oublic. 13. II est bien f^cheux qu'il se
Boit oubli6 ainsi 14. Resterez-vous jusqu'5-ce-que j'aie mis ordre 2l
mes affaires. 15. Je resterai jusqu'^-ce-que vous les ayez rdgUes.
16. Ne faudra-t-il pas que je foumisse des provisions & cette
famiUe? 17. D faudra que vous lui en fournissiez pourvu que vous en
ayez. 1 8. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieuz que vous lui pr^tiez de I'argent, que
de le laisser manqner du n^cessaire? 19. II vandra mieuz que iK>nt
Digitized
by Google
LIB0Oir LXXIT. SOI
. «l en {v^tioBB. SO. Que faQi-il que nova fiwskmB 1 21. II tkai qn^
vom portiez ee linge ohez moL 23. N'estdl pas temfNi que je mm
eoQche? 33. U est temps que voos voua couchiez. 34. Fant41 que
je me l^ve T 36. II &ut que 7008 vooe leviez.
Exercise 144.
1. Wliat muBt oar iHend do? 3. He most remain at our house
lintL I come. 8. What must our neisrhbor do t 4. He must put his
aflbifs m order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your eredi«
tors? 6b It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your
little boy to go to school ? 8. It is time for him to go to school, it is
ten oVlock. 9. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to-
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is
it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casquette) ? 13. It is
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it necessary for your mother to
finish her letter ? 14^ It is not necessary that she finish It 16. Is it
certain that your son has forgotten his money ? 16. It is certain that
he has forgotten it 17. It is by no means certain that he has for-
gotten it 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? 19. 1
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do
you wjU not succeed (rSitssir). 21. Whatever your brother may
siqr« nobody will believe him (crmre, ir.). 33. Must I write to you?
S3. You mast write to me. 34. Do you wish me to be sick ? 36. 1
do not Trisb you to be sicL 36. Do you require me to tell you
that? 27. It is necessary that you tell me alL 38. Do you wish
me to go to your house? 39. I wish you to go there. 30. Must I
get up? 31. You must rise immediately (d Finstani). 33. Must
your brother retire? 33. He must go to bed immediately. 84. It
is time for him to go to bed, It is twelve o'clock.
LESSON LXXIV. LEgON LXXIV.
USE or THE SUBJUNCTIVE. CONTINUED.
1. The verbs croire,to believe; dire, to say; esp^rer, toAope; gager
and porier, to bet ; penser, to tJiijik ; sentir, to feel; voir, to see ; and
others expressing affirmation or something certain and positive, are
(when they are conjugated affirmatively, and have que after them)
followed by the indicative present or Aiture [{ 137, (3.) Note] :—
leperae, Je crois, Je dis qufl / think, I heUms, I mjf ikal kt wO
Digitized
by Google
9(»
LSSSOV IZ^XT.
2. The above yeiis, when used in the same eonnectioii and eonjo
gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the aabjvnetivt
[{137,(2.)]:-
J6 ne crois pu qnHl vlenne. I da not bdieve he wiU come,
8. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, it
put in the subjunctive, while there is an Idea of uncertainty, and In
the indicative, when the idea is certain [{ 127, (2.) Note] : —
J*ai un homme qui me rendra scr- / have a man who wiU oUige me,
vice.
J'ai besoin d'un bomme qui me / toanl a ma» toko mil (moj/) obiigt
rende service. me,
A, A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, U
muly le premier^ le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [{ 127.] :-«
YoWk le seal cbapeau que J'aie. Thai is ike otilif hot i have,
Yoila le meiUenr homme que Je There is the best man J know.
oonnaisse.
RtoUMA OF EZJLMPLBS.
Je crob que le concert a eu lieu.
Je ne pease pas que notre ami
vienne.
J'espdre que vous apprendrez cela
par ccBUr.
Je ne pense pas qu'fl puisse appren-
dre tout cela par coeur.
Je crois que oe marchand s'enrichit
aux dftpens d*autruL
Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse a
vosd^pens.
Je ne crois pas que vous riussissiez
at gagner votro vie.
J'ai une carafe qui oontient un litre.
Je cherche une carafe qui contienne
un litre.
Je vous pr6te le mellleur chapeau
que j'aie, a condition que vous me
le ^ndiez demain.
I bdieve that the concert took piaee,
1 do not think thai ow friend wiA
come,
I hope thai yon will Uam that hy
heart.
I do not think that he can learn mB
that by heart,
I believe that this merchant grows riek
at Ike expense of others,
I do not believe tJuU he enriches Jlm-
selfat your expense.
I do not believe that you will succeed
in earning yowr living,
I have a decanter which holds a Utre,
I seek a decanter which holds a litre,
J lendyou the best hailhate, on eon-
dition that you loill reium Utowu
to-morrow. '
Exercise 145*
8*asse-oir, 8. ir. ref to Fort, strong; Rentr^r, 1. to tome in
sit down ; Litre, m. litre, about a again ;
Compt-er, 1. to depend j quart; Sorte, f. kind;
Cristal, m. crystal; N€gociant,m. merchant; SufH-re, 4. ir. to tujicet
Deb<)Ut, standing; Pa.'::9ol, m. parasol; Tanneur. m. tanner t
Dur-er, 1. to wear^ last; Portier, m. porter; Tard-er, 1. to tarry,
1. Pensez-voua que ce drap dure longtemps? 2. Je croia qvll
dwrera bien, ear il est fort 8. Croyee-vous que notre portier taida i
lentrer t 4. Je crois qu'il ne taidera pas. 6. D6airaz-vou8 que nirai
Digitized
by Google
LS8SOH XXZIT. tot
vesttotts debout? 6. Je desire an eontraire, que Tons Tons «§•
lejiez. 7. Croyez-vous qae ces etadionts puisseot appreodre cinq
pages pur c<Bur en deax heures ? 8. Je crois que c^est impossible.
9. Espt&rez-votts que no tie ami arrive de bonne heure ? 10. Pesp^re
qu'il amvera bientOt 1 ]. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il 1 12. h
m*en fnu*; unequi contienne un litrn. 13. J'en ai une de cristal, qui
•sxtient deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ce n^gociant s'enrichisse
k vos depens? 15. ie sals qu'il s'entichit aux depens d'autrui. 16.
Quel parasol pensez-vous me prater? 17. Je pense vous prater le
meillcur que j*aie. 18. Le tanneur r6ussira-t-il ^ gagner sa vie ? 19.
Je ne crois pas qu'il y r^ussisse. 20. Pensez-vous que eet argent
anffise k voire p^re? 21. Je crois qu'il lui suffira. 22. Croyoz-vona
que cea meaaieurs eomptent sur moi ? 23. Je saia quMls eomptent sur
vous. 34. Pensez-vous que le concert ait lieu aujourdliui ? 26. Je
crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu.
Exercise 146.
1. Do you believe that tlie concert has taken placet 2. I believe
that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that yonr siEter's dress
will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very
good. 6. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a
livelihood ? 6. I believe he will succeed in it (y), for he is very dili«
gent 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense!
8. I think that he enriches hiq^self at the expense of others. 9.
Does the merr.hant grow rich at my father's expense? 10. lie
grows rich at your expense. 11. What kind of a house must yoa
have (cotts faut-il) ? 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms.
13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind
of a decanter do you seek ? 15. I seek one which holds three litres.
16. I have one which holds two litres, I will lend it to you. 17.
What coat will you send met 18. I will send yon the best I havoy
take care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will
learn all that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it 21.
Do you believe (that) he will comet 22. I believe that he will
«dme ^on. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon met
24. I kno V that he depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentle-
man depend upon met 26. I think that he depends upon your bro-
ther. 27. Will the porter soon come in again t 28. I hope that h«
will not tarry long. 29. Will yon not lend me your umbrella t 30,
I will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain
standing t 32. He does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish
me to sit downt 34 T wish you to remain standing. 85. I wiah
thai he may come.
Digitized byCjOOQlC
SM I.B:»*OX IrZST.
LESSON LXXV. LEgON LXXV.
TSB DCPSRrscrr and plupbrfbct of thb scjbjuncrits.
1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive mre in til
the verbs, regular and irregular, of the four conjugations, sse, net, U
isions, ssieZy ssenL
3. The vowel preceding the i of the third per8<^n singular always
takes the circumflex accent.
3. Conjugation of the Imperfsot of the Subjunctxys of
THE Keoular Verbs,
Que Jd chant -esse fin -isse re^ -usse rend -isse
Tkat Imigkt nng nt^fht Mmitk might mrive m^gU tmim
Que tu pari -asses ch6r -isses apcr^ -usses vend -iases
Thai tkiv^ migktut tfeak mtigkte$t ekeriMk myrktest peneiM migkUgt nU
Qu'il donn -&t foum -it per9 -ut tend -it
TiMtlumigktgiv might /kmUh might gather might tmtd
Que nous cherch -assions pun -issions 0009 -ussions entend -issiona
That io€ might teek mifht punish might conceive might hear
Que vous port -assiez sais -issies d -ussies perd -issies
That yra might cearrjf might seize m^ht ewe wUghl leee
Quells aim -assent un -issent d69 -ussent mord -issent
T%at a«y might lave migkt tmate might deceive might Hta
4. This tense may be formed from the past definite [L 61.] by
changing, for the first conjugation, the final t of the first person 8in«
gular of the past definite into sse, jses, etc., and by adding se, fes,ete.
to the same person in the other three conjugations. This rule hat
no exceptions.
J'allal, failasse ; je finis, je finisse. I went, I might go ; I finished, I mighi
finish.
6. All the observations made Lesson 62, on the changes of the
stem of the irregular verbs, in the past definite, apply equally to the
baperfect of the subjunctive.
6. The pluperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the imperfect
of the same mode of one of the auxUiaries avoir, itre, and the past
participle of the verb.
Qu3 J'eusse flni ; que Je fuase venu. That I mighi have finished, Ihat I
might have cmne.
7. All the rules given on the use of the subjunctive in the three
preeeding lessons, apply, of course, to the imperfect and pluperfect of
the mode.
8. In the same manner as the present or future of the indicativ^e
of the first part of a proposition, governs under the aborrv-mention<Ht
rules, the verb of the second part, in the present or past of the su^
Digitized
by Google
hn^MoihtiMxr,
M ill* impeifeet and other pMt tensM of the indieativo
■nd the two cooditionaUi, govern the verb in the second part of the
propoaitioD, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the aubjunetive.
Ne fklMt-il pas que Je lui parlane? Was U not necessary that I should
speaktoMm?
11 Aiudrait que Je lui doniiaase oe li- iZ VMmU be necessary forwu ta gim
TTB. him thai book.
RteCM£ 07 Examples.
Voudriea-rona que Je donnaase un
coup de biton k cet enfant ?
Je Toudraia que toub tirassiez ud
coup de fttsu Biir cet oiaeau.
Exigericz-Tous que nous revinBsi-
OD8 de bonne heure 1
Que Tondriez-vooa queees hommes
Assent 1
Qne youliez-Tons que Je fisse 1
II fkudrait que J'euasc mon argent
Je ne roulais pas que vous mourua-
siez de froid.
SDe craignait que tous ne mourus-
aiea de misdre etde faim.
Voudriez-Tous que Je jetasse un
coup-d'ceil sur ces papiers 1
Would you wish me to give thai chUd
a blow foilh a sHck?
I would wish you tojire your gu^
upon that bird.
Would you require us to return early ?
Whai would you wish thou wun to
do?
What did you wish me to do?
It would be necessary for me to ham
my money,
I did not wish you to die with the cold.
She ftartd lest you might die will
waTU and hunger.
Would you wish me to east a glance
upon these papers ?
Bessembl-er,
sanUe:
R^tablissement^
eoveryf
Banib, f. heaUhs
1, to re
Exercise 14*7.
Ivrogne, m. drunkard
Mer, f sea ;
Li^vre, m. hare ;
Perdrix, f. partridge;
Postc, m. post ;
Se rend-ro, 4. ref to re- Tir-er, 1. toJlre, shoot,
pair:
fiicasse, f woodcock;
Bord, m. shore ;
Ghaig-er, 1. to load;
Coup, nk. blow;
Coup-de-fusil, m. shot ;
Coup-d'CBil, m. glance;
Demi-usa, half-worn;
Fouet) UL whip ;
1. Vottdriez-vons que j'achetaase un habit k demi-ua^? 2. Je von*
dniis que voua en achetaaaiez un ueuf. 3. Voulait-on que ee aoldat
malade ae rendit k son poste? 4. On voulait qn'il ae rendu k aon
r&giment 6. Fandrait-il que je demeurasae an bord de Isl mer ^ 6. U
fkudrait pour le rc'tablissement de voire sant^, que vous vous ren-
dissiez en Suisse 1 7. Ne pensez-vous pas que cet enfant ressemble k
sa m^re 7 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui ressemble-
t-il! 10. D ressemble & sa sceur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-vous que
Totre fille 6pous&t cet ivrogne. 12. Voudriez-vons que nous mou
nuaions de misere? 13. Je cmtgnaia que cea damaa ne moumssent
[f 197, (3.) L. 72. 9.] de froid. 14. Ne vonlez vook paa ttrer an ea
Mvtal 16. Je timaia aor eetta bteaMO aa mon Aisfl 4tait chaig4
Digitized
by Google
8(KI LS08OV IZXITL
16. Oombien de coups de fasil ▼oiidriez-voas que je Unmel 17. 81
▼0118 aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirasslez eur cette per*
drix. 18. Voalez-vouft que je jette un coup d^ceil eur cette lottrel
19. Je voudraie que vous la lussiez. 20. Que vouiriez-vous que je
fisse? 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention k vos etudes. 22.
Faudrait-il que je sortisse ? 23. II faudrait que vous restassicz h la
maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse k ce chevail 25. Je
voudrais que vous lui donnassiez des coups de fouet
ExsRciss 148.
1. What would you have me dot 2. I would have you east a
glance upon this letter. 3. Would you wish me to give that dog
blows with a stick ? 4. I would wish you to give that horse blows
with tt whip. 6. Would you require us to return at five o'clock!
6. I would require you to return early. 7. Do you think that your
brother resembles your father 1 8. I do not think he resembles my
father. 9. Whom do you think that he resembles? 10. I think he
resembles my mother. 11. How many shots have you fired? 12. I
have fired five shots at that woodcock. 13. Would you not have me
fire at that partridge ? 14. 1 would have yon fire at that partridge, if
your gun was loaded. 16. Where would it be necessary for me to
dwell ? 16. It would be necessary for you to dwell on the sea^shore.
17. Would you hav« me die with hunger? 18. 1 would not have you
die of hunger. 19. Would you have your brother die with cold?
20. I would not have him die with cold or want 21. What would
you have your son do ? 22. 1 would have him learn his lessons. 23.
Would you have him learn German ? 24. I would have him learn
German and Spanish. 25. Have you fired at (sur) that hare ? 26. I
have not fired at that hare. 27. Would it be necessary for me to go
out? 28. It would be necessary for you to go out 29. Would it be
neeessary for me t4> remain here? 30. It would be necessary for you
to go to church. 31. What did you wish ? 32. 1 wished you to write
to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out? 34. I
wished you to buy a good hat
LESSON LXXVL LEfON LXXVI.
REGIMEN OR OOYERNMENT OF VERBS. (^ 129.)
1. Many verba come together in French without prepo«tioa».
wfaieli are in English joined by them. Many .others are connected in
fVeneli by prepoaitiona different from those eonnecting the ooitm*
Digitized
by Google
LSBBOir LZtTL
nr
ponding verb« in English. No satisfactoiy getieral nilea can be
giT« I on this point. We have ^iven in the Secomi Part of thia gram-
mar [} 1 30, 1 31, 132.] copious lists of the verbs in general use, with the
prepositions which follow them, when they come before otiier verbs.
We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually placed after the
verbs introduced in our lessons.
2. The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb
(not avoir or ilre) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive.
3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, {130, although
they, in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take
one in French :—
AHer, 1. ir. to go
Compter, 1. to intend
Courir, 2. ir. to rvn
l>ai^er, l.todet^
Bi^irer, 1. to destre
Devoir, 8- to owe
Snvoyer, lAr.tosend
Espdrer, 1. to hope
Falloir, $.\r, to be ne- Savoir, 3. ir. to know
cessary Souhaiter, 1. to wish
Mener, 1. to Uad, take Valmr Dueux 8. ir. t» he
Penser. 1. to think beUer-
Pouvour, 3. ir. to beaUe Yenir, 2. ir. to come
Pr6teDdre, 4. to pretend Youloir, 8. ir. to vritk^
Pr^ferer, 1. to prefer wilL
titsvuA 07 Examples.
Gomptez-vous diner avec nous 1 .
Je vais diner chec mon p&re.
Ne voul€»-vous pas donner k man-
ger iIl ce chien 1
IMsurez voos monter dans ma cham-
brel
Je pr6ftre desccndre chez votre p&re.
]>emenre't-iJ en hant on en baa'}
Pr6ftrez-vou8 demeurer an rez-de-
chaiiS86e1
Je d6sire demeurer an premier etage.
Nous piiiSrons louer )e second 6ta§e.
Nous c8p6rons louer une chambre
au second.
Do you intend to dine wilhus?
I am going to dine at my father' m,
mU you not feed that dog?
Do you wish to go up to my room?
I prefer to go down to yowrfaiher*$.
Does he live above or bdow? *
Do you prefer to live on the ground
fioor?
Iieish to live in thefSrst story.
We prefer to take the second story.
We hope to rent a room in the second
story.
Exercise 149.
Cabinet, m. closet ; Bn baut, up stairs^ above; Salle, f parlor ;
Compter,!, to cipher I Faisan, m. fAeosan^ / Touch-er, 1. to touchy
Demain, to-morrow; Jou-er, 1. to play; play;
XX^Jodn-er, 1. to break- Lon-er, 1. to rent, to 2?/ ; Troisidine, third story;
fast; Vinc-er^l.toplay; Violon, m. 0iof»9».
Bn has, down stairs, ^Plaisir, m. favor f pUo'
lou ; sure ;
1. Combien de ehambrcs comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous eomp^
tons loner anesalle au rez-de-chaoss^e et deux cabinets aa troisidiiie.
8. Ne pr4f&rez-voQ8 pas loner une chambre-dMsoneher an seeond? 4r
Nona pr6l&rons demenrer an rez-de-cb^oss^e. 6. Ne ponves-voua
Digitized
by Google
MB i.»#]0Oji iizzvi:.
mater 4 diner aveo notia aujourd'hai ? 6. Je vouaremeieie, je pift*
f(^ Tenir demain. 7. M. voire p^re Tiendra^t-il demaio d^jeOnei
fivfo noas? 8. 11 eompte venir demain, de bonne heure. 9. Que
Toulez-Tous lour dire? 10. Je veux lee prier de me faire oe plaibir.
11. Comptez-voua faire ce plaisir k mon fr^re? 12. respire le lai
faire. 13. Preferez-voue demeurer en haul on en baa 1 14. None
pr^ferona demenrer en baa. 16. Que pensez-vona iaire de ce jeuie
laiaan? 16. Nona penaons TeDvoyer 4 M. votre beaa-fr^» 17.
Ne aavez-YOua paa joaer dn violon? 18. Je aaia en jouer. 19.
W^ votre conaine aait^lle toucher le piano? 20. EUe aait toucher
le piano etpihcer la harpe. 21. Ne aavez-voua paa 6crire? 22. Noni
aavons lire, 6crire, et compter. 23. Savez-voua jouer de la goitarel
24. Nous ne aavona paa en jouer. 25. Nona aouhaitona trouver un
fq^partement au rez de chauaa^e.
EXBRCISS 150.
1. Doea your brother-in-law intend to rent the ground floor? 2
He intenda to rent two rooms in the aecond story. 8. How many
rooms doea your son intend to take? 4. He intends to take two
rooms in the aecond atory. 5. Does he prefer to live on the aecond
floor? 6. He prefers to live on the ground floor. 7. Doea your
father wish to come to dinner with ua to-morrow? 8. He intenda
to come to-morrow at two o'clock. 9. Do you prefer to live up
ataira or down stairs ? 10. I prefer to live above. 11. Does your
aiater know how to play on the piano ? 12. She knowa how to play
on the piano. 13. Where do you intend to live (demeurer) ? 14.
We intend to live at your father'a. 15. Will you go up to my
room? 16. I will go down to your father's. 17. Do you wish to
live on the ground floor? 18. I wish to live on the second floor.
19. Is it necessary to stay here? 20. It is not necessary to stay
here. 21. What do you think of doing with (de) your book? 22.
I think of giving it to my son. 23. What do you wish me to say to
that gentleman? 24. I wish to beg him to do me a fkvor. 25. Do
you wish to send that pheasant to your mother? 26. I wish to send
it to her, ahe is sick. 27. Cannot your sister play on the violin?
28. She cannot play on the violin, but she can play on the guitar.
29. Does your ^i8t6r wish to live up stairs ? 30. She prefers living
down stairs. 31 Will you not do me that favor? 32. I will do it
with {Measure. 3d Cannot your brother stay and dine with ua to*
day? 34^ He haa , -omiaed my father to come and dine with hia^
8&. Our tn^nd knowa now to read, write, and cipher. *
Digitized
by Google
lilllOV t^XfhU
UESSON LXZVIL
LBgONLXXVn.
&OTSRNIfSNT OF VSBB»— OONTmUSD.
1. Many verbs, in Freneh, are joined with other Terbe follow: n;,
ay means of the preposition de, cf^ where the eorrespondinif nrbe
n English either take no prepoaitiony or one other than of. Besidei
avoir besoin^ dec. [L. 21. R. 4.], the foUowin|r verbe extracted firoa
list, i 132, belong to this class : —
Dispenser, to dispense N^llger, ta n^ket
Smp6cher, topreveTU Prier, to beg
Kviter, to avoid Promettre, toffromim
8e flatter, toJUUter ^on^s Proposer, to propose
self Refhser, to refuie
Jnrer, to swear Supplier, to entreai
Manqner, tofi^ Trembler, to tremUe
Menacer, to threaten
Achever, tojktisk
BriUer, to bwm, to long
Cesser, to cease
Comnuuider, to eon-
CoDseiller, to advise
D6fendre, to forbid
Dire, losof
RfisuM£ OF Examples.
Ponrqaoi n'schevez-yona pas d'ap-
prendre oe m6tiert
NoQs brdloDs de continner nos 6ta-
des.
D ne cease de nons tonrmenter.
Me d6fendea-Totis de ikire du bien
k cet homme 1
Ne nfigliges pas de Ini faire nne
Tisite.
Me promettez-Yons de fkire nne
Tifflte k mon ami 1
Je Tons prie d'aller tont droit ches
Tons.
Te vons conseille de venir par le
chemin-de-fer.
Ne manques pas de hd fkire mes
compliments.
L'avcz-vous menac6 de le fhipper 1
J'ai refns6 de lui ftlre cr6dit.
Me proposes-Toiis de Ini confler cet
argent 1
Je Tous conseille de le Ini confler.
J'6vite de lui repi'ocher ses fkntes.
Why do fon not JSnitk homing tkett
(rode?
We bum to contmme our tktdies.
Bs does not cease tormenHng us.
Do you forbid my doing good to tkM
man?
Do not neglect paying Mm a mttL
Do you promise me to pay a visit to
my friend?
I beg you wiU go straigbt home.
I advise you to come by tke railroad.
Do not fail to present mf eompU-
mentsto Mm,
Have you threatened to strike kim?
1 refused to give him credit.
Do you propose to me to trfut him
toUh this money ?
letdvise you to trust him withU.
I avoid to reproach him unth hii
fauUs.
EXBRGISB 151.
Arros-er, 1. to water ; Qard-er, 1. to keep ; Tont droit, straight ;
AiT08oir,m.«o^mi»^-^; Jardinier, m. gardener f Bend-re, ^.todOfto rm^
An eontndre, on the Lendemain, m. next ders
contrary ; day ; Veille, f. eve, day before /
Corrig-er, 1. to correct ; Onbll-er, 1. to/orget ; Voie, f. cowveyance^ way,
Faire parti to cMuntmi- 8e rend-re, 4. red to w mode a
eoU; tnairs
mveyance^way
leftreneliimg.
Digitized
by Google
410 ^MBB01f LXxriL
1. Pourquoi ne eessez-vooB pas de lire ? 2. JTaarais tort de <
do lire avant de fiavoir ma lc9on. 3. Avez-vous defendu k votra
jardinier d'arroser ces fleura? 4. Au contraire, }e lui avals com-
mande de ies arroscr. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de h faire? 6.
PareequMl a oublie d'apporter Tarrosoir. 7. Que desire faire M. F. !
8. II iNriile de contlnuer Tetude de la m^decine. 9. N*avoz-Tous paa
tort de faire des visiles A ce monsieur ? 10. Paurais tort de *e n^
gliger. 11. N'avez-vous pas refus^ de rendre ce service k voirt eo-
nemi ? 12. J'aurais eu tort de refuser de le lui rendre. 13. QueUe
voio nous avez-vous conseill^ de prendre? 14. Je vous ai conseiU6
de prendre la voie du b&teau-Si-vapeur. 15. Avez-vous menac^ de
frappor cet enfant? 16. Je Tai menace de le corriger. 17. Avez*
vous reAis^ de vendre des marchandises 4 mon fr^re ? 18. Tai re-
fuse de lui en vendre ^ credit. 19. Avez-vous dit k mon fils de ae
rendre k la maison? 20. Je Tai pri^ d'y aller tout droit 21. Vous
proposez-vous de venir la veille de Noel ? 22. Nous nous4>roposons
de venir le lendemain. 23. Votre compagnon se propose-t-il de
garder le secret ? 24. D se propose de faire part de cela i tout la
monde.
ESCSRCISB 152.
1. Have you forbidden my cousin to speak to the gardener ! 2. 1
have not forbidden him to speak to him. 8. Has your mother ordered
the gardener to water her roses (roses) ? 4. She has ordered him to
water them. 5. Has he forgotten to do it? 6. He has neglected to
do it, he has not forgotten it 7. What conveyance will you take to
go to Paris ? 8. I advise you to take the railroad. 9. Have yoa
told (d) your son to take the steamboat? 10. No, Sir, I liave told
him to take the stage (diligencef f.). 1 1. Is not your brother wrong
to neglect paying a visit to his brother-in-law? 12. He is wrong to
neglect it 13. Does not that young German long to read that letter 1
14. He longs to continue his studies. 15. Do you propose to trust
him with that money? 16. I propose to trust him with it 17. Do
you neglect to reproach him with his faults ? 18. I avoid to reproach
him with them. 19. Have you threatened to punish your son. 20.
I have threatened to strike him. 21. Do not fail to present my com-
pliments to my sister*s friends. 22. I will not fail (je rCy manquerai
pas), 23. Have you refused to sell him goods? 24. I have refused
to sell him goods on credit 25. Which mode of travelling do yoa
advise me to take ? 26. I advise you to take the railroad. 27. Do
you forbid him to come? 28. I have forbidden bis writing. 2d.
Have yoa failed to pay yoor gardener 7 80. I have not faUed to pay
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Litton Lxxrith <ll
mo. 81. I have f jigotten to pay yon. 89. Do not negloct to write
%o me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not eeasA to work.
^. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 86. I have told him to eom«
'iie dav after.
LESSON Lxxvm. usgoN Lxxvm.
GOVERNMENT OF VEKBS— CONTINUED,
1. Many French verbs reaeh their object by means of preposition^
while the corresponding £ng1ii»h verbs govern their object directly,
that is, without intervening prepositions. Otlier French verbs reach
their object through prepositions dilTerent from thoM used in English.
We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, common*
eing with the first : —
2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun, in French, bat
have none in English : —
Abnscr de, to abuse Joair de, to enjop Plaire il, to please
B'approcher de, to op- Manquer 4, to offend^ to Be souvenir de, to re»
pnacA fail memJber
Coiiveiiir Ji, to suit M^dire de, to dander 8e servir de, to use
Deplftin; &, to displease So ro^fler de, to mistrust Resscmbier a, to resem*
IMsob^ir a, to disobey Obiir &, to obey Ue
Douter de, to doubt Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre &, to rttrvive
fichappcr a, to escape
3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions In tha
two languages.
B^Migerde, to grieve for Louer de, to praise for Bcmercler do, to t^mUt
F6liciier de, to congral- Profiter de, to profit by for
uUUe Penscr a, to think of Rirc de, to lau^h at
QdrnxT de, to grieve for Se passer de, to do vnlhr Rougir de, In blush si
S'iDformer do^ to inquire out Son^r a, to think of
about
R£sum£ of Examples.
Have you not abused ourpaiunee^
Iravc35-T0us pas abus6 de notre pa-
tience 1
Nous en ovons abns6.
Vous avu7. d6.sob6i a ros psrents.
Vous pardonnerex a vos cnncmis.
Voiis {Kiuscruz constamment a vos
devoirs.
Vons y penserez constamment
Ke riez-vous pas de nos erreurs 1
Nous n'en rions point.
Ve reMemble-t-il pas k son pteel
H'c hare abused it.
You have disttbeyed yotir parents.
You will forgive your encmieu
You loill tkink conslanUy of ym
duties.
You will think of them eonstmnUf.
Do not laugh at our mistakes,
Wedonot laugh at them,
DoeshenolresembkMsfKtktrf
Digitized
by Google
tit tlBSQV LXXYtll.
EzxBCisl 153.
ArnuigeQioDt, m. ar>C<Bnr, m. Acsri; No— pliiA fi9 iMry
rangemtiUf DeYoir, m. dulf f Noaifelle, f. im^ii
GirconstADce, f. drcum^Fwitid, tfavU; Peintre, m.paifUe'*
stand f B'infon&er, 1. rat <0 fn- Prochain, m. neigkk^r /
Condnite, f. eandua 9 quire ; SeUier, m. 9addkn
CompUdsanoe, f. AiiMl- Blalheiir, m. mbfor'%QodbA,m,moom.
nessf tenc;
1. Get anangeTnent Tona conTienUl ! S. H ne me eonvient paai
mais il eonvioiit §L notre parent 8. Celaned6plait-il paaau peintre t
4. Votre eondoite lui d^plait beaneoup, 6. Ne craignez-Tona paa
d'abnser de la patienne de votre ami 1 6. Jo craina d*en abaaer. 7.
Ne penaez-voua jamaia k vos devoira? 8. Ty pense tons Jea joora.
9. Avez-vou9 penad k votre Mre aujourdliui ? 10. J*ai pens^ k lui,
el je me aaia souvena de aea bont6a. 11. A-t-il en aoln de aon p^re,
et lui a-t-il ob^iT 12. II lui ob6it conatamment. 13. Ne lui a-t-il
Jamaia d^sob^i? 14. H lui a d^aob^i pluaieura fota, maia il g6mit de
aa faute. 15. Ne lea remerciez-vons paa de leur complaifiance? 16.
Je lea en remercie de tout mon coeur. 17. Le sellier voua a-Uil
felicity de voire auoc^at 18. II m^en a f)&licit& 19. N^avez-voua
pas ri de notre malheur? 20. Nous n'en avona paa ri, nous ne riona
jamais des malheura d*autruL 21. Ne vons sonvenez-vous pas dea
nouvellea que je voua ai apprisea % 22. Je ne m*en souviens plus,
23. Votre p^re ne vous a-t-il pas d6fendu de m^dire de votre pnK
chain ? 24. II me Fa defendu. 25. Nona nous aommea inform^a de
toutea lea circonstancea de cette affaire.
ExBRCisx 154.
1. Have jToa not abused jour fnend*8 kindness t 2. I have not
abused his kindness, I have abased his patience. 8. Does not your
condact displease your parents t 4. My conduct does not please
them. 5. Why have you not obeyed your father? 6. I have obeyed
him (lut). 7. Have you not laughed at my mistakes 1 8. I have
not laughed at your mistakes. 9. Has the young man laughed at
the painter's mistakes? 10. He has not laughed at his mistakes.
1 1. Has your saddler laughed at your cousin's misfortunes ? 12. He
has not laughed at his misfortuiies. 13. Do you ever laugh at the
misfortunes of others ? 14. We never laiigh at oui neighbor's mis-
fortunes. 15. Do you remember the lesson which you learnt yes*
terday ? 18. I do not remember it (jen), 17. Does that young lady
reremUe her mother? 18. She does not resemble hr mothac
Digitized
by Google
&S8«01I LXYIX. fit
19. Kiv« yon thanked ycnr friend for his kindnMs? 90. I hsvt
thanked Ulm for it 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read
that book? 32. She has forbidden it (mc To). 28. Why do you
not forgive your enemies t 24. I forgive them with all ihy heart
26. Do yon not think of your duties? 26. I think of them (y) every
day. 27. Have you congratulated your friend? 28. I havecongrato*
lated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those gen
tlemen? 80. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house
suit you ? 82. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33.
Doea that house suit the painter ? 34. It suits him very well, but it
is too small for me. 85. My father has forbidden my speaking to
that gentleman.
LESSON LXXIX. LEQON LXXTT,
BxoiMBN or Asjsonyss. ({ 87.)
1. The regimen or complement of an adjective is generally a
noun or a verb completing its signification. This regimen is usually
connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition.
2. lliat preposition is often different in French from that connecting
the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [J 87,(1.) (3.)].
8. When an adjective follows the verb itre^ used unipersonally,
the preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [{ 87,
(4.)]:-
n est n6oe8ish« de travafller pour Jt is necessary tc labor in order Is
vivre. Uoe. •
4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, { 88, 89, 00, reach
their regimen through prepositions, different in French and Eng
lish^-
Amoureux de, if» love M6oontent de, displeased Propre k^JU for
wUk toUh ReboUe k, rebeUious tow*
ChAri de, belooed by Reconnaissant d»y grate- ards
Content de, pleased wilk ful for Bon pour, kvnd towarde
I>6tol« de, grieved for BempU de, fiUed toith Insolent aveo, insolefU
FachA de, sorry for Bon &, good for tmoards
Inquietde, wieasy about Cruel k, eruel toufords Poll ennrers, peUte to
Vm^^intoxieaied with Exact k, exact m
BteUMft OF EXAMPLIS.
N'Mee-voos pas content de vos pr>
grtal
^en suls fort content
totre domestique est-ll exact h
ruDplirsesderoiisI
Are you not pleased imtk ymm pro*
gresil
I am very metek pUa$ed wUk U,
Js yonr serwwl exact in fMObag
Ad^dSes?
Digitized'
i%£ioogIc
914
LMBBOV LZXIX*
Ana^TOTU rempll de Tin oette boa-
tfiillel
Avcz-voii« rempli d'argent votre
boni-sel
Jo Tea ai rempUe.
I] e)»t trds fucile de bUmcr les ac-
tions d'autrut.
11 <*sl glorieux de mourir pour sa
patrie.
II est plus arable de voyager en
6t6 qa'en hiver.
Hare ifon JUled your purse irilM
moneif 7
i have JUIedil Kith it.
It is very easy to blame t}e aclitnu
cf others.
II %s gioruna to die far ime*s countt f .
// is more agreeable to travel in
mer than in winter.
EXBRCISB 155.
Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cit/ Bois-&-briller, m. ^rv-Nettoy-er, 1. to cfean;
dawn; wood; Vew^\e, m. people ;
Achat, m. purchase ; Chagrin6, c, vexed; Ponimier, m. apple-lreg;
Arraeh-er, 1. to imtf Encre, f. nU' ; Trunhr, m. plum4reei
up ; Fendre, 4. to deave^ split; Roi, ra. inng ;
' ' --..-. Sci-er 1. tosow;
Tonneau. cask.
Aubergisto, m. iiniifcttjp- Ololre, f.^lary;
er; Libert*, f. liberty;
1. Ce h^roa n'6tait-il pas amoureux de la liberty et de la gloire ?
2. II en 6tait amoureux. 3. Ce roi n'etait-il pas cheri de son
peuple 7 4. II en 6tait ch^ri. 6. Ces negociants ne sont-ils pas
contents de leur achat t 6. lis n'en sont pas contents. 7. N'^tea-
vous pas chagrin^ de ne pouvoir nous accompagner t ^ 8. J'en suis
dosole. 9. Savez-vous de quoi Taubergiste a rempli ce tonneau 1
10. II I'a rempli de vin. 11. De quoi ferez-vous remplir cette
bouteille, qnand vous Taurez fait nettoyer? 12. Elle est dejai
remph'e d^encre. 13. N'^tes-vous pas bicn t^\\k d'avoir fait abattre
vospomroiers? 14. J^en suis blen content^car ils n'etaient bons &
rien. 15. N'e«t-il pas n^essaire de faire arracher ces pruniers*
16. II n*est pas ncccssaire de les faire arracher. 17. Est-il possible
de fcndre ce morccau de bois? 18. II est possible de le fendre.
19. Etes-vous exact k nettoyer vos habits ? 20. J'y suis tr^s exact
21. De quoi avez-vous rempli votre bourse? 22. Je Tai rcmplie
d'argent. 23. Est-il ndcessaire de faire scier votre bois-&-br(iler 1
24, U est n^essaire dele faire scier. 25. N*6tes-vou9 pas reconnaissant
dea services qu'on vous rend ? 26. Ten suis tr6s rcconnaissant.
Exercise 156.
1. Are you not grieved with having lost your money ? 2. I am
vexed that I have lost my purso. 3. With what will you fill lUat
bottle ? 4. I will have it filled with ink. 5. Is it not necessary to
have our wood sawed? 6. It is necessary to have our fire- wood
nwwL 7. YoorfudraktoonudltUitnotiiiMMMUCjtobaveMiae
' ^ Digitized by Google
LXB80V LXXZ. 311^
ftmii-tiees palled ontl 8. It is necessary to have some plum-tree*
cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver? 10. I
have filled it with gold. 11. Arc all your bottles filled with vino!
l± Tii^y arc all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled
your bottles with ink 1 14. I am glad to have filled them witli ink,
for [ want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. I am
pleased with it 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good
for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children? 20. She is
beloved by her fneuds and by her children. 21. Are you grateful
for those services ? 22. I am grateful for them. 23. Is It not possi-
ble to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it.
25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not so agreeable to
travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others.
88. Is it not glorious to die for one's country ? 29. It is glorious to
live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand
(encrier) with it ? 31. I have filled it with it. 32. Would it not bo
oecessary to pull up ail those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary
to pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 84. Heniy tba
fourth {quatre) was beloved by his people.
-, — ^ •»■
LESSON LXXX. LBgON LXXX.
OOYBRXMENT OF PRSPOSTTIOKS, ETC. (} 139.)
1. Some prepositions govern the nouns which follow them, without
the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before {at an earlier period)^
[j 142, (1.)] devant, before (opposite place\ [} 142, (1.)] derri^re,
hehijid; chez, at the house of; concemant, touching; except^, except;
outre, besides; selon, according to; voici, here is; volU, there t«, cte
[5 139, (1.)].
2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their objeci
by means of the preposition de : — liors de, out of; loin ^^^ far from ,
& fir.ur de, e\:en with ; & force de, by dint of; k I'egard de, with regard
to; k Pinsu de, without the knowledge rf^ unknown to ; k raison de, at
(he rate cf; an de^a de, this way of; an deli de, that way of [} 139,
2.].
3. Others take k — quant i, as far ; jusqu'k, as far as, etc. [} 1 39, 3.].
4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions may in French
flftve a regimen in common, provided they gorem in the same masam
•r case [} 92, (1.) (2.) \ 140^ and { 133.] :—
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
91d
LC886ir LXXX.
We loot and fndm 0itr ddldmL
That garden is vsefid and agrteeik
to imrfalker,
WUkin or without the kingdom.
VcroM aimoiif et nous loaona not
en&nU.
Ce Jardin est utile et agrtoble k
Dotre p6re.
Au deduis oil an dehors da roy-
anme.
6. When, however, two or more verbs, adjeetives or prepositions
coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen
n the same manner, thej cannot have a regimen in common. The
regimen must be repeated, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not.
therefore, be translated literally into French : —
That man is useful to and loved by kis family-^I write to and recfivi
letters from my brothers— TT? be exposed to or sheltered from the rain. We
must say: —
Oet homme est utile k sa famiUe,
et 11 en est atm6.
J'Acris des lettres k men frftre, et
J'enre^ois delui.
Eire ezposA 4 U pluie, on en Atra
aTabrl
T^at man is usrful to his famHii^ and
he is beloved by them.
I write letters to my brother ^ and re-
ceive same from him.
To be exposed to the rain^ or to be
sheltered from u.
Utile and aim6, 6crire and recevour, ezpos^ and k rabri, take di&
ferent regimens.
Nous sommes arrives avant la ba-
taille.
Vous vous asseyes to^Jours devant
mol-
lies avez-vous plftc6s sur la table 1
Je les a! plac6s dessous.
Je les ai mis sous la chaise ou des-
sus.
Us demeurent derridre notre mai-
8on.
J'ai louA une chambre de derri^re.
Nous occupoDs le devant de la mai-
son.
Je les ai rencontrfo derriftre votre
Jardin.
Vous avea achet6 oette terre k
Vinsu de votre pdre.
J'ai pay6 ce Jardhiier k raison de
d'^^K fVanos par Jour.
RiaiTM^ OF EZAMFLSB.
We arrived before the batUe,
Yon always sit before me.
Have you placed them upon the toNef
I have placed them wnder.
Jhuveput them under the chair or
upon it.
7%ey lived behind our house.
J have rented a back room.
We occupy the front of the house.
I met them behind your garden.
You have bought that estate withoH
the knowk^e of your father,
I paid the gardener at the rate efbma
francs per day.
ExBRClSX 157.
Assiette, f. fOote ; Dehors, MOitd^e, wifibM^; Dessous, under^ widfr
0o4t«r, \. to cost; Deniteo, del back g Ut
JMssm^ tntidtt wiihim Devant, m.>ViMU/ Vmm, ahove, ufon U $
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
i»it«oii hzzh tlT
■^nrWMr. 1 * h$m$ Bon. ^tUf ^mtmt dt Un% t §^
rich ; Plat, m. disk ; iato;
Hectolitre, m 100 2i/ref ; Snr, iipm, «ImiI.
1. N^avez-voas pM feno6 la porte de dcTantt 2. Nona TaTODa
ferm^c, maia Doaa n'lvona pas feim^ la porte de derri&re. 3. Qui
eat arrivS avant moi ? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis decant la fen^tre.
6. Qui demeure derri^re votre maison ? 6. II n'y a point de maison
derri^re la nAtre. 7. Ne p^sez-vous pas qu*k force de travailler, il
■*enrichirat 8. Je ne crois pas quUl s'ennchi&se, s*il vend sea mar-
chandises ^ ai bon marche. 9. Apprend-il la musique ^ Tinsu de sea
parents? 10. II Tapprend k leur insu. 11. Vous ^tes vous mari^
k rinsu de votre soeur? 12. Jo me suis marie ^ son insu. 13.
Notre ami n*est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. U n*est paa
hors de la ville,il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de I'argent sur vousl^
16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demearez«voua aur le der-
H^ on sur le devant de la maison % 18. Nous demeurons aor le do*
vant 19. La cuisini^re a-t-elle mis lea aasiettes sur la table oa
dessous I 20. Elles a mis les aasiettes, les plats, les cnill^res et lea
fouwhetiea sut la table. 21. Combien cea pommes-de-terre Toua
eo&tent-ellea 1 22. Je ?es ai achet^s ^ raison deeinq franea ThectA-
litre. 23. Ayez Tooa &it r^parer le dedans oa le iahora de la mai*
eon 1 24. Tai fait reparer Tinterieur et rext^rieur.
ExxRCiBx 158.
I. Have j%vi bought that house without your father'a knowledge 1
S. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten
to shut the front door 1 4. I have shut the front door and the back
door. 6. I have brought all my books except two or three. 6. Doea
your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupies the
back. 8. Whom have you met behind that house ? 9. 1 met nobody
behind the house. 10. DoesUhat gentleman live behind your house!
11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no house behmd
yoon. 13. Hare you a knife about you ? 14. 1 have no knife about
ne. • 15. Do you carry a knife about you? 16. I never cairy |i
knifb about me. 17. Haa not your brother money about him? 18.
He haa no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils upon
the table» or under it! 20. I will put them in the drawer (jLiroir)*
21. How much have you given for that whcj^t! 22. 1 bought it at
the rate of twenty*ftve franca the hectolitre. '*28. la that Iidy*a konae
>nt of the city ! 24. It ia not out of the city ; it is within. 25. liae
m4 your aiat»r placed the plaM'' upon the tabic ! 26. She haa pot
Iho plalcn mfm tiie tables and tiie apoone under it 27. Have y«n
*^ Digitized by Google
tli LlSiOV hXXXL
bad your bouse repairad! 38. I hare had the inaida repaived, Vat
Dol the ontaide. 29. How much d(>C8 that silk comI you f 30. J
have bought it at the rnte of live francs thv metre. 31. Did you
marry wilhoui your father's knowtedgu ? 32. I married wiiliout hi«
knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without my knowledge^
84. I sold them without your knowledge. 85. 1 sold them without
my aiater'a knowledge. .
LESSON LXXXI. LEgON LXXXI.
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. (^ 108.)
1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun t^, used before
the verb to fo, in such sentences as, it ia l^it is ihtm, die. The latter
pronouns (/, thau^ die.) are rendered by moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous,
eux, m., elles, f. The verb remains in the singular, except when the
pronoun following it is in the third person plural; in which case it
nay be put in the plural or in the singular [} 116, (2.)]. If the
pronoun is followed by quij the verb is better in the plural, and, if
followed by que^ in the singular : —
Cost moi, c'est lui, c'est elle. It is /, il is Af, il isshe,
Ce sont elles qui parlent // is iJiey who speak,
O'est elles que nous cherchons. U is they whom %c€ seek.
2. If the relative pronoun qui and another verb follow ttre^ this
aecond verb must agree in number and person with the pronoun
preceding the relative : —
C'est vous qui avez fait cela. R is you have done that.
C'est nous qui avona d6chird cette II is we who have torn that sUk,
sole.
8. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used abaolntely, bat
not unipersonally before the verb to be [} 108, (A.)] :—
Ce fut en Allcmagne qu'il trouva It was in Germany that he found w
BOO ami friend.
4. Celui qui, celle qui, ccux qui, m., colles qui, f., are equivalent U
the English pronouns, he who, she who, they vAo— eelui que, oeile que
eeuz que, eelles que, render he wkom^ 4«.
Celui ou celle qui cbante. He or she who sings.
Bi&BVMt OF Examples.
Bat-ce vous qui nous avei avert! de | A i^ you whohatewamed uso/Aief
oelal I
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
itSBSoa tuxtv
n.9
t ^pA TOW 60 ftrons ftTSfti.
^t-ou vouH, moifUames, qiie uous
ttv«HiK ivni*oiitr64.fi 1
Cc iruttt |Miit nous, c'ost eux quo
vous awx vna.
Ue u'em |«» voos, co sont eux qui
out fait cvla.
CTeat en Anglcteiro que Je vona ai^
Connaisscz-voua oos deux Fortu-
gaial
Je comiaia celai qui parte & M. L.
is U yim, ladies^ wkom we have met?
a is notice; ilis ikeywhtnn you Atfut
It isnoiyoui UisiheyiBka hn^ dem
thai.
Risin England tkal J tarn you.
Do you know those two PoHu^^uesi 7
i know km who tpetUu to dtr, L,
EXKRCISK 159.
Gonnaissance, f. aequain- De temps eu tempa,/rvai
tance ; titne to timeg
Expliqn-cr, 1. toexptain; No. number ;
Guerre, f. v:ar; Phrase, f. senlewces
De-jour CD jour,/r<nii^yPr61ud-er, 1. to prelude,
to days
Appel-er, 1. to cdU ;
A-toute-force, by all
mtans;
Avert-ir, 1. to wami
Blcmure, f wountl;
Cooibl-er, 1. to over*
whelm;
1. Est-ce tous, Madame, qui avez appeld votre domeatique? 2. Ce
n*esi paa moi qui Tai appele. 3. Eat-ce voua man ami qui voulez
k toute force aller en Espa^e? 4. Ce n'eat paa moi,c*e8t mon couain.
5. N*cst-ce pas lui qui a avvrti ce matelot de aon danger ? 6. Ce n*eat
paa lui, c*eat moi qui l*en oi averti. 7. Eat-ce noua que voua atten-
dez de jour en jour? 8. Ce n*est paa voua, c*C3t eux que j^attenda.
9. EaWe voua, Madame, qui nous avez combleea de bienfaitat 10.
Ce nVat paa moi, Madame. 11. N*e8t4*e paa en Italie que voua avez
fait connaiaaanoe avec lui ? 12. Ce n'eat pas en Italie ; c'est en Ruaale.
13. Eat-ee voua, Meadames, ou vos cousinea que noua avona vuea an
bal ? 14. Ceat nous, ce n'eat paa noa cousinea que voua avez vuea.
15. Ne connaiaaez-voua paa ceadeux meaaieura? 16. Je connaia celni
qui parle a Madame L 17. Eat-ce vous qui avez re9u une bleaaure
k la guerre? 18. Ce n'eat paa moi, c'est mon voiain. 19. N'eat-co
paa vous qui noua avez explique cotte phrase? 30. Eat-ce voua, Men*
aieur, qui demenrez au N**- 18? 31. Ce n*est pas moi qui y domeure^
22. Entendez-vous cea musicienn? 33. J*entenda celul qui chante.
84. Je n*enteuda poa bien celoi qui joue. 25. Nona entendons ceu .
qui preludeuU
ExRRcni 160.
1. la it you, my friend, who have warned me of my danger? 2. It
b not I who have warned you of it 3. Is it they whom yon expoet
finxa day to day ? 4. It U not they whom we expect 5. la it yoa
wiM> have done thia? & It is not wo ; it ia yoa who bave diNM it
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
% Was It In Engbnd that ]roa bought this hat! •. Itwas iNrtni
Eng^lanil ; it u as in Germany. 9. Was it not in Russia that yoii be-
came acquainted with himl 10. It was not in Rusnia; it was in
Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us? 12. It was not wo: H
was Ik. 18. Are yon not acquainted with the two Poles who are
reading 1 14. 1 know the one who is near you. 15. Is that (es^-ce U)
the bdy wliom you expected? 16. It is not (she). 17. U it you,
gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness? 18. It is not
(vi*e). Sir; we have not the pleaaure of knowing him. 19. Is it yon
who have been wounded in the (au) arm? 30. It is not (}), 31. Do
you not hear those two Udies? 23. 1 do not hear the one who sings.
98. i hear the one who plays. 24. Was it you who came to oar
house this morning? 35. It was not I; I was in London Uien (alon).
36. Was it you, Sir, who did us that favor? 27. It was not (I) ; it
was my sister. 38. Was it your son who wished by all means to go
to London ? 39. It was not he ; he is now in Germany. 30. Is it you
who wrote that letter? 81. We have written no lotter. 83. Who
lives at (au) No. 30? 88. 1 live there (c'est moi). 84. Is it we whom
you havo seen? 85. It was not you whom I saw.
LESSON LXXXIL LBgOJT LXXXIL
I. The pronoun 00 (and not the pronouns r/, ^Ue^ ^bc), must b«
used for he^ sfte, tkey^ coming before the verb to fe, when that verb m
followed by a noun, or an adjective used substantively, ffreeeded by
the, a or an, hj9ome or any understood, or by a jk-^sssesrive or denun^
Mlrativeadjeclive. Wlien the word used in apposition with ee is plural,
and in the third person, the verb is pot in the plural, although e$ r^
mains unchanged [} 108, (3.) (8.)] : —
Cert mi Polonais. He it a Pdt.
Ce soBt dcs Anglais. 7%ey am EngUskmen,
C'est cotte dame qui m'a parl6 de vons. // is thai lady who tpoU U ma tfymk.
3. Ce is used as the nominative of the verb 6tre, in sentences JUo
be foOowing, and the conjunction que is used idiomatically after iL
Tho verb in this case is not put in the plural :— "^
Qu'est-ce-que oes enfknts 1 What am thou ekiidrp^T
Qu'estrce-que I'ltalie 1 Whnl is Italy ?
Qn'cst-ce-qne le Jardbiage ? What u gardening ?
8. Qu4 is used idiomatically in a number of senteneea. In tht
following it gives greater force to the expression : —
Ce tODt de bons llvres que les v6tres. Yours are indeed good IwaJhl
JoMqoeovl; JecrsisqQSMBi ieagfeti iStlitmm$
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
hUBumn hMtxii.
R£sum£ of Examplks.
Qui soDt ces lueasieun qui uarleut
a M. L. 1
C« Mmt tnes ooasins, qoi vienneiU
d'arrivor.
De quel imys sont ces marchands 1
Cesont des Poiooato} ila viennent
d'arrircr.
Ua Qe aoDt pas pokmaia; IJi aont
nissca.
€e ne Mmt pas des Poloiiali ; ee lODt
deaRoMea.
Qn'e9t-oe que la Tonrainol
Cest le Janlln dc la France.
Voire fetidtre ne d<mix>-t-ene pas
■aria rue 1
Kon, c'cat sur la eear qa*e]1c donne.
Je ciois que oui j Je cruis que uon.
W/i4f are ike gentiemen wht spe^ i§
Mr. L. 7
l^eff are my causinSf who mt pai
arrived.
Of lehal country are i/uttewmekanti?
Tliev are Potest tkey tffv imi ar-
tited.
T&tjf are nal Poie$i tUp eon. Bit$^
sians,
Thejf are not Polet ; ikef e^rt Jftu-
\VhatisT\nuraine?
His the garden of France,
Does not four window Mt on Hk
slreei?
NOf U looks on ike yard,
J believe Uf; I believe not.
EXXRCISB 101.
Brif-er» 1. io break ; fitranger, e, foreign ; Soiarict, f. p. t3k Uygki
Charron, m. wAeelwrigkd Fenitrc, f. window t Bucre, m. sugar i
Confiturcti, t. p. fre- Lyon, Lwms; Suisse, Siciss;
serves f MouchoLr, m. Aafu&ter- Surprend-re, 4. ir, 10
Doon^r, 1. to give, looks chief; caUh, surprise ;
ficonais, o, Scotch s Boae» f. wheels Vol-er, 1. to steal
1. Connoissez-voua ces ^traDgerst 3. Oni, Monsieur, ce aont lea
fr^rea de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-ll pas dcossois? 4. Non, Hon-
lieur, ila aont saiases. 5. Ne sontce point des ficossais qui voua
ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, Monsieur, ce sent des
Suisses. 7. N'estpce pas voire domestique qui vous a vole du vin!
S. Ce n*eat paa lut, c'est son fr^re. 9. N'est-ee pas hii qui a pris vos
confitures? 10. Ce n'cst pas lui; ce sowt aes enfants. 11. Ne
•ont^ce pas 1^ lea enfimts que vous avez surpris k volcr votre sucre I
12. Ce sont leurs fir^res. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins 1 14. lis ne
sent pas cousins; ils sont fr^res. 15. QuVst-ce-que ccs soierics?
16. Ce sont des marchandises qu*on vient de nous envoycr. 17.
N^est^e pas une belle villo que Lyon? 18. Cest une grande et
- die lille. 19. N*est-ce pas la le mouchoir que vous avez perdu I
10. Jeerois que oui. 21. N*est-ce pas sur le jardin qne donncut vca
fendtres? 22. Oui, ^lonsieur, c*est sur le jardin qu*elies donnent
23. N'iestrce pas notre eharron qui a fait cctte roue? 24. Ce n*est
pas lui qui Ta faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis, qui Tont bnsee ti e^eat
la menuisier qui Fa faite.
ExBROiss 162.
L Is thai liCdy your firiend's sister? 9. No, Sir, sht is a atraagcr
I' WlioamtiMtwocaDtieiiieiiwhdareapsddngto jr«iirrislarl 4^
Digitized
by Google
tat tatiox txxxttu
They nre Swtss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom toq
have invited? i. It is they (eux), 7. Do you not know that m.in^
8. I know him very well ; he is the man who has stolen my wine.
9. What is Italy? 10. It U tlie giirden of Europe. 11. Is not th«l
the letter which you intended to cxu-ry to tlie post-oflice? 12. Noi,
Sir, it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre fine? 14. Yea, Sir
ilavre is traly a large and beautifnl city. 15. Is not that the ma
whom you have caught stealing your fruit? 16. It is not, it is an
other. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought ? 18. Yes, Sif, I
believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on the street!
30. No, Bladam, they look on the garden. 21. Do not the windows of
your dining-room look on the yard (cour) 1 22. No, Sir, they look
on the hike (he). 23. Is it that litt!'* child who has taken your pro-
servos ? 24. It is Ills brother or his sister. 25. What arc those en-
gravings ? 26. They are engravings which I bought in Germany.
27. Are those gentlemen Scotch ? 28. They are not Scotch ; they
are Italian. 29. Are those ladies Scotch? 30. No; they are the
Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is h irseille? 32. It
is one of the finest eities in (de) France. 33. Is it *ot youi tailor
who made that coat? 34. Ills not he; it is an En^ di tailor who
made it 35. It is your friend who broke my watch.
LESSON LXXXni. LEgON LXXXIIL
1. In French, as in other languages, when a verb has two subjects
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [} 114, (2.)] : —
L*onclc et la tante sent arrivds. 7^ke unde and aurU are arrived,
2. Wlien a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it
is put in the plural, and assumes the termin.ition of the first person
nitlic! than that of the second or third, and the termination of the
second in preference to that of the third : —
Vons et moi irons demain d la chasse. You and I viU go kwniing It^^mmrow.
Vitus -.^t lui irez demsiin a I ecnic. Yon and he tniUgn tnsrjiikti fit-mon.nff.
Ba indru i>t moi nous avons 6crit Ills mttLkcr and I have written UuU
cutttt Ictti-c. letter.
3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has sevend
ftubjeets, all of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouna^
the words moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of je, tu, il, ils. A pro-
noun reciqiitulating the others, may, as in the Ustexamplei be placed
immediaUly Ufore the verb [{ 33, (10.) (U.)].
Digitized
by Google
&I880V &ZXltIL
4 Fw farUw/ rnlea on this subject, see { 114 and 116, and also
Dj) next lesson.
6. Gtoer eorresponds in signification to tlie English to twubk^ to
twommodef to disiiarl^y to be in the toay^ and to hurt (in speaking ef
ikon mid garmenis). Se g4ner means to constraint or troubU md$
Sst-ce-que je vons g^nel Asi^Iin ftntr wcy?
R^suicfi OF Examples.
on irea-ToiiSy Totre irftro et tous 1
Ini et moi irons en Angleterro.
Vons, eUe ct lui, vons acLdtcrez da
hU.
Biix et moi, nons sommes fidt mal
a la tdte.
Tons et lul. rons dcvriez vons pra-
ter aux circonstances (se pr4ter}.
Lni et moi, tous gftnerons sans
doute.
Ma consine et moi, nous craignons
de vousgAner.
Je ne me g6ne Jamais ches aes
smis.
Ne V01IS gftnez pss; mettez-vous &
votrc atse.
Nous n'aimoDS pas k gftner les au-
tres.
Nous n'aimons pas & nous gdoer.
When vriU you go, your krwtim mid
you?
He and I nf ill go to Knglani,
You J she and & vrill buy wheat.
They and I have hurt our heads.
You and he should adapt yoursdves
to circumstances.
He and I wilt without doubt ineom^
mode 1JOU,
My cousin and I fear to be in yous
way.
I am never under constraint with my
friends.
Be under no constraint ; place your'
self comfortably.
We do not Wee to incommode ethers*
We do not like to incommode ouT"
sdves.
EXERCISB 163.
A perte, at a loss; Nullement,^ n^ means t Prodigue, prodigal, Imh
A profit, with a profit f Pardon, excuse Tne ; ish ;
Bras, arm; Porsist-er, 1. ^ jperju^ ; 8ociet4, f. company^ so*
D6rang-cr, 1. to disturb; Place, f. roam ; dely ;
ficonome, economical ; Tous deux, both.
1. Si nous rcstions pins longtemps ici, nous craindrions do tous
g^ner. 2. Vons ne nous g*nez nullement; votre societ6 nous est
tria ngr6nblo. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigucs, vous et votre
fitre? 4 Lui ct moi au contraire, nous avons cte tr^s 6coiiomcs.
6. N'awz-vouH pas tort de goner ce inon.situr? 6. Nous n*avons
DuIIemcnt envie de le geiier. 7. Esi-ce-que mon bras vous gSne,
Monsieur? 8. Non, Monsieur; nous uvons assez de place, vous ne
me g6nez paa. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous prdter anx cireoo-
stances 1 10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nova y
plater. 11. Ce jettoe homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution f ISi
Nans J peraiatoasy lui at moL 18. Peiaist6ft>yoiis tons deoz & mt
Digitized
by Google
%m Ml 14 HmiM y p«ni«toiis torn deox. 19. C0I h^MM etM
g6n6 dans tea affaires (uncomforlably silua'^d, haily o/f)t 16. F.
Malt 9606 dans sas affiiires il y a un an. 17. Ne voua ^nez paa,
Vonsianr. 1$. Je ne me g^ne jamais, Monsieur. 19. Est-er^que
aon Mrt tons derange f 20. Non, Monsieur, il ne ne demnjre paa.
SI. Je ne voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si Je voos d^
lange. 29. Vous ei votre associd avez vendu vos maiehandises 4
perte. 24 Vous et moi nous vendons toujours k profit 25. Voire
p^ra, Totre ir^re et moi nous avons achet6 des marchandiaes.
Exercise 164.
1. Do we incommode you, my brother and I? 2. No, Sir; yon
do not incommode us ; we are very glad to see you. 3. Arc you not
afraid to disturb your friend ? 4 We are afraid to disturb htm ; he
has much to do. 5. Is my foot in your way, Sir? 6. No, Sir ; your
foot is not in my way. 7. Will you and your brother go to Ger-
many this year ? 8. We intend to go there, he and I. 9. He, you
and I, should write our lessons. 10. ShoiiU you not, you and your
friends, adapt yourselves to circumstances % 11. We should do so^
if it were possible. 12. Do I not disturb ^nu, Sir? 13. You do
not disturb me by any means. 14. Does vt:^ my little boy disturb-
you? 15. He does not disturb me. 16. He Vsturbs nobody. 17
Does'not your partner sell his goods at a loss ? )i \ He never sells at
a loss. 19. He and I always sell at a profit. 9^. Do you persist in
your resolution? 21. Your friend and I persist > our resolution.
22. I never feel under constraint at your house. ^^ Be under no
constraint (make yourself at home). 24. Are you rrt wrong to in-
eommode them? 26. I do not intend to incommode tV««i. 26. We
do not like to incommode ourselves (to put ourselves out of the
way). 27. My little boy and I will, perhaps, be in yoe- vay. 28w
No, Sir; we are very glad of your company. 29. Do I dis^rrb yout
80. No, Sir; you do not disturb us. 31. Do I disturb your Hther!
82. No, Sir ; you disturb no one. 33. Excuse me, Sir, if I Ji^Mirb
ou. 34 Have you not been very lavish? 3A. No, Sir; I ouiiue
ou, that your son and I have been very economical
LESSON LXXXIV. LEgON LXXXB^
I. When a verb is preceded by several nouns not connected by ci;
il agiees witii the last only, provided the nouns are in some nvay
i^onyiaoua» «r the laiod dwell* more ibreibly upoa the last >«•
Digitized
by Google
&S«B0X *%ttir.
«s
■ His Uve, ha ttndemets fsr Mis dM^
enfknts est comiQe de toot le. drenj are known k/ every be dy.
monrlc.
Tos amis, roe pRrentt, Dion roos Yottr friends^ your rdatives, Ood
rftcompuiserft. mli reward you,
3. Wben two or more nonns are united by the conjunction ou^ the
verb agrees with the lost only : —
Charles on Qoorgo 6crira a votre Charles or Charge vHU wrils to your
ami. friend,
3. Wben a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not be«
big al] in the third person), ore joined by ou, the verb is put in the
plural : —
Vons on moi iiartirons deroain. You or I wiU go to-morrow.
Votre sfleur oa vous irez a T^glise. Your sisltr or you wUL go la ckurck
Youaott Ittiftveispaseidsooiiimettre You or ke aiene kavs prokMy €anh>
cette action. mitUd Ihis act,
4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated* or wh«i fd Tun «i
Paulre is used as nominative to a verb^ the verb is pat in the plural if
the two nouns, or the two persons represented by ni fust ni VasUref
pisrform otr may perform the action together: —
HI ran ni I'aatre ne linmt NeWUr the am mr ike other wiU fsod.
6. When, however, oniy one at a time can petform the aetlon, the
verb is put in the singular: —
Hi l*un nl I'autre ne sera nomm6 Keither ikeonenorthe other mUbe ap^
pii6fei dace department poinied prejket of iMat dipurtmsnk
B£sum£ of Examplss.
Hi l^m ni Tautre n'ont troav4 le vin
boo.
Ii'an et Tautre ont trouv6 le diner
manvais.
Comment se trouvent Mevieurs vos
friresl
Ki hin nl Vautre ne se trouvent bien.
L*an et I'autie se trouvteent auren-
doa-vous.
Ni Tun ni Tautre ne sera 61u presi-
dent.
If on oa rautre y troavera h, redlre.
Lni on vous avez trouv6 quelque
chose k redlre k notre conduits.
Ml loi ni rod n'avons trouvi a redire
k la cooduite de vos en&nts.
Neiiker iksomnartksatktrfimmd tfr
wins good.
Both found the dinner bad.
Haw da yauf bfethsrs^mdihtMSUtttf
Neither Jtnd themsdves wdl,
T^ey both found thamsskfes at thsrew
dez'Vous.
Neither will be elected president.
One or tht other wiUfind fault with U,
He or you have found something to
blame in yur condtict.
Neither he nor I have found any fauU
with your children's conduct.
Aatemvm. author i
j^roir, hl dutyi
£ZSRCI8£ 165.
Ell-re, 4. b.&x^ft:/;
Expoft-er, 1. to expose }
imAret, m, interests
10«
Fiat Alt ratksrs
Bempl.|r,2.to/i4/6/
WM;m.roaMiiS;
Digitized
by Google
fikcr&Uire, hl jeorvtory f Be troaT-er, 1 . ref. hfind VefDer, 1. 19
TrouvMjr, 1. to Jittd, to one** sdf; to be |>re#- Vic, f. U/e,
Uke^ to fancy i ent.
1. Remplissez-Tous bien votre devoir? 2. Nous ne lo rcmpiiasoni
ni Tun ni Tautre. 3. Cherchcnt-ils Tun etTautre ^ s'expoaerl 4. Ni
I'un n' Tautre ne cherchent k exposer leur vie (La Bruteke). 6. IL
Totre p^re et M»«* votre m^re, ae trouvenUils mieux aujoard*hui ? 6.
Ni Tun ni I'autre ne ae trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouv6 k re*
dire k mon 6criture ou k celle do mon aecretaire? 8. Je n'ai trcu76
k TfAlie ni \ Tune ni k Tautre. 9. Get auteur ne trouve-t-il pta k
redire k tout? 10. U trouve i redire k tous lea liiTea, IK Y
trouvez-TOUs quelque chose a redire ? 13. Ni lui ni moi n*y trouvons
rien & redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillerona k vos intSreta. 14.
Ni lui ni moi ne ceaaerona de vciller k la conduite de votre fila. 16.
Noua y vei Herons plutAt que d^y trouver k redire. 16. Lui et moi
uoua trouvimes ensemble au rendezvous. 17. Vons y trotlVerez
vooa i*UQ ou I'autre? 18. Nona nous y trouverona Tun ou Pautre.
19. L'un ou Fautre aenut-tl 61u president? 20. Ni Tun ni Tautre
ne aera 61u. 31. Comment tronvez-vons ce r6ti? 33. Je le trouve
excellent 38. Je trouve ee livre bon. 34. Je ne le trouve pas bon
26. Je trouve ceU bien fiiit
ExsRciSB 166.
1. How do you like that book? 3. Neither my sister nor I like
it. 3. Did your brothers find the dinner good ? 4. Both found it
very good. 6. Did the professor find fault with your conduct ? 6.
He did not find fault with it 7. Neither he nor my father find
fault with my conduct 8. Do they both watch over your conduct 1
9. They both watch over my conduct and over my interests. 10.
Have you both fulfilled your duty? 11. We have fulfilled it 12.
Have you not both criticised my writing? 13. Neither has criticised
it 14. Do not your two sisters find themselves better to-day ? 16.
One finds herself better. 16. The other does not find herself so
well 17. Do not those ladies find fault with every thing ? 18. They
find fault with nothing. 19. Will either be elected prefect of the
Dej'artment? 20. Neither will be elected. 31. How do you like
this bread ? 22. I find it very good. 23. Did your two friends ar-
rive in time at the appointed place ? 24. Neither was there in (d)
time. 26. Do you find fault with that (ccla) ? 26. I do not find
fault with it (y). 27. Will you both expose yourselves to this dan-
ger? 38. We will not expose ourselves to it 29. Do yon find fault
with my aeeretaij'a condnat ? 80. I do not find faolt wUb it 81.
Digitized
by Google
LKISOir LX3tXT. S2T
Do ymi ffni firalt with his writing? 32. I find fiiuU with it; for fit
b very bod. 33. Will you not watch over my interests 1 84. Mr
brother and I will watch over them. 85. We will not cease to waleft
over Toor interests.
LESSON LXXXV. USgON LXXXV.
1. A verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [{ 8, (6.)]
fioeeded by the article, agrees with the noun [} 115, (1.)] : —
La funle des paurres est grande. 7^ crowd of Out poor is great,
2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [{ 3, (6.)] takes the
number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be papu
ticulariy directed to the collective itself [{ 116, (2.)] : —
Une foule de panvres resolvent A crowd of poor people receive assut-^
des secours. ance.
3. The words, la plupart, mast ; un nombre, a number, &e., and
the adverbs of quantity, pen, assez, beaucoup, plus, moins, trop, tanti
eombien, belong to this class.
4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to June left.
The adverbial expression de reete is often used in the same maimtr
m the English word left : —
B me reste deux fVancs. I have two francs 2^/1— or literally
There remaiM to me twofranes.
Nous avons cinqnante tens de reste. We have fifty crowns left,
5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with 6tre as an auxiliary, correapooda
in signification to the English to become, followed by cf. It is also
Englished by to become, or simply to turn : —
Qu'est devenu votro frftre 1 What has become of jfowr brother 7
II est en France, ct est devenu He is in Prance^ and has twmed lat^
avocat. yer.
R£suMfi OF Examples.
Most of my hours are devoted to laftor.
lift plupart de mes heures sent
consacr6c8 au travail.
I«a foule des humains est voute au
malhenr.
La plus grande iiartic des voyageurs
le diseut, ct le r6pdtent
Ke VOU8 resto-t-!l que cela 1
YoUi tout oe qu'il me reste.
Je no sals oe qu'ils sont devenus.
it M tab oe que vons devlendres.
T%e mass of mankind is devcted to
misfortune.
The greatest number of trtneOert
say it, and repeal U,
Have you only that left 7
ThaiisaUihail hMoeUfL
I do not know tohat has become ef
them.
Jdonotknowwhatwittbeemeefifen
Digitized
by Google
n§ »t»i0* ^MUKV.
ExsRczsB 1G7.
g'appUqiter, U raf. <»Cbemin,m.iM3r,fMJ; Hahne, ifc^i
a|i;i^v; g68ol-er, 1. to dfSoUUe; Maigre, /Aim, ^mm;
Appreiiti, m. apprmUee ; £gar-er, 1. ^ nuijay ; NaUsance, f HriX $
Avuufile, blind ; Eniplettcs, f. p. yurcha- Rue, f. sTrw/ ;
Baeatelle, f. iriJU ; ^ '^ ' Savant^ a, leanwrf.
Boiteux, 06, lame ; Etat, m. trade g
I. La plopart de Toa parenta ne aont-ila paa T«niia wua Toirf SL
Beaacoup sont venua. 8. Que aont devenoa leaantreat 4. Je na
aaaraia voua dire ce qu^Oa aont devenaa. 6. Que deviendim ee Jeine
liomine a*il ne a'l^plique paa k F^tude t 6. Je ne aata paa oe qxCfl
deviendra. 7. Je aaia qu'il ne deviendra jamaia aavant. 8. Comblen
de franca avez-voua de reate ? 9. II no me reate qu*un franc. IOl
Combien Toua re&tera-t-il quand voua anrez fait voa emplettea! 1 1.
n ne me restcra qu'une bagatelle. 12. Get apprenti est-il devenu
habile dans aon 6tat? 13. D y est devenu habile. 14. Ce monsieur
eat-il aveugle de naiaaanee, on Test-il devenu? 15. II Test devenu.
16. Savez-voua ee quo sont devenua cea jeunea gena? 17. lis aont
devenua medecins. 18. Ne savez-voua paa ce que aont devenua mea
livreat 19. Da aont.^gar^a. SO. Ne deviendrez-voua paa boiteux si
Toua marchez tant? 31. Je deviendrai boiteux et moigre. 23. La
fonle ne a^eat^lle paa 6gar6e dana ce boia? 33. La foule a^y est
Igai^ et n'a pu ratrouver aon chemin. 34. Une na^ de barbarea
d^aol^reni le paya. (Acad.) 25. Une foule de eitoyc^na ruin^
rempliaaaient lea mea de Stockholm. (Voltaiks.)
EzsRCXSK 168.
1. Hati) not most of your friends become rich ? 3. Most of them
have become poor. 3. Has not that young lady become learned ?
4. I think that she will never become learned. 5. la not the Ameri-
can army (armSe) very amall 1 6. The American army ia amali, but
moat of the American aoldiera are very brave (braves). 7. Can yoa
tell me what has beeome of that gentleman ? 8. I cannot tell yoa
what has become of him. 9. Is your brother blind by birth (wai
your brother born blind)? 10. No, Sir, he has become so. 11.
Were you bom lame ? 13. No, Sir, I became so three years ago (rl
y a). 13. Are not most of your hours devoted to play (jeu, ni.) ? .
14. No, Sir, they are devoted to study. 15. How much of your
money have you left? 16. I have only twenty-five franca left. 17»
Do you know how much I have left? 18. Yon have only a trifle
Wft 19. How much ahall yon have left to-morrow? 30. I aluil!
anlr bava aix ikaiioa lafi 31. I ahall osly have two fraaaa left wImmi
Digitized
by Google
»M9«ir itt«««. •»
I hn% aadft ny fmnhmtn. UL What has beeone of y«w
OMT T SS. I have mislaid it 24. Do yon know what has beeoma
of my htoti a& Yoa have left (kdste) it upon tba table. 9a WiU
•ot that gentleman beeome blind? 37. He will not become bh'nd»
bot lame. 38. Has your son beeome skilful in his trade ? 39. He
has not beeome dcilful in it. 80. What has become of him 1 81.
He has lost his way in the wood. 33. Did the crowd lose its wa^ !
8S. Most of the soldiers lost their way. 84. A elood of locnste
(mnUtteOeg) desolated our eoontiy.
LESSON LXXXVI. LBpON LXXXVI.
1. The articie, the demonstrative and the possessivo a^jeethrea,
most be repeated, as before said, before every nonn or adjective used
aobstantively, which they determine [} 80, 93, 31].
3. The prepositions d, ie, and en, are repeated before every word
which they govern [} 141].
8. The verb quitter, to leave (to quit)^ is said of persons an4^
plaees, and also of things in the sense of to abaiidont to give up : —
Tons aves qaitt4 vos parents et vos You have left your rtUUioni one
amis. friends.
Hons avons qaltt6 nos 6tnde«^ We have discomtiwiud ew iNdiH
4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how
ever said of persons in the sense of to euffer to remain .*^-
Tons aves laissi votre livre'sur la You left your hook upoik tke toMe.
table.
The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verba.
BiteUlflb OF EZAMPLBS.
JTanrea voas psa qnittA^ votre mai-
sonl
J^ai quitft4 mon pays et mes parents.
J*ai hiis86 ma biblothdqnc en Eu-
rope.
Ne vonlcz-vou9 pes laisser votre flls
ici 1
Je n'aime pas ii le quitter.
J'ei laiss6 votre lettre a son domes-
tSque.
lion pk« m'alaisitdnquantemille
Baiee fou nU kft year keem?
I have left my amnlry amd f fMlen
I left my library in Europe,
WiUyounot leave your son kef e?
I do not Kke to ptit km,
I left your letter wUk hie stevmeL
My f taker left me fifty iUueuue
framee.
Digitized
by Google
H kms 9f l«Ls86 la chnnp libra.
Oe malade a quitbS le lit.
Votre fVdrQ a quiU6 le barreao.
Je Tons laiflferai ee chapeaa ji oe
pruc
/ have kfi tkem a free ekmee ( Jht
room). '
ThxU sick man has le/l his bed.
Your brother has left the bar.
I wiUletfou hax-e that hoi eAtim
price.
EscsRciSB 169.
A bon a)mpte, cheaps Mativais, e, bad; .^ Pension, f. hoardings
' Qarte. f- card; Moins, ksss school;
fip6e, f. swordf army (fig- Noyau, m. fruU-^Ume; Portier, m. parUr 9
uratively). Pourquoi, wAv ; Prix, m. price ;
Habitude, lA^^i/; Pa vie, m. aingsUme- Robe, f. ^oirw ;
Jiige, m. judge ; peach ; Service, m. service^ earmf,
. 1. Vos oncles, vos cousins et vos neveux, ont-ils quittS le com-
merce? 2. lis ont quitte le commerce, et sont devenus medecina.
8. Le capitaiD') G. nVt-il pas quitte le service ! 4. II a quitte la France^
mais il ii'a pas quitte le service. 5. Oi^ avez-vous laisse voire fiis?
6. Je Tai laiss6 dans une pension. 7. £st-ii trop jeune pour quitter
•es etudes ? 8. II est trop jeune ; il n*a que douze ans. 9. A qui avez«
TOtts laiss6 voire carte de viaite? 10. Je Tai laiss^e chcz le {jortier.
11. Pourquoi ne le laissez-vous pas parler? 12. Parce qu'il est temps
que nous vous quittions. 13. Me permettez-vous de lui communiquer
cela? 14. Je vous laisse le champ libre -^ cet egard. 15. Ce jeuae
bomme n'a-t-il ptas quitte ses mauvaises habitudes? 16. II les a
quitt^es. 17. M. L. nVt-il pas quitte la robe pour Tdp^e? 18. Oui,
Monsieur; il n^est plus juge ; il est capitaine. 19. Ces p^hes quib
tent-elles facilement le noyau? 20. Non, Monsieur; ce sont des pa-
vies. 21. Je vous laisse cet habit pour cinquante francs. 22. A
quel prix me le laisserez-vous ? 23. Je vous le laisserai pour dix franca.
24. Je vous le laisse ^ bon compte; je ue saorais vous le laiaser \
moins.
EXERCISB 170.
1. The son, daughter, and cousin, have left Paris. 2. My iather,
mother, and sister, have left me here. 3. Do you like to leave your
country ? 4. I do not like to leave my friends and country. ^ ft. My
pai'ents do not like to leave me here ; I am too young. 6. Why
does not your brother let his son speak [L. 97. 4.] ? 7. Because he
has nothing to say. 8. Have yon let him alone? 0. I have let him
alone. 10. Why do you not let me alone? 1 1. 1 will let them alone.
12. Has your friend left his bed? 13. He has not yet left his bed
he is yet very sick. 14. Has Captain 6. left the army ? 16. He has not
left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the bar?
17. He has not left the anny. 18. My friend has left the Vur. 19l Al
Digitized
by Google
LBt«j»ir XXXSTtL Mt
WktA f riee \n\} you let me have this silk ! SO. I will let yoa hare it al
two fnuies a yard. 21. Can you not let mo have it for less? 22. 1 lei
you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for twenty,
fisviee. 24. I will let yon have it for twenty-two. 25. 1 con Id not let
you have it for less. 26. With whom (d qui) have you left my book ]
27. 1 left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not leave it w th my
servant? 29. Because he had left your house. 30. Do you like to
leave your friends ? 31. I do not like to leave them. 32. Where
have you leA your book ? 33. I left it at my father's. 34. Has that
merchant given up commerce ? 35. He has not given It up. 86. Those
peaches do not part easily from the atone ; they are clingstone peachea.
I
LESSON LXXXVIL LEgON LXXXVH.
1. The nominative pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles,
must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative
and the second affirmative, when the verbs are in different tenses,
and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions
other tlian et, ou ni^ mais [} 99. 2.] :—
II ne lit pas ; il 6cnt He does not readf he writes.
EHe ne vicndra pas ; eBe est partie. Ske will not come ; sAe is gont,
2. Tlie pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the
Mcond verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should,
however, not advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is
always correct to repeat the nominative pronouns.
3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must
always be repeated.
4. Connaltre k answers to the English expression, to knowhy:^^
Je le connais & sa d-marche. / kntno him by his walk (carriage).
5. Connaltre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean, to know by name^ by
6. Se connaltre ii quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds
in signification to the English expression; to be a judge ofswnefhing,
Vous Tons connaisscz en picrrerics. You are a judge of precious stones.
RiSUMli OF EXAMPLSS.
Jo le eonnaia, Je Taime, et je liil / tnoto him, love Aim, and do jusUes
rends Justice. GassssT. to him.
Q s'^coute, 11 le plait, 11 8*adooise, He listens to himself ^ is pUastd wilh
U s'aime. J. B. Rovssbio.' Aiifisf^, admns iimsdf Urns hia^
sdf.
Digitized
byGoogk
isit#s ts«jrrff%
A <|Mt C0BM]n68-T0llt 08 SUNI*
siour 1
Je 1o connais a son habit noir.
Je lo connais de vue.
J'ai rocoonu ma mi^ k la roiz*
A qnot vous cc«iiaisaez*voiis 1
Je me connais en marchandises.
Je ne ni'y connais pas.
II ne s'y oonnait point da toat
I! 8*y coDnait mienz que mot.
^ m^ Qonialt mm! bleii que loi.
By ttbit db «m. InMt iAat ,
men?
I kntno him by Ms black coat,
I kTuno kim iiy sighl,
I recarnixed wy wolker hy her i
Of vfkat are you a judge 7
I am a judge of goods,
I am Wit a judge of U {of <.Wai).
BeiswA tht Uatt judge f*J U [tf
tAem).
He is a belter judge of it (of tkem\
thanL
I^masgatda^tdg^ef Ui^/tkmH
^ashe.
EzxRCiss 171.
Artisan, m. mechmiie ; fi toifes, eUOhs of all kinds; Grain, m. grain ;
Blond, e, Ught ; Falnicant, m. manufae- Orf^re, m. gotdsmtti^ i
Boucl6, e, curfe^^; ' turer f Oeuvre, f. work i
Clievelure, f. iead ^Forgeroo, m. dfocibrnt^; PoHie, f. iNvtry ;
hair ; Oostes, ra. p. gestures ; Tout, quiJU.
C^eTenz, m. p. hair: Gracieux, se, gracfful ;
1. Ne reconnaissez-voos point votre amie ? 2. Je la reconnala k
aaclievelure blonde. 3. A quoi reconnaisaez-vous cette demoiselle 1
4. Je la reeonnaia k sa demarclie graciease. 5. rTauriez-vons point
conoo votre ami k la voix ? 6. Je I'y auraia re^onnu. 7. A l*oeam
on connait rartlsan (La Fontaias). 8. Ne le reeoniiAltrez»Tous point
iicea majrques? 9. Je Ty reconnaltrai. 10. Get orf^vre ne ae con-
nait-il point k cela ? 11. D ne a*y connait point du tout 18. Voos
y connaiaaez-voas aueai bien que le foigeron? 13. Je m*y eonnaia
tout ausai bien que luL 14. Ne vous connaiaaez-voua point ea
po^sie 1 16. Je ne mV connais gu^re. 16. Le fabricant ae connait-
il ausai bien en ^tofiea qu'en .grain? 17. II ae connait beaueonp
mieux k c«lAea-l& qn*k celui-cl 18. Ne connaiaaez-voua. paa ce non-
aieur ^ sea geates v^titoents? 19. Je le connais ^ sea cbeveus
boudea. 20. Ne vous dtes-vous paa fait connattre (toid youf name) ^
21. Je me auis fait connaltre. 22. Ne nous ferons-nous pan con*
naltre ? 23. Vous vous ferez connaitre. 24. lis se fcront cAunaltre
par leurs vertua (they toiU make themselves knoum),
EXBRGISB 172.
1. Do yon not know that man ? 2. Yea, Sir; I hnow him bv his
targe (gnmd) hat 8. By what do you lecogntze me? 4 I reeog*
nize you by your walk. 5. Do you recognize my friend b^ hia gya*
tuea ? 6. No, Sir; I recognize him by hi« black coat X Do y«it
kaow him well? 8. I know him by sight, but I have never epuWai
Digitized
by Google
toMM. a AieyMftJo^of ironf la Mo» Sir ; tht bhdMmHh
b a judge of iron. 11. By what will you ^nov yoar book T 12. 1
thall know it by thoao marks. 18. Hare you not known yoar fnend
by her vuieo ? 14. No, Madam ; I knew her by her light hak. 1 A.
Ilave yon told yottr namo? 16. I have not told my name. 17. Did
you kaow your sister'a friend by her eurled hairt 18. I knew her
by it 19. Is the merehant a good judge of doth t 20. He ia a bet
Isr jndge than I. 21. laiie a better judge of it than the maoulao
1u er ? 22. He ia quite aa good a judge aa he. 23. Is not the gold*
■nitli as good a judge of precious stones as you? 84. He is a better
judge of them than L 25. Of what are you a judge! 26. I am a
judge of nothing. 27. Are not your sisters good judges of poetry ?
28. They are not Che least judges of it 29. Do you not know that
young ^y by her dross (robe) ? 80. I know her by her graceful
earriage. 31. Have they made themselves known ? 32. They have
made themselves known by their merit (nUrite). 33. Is not the
workman known by his work ? 84. The workman is known by hia
work 85. He is a judge of it
LESSON LXXXVm. USgON LXXXVUL
1. Quelqne, tohaisoetert however^ wmt^ any^ followed by a nouti
taices the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed
by an adjective or an adverb [} 97, (1.) 2. 3.] :-^
Quelques livres que voos aycz. Ulkatever bonks ytm mof have,
Qnekiue bons qnils soient Howeter good they stay U,
$. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written aa two words, the first
(qud) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that
verbf}97,(l.)l.].w
QneUes que soient vos vertua. Wk/aUver fowr wimu mmy be.
8. The above examplea show that quolque— que and quel— qM
govern the subjunctive.
4. Tout meaning entirely^ quiie^ nothing hui^ though an adverb^
Tariffs through euphony before a feminine word commencing with A
eonsonant or an ft aspirate :
It'eiBfosnee, UnUe trompeuso quelle Ofpe, deeeUfid as U is, serves at ktut
eel, sert au uoins h nous mener i to amdud ustotks UrmhusUun oj
la fla de la vleper «a chsmin Ul9hy m lyiesMg mti.
(La BavTtaa.)
Digitized
by Google
iw
LBta«9 vxTxrtti.
A. Tke in>Td gr6 Bignifyina; amsenlj leiUy meanings ^
number of idioms ; —
Je !u! sais fsavoir, 8. ir.] bon gr6 do
cetto action.
U uous sail mauvais gr6 de cela.
/ am thankful to kim (i. e. owe Am
geod-wilt) for thai acUitm.
He is disjtUased trilA us for that.
RgsuMfi OF Examples.
Ne 1e ferez-vous pas dc bon gr6 1
11 a'est mariA coutre le gr6 de sea
• pansnts.
8« chi?clure volti^e aa gr5 de vdnt
Je sals nianraifl gr6 & Totre fVdrede
vouloir ae mdler de mea affiiires.
Je lui en ttais bon gr6.
J'c8{)dre c|uu vous no nie sanrez pas
niauvaiti gr6, si Je ne vous 6cris
pas.
C'est k mon gT6 le meillcur enfant
du moudc.
WUl you not do it vnHlnglif?
He married agaiftsl the wiii of ku
parcnU,
His hair fluUers at the wiU of tie
wintl.
I am displeased vnlk tfmtt brother fff
wishing to interfere with wtp afiaru
I am thankful to him for it.
I hfipe thai ytm will w*t Ite displeased
with me, if I do not write to ymu
He is, to my thinking, the best ehiOa
in the world.
Exercise 173.
Bon gr€, mal gr6, wUHng Men-er, 1. to take, to lead ; Secret, m. tecret ;
or not wHling ; Non-er, I. to lie, to fasten; Silence, m. silence ;
Cbambrc, f. roam; Obliger, 1. to obliges Suite, f. consequence t
Oard-cr, 1. to keep: OflTrc, f. offer f Voler, 1. to fly.
Lit, ui. bedi Becommand-er, !• to re^
Malgr6, in spile of; commend ;
1. Savez-voas mauvais gr6 ^ votr|p oncle de ce qu*il a dit? 3. Je
ne lui en saia aucnn mauvais gre (Voltaire). 3. Ne me sauriez-
vous poa bon gre si je vous mcnais avec moi ? 4. Je vous en saunua
lemeilleurgredu monde. 6. Ne Icur savez-vous pas bon grS d'avuir
garde ce secret ? 6. Je leur sais bon gr6 de Tavoir gard6. 7. Ne
leur aveZ'Vous pas recommand6 de garder le silence ? 8. Je leur ai
fecommande de le garder. 9. Ce malade garde-t-il encore le lit)
10. II ne garde plus le lit, mais il est encore oblige de garder bi
chambre. 11. Votre clievelure est-elle blen nouee? 12. Non,Mon.
sieur, elle vole ayt gre du vent 1 3. Gardercz-vous votrc domcstique *
14. Jo le garderai,!! fait tout a mon gre. 15. Quelques oflruH qu^on
lui Tissc, il ne veut pas me quitter? 16. Quclque bonnes quo soicnt
ce.s duuies elles ne stont pas 1 mon gre. 17. Quelles que soieiit les
suites dc cettc affaire, je vous sais bon gre de vos intentions!
18. Timte belle qu*elle est, elle n'est pas ^ mon gre. 19. L'avez-vont
fait malgr6 vous? 20^ Non, Monsieur; je Tai fait do bon gr^
31. Bon gr6 mal gr6, il partira. 22. Me garderez vous le secret!
98. Je voQB le garden!. 34. 11 change d'opinlon an grS doe 6y6n^
■Mnte.
Digitized
by Google
hmnsom ixxxim
ExxKciss 174.
X. W*/ le iD^rry ngftinst his iathcr*8 consent! 3. He wiV M4
mtury a^rjust hi*', parents* consent 3. Why are you displeased iritk
nie * 4. J am n^t dii«p1eascd with you. 5. Is your little ^rPs hair
tied ? 6. Vs is Ml tied ; it waves (JloUe) with the wind. 7. V.Hial
do vou thidc r>f my book ? 8. It is, in my opinion, the best book
tluil I havd tutA [L. 74. 3> 4]. 9. Will you not be displeased with
mc, if I do r.O /.ome to-day I 10. I shall not be displeased with you.
11. Will yc\*. rot read that letter? 12. However well written it may
bo,I willnctrfudit. 13. Are those ladies handsome ? 14. However
landsoroe ani good they may be, they do not strike my fancy.
15. Are you displeased with my brother? 16. No, Sir, I am thank-
ful to him for hi^ intentions, whatever may be the consequences of
his conduct. 17. Will you keep this secret (for me}? 18. I will
keep it willingly. 19. Does your sister keep her bed willingly t
80. She does not keep her room willingly. 31. Willingly or not,
she must keep her room, when she is sick. 33. Will you keep silent
on tills point ? 33. I will willingly. 34. I am tlmnkful to you for
your good intentions. 35. Are yon thankful to him for this {^
eda) t 36. I am thankful to him for it. 37. Will the judge keep hia
servant? 38. He will k^p him. 39. Does he do his work to hia
fancy? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is your brother obliged to
keep in the houso ? 33. He is obliged to keep his bed. 33. Has he
not loft his room ? 34. He has not yet left his room ; he is too sick
to leave iL 35. I should be under the greatest obligations in iknb
work! to you, if you would do this.
LESSON LXXXIX. LEgON LXXXIX.
1. Servir [3. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the English
expression to help to :-—
Que TOILS ser\iral-je 1 7^ trA/i/ ifuill 1 help ymi, ?
Voii5t xerviitii'Je (It; la sonpc *? ShiUl I ktip ytnt f4t »mie vmp 7
Vona n'avez |ms servi monsieur. Yuu hate nU helped ikal gentleman.
3. Je vous remeriMe, / thank ynu, said in answer to an oflc*r, is in
French always a refusal. This phrase is never employed like the
English expresiiion, / thank you for {this or <ha/), to signify a request.
The French make nae of other forms:-— Oserai-je vons pher de . . •
Qaend-je vogs demander . . . Je rons prie de • . . Je vone pviend
<e . . . >—
Digitized
by Google
&Sn09 ISMtX.
OmnAJBrmm denmder mw afle
dc cette voUiUo, im morceau de
oerdtil
3. S*il voua pinit, corresponds to the English, if you pkase, Tht
vorb is used unipersonally in that sentence and in the fuliowing :—
Coflime il vous pltira. As you please.
II no roe plait |ias d'y aller. // does not suit or please me logo tken.
Que Toua plait-il 1 What would yarn fieasi to ktne ?
4. Aa plaiair de vons revoir, an revoir, adieu, jaa'ia'au reroir, meaa
riU I hate the pleasure afeeeing you again^ till I tee you agaiitt iic.
IUsVKA of ExAUPLSfl.
Qn'aaral-Jc Ic pldsir de vous servir 7
Jo Tous demaodoral unmoroeau de
ccjarabon.
Voiis oSHraMe un morceau de ce
roUl
Je vous remercie, Monsieur; fe
prcndrai de pr6ISrence una alle
de cetto volaille.
N'a-t-ou pas encore serrl 1
Je vous sotthaite le boa soir.
J'ai 8oahait6 le boiyour a Madame.
Ayes la
seoir.
Messieurs,
d'entrer.
ooaplaisaiiee da roua as-
aycz la complaisance
TV tehal shall I hmve the pleasure sf
helping yon?
1 wiU Ihunk you or J unUtnmlk yam
for a slice of that Aam.
SAo/f / offer you a slice of this rousi
meal?
I Ihank you^ Sir ; I usntld prefer «
tping oj thai fowL
IsmfifhedmueryeloutikkthhT
I wish yofi good evening,
1 have vrished the lady a good m&n^
ing.
Hmve the goodness to sU dem^
Genllemenf have the kindness to lealk
in.
EXBRCXSE 175.
Adieu, m. adieu ; Grices, f. p. thanks : Fri-er, to heg, to denre t
Aile, f. Ufivg; Jamlion, ni. ham; Rcnierciment,m«MaNjt9
Attend-re, 4. to wait for; Ldgnmc, m. vegelabU ; R<'»ti, m roast meal g
Bouilli, m. boiled meal, Mett-rc, (sc) ir. ref. 4. to Sou()C, f. sirup ;
beef I sU down ; Siillisamment, adv. sufi
Con£6, m. leave f Ortolan, m. ortolan; fidenlly;
Cotelette, f. cuOet; Perdrlx, f. partridge; Tranche, f. slice,
1. Monsieur, qu'aurai-je le plaiair de vous serx'ir ! 2. Je voua de*
manderai une tranche de ce jambon. 3. Je vous prie de scrvir coa
mcftsieura 4. Oserai-je vous demander un morceau de ce bouilli ?
0. Vous ofTrirai-je une tranche de ce rOti ? 6. Je voua rendu <*!^cei
Monsieur; fen ai ' auflisamment. 7. Mademoiselle, aurai-jn i'iioii-
Bour da voua aervir une aHe de oette perdrix 1 8. Je voua li'imrcieb
Monsieur ; je prendrai de pr^fsrenee un de eea ortolaua. 9. M oiiaiuiub
▼oua enverrai-je de la aoupe t 10. Madame, ja vow prie de aarvii
ttademoiaellek II. Je voua ea demandeiai apr^ 1% Jma, pr^
eantex eette eetelette ^ Honaienr. IS. Cea 16gum«i aont d«Uae«^
Digitized
by Google
t4. MoitMcur, J9 tub Men aiae !)«• vvns Itstrsovicvboiit. II M«»
■ieur, ne voulex-vonn pas voiis asseotr? 16. Mille remcreimvntt,
lloiiftieiir. mon pi^re m^attend & la mainon. 17. Ne leuravM-vou»pat
souhuite ie bonjour? 18. Je leur ai soabaiU le bon aoir. 19. Leur
avez-?o!» dii adieu ? 20. Taidit adieu k mon fr^ro. 31. J'ai pria
eonge d^eax. 22. Lea avez-voua pri^a d*entrert 23. Je lea on ai
pri6a. 24. Meaaieitra, on a aervi. 26. Ayez la eomplaiaance da
fooa mettio ici.
Exercise 176.
1. Madam, to what ahail I help you? 2. I will trouble you for a
tliee of that ham. 3. Shajl I send you a wing of this fowl 1 4. Noi
8ir, 1 thank you. 5. I thank you, Sir («'t7 vous plail, Monsieur),
6. Sh*, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ?
7. I thank you, Sir, I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall
I oifer you a little of this boiled meatT 9. I thank you, Sir; I have
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soupt 11. Mueh
obliged to you, Sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise], 12. Sir, will
yon have the goodness to help this young huly? 13. With much
pleasure, Sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 16. These
ortolans are delicious.' 16. I am very glad that you like them. 17.
la the dinner on the table ? 18. No, Sir; it is not yet on the table.
19. It ia too e^rly. 20. Does It please you to go there ? 21. It does
not please mo' to go to his house ; but I will go, if you wish it 22.
fcihall I go with you? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend
ait down ! 26. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day.
96. Have you wished your friend a good morning 7 27. I wiahed
him a good OTening. 26. Hare you not bid him farewell ? 29. 1
have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here.
81. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are
much obliged to you, Sir. 36. Our father ia waiting for na ai home.
^«»>
LESSON XC. LEgONXC.
1. The verb tenir [9. ir.], to hoU often eorreaponda in aigniiieatiea
lotheEngUahverblotep; tenta'nn hdtel,loXDnp«Aaiift* tenir Ubk
evverte, tokegpt^f* iM$ ; tenir aa ehambre propre, &e., iokup OM^a
roomdmn; tenil' la porte,^lea fen^trea oovertea, fa ftatp (&a^eor,lAt
t€pen; leair leayiiiK ettverta,fefiii4a,lotwydiii^f lyiirifiiii^
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
x«.
9hU; tenfr lit t^te draite, 4i(e., to kmp m^s head ttfrigki; tanir ■•
parole, to keep one^s umW ; teuir compagnie k qoolqu*un, to Ua^ oi
remain with strme or any one,
*X Tcnir an bingage singulier, teiiir des propos . . ., dea diseours . . ^
would be rendered in Cnglisih by to make use of wingvlar language
to use pectUiar expressumSy to advatiee thitigs, d&c
Ce jecne homme tient des propos TIM young man saysfooUtk tUngs,
inseusds.
3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to^iohe iem^
eious of:—'
Je liens a mon argent, k la vie. Ival%e (i. e. hM to) wy money ^ m^
Ufe.
Je tiens a mon opinion. / am tenacious of my opinion.
4. Tenir is also used of a color which is foul or not: —
Oette couleur tiendra ou ne tiendra 7%u color is fast (i. e. holds) or noL
IMS.
5. Faire tenir is used in the sense oftofoncard, to send:^^
Faites-lul tenir cet argent, cette Forward him this money, this Idler,
lettre.
6. Se tenir, or s'en tenir, conjugated reflectively, may often be
rendered by to remain^ to abide by, to be satisfied with : —
He remains standing, sealed,
J am satisfied with your opinion.
II se tient debont, i
Jo m'en tiens a votre opinion.
R£8UMfi OF Examples.
M. L. licnt nn hotel snpcrbe.
Votrc petite fllle no tient pas sa
chambre bien proprc.
Pouniuoi tenez-vous les portes ou-
vert<?8 1
n fait si chaud que nous tenons
toutes les Tendtres ouvertes.
TenfZ la t^te droite et les yeux
ou verts.
Pourquoi ue tencx-Tons pas votre
}Nirolu ?
Tenez compagnie a Totre sceur;
elle est mala<le.
Votre ami tient des propos bien
singulierp.
' Vous tenez des disconrs bien l^rs.
La couleur de votre drap ticwlra-
K'llct
Lni avez-vons fkit tenir ce livre 1
A quoi vuus vn tiendrez-vous ?
Je ni'en tiendrai a ce que J'ai dit.
Pourquoi so tientril toi^jours do-
■ 11
Mr. L. keeps a superb hold.
Your liUle girl does not. keep her
very clean.
Why do you keep the doors open ?
It is so warm thatwekeep ail the win'
dows open.
Keep ymir head upright and fear
eyes open.
Why do you not keep your word?
Stay with your sisters she is siek.
Your friend makes use of very single'
tar expressums.
Ymi use very tight language.
Is the color of your cloth fad 7
Have you sent him that book?
What mil be f/tmr decision ?
I shaJJ abide oy what I have said.
Why ioes he always reesenn stains
ing?
Digitized
by Google
LBBBOV X0.
» 1*611 tiendn-^il an pri-
aeal^ qui doit fluir deniain ]
Massiluon.
Ike preseiUt wkuh is to end U/^nwr^
row?
Recomroand-cr, 1 t§
recommend t
Regard-er, 1. so looki
Rue, slretl ;
8av-oir, 8. ir. to knowt
ExBRCisx 177.
Cocher ra. eowAman; Gens, pi. people;
Deboat standing; liidisi|iose, e, indisposed
Hikodrbf 4. tojforlrid: Insolent, e, insokrU;
i>e prte, dosdys L^cu, place;
Sn dehors, ouiy outside; Malade, sick;
ffcnrhtimer, 1. ref. toget Parfaitcment, perfectly; Vie, life.
A cold; VrtUiT-eVf \. to prefer ;
1. Quel h6tel votre fr^re ticnUl? 2. II ttent IMidtel de l^Enrope,
me de . . . 3. Votre petit gar9on se tient^il bien propre ? 4. .11 so tient
hien propre. 6. A quoi voas en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je m'en tiendrai
& ce que je voas ai dit 7. Ne savez-vous pas ^ quoi vous en tenirf
8. Je saisf parfaitement i quoi in*en tenir. 9. Pourquoi vons tenez-
Tons debouti 10. Parceque nous n*avons pas le temps de nous
asseoir. 11. N*avez-vous point d^fendu k ces jeunes gens de tenir
de teh propos? 12. Je le tenr ai dSfendu. 13. Votre cocher n*a*t-ir
pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas peur de vous
enrhuroer, en tenant lea portes ouvertes? 15. Nous prefererions lea
tenir fennees. 16. Votre maltre vous reeommande-t-il de tenir la
tite droite? 17. II me recommande de tenir lespieda en dehors. 18.
Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie? 19. Sa aoeur est
indisposie; ii est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre oncle ne
voas a-t^il pas tenu lieu de p^re? 21. U m*a tenu lieu de p^ et de
m^re. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus prda ^ cette affaire? 23. Noo,
Monsieur; je m*en tlendrai k ce que j*en sais. 24. Ce m^deeln ne
tient-il pas i son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne tient k la vie
de aes malades.
Exercise 178.
1. Docs that gentleman keep open table ? 2. He keeps a hotel in
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the v^indows open ? 4. We keep them
opor. because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept hia
word. 6. He has kept his word ; he always keeps his word. 7. Have
you :iot told your scholar to keep his head upright? 8. I have toh
him to keep his head upright and his eyes open. 9. Why do you
not stay with your sister? 10. Because I have promised to go to my
eoQsir/s this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy to
nake use of these expressions? 12. 1 have forbidden him. 13. Ooea
he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not 15. What iriy
bt your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told your fiither. 17
Digitized
by Google
*46 &!••#» S«l.
IbTtt yMi flhriTftHM dMtt m6Mjr U your MMiAt !•. IbMtMlyal
forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to him to-morruw}
80. 1 will forward it to him, if I have an opportunity. 31. Why do
you not keep standing? 23. Beoaiite I am weary. 23. Do yoo think
that the color of your coat is faat? 24. 1 think that it is iaat; it (elk)
appears very good. 25. Will yon not look closely into your broUi«r*s
afiairst 26. 1 shall not look closely into them. 27. 1 will be aaitisfied
with your opinion. 28. Are you not tenacious of your opinion?
29. I am not too tenacious of it. 30. I>oea not your physician ad>
here too tenaciously to his opinion? 31. He adheres to it 32. Does
that lady hold your mother^s place ? 33. She is a mother to me. 84
Oar cousin is a father to na. 36. That phyaksian does not valu« the
life ef his patient.
LESSON ZGL LEgON XCL
1. The verb 6tre forma t great BiaDy idioms besides those which
we hare already mentioned : 6tre en retard, to be late, to tarry ; ktn
en (M^ Sl m6mo de^ to be dfle to ; dtre en peine do, to be uneasy about;
Mre eo via, lo fte tfUes, to liee ; ^tre en chemin pour, in be oa the way
to ; Mrs au fait, au conrant de, to be familiar wUi; dtre k la veilie dfl^
to bean (he eve of ; Mre de trop, to be unneeeeeary, to be in the way;
Mre bien avec, to bean good terms mtk; 4tre brouillS avee, tobeom
had terms with; 4tre auz prises avee, to be in open rupture^ quarrd or
hattk with ; dtro d'avis, to be cfopimont ete.
2. ^tre, as already said [L. 47. 5.], is used in the sense of appai^
tenir, to belong. It is also employed in the sense of to behoove^ to bo^
eome. In the latter sense, it takes generally the preposition de before
another verb : —
Sst-ee k vous de lu! ikire des re- ihes it beeme yon to etut (smIO n
proches 1 preaehet vpon him 7
O'est k vous d parler. R is your iwm to speak,
t. Y dtre ia often need tor lobe at haam^ to be in:^
Vo«repkii7«Bt.fi1 AyeOffatiwredkemf
BdMHIft dV BXAMPLM.
If' sommca-tioiu pas 6a trop lei 1 Art we not in the weof heref
WeamnetemioodtermswiAaa^t
lotions*
mare/amOiar with aU that.
_. I pas do trop lei 1
H ons ne sommes pes Wen af<eo
aosparsnts.
Vsas sommes aaeesaeal detont
Digitized
by Google
XJIB4B0V %0t,
Ml
Umikh ipto6deifttSar«iM4ift
dcmanCle.
KcMis 9ommtB bronQUs.
Ua BODar est 4 k reilld de ae
marier.
KoQB sommes d'ayis qae rous
alllez lui fitire des excuses.
Ce n'est pas a lui de nous re-
procher notre bontA.
A qui estK» a lire ?
O'est 4 ma soeur a lire ce matin.
Cette maisoa eat 4 lui et 4 mol.
£l]e est a moi, elle est 4 lui.
Ces soulieiB ne sont pas 4 nous,
lis appartiemient 4 notre (thn,
lis lui appartienncnt
llonsieai^ n'y est paa.
Madame 7 est
rm^0ikt0tMti^Jkt4kmm9d.
tmrianee.
My sister is an tkt €t9 ef ker m«r>
riage.
U is W opinion that fou skauld g9
and apologize to him.
It does not Seamu him to repraaek m
vritii ova- kindness.
Whose turn isUto read ?
It is my sister's turn to read thiU
momtng.
That h4mu is kis and mmm.
, // is mine J U is his.
These shoes are not ours.
They belong to our hothar,
ney Mang io him.
T%e gentleman isnoteU 4om#
TV lady is in.
EZBROBSB 179.
Achet-er, 1. to buy; Gravore, f. engravings Part-ir, 1 Ir. tesktri, «i
Arriv-er, 1. to arrive; Hdte, m. host; out;
Cofrespondant) earres-Ubn,\re,m.boekseUeri Pn^piMCidn» M. imU^
pondmt; Moia, m. month; lard;
Craind-re, 4. Ir. to fear ; Montre, f. watch ; Punir, 2. to punish ;
Der-oir, t. taawt, beobtig- Mori, p. p. from rnonrir, Yeille, f. eve, dmy b^
ed; to dse; fort»
Bmbarau-er, (s*) 1. lef.
to emboirk;
i. Y a>t41 loogtemps que tobs dtea brovili^a I 9. U y a pl«s d*qii
mois que j« asia broui1l6 avec lui. 8. Votre ami eat-il encore en vie f
4. Non, Mooaiear; U y a dix ana qu'il eat mort. 6. Votre eorre^
pondant eat-il en ehemin pour Paris t 6. Je crois qh'il doit 4tm
anriv6. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il paa en retard? 8. Ooi, Moa»
aienr ; il ne vient jamais 4 tempa. 9. Cea gravnrea sont-elles 4 vona
on 4 votre libraire \ 10. Elles aont 4 moi ; je viens de lea aoheter.
1 1. Ne craignez-voua pas d'4tre de trop id 1 13. Nona aommes trop
luen avec notre h6te pour craindre cela. 13. A qui eat^oe 4 aller
ebereher lea livraa t 14. C'eat 4 moi 4 lea aller ehercher. 16. Esi-ca
4 vona de le pnnir, qnand il la m^rite ? 18. Cest 4 moi de le panv«
oar je lui tiena lieu de p4re. 17. Cea maaaons n*appartiemioni*eUea
paa 4 notre propri6taire? 18. Ellea ne lui appartienncnt paa. It.
JBllaa aont 4 notre coirespondaai SO. A qui aont cea lettrea f 91*
Ellea ne aont point 4 moi« elles sont 4 ipa coaaine. 23. Cette m<»tn
«, Mi firilowed I7 aname, am cenerally 1
r and mlatraaa of tlie house, the beads of llM OoBilr.
1* Digitized by Google
249- I.S880V zorL
est k lui. 23. K*4te8-T0U8 point k la veflle de partii ponr (jondres*
24. Nous sommes k la veille de nous embarquer ponr Cadix« 2ft.
II y a longtemps, que nous Bommes aux prises.
EXBRCISB 180.
1. Are you able to pay him ? 2. I am not able to pty him ; T have
not received my money. 3. Are you on good terms with your book-
seller? 4. I am not on good terms with him. 6. I am on bad terms
with him. 6. How long have you been on bad terms with him? 7.
It is more than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy my friend^s
demand? 9. I am able to satisfy it (eTy saiisfaire), 10. Are you
on your way to Naples? 11. No, Sir; I am on my way to Rome.
12. Is not your physician on the eve of starting for Montpellier ? 13.
He is on the eve of starting for Paris. 14. Am I in the way here?
16. No, Sir ; you are not in the way. 16. Whose turn is it to speak ^
17. It is my turn to speak and to read. 18. Is it my place (d rnoi)
to make apologies to him? 19. It is your brother's place to apolo-
gize to him. 20. Does it become you to punish that child ? 21. It
liehooves me to punish him. 22. Do you hold the place of a father
towards him ? 23. I hold the place of a father towards him. 24
Is that coat yours? 25. No, Sir ; it is not mine ; it is my brotlier'a
26. Have you broken openly with him ? 27. We have been quar-
relling two months. 28. Is not that large house yours ? 29. No,
Sir; it is not mine; it is my sister's. 30. Does it become your
brother to reproach him with his kindness? 31. It does not become
him to do it. 32. Whose turn is it to go and fetch the books? 83.
It is my place to go and fetch them. 34. Is the gentleman in!
85. No, Sir, the gentleman is not in ; but the lady (of the house)
is in.
LESSON XCIL LEgON XCH.
1. Avancer, retarder, correspond to the English verbs to gavi, to
•ose, tn piU ftjrward, to put back, in speaking of a watch or clock, &£.
The pieposition de is placed before the word expressing tlie van-
ation :-^
Ma montie rctarde d'une demi- jlfy wJdi m ktdfan hour toe sbm.
heurc.
La mienne avanco d'mi quart Mine is a quarter of an hour too fast.
d'heuro.
J'ai avaTic4 cetie horloge d'une ite thatdodihiUfmikmMrfprmm^
demi-lMBre.
Digitized
by Google
ISSSOV ZOXI,
S4S
niiimtes.
a. Metlro [4. ir.] & rheme, meant to ut r^A^ to put righu te
Mettez ootto montre 4 rheore. Set that watch right,
S. S*aecordor, toagreej is said also of clocks, watches, dto.
R£sum£ of Examples.
Votre montre va-t-clle Wen 1
£lle retarde d'une demi-hcure par
jour.
Elle avaiico d'on qnart dlienre par
semaine.
De combien avance-t-elle 1
Je Tiens do mettre ma montre a
rheure.
Bi Totre montre retarde, pourquol
ne ravancez-vou9 pas 1
Ha pendule avance ; Je viens de la
rctarder.
Qnelle hcuro cut-il & votre montre 1
Mon horloge sonne lea heores eties
demies.
J'ai oubli6 de la mooter (or remon-
ter).
Voire montre est dirvngSt,
II fiiodra hi fairo nettoyer.
La sonneric en est d^rang^e.
Votre pendule et ma montre ne
8 accordent pas.
Les pendules a rcssort vont mienx
quo Ics pendules a poids.
L'borloge a sonn6 deux heures.
Does your watch go well 7
It loses half an hour a day.
It gains a quarter of an hova a week.
Haw much has it gained ?
J have just set my watch rigU.
if your watch loses, why do ytu not
set it forward?
Mv clock gains ; / hofoe just $et U
What o*dock isithy your wata^?
My clock strikes the hour and th ha'/
hour.
1 have forgotten to wind it tip.
Your watch is out of order.
It will be necessary to have it deaned,
7^ striking part is out of ordsr.
Your clock and my watch da nai
agree.
Spring clocks go better than weight
The clock has struck two.
EZERCISS 181.
Droit, e, straight: Ressort, (grand) m.
F6\€, e, cracked ; nuUn-^pnng ;
Justo, right, correct ; Secondes, (montre a)
pendu- Matin, m. mami'M ; watch wUh a second
Perfection, f.«n;/«c<t(ni; hand;
Plat, e, flat, thin; Timbre, m. bdl of m
R£gl-er, 1. to regulate; dock;
R£p6Ution, (montre k) Vite, quick, qmday.
t repeater;
h N*aTez-vous pas nne montre k r^p^titionl 3. J*ai ime moniK
i'or, 4 doable boite. 8. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne t 4. Elle ne
va pas blen, eile retardo d'une heure par jonr. 6. Est^se nne montre
4 aecondesl 6. Cost une montre k secondes et k cadnm d*or. 7.
Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas ! 8. Elle ua sonne plus, le iimbf
•a eat eaas^. 9. Riurquoi eea pendules ne s*aooordent-eUM paa*
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Aignille, f. hand;
An^trer, (s*) 1. ref. to
stop;
Balancier, m.
lum;
Boite, f. watch-^ase;
Cadran, m.face, dial;
Cass-cr, 1. to break;
Doable, double;
t44 1.BSSOV zoii
10. Pgmsqm I'vne sfinee ct I'Mtn rotaidew 11. ITavM tqwi foM
mm6 le grand rMsort de votre montre t 13. Je Pai eaiw^ «d la le-
nontaiit 13. Votra pendule e«l elle juste? li. Oui, MoMienr
•lie est juste ; je viens de la faire i^gler. 16. La sonnerie de eotli
pendule estnelle d^nngi^e t 16. La sonnerie en est ddrsog^et le
timbre en est ftl6. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est
cass^. 18. Le balancier de votre horloge n*est pas droit! 19. Do
eombien votre pendule ayance-t-elle ! 20. Elle avanoe de cinq mi-
nutes par jour. 31. La perfection d*une pendule n'est pas dialler rite,
mais d'etre r6gl6e (Delillb). 33. Votre montre s'arrdte-t^lle
Bouyentt 33. Elle s'arr^te tons les matins. 34. Votre pendule
s'est arrdt6e.
EZKBCIBB 182.
1. Does jwaar watch gain or lose ? 3. It does not loie ; it goes
▼ery well. 3. It loses twenty-five minutes a day. 4. Does your
dock gain much ? 6. It gains one hour a week. 6. How much
does your son's gold watch lose ? 7. It loses much ; it loses one
hour in (en) twenty-four (hettres), 8. I have put it forward one
hour. 9. I will put it back half an hour. 10. Does not your clock
strike the half hour? 11. No, Sir; it only strikes the hour. 13.
Have you foi|^otten to wind up your repeater! 13. I have forgot
ten to wind it up, and it has stopped. 14. Is your silver watch out
of order! 16. It is out of order, and it will be necessary to have it
cleaned. 16. What o'clock is it by your watch .^ 17. It is three
o'clock by my watch ; but it gains. 18. How much does it gain a
week ! 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 30. Is your
watch right! 21. No, Sir; it is not right; it is out of order. 23.
Does your dock strike right! 23. It does not strike right; the
striking part is out of order. 34. Have you broken the hands of
your clock! 26. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 36.
Has the clock struck three! 37. It has struck twelve. 38. It has
stopped. 39. Does it stop every morning? 30. It does not stop
every morning ; it stops every evening. 31. Your watch does not
agree with mine. 83. Have you not broken the main-spring of your
Drother's vratch ! 33. He has broken it in winding it up. 34. Mj
hmhk^B wateh is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated.
Digitized
by Google
Lxsaov xeiti;
U§
LESSON xcm.
Lsgoy xcm
1. 'Se d^mettre [4. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to the
English expression to dislocate oniz army torn/, to put one^s arm^ wrist
ma if jwM. In this sense se d^mettre takes no preposition before
its objeet>—
Je me snis dfimis r^paole. / haios dislocaUd my shdntlder.
fl. Se d^mettre, used in the sense of to resign, togtse upf takes
the preposition de before its object : —
n s'est d6mls de sa place. He has resigned his jdace,
S. S*emparer, to seixey to lay hold of, takes de before ita object >—
II s'est empare de ce chapeau. He seized vpon this hat,
4w S'emp^her, to prevent one^s self, toforbear, to help, takes cfe be*
fore another verb : —
Je ne pais m'en^)6cher de rire.
Je ne puis m'en emp6cher.
/ cannot help laughing,
I cannot hap doing so.
6, S'inqui^ter answers to the English expression, to fte or become
uneasy, to trouble one^s self; it takes de before its object, be this ob-
ject noun, pronoun or verb :—
Je ne m'ioquidte pas de cela. I am not uneasy about that,
6L Se comporisr aaewera to the expressions to behave^ to deport
tmds self,
7. S'attendre means to mim^, to expect. It takes d before ita ob-
ject-—
Je ne m'attendais pas & cela. I did w4 expect thai,
Je ne m*7 attendais pas. / did not expeU it,
RftSUHfi or EXAIIFLBS.
Vcnis etes-vons dimis r^paulel
Je me la suis dSmise [L. 46. 2,
^135].
Cette demoiselle s'est d6niis le poi-
gnet.
Qui le lu! a remis 1
Le Dr. L. a remis r6panle & ma
soeur.
Voiis dtes-vous demis ^e voire
placet
Je m'en snis d^mis [% 135. 7].
Nous ne pouvious nous empteher
de sounre pendant ce r6cit.
Vous Ates-vous empari de oe livre 1
le m'en suis empar6.
De quoi vous Inqniites-voos 1
Have you dislocatsd your shouldtr?
IdislocaUdiL
That young lady dislocated her wriff .
Who set U for her?
Dr, L,setmy sister's shoulder.
Have you resigned your situaiien 9
J have resigned it.
We could not help smiUng dmneg
that narration.
Have you seized that book?
lUddhoUofU,
Why dfi you tremHU yousadff
Digitized
by Google
€4«
ivttoir xcixL
Jc DO m^tiiqaiAte de rien.
CommoDt ce jcone homme se com-
porte-t-il 1
D 80 comporte comine il faut.
7e no m'attcQdaU pas k une tolle
r6poDse.
Jo ae m'y attendali noUemont
/ trouble myself ahofut MClti
H&w does thai young i
^Smm?
He behaves properly.
I did iwt expect such an
IdidnotexpeU U, by any means.
K I'aTonir, infiUurei
Bras, m. onn;
Cas£wer, 1. to break t
Droit, e, fy;ht ;
Dnrant, during!
ficritoire, f. inkstand!
Eimomi, m. enemy ;
Exercise 183.
Gauche, left ; Paysan, m. peasant i
Mieox, betUr ; Prasse, f. Prussia :
Monde (tout le), every Q^iowr, m. stays
body! Traitement^ m. imai^
Oh\\e6, obHged I mentf
Pareil, le, nmilar, such; YUle, f. ciiy.
Part, f. part ;
1. Ne V0U8 6tiez-voas pas d^mis le bras? 2. Je ne me Tetais pat
demis; je me Totals casse. 3. Si vous alliez en Ameriqcc, tous d6-
mettriez-vous de voire place ? 4. Je serais oblig^ de m*en d^mettrtd ?
6. Y a-t*il longtemps qae votre coasin 8*est demis de laaienne?
6. II y a un mois qu^il s'ea est demis. 7. Uennemi s^est-il empare de
la ville! 8. 11 s'en est empar^. 9. Votre fils se comportera-t>il
mieux k Tavenir? 10. II s*est tr^s bien comports darant son s^joor
en Prusse. 11. Vous attendiez-vous k un pareil traitement de sa
part? 12. Je ne m*y attendais pas. 13. A quoi vous attendiex-
vous? 14. Je m'attendais -^^tre traits commell faut 15. Pourqad
vous £tes-vou'} moqu6 de lui? 16. Parceque je n*ai pu m*en emp^
cher. 17. Si vous laissiez voire ^critoire ici, le paynan s'en empare-
rait41? 18. H s'en emparerait certainement 19. Votre associd se
comporte-tril bien envers vousi 20. II se comporte bien envcrs tout
lemonde. 21. Qui aremis le poignet a votre sceur? 22. Le Dr.
G. le lui a remis. 23. M. votre p^re ne s'est-il pas d^mis le brat
^it ce matin ? 24. II ne se Test pas demis ; il se Test cass6 ce
* rrtm k cinq heurea.
Exercise 184.
1. Has not Dr. L. resigned his place ? 2. He has not resigned it
). He would resign it, if he went to Germany. 4. Are ybu obliged
to resign your place? 5. I am not obliged to resign it 6. Has your
cousin dislocated his arm ? 7. He has not dislocated his arm, but hit
shoulder. 8. Who set it for him? 9. Doctor F. set it for him.
10. Has not your mother dislocated her wrist? 11. She has not
dislocated her wrist ; she has broken her arm. 12. Has the enemy
seized the town? 13. The enemy has seized the town. 14. WUi
not some one lay hold of your h9t» if you leave it here t 16. Some
Digitized
by Google
LXSSOll xoiv. U1
oiM wQl lay hold of : t 1 6. How has your son beharcd tl/w morning f
17. He behaved very well. IS. He always behaves properly.
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (iniUileme7U)1 20. I do
not trouble myself at all (du Unit). 21. Did you expect such treat-
ment from (de la part de) your son t 22. I did not expect such
treatment from him (de sa part). 23. Does that young lady behavo
well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every
body. 25. Will you behave better in future? 26. We will behave
well. 27. Have you broken your finger (doigt) ? 28. I have broken
my thumb (pocice). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) 1
30. Wo could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help
laughing. 32. Why are you uneasy? 33. Because (parceque) my
sou does not behave well. 34. Did your father expect to be well
treated ? 35. He expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not
expect such an answer.
LESSON XCIV. LEgON XCIV.
1. N'importe, an ellipsis of U iCimportey answers to the £ngliaU
expression ** no mattery^ it does not matter^ never mind ;-—
Donnez-moi un Hvre, n*importe le Give me a book, no maUer whkh.
quel.
2. Qu^importe? answers to tho English phrase what matter^
What does it matter ? When that expression is followed by a plural
eobject tho verb importer is put in the plural : —
Que nous importent leurs mur- Wh4U do we care for tkdr mitrmwrt?
muresl
3. N'est«e pas % corresponds to the English expressions, U it watt
i$ he noty d^l do they not 1 following an assertion : —
II fait fVoid; n'est-ce pasi U is add f isUnot?
4. N'est^e pas ? frequently precedes the assertion : —
STest^e pas que votre fr&re est Yovr Ifrother is come ; is he not 7
•rriv^t
6. Regarder, to look at^ is used in the sense of to concern :—
Cela rcgarde votre frere. T*hat wncerns your broth^-.
a En voul-oir (3. ir.) 2l quelqu'un, ^ quelque chose, means to haie
B design, against or upon ; a grvdge against any one ; to be angry with
ene on account of something ;—
n en reut inotre vie. ffe has a design agasnU our 4ft
Digitized
by Google
nt
LXtffOS X0IT,
SmbouA of Eiampubs.
Ponrvn quo roos renies, n'importe
par qa«I chemio.
FourvQ qu'fl le ilunOi tt'inqxirto
commieiit
Apportes-moi qnelqne diose, u'lm-
porto quol.
'«n moiuTai ; n'importo.
1 B'est pas satSafait; qa'importel
'1 feftue DOB prtflenti ; qn'importe 1
^ae noTU importe cetto affaire 1
Qae VOU8 importe son arrfv6et
Vous Tiendrez ; n'est ce pas? >
li'est-oe pas que vous viendrez 1 )
Estroe que cela me regarde 1
Cela ne regarde personne.
n en Teut k nos bfens.
II en yeut k nos amis.
Tela vous rogarde-t-il 1
i^rovided you comtj no ijfflir wkiek
Pnmded Mm 4hs U, wawatfsrjbw.
Bring fM s6midhing^1uf matUr wkJL
ItkaUdieikroMMh iig nomaUer.
H€ is not sa^/Ud vith Ui wkM
matters it?
Ht refuses owpre$nU$; itkatipetU
matter?
What do ice care for tkat affair?
What is his arrival tons?
You will coTne; vnllyounat?
Does that concern me? h that anf
thing tome?
TVuit concerns nobody. That is na^
body's business.
He has a design upon our property.
He has a grudge against our Jrien '4,
Is that your business?
EXBRCISK 185.
Accord-cr, 1. to grant ; Hasard, m. chance ; Pouv-oir, Z. \x. to h$
Approuv-er, 1. to ap-ltoiu,far ; able;
prove; Moqu-er, (te) I. reH to9a.ng, m. Hood t
Auteur, m. author ; laugh at ; yti,Jrom aller, togog
Bien, very ; Murmure, m. murmur ; Velours, m. velvet ;
Condamn-er, 1. to con-Ten, UtUe ; Vers-er, 1 to pour, shed g
demn ; Plainte, f. complaint; VU, o, vUe ;
Demande, f. request ;
1. Qne voua apporterai-je de Londres ? 2. Apportex-nons ce que
Tous pourrez, n'importe quoi. 3. Lai avez-vous dit d'apporter da
velours ? 4. Je lui ai dit d*en apporter, nMmporte de quelle quality.
6. Pourvu que quelqu'un vienne, n*importe qui. 0. Que m*importe
qu'Amaud m'approuve on me cohdamne? (Boilbau.) 7. Voua
accorde-t^il votre demande? 8. II refuse; quMmportet 9. £at41
■atisfait dea efforts que voua avez faita? 10. II n'en est paaaatisfait;
qu*importe? 11. II n*a pas voulu nous reccvoir; peu'm'impoita
13. Qu'importentles plaintes et les murmures des auteurs, si le public
s*en moque? (F^raud.) 13. Qu'importe qu'au hasard un sang vil
Boit verse ? (Racine.) 1 4. Cela vous regarde ; n*eat«e pas ? 15. CeU
ne me regarde pas. 16. Cela ne regarde que moL 17. Vous leur
avez dit que ees affaires ne les regardaient pas; n'est.ce past
18. Vous m*en voulez; n'est-«e pas? — ^N'iriporte. 19. A qui en
vonlez-voua? 20 Nona n^en voulona i personne. SI. Nooiimtom
Digitized
by Google
Liftoff JtOT. • U9
Ml Toal«iir8 pas. 9S. Vont m'en Yondrez; n'eil ee pas? 38. Ed
Yonlez Tous il la vie de votre ami ? 24. Je ii*eii Tevz pas & aa ?ia.
25. II m'en Teat; quMmporte? 36. Va, C^sar est bien loin d'ea
Tonioir & sa vie I (Voltaire).
EzsBCiss 186. >
1. Which way will your brother come? 2.^*rovided he comes to*
morrow, it does not mattei which way. 3. Will he write to your
brother? 4. He will not write to him; but it is no matter. 5.
Will yon not lend me a book ? 6. Which book do yon wish to
have 1 7. No matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from
Paris ? 9. Bring me what you can ; no matter what. 10. Does
that concern your brother? 11. That does not concern him, but it
eoneema me. 12. Does he refuse to write to us? 13. He refuses
to (de) write; but what does it matter? 14. Bring me a book, no
matter which. 16. Your brother will come, will he not? 16. Has
he been willing to receive your brother? 17. He has refused to re-
ceive him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not? 19. He is
not pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business? 21. It
is my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told
you tho^ it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against
your father's life ? 25. He has no design against his Kfe ; but he
has a design npon his property. 26. Are you angry with ns on that
account? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have yon a
grudge against my friends? 29. I have no grudge against Ihem.
80. That concerns you, does it not? 81. That concerns me. 33.
Is that^our business? 33. It is very warm this morning; is it not*
14. My sister will come this afternoon; will she not? 35. If she
ioes not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming to ns?
LESSON XCV. LEgON XCV.
1. The word monde, toorld, is often used in French in a restr]eto4
sense. It has then the meaning of peopUf eompanyt reiirme, iervania^
T avait-il beacconp de monde k Were there many peopk at church?
r^lisel
le meUant iila t^te de son monde, il Placing himself at the head of iUf
OBvrit Ini-m^me la porte. po^^i ^ him&dj lyefmed the door.
VOLTAISE.
3. Hm word gens also meana jMopZe, and » of the maseniis^ fui»
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
ttO
LX8809 SOT.
d«r ; buti by a wngular anomaly, the adjectives which precede gen^
are put in the feminine, while those which follow it mast be in the
masculine gender >—
Ce soDt les meillenres g^ens da monde. 7^ are the best people in (he toarld,
Ces gens sont fort dangercux. TTiose people are very dangerous,
d. The words toat, tel, quel, certain, not preceding immediately
the word geru, are pat in the mascaline, except when the woi^
coming between is an aiiyective having a different termination in the
two genders : —
Tons ces gens 14 ^taient-ils chr6- Were aU those people Christians?
tiens 1 Pascal.
Teas ces geas Ik sont sottcment All those people are foolishly ingenU
ingfinieax. J. J. Bousseau. ous.
4. The words toat, tel, quel, certain, are put in tlie feminine whea
they precede immediately the word gens^ or are separated from it
by an adjective having a different termination in tlie feminine :~-
Quelles eens fttes-vous 1 Quelles sont What people are you? What is
vos affaires 1 (Racine.) business?
Qnelles bcmnes et dignes ^ns 1 What good and worthy people f
R£suMd OF Examples.
Aprto s'Atre ikit craindre de tont le
monde, il craigoit tout le monde
aossi. FUEcHiia.
II dit da mal de tout le monde.
Toot le monde le dit.
Aves vous amen6 beaucoup de
monde 1
Le monde n'cst pes encore arriv6.
II n'y avait pas grand monde.
II y a da monde avec luL
II a congedi6 tout son monde.
Ce capitaine a tout son monde.
Yoild de sottes gens.
n s'arrAte chez les premieres bonnes
gens qu'il troave. Boiste.
II y a ji la viUe, comme aillears, de
• fort sottes gens, des gens fades,
oisifls, d680ccup6s. La Bruy£re.
Quels braves gens !
Quelles viles et michantes gens !
bodyviA
After having inspired every I
fear^ he feared every body.
He slanders every body.
Every body says so.
Have you brought many people f
The company is not yet anne.
T%ere were not many people there.
There is some person with him.
He has discharged aU his servanti
(people).
That captain has all his crew.
Those are foolish people.
He stops urith the first good peopk
that /te finds.
There are in the cifyt as ^sewkeri^
very silly people^ tedious^ idle, wt^
employed people.
What loorthy people t
What vile and wicked people t
EXBRCISB 187.
Aocommoder(s\) 1. ref. Campagne, f omn/rf/; Gens d'6p£e, miUtarf
topiU up wUhf to agrei Ddm6l-er, 1. to settle] ar- men ;
wUht range; Gens de lettres, men tf
Attend-re, 4. to await j to Oto que, as soon as: letters ;
9eeti Squipsgo, m. etino; Gens de robe, lawyers g
i (k\ M> boardi BveiU-er, 1. to aoake ;. Patron, n. pitren eaud
Digitized
by Google
LMBSOV ZOT. tSi
Pofd-re, 4. to lose* Beven-ir, 1. ir. to r«tKr)» ;Voyig-er, i. [( 40.] io
Basdembl-ar. 1. to bring Salon, m. drawing-room; travel ;
together; Serv-ir, 2. ir. to Krw; Terre, f. land^ s.\ore,
1. Avez-vous rassemble beuaconp de monde chez vous? 2. II n'est
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner an*
joord'hui ? 4. On le servira d^s que noire monde sera venu. 6. Le
capiLiine a-t-il tout son Equipage k bord? 6. Non, Monsieur, il a en>
roye du monde il terre. 7. Vos gens se levent-ils de bonne heure *
6. II faut que tous les jours j^eveille lout mon monde (Moli^ee).
9 Les Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que lea
Suedois (Voltaiee). 10. Ou est Madame votre m6re? 11. EUe est
dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle (company). 12. Tout le
monde pent voyager comme raoi (X. de Maistee). 13. Ainsi va le
monde. 14. Elie attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde Tait
quittee (Fl^chiee). 16. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne?
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a^t-il ici une society
de gens de lettres ? 18. Non, Monsieur; il n*y a qu^une societe de
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces braves gens? 20. Je crois
que ce sent des gens d*6p4e. 21. Tels sent les gens aujourd'hui.
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La BEUTfiRs). 23. Tous mea gens
sent malades. 34. II faut savoir s'accomuoder de tootes gens
(L'Acab£hie). 26. Que pouvez-vous avoir & d^m^ler avec de
telles genst •
Exercise 188.
I. Are there many people at your brother's? 2. There are not
many people there. 3. Docs that young man slander every body ?
4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with
you? 6. We have4)rought but few people with us. 7. Is there com-
pany with your mother? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who
has told you that ? 10. Every body says so. 11. Is the company come I
12. The company is not yet come. 13. Has your mother discharged
iw< servants (domesliques) ? 14. She has discharged all her peoplo.
15. Do you know those people? 16. I know them very well; they
are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he stops always with
good people. 18. Are there foolish people here? 19. There are
foolish people everywhere (partout). 20. Do you awake your people
every morning? 21. Yes, Sir; I must awake them everyday. 22.
What can your brother have to settle wh\\ those people ? 23. They
tro the best people in the world. 24. Were there many people at
cfauich this morning? 26. There were not many people there. 86L
Are your people sksk? 27. Yea, Sir; all my people are sick. 28»
Digitized
by Google
151 LXiioii xoTk
Tliera it here a Boeietj of learned men. 99. There are in Parti
■everal aoeietiea of lawyers. 30. What worthy people I SI. What
^od people ! 83. Do you expect your people to-day ¥ 83. We ex
pect them this wening. 34. So goes the world. 85. Haa your cap*
tain all hla erev T 36. He haa all his erew on board.
USSON XCVL LEgON XCVL
1. When property or possession is affirmed of things inanmiate^
the relation of possession is often expressed by the relative pronoun
en [} 96, (6.)] :—
VoiUi un bel arbre; le fruit en est That is a fine treeg iUfruU is wxcA-
excellent Vtnl,
3. When, however, the inanimate possessor is the subject of the
same clause, the possessive adjective is used [} 95, (4.)] :—
Cet arbro a perdu son fruit TtuA tfte has last its/ntii.
8. Entendre, to hear^ is used in the sense of to underaUmd, It
is also used reflectively. It means then, to be understood, to under*
stand one^s self^ or one another, or to agree unth one another. It means
also, to be expert in any thing. In this latter sense it takes d before
ita regimen. This regimen is at times replaced by the pronoun y :—
Comment entendea-rous cela 1 How do you understand thai ?
Cela s'entend. T^hat is understood.
n s'entend aux aflaires. He is expert in business,
4. Se faire entendre corresponds to the English, to make on^e $eff
understood, to make <m£s self heard i —
Nous nous sommes (ait entendre. We made ourselva understood,
6. Taire [4. ir.] means, to eoneealj to keep to onis self. Se taire.
ref., to be sHenL
Taisea-rous. Taisons-nous. Be sUerU (hold your tongue). Ut «i
be silent.
Dites-lui de se taire. Tell him to be silenL
R£8um£ of Examples.
Ii'auteur d*UD bienfait est celui qui
«n revolt les plus doux fVuits.
DUCLOS.
Votre Jardin est maguiflque; les
arbres en sont superbes.
Iia vie a seB plalsire et scs pelnesw
If'Atvde a see cbarmesi
T%e author of a good deed is the one
who receives its sweetest fruits.
Your garden is vu^uifieentt ii% trUf
are very beautiful,
Lifehasits pleasures anditftrnUe^
Sfud9 has its iharm% «
Digitized
by Google
txaaoir lorL
fS$
InlMideft'Vow Man le lattait
CetaYOtt6 n'e&tend riea auz afikires.
n Be 8*7 entend |>a8.
Je loi ai doimd & entendre, qu'Q
6tait de trop icL
Qn'oDtecidez-Tous par la 1
U 7 avail tant do bruit, que nons
n'avons pn nouBfaire entendre.
Taisez le premier, ce que tous you-
lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim.
Pourquoi ne voos taiaez-voua pas 1
Kous Tayona fait taira.
Do y$u fmienumd LttUn wdl7
Tkat atiamey has no knewUdge of
business.
Be is not expert in this.
I gene hiin to understand thni it
was in the way here.
What do you mean by that ?
There was so much noise^ that wm
could not make ourselves heard.
Keep to yourself thai wJUeh yoti would
wish to have kept secret.
Why are you not sUent?
We made him hold his tongue (<i-
lenced him).
ExBRCiss 189.
AgremeDt, m. pleasure ; Cbirurgien, m. surgeon ; Manche, f. sleew ;
Avantage, m. advan- Conaent-ir, 2. ir. to con^ Mdl-er, 1. to mix ;
tage; serU; Muet^ te, <2«iii^, 0t«te ;
Baaque, f. skirt of a Court, e, shorts Pays, m. country i
coal! Force, f. force, poioer / Raison, f. reason /
Brare, worthy; Fort, very; R6us8-ir, 2. to succeed.
1. Eat-ce un habit neuf que voire fila porte? 2. Ceat un habit
oeuf, le drap en est tr^s fin. 3. Lea manches n'en aont ellea pas trop
courtea ? 4. Je crois que lea manches en sont trop courtea et lea
baaquea trop louguea. 6. La campagne n'a-tpelle paa aea avantagea ?
6. J^aime la campagne ; j'en connaia lea avantagea. 7. Paris a sea
agr^znents. 8. J'aime Paria ; j'en connaia lea agr^ments. 9. Ce chi-
rurgien a'entend-il & la m6decine? 10. II q'7 entend rien du tout.
11. £ntendez-vous la m^decine. 12. Je ne m'7 entanda paa. 13. Je
ne I'entends paa. 14. Je n'7 entends rien. 15. Avez-voua r^naai jL
voua faire entendre ? 16. Noua n'7 avona paa reusai. 17. Mon voi*
■in eat un brave homme et je m*entends fort bien avec Ini. 18. Faiia
taire certaines gena est un plua grand miracle que de faire parler lea
mueta (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pa7a est cet homme t
20. II tait son pays et sa naiaaance. 21. Par la force de la raiaon,
elle apprit Tart de parler et de ae taire (Fl£chier). 22. Voulez*
vous vous taire impertinente, vous venez toujoura m^ler voa imper
tinerces h toutes chosea (MoliSre). 23. Qui ae tait conaen
(PAuTERB).
EXERCIBE 190.
1. Have you a very good garden ! 2. We have a ver7 large otie^
Imt its aoil {terrej f.) ia not good. 3. la 70ur brother'a eoat newt
a. Ha haa a new coat, but ita aleevea are too ahort 6. Are not ita
aUrta too long? 6. No, Sir; ita akirta ara too abort 7. Hava |oii
Mihaaid tkat praaebar(|»r^^M<aar) ? & Tbara w«a aa smcb nolaa
Digitized
by Google
854 LSB80H XOYIL
that I could not hear aim. 9. Does not the country have its plas
sures? 10. The country hoa its pleasures. 11. Does not your br^«
ther like the city ? 12. He likes the country ; he knows its pleasurosL
13. What does your brother mean by that? 14. H3 means what he
says. 15. Is your father expert in business ? 16. My father has no
knowledge of business. 17. Does that young man understand Eng*
lisli well? 18. He understands French and English very well. 19.
Do you agree well with your partner? 20. My partner is an honest
man [J 86.] ; I agree very well with him. 21. Does tliat young
man conceal bis age ? 22. He conceals his age and his country. 23.
Docs your father understand medicine? 24. He does not under-
stand it 25. He has no knowledge of it. 26. Be silent, my child.
27. Tell that child to be silent 28. Silence gives consent. 29.
Will you not be silent ? 30. What have you given him to under-
stand? 31. We gave him to understand that study has its charmSi
32. Have you silenced him? 33. Yes, Sir; we silenced him. 84.
Tell him to be silent. 35. I have already (ci^'d) told him to be si-
lent 36. Let us be silent
LESSON XCVH LEgON XCVIL
THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE THE VERBAL ADJECTIVE.
1. The present participle is invariable, and ends always in anl. ft
expresses action, not situation. It cannot be rendered into English
by an adjective, but is rendered by the participle present or by the
present of the indicative preceded by a relative pronoun. The pros*
ent participle has often, or may have a regimen. [} 64.]
Cos hommes, pr^voyant le danger, 7%ose men^ foreseeing the danger,
8*enfuircut. fled.
2. The part of the verb used after the preposition en, is always tb
present participle : —
En ficrivant, en lisant In writing, in reading.
3. When the word ending in ant, is used to express the qualities,
properties, or moral or physical situation of a noun, it is a verbal
adjective, and assumes in its termination the gender and number of
the noun which it qualifies. It must in this case be rendered ioto
Knglish by an adjective :—
Ges hommes eont privoyants. Those mef^ «v cantimu, ffmaidmL
4. The veriM entendre, to Ikesf ; £dre» to ctfiue, to mdi»;1ala8er.loJM^
Digitized
by Google
fcSBaoir xoYii.
M9
iEe^ foilowd by another verb completing tbeir meaning, are not ia
French separated from that verb. In the corresponding scnteneea ic
Bnglisli, the two verbs are usually separated by other words :—
J'ai laisB6 toraber roon coateaa. / have let my knife fall {dropped),
J 'ai entendu diru cela. / have heard thai said.
R6SV1S& OF Examples.
Je oonnaia des personnes dormant
d'un sommcil si profond, que le
bruit de la foudra ne lea r6veille-
rait pas. Brscher.
Les eaux donnantcs sont meilleures
pour les chevaux que les caux
vives. BupFON.
Nous avons trouT6 cctte femmo
mourante.
Cette fomme mourantdans la crainte
de Dicu, ne craignait point la
mort.
On est beureux en se contentant de
p€U.
il vez-vous 1ais86 passer ce roleur 1
Je I'ai lai886 passer.
Pourquoi avez-v.>w3 fait ikire un
habit 1
Je n'ai pas fait (kire d'habit.
J'ai las86 tomber quelqno chose.
Lui avez-Yous entendu dire cela 1
Je le lui ai entendu dire.
Je Tai entendu dire.
Je Tai entendu dire a ma soenr.
/ know persons J sleeping (who sleep
so projotindlijt thai the noise ofthun'
der would not awake them.
Sleeping {still) waUrs are better fei
horses than living waters.
We found that woman dyirhg,
7%fd woman dying in the fear of
God, did not fear death.
Oiu is happy in contenting one's stV
with little.
Have ifou lei that thief pass ?
/ let htm pass.
Why have you had a coat mads f
I have had no coat made.
I let something fall.
Have you heard him say that 7
I heard him say it.
I heard it said.
I heard my sister say it.
EXSRCISB 191.
Appliqu-er, (s') 1. ref HAt-er (sc), 1. ref. to Pr6venant, e. obliging i
to apply; hasten i Preven-ir, 2. ir. to eoh
Bcsoin, m. iMii< ; Lecture, f. rica^ifi^; tidpate;
Changement, m. aUera- Obligeant, e. obliging; R€p£t-er, 1. to repeat;
tiott s Plai-re, 4. ir. to please / Suivant, e, foUotnng ;
Emouss-er, 1. to blunt ; Pointe, f. point; Suiv-re, 4. Ir. tt follow t
Empdcher, 1. to prevent; Pleuv-oir, 3. ir. to rain ; Voyant, e, bright, shyisy.
Essayer, 1. to try;
1. Ma cousine ost-elle aussi obligeante que la vdtre? 2. Elle est
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Vos en-
fiints sont-iU prevenants ? 4. Mes enfants, pr^v^nant tons mes be*
Boins, ne me laissent rien ii d6sirer. 6. Lisez bien attentivement los
pages aoivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, autvant Texemple de leur m^re,
8*nppliquent i la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantea ne me plaiseni
point 8. Mes acsurs voyant qa*U allait plenvoir, ae h&t^rent de re-
rcoir. 9. Qn'avez-Toiit laiaa^ tomber T 10. J'ai Uiaa6 tombor na
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
HM LBSSuir xerttu
plnme; lapointe en est toouss^ 11. Les aTez-vous faltfarkrf
13. Je les ai fait parler, mais avec difficult^. 13. Avez-voue fait Aire
dea cliangements dans votre maisonT 14. J'yen ai fait (aire. Id. A
qiioi en avez-vons fait faire ? 16. Ten ai fait laire JL la aalle ^ maik
ger et an ealon. 17. Avez-vous lalss^ passer cet homme? 1& Je
n'ai pas essayd de I'en emp4cher. 19. A qui (wham) avez-vous en*
tendu dire cela ? 30. Je Tai entendudlre & mon p^re. 21. Je le lid
ai entendu rep6ter. 32. H vous I'a entendn dire. 33. 11 voas a vo
faire cela. 34. II vous I'a vu &ire. 25. Je Tai vu passer.
EZBRCISB 192.
1. Are still waters good for horses? 3. Buffon saysttiiat they are
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters eautionsf
4. They are not very cautious. 5. My sisters, foreseeing that it was
going to rain, brought their umbrellas. 6. What have yon let fall t
7. I have let my knife and book fall. 8. Do very bright colors please
your brother t 9. Very bright colors do not please him. 10. Have
you read the foUo wing pages? 11. Have you seen the dying wo-
man? 13. Your sister, dying in the fear of God, was very happy.
13. Your sister, following your example, appli'*:. herself to study.
14. Have you made them read? 16. I made them read and writa
16. I made my brother write. 17. I have had a book bound (rdier).
18. Has your father had alterations made in his house? 19. He has
had some made in it 30. In which room has he had some madef
21. He has had some made in my brother's room. 33. Whom have
you heard say that ? 33. I heard my sister say it 24. Have yoa
heard him say that ? 26. I have not heard him say it 26. Have you
seen my father pass ? 27. I have not seen him pass. 28. I have
Heard him speak. 29. Make him speak. 30. Let it fall. 31. Do not
let it fall. 32. What has your brother dropped ? 33. He has dropped
nothing. 34. Whom have you heard say that ? 35. I heard your
brother say it 86. I have heard you repeat it 37. We have i
yon do that
LESSON XCVffl. LEgON XCVUl.
FJtACnOAL fUtoUMft OF THS RULES ON THE FAST P kRTICirLB. ^L
The participle past is variable under any of the following ooi^
ditionsy*
1. When employed as aa adjeetive; in which ease H agreM te
gcndMr and number with the now whieb it qnaiUlee ^—
Digitized
by Google
OatliTMliaprinlf. FH$U$db$oks.
Om tanoMt paraiiwiit Uen abaf- 1^^$ womm appemr vnf dtftckd.
S. When used in the fonnatioii of the tentet of pMiive ywh^i
wImb it always agieea with the tu^tei of the propoiitioii >^
JSDn sont Uea xe^uet de toat le Thef mrt wU reetivtd hf €fptn§
noado. hodiff,
S. When employed m fonning the eonfponnd tenaea of neuter
verba having Urt aa an aiudliary ; in which pbee, aa in the preced-
ing eaae, it agrees with the subject or mnninative :—
Yotre aoBur eat partie ce maUn. Your sister went away tkU morning,
4. When employed m forming the tenses of active verba having
amnr aa an anxiliary ; in which conneetion it agrees not with the
subject, but with the direct ob/ect or n^guncn, provided that objeet
prseeies it :«-
Les maisoDS que noos avons ache- The koutet vfkiek we k€ve hengkt.
5. When nsed along with itre in the formation of the compound
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct
object; in which position it sgrees with that pronoun or dire€$
cbftet : —
Ges dames se loot flatties. 7%ose ladies have jUdlered iknmkeee,
& When used along with tlrt (aa in Rule 6.) in tiie formation of
the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition ;
in wliich event it agieea with the direct object^ provided (aa in Rule
4.) that object precedes it : —
Les bJstoires ({n'eiles se soat rsocB- T%e stories whkk ihtf retmted to eaek
tees. . / other.
7. When fonning part of a compound tenae of a verb governing a
succeeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob
jeet which ia represented as performing the action denoted by the in
finitive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object:—
Les dames que J'ai entendues chan- The ladies whom I heard sing {sing'
ter. ing).
8. When in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle is
preceded by another object or regimen which is direct ; in which case
It agrees with that direct object: —
Je les en ai avertis. t hate warned (km of 0,
Tens lea en avea teftmis. Yosk ham tnformed tSem of #,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
e«
l«9iSQ« SCVIIV
B£8um£ of Examples.
Voof avez drs livren bien rolite.
VoB lilies hont cstituccfl.
Ces (orms sont bieu lalK)ur6e8.
Mcs voUines sont toinb^es d'ao-
cold.
EUes sont venues noos trouver.
La victoire quo nous avons rem-
porUSo.
Lcs champs que vous avez 1abour6s.
Vous vous ites rcpentis de Totre
fauto.
£lle s'est sonvenue de sa promesse.
Les soldats que J'ai vus passer.
Les musiciennes que J'ai enten-
dues jouer.
LMndiscr6tion que nous nous som-
mes reproch6e,
Les evcn^mcnts qu'elles se sont
racontds.
Lcs fruits que J'cn ai recus.
Les nouvelles que J'en ai apport^es.
Yott have wdl bound AoMb
Your daughters are esAeer^i.
Those lands are well ploughed.
My veiffhbttrs have come to tm* «»
fUrslaiuling,
T%cy came to us.
The victory which we have gaintd,
me fields which you have pUmgked,
You have repented {you) of yom
fauU,
She remembered her prifmiae.
The soldiers whom 1 saw f^issing.
The musical ladies whovi I ieari
playing.
The indiscretion with wA.. .i «v rs-
proached one another.
The events which they relatea, 9f»
another.
The fruits which I received frwoK -«
The news whi^ J brought from u .
ExBRCISE 103.
Arordinairo, iutt«va2; Flenr. f. y2<7tMr; Reprocb-er (ae), 1. refl
Avert^ir, 2. to warn ; Malaae, sick person ; to reproach one*s s^s
Boue f. mitd; Merveille (a), wonder- "BLX-re, 4. ir. to laugh;
Coutume (dc), lutta^^y, fuUy, perfectly ; B6rieuX| se, xnViu;
usual; Parven-ir, 2. ir. to 5m^- Souri-re, 4. w.tosmiU;
Caeill-ir, 2. to gather ; ceed ; Buivaut, according to;
Decliiffr-er, 1." to <fea-Port-cr (se), 1. to be, i<?Tomb-er, 1. to fail;
phcr; do; Tronv-eVj to find;
D6coiirfig-er, 1. to dis-Vlus tot, sooner, earlier ; Vol-cr, 1. to steaL
courage i
1. Cette demoiselle ne se trouve-t-elle pas bien fatigu^e? 2. EDe
est fatigu^e et d^courag^. 3. Votre aoeur est-elle all^ i Fegliae
BuivanC sa coutume? 4. Ma m^re et ma aoeur y sont allees. 5.
Votre aoeur est-elle revenue plus t6t que de coutume. 6. Elio esl
revenue plus tard qu'k Tordinaire. 7. Cette pauvre malade cst^lle
tomb^e! 8. Elle eat tomb^e dans la boue. 9. Ma m^ro est^lie
parvenue ^ d^chiffrer ma lettre ? 10. Elle n'y est pas parvenue. 11.
Quelles flcurs avez-vous cueillies? 12. Les flcurs que j*ai trouveea
Bont plus belles que celles que vous mVvez envoy6ea. 13. Votre
tfousine no e'est-elie pas bien portee ? 14. Elle s^est portee b. mer-
veille. 15. De quel livre vous ^tes-voua servie, Mademoiselle f 16.
Je me suis servie du v6tre. 17. Nous nous sommcs servies dea
nitres. 18. Quelles fautes votre fils s'est-il reproch^es? 19. Le«
fiatea quMl s'eat reprochtea ne aont pas B^rieuaes. 30. Les avet*
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
VOQS TQs rirel 31. Je l«s ai vvs sonnre. 32. Les avex-foua ▼«•
7olor des fruils ? 23. Je les ai vus volcr dcs pommes. 24. Les btm-
rous avertis de Iturs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne lea
en ai pas avertis.
EXBRCISK 104.
1. Are jour books well bound? 2. They are well bound, tind
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged 1
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis-
ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un-
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 8.
Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. la not your
Bister gone to church? 11. My sister is gone to church as usual.
12. Did your sister return sooner than usu'-d? 13. My sister re-
turned later than usual. 14. Are the fields whicJi you have ploughed
large? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 16.
Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies
whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall!
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud? 20. Did your sister
succeed in reading that book ? 21. She succeeded in reading it 22.
Have you wanied your sisters of their danger? 23. I have warned
them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What pen has
your mother used ? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not those
young ladies used my book ? 28. They have not used it 29. Has
your mother been well? 30. She has been perfectly well. 31.
Has she remembered her promise? 32. She has remembered it. 33.
Have you seen those boys laugh? 34. I have seen them smile. 35
Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play.
LESSON XCIX. LEgON XCIX.
PRACTICAL R^UMfi 07 THK RVLSS ON THE PAST PARTICIPLS. — IL
The participle past is invariable ?—
1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle :—
Mes niices ont 6tndid leurs le9ons. Mif nieces hare studied *Mr lessons.
£lic8 ont D6glig6 Icurs fitudcs. TAey kave negLded their studies.
2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir : —
Mes cousincs ont dispam. JMV cousins kace disappeared,
Les cinq heures qu'elles ont dormL Ttejhi hewrs which Mcy A«t« slepk
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
29D ftiffov xcii.
In tiM Iflttor MBtoiii^ tbt «wd juniiaiit is luidsntood alUr
4<ifrv9.*> —
I1O0 cinq henres vendmU Us fMflif Tie j(m Amci dmring wkiek 11
elles oQt domu. depk
8. In uniperaoiud verbs, whether ooi^jiigated with 4tre or wi
avoir :—
Lei chalenn qn'ila (kit ceCte ennle. T%t kuA (ksn has bam tka$ jpmt
n est arrive bien des malheun. Many misfortwna Aow kappnt
4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second promHI
is an indirect regimen, whea no direct regimen precedes ^—
Bile s'est propos6 de partir. She prepated to kendfio kmce,
6. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and ia preeeded by a
direct regimen, and this direct regimen is not the actor, bot the ob-
ject acted upon. In this case the infinitive is generally rendered hi
English by the passive voice: —
Lea chansons que J'alentendachan- The song vkUk I heard (being)
ter. sting.
6. When the direct regimen preceding a participle la noi the object
of this participle, but of a verb following* —
La r6gle qne Je voua ai conseilU The rule which I advised fou t»
d'6tudier. study.
7. The participle of faire, faitf followed by an infinitive, is always
invariable : —
Je les ai fait raccommoder. / have had them mended.
8. After the pronoun, en, when no direct regimen precedes :— -
VouB a-t-OA donn6 des flenrs 7 Have they given you /lowers ?
On m'en a donn^. They have given me {some) of then
"RtaVHA OF EZAMPLSS.
7^ have given us good adviee.
Biles nous ont donn6 de bons con-
seils.
Elles nous en ont donnA.
Les trois Veues qu'il a ooiim.
Les annies que ces Miflces ont
dur6.
La belle Joumte qu'il a ikit hier !
O'est U plus beUe Ate qa'fl y ait
ca.
II s'est pr6sent6 deux de vos amis.
Ces demoiselles se sont nui.
Les Asiatiques se sont (kit une es-
ptee d'art de I'^dncaUon de I'ei^.
phant. Bmrrox.
7^ havegvoen us some.
T%e three leagues which he ran.
The years that those edUices kam
lasted.
What a kautiful day it was yesto^
day!
It u the finest feast that there hat
been.
There appeared two of yaw friends.
Those young ladies kave inpmd ems
another.
The Asiatics have made the edmemUmt
of the etephMU a kind of art.
Digitized
by Google
rtussir. • succeed.
Les fniits que J'al tq Toler.
Les soldato blQ8a6ii que J'ai ra por-
ter.
La duuMon que J'al entendu chan-
ter.
Les pommes que Je todb a! diAmdn
de OMiiger.
Je lee a! fkU partir.
Biles m*ont apportd dee oranges.
EUes m'en oot apport6.
ThefmiU which J smt ieing <Mnk
T%e foounded sddiers whom I j»w
{peing) earned.
The song which I heard sung.
7%e appUs which I forbade fwi to
eal,
I obliged ihem to leave.
They have brought me oranges.
They have bronghl ma {some) of ihem.
EzSRClSB 195.
Atiberge, tisi^g Joa-er, 1. to play ; Piftoe, f. piece t
Bien, m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; BacoDt-er, 1. to reUUof
Dernier, e, last;. ^ Porm-ir, 2. to deeps Eeven-ir, 2. Ir. to r^
Pisparait^re, 4,ir.toi2£s-Lion d'Or, m. Golden twms
appeotr g LUm ; Soieries, sUk goods.
Enterr-er, 1. to bwrys Mori, e, deads
1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommand6e ? 2. On m'a reeom-
mtoAh I'auberge ^n Lion-d'Or. 8. Qnelles nouvelles avez-vous
apport^es? 4. Tai apport^ des nouvelles arables. ^. Vosvoisines
■onUelles habilltesl e. EUes ne sont pas encore habill^es. 7. Ont-
ellea bien dormi la noit demi^re? 8. EUes n'ont pas bien dormL
ft Qoand aont^lles anivdes? 10. Elles sont airiv6et k qoatre
heures et demie. 1 1. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures? 12. Les
siz beures qn'ellea ont dormi leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 1 8. Voa
MBura se sont-elles amus6es ? 14. En jouant elles se sont fait mal
an bras. 15. Se sont^Ue^ raeont^ notre conversatioii ? 16. Ellas
ee la sont racont^e. 17. Vos amies ont-elles dispam! 18. Elles
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats
qua vous avez vus partir; sonUils revenns? 20. Ds sont morts;
je les ai vn enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait^tudier? 22. Je
les ai fiut lire. 28. Avez-vous apportd des soieriast 24. Je n'en ai
pas apport& 25. Les soieries que j*en ai apport^as sont superbaSb
EzsRCiaB 196.
1. Have you not recommended my nieoeaf 2. Ihavarecommandato
Uiem. 8. Have you brought me good oran^s ? 4. I have brought
yon^aome. 5. Have you given any to my two daughters \ 6. I have
given them soma. 7 I would bave given tham some, if I had had
many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies? 9. I have not
aai^aeted them; I never neglect them. 10. The years which that
•faareh has lasted, speak m ikvor (en faveur) of the aichit^^
11. Tha ten miies wliieh ha haa nm, have iktignad him. 12. Htvaf
'Digitized
by Google
^e$
LS690ir o.
yonr Bisters injured each other ? 1 3. They have flattered therasehea
14. Did my friends present themselves? 15. Th«re came three of
your sisterd. 1 6. What did they imagine ? 17. They conceived the
idea of reading Tasso {Le Tasse), 18. Have you seen them (m.)
steal my apples? 19. I saw them steal your peaches. 20. Have
fou hciird them (f.) sing? 21. I have heard tliem sing. 22. The
songs which I heard sung, are not new. 23. I found in your room
the books which I had forbidden you to take. 24. The peaches
which I have forbidden you to eat, are not ripe (mUrex). 25. Have
you seen those soldiers ? 26. I saw them pass last week. 27. I saw
them carried to the hospital (d VhopUal) this morning. 28. Have
you brought oranges from France ? 29. I brought some. 30. The
oranges which I brought from it (en) are good. 31. Have you
brought silk goods? 32. J have brought some. 33. I have brought
none. 34. Are the silk goods which you brought from that placOa
good ? 35. I brought but two pieces.
LESSON C.
LE9ONC.
SXAMPLB8 ItLUSTBATZNO THB VARIOUS U8B8 OF THB PRIHCXPAL
CONJUNCTIONS.
I V0IK8 QUE.
II D*en fera rien, a moins que
vouB De lui parlies.
A moins que vous ne preniex blen
votre temps, vous d'cd viendrez pas
iibout
Quel indigne plaisir peut avoir Tava-
rice,
£t que sert d'amasser, a moins
qu on ne jouisse f Boursault.
He mil do nothing of the ittRc(
vnless you xpeak to hUn,
l/nlfM yoti choose your time teell^
you will not accomplitJi it.
What unworthy pUantra can av»>
rice offer t
What t« ilie use of hoarding fg> «c»-
leMwe enjoy f
ArsSL
Aussi, lis n*ont aucune force pour
^ posseder sdrement Pascal.
Ma douleur serai t trop mediocre,
9i jo pouvuis la d^peincfre ; aussi Je
ne rentrcprendrai pas.
Mmk ns SivioNi.
Therefore, they have 10 ttrengtk
to poeeees it safely,
Afy grtff would be too trUlinq ifl
could depict it; to that I will wot
undertaie it.
Cest ce qu*il J a de plus sage ; an
^ jMte» c'est aossi ce quil y a de plus
' JQitiu ^ Marmontkl.
This it the witett way; hetU^ U
it alto the mottJutU
Digitized
byGoogk
- ^^'
o
tBsaov e.
f«a
VoUa les pdrils. void 1c moyen de
les ^viler^, car eniin, 1e bras de Dieu
nest pas raccourci. Masbillon.
Le peuple se figure utie felicity
iDingtmure dans les situations 61e-
v^es, oti il ne peut atteindre, et il
atiit (car tel est rhomme) que tout
ce qu^il ne peut avoir, c'est cela
n)6me qui est le bonheur qu'il
clicrcbe. Massillon.
Thote are the dargen, thU it tks
way of avoitUn^ tfuM ; for JtiUilfiff
the iu/vence of God if- not leu
powerful.
The people pieture to tkemwlvn
an imaginary hnpplnes* in f^evate
atationt which tfuy car. not reach
and tfuy believe {for eueh it man
that all that which they cannot ob
tain, formt that very happinet
which tfiey teek.
OOMME — QUE.
Conime rambition n'a pas de
frcin, ct que la soif des nchesses
nous consume toua, il en rdsulte, que
le bonbeur nous fuit k mesure que
nous le cbercbons. Th. Corneillk.
La reconnaissance est le plus
douz, oomme le plus saint des de-
Yoirsw Thomas.
Comme il sonna la chaise, il
Sonne la retraite. La Fo^iTAurx.
AA atnbition hat no limitt, and 04
tJie thirtt of ric/iet devoum 7it all,
the retult it, that happinett avoidt
tit, at we proceed in our tearch after
iL
Oraiitude it tJie tweetett at well a»
the holiest of duLiet.
At he tounded the charge^ to ht
toundt the retreat
Voire maltre voua aimc; done,
fous devex Taimer.
Je »uL<, done, un t^moin de leur
peu dc puissance. Racine.
Et cToti peut done venir ce
cbai^enieot extreme ? Voltaire.
Si ce n'est toi, 0*081 done ton
fitrc. — Jc u'en ai pas.— C*est done,
qucluu*an des tiens. La Foxtajne.
Allons done I r^pondit on, et la
transactioD n'eat pas lieu.
DbCusst.
Your matter lovet you; therefore,
you thould love him,
lam, therefore, a wiineu of their
want of power.
Wlu-nce, therefore, can thit extreme
change proceed}
If it it not you, th*n it ft your
brother. Ifiavenone. T/ien it inuti
be tome one of your family.
" WeU doner replied they, and
the affair did not take place.
DE M&ISQUB.
De m^nie que le soleil brille sur
la terre, de m6me le juste brillera
dans les cieusL L*acadAxik.
At the tun thinet tyxm the earthy
to will thejutt thine m heaven.
CTest 6t73 faible et timlde que
d'etre inaccessible et ficr.
Massillox.
T7do famille vertueuse est un yais-
seau tenu pendant la temp6te par
deuz ancres, la religion et les nuBurs.
CuATEAt'BRlANO.
Qnd carnage de toutes parts 1
On ^'^oige k la fois les cnfants, lefl
rieillanla,
7b be inaeeettible and proud, it ti
be weak and timid.
A vittuout family it a vettd
tirengthtned during the tempeU by
two anehort, religion and tnorelt.
What carnage on all tidet !
They murder ai once the ehtldren,
the M men, the tiUer and the brUh'
Digitized
by Google
fcKM*ir 0.
£t la fiUe et la m^re,
Le fils dans lei bras de eon p^re.
#r, tkt dtmghUr mid <A# molWt (&•
«o» til <Ad armj ofku/atk&t.
LOBSqVE — QUAND.
Loriqua llnnooenoe habitait la
Vrre. Bossuvt.
Qnnnd vous me halriez, je ne ro*en
(ilaindrais pas. Kactke.
Quand nous n^aurions ^ard qu'au
r«>po9 seul de Dotre vie, (^uand nous
n'aurioDs point d'autre int^rftt ici-
bas que de nous preparer des jours
heureux, quel bonbeur de pr^venir
d'avance et d'6touflfer dans leur
naissance tant de passions violentea
Massillon.
C*^tait d^jA la puissance imp^-
riale au'on lui a vue deputy mais
avec rassentiment universcl des
peuplesi, arec dee formes moins
royales, mais plus dignes peut-dtre.
TuiEas.
Lliarmonie ne frappe pas simple-
ment Toreille, mais resprit
BotLEAU.
CTest un parti sage a la guerre dc
de se tenir sur la defensive, mais oe
B*est pas le plus brillant
La Rocuefougautj).
n n'j a point de mais qui tien-
ne ; je ne auonerai point ma fiUe &
00 muat BauAva
tHhMitd tk9
When innoeenct
earth.
If even you huted me, Iwmlo h<«.
eomphin.
If even 100 eontidered meniy tkt
repote of our Uvea, if etfen toe had
no other interest here than to pre*
pare for ourselves happy day*, VDhoA
happiness it wmld^be, to prevent
beforehand, to stifle in their Inrtk^
80 many violent passion*.
It toax already the imperial j
of which we nave since seen hisn
possessed, but with the consent of the
people, with forms less regal, bul
perhaps more worthy.
Harmony does not only Hrik$ th§
ear, but tJu mind.
To keep on the defensive is « (
resolution in war, but it is mat
most brilliant.
Oa
There is no ' but in tht ma
I will nof give my daughter to a
mute.
Hettreuz celui qui salt se conten-
ter de peu! Son sommeil n'est
trouble ni par les crainces, ni par
les d6iirs honteuz de Tavarica
Tead. d'Ho&ace.
Vous perdez ainsi la oonfianoe de
▼OS amis, sans les ayoir rendus ni
meilleurs ni plus habiles.
Voltaire.
On n'est jamais si heureux, ni si
malbeureux qu'on se Timagine.
La RocHEFoucAULn.
Cette loi sainte neconnait plus, ni
pauvre, ni riche, ni noble, ni roturier,
ni maitre ni esclave. Massilloh.
Sappy is he who can content AsH"
self with little I His sleep is dis-
turbed neither by the fear, nor by
the sliameful desires ofc
Tou Ume thus the eonfUknes t^
your friends without having render-
ed thim eitfter better or mere ekilfiiL
We are never so happy mor a» wsr
happy as we fancy.
That holy law knows no
either poor or rich, noble or
master or slave.
Or nw, mettoDS nous It rouvi^gv i yow tAen^ let us go io m»A
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
LBSftOV O.
MS
iaifliB|Mi^tai«Blhiiot€rtjMM. I mm om Jidiy , ** <A« ItNM ^ l^sir M<l^
Lb Saox. Aootf if Q9§r.*
]jt frfftone, nit booae oa bimi-
fMM^ soil iMi—ighni ou oooitaDte,
M peal litn tiir 1 4iim da nge.
Mabmomtsl.
Ia liberty de miblier ms pooste^
MlalibarM de Ja prane, doit Mre
HgMe rar ]* libartA mtene d'agir.
B. JIB 9t. PlBEBS.
Les grands homines entreprennent
de gnindee choees parceqn'elles
•ODtgnndes^ei lee fous parceqa'Os
ies croieat fiieilee. VAUYxiiiAOUBi.
tnmmmt^r imwimii, ktu nopomir
ofmr ika 9oml of the mte,
7%€ liberty of pMiMng on^§
ikmiaki*^ or ih$ lUiriff of tkimrMt,
9komtd be rtffuhied %tpom tko Hborty
o/oatimitmlf.
rABOBQUBi
Great men undertake ffreai tMinae
becauee they are great; and fooU^
beeauae they believe them eaey.
Beery ihina there ie bemttifid, be-
every tbny ii tnte.
Lk toot est been, jMioeque toat
POUBTAIV.
Le style le moins lioUe a poor- 1 I%e lemet elevated etyle haa^ mmer
tent sa noblesse. Boilxau. | thdeea, tto elevoHon,
Peopqaot le demuider, poisque
▼oos le ssvei f RAonnE.
Ne Toos lesees jamais d*examiner
lee eapsss dee gnnds cfaangements ;
a Todre instmetkm. Bosauxi.
Poisqae toos le Toides» je Taia
chaBfer da style. BonuAir.
Jamaie OD ne tit mi si grand exam-
ple, qoe la eooraga n'eet point in-
VOLTAIXB.
Nene a'atxins qoe pea de temps li
▼ma, et Un d'en proftter, nous ne
eberdioas qu'k le perdre. Latxaux.
A ||aat TOOS seirira d'aroir de
reeprit» si toos ne I'emplo^es pas, et
qqe TOOS ne toob apphqmez pas f
BOSSUBT.
TootafiBaqaesert-il de mejusti-
iert Raonx.
QdH fiuse oe qn'il Ini plainL
<toe le monde est grand! Qu'il
«t magntfiqne I JCassiuxw.
Qoe de beaoz Joars a'oot pas de
beaoxsoinil Boistb.
Baas to qoekjiie chose da plust
OblquAddL BauxTs.
IS
Whyaekalbontii,theeeyonhwmHf
Never be weary ofexamininjf into
the eaueee of great chanyee; for
notkiny wiU ever beof eo mmch sirr-
viee to yom" inetmetion.
8ime you wUl hem ii vo, I witt
chnnye my etyle.
Never was eaeh a eirUriny emm^
pie ve^ ^at eome^ %• not iwdsm
patible with e0eavinney.
We have bat little time to Uve,
emd inetead of improving it^ we only
eeels to watte it,
Cfwhat nee wiU be yow wit, if
you do not ev^^loy it^ and denotaiy
ply your$elvee f
However, wW ie the u$e 4/JnttO'
fying mipdff
Let hem dowhat h^pleaeee.
Sow great ie ihe world f Sow
maqnijlcent!
Sow memy fine daye heme not
boautifol evening* !
Do you know eeey thimw miyn9
f%edIdot
Digitized
by Google
S6«
LX0BOH 0.
Cast one inaUdie d^Mpritk que de
•ouhaiter dos choaes impossibles.
Yisihon.
II n'j aura jamaia de meilleur di-
racteur qua rfvangile.
Oanoakklll
La y^ritable oonTemioo du eoeur
fiut autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aim6
ke crdatoreB. Pasoal.
Orois ta qne dans son ecBur, il ait
jur6 ta moitt Racins.
Ce n'est pas que yeuase mieuz fidt
que Toua. Mme. mt SiviQvt,
II a iaila que mea malheun m'aient
iDBtruit»pour m'apprendre ce qae je
ne ▼oulais paa croire, Fi^Alon.
a dUea$e of the mmtL
Titers mil never be
gmdB than tkt ChtptL
The true comeereum cf ih» heoH
Wkdkt9 ue love God ae much ae ve
have loved the ereeOuree.
Do you believe thai he hoi mmth
your death m Am heari/
Itienot that I ^ight have dome
better than you.
It uae neeeeeary that my mi^er-
tunee ehouitd inetruet me, to teach
me what I would not believe.
QDOIQUX— QDOI . • . qD&
Qaoique Dieu at la nature aient
ibit touB lea bommes 6gauz en lea
Ibnnant d'une mdme boue» la yanit6
humaJne ne peut souffiir cette €ga-
yt6. B06BUBT.
Qu(n que voua toiviez, 6yitei la
baaaesBe. Boileau.
Quoi qua ca aoit qu*ella disa, elle
ne ma penuadera paa.
Gl&AULT-DuvinXE.
Although Chd and nature have
made all men equal infonning them
from the eame earth, human vanity
eaimot bear that equality.
Whatever you may write, tufoid
vulaarity.
Whatever the may toy, Ae will
not pereuaJe me*
81 TOua la Youliez, nous partiiioDa
ensemble.
Si Tous le prenez but ce ton, je
me retire.
Nul empire n'est sftr, 8*il n'a
Tamottt poor baaa. RAciir&
S'il le fiiut^ notia partirona.
Votre esprit a toujours en r^aenre
foalque si, quelque mais.
Debtodchbb.
J/ you wiehed it, we would go Uh
gether.
If you go on in this way, I with-
draw.
No empire ie eafe, unleee U hat
affection for its basis.
If it must be so, we wUl go.
Your mind has always in reserve
some* if; some *hxA:
Sa r^poodirant^ qu*il fkllait r&
teblir r^uilibre europ4en rompu,
quil fidlait le r^tablir sinon sur le
eontinant^ oh il 6tait tout li fait
d6tniitk au moma anr TOc^an.
TmKBa.
T^ey replied, that it was necessary
to re-establish the disturbed Euro-
pean balance ; that it was necessary
to restore it, if not on the continent^
where it was entirely deetroyed, ea
least on the Ocean.
boit qu'il le fsmt, aoit qu'il ne le
fuae pa&
Sott la bardiessu de Ventrepiiae,
B(iii la aeule prtenoe de oe grand
Whether he does it, whether he
does it not.
JBe it the boldness of the enter-
prist, be it the presence aUme ^ ikea
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
XiBfltOK e.
Uf
^MitbipntMstfonTiriUe dn
cial, il ^toDDO par mi rteoliitioiL
YutCHOtU
Soit en bran, wiii 6q BMU,moD tmi,
1ft prudenoe dil» quTil fiivt numneBt
JDrar tor Tappareiice. OBikOir.
Vow le ▼oolei f ftiiin ioit il 1
Un mal f UBsste ei oontagieiix te
r^pandit dans lea priodpalea Tilles
da ia Normandie ; soit ^ue FiDtem-
pMe dea aaiaons eti lauad daaB lea
ain qoelque maligne impreatfion, aoit
nu'un commerce filial eftt apporte
daa pays ^loigii^ avee de fragiles
lichesses, des semeocea de maladie
et de morty soit que Fange de Dieu
eftt 6teDda la main jwur frapper
oetfce malheureuse proriDce.
FlJoBBB.
fffwaiman, be it ^ eMUt orotoa*
turn ofhtis9B^ h$ eafonltAM ey kit
r€9oluiion,
Bt U forgcod^be it for mril, my
fiimdf pruatnc0 says, thtU we mutt
rarely Jvdae from appearamcea,
YouwUlhaveit §6f 80 be it!
A fated and eontoffitma dieeae
wread in the principtil eiiiee of
^ormandjf; be tt that the inelemenr
cyofthe eeaaon had left in the air
tome malignant trnpreetian, be it
that a fatal eommeree had browht
from dtttant eountriet, with perxeJtr
able richee^ the aeedt of diteate and
death, be it that (he angel of God
had ttretehed forth hit hand to tmitf
that ynfoftmnatt promnet^
EXERCISES IN COMPOSING.
Tbe words in the following lists are given, as before intimated
(page 69), as syggestive of thought In conducting the exercise, the
Teacher selects a particular word, as Relieur (Bookbinder), and re-
quires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this term.
The pupil is duly notified, that he is at liberty to take any thought
suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any form found
in any of the foregoing Lessons : regard being had all along to all
the Rules, Notes, Exceptions, &c., that may bear upon the case.
Thus, adopting as a model the sent^ce. Voire marehand est bien Mi-
geant (Lesson 17, Resum^), or, Le Danois a4M qudques pommesf
(Lesson 18, R. 7) dtc. &c, let him endeavor to produce others of the
like kind
A little practice will render the exercise both easy and interesting.
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only oTie, but two^
Arm or more of the words t^en from the lists.
].— Peormions bt MAimis.
Aeiew, m. aetor,
Apotfaicaire, m. apothtoary.
Artiste, m. artitt,
AumoDier, m. dutpkdn,
Auteor, m. au^Jior,
BarVier, m. barber,
JKjoatier, m. jeweller,
B&ncni»g*iiee^ t watJi
Boacfasr, m. o^ttehtr*
FaomsioifB and Tsadm^
Brasseor, m. brewer,
Brodeuse, f. embroiderer.
Chaibonnier, m. eoal^man.
Charlatan, m. ptaek.
Oharretier, m. eartmem,
ChaudroDnier, m. copptrtmitk
OhimrgieD, m. turgeoeL
Oofdier, m. rcpemaktr,
Oorroyeur, m. cnrrttr*
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
fM
LIST 09 iroftDa.
OcNiTrMir, m. iUa^r, tUmr,
Oar^ m. •Mir.
Fftodiear, m. i
Gtntiflr, m. plover,
GimTeur, m. styrmm'.
Horioger, ol eMi and
bittitatoiir, m, Institutrioe, £, ickool"
Lnprimear, m. jifritU§r.
JoMllier, ttLJmoelUr.
Ma^oii, m. MMtm, hrieklayef.
Kaltre d'^cole, m. tehoolmatttr.
ManoaTrier, m. da^-labonr.
Mftiduuid-deK^TaaZi maqnignnn^
m. hor$6-d9aUr.
Mar^clial femmt^ m. farrier, •hoe-
ina-mnUk
UaMud,m.blaek9mith.
U— L'HoioiB.
Aaeltrai^ m. p. oncealorM,
Arrite^e-petit-nli, m.mat'ffranitotL
Beaxk-ttk,m. mm-inJaw, tUp-mm.
Bean-fr^ m. (ro<A«r-t n-Zoie.
Bean-ptete^ m. fatktr-i^-Umt tUp-fie-
Urn.
BaUe-fiUa, I da»ighier4nrlaM, tUp-
daughUr,
Bell6-mto«^ t motkef4n4aw, ttep-
BeUe-tOMur, t $%MUr4n-laiio.
Biflaleul, m.area;^-grandf other,
Bni,£ dtt/ughUrHfirUtm,
Deaeendants, pL ducerubnUi.
B^uoe. £ cAtMood
IVuniUa, t/amay.
Fmnine, £ wom— » wifi,
Fiaa^ailki, £ pk iifroMM^.
nL— La ooftn soiUDr.
Vntn^tia^jBLnahtraiUU
Ontew, BL arolar.
Oiftm, BL ^olcf «n4 fOiir aaitt
Papa, m. MM.
Pfctre, BL dfcyJbrtti i
Fwru^uiflrt nx Amub
PbUotopba, m. ;»A«lonpA«r.
PoMoaniar, la, FtoMaoniiitee, £,/i4
Fk^6dieateQr» BL jMiiadUr.
PMti^ BL priaiL
BafBneur de aoere^ da ael, rn^fm
^ft'f^^TMWir da ^wiinin^fla, vouohiBMn
Rdieiir, m, hvoiMnder,
SaTBtiM; m, cobbler,
Scolpteor, m. eeulpion
SaUiar, m. fduUftfr.
Sanrurier, bl Icekemitk.
Tapiauar, bl iiphoUterer.
Tamtnriar, bl Oj^,
Tiaaarand, bl weaver.
ToDoaliar, bl oocper.
y itriar, bl gUmer,
Wba%t bride,
Gandra, bl aoM-tnpZow.
Grand-pte^ bl grandfaiker,
Orand'mtoA £ grandmother.
imaD% bomma, bl young mem,
Jauna filla, £ goung womem^fk/L
Jemieflae, £ youth.
Jomaau, dl, jumalla, £, twm.
ICamuDe, £ gotbnother,
Uati, m. hueband
Naiaaaooa, £ birtk
Noorrioe, £ nuree.
Nouvaan maii6, bridearoom,
Nouralla marine, bride,
Oq)ll^^o, BL, onp^line, t, 9fphmk^
Ftimn^ m. godfather,
Fe^trtik^grtmdeon.
Patita-fiUe, granddm^kter.
Van£ BL widomer,
VaaTa,mdM0.
yieil]an6,£aU4^
I Boadia, £ Mi«a.
|BhM^BL«nii*
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
hlUt 09 W0»O&
IM
Obsar,iJieik
Cosar, m. kiart
Carp8,m. body.
CM,m,nde,
06ie,tnb.
Cent, m. neck,
Coade, m. el5oMi
Crtne^ m. iMIL
Doigt, hl/i^IW.
Boa»m. iodb
£pine (da dos), £ Mint,
Favorit, m. p. fghuhtn,
Fde, m. Itper.
Front, uk/oi'fhtad,
Qenchres,/. p. ^imm
OenoUyin. imee,
Qorge, £ <Ar«M<.
HaiMii«b £ A^
Jambe, £ ^.
JoQO, £ eA«db.
LuMpae, £ toi^piML
L^vre, £ /tp.
MemlMre, m. limh.
. IV^— MALAinn^ mmmtiM, ma
AUaqne, £ attMk^JU,
Baume, m. baUam,
B^gaiement^ m. stmnmtrinff,
Blessore, £ tecund
C6dU, i blindnesM.
Chancre, m. cancer,
CK&ind, £ 9ear.
CoHqae, i edic
CoDtosioii, £ brtriM.
Crampe, £ ercm^
Dislocaiioii, £ dUlocaJtUm,
Em^tiqae, m. rnneiie,
Enfinre, £ moelling,
Kironmfliit, m. AoofMiMta
Entora^ £ main.
EpHepaie, tepiUpde,
ETaDooiflsement^ uufakUinff,
"Fitrre, tfner.
Eiftyre Derreiise, £ ner9&uifner,
y^ — HAnLunoan.
Agnfe,tekup,
^^aah,lne0dU.
Algiulle da dwyens, 1 Mr^in.
Bf^iM, £ fiiy.
Bml IB* ttot^nffk
MoiUa^ £ nHutow.
Muscle, m. mmieiU,
V&tf m. IMFMa
Kei^ m. fioM.
Ongle, m. M«<£
Orteil,in.to«.
Pfllais, m. poi^fite.
Pkupiire, £ tyv^tdL ^
Peau, £ Aibjn.
Fraoe, m. iAiMift.
PoQinoD, m. hmg*,
Rate,£«pfom.
Rainfl^ni. jx /btna
Sapg, ntbood
Sein, 6otoMk
SoonsilB, m. p^ ^ytf^TMoa
Squelette, m. «Mi<Mi»
Talen, m. Am/.
Tmi^m, ecmpUxion,
Tempee, £ p. tempU$.
TTtdif m. feature,
Yeme, £ vein.
Visage, hl/om.
Kaladhs^ iHvnuaiiMi Bta
Pl^yre scarlatme, £ eearUtfetmr
On^risoD, tcure,
Ooutte, £ ffout,
Hjdropisie, £ drop9y.
IndispositkiD, £ tfufii2Msie»si»i
Loacne, adj. f^KtiiHw^.
Malaise, in. tn^t'mofiKofk-
Mutisme^ m. dunumeet.
OrdoDoance, t preteripHom.
Onffuent, in., pommade, £, miIm
Petite-vdrole, £ emaU-fox.
Pulxnonie, £ coiwumpfton.
RemMIe^ ia remetfy,
Rhnme, m. «oUl
RoQffeole, £ meaalet,
Soratd, £ d!0a/*9i«M:
Tonx, £ cough.
Ulcere, m. iUcer,
Vertigo, m. dUdnem,
Aamouior
Basb, m. dmiiy,
Batbte, £ comMet
Bijoirterie, t Jewelry,
Boonei^iiL MHk
Digitized
by Google
STO
I.IST OV WOBOS.
'Baatiid,t lock of hair emrl
Boudes d'oreillea, £ p. «ar-Hi^
Buune, £ |MirM.
Bracelet^ m. bracelet.
Bretelles, £ p. 6ra€tf«, iiMpeiufert.
BroflM, £ brueh.
Brosse-k-denta, £ iooiMnuk.
Cale90o, m. a. c&rinBirt.
Oeinture, £ aaaK heii, baad.
CfaaunoDS, m. p. fod^
Cirage, m. blaMa^
Ciseauz, m. p aeiuon,
Cciff\xn,ihead^ret9.
Collet» m. eoUar.
Collier, m. neddaee,
Ooiion, m. eoUon,
Cravate, £ eraeai,
Crdpe, m. crape.
Diamant, m. diuMidfMi
Dentellc^ £ lace.
ouUure, £ Unifig,
crin, ID. eaiket,jewel'ba»,
^p^e, £ award
Speronei m. n. ijpvra
Spingle, ipifL
Qtui, m. needU-cate,
ilveotail, m.fan.
Flacon. m. eaulUng-boitU
Founrure, f,/ur,
Vnc, m, dresa-coat
VL — liA. YTLLM, LA lUnOV, Bia
Anticfaambre, £ oMtectonfrtfr.
Ardoise, £ t^o^
Aneoal, m. armud.
Banc m. 6^iiM, teat
Barrite^, £ ^oto.
Biblioth^ue, £ library,
Bourg, HL borough^ email town.
Bourae, £ exchange.
Bric^ae, £ brick.
Capitale, £ capital cify, mHropalie.
CarilloD, m. chime of belle.
Caserne, £ barrack.
Cave, £ cellar.
Chambre, £ cAomW, room.
Chambre 4 ooudier, £ bedroom.
Chapelle, £ ekapeL
Ch&teaii, m. eowUry'hauee, mUa.
Chauioiiire, £ htUf cottage. •
Chauz, £ lime.
Cheminte, £ ehknnag.
Cimetitee, m. bwrgUtg-groaetd^
church-yard
CM^tbeU(\ar^),cki$rchhea,^
VTUiifB,l/rimge.
Oanutore, £ trimmkigk
Gilet, m. veet, wntiooat
Grenat, m. garnet
Guitres, £ p gaiiere.
Habit, m.coaL
Ivoire, £ ivory.
Linge, m. Ito/en.
Manche, £ eleeee.
MousaeliDe, £ mtiaSNi,
Pantaloo, m. sing, pmkiedeome,
Parapluie, m. umiXrdla.
Parasol, in.jMtrMoJL
Peigne, ULccmh.
Pendants-d'oreilles, m. p.
danU.
Perle, £ pearl.
Poche^ £ pocket.
Pominade, £ pomahan^
Redingote, £ great-coat.
Robe, £ dr«M, robe.
Robe de chambre, £ dnttinggmm^
Satin, m. Mttfi.
Soie, £ eilk.
Tablier, m. apron.
Taffeta^ m. tafeta.
Veloors, m. ftelvet.
Teste, £m«.
Voile, m. veil,
ToVN, Horai^ BNL
Clodier, m. church-etcepla,
Clocfaette, £ email beU.
Cloltre, m. dcieter.
Cour, £ yardy court.
Couvent, m. convent.
Cuisine, £ kitchen.
Douane, £ cuetom-ltouee.
Bcurie, £ atable.
Environs, m. p mvtroM. neiahbar
hood
Etnge, a m. etcry^Jloor.
Escaller, m. staire.
Faubomg, m. auburb.
Ferme, tfarm. ^
Fontaine, tfounldn, %M.
Four, m. oven.
Goutti6re, (.gutter.
Grand chemin» } ..^.._
Grand'route, ^«n-*V*>*^
Gran^£6«ni.
Grenier, m. garret,
Haie,t hedge.
Digitized
by Google
LIST OV WqB9«.
Ml
H6pital,iii.A4i9MAi^
B6tel-de-yille, toum-hmte, cUv-koute,
ffuild-hall, cUy-htUl, tawn-haU.
Meable, la piece o/fumUure.
Meubles, iXL-p./umUure,
Moonaie, 1 mini,
llortier, m. mortar.
MiiraUlc,! f*"*^
Palais, m, palace,
Paroisse, t paritk,
PaT^ m. paetment
P^pinidre, £ nureery oftreee,
PeFBienne, blind^ opem ehMere,
Plafond, m. ceiling,
PlaadM £ hoard.
PlaDcheTi m, floor.
Po6le, m. etonte,
Pdmpe, £ pvmp.
PoDt, m. bridge.
Porte, f; door, gate,
Poste, tpoet, po
Poutra, £ beam.
Kt:'!"-*^
yiI.^MnjBLis.
Allumette, a £ match,
Allumette cfaimique, £ fridicmr
match.
Amadou, m. tinder.
Armoire, £ cupboard.
Baril, m. caek, barrel
Baasin,!!!. bowl, waekbomL
BaMtnoire, £ warming-pan,
Beroeao, m. cradle.
Boite-k-fusil, £ tinder-bo^.
Bougie, £ taper.
BcnSXuk^tkeUU,
Briquet, ULflre-tteeL
CwmtUL/rame.
Caud^labre, m. chandelier
Caaeerole, £ sauc^Mm,
Cassette, £ Aoc, catkeL
Chandelle, £ candU.
Charbon de boie, m. chetrcoal,
Cbarboo de tem, etone coaL
Chau Ji^re, £ boiler,
Coffre, m. chest.
Commode, £ eheti of
Corbeille, £ baeket
Crible, DL mew.
Onxha, t pitcher,
Oa?ier, m. tsib.
Dimp^i
Prison, £ /Miaou
Puit8,m.««^
Quartier, m. quarter
Bampe (d'escalier) balutirade ^ t
etaircaee.
Res-de-chauflfl^e, m. growndfloor,
Sacrtstie, £ veetry,
Saile, t. parlor, eitting-room.
Salon, m. drawing-room, hall
Serre, £ conservatory,
Serre-ehaude, £ Ao^AoMf .
Serrure, £ lock,
Sonnette, £ belL
The&tra, m. theatre
Tott» m. foof.
Tour, £ tower,
TwHe^t tile.
Verger, m. orchard,
Verrou, m. bolt
Vestibule, dl hall, entry.
Viffne, £, TignoUs^ la, vinegmd
Villsge, m. milage,
Vole^ mndow-elMter.
Voote, £ vavlL
Fcsmtnub
£cumolre, £ tkimmer,
Entonnoir, m.fwfmeL
Essuie-main, m. ^ows^
Per it repasser, m. iroeu
FoxstgOD^m. poker.
Foyer, m. hearth.
Lampe, £ lamp,
Lanteroe £ latUem.
Lit,m. bed
Lit de plume, vbl feather bed,
Lumitoe, £ light.
Lustre, m. sconce,
Marchepied, m. footstool.
Moucbettes, £ p. snnjfere,
Mortier, m. mortar.
Moutardier, m. mustard^fOL
Nappe, £ tablecloth.
Oreiller, m. pillow,
Panier, m. baskeL
Paraveut, m. screen,
Peiuture, t painting^}
Pelle, £ shoveL
Pierre it fusil, t flint
Pincettes, £ p. tongs.
PoAle, m. s^ooii
PoAle, t frying-pan^
Poivridre, £ pwper^om,
Toi,m.keUle.
Digitized
by Google
tft
t»t e# iro«»«.
Btfiftre, f. MftMffar.
SftTOO, BL fOM.
Serriettc, £ mmkitL
8oaffl«t» m. MfoiML
Siicriar, M. nyr Htk
BooOli, m. doOti 6m^, MM
Bonilloo, m. frnidL
Ooofituree, t p. prwmwi.
Cotdette, £ euM.
Oigot de moutoo, m. Uff tfwmUdm,
JamboD, m. ham,
If outoo, m. muttoiL
OBut m.ego»
Omelette, { mmML
Tore, m. pork.
IX.— Ltouim, QmADT, Bfa
Ail, nL, pL anlz or miz, fforiio,
Asperge, £ aaparfiguM,
Aroine, £ oatt,
Betterave, f beeL
Bl^ULwAMt
Caroite, £ carrot
O^eri, m. edery.
ChampigDon, m. muakfoom
Chou, m. cabbofft.
Ohouflenr, m. eamlifiower,
OoDoonibra» m. cuctmibmr.
OreMon, m. cTMa
Epinardfl, m. pL ipiiM^
' Vbre, £ 60811.
Oraio, m. kem^L
Herbe, £ herb,
LentiUe, £ UnHi.
lialB, m. moiM.
X.— Abbeh nunim% i
Abnoot^ OB. opftcoim
Abriootier, m. opridoMfw
Amaiide,in. olmoikL
Amandier, m. i^imotidirm
Ananas, m. jntuappU,
Areline, tjubert
Caiitaigne, £ dkMMil.
Oitnip, PL, eUrom^ Umtm.
DMo^ldoio.
Tmfk,m.€QrpeL
Tuw-boaehoD, m. c0rA«
Tiroir, m. dmmtr.
T^Tanin, m. boUttr.
UatMMilea de eaUm^ m ^ kUtkm
y «re, m. ^faia
Rafraiphiiaqnmnt% m. pi nfimk
Btaane, f. iommgo,
Soape» £ coiip.
Soape maigre, £ »ty»fiHi MiipL
Tarte,f rort
yeaa,m.MaiL
y ermioeUl, m. MrmMNL .
yolaille, £/(Mrf.
Mniet, m. ffiO^
Naret, m. Atmtjx
OgnoD, m. ofiton.
Oige, £ barley
Oaetlle, £ torrwt.
Fanaia, m. partmp,
Perail, m. partUy,
Phakie,t plant
Po&^m. t>Mk
Racine, £ roof .
Radis, BL fvuliiA (iumm)*
lLKwe,lradUk(lomg),
BiEftsLriee.
Qan^ltage.
Seigle,in.m.
Ihym, m, thffma
Trttflb,£fn^
Faun Tbbs, FnaOL
IVaiae, £ <<rai060rry.
FVamboiae, £ fv^p&nty.
GroaeOle, £ goomhtffy.
Melon, m. ifM/ba
Mure, £ mii/60rrsf.
K^fle^ £ m«»ar.
Koiaette, £ HomO-wU
N<HZ,£lMI«.
OFBiiffe,£ oraiiea
F«Qhe,£peadi.
PBB%£pMr.
Digitized
by Google
frlftT OV WO»»f»
in
Pomme, £ «f9>£r.
Pommiar, m, lyyfa <ni<.
Fft]iM»£jili«ii.
XL — ^Aebeh
Boaleau, m. birch,
ChAne, m. ooA;
Eoorce, tbark.
Enble, m. mop^
Frtnerin. ociL
H^tre, UL beech.
Htitee, m. /ordL
Qnne, m. tffai.
XIL— Flbdb^ xra
Anricnle, £ ourieif /a.
Ohtfdon, m. <Am(<0l
Ghftyre-feuille, m. hone^mieisk,
6irofl6«^ £ ffillif/Umer,
Jasmin, QLJiiiMMMAM
lia, m. /t/y.
HMguerite, £ dlstiy.
MaaTuae herb^b £ ifMdL
Ifyrte, m. myr^
Xm.— Omm
AigU,m,eagU,
Alle, £ wif^.
Aloaette, I lark.
Autoor, m. AomI^
Aatmche, £ ocfridk.
Bec^m. beak.
'BAausBe, t woodcodt.
BdcftflsiDe, £«fiteA
Bergeromiette, £ Mj^fiA
OaiS»,t quail
Canard, m. duck.
Ganari,m. canarif'Hrd,
C%ardonneret, VLooU^lmok
OhAnTe-floiina» £ SaL
Cigogne, £ rtor*.
OcMombe, £ dove.
Carbeaii,m. raeen.
Comeille, £ tfrma
Coaum, m. cuckoo.
C^gne, m. twan,
Dmdon, m. turkey,
YuBOHy m. pheaeamt
XEY.— QoADBuriDM.
12«
OMtor, PL heatnr.
y igoe, £ vtiM.
FOBSR
Peoplier, m. fcpUtr.
Rameau, m. iottj^A,
Sapin,in.jnn&
Saule, m. wiUom
TUleii], m. ^Mid^fri
Tremble, m. ojmii*
TtcKM^m. trwiCk.
Ot^tnetile.
PaTot,m./)<9!|^
Peo86e, i forget me-noi.
Pled d'alooette, m. larkafm
Primey^re, £ cimlip.
^Bjo&^troee,
Tourneaol, m. aui^^foMr.
ToUpe, £ f«/to.
Viofette, £ vtoUL
Bnoa.
G^eai, m./adb({mft
Griye, £ thruth.
H^ran, m. heron.
Hbrondelle, £ Mxa/ZoMb
linoite, £ lifmtL
Merle, m. blackbird,
Oie,tffooee.
Oisean de pniie, m. iM ^jmfk
Pama, m. |>0aooeik.
Paaaerean, m. fporroia
Perro^nei, m. parrot.
Ferdra^ t patfridga,
Pie, £ ma^7»ie.
Pigeon, m. jM^^tfon.
Poule, £ hen.
Ponlet, m. chicken,
Roitelet, m. wren,
Roeeignol, m. nighHngaie.
Rouge^rge,m. redbreatt
Serin, m. canary-bird.
Toorterelle, £ iurOo-dem.
y aatour, m. wdtwre.
QUADftOnDIi
Cauypoia» PL ctoiwfc
ChtiTre, £ ^Fotrf.
Obeyreiiil, m. roehmk.
Eeoraiiil, m< t^mrrvL
Digitized
by Google
»4
ttlST OV WO»OS»
Kurat^ BBL fwfftL
Lapin, rfi66it
Ii6Tr«b m- Aoiu
Lion, m. /ton.
lionp, m. wdf.
Mule, £ mti^iL
XT.— PomomL
Anguille, f. m2.
Baleine, t wkaU,
Brochet, m. pike,
Carpe, t eon,
Cheyrette, £ tkrimp,
EcreriMe, £ eram^fuh,
Eftorgeon, m. ttirg^on.
Hareog; m. herring,
Hareng aaor, rtd htrrkig,
Homard, m. loUUr^
XVL — ^iMBBOnii BTCV
Abeflle, £ Ue,
Araign^e, £ ^rid^.
CheniUe, £ eaterjnllar,
Gigale, £ ffnuMhopper,
OoolettTre, £ adder.
CdOMOf m. ffnat
Crapand, m. toad.
EMarbot, m. UetU,
Fonrmi, £ a»iL
OriUoD,m. eridbeL
Grenouille, £/fiog.
GuApe. £ looip.
XYIL— OimLi
Altee,£aio2.
Balance, £ aeo^
Broeae, £ Intah.
Bronetta, £ wheelbmrrmf
Oachet^m. moL
Carabine, £ rijte.
Charrae, £ phugK
Cheralet, m. eatel.
Oire, £iM«.
Ooffn^e, £ hatchtL
Gofie, £ glu$.
Oompas, m. eampoMtt,
Eofaa&adaga, m. m iffcld
Eehe]le,£Za<»er.
Endome, £ coMtL
Etati, m. vide
Taadlle, £ tidUtf.
FUaii,m./a<£
Oiir%m.6Mr.
PoiilaiiiyiiL «oft
Pooroean, m. hog^ into a
Renard, ni./MB.
Singe, m. wigwJfcujfc
Taope,£ mo^
Tigre, m. tigtr.
Merlan, m. v>hUi%§»
Morue, £ eo(ffi§k
Percfae, tptrck
Reqiiin, dl ahari.
Saumon, m. io/MMk
8o\e,l§oU
Tanche, £ <endL
Tortue, £ twrtU.
Tmite,£<roMt
Turbot, in. etirftoC
L6sard, m. /tsan£
limacon, m. maiL
Mouche, tfy.
PapilloD, m. buUw/if,
Pace, IJUtL
PiuuuBe, £ bug.
Sangsue, £ leech,
Santerelle, £ loeuit,
Serpent, m. eerpent,
Teigne, £ motk
Yer, m. foorm,
Yiptav, £ viper.
HaGlie,£ ax.
HamefOD, uLjUk^oak,
Herse, £ harrom.
Houe, £ hoe,
Ugne, £ /tiM.
Lime, £^S2«.
Meole, igrindaUme.
Pain 4 cacheter, m. w^^r
Pelle, £ <Aove2.
Pince, £ crowbar,
Pincean, m. hnuk, petmL
Poulie, £ pulley.
Rabot, m. plane,
Rouleao, m. roller.
SabUtoe, £ Mtu^^eii.
Scie,£«n0L
Serriire, £ lock
Tenaillea, £ ^pimttn,
TmeUfl, £ fi^wil.
yii,£4
Digitized
by Google
abrAviations.
A. p. A protester.
K. S. P. Accepts BOOS protAt
A. S. P. 0. AooepU eous prot^t poor
^-oompte.
ft^ Bbtod.
0^" Cheyalier
C^^Comte.
C*^- Comteese.
DF Docteur.
fy- M"- Docteiir-m^deda
REst
J.-C. J^ufl-Cbrist
LL. AAa II Leura Altenee Impd-
riales.
LLu AA. RR Lbutb AlteMee Roy-
LL. AA. SS. Leun Alteaees SM-
LLu Em. Leurs £ininenoe&
LL. Ex. Leon EzceUeDcee.
LL HH. Leun Haateaees.
LL. MM. Leun Majesty
LL. MM. XL Leun Majesty Imp^
ri&lea.
LL MM. RR. Leun Majettdt Roy-
M. ou M'* Monsieur.
M»«- Maltre.
M. A. Mabooaasurte
M. A. C. L ItfaisoQ aesur^e oootre
Fincendie.
M<i- Marcfaand
W^ Marchanda
M"*- MademoiseUe.
Mf* Mooseigneur.
M**" Marquis.
M'"^ Manpse.
MM. Messieurs.
M">^ Madame.
Mst Mannscrit
K. B. Kota bene.
N.-D. Notre-Dame.
N.-N.-E. Nord-nord-est
N.-N.-0. Nordnord-ouesi
N"- N^godaot.
N*^ N^gociaote.
No- Kum^.
9. & Notre-Seigneor.
K.a J.-a Notre-SeSgnrar JMoi-
Gbrnf.
ABBREVIATIONa
IhbeprotuM
Accepted under proUeL
Acetified under protui 9m
Baron,
OkewdUr, knight^ eir.
Count.
Oountese*
Doctor.
Doctor of medicine,
EatL
Jetue ChrieL
Their Imperied Biffhneeeee,
Their Royal Higkneuee.
Their Most Serene JBighneeeei,
Their BmMieneee.
Their SmeeUeneiee.
JTieir ffighneeeet.
Their Me^ettiee.
Their Imperial Mi^etiiee.
Their Royal MqfeetieM,
Sir, Mr.
Maeter.
Ifouee ineured.
Houte ineured offoenet Jim,
Dealer , ehopkeepeTt OL
Dealer, ehMpkeeper, t
Miee.
My lord,
Marquie,
Marchioneee.
Meeere. Oentlemen,
Madam, Mre.
Manvecript.
Nota Bene,
Our Lady,
Norih-north-eaet,
Northr-north-weei,
Merchamt, m.
Merchant, I
Number.
Our Lord.
Our Lord Jem$ OkruL
Digitized
by Google
tn
*/• Poor €6Btk
0.-K. 0ll6ft4M(d.
0.-a OoMUud.
p. a Po«t«criptiim.
R. P. R^y^reod pte8k
a sud.
a A. I Son AHave finpMJa
S. A. R. Soo Altene lUmde.
8. A. a Soa Altene S^rteMm*.
a-R Snd-est
a Em. Soo EmiiMoot.
a Ex. Son EzoeUenoe.
a G. Sa Grandeur.
a H. Sa Hantene.
an. SaMajeeM.
a M. B. Sa Majesty Britanuque.
a M. C. Sa Majeet6 Catholique.
a M. L SaMajert^ Imp^riale.
a M. R 8a MajestA Km^e.
ana SaHajMMSaMolfle.
a M. T. a Sa Hajeet^ IVte OM-
tienne.
a M. T. F. Sa MaJetM IV^a TidMei
a-0. Sndronest
a P. SttntPte«.
SaPP. LaeSaial
as SaSaintet^
a-a-JL Sikkiid^l
a.a-asttd«id-
Wmi.
RtfMrendfaiktr,
&mUL
BU or Ear Impmriai Eigknnk
BU or Str Roffid jSmtAmhi
HU Mott Bermi Higimm,
Bo%ah-€(uL
BUHninenee.
Bi$ SxeMmey,
SU Grace (to a BidiopX
ffu Stghns$9 (tha TuOMl taptt
or).
EU or Eer iMeMy.
BuorHtr BinUmmm MaktiM.
BU OaiMie Mmett^
m» Jmp€rMljAi$9tjf,
jaU Royal Mineiy,
SU Sw&cUth Mi^ut^,
Bu Mo$t Chruti4m M^gm^
Bu Mo9i FmOfld Mmt^
JSb/yJPM«f.
TUBolflMmL
BU BbUne$$.
Digitized
by Google
NEW FBENGH GOUBSE.
PABT SECOKD.
§ 1. — FAxn OF Sfuoh.
(1.) Thsbs are, in Franeh, ten sorte of words or ptrti of qpeoeh.
Noaas or SnbstaatiYM, Partldplea,
ArticlQ% AdTorbts
Adjectiveii Prepo6itioii%
PrononiiB, Conjunetionsi
VerlM, Interjections.
(9.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words.
(3.) The vamhle words aro those the terminaaon of wUeh atU
ttits of various changes; by these changes various modifiealionB ot
SManing are ttzpreased. Thevaiiable words are of six kinds:
The Noun, The Pronoun,
The Article^ The Verb,
The Adjective, The Partidple.
(i.) The invariable words are those the termination of which
never changes :
The Adverb, The Conjunction,
The Preposition, The Inteijection.
(6.) AH variable parts of speech have two numbers: the singtiUtr,
which denotes but one^ and the plurai^ which denotes more than ene.
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen
ders: the nuucuiwe and the/mitntne.
§2.-
The eases adopted by French grammarians are :
(1.) The nommatif or sisrW; answering to the nominative or sub-
ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin.
(S.) The r^me iireeiy or direct object of the English, aecuaalivis
of the Latin.
(aO Th«r%i«ieMini:r,iii&ect object of th»l^^
the oblique cases of the Latin, tko gMiMw, dirtivi% nd abtottvi.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
S78
aXHBBB.— -§ d, 4» 5.
§ 8. — Tex Noun or Substantivx.
(1.) The noun or mbsianHve k a word which serves to
person or a thing; as, Jean, John; maison, house,
(3.) There are two sorts of nouns: proper and comaum.
(3.) A proper noun is applied to a partieulBr person, or thing] at,
Napoleon, Napoleon ; Paris, Paris.
(4.) A oonunon noun belongs to a whole class of objects ; as, liTre,
bodk; homme, man,
(6.) Some common nouns, althou^ Angular in number, present
to the mind the idea of several persons or things, forming a eollee*
tion : they are for this reason denominated coUectute nouns ; as, tronpe,
troop; peuple, ji6op2e.
(6.) Collective nouns are general, or partitive : generalj idien they
represent an entire collection ; as, Tann^e des Fran^ais, the army cf
ike French: partUivey when they represent a partial collection; as,
une troupe de soldats franQsis, a troop of French soldiers,
(7.) A common noun composed of several words, as, ohef-d'cBuvrei
masterpieoef avant-coureur, forerunner, is called a compound noun.
(8.) Of the two properties of nouns, gender and number, we shall
eomnience with the first
§ 4. — GSNDXB.
(1.) There are, in the French language, only two genders: the
masculine and the feminine.
(2.) The masculine belongs to men, and animals of the male knid
as, Charles, Charles ; lion, lion,
(3.) The feminine g«ider belongs to women, and animals of the
female kind; as, Sophie, Sophia; lionne, lioness.
(4.) Through imitation— often on account of derivation, often
without any real motive — ^the masculine and feminine genders have
been given, in French, to the names of inanimate objects : thus, pa-
pier, paper, is masculine, and plume, pen, is feminine.
§ d. — RULBS FOR DBTXRMIMINa GxilBXR BT THX MrANINO.
MascuUne,
(1.) Male beings; as, homme,
r/Mn ; lion, lion.
(2.) Objects to which male qua^
titles are attributed
genie, genius (a spirit]
sun,
(3.) The names of the seasons:
le printemps, the spring, dtc ; and
of the months, Janvier, January ;
ftTiiar, February, Sic
(4.) The days of the
.f(6}iitntfi6.
(1.) Female beings : as, fenmie,
tooman ; lionne, lioness.
(2.) Objects to which femae
qualities are attributed : tb^ fairy ;
lune, moon.
(3.) Virtues :Uicharit4,cian'<y;
except courage, courage ; mbnibi
merit, which are masc.
(4.) Vices : la m6ehaneet6, wiek^
ednees: eioept PofgaeO,
Digitized
by Google
i.^^.
SI*
.ucdl, Monday; mu^Tiutday^
(&) The namefl of the cardinal
poinU and the winds: as, Test, ihe
East;Vo\keAX,lheWestyiic [See
exceptions opposite.]
(6.) The names used in the
French decimal B3rBtem : as, cen-
time (hundredih part cf a franc) ;
kilognunme (1 000 grammts^ abatU
two pounds) ; mdtre, dtc
(7.) Metjds:lefer,tron;racier,
(8.) Colors: le vedfgrten; le
;aime, yellow,
(9.) The names of empires and
^ii^pdoBM when ending with a eon-
^nant: le IXuiemazo, Denmark;
e Bresili BraxH
(10.) MonntaLis : le Jnrajtfbuitf
Jura , le Puy-de-Dome, (*) the
PuydeDome; le C^nis, le St Ber-
nam, JMoim/Cenu, Mount St Ber^
nard,
(1\.) The names of rirers when
enoing with a consonant : le Rhin,
theMme; le Nil, the NUe.
^19.) Trees, shrubs: le chtoe,
iheoak;\e frdne, Ae ash ; le rosier,
the roaeJnah. [Exceptions op-
posite.]
(13.) The name of a language :
as, le fran^ais, French ; Talle-
mand, Qerman, &c.
(14.) The letters of the alphas
bet: un a, an a; un z, a %,
(16.) Compound words formed
of a veib and of a noun, either
masculine or feminine, or of a
pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille,
pocket^fook ; rendez-vous, rendez-
(6.) Festivals: kSaint Jeamie
la £bte de St Jean, Sl J6kn*9
day; la Chandeleur, Candlemas*
except Noel, Christmas^ mase.
Biae, a poetical term for North
wind, Tnmonianet a term amaiied
on the Mediterranean to the North
vnnd, Brise,. breeze; mousaonsy
trade-unnds.
(5.) The names of countries
when ending in emute : la France ;
I'Espagne, rAm^riaue, &e,
£xc Bengale, mnovre, Me-
xique, Pelopon^se.
(6.) Chains of mountains in the
plural: les Alpes, iJte Alvs; lea
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees; les Yo*
ges, les C^vennes, dLc.
^) The names of rivers when
Dg with e mute : la Seine, the
Seme; la Loire, the Loire,
Exc Le Rhtoe, the Rhone; le
Danube, le Tibre, le Cooyte, mase.
(8.) Aubepine, hawthorn; hour-
dame, black alder; 6pine, thorn;
hidble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier ;
7euse,t/er.
(9.) Garde-robe,
perce-neige, spring-crocus ; peroe-
feuUle, hart^s-^ar.
It applM Is a I
ettumm
Digitized
by Google
ttaiTBSK 8T turn tmmUiWAtlOM^r^ d»
(10.)Moit]^W/;«id«ll]
bm andiag with mm: d»»nfcM%
(IC) NovBfl, pronoiuuH yitIm,
fte.»nBed sttbatontiyely : l«boire
d le maoffer, eating mUdrinking.
(17.) Namben— cwdinal, or£-
nal, and proportional-^tued rab-
itentiTely: le dui» the Unih; le
nenviftme, the nmtk; le tiers, Ae
fUnL [Bxceptions o]»poBite.]
§ 6. — GsirnXBy BT TBB TBUinrASIOF.
(1.) The exceptione to the mawcnline will be found oppooite tbe
termination, in the feminine column ; and the exceptions to the ftn*
bine, in the masculine column, also o^osite :
(3.) ComonanU.
B
Terminatkms. Feminim
MascUHne'
SS^*-^
JDWIM. 'JSJ*' Amu
BB Horeb,
MmmtMareb.
OB radoulH
rtfUmgatiMp.
MB plomb^
Utd.
C
40 sac,
sadL
BG beo.
Jmak.
10 mastic.
putty.
00 soo,
plaugk$han.
vc due,
duke.
BO tronc,
trunk.
BO clero,
dark.
ac fiso.
Ttwtnut.
BD pied, fooL
n> nid, nett.
op tripod, tripod,
.m Tslmud, Talmud.
KD marchand, merekant.
BD bord, border.
w ehe(
ir snif^
UF OBUf,
BT eeatt,
m rsBg
taOow.
rtuutt
Baoi def, Joy; ■•( tkf^
O
I
K
I
Digitized
by Google
.•^«.
Ml
XL
m
VL
iOkfl,
ML
Mb.
ftifi.
1
AM
KM
Dl
Adum
harom,
daim.
AiIm.
tow.
deer.
en
m
iiom»
puftun.
name,
perfume.
BR
eadnm,
examen,
HoL
exambtoHon.
Dl
OK
nrt frecM by is or gi^
Slaaon, blaxoiL,
biwii, hieon; hoiizon, ho-
rizon; oiaMkf goeUng;
poison, jpoisen; tiaon,
AP
or
OF
bastion, hasHan; bastion,
figure-head if a tiMp.
dnq^ chik
galop, foOop.
eonp, Ko««»
Qvm
Exow-*^ ainl; main, tout
Ezc— chanaon, aoi^; eiiia>
SOB, baking; oonteo*
fii^mi, eoumerfeitn^ ;
fiiQon. mods; moisson,
kariest; movasons, trade*
wMff; nn^on,
maiaon, ibiiae.
Ezceptiona oppodte.
region, region.
pension, peneion.
queation, queetion.
r&Ottdon, r^/Uoiom
OQ aoq-dlnde, t«rfay»
duur,
f«r.
«r0ii»
n
OB
OB
or,
not preceded by e,
asnr, onine;
bonhenr, happineet ; eoBor,
Aasrt; choBor, chorus; d6-
nominatenr, denoimnsfor;
diaboananr^iKsibonQr; 6qni^
tsur, equaier; eittitoiir,
BOB
Fifn.1 fwfflar,
efaair, jinl.
Ezc— lonr, Umer.
ehaleor,
hantenr.
Digitized
by Google
tflVDXm BT WBB VBEMZVAYXaV^— § 4.
MtueuHne Terminaiions,
exterior; honneur, honor;
inUrieur, interior; labeur,
labor ; malheur, misfor'
tune; multiplicateiir, mul~
Hplier; pleure, tears; re-
ffulateiir,r^^v2ator; venti-
Uteur, venitkUor,
E— Continued.
fefnttttne Tvrfiuiutft0iilL
stn&— Contmued.
Exoeptiona oppodle.
8
At
bras,
artn*
El
gr^
sandstone.
IB
souris,
smile.
aBiaryms,amaryttit; bra
OS
08,
bone.
bis, sheep ; fois, time : SOB-
US
blocQs,
blockade.
lis, ffiouje; vis., screio ; oa.
n
temps.
weather.
sis, oont.
M
vers,
verse.
1
r
AT
climat.
climate,
ST
an«t,
arrest.
for«t, forest
IT
lit.
bed.
niiit, nv^
or
cachet.
dungeon.
dot, dower.
mr
bout.
end.
/
HT
pent,
bridge.
dent, /axA; gent, people,
jument, fiutne.
BT
tort,
wrong.
3
part, s^rv; )a pinpart, ih§
mosL
i
AX
climax,
dimax.
XX
sUex,
silex.
IX
Prix.
price.
£xG.— croix, cross; noix,
nut; ^sHx, jfeace ; voix,
voice ; ^rdnx, partridge ,
poix, pitch.
Exc— chaux, lime; fanx,
uz
courroux,
anger.
NX
lynx.
lynx.
S
gas.
scyUie; tonx^ cough.
AZ
gM,
A
MM
Bex,
nose.
a
rix,
rice.
(8.)
Vowels.
A
A acacia.
Eza — ^vinula, a sort ef eaU
erpiUar; sepia, ispta.
A complete dasofication of nouns ending in e mute (a majoritj of
wbicfa are feminine) would be, from its len^^ of little practical nee to
the Undent, who would find it easier to apply to hit dictiooarj thsn to
Digitized
by Google
»aB]>s&B BT tax tmtbMtWAtiov. — § 6.
MehaUrt. We viU gm hm the
aooordiAg to their g^eoder, and pUcii
gi^en for the terminations, inetead
opposite column.
Ma$cuUne Terminations.
ABB astrokbe, agtroiab,
Ezc. — Souahe, Svalna;
Byllabe, tyliable,
ACUE miiBcle, miracle,
£xc.— debacle, breaking
up cf the ice; maelet a
mweroL
ACRE sacre, consecration.
£xc. — ^nacre, mother cf
fearl
■ AAX eoanige, courage.
Exc—'UDagtjbiu^ ; race,
rage; page»|M^« of a
book ;cAgei cage ;nigef
swimming; plage, beach.
. AI«K aahure, saltmf.
£xa— -affaire, affair ; aire,
Joor; glaire, white of
egg ; grammaire, gram^
mar ; paire, potr ; ju^-
laire^'i^^^r-ret/iy'haire,
hair-doth; chaire, jntU
pit; serpentaire, smke^
root; parietaire, peUu
tory, and a few other
namea of pl&nts.
▲BS hectare, hectare (a
measure).
ASTRB cadastre, roister.
AVKK chaume, thatch.
£xc. — paume, tennis.
t not immediately preceded
by t or ft.' abr6g6,
Atu
coU^ge, ' eoOege,
BJxc. — ^Norvdffe, Norwaif.
ear^me, IbtiL
Kxa — cr^me, cream;
br^me, bream; bir^me,
trireme, galley wUh two
or three rows of oars.
Sr^tre, priesL
xc. — ^fen6tre, window ;
guAtre, gaiter.
vmiRB beurre, butter.
muM cidn^ dder*
principal tcnnfaiatkiQi» elaamig tham
ig the exceptions mider the aKaiaplea
of putting them, as hitherto^ in the
Feminine Terminations.
ACS gr&ce, grace.
£xc. — espace, spaoe.
ADE parade, parade.
Ezc— stade, stadium
frsAe^ grade.
AiB haie, hedge.
AJfCB importance, importanee.
AJfSB danse, dtmee.
AS8B masse, mass.
Ezc. — Pamasse, Patm
nassus,
ia nu^e, cloud.
£zc.-*4pog6e, apogee;
athee, atheist; camee,
cameo; colisee, cdu*
seum; coryphee, cory^
pheus; emf>yr^highest
heaven; lycee, lyceum;
mausol^e, mausoleum;
musee, museum; hy-
men^e, marriage; p4«
rigfee,|ier^cc; pygm6o,
Vyg^i troch6e, trochee ;
trophi^e, trophy; spon*
d6e, spondee; scarabee,
scarabee.
EiHE baleine, whale.
EBCB cadence, cadence.
£xa — idlence, sHenoe.
XHHB antienne, anthem.
Exc. — ^renne, reindeer.
XNSE offense, offence,
ESSE tristesse, sadness,
IE charpie, lint.
Exc— g6nie,g^8nti»; p4ii»
h^liBj perihelicn ; incen-
die, conflagration ; panu
pluie, umbrella; pavie,
clinkstone peath.
liEB chaudidrci, boiler.
IRE doctrine, doctrine^
IQT7E pratique, practice,
IVE rive, share.
issE coulisse, sU^^ng-shmUsr^
LLE paille, straiw.
Eza— -intervallt* tnlsrwrf;
Digitized
by Google
mmm^MB^^ 1
JClfOlllMf
JMU priama, ^f^Mi.
nqUB risque, riik.
Exa— -bisque, soup,
nrx ib^idste, cabind maker.
£xG. — ^batiste, oamMc;
ljste,/tst;pl8te»lradle.
vos refuge,
cmxB arbustiii
]ibelle,fiM;ve
venniedH; noloneeUej
vioUmuOo; cfaeTmi
fettiUe, honey-suekki
portefeuille, fodtoi^Mk;
yandefiUe» ii«iufen2le.
boeee, hunch.
£zcw— colosae, eoUmmui
m tuppe, tahU^cML
BBS not pieeeded by «.
tene, land.
£»>— lieire, ivy , psrtene,
fiower-garden ; tomwReb
tender; pMlonoetn^
l^thtnxng'^Tod / Tetrti
«i amiti6, fneniMp.
TTl P&tte, fOM.
£xa — amulette^ omtfte;
sqaelette, MeUm.
VBX nature, iiafiirs.
v» ezense, exciise
UTB OBVe, iM&i
1 midi, Yuxm.
Bxc— foi,/aiA; fonnni,
ant; aprto-mkii, t^ltr^
noon; iol» Jaw; land,
V revenu, revenue.
Ezc. — ^bru, daughler-h^
law ; Tertu, tirtue ; glu,
hirdJime; eau, water;
peau, simi ; tribu, A-tA«;
^ 7. — ^NauNe MAsouuirE ik oin aoobptaixon, amb FsMnnn
IN THB OTHBB.
JfcM/tMA
Barbe, Barbara korte,
Oarpe, wm< {tm4tUimy\
Oartoodie, omamenU {tmlp'
Auna, e(r.
Barbe, Uard.
Oarpe, e«i7».
Cartouche, aaftri^^
Osuple.
Crdpe,
Oouple, apahr^ irate, um
Digitized
by Google
PftV1L4b OF VOrVir*4 ^
Fcrat,
Heliotrope,
Ejnuie,
LiTre,
Maneht
M^moire,
Mode,
0|^ ofcUrh of t
ccwrL
9Hnflow«r.
danUal ehonL
hook.
memoir, hiU.
wwuld,modtL
work,
agame.
Ombre,
Purall^le.
Peodale,
P^riode,
FSroiiie,
Fkne,
FUtine,
aMHl
Airf^At
.Soorii^
Tour,
Vague,
Vase,
Voile,
>t^p, we^^
tour, tiini, tHck,
9ptiee, empHneii,
fmL
E«empl%
Faux,
For«t,
Qreffe,
H^otrope,
HjIDll,
Lirre,
forut
a mineral
CMititmkpmm,
pownd.
Mtoiaire,
Mode,
Moole,
(Enyrea,
Office,
Ombre,
Panadbe,
Pandtek,
Pendule,
P^riode,
PiToine,
Plane,
Platniei,
FMe,
Pbete.
Fr6teste^
IMgale,WffA<
emMeeofa
feM^m.
literary werk9
paniry,
oraatt,
the '
parallel Umt.
period, epoeh*
aJUmer.
joinev^etooL
plate$.
potA<gp9e»
of rMfteix^ ihe n
8ok
SomoM^
Sonrii,
Tour,
Vagoe,
Vaee,
Voile,
jHqr.
§ 8. — ^FoBMAnev 07 ths Plural Nomre.
(1.) The plural in French, u in Engliah, hi fonned by th« adMM
ofstotheangnlar:
Bh^g^lUw, PlwraL
<^«»*r%
▼ille, towfi; Tillea,
($) lVriit«aKq9<ioiiw-*NMUMM4iiiglDth8
hKv» the auBe fbnn in the plana:
Digitized
by Google
9M PLUBAL ov voimB.-^ 8.
BImffulmr. Plvnl
nn,no$e; nei^iioMt.
(8.) Secofui exception.— Nouns ending in the lingular with te mJ
«!(, taJce dp in the plural:
Singular. PluraL
chapeau, htU ; chapeanx, hait,
fea, fir0 ; feux, firtt,
(4.) Tfttni exception. — ^The following nonna ending in ou'take *
In tbi5 plural:
Siitgular. Plural
btjou, JetoeZ ; bijoux, Jewels,
caiiloo, pebble ; cailloux, pebblei,
cfaou, cabbage ; choux, eabhagee.
geoou, imM ; ffeooux, htuee.
hiboa, ow/; biboux, owU,
ymyniy plaything : ' joi^oox, fUaylhinge,
(p.) Fourth exceplicm, — ^Tbe following noons ending in at2^ changv
that teimination into aux in the plural :
Singular. Plural.
bail, leaae ; baux, leaue.
oorail, coral ; coraux; ewaU.
ktaaS\ enaund; 6inaux, enamdiu
Boupirail, atr-Ao/tf; tonpiraux, atr-M«ff.
8ouabail,iiiu29r4iai»; aoos-baux, wMlfr^MMM
travail, labor; travaux, Ubofre.
(6.) JF^ exceptioTL — The following nouns form their plural irreg-
ttlaily:
Singtdar. PluraL
hilt garlic; sux.
b^taa, eaOle. besdanz.
Bercail, sheep/old^ has no pluraL
(7.) Sixth exception. — Nouns ending in the smgular with al^ chshg*
that termination into aux in the plural :*
mngtdar. PluraL
g^airsA^aeneral ; g6ja6rKax, generaU
dieval, Aotm; chevaux, AofMa \
mal, eoU; mauz, evUs.
(8.) Ciel, oeil, aieul, travail, have two plurals:
Singular. Plural.
eiel, heaven; deux, heavene.
.^, j Utter of a bed; .. • j teetere of hedi.
"•* i ekyofipicture; "^ \ ekiet </piciwe$.
*Ba],M^• cmamrwX^eamiptU; duMlJaekal; t^gal, treat, kSltwi^
gMMnlmle.
Digitized
by Google
PL0AAJ. OV OOMFOUVB VOITHfl. — % 0. IW
qbO de-boBQ^ ova/ window ; ceOsHle-bcBii^ ova/ wwrfoMfc
aleul anee$tor ; aleuz, anceMtort,
MJ^ni, erund/ather ; aleu]a» ^an^^i^Aora.
traTiul, lobar; travauz, /a6or&
tntTtil, iriMw; traTEilB, Itovm.
§ 9. — ^Plural of Compound Nouns.
(1.) When two nouiui form a compound subetwitive, both take the
phiral ending:
Binfftdwr. PlwrcU,
chef-lieu, ehief place; chefr-lieux, chief plaeea
fieatenant-coioiie], lUmtemuU' lientenantB-colfineLii lietUmiank-
colonel. cciUmcU,
(2.) When a compound noun is fonned of two sabstantives joined
by a preposition, the fiist only takes the plural ending:
Smgtdar , PlwraL
ar&«D-cid, rotn&ov; arcsren-eiel, raMoiM.
ebe^cBuvre, maUerpiece ; ehefa-d'oeuTre, maeterpiceee.
'FhB words t6te-ii-tMe and ooq-k-r^ne (an incongruouidi9dowree)t remain
tttcfaaoged in the pluraL
(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, botn
«re varied in the plural :
Singvlar. PluraL
genlilbomme» nobleman ; gentOBhommee, noblemen.
fOgie<odi^m, carriage-door : portee-ooefatoes, corrM^tfwIoori.
baflee-cour, poultry-yard ; DaaBes-oourB, pouUry-yardi,
(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the plural"^ is cnaHed
li. the adjective of the following compound words:
Singular, Plural.
grand'mftre, grandmother ; grand'mires, grandmothen.
grand'mesBe, kigh-nuae ; grand'mesees, HigKmaeeee,
(5.) The words, Monsieur, Svr^Mr.^genJI^leman; Madame, Jfrntoii
or Mrs. , MademoiseUe, Miu^ fonn their plural as follows:
Singular. Plural.
MoDsienr, Sir, etc. ; Me88iean» Mrt, gentlemen.
Madame, Madame etc. ; Mesdamee, /adS^ etc.
Mademoiselle, Miat, etc ; Mesdemoiselles, young ladUe, etc.
(6.) Ill words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or aa
■dverb» the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however
there is plurality in the idea.
Singular. PluraL
paM.port,jMW9>of<; passe-porte, |>«Mpor<t.
Avaoigarde, wmgua/rd; avantgardes, voM^narda
• ThemarkoftbefiBmiiikiealia
Digitized byCjOOQlC
tM TtVMAh or VOHt.^ Up llf IS.
(7.) Gompomid nouBa ef whieh the NOMid word
littly* taki t in the rfBgohr iod plmil :
eure-denta, a tooth^k ; enra-dtnte, i9M^ffuk$.
CMta-ooiMttes, fMil<«rMJbfn; oMte-noisettai^ fAil*«nicfaVlk
(8.) Worda composed of two yerbs, or of a verb joined to au ajU
Teib, or a preposition, are inyariable :
Singular. PluraL
passe-partout) matter-key ; passe-parUrat, nuuUr-kevt,
ponr-boire, eoaickmiam!9 fit ; ponr-lioife^ coaekmmCt fit,
§ 10. — ^NOUNS WBIOH HAYl NO PlURAI..
(1.) The nouns of metala eonsidered in themeelTee: as, or»^otf ,
aigent, silver; plomb, 2efluf ; 6tain,|iewler; fer, tron; eniyte, copper ;
Sargent, gutcXctiZrer, dtc.
(9.) Aromaa: each as batutte, Maem; encena, tnoenae, iu,
(3.) The namea <ii ▼irtnea and vieea, and some names rekting to
pnyafcal and moral man: as, la jenneaae, youth; la beant^ hMuiff; la
bonte, goodness ; le courage, courage,
(4.) Adjectiyes used snbstantirel^ : as^ le bean, ^ hemt^ ; IHitileb
§ ll."^N0UKB WmOH HATK KO SnrOULAR Zir THB^SXIISI
OIVSK.
Airhes,
SOriMSf MSfNIll
Entraves,
Annales,
tfffymfa
FianqiUle^
Appas,
sAoivis.
Fimteille%
Arr^rage^
arreart*
F^ais,
ArrMs («tre avtz), Id 6« lifkln- srrwtiL
0«gea.
Assises,
attUtt.
Osas)
BroQssaiUes,
oruihttoon
Lunette^
Oataoombesi
eataeombt*
McBurs.
Oiseanz,
tcUtort,
Oonfins,
tonfinet.
Pierreries,
DeaHes,
Virres,
FiBcettes,
Pkufs,
Dteombres,
muiA
SemaOles,
Strennes*
mtm ytat^tprtttntt.
Tteebres,
EnTiroos,
Tenailles^
Alentonrs,
Yitranz,
httrothm^t
fMpU
tpedacitt.
mannert,
tnufert.
jtweltt diamambk
ionfft.
darknttt.
pineert.
wmdoio-gUm,
S 12.-^PitonR Kamxs.
(1.) Proper latties, when not need Hguratirely, are hiTarinble^
when preceded by the plnral artfele, lea.(*)
L'Espagne slioiiore d'aToir pro-
duit les denz AmlyiMc
Ratvooabo.
ifijpeiii vrJdst
ffivtm hitik to «Ai
« QAsn used by the Aewh belbre Hie I
I oCeelebcated indiTidvda
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
TBB AETIOLl,— § !(. )|9.
Locke, Momtnqtiim, /. / Bom'
Mav, at /A^y <in)M tit iAirofM, m<M
tipon fUMCsm nnHoiu to «Mtm (Am*
!«• X«dK 1m JfoHtetquUu, Im
/ / JicM$$emf en se kvani en
Smope, appelerent lee peuplea
nodernee k la liberty.
CHATCA0B&I12nX
(3.) When proper OAmee are used figiintlvely, they tek« tk» fotm
•fthephural.
La Franoe a en ses Chan et see | France ka$ Aenl iU (hmmn Qm4
That is, generals like Pompey and Cnsar.
tin eoim d*OBil de Louis enfao- 1 A glanc$ firmm lanrit pnimMiJ
UiXB dee OomeiUe$, Dxlill& | OomtUUe.
Ti)«i J8, poets like Comeille.
§ 18. — Tbb Amnou.
(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word iim4
anbstantiyelyy to determine the extent of its significatioB.
(2.) Modem French grammarians recognize only one artiele» 2e»
(3.) This article, contnusted with the prepositioB de^ is often OMd
before a wotd in a partitive sense. [} 78.]
(4.) The words wi, masc^ tine, fem^ answering to the indefinite
article a or on in English, are now very properly* classed wit^
the nnmeral adjectives. We shall, however, for th» sake of oontei^
ience, devote a few lines to them under this head.
(5.) The article Ufthe^jBla for the feminine, and les for the plnraL
(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes: diiion [{ 146]
and contraction.
(7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters c, a, which are repUoe^
by an apostrophe [ ' ] before a vowel, or an h mute [seeL.8 (11)] : thusi
ToBprit, the mind, instead of le esprit
Tamitid, the friendaMp, " la amxtiA.
lliomme, the fium, * le *»<*«<Myfct
Hiumanitd, AtfliMittty, * lahnmanit4i
(8.) Contmetion is the union of the srticle fe, lu^ wkh ooe of ths
prepositions, d, de. Thus, we say by contnetion :
an livre, to the book, instead of it le iivre.
aux fruits, to the/ruite, " k]m fruits,
dn livre, of the book, " de le livro.
des fruits, (/<A«yrii<Ci^ " deUsfiruiti.
(9.) The contractions ou, <{i«, are not used before masculine words
eommendng with a vowel, or an Jb mute, nor before feminine words:
^1 ■ .'^MI'iH' II . II II ■■■■ ■■■■■■,..■ Ill I I. !■■■ Ill - ■
* Ko diffBrenee can be made in rendering Sqgiiflh mto Frendi, between
a sad one, so tint in French tut homme means a man, or ome man. Hhm
«tfaer numeral adjectives might with at much propiiety have bem eailei
18
Digitized
by Google
•190
tBB ABTXOLS. — § 18.
k Hiommfl^ to tke i
k rami, to thefrUhd,
de lliomme, of the maoL,
de rami, of the friend.
(10.) TKe arti< le used before words taken in a partitive aeofle QTS
(1)], comes in connection or contraction with the prcpcisition d!^; it it
londered in English by somt or any^ expressed or understood:
du pain, m. eome kreadt or of the bread (a peart ef\
de rar^ent, m. money, eome moneif, of tlte monej (a part of)
de la viande, f. meatf tome meat, of the meat (a part of}
lie Targenteriei t rilver-plate, some silver-plate, of the silver- p]ate(a pariefy.
des livres, m. hooke, some books, of the books (a part of),
(11.) The English indefinite article, a or an, is rendered in Freacb
by un for the masculine, and taifi for the feminine ; when those woidt
are connected with the preposition die, the e of the prepoahioii Is
'elided.
Masctdine, Feminine.
nn bomme, a man. une femme, a vnman
d'un lK>mme, of or from a man, d'une femme, of or from a \
a un bomme, a< or to a man. - k une femme, a/ or to a i
Resumi of the above Observations.
le, before a mascnline word, ^ commencing tnth
la, bef<H*e a feminine word,
r, before a word of either
gender,
les, for the plural, in all cases,
du, before a masculine word, ( eommencinff tnth
de la, before a feminine word, ( a consonant,
de r, before a word of either ( eommencina icith
, gender, ( avowelorhmute,
des, for the plural, in all eases,
au, before a masculine word.
It la, before a feminine word,
a r, before a word of either
gender,
iMiz, for the plural, in all cases,
un, before a masculme noun,
une, before a feminine noim,
d'un, before a masculine noim,
d'une, before a feminine noun,
H un, before a masculine noun,
H une, before a feminine noun,
Ze ptoe et la mfere sont au d&-
■espoir. B. db St. Pierre.
X'amiti6 dans nos oceurs verse un
bonheur paisibla DBMousnsa.
Xlionneur auz ^ands co^urs est
phis cher que la vie. Corneille. .
Zes fines ot les ffar^ons chanttoent
mk cboBur. & ds St. Piiau.
a consonant,
1 1 commencing with
( avowdorhmvte,
[ oommendtig witl*
\ a consonant,
commandng vith
[ avowdorhmute,
the.
oftht,
from tks^
any.
atortoths.
0, on, one,
' of or from a, am, on
^ at or too, an^ oiu.
The father and fnother orv i i
despair.
JfViendship pours a peaeeftU A^
piness ifito our hearts.
Honor is dearer ^an life ton* Vi
hearts.
The boys wd^firU sm^itkthtr, ^i
Digitized
by Google
TB« ADJBOTITS.^ li-1, g 14-&
ft91
Bar 2m rives dbi Qange on Toit
ienrir r^btaa. IhEULiA
Zm vioietto se eaebe timldement
mm miliea <Im filles ir Tambre.
DXLXUZ&
Ld remordB m rfiyeille au cri de
Is nstnrB. Dk Billot.
La moiti6 dsa hamains Tit mtx
^Ap&MdeFwitte. Dmouoioa
iks ebony in hUim,
Th€ vwlet eoneeaU Kttmif iltmH^
t« the nUdtt of the daughters of th$
•hade,
JUmorse ii oromed by the efy of
nature.
The half <f mankind Ikm at tkt
expense of the other.
§ 14-1. — Tbe Abjiotivx.
(1.) The adjectiTe Benres to denote the quality or manner of being
Of the noun.
(3.) AdjeetiTea are of two aorta : qual^ying adfectioes and dOertim*
tng at^tttvocs*
' (3.) WecaUfua^i^t^AJ^ecftoefthoaewhlchaddto theideaofiha
objeet» that of a quality proper to it; aa bon, good; noble, nobU;
eonragenz, eourageoia,
(4.) Determining a^'ectives are those which add to the idea of the
object that of a particular limitation or determination; aa quelqne,
some; tont, aU; autre, other; mon,my; nul, no; un, one; deux, twok
§ 14-2. — QuALnrriKO Adjbotivm.
(1.) These adjectives may express qualities: 1. Simply; 2, "Wltil
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de-
grees of qualifieation: the positiye, the comparatiTe, and the superUu
tire.
(2.) The positiTe is nothing but the adjectiTe in its simplest signi-
Aeadon:
Moi, je tds k Tana, irieie, pauore,
fwelue, BoiLSAUi
At Parii I am ead^poor, and it*
<^nded
(3.) The comparative is the adjectiTe expressing a comparison be*
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objecti
eompared, a relation of equalilyj superiority^ or inferiority,
(4.) The comparison of equality expresaea a quality in the same de-
gree in the objects compared; it is formed* by placing aussi, as^ on
autant, as mticA, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, ms^
after it:
L'AIlemagne est otMm peupl^e Oemuiny is at populous as France
fiM la France. Voltaixs.
A lour tAte eat le chien» superbe At their head stands the dog, at
aaitmt ^atilcb Dblixja noble as hm/W.
* In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in English, by means at
shanses in the temunatioo : with the exception of mMJUaxat better ; main*
•dverbiL
and pirfl^ worse, all comparisons mutt be fcimed I7 means d
by Google
Digitized t
Lm afitioDtioot plm maetaw qut
let pATolet. Mlu. vm SonoDi&T.
L9 pied dn oorf est mtanx fiut que
eelui du boBol Bufton.
((L) Tbd nbtkui or oampari«on of noperioxitjr ezpreues a quifef
Sn a liigher degree in one objeei than in another ; this compariaon to
fonned by pbefaag ^oa, more^ before the adjeetiTe» and qno, Aon*
after it:
Aetiont 9f mom tincmr^ tMttm
word$.
Tk$ foot of ih$ stag %M UUtf
formed than &at o/thtox,
(6.) The compariaon of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower
degree in one object than in another ; it is formed by placing moinsi
k$tt belbre the adjective, and qua, (tot, after it:
Le naufrsge at hb mort soot motiM Shipwreck m%d death att Uu/ttel
nnastes qm les plsiiirt qui atta- thtm thorn fimmtru whUh attmek
quent la yerto. VtsiuM, virtue.
(7.) We have only three a^jectivea which are comparativea of them*
■elvea: meilleur, better^ moindre, leu; pire, worte.
Meilleur, instead of plus bon^ which ia never used in the aenaa of
better:
B n'ast fMiUeur ami ni parent I We Aatw no better friend^ we M-
que loi-mAme. La Fomtaxms. | tor relation than ourielvee,
Pire, instead of plus mauvaiSf which may however be naed:
Lerembdeestparfoisjnreqnele I The remedy is at times worse than
aaL liixoBLi. | theevU.
IkUundre, instead otphu petU^ an ezpreaaion also in nae :
Oen'eat pas «tre petit one d'etre | Bemgi Ussihmnffre&tisnetbeii^
moindre qu un grana. Bonn. | email.
(8.) The syperiatsve^ or third degree of qnalifieation, eipreaMa tbo
quality carried to a veiy high, or to the highest degree ; thence thara
are two aorta of superlatiyeB: the relative and the absolute.
* Jfieox, better; p&i» worse; Bioinfl» less. The Eqglish wonls better,
woise, less, are sometimes adverbs, and when they are so^ should be le^
dered by liie several words placed at the commencement of this note. A
practical way of determining the nature of those words in English is :
1. To chai^ the word better into the expressioD 'in a betUr maimer.'*
If this change may be made without diangmg Has sense, the word better
h an adverb^ and must be rendered by mse%ig:
He reads better {in a better man- I II lit mMua; que son frtee.
mer) than his brother. \
2. If you can change worse into **ina worse manner P it should be traaa>
lated pis, or, more ebgantly, plus mal ;
ffe reads worse (in a wares man- I U hi pie (plus mal) que aoB
ner) than his brother. \ frtoe.
8. When you may substitute " o emaller amount or quemtetf* for IJba
wotd i«M, it riionLd oe rendered aiof MS :
9ereaieleee{a emaller amtmsO I H lit metiM qne eon ftin.
^an Me brother. |
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
»aiii»in or AftascnTSi.-^ I8» ttt. tW
(9l) The gnpeiktiTe relative nuiks a very faigb or Hie Mghiit de-
gree relatively^ or with eompBrieoii: it is formed by plaeing le^ la, le%
&e ; mon, my ; too, thy ; son, his ; notre, our ; votie^ your ; lerir, lenrBi
fftctTy before the companitiTe of superiority or inferiority :
A bemtfU received %• the mmC tO'
cred<>f€ildebU.
Un bienfidt re^n eat la plue eaerSe
da toutes let dettea Mio. Nigkkb.
La probitd reconnae est leplvesOr
de tool les aemieiita. (Tbs baib)
AeknawledgedjpwobUy ie the moU
eecure of all oathe,
(10.) The words 2e jihuy U mom, must be repeated before every ad*
Jaetive:
Ce soot les livres lee plue affr6-
aUes» Ue pl%u vnivenellemeiit liis»
et lee plue fOUee,
BxaxAKViN DB St. Pb&bs.
Theee booke are the moaf agfee*
the moet ueefuL
(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree*
but, absolately, without compsrison : it is formed by pU»ing before
the adjective one of these words, irHyfortt vnfinimenly extrhnementf dto. :
n y a a la vlQo, comme aflleun,
6b fort sottes gens. La Bauriaa.
Je vena prie de croire que je ne
•ouge qa'a vooa^ et que vona m'etea
omMmemeat ehire.
Mm. m SivioNi.
There are in eiiiee, ae eleeakere,
very eilly people.
1 hea you to hdieve that you are
my only thouyht^ and that you are
extremely dear to me.
§ 15. — Gender and nxtmbxr or Adjbotivbs,
(1.) The adjective has, of itael( neither gender nor number ; it nraal
the gender and number of the noon to which it belongs.
(3.) The termination of the adjective varies aoeording to the gender
and munber of the nona which it qnalifies or detenainee :
Un homme prudent Une femmejinidmfa
A prudent foan, A prudent wwnan,
Bea hommea prudente, Bea femmea prudentee.
Prudent men. Prudent women.
g 16. — ^Formation or thb Fsmininb or Adjxotivxs.
(1.) AH acyeetivea ending with e mute^ remain nnchanged in the
feminine :
Maeeuline,
Vn homme aariable.
An ayreeaole i
Un mar eolide.
A ttrongwoXL
Feminine.
TTne femme aariable.
An agreeable wtman,
ITne maiaoQ eolide,
A etrong {weU bmlt} hauee,
(3.) Adjectives not ending in « mnte form, their feminine by the ad»
iltion of «:
Maeealina,
Vngar^diHgent,
A diligent boy,
V^hoauaia poU,
ApcliUt
^wm/tn^ne,
Una file daigenU,
A tUligent airl
VeedameMiiA
Apditelady,
Digitized
by Google
9BHt)ttwm or A»«ienT»i.— S'16.
W
% -# - ■
Mat.
An.
' il'
XLLX, tel. 1
telle, tmK
KU.
KiLUE, pareil,
poreille, UkM.
XH
Cfhanffe ihote
xvvB, andeD,
Mi4?iff"fift. ettcJMil
▲dyeeth«8
XT
xm^ muet,
nnette, wwU,
Midiiigm'
OX
' fwtlufemi-'
OXNX, bOD,
bonne, poeti
r
mimiito
▼X, neui;
DeuTe, neu.
8X, heureux;
pwae. /at
(4.) The following, altlwiigh ending with these tenninatioui»form
their fesumneotfa
erwiae:
edmplet,
COfltpISftfy
'complete.
ooiicret»
«0fl4T«f£,
concrete.
di8cret»
inqniet^
' make in tktfeminifU'
diacrtte.
inqui^te.
aecret»
Mcrv^i
secrete.
wplet.
r«pfo<tf,
^ repute.
mAuvais,
manTMM,
nU'-s,
«t7/y, ofij maX;tf tn Me-
niaise.
»^
^raae.
doux,
•eA iieee*, 1
^ douce.
&IUK|
/a/<e.
fiMUie.
prefix,
roux,
j::ff
maki in tktfmmku
pr^fixe.
rouflse. '
tien^
^rd.
1
.tierce.
(5.) Adjeetives ending in eilr, as also some snbstantiTes of the
same termination, have three several modes of forming the feminine:
' IsL Those wliich are deriyed from the participle present of a
French verb by dropjdng ant^ and substituting eur^ change tiie final
letter (r) intoM^as*
Pre$. Part Mueulim. Feminim,
daxuantf whence danamr; and thence danseuM.
trompafU, " tromp«tfr; " trompeosA
Here, however, note that chanteur^ when rignifying a professional
HngeTf taices for the feminine eantatrice. like anomalies appear in
the following:
amboasadenr^ amhassadoTf
bailleui*, lessor^
chasseur, hunter,
demandeur, plaintiffs
dSfendeur, oxfendanU^
devineur, guesaer,
enchanteur, enehanUft
gouvemeur, governor ,
p6cheur, tinner ^
serviteor, effrvoiii;
make in ike
ambassadrice.
bailleresse.
chasseresae.
demanderesae.
d^fenderesse.
^devineresae.
enchanterease.
gouvemante.
p^cfaereaae.
aervante.
IdL Those endingineniraadderivedfromtheLatin,aad,eoiiMqiMBt»
Digitized
by Google
a$ntiim9 or a]>'>otit««.-:5,io.
m
j» not fklling xindet the nue (IK) Jnat given, foim. tbeb feminine bf
changing ieur into <rto^ as,
Matndine, Fkminine,
actenr, aetor, actrice, aetnu.
admirateur, tubtiirtr, admiratrice, acbnirer
Kxceplions to thia, however, are the following:
d^Kiteor, debtor,
ex^cuteor, executor,
inspecteur, intpeetor,,
inyenteiir, itwerttoTt
pen^uteur, peraeetUor,
make in the
d^itrice.
ex^catrice.
inspectrioe.
inTentrica.
.perB^cutrice.
3dL Thoae ending in ^rteurj alao mu^eur^ mtnettr, mBiQeuT^ toWfom
the general mle, that la, add e to form the feminine ; as,
"^exi^neure.
sup^rieure
ext^rienr, exterior,
snp^rionr, superior,
majeur, of age, mtgor,
mineor, minor,
maUlMir, better.
make in the
feminine
majeure,
mineure.
meillettre.
(6.) Adjectivea, as also nonua, indicating occapation ehiefly ey»N
daed by men, are alike in the maaculine and the feminine ; aa,
antenr, author ; litt6rateiir» literary pereon.
(7.) The following adjectives having two forma for the ]
form their feminine as followa :
Maeeuline before Maaeuline before
a eoneonanL a vowel or h mute, J^hninine,
bean. bel, belle,
|Sra» fol, foUe,
moo, mol, molle,
DoaTean, nonvel, nouvdle*
vJeuz, vieil, vieille,
fiolieh.
eofL
new,
old
IrregiUar A^'edives.
(8.) The following adjeetivea form their feminine ixregnlariy .
Feminine.
absoute.
bdnigne.
blanche,
cadaque.
ooite.
dissouta
fiiYorite.
fraidie.
fraoche.
gentille.
greoqne.
Mbralque, used onlj of tt«
Hebrew toogoa
jqiivaf asB (ohsekW), a etripUnff^ jonvencaUa.
Jfaeadine.
ab»cu8» absolved,
b^nin, benign,
blanc, white,
caduc, decrepit, injlrm,
coi, ^iet,
difflous, diseolvedf
f&YOTi, favorite,
fnia, freth,
franc, free, frank,
gentil, oref /y, genteel,
grec, Grecian, Oreek^
n6brew, Hebrew,
Digitized
by Google
JiniiMii,Mis fattnlle.
long, Um^, «tM% loDgue.
mtAtre, matter, maaUrfy, maltrMM,
malin, cunning, nudigmmt, maligne.
mnlitre, mulatto, mulitre or
mxmcat, muieai, mmeadAi
nul, null, nom, nolle.
dUoog, obhnff, obloDgos,
yah^ public, pabliqat.
rfieooB, molvid, tkmfftd^ rtelnii
Nc, dry, barrtn, ttehe.
■ot, niiy, Botte.
traltre, iraitar, trHtehcroua, tnAtnmt,
tore, TurincK, ^?!1^^
(9. The following have no feminine :
artiMn, mcehanie. partUtm, jpnimn.
diitein, ehemut color. Umoin, witneaa.
dispoe, active. 9ili$i, rellam, of wll— ■
§ 17. FoRMiLTtOK OF TRX Px.tmA.1 OF ADJSOTmKft.
(].) Otnend AuZe.— The plnnd of adjectives is foimed by fli» flAi
dition of « to the mucnline, or to the fenunine tenninatik>n :
Macculine,
Singular. PlmraL
grand, great, grands ;
petit, ifRa/A P«titi;
Fhninins,
Singular, Flurai.
gmde, grandeii
petite, petitee.
(t.) This rule has no exceptions with regard to the feminine ter-
Bunation.
(8.) With regard to the masculine terminalion, it is sul^eet lo the
three following exceptions :
First £xce^toR.— Adjectives ending in the singular with s or «, d»
not change their form in the plural :
Singular, PluraL
beureux, happy, heorenx
douz, cwcet, $oft, doux.
Second £a:c0pfion.— A^'ectives having in the singular the tennlna.
tion e0ii» form their plural masculine by the addition of « ;
Singular. PluraL
beau, handnmc, beautiful, beaux,
jomeau, twin, jumeaux
nonveau, new, nouveaux.
Third ESxoeption, — ^Adjectives ending in oZ, form their plural m^
SttUne by changing al into aux:
Singular. Plwral
)Sb6ni,Hberal, Ub6raiB.
rani^rurah
Digitized byCjOOQlC
AQMMMUkM'i OV JlBlBefftTSa— g 18. fit
Wii quote from Dotehonili^ OrMMMnrt iMfinMb^ tbo a^fMliM
wUeh fonn their plnnl in d!$:
Sinmtiar.
baDcala.
fatat/flJoT^
&tala.
fiDa],/iia/,
iSnala
frogak.
filials.
f^^i^A*^^ •^
Ditial, im/toi,
uiitiala.
labial, /o^io/,
labials.
matinal, early.
matinak.
medial, fi»«M»
m^diala.
Daval,fMMMi4
navaJa.
pascal, /MMcAo^
paficalflL
h^airS^hiarUai,
pteala.
Uitetnk
§ 18. — AQfOOMMMT OV AdJBOIITM WIXB K0UN8.
(1.) Hie adjoetito mooi Agroe, In gendor and Dunbei^ vith tlM
loan or prononn wUch it qualifios :
MatcuUmB. fkmMm,
Singviar. Plvral BtnguUxr, Plural
ie Im« jaidiii, lea Womb jarditt; kM2«maiaoiv ImbMrnnrnmam.
tktjimeaarden, ihejlne gturdtm; thejlne houg$, the Jine houMt,
Ugrtmd^m% lae^nnMif liTrea; la ^rflndi «aiia^ laa^flmdlct cartas
ike large book, tMe large booke ; the large map, the large mope,
(3.) Thia agreement mnat take place, not only when the a4]yectiY0
immodktely precedea or followa the noun or pronoun, but alao when
H ia separated by other worda :
Maeadine.
Bingular^-^Tlmae k Dieu de te
rendrs asses Am poor m^ritcr la Tie
heursuae 1 Ftaitunf,
May Ood render thee m^Uimtfy
good to deeerve the bleteed life,
Plvral,^ taoau, en qnoi qua oe
puis«e dtre les m^cbantB ne soot
lone k rien de bon.
J. J. RoOiSBAV.
The wicked are never, in any eir-
eunutanee$,JUted {good) to perform
amy thing good.
Feminine.
Singular.-^JAiaaDem de
poor bonne I'empeehait de ae' 1
trer mammee, Mabitaqk.
The honor o/j^aemigforaoodprw'
rented her ehowwg hereelf bad,
PlwraL — Loin da nous raidir coo-
tre les indioations qui aont 6oiiii«^
il Ikut les Buivre poor serrir Diea
Mxa. DX MADfTBfOlK.
Far from rtneHng oar good inell-
noHone, we ehould follow them in
ordertoeente Ood,
(B.) When an adjective relates to two or more aubatant&vea,
whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it
must agree with the nouna in gender, and be put in the plural ; |
UridieetrindigsBt,riinFnKkBiHI Tk$ Hok emi iho poor, ^ w^
lasags^ \prvdmi and the wiae, being
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
ABllOTITSa-^ 19^ %ik
\B9df6ei tatk^i
•ort J. B. BoOMBAU. I the gamefaU,
(4.) When the words which the adjectii^e qualifies are of different
genders, the adjective mnst he pat in the masculine plural :
I try to render happy, my wfit
my chUd, and mpm my eat emd my
dog.
Pitblie order and tUtltty
the fruite of crime.
Je tftche de rendre heureux, ma
liBmine, moo enfant^ et m6me moo
diat et mon chien
Bxaif ARDiN Dx St. Pisrsk
L'ordre et rutilitd pitbliee ne peu-
vent 6tre le fruit da crime.
IIA88IX.LON.
For special rules on this point, -see ( 83.
§ 19. ^DXTBBIUNINO OB DsTEBiaNATIYB AdJXCIIVXS.
There are four sorts of determining adjectives — ^the demonslntivs^
the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite.
§ 20. — ^DBMommuTivx Adjsottvxs.
(1.) The demonstrative adjectives are used, when an object is to
be psrticnlarly specified or pointed out They are never, in F^nelii
used substantively, that is, without 'the nouns which they determine:
Singular,
MamtUn$.^'-X)e, thie or that, placed before a word eommenemy with m
eoneonant,
* Oat, thie or that, pUoed before a word eommeneing with a
vowel oranh mute,
jnminine, — Gette, thie or that, placed before all eorit o/noune.
PluraL
Cea/or both yenderi,
BzAionuBL
Jfaeeuline eingular,
ceadldat, thie or that eoldier.
set ami, that or thie friend,
est honame, thU oe that i
Feminine eingular.
cette femme, ihU or thai womem.
cette €pbt, thai or thie eword,
cette harpe, thie or that harp.
Plural
ees hommes, theee or thoeemen; cea femmea, theee or thoee women.
Voyez ce papillon 6chapp6 du tom«
8a mort fat mi aommeil, et aatomhe
uuheroeao. Dxlellx.
.... Get admirable doo,
Llnstinct, pans doute eat loin de
I'augnate raiaoo. (Tbx aiicx.)
Lit, eette Jeone plants en vase dis-
4Ugaate seeneiUs la
(TnsAioB,)
See that butterfly eeeapedfrom the
tomb; hie death wa$ a dumber, and
hie tomb a cradle.
Thai admirable gift, ineHnet, «»
doubtleufar beneath m^eetic re^
eon.
There that young plant prepared
ae a vote, reeeiim the dew tn Ha
Digitized
by Google
qm 1» TnlgaJM ad-
mire,
|t6yeiUeDt-fls les mprts an Bein de
monumeots f Souui.
Jh them h<mon^ aJmirmi ly tk§
vulgar, awake the dead /ram tkeh
eepukhreef
(a.) When it is necessary to make, in French, a difference simiiar
to that existing between the English words ibis and ihaty the adverb*
€t and ^ must be pUiced after the nouns :
oe livre-d, this book (here),
oes liyres-ci, tltete hooks^
oe livre-l^ ihait hook (tiiere).
oes liyres-la, th/oee books.
§ 21. — ^PoBSESSivB ADJXcnyss.
(1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined to a noiin»
relate to possession or property; they are:
Singular. Plural
Masculine. Feminine^ for both genders.
man, ma, me% my.
ton, ta, tea, thy.
SCO, ia, sea, his,her,it$.
notra, notre^ nos, cur,
Totra, Totre, voe, your.
lenr, leor, leurs, their.
(2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of
the object possessed, and not, as in English, those of the possessor*
Mase. sing. Fern. sing. PL both genders,
man frire, my brother, ma soeur, my sister, mes coosins, my cousins.
too livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, * tea maiaoos, thy houses.
iOQ papier, Am or her sa table, Am or Aer <a^ sea habits, Am or her
paper. He. clothes.
notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, noa prairiea, our meadows.
votre Kt, your bed, votre chaise, your chair, voa crayoDS, your pencils.
leur foin, their hay, leur paille, their straw, leurs fermea, their farms.
SobffiM dans toute chose.
Mo% ami, c*eat Tart de jpuir.
DU TaSMBLAT.
Ma main de qnelqud fleor ea-
quisae la peinture. Castkl.
Mes aeoa aont glRc6a d'efirol
J. R Rousseau.
De son propre artifice on est aou-
vent victime.
Colin d'Harleville.
A sa vocation chaque 6tre doit
r6poDdre. Fa. de X^ufchatbau.
Il faut de ses amia endurer quel-
que choae. MoudbuL
Notre vie eat one maiaon,
r mattre le feu c'eat folic.
NivsaiiAiiL
Sobriety in all things, is, my
friend, the true enJoymenL
My Jiand sketches the picture of
same /lower.
My senses arefrosen with fear.
One is often the victim of his own
artifice.
Every being should fui/U his vth
cotton.
Wemiustbear eometkimg from met
friends.
Our life is a kemm; ^ mi Uem
JSreiefOly.
Digitized
by Google
irVMSMAl. ▲ 101 set IV KB.— f St.
■# Vcttlprtlit MfttI Uk
ilMttg« {Mttllte. OAltB..
Liun fleurs soiiToiit met pM, til
rfcrdant ma Tue. (Thb bamk.)
andpUaae mjf tiff ML
(8.) The adjecdvM mon, my ; ton, % ; son, his or Aer, are need in*
■toad of ma, ta, aa, before feminine woida eonmiencing with a rowel
or an ^ mnte, in order to prevent the meeting of two Towebi or of a
rowel and an h mmte; thus we say:
men ^p6e, my tword, and ntver ma 4p^
ton dpoose, thy im/», imUadoftA Spouse,
■on ann^ hii arwuy, bmi immt aa anode.
Cflo eat fidt, mon beure est Tenae. I All t« aver, my hour U com$,
BOILXAU. I
(4) The posaesaive adjectives must be repeated before eveiy
noun:
Hon IMre, ma wtiat et mea oon-
m iont a Pans.
My hrotk$r, riiter, and eomsmM mr$
oiFarU
§ 22.— NUMBBAL AdJKOTIVBS.
(1.) There are two kinds of numeral adjeetiTes: the eanynal and
tiie ordinal.
(3.) The cardinal nnmbers indicate eimply the number or ^oaatftf «
without any reference to order: aa, nn, one; deux, tw^ &e.
(8.) The ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persona
and things occupy: aa, premier, ^rs2; second, teccndt &e.
We shall, for the purposes of eompaiison, place the **Hinnl aad
ordinal numbera in parallel eolumna:
(5.) Ordinal JTMrnbtrt.
(4) Oardlnai ITumbiri.
xxHtfinUnim una,
erui.
deuz.
troi^
^ualre,
anq,
■«,
•apt,
hmt,
neu4
dix.
ODze,
dooze.
treiae,
quatona^
quinxe,
Mize,
^A
viogt.
to
▼iBfft^i^
tl
deuzi^meorieccndC/.itooBde^ td
troisi^me,
8d.
<]^aatrieme,
4th.
cinquieme^
6th.
fiiziame,
etk
ae^titoie.
7tk
hmtitoie,
8th.
neuvi^me,
9th.
dizi^me,
loth.
onaitene,
nth.
douzitoie.
12th.
trdzitaie,
ISth.
quatoRdema^
14th.
qnixusi^me.
16th.
seizitoie,
16th.
dix^ptitai^
nth.
diz-hmti^me,
18th.
dix-neuvitaM^
19th.
yjngtiame,
Mth.
tlat
Digitized
by Google
•Vi<a*fc& ABjri«tfTi0.'-^ M.
»m
Ttagt.d«u^4«>,
n
tranto.
80
trente-et nn, Acl,
81
irmU^ttt^
8S
qiuuraote.
40
quaraoto-et-uD, Ac,
41
^uaranta-deaz,
42
cinqaante,
50
dnqaaDte-et^un,
51
cinquanie-deux^
52
aoixante,
60
■oizante^t-oi^
61
aoizante-deTiz, Ac,
62
■eizaDteHlis,
70
(MBzante-ooce,
71
72
aaizante-treiie,
78
Mixante-qaaiorM^
74
floizanta-quime,
7«
aoizaQte-aeise,
76
■oizante-diz-Bepi,
77
78
•oizante-diz-neiit
79
quatia-yingU*
80
quatre-viogi-im,
81
qaatre-TiDgft-denx
in]AtrA»Ti]iiirt-<liz.
82
90
qnatre-idngt-oiiie
91
quatra-Tinit-doQny ^
92
cent,
100
oaot-im,
101
deox-cenU,
200
d^vx-cent-QDi
201
tnia-eealr^
•00
troia-eani-mi,
801
milk,
1000
deox-miUe,
2000
deux-miUfl^dnqaaiita,
2060
immiUaon,
1,000000
§ 23. — ^VAMATioirs OF
ZOtbk
8l8t
82d.
40th.
41st
42d.
50th.
5l8t
52d.
60th»
6l8^
62d.
70th.
71flt
72d.
78d.
74th.
75th.
76th.
77th.
78th.
79th.
80th.
81gt
82d.
90th.
91at
92d.
100th.
lOlst
200th.
201st
Booth.
801st
1000th.
2000th.
THS Oardikal Numbbbs.
(1.) The following cardinal nnmbera vary:
(S.) Un, anef a or on, takes the gender of t le noun to whieh H l
prefixed:
im Uvre, a book ; un» feuHle, a Uaf,
When need mibetantbelyt tm takes, at timea» the form of tht
plonL
ITmo. Lea imm at Isa antrea, Thut^ and tho$a,
l>km. Las HUM at las antras, (J%e oneM and tk» oHUn^
(S.) Vingi and ceni^ when moltiplled bj one number^ itid not tdU
lowed by another, take the fonn of the ploral :
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Yingi-danxitana, Ac,
trantibina,
tranta-et-unitena,
trantaKiauxitena,
quaranti^ma,
quarante-et-uni^me,
qnarante-dauxitaia,
cmquantitaia,
dnqaaDta-at-miidma,
cinqaanta-dauxitaia.
soizantibme,
Boizaata-at-um6ma,
Boizaata-deuxitaia,
soȴanfrfHf'T*^^ff>,
■oixaota-cozitena,
soixanta-donxitana,
aoixante-treizitena,
soixanta^aatorsitaiia^
aoixantaHiiiiiuitena,
soixanta-saizifeme,
soixanta-dlx-Bapti^me,
aoixanta-dix-huititaie,
Boixanta-dix-nauTidma,
quatra-yiDgtiime,
quatra-yiDgt-unlMne,
quatre-yingt-deuxiima,
qaatre-Tingt-dixitena,
qoatra-Tiqgt-Qiizidma,
qaatra-TingtHioiuiiiB%
oantitana,
oant>unitoia^
daBx-canti^ma,
denx-oeat-unitane,
trois-oantitaiia,
trois-caDt-uDitoia,
niillitoia,
danx-milHtaie,
deux-miUa-cinqnantiAme, 2060th.
miUioDitoka, 1,000000th.
Man Uv6$ Mgkij^ pmn, ih$ Af
LlKnme Tit qumre^inaU ana,
!• cliiea n'en Tit que iix. Buffow.
Qa m'app irta chez moi, douze
othi* fraDcs. J. J. KocssxAU.
onlytm,
Ttuy brought me, at my kouat^
twelve hundred fianes.
(4.) Vingt and i eni, however, when multiplied by one number, and
followed by another, or, if not followed by a number, used to indi-
cate a particular epoch, do not take the form of the pluraL
(^uatre-vtn^^dnq hommea, eighty-five men,
cinq-«#n/-dcuz hommea, five hundred and two men.
Charlemagne fut proclamd em-
perear d'Occident, le jour de Nool,
ea huit cent. Voltaire.
Charlemagne was proclaimed e$n-
j^eror of the Weei, Chrittmaa'dajh
in the gear eight hundred.
(6.) Mille — (thousand) For the date of the year, reckoned from
the commencement of the Christian era to the year two thousand
of the same, we use the abbreviated form, mil
L'an mil huit cent dnquanta, I The gear one thousand eight Am»-
1 dred andfifig.
(6.) With regard to the years which have preceded our era, and
those which will follow our present thousand^ we write the fall fonn,
mille,
Lapremi6re irruption des Gauloia,
eut lieu sous le r^e de Tarquin,
environ Tan du moude trois mille
quatre cent aeize. VsaTor.
The first irruption of the Gavls
took place under the reign of Tbr-
guin, about the gear of the world
8416.
(7.) Million, billion take the plural form.
§ 24. — ^MiBCSLLANEous ObservatioIns on thx Cabdikal
Numbers.
(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty
&«., the larger number must always precede the smallei. We may
not say, as often in English, one and ttoenty, but always wigUeUun^
vingt^deuXy dLC.
(2.) The conjunction ef, after vingt, trente, Aui., is only used before
un : thus, we say vingt-et-un, troentg (and) oncj and simply vingt-denx;
twenty-iiDo, &c.
(3.) The word one frequently precedes in English the words hwi^
dred and thousand; it must not be rendered in Frencn. We say :
mille hommea^ one thousand men.
cent frjuica, one kundred francs^
C4.) When the words cent and miUe are used substantively beforo
the name of objects generally reckoned or sold by the hundred or
thousand, in number or in weight, the word un may be phiced befwt
them; the name of the object being preceded by the pnpoeU
tiond^
Digitized
by Google
t IT»0tiil»imiBflb(miUier)deMqM%
Cm« Auiifdmi^ oim tho%uand (of) 6ndkk
Un cent (uo quintal) de sacre,
Oiu huni'ed {weight) of w^ar.
(6.) The words septante, seveiUy; octante, eighty; and nonantei
rwety, are now nearly obaolete, being used only in a few provinces
of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, repjaced
by awkward expressions soixarUe^iXy sixty-ten ; quatre-vvngtMy foop-
tictrUies (four score) ; quatre-vingUdiXt fonr-scoie-ten, dtc.
(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzi^me, eleventh, the arti-
cle is not elided. We say le onze, le oTtzUme, la <mzQme, In pro-
nunciation, the 8 of the plural article les is silent when this articJb pre-
eedee <mze or oTizQme,
§ 25. — Obbkbyationb on ths Obdikal Numbsbs.
(I.) It will be seen that the ordmal numbers, with the exception of
fremier and jeeoTid^ are formed from the cardinal —
1. By the change of/ into vUme in nsuf;
2. By the change of e into vihne in those ending with that vowel;
8. By the addition of vikme in those ending with a consonant:
4. Cinq requires mhne to make dnquihne, fifth.
(2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural.
(3.) Premier and eecond alone vary for the feminine, and make
premise, seamde. Sic,
(4.) Uni^Tne (Jtrst) is only used in composition with vingt, trente, &e.
(6.) Second, deuanhne, (seoondy—Deuxiime supposes a series, a con-
tinuation ; eecond merely indicates the order :
let We may aay of a work which has four or more volumes :
J'ai le deuxihne (or le Hcond) vo- | / haive the teeond volume of thet
home de eet ouvrage. | teork.
2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumea, we should aay *
I have ths ieeond volume ofBv^
eherelUM dietUmary,
J'ai le teeond (not le deuxiim^)
volume du dictionnaire de Bescher-
•Ue.
8d. Under the ordinal numbers may be placed the folbwing WQrd%
which are often used substantively :
Trentenah'e, thirty, of thirty yeart^ hratum;
Quarantenaire, forty, of forty "
Cinquantenaire, Jlfty years old, of fifty "
Sexag^noire, sexagenarian, of sixty *
Septuag^oaire, septuagenarians, of seventy **
Octog^naire, octogenarian, of eighty *
Noni^oaire, nonogenarian, of ninety "
Gentenaire, centenarian, of one hundred
4th. Trentenaire and quarantenahre are law termst
1 trentenaire, quanato- 1 Tkktyt forty feetre ptmmttm,
Digitized
by Google
9M
jrvHsEAt jLbjiottttfl.^
%,sn.
S<k or Om otbm, tMigteiiie, wptiMgi^^
in frvquent qw :
Un oetog^oaira pbDtatt, Ae. | AmmieigkiifymnMwtiMfUmi
La FoMTAm | ing trwi,
§ 26. — ^RuLES.
(1.) In speaking of the daje of the month, the French nee the ear*
diwdi not the ordinal nomber ;
lecinicman,
le (JMhMpf aTril,
L*oa?ertare des £tata-g6D€rai]z
•at lien le dnq mai, 1789.— Tbise8.
(3.) We must, however, say:
le prmnier (not Pvn) juin,
(80 The cardinal miraben are also esiployed in speaking of aoym
ttignsandprinoea:
the MiMfUMitiA of April*
Ths opminff of the StaUa^entral
took pU^ OM (he fifth of May, Vl9*.
thsfirUofJume,
Churlu th$ ThUk.
LtmU the EightemtK
LemU the Eleventh woe tMrtf^ki
ywre old vihm he aeemJed th^
thfotte,
ThedMthofQtefforyiheBmemih
did not eximffuM the fire whieh h$
had kindled.
OhaxUBdis,
Ijoiou dix-hitit,
LoniB ofict avait trtDte-hntt ani,
qnand il monta sur le trOoe.
AnQuntita
La mort de Grfeoire eept n'^tei-
gnii pas le lim qa'u aTait allnm^
VoLTAiaii
(4.) We must say, however:
Henri j»r«mMr, Mmr$ the JPlrtL
(A.) Deux and second are, in this caae» used indifferently:
Oharlet ifriKB, Charles «i0owl Ohmrlee the Second.
(6.) In ^Making of Charles the Fifth, of Germany, and of the Pop«
fitetas the Fifth, the obsolete word futitf (fifth) is used :
Oharlesymn^, Charlet the FUiK
Sizte^wtii^ Sixiue the Fifth.
We shall, in order to render referenoe eaaier, place here some •)»•
serrations on nouns and adv^bs of number.
§ 27. — ^NuniiAL NovNB.
(1.) The numeral nouns in use with the French axe :
couple, paire,
trio^
demi-doozaihe,
hnitaine,
neuvain>
disaine,
douahie,
unit;
eoupU, pair ;
trio, three;
half dozen;
eight daye;
nine (nine,day$ of
prayer);
ten, htdfaeeore;
vingtains.
fiffe/en, joftnejgni ;
trentahie, thirty;
^uanmtame, tteo More;
cmquantaine, fifttfi
soizantaine, nxty;
qoatre-Tmgtaine, eighty ;
1 centaine, hunth^ea ;
deux centainea, Ac, two hnndroi;
1 miUier, one thmmmd;
deu m^Bie, fiM ikouemdi
1 vmriade, etmwimif
ImDliim. mmUUon.
Digitized
by Google
N
•f niimlwr i • wfiibakal to tlM Ettgttrii iiMie, In mma Uk« tlie foSoU^
fug: I httre mim tvwity books, i & aboat Inrailr bookh J'ai «m
tingiaine do livroo.
§ 28»— ^Fbaotioitai. Numshalb.
un quart, otuquarUr: mi diM)iiitoie^ on*.
deiiz quarti^ I10O fnarfan ; daox cmqoitaMii two]
trois quarts, tUrw§ ommrt9r9 ; on lixitene, etc, om#
lotim, tk$tkthi; qb doiftaM^ ato, anf Imf^ifa;
4aaditiai% tm^tkMb; ha aantiftma, mtkum^rtitMj
lamoiti^ (htkcdf; on milliteno, ana lAaoMMMb
(1.) It will be seen that, with tho ozoeption of tiorii quart and mol*
mtheoomunberatakotliolbrm of tho ordinal nomanb. Tha^maj,
thtrafofOt tako tho fwm of tho plnial when noeaaaaty.
(2.) The word demi^ when used adjactivelj and praooding tho novBi
lihuTarfablo:
fliia iCmUJiaiiro £, Aa^on Aaiif ;
una etant-aiina £, hJfim ttt,
(8.) When comings after the noon to denote an ^dUtional half^ U
agrooa in gender with the noun:
ana hanro at dlanif^ mukmrtrndrnM/f
una auna at tUmis, ana M and a ktUf,
(4.) When naed aubatantively, demi may take the form of tho plvnl :
Oatta h(vl<^ aoima let hauxatat 1 TkU dock $irikm th$ kmm md
lea dbatel | HU hatf-komn.
§ 29. — OrDIKAL ADTXRTf?.
Qnatritanamant, fowrihiy;
{Vi Fremiteement, \ in thi/rtt
^Djiuitoiemattt, Afi^f'
«ot,
. . *«ft«j?-, . ftapCiimamant, mmtMf;
SecoBdement, \ ••*>^>^9> DIsitaMment, tmUhly.
TroiiiteiaBeDt, UM^y;
(2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition ol
ment to the feminine form of the adjectivo.
§ W.-^lmxnvm AMsonrxa.
(1.) The hidefinite adjectivea are naed when any tiling ia to bo
repreaonted or referred to in a general or indefinite sunner. llieir
aiOr-
aooan, noi any, net mte;
mu. 110;
pkiaaiin, MViraf;
qnal, wAaf;
qnaleotiqao, M*aiwwr;
UH, mtk;
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
•M
iVDByivxTB iLnjmfltiym%.**^^€Of
y%) AVGini is gteaeMllf followed hj a nova, wMi wkioh It inHl
agree. It is followed by ne when it eomeo beforo a verb :
miemn homme, nd ifum; aucune femme, no wamoiL
^uemn chemin de fleun necoodrnt
fa la gloire. La Foktaikb.
On m^prido tons ceux qui n'oot
avetme vertu. La RocaKFOucAULa
Nofiowery path leadt to fflory
All thote uiho hone no virhu <hv
detpiMedL
(3.) Aucun is by the French authors sometimes used in the plural.
They con hear no legiUmaU <fe-
nUnion^Betno bomntU to their cniwiy
Hi ne peuTtiii touffirir sncan em-
piro Ugitime, ne metteni aueunee
Doraei a leors attentata
Mozfns(|uiEU.
. Aucun and md ahould be put in the plural only before sneh words
as are not used in the singular, or have in the singular a different
acoeptalion.
(4.) Ckaqub is of both genders, and is used only in the ringnUa\
It always precedes the noun, and cannot be separated from it by an
adjective or by a preposition. It should never be used without a
noun:
Claque kge a sea plabirB, ehague I ^ery age hoe ite pleaturee, OHff
iUi a sea channea. Dbulu. | eiluati^ it$ charme.
(5.) Miu, placed before the noun, has the sense of $amet in
English. Placed after the noun, it meana, generally, htmse^, her$ey^
iudfy or themselves. It may often be rendered by the word everu
When mhne is an adjective it may take the form of the plural, but
does not vary on &co sunt of gender :
c^est la verta mSme;
it is virtue itedf.
The people and the great have
neither the tfume virtuee nor the game
vices.
The barkeven of vegetables is in
harmony with the temperatwre of the
atmosphere.
c'est la mhne vertu ;
it is the aame virtue.
Le people et lea grands n*ont ni
lea moMss vertua, ni lea mimes vicea
YAUvsMAaausa
Les ^corces mimes dee v^tauz
•ont en harmonie avec les tempera-
tures de TatmoBphire.
BKBNAaDiN DB St. Pnaas.
(6.) It is at times difficult to diallnguiah meme an adjective from
mime an adverb, which is invariable. . [See \ 97 (2,) (3.)]
(7.) NuL is a stronger negative than aucun. It agrees in gender,
and number with the noun which it qualifiea like aucun, when re
lating to the aiibject of the sentence, it requires ne before the verb
Iful boBiBM n*est henreuz; nuUe
diaaenepeutlerendreteL Bonn.
JVulle pais poor Vimpie; il la
cberdie, elle le Mt lUann.
1^0 man is happy; molking eem
render him so,
No peace for the 4mpisms / Atatals
ii,Ui " "
Digitized
by Google
ivDaxiHiTs AmimoTirMBr^ ao»
ijk) NmI k amnnfimefl paed aloae^ in tii» aenga of no oag?
■i mtomtent de son esprit.
Mice. Dishocubilis.
nor duplea&id with kis hwh wk.
(9.) Plttsteurs iBy of couTse, always in the plural. It does not
%ary ita form :
Jl faut bien qu'il y ait plunewn There muH nMeuarUy h€ teveral
*«t8ons d'ennoi, quand tout le monde reasont/or ennui, witen all agree in
««t d'aooord poor bailler. FLoaiAN. yawning.
(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which i(
r<)latea. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from
which it may be separated by one or several words:
What a ddightful pietwre th$
Qiiel tableau raTiseani pr^ntent
lea campers I Dkulul
Quelle uiTiaiblo force a soumis
ruDiyers f L. Racine.
Queie sons hannonienz, guele efifbrts
rayjasanta*
De la reconnaissance ^galent les
accents t
country qfer$ I
What invisible hand ha$ eon-
fuered the univereef
What harmoniout eounds, what
ramehinff etraine, equal the wiee of
gratitude f
(II.) QuELCOKQXTS is slways placed after the noun, and varies only
for the plural :
Toutes les jouissances sont pr^-
Mi6ei d'un travail cw«^<m^ti«.
Mux. Camfak.
Deuz points guelconquee 6tant
donnas Thb Agaoskt.
All enjoymente are preceded by
tome $ort of exertion.
Two pointe of eome kind beU^
given
(12.) QuBLQUB in the sense of som^ (a certain number)^ or tehaUver^
a0Eee» in number with the noun :
n ]^ a du m^rite sans 616yation,
mais il n'y a point d'ASvation sans
quelque m6riie. La Roohevougauld.
Quelquee rtins lauriers que pro-
mette la guerre,
On peut 6tre h6ros sans ravager la
terre. Boilxau.
There i$ merit without elmation^
hut tltere is no elevation without «wm
merit.
Whatever vain laurele war may
promieef one may be a hero without
ravaging the earth.
(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however^ is in-
vsriable
• Quel ige aves-voos? Yous aves
boo visage I Eh 1 qudmie soizante
ana Racine, let Plaideurt.
Alexandre perdit quelque trois
cents hommes, quaiia il vainquit
PMnoa D'Ablanoouet.
Quelque m^ehants que soient lea
htanmes^ ib n'oseraient paraltre
fliiM«i»d* la yeriu.
La RoannooavLD.
Sow old are you f Toulo^weU,
Oh I tome tixty yeart,
Alexander lost tome three hundred
men when he vanquithed Porva
JSowever wicked mon wmy be^ theyi
do net dvr§ to appem emmi/t^ of
Digitized
by Google
f ■« rmovooii^^ SI, «1»
(14.) Tb. mkm la th» taMM aOt; in
Irit; Ib the pluii ftminiat, <i0et. It agnes wilh ihm noaa wbMi II
qialii&M:
id Utto^ mmA dooifc; telU leitre, tiM4 2«tt0r;
teb liTre% «ie4 6ooX» ; Mm lettrea» mek Uti§n
(16.) Tout meaniiig every, ia of course always in the BiDgiilar,
bat Taries for the feminine:
Airy eUiMm 9komld Mm* Ait
2W citoyeB doit Mnrir mo paya;
le soldat de mq aaqg, le pr^tre da
sen sft]& La Mom.
En tma$ dioaa, U fimt oooaid^Nr
hi fin. Lk FQMTAXII&
eoutUrv; the mtldier with kis bloody
thsprUH with hit r~'
Jn m/mr%
(16.) TmUf in the aenae of aU, agrees in gender and nmnher with
the noun to which it rehitea :
taui rargent^ all th§ moi^; Umte hi toUe, off tkt dotk
^^ieh form all th4dmrM€ndmdk$
hcpe$^n
n 6tait aa-daania da tami caa
taina ol^ata qui Ibnnant Ipuf lea
d^aira et Umiea lea eap^ranoea daa
See i 97 (6).
§ 81.— The Peokouh.
(1.) The pronoun^ in Freneht aa hi other langnagea, ia a worn
used to repreaent the noun, in order to prcTent ita too frequent
repetition.
(2.) The pronoun serrea alao to designate the parts which eadi
person or thing takea in speech. This part ia called permn.
(8.) There are three peraona: the first, or that ^i^ich apesln; ihm
jsaond, or that spoken to ; the thini, or that spoken o£
ft.) There are fire aorta of pronouns :
Hm perMDal ; The demooatratiTe ;
The poaaeanye ; The relatiye ; I
The indefinite. \]
§ S2.-7-THE PSBSONAL PrOKOUITB.
(1.) The personal pronouna are ao called becauae they seem I*
dsaignate the three peraona more espeoially than the other pronouan,
Theae pronouna are:
iSTomtiMifiM Fi»rm. JUlaHve Farm,
BmpUar. PlmtaL Bimffylar. PlmaL
1. Je, /; noafl,«M; me, nugtdf: hoom, omtAm;
% to, ikm; yma,yaHtf$; ta^ th^ftdf; voo^yiMrtrfaii/
(0, iU; l^m.;mm.<A^; _. ihimad/!
(dS%, alKftpf; eIlea,£<A^. ^ (Urnif:
d by GoOgI
Digitized t
rmnBo»A% rmpwcvv§^% Ml Ml
(a) ZNnor
i|iMidMbr«lheT«rk WlMik plMod aT to a nrt^
SL ttt, Mm; TOUfl>yow; toi, (Am; Tous,y0«;
(3.) hidweei regimen^ or DetfM
WhMi |dM«d b«fon tbt verb.
Singular. FlmraL
1. me, tome; nous, toiw;
8. te, to thee; toub, to you;
{Sfr (bothgMllW.>
Whan jdaced ftfter tlM Terh.
Singvlar. JPluraL
noi, 4mov CtfifM; nonfl, fcnoai^ few,
tfli, 4ioi, toikot; ^nntLt Iltoik^ tpyMi;
>«-.U51Ut:: >-. It :£,•?(*•«-
(4») Indirect r^imen ; Oenilive and AbUuioe.
Always placed after the verb.
BmguUar. FlwraL
de noi, o/orfivm me; de nooa, of orjromfu;
detoj, ** thee; de toub, * you;
delui, * Am; d'enz, ** them,nL,
##00, • A<r; d'ellM, «* <A4m,l
§ 33. — ^Remarks on ths Pxiuional Pbokouks.
(1.) The French, as well a» the English, use the second petaon
fhnal for the seeond peivon singular, in addresaing one person. .
(3.) The second person, however, is need, as !a finglish, in address-
mg the Supreme Being :
Gfsnd Dieal te» jugementa sent I (SfrMt €MI ihif ptS§mmU mn
remplia d'6quit^. Om BAaasADX { fi$ll of equity.
(8.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction.
^ O men aouTerain roi 1
He Toid done tremblante et seule
derant toL ftkoaat, Esther,
O my eoeireigH Innii I
Mere I am, tremhUitf^ and edom
before thee.
(4.) It is used by parents to children, and also among Intimata
ftiends.
(fi.) The pronoun U is used nnipersonally, m the same maoxiar as
tiie Eif^ish pronoun tf.
t/ pleut, t< rdwfu; Ug^Ufreeaet,
((.) Obaerre thai the personal pronouns of ihb third person am
not lied ibr Um Mireet regteen to rcpreMBi inaninste objeela
Digitized
by Google
llie xeiatiTe pronouns bh, of oryrom if [} 89 (17)], t, to & [ J » (1«)I
m Qsed instead of the personal pronoons. Thns, in epeakiBg of ft
house, we do not say, Je lui ajonterai one atle» I wiU add a wthg^ tt
tf. We most say :
J'y ajoaterai nne atle ; I will add a wing to U (tkereio).
In qieakiog of an author, we may say :
Que penies-Toua dtlyif What do you think of htmf
But in speaking of his book, we should say :
Qu'm pensez-Tous t What do you think of it {thoreof) f
(6.) The word mime, plural m^mef , may be used after the pronoun
in the sense of self, selves :
le roi lui^mSme, tho king himoM
la teine Me-mtoM^ tho quoen herself
left princes eux-mhtus, the prinoes themseloes>
lea prinoesaes elUs-mimes, the prineesses themteloes,
(7.) The pronouns moi, foi» lui, eux, are often used after the verbb
to give greater force to a nominative pronoun of the same person,
in those eases where the emphasis is placed on the nominatiTe in
English, or where the auxiliary do is used.
jftf le djfl, mot, I say so, or I do say so,
t/ le dit) lui, he says so, or he does say so.
(8.) The same pronouns, moi, iot, ltd, eux, are used instead of the
nominative pronouns, ^e, tu,%l,%ls, for the English pronouns, /, thou^
he, they, when those pronouns are employed without a verb in an
answer, when they are used by themselves, or liave a verb nnder-
stood after them :
Qui est arriyd oe matint MoL WTu) arrivedthis morning f I,
Lai et moL Vous et eux. He and I. You and they.
VouB 4cnyez mieux que lui. You write better than he,
Yottft Uses ansai bien que mot. You read as well at I,
j[9.) The same pronouns are used in exclamations, and in those
^aaes where the English pronouns, /, thou, d&c, are followed by the
relative pronoun who ; also after t^tst, t^Stait, &c.
Moi Ini o^dor 1 / yield to him t
JSux aller k LoAirea I Th^ go to Londonl ^
Moi qui sois nudade .. Iwm am sick.. .
JaU qui est offider. ffe who is an ^cer.
Eux qui soot saTanta They who are Tsamed^
O'est mot ; c'est lui. It is I; it is he.
Oe Bont eux. It is they.
Pte61ope, sa femme, et mot qui
<nift aoQ nlft, nous avons perdu Tes-
p6nnoe de Is revoir. FibriLON.
Penelope his wife, and /who «m
his son, hose lost the hope ^ ssssn§
him again.
(10.) These same pronouns are also used ins^^ead of the nomi*
Mtlvesi/eb te» ^^, when the verb has aeyera! eobjeoto wnieb.troall
Digitized
by Google
:^6«0i08ttt pft^totnrii.H9 ^* ^^^
Tomr fcUker mtd I wert « hmg
£ica and I are, ptrhapa, ikefitgL
fmoviui or pftrQy noima and partly pronomn. The T«rb may ihtii
be Immediately preceded by a proBOnn in the plural, reprenenting ia
one word all the pieoeding eubjeets.
Votre ptee et mot, nous avooB
^t6 loDgteED^ eimemu Tim de
Tautre. FivixoN.
Rica et moi sommes peni-Mre les
pemiera. Montxsquiku.
(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and theyerb eometimes eome
4T8t in the sentence.
Nout avoxiB^ nom et mot, besoin 1 Ycu ondlhaveMed o/toUramet,
de tolerance. Yoltaiub. |
(12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself^ &c, is used for both
genders, and for both numbers; for persons and for things; and
always accompanies a verb.
Les yeox de ranuti6 m trompent I The eye$ offriefuUkip are eeldom
nrement Voltaibb. | deeeioed (de^ve thenuetvei),
(13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes
A reflective meaning, according to the context ;
lis ee flattenti they flatter thenuetvea.
ils ee flattent, th^ flatter one another, each other,
(14.) Soi, hinuelft itself, ^., is of both genders and numbersi
and is applied to persons and things. It is used in general and inde-
(enninate sentences; having conmionly an indefinite pronoun for the
Bominative :
On a soaTeni besoin d'un plus
tit que tot. La FoMTAnix.
II depend toujours- de eoi d'agir
petit que tot. La FoMTAnix.
II depend toujours- de tot d'ag
hoqorabiemeot Gibault-Duvitikb.
. Etre trop m^oontent de tot est
une fiublesse. Mxb. db SabiJ.
We have often need of one moro
humble than ourtelvee.
It ie alwaye in our poieer to ad
honorabltf.
To he too much diepUaaed mth
on^e edf it a weaknue.
For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, { 98,
md following.
§ 34. — ^PossBssiTB Pronouns.
(1.) The possessive pronouns, which are fonned from the personal
pronouns, represent, in the radical part, the posseswr, while m teimini^
tion they always agree with the thing posseesed. Some relate to one
person, some to several
(2.) POSSESSIVES BELATIKG TO OrS PsBSOBT :
The object poeeeeted being in tho~^
Binffular, PluraL
MdMUhu. Fminne, Maeetdhu, Hkmmine.
1. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennea^ mtiM;
flLletien, latienne, lestienfl, lestiemies, <Atiit;
twleaisn, lasienne^ lessiens, lesaiemies hiSthm^iU
Digitized
by Google
m
(3.) Two Oft voBi PkMom:
le ii6tre, la n6te«b
le T6tre, * la T6trfl^
k kiir» k kor.
k6B6trti^ mm;
I ai^.r-*BttUBtt ov m PoflSMflZTB Psonoviiig.
(1.) It may be aeen from the aboye tabk tiuil» aa befoFe aakl» iStm
4«miiMtion of tha poiMMive pranooii agraea in fendar and amnber
with the objeet posaeeeed.
Votre canif et U mien. Voire plume et a< ^ mUniM,
Tout penknife emd mimM. Tcwr pen and mine.
Vo8 freres et lea miene, Voe soBon et lea mienne*,
Yeut hrvthere and mine. Tom tietere and mine.
On Toit ks maux d'autrui, d'on
antre osil ^ne ks eiena. Coen blu.
Lm mimstres da roi lenteiit que
kur gloire, oomme la menme^ eat
daoa k boolteur national.
BxaiTAaoiN na St. Pnaaa.
We eee the mirfcrtemu ef oiken
differenily from ow own.
The minuter* of the kinpfeeithUi
their glory t like his omn, w in mi-
tional happinui.
(9.) Theaa prenoima ehould relate to a ao«n piavioualy axpniaii
lik mk k ijken viokted in meramtik aonraipoiideiioa:
J^ai re^n la vStre en dAte du, etc, I received yomre dated the, Se^
k incorrect It ahould read thua :
J*ai re^ii Totre lettet en dftte do, eta, I received yowr letter dated, dbe
(3.) Thece prononna may, howeyar, be naed abeolntely when w»
mean thereby onr lamily, near iiriativea, or intimate fiienda :
Thane my family or friendtf the
court, thepoaple topleate.
wnocarf
Moi, fai lea miene, k cour, le pea-
pk a oootenter. La Fomtado. ^
]CaUietirenz....qiuporieohe2ka Wretcheduhet
giene k glaive et lea flambeaux. hiefelloehcitieene the eword and tSe
OoLAansAU. torch.
Ceet a nona a payer poor ka We metet hear the penaity of tk
WtomdaanMrm SAflDnt \erimeeafow family or people.
(4.) Le mign and le tien are also used absolntely as the words mtnt
and Oiine in Englkh, in the sense of ponoeonion, property :
Et le mien et le tien, denz frteea And mine and thine, two punetiitF'
pointillenz. Bohxau. one hrotherc
Le tien etle mien, BauHcemmroBB Mine and thine (memn and tmmm)
de toatea ka dlTiaiooa et de tontea are the mmrcee of all dieieione ami
ka qoereUea OiaMwr-Deymn. j yuan-a/a
Digitized
by Google
•^
•BMOVftTftATIYX PBi>NOirve.-»{| M» SY. tit
g 90. — ^DnKHimnuTivB Pbosoow.
e«hii» oeUe,
cem,
J«^;
lA4i(, cenz-li^
oe. it, thi^,
AUolute DemtmttroHv PranaumM.
ced, ^fi^ ) not uwd in the
oela, that, ) plimL
§ $7.— RtlfAIWB ON THS DXMONST&ATXVI PbOVOUITI.
(1.) The deaonstmtive pronoiuiB edidt odk^ Si^ MnuM tho (
der and number of the noanB which thej represent:
Je oe eooDAis d'averice permiae
qiie edU dn tempa.
Stjuhslas LsooinKT.
Lm aeidei lonaiiges que le ocBcir
dooiM, flont mUm que U bontd i^at-
tira. liA88ILL0N.
(2.) These prononns are aometimee need absolutely before qui, qua
iantf etc^ in the same manner as the English personal [M^nomis he,
they, &c, before uiho, whom, &c. :
MahinkM no wMtria i# &lhmM$
Ths cnlyprmat wMcA tkt hngri
^fMt are thorn wkieh goodman db-
Cehn qtd rend un service doit
r<mbUer, idm qtd le re^cnt^ s'en aoa-
renir. BARTHALxmr.
Aimer cnuf gm Tons halwent amx
eiii Tons jMrstentent^ c^esi la chants
on Chretien, ^ast resprit da la reli-
gioBL BonuuLOUi.
ffe who rtndtTM a ierviee thoM
/orff€t it; ha foko raceiaei it thoM
remember it.
To loae thoae wAo hate jfMK tkaae
whoneremmta pm, ia the akmitjf ef
the vhriatiem: '- ' '
ligion.
it ie the^'ipirit efro'
(3.) C!eUc^ceZZ»«t,etc; oehit4d,ce2Z»^are oaedwhen it k da-
drable to denote the comparative proxindty or remoteneaa tiipraiMHud
m Engliah by the worda ius and that:
eabi-ei» tM» am, ertol-la, that ama» ^
(4.) Cdui^ oeJui-Zd, etc^ are often nsed to eipress eentrast or
eomparison. They are then equivalent to the English expreesiona
^formart iha latter; this one, that one:
ITBibagistrat int^gre et un brave
eelut4d fidt la gnerre anz ennemis
domestiques, eiwM boos protege
eootre lea ennenlia estMeqrs.
Tel est Vavantage ordinaire
Qtt*oiit sur la beant^ les talents :
ftnasfplaiseBt dans tons lee temps;
Wie/d o'a qn'un temps ponrpbiire.
J^oiTAma.
An ypright memetrate and a hraae
effimr Ore eqmaug eetimable: the
firmer makee tear againtt domaetie
enemiee, the tatter peiteete ne agaimat
8u«h ie the ordinary adaamiage
which talents poseeee over beaata:
the former pleaee at nU tbnee; me
hitter hoe hut one time to yfeesa
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
ifk4 BSLATXYl PBOKOUN8. — § 88, M»
(6) Can, eeZoy fisTe no plunl, and are need only of tfatnga. Tbty
do not refer to a nvord ezpreased before, but aervo to point out oljecta :
ptBDes 90^, take thit. doones-moi e^/o, give me ihaL
J^ai d^^ dit co qu'il faut fsire, I have alreacfy tdid what should 6§
quand un eofimt Teut aroir e&d et done when a cAt^d will have thie swd
eelek J. J. Boubsxau. that.
(6.) Ce, a pronoun, must not be confounded with the demouatra-
tiTe adjeetive ce. The pronoun ce is often used without an anteoe*
dent, as the nominative of the verb etrt in the same manner aa the
English pronoun ii r
c'est moi, it i» I c'est toqs, ii ie youL
Oe n'eat pins le jonet d*une ilamme
Berrile.
Cest Fjrrrhus, c'est le fils et le
rival d'Achille. Raooe,
Ji it no longer the sport ef am
unworthy JUame.
It is Pyrrhus ; ii is the son ani
the rival of Achilles,
For particular rules on this pronoun, see } 108.
§ 88. — Relative Pronouns.
(^1.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti.
mate relation which they have to a noun or pronoun which precedes^
and of which they recall the idea. The noun or pronoun so precede
ing the relative pronoun is called the antecedent
(3.) Table of the Relative Psonoims.
qui, uhOf which; (sujet, noooinat} de qni, of, /n>m toAom, ) Regime l&«S'
que,»Aom,ia&toA; (r6g.dJrect,acc) dont, of, from whom; [ JSg^fflSST
which; J «"■**»"'•
a qui, to whom; (r6gime indirect, dative.)
leqnel, who, which ; oomposed of the article and quel
Singular Plural.
MaeetUnu, AmtfnsM. JUasadne, AmsMm.
lequel, laqnelle, lesquela, lesqnellea, who, which;
dnqud, delaqnelle, desqnels, desqnellea, offromwhi^;
' auquel, & laqaelle, auzqneli, auzquellea, to which,
y, to it, of iiy etc en, of it, of them, etc
quoi, what, which, why, etc.
§ 89. — ^Remarks on the Rblativb Pronouns.
{i^ Qui, whoy tohichy is generally the subject or nominative. It U
vsed for both genders and numbers, for perspns and for things. (See
No. 6 of this {.)
(9.) When used for things, qui cannot be preceded by a prepost
tion. Its use, in this respect, is restricted to the nominative.
(3.) It is used relatively and abso^^vely.
(4.) It is used relatively when it has an antecedent expreased :
Digitized
by Google
ftSLAVlTX PftOVO0H8.^'m.
9I#^
Jm uaniar' ynj fat mi, fiit vn
ptoe aai»& Adbbkt.
Love MiwM eagerly all thai /at"
tere iL
L'amour ayidement croit toat oe
pd le flatte. Raoimx.
(5.) It IB need absolutely when it haa no antecedent ezpresaMt
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It ib ren«
dered in English by Ae whOf ahe who, they who.
Qui Tent pailer rar tout» sonrent
parle an hasard. Andsixdz.
Lftciie, qui veut monrir, ooorageux
qui pent Tivre. Raodtx, Jmi.
Qvt na frit dea henreux, n'est
pas digne de Tdtra
Who {he who) wiehee to tpeak om
every eubjeet, neake often at random.
He who withe* to die ie a coward ;
he who can eupport life heu courage.
He who doee not render othere
happy ie noi worthy to be 90.
(6L) Qui is also naed absolutely when it is interrogative. It may
then be nominatif or regime :
qui parle t who epeakef qui voyez-vouat whom do you eeef
(7.) Que, whom, whatf which, stands generally for the regime direct.
Thb pronoun is used for persons and things. It is of both genders
and numbers :
lea lettres que j'ai,
lea hcnnmes que j'ai tob,
the lettere which I have,
the men whom I have eeen.
(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent :
Olory lend* a charm to the horror*
La gloire pr^te un channe auz
horreurs ^*od a&oote.
DXLAVIONX.
Des lois que nooa suivons, la pre-
miere est lluxmeur. Voltaiex.
which we face.
Of the lawe tpfttcA we foUow, the
Jiret ie honor.
(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies qneUe
chose! what thing 7 quoi? tchatf
que voulea-vout t wAa< will you (have^ f
quediirOii\ what do people eay f
(10.) QuQi, what, is invariable, and said only of things. It may
be used absolutely and relatively :
J'ignore etf d ^Mot il pense, I am ignorant of what he thinka.
In the above sentence it is relative, being iMreceded by its ante-
ledentce.
(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means queile chose 7 what thing 1 and is
used mostly iu interrogative and doubtful sentences :
n y a dans cette affiure je ne salt
quoi, que je n'entends naa.
liAGAD^ldX.
H y avait je ne eaie quoi dans Bet
yeuz per^ants, qui me faisait peur.
Jiatium.
There ie in that affair I know noi
what, which I do not underetemd.
There 1001 1 know not what in hit
piercing eyee, whM ieiepiredmetrifk
fear.
Digitized
by Google
na
ftSLATiTJi FBOirovira.<«*«S M.
(IS.) J^oHTy ^^tht&tf ^ vMchy iow0M| It wd Mr Wlii (
Bunben; for peraont and for thingB. It ii alwmya emplojed nla>
tivelj, and ia, therefore, always preceded by an antecedent:
to f«pm<, can nmtr he a pmotful
<me.
We muMt pU^f the fauef that urn-
fyrtymaU yrmce, wkoee kardemtd
heart hoe never forgieeH,
(13.) Dont is preferable to de qni, of tpJbm, and duqnel, cf whidu
When, however, the pronoun has the sense ^ from liftem* LOi, when
used to denote a transfer, «fe ^» is better :
Un plaiar SmJi oo est SMar6 de
se repentb- ne pent januus dtre tran-
quille.- Mm. ds La Valusex.
n &nt plaindre le tort du prioce
mfiDrt«ii6, dont le coBor endurci n'a
jamait paidoiind.
CHfama.
Thehookedtm'
lUr ftcm
Le Bbraire de otM J*ai reca oes
lima
(14.) Leqnel, laqnelle, lesqnelles, who^ tOadi, shonld only be used
In the nondnatiTe, and in the direct regimen, in order to avdd am-
bignity. They may relate to persons or things:
(Test on effet de la divine Provi-
denoe, leqM attire I'adnuratimi de
tout le monde. Bosu-RASimir.
Hie an act of tKwine J^revidemM,
tekieh {act) attraOe ^admiraiion
of everyone.
(15.) Lequd^ preceded by a preposition— that is, duqudt auqud^ dmu
kijuelf &C., most always be nsed for tilings in tiie indireet rsgimen.
The word ^t, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to things
in the oblique cases :
That w&M beaewimu hook la
^ehieh not afaieehood were/owmd
The Seine, inthehedof mhM the
Tonne, the Mmme, and the Oiee
tptyr
Un Ixvre cnrieoz serait oelui dlamt
Ufuel on ne tnmverait pas on men-
■oDge. NAPoiioir.
La Seine, dans le lit db laqueUe,
Tiemient se Jettr T Toons, la JNEarae,
etroiae.
(16.) Leqnel, in all its modifications, may be used absolutely or
interrogatively:
leqnelt 10AM mm/ doqael t of ^Meh anof
ie^Mrf veyes-vous t which one do yen me f
(17.) Ev^qf Uf of them. This pronoun is of both genders and
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things. It is often
used for the English words, some, any^ when employed absolutely,
or even when understood. It is slso used as an indireet regitawn
in rdation to tlnngs, and sometimes, but not often, in relation to
persons [{ 92 (3)], instead of the personal pronouniB fui; eQsi» «ii«|
•0BS. Ul03»Rttlel.]
VouB en paries, you epeak 0/ U. J*m ai, / hone $mm of Ii
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
tjri^B9i9itB Fm*ao0St^*-^ 40^ 41.
•ir
Am 4U wtHk: A$ <m*
Lliypocrii^ em m^dit, et lliannAte «pMii» ml of U, and ihi worthy
haiotxM en um. Dsulli. man uaee it
J4S limitaadM tdencataoatcom- The ImUU of enUnee mt like the
me lliorizoD ; pliu od en approdw, horuon, ike more we t^
plus ellM recojent. IAm& ifnaooL (them), the more they recede.
Ia Tie «tt UD d^pM oonfi^ par le
del; L^e tea trust eonlUed by k
leer en dispoier, <fett Aire GrimmeL to dare to diepoee of tit ie a orime»
Geubr.
(18.) Y^toitfio ihem, thereto^ ofit^ &c. This relative pronoun, of
boftk gtndenvid nviibini, ia naed faiatead of a 7iii, d eOe, en l«i, &e.
It ia naed of tiunga, and alio advvibiaUy in the senae of there.
Ty doDDe met taum, Ijeeote my
ioit
J'y
I think of it.
J'ai eoum la aaalbem', et fy mub
campAtir. Gcioouia
N'^ aongfioni plu% clier Paulin; pine
Flui je eeos fhaneeW ma craelle
cooaUaea. RAonre.
Yone a¥ea pen da Uan; joignaa
y ma fortime. Doeat.
£a quelqne paya que Jaie 6t6, fy
ai T^ea oooima « feoata dt y _
ma vie. MosnisQUixu.
/ haife known mieforiune, emd 1
east eympathiMe with tt
Let ue think no more ^ Uki^ demt
Paulin ; the longer I think of ti, the
more I fed my eruel eonetemey wrnter.
I whaleeer eauntry I hene been,
oa if I wee to epemd
Ton ham hut imie property ; jeie^
my/oTtwM to it
fn whatever eon
I Heed (there) a$
my life in it
(19.) AKhoogh mimeroae inatancea maj be fonnd in whfeh Freadi
anthora have naed y with regard to persona, theae are licenaea wh^
ifclanotdeaimble to imitate.
§ 40. — IsDmsuM PAOVomrs.
(1.) The indefinite prononna indicate persona and things will mt
particniarlring them : the j are—
qiiiooiiqne»
rmi raotre,
Ywoi et Tantre,
tel,
tout,
aatm^ othere,
chacmi, eeeryone.
on, one, people, they,
panoone» no one, nobody.
qoelqa'ttD, aoiiM one, eomebody.
ioth.
fueh.
eeery thing, vMle
§ 41. — ^Rbmakkb on the Ikdkfinitx Pbonouks.
(1.) AuTRxn, others, Thia prononn ia applied only to peraona. It
kta no ehaage of form for gender or number, and ia need only aa an
mdireet regimen.
LlM30D6te homme eat diaoret ; il
lamarqna lea d^fimta d^euirm, maii
Hn'eoparlejamaia. StETmnrosfiK
Ne ukia pent 4 oMfnrf oe qoa tn ne
vondraia paa qn'oa te flt^
77ie yenileeum ie diiereet ; heeb"
thedefeeU€feihere,buif
Donotwnieotherethatwklekthew
Digitized
by Google
ttt
IVfiXriVITB PBOVOUV0>-§ 41*
(S.) Gbacuh, eMfy om^ codk one. When this pronoim is abeoluti^
•nd meaiiB every cme, everybody^ it is invamblo :
Le moB ccmmun n'est pas dioae
Ckacu» poortant^ croit eu ayoir
asses. VALAiicoocniiL
Chaeun est proetem6 devantles
gaoa heureaz. Distodohbb.
(3.) When chaeun is used relatively it may take the form of the
feminine:
Common mhm u no
tkiny, ikough mtery one b^iowet k$
kM enough of U,
Beery ome borne before the for
tunate.
OhoBwne de Dona (das femmes) ae
r^tendait sap^rieure aux autres en
0aut6. MOMTEBQUDCU.
Eeery mm ^ «t (womaii) ikomf^
hereelf empertor in bemgty to the
others.
(4.) Oh (onej peopUy (hey) is always in the nommative ; and although
always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys
most generally the idea of plurality. It is commonly used in indefinite
sentences:
On ^ people eay^iheyeay^itieeeAd, On "ptjrle, eomebody ^mJU, in.
On garde sans remords oe qu*<m
■oquiert saaa crime. Coexkxlle.
On reUt tout Racme : on choisit
dans Voltaixa Dxlujjb.
On ne sonnonte le vice qu'en le
Ihyant FiNALON.
We {one, peopjU) keep wUhmU re-
moree that which we (one, people)
aemtire without erime.
We {ne<Mle, they) read again and
again aU Aaei»ie : we (ilfee.) eeied in
Voltaire.
We conquer vice only by aooO'
ingit.
(5.) On^ coming immediately after the words et^si^on, que^ and qu^
b generally preceded by the article f, used for euphony :
That whi^ one underetande weH,
Oe one foil coofoit bien, i^ez-
nrime dairement Boiuau.
CTest d'un roi que Fon tient cette
nuudme augoste,
Que jamais on o'est grand, qu'antant
que Fon est juste. Boilbau.
he clearly expreteee.
It i$ from a king that we derive
this auguet maxim^ that one is only
great in proportion as he is Just
(6.) PsRsoNirs, no one^ nobody, used as an mdefinite pronoun, is
always masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb
expressed, it is followed by ne:
n n'est personne qui ne cherche k
se rendre heurenz.— C%tne«e thought
Persowne ne veut dtre plaint de
ses erreur& Yadvinaiioues.
There ie no one who does not seek
to render himself happy.
No one wisnes to be pitied en
account of hie mistakes.
KoTB.— The word persomtet used as a noun, and meaning a particiilar
penon, is of the feminine gender.
(7.) QuELQu'xm, somebochf, some onef any one^ anybody^ used
lately, is invariable :
Digitized
by Google
INBBYIVITS PBOSOUNS.--§41.
«»
qutimiyn c^««t a'atouer
toniniSrieur. Bxli. dx L^Espinassb.
QiMi/^'iMi a-t-il jamais doutd
i6rieuflement do VezistetiGe de Dieu !
GiRAULT-Duvivixa.
telf hi9 inferior.
Ha» any oim «v«r had mtioim
dofubU on the eMtitence of Qadf
(8.) Qyeiqu^im, nsed relatively, changes for gender and nnml>er.
has then the sense of some qf^ some one cf:
It
Coonaiasex-TOUB quelgu*uns de oes
dames qttdqttes-UTis de ces mes-
■enrBl OiaACLT-DuviyiEa.
Do you know any one of iko$
kuUe$f any of those gentUtnenf
(9.) Qoiconque, tohoevery whosoever^ b generally masculine, and has
no pluraL It is only said of persons :
Qvieonque flatte ses mattres, les
trahit Massillon.
Quioon^ue est capable de mentir,
est indigne d*dtre compt^ aa nombre
des hommes. Fix^LON.
QmieonqtieeBt soap^onneuz, mvite
la trahison. Voltaulx.
Whoever fUUters his masters be-
trays them.
Whoever is eapaUe of falsehood is
unworthy to be counted amanff the
number of men.
Whoever is suspicious, invites
treachery.
(10.) L*un Tautre, one another^ each other, the one and the other,
Tbis i^onoun makes in the feminine Ftme Vaulre^ and in the plurat
Us uns Us aulres. Us wnes Us autres :
Tout le monde se oonfiait Fun d
Tau^rtf cette confidence. Rulhixbxs.
Tout le pNBuple soiyit Virginie, Us
mns par cariosity, Us autree par oon-
nddnition pour Icilius. VutTOT.
U y a deux sortes de mines ; tune
FouTrage du temps^ Fautre TouTrage
des hommes. OHATKAUxaiAND.
Everybody confided one to another
thU communication.
All the peopU followed Virginia,
some through curiosity, some through
respect for Icilius.
There are two sorts of ruins; one
the work of time, the other the work
ofmef^
This ezpresdon
(11.) L'un et I'autre, les uns les autres (both).
may be used of persons and things :
Za Condamine traveUed over both
La Condamine a parooum Fun et
Fautre h^misph^re.* Bufpon.
X'tm et Fautre consul suivaient
ses 6teDdart& Cobneillx.
Sous Fune et Fautre ^poque, il
p^rit un trto grand nombre de ci-
toyens. Babthklemt.
UB se rdanissaieDt les unt et les
•ntres oontre rennemi eommun.
GimAULT-DuYinxa.
hemispheres.
Both coneide followed his stand'
ards.
At both epochs a large number cf
citizens perished.
They united with one another
againet the common enemy.
(12.) Tel, telle, feminine, such, many a person, many, ia an indefinite
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences:
* The noun is in the singular, because the word hhnisphire is under*
itood aftv the word Fun. This rule is observed by the best Frenoh
Digitized
by Google
TBBBa.*-*§ 4S.
Td teiw» ^ piMM maSm, qui
ifobl^ ]>enoiiiie. Coekxillb.
Td tariUe ui eeooiid nog, qui
t'^dipM an premiec. Vouauu.
Ttl Mt pris qui crojatt prendre.
Ilk FOMTAIKB.
TdU, Bans aoeon attrait pour la
retraite, se oonaacre au Seigneur par
pure fiert^. JAAuaLtjom.
TeU que Too croit d'lnutiles amis,
Dana le besoui rendent de boot
BouaaAULT.
IthotU obliging any otu.
Many a narmm may Mm» l» <Aa
finL
Many art eatight vkiU attempting
to eateh othert.
Many [a ftim] for wkom rvfrraf
uif to tks Lord tkr<mgh mere pridt.
Many friends vAom v)e think um-
leu render kj, in our need, valuabia
(13.) Tel, in connection with Mondevr, Madame, &C., aa Mcnsieur
floi tdt Madame une UHU^ Mr., Mrs. auch-a-one, ia used aubstantively.
(14.) Tout, ewry cine^ evary tking. This word, employed absoltttel/y
b iBTsriable.
▲ la settle vertu, aoia eftr que
tout prosptoe. F. na Nwowquatkav.
Tout n^esipas Caumariin, Bignon,
bI d' Agueaseaa Boilcau.
SoQ grand gteia ambiataah UmL
Boesuxr.
Be auured that it ie with fdrtma
alone thai every thing proapere.
Every one ii not Oaumartin^
Bignon, nor dAgueetean.
Hie great gemue embraced eaerp
thing.
§ 42.— VlRBS.
(1.) The verb ia that pari of speech whieh ezpreasca an action
done or snfifered by the subject; or simply indicates the condition of
the sabject
(2.) The subject or nominatiTO of a verb is the person or thing
doing the action, or being in the condition expressed by the verb. It
replies to the question qui est^x^i? whol for persons; and gu'es/-
oe quil which f uihatf for things.
(3.) Verbs admit two kinds of regimen : the JSrect r^imen and the
indirect regimen,
(4.) Tlie direct r^men, or immediate object, is that which com-
pletes in a direct manner the signification of a verb; that is to say,
without the aid of any other intermediate word. It answers to Uie
question quit whom? for persona, and quoiJ whatt for thinga.
(5.) The indirect regimen^ or remote object, is that which completes
the signification of the verb by means of an intermediate word, such
as the preposLtions a, (fe, pour^ avec, dans^ die. — ii qui ! to wham 7 de qui 1
tf or from whom? pour qui? /or whomt avec cui? &c., for perscns;
and 4 quoi? to what? de quoit of or from whatt dtc, for things.
(6.) Verba are regaUu', irregular, or defective. { 44 (3).
Digitized
by Google
riBBfe.*^ 43.
in
§ 43. — ^DlFVXSXHT 80BI8 OW VlRBS.
(1.) There sre five torts of verbs: active, passive, neater, reflective
•r pronominsl, and anipersoiud.
(a.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed by
the subject, and having some person or thing for its object This ob*
jcet is the direct regimen of the verb.
(3.) Every French verb after which qudqu^uru some one, quelque"
e^se, something, may be phiced, is an active verb. Thus, in the foU
lowing sentences, frotegtr^ changer^ ehanier^ dec, are active verbs, be-
cause we may wyproUger qu/dqy^un^ to protect some one; changer
(wHqvechotA, to change something:
DwafffQt^ llDBOoeiioeu— Raodti.
L'habit cbang* lea masan,
VOLTAJES.
Lea cygnea ne cktmUnt paa laor
SMirt Bvwwon.
OodproiieUi
Drw chang€$ the nuamtn,
BwmfdonoitmfftMrdtath,
(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. Tlie aetive
verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately directed
towards an object; whereas the passive verb presents the subject at
suffering or receiving an action. Tlie passive verb is composed ol
the past participle of an active verb and the auxiliary ^fre, to be.
(See i 64.)
Koa campagiWB MontfirtUitSet par
la pluic UAOALiMnL
U Hait gui<U par la force de aon
gillie. Massilloh.
Lea ])etita eaprita 9ont trop bUnh
dea petitea chosea.
La BocBxrouoAULn.
0%ar JSdA are fniUtMed hff f4a
rotfk
He woe guided hy the farce af M
gentiuB,
LittU nUndt are too much wexed
vithtriflee.
(6.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per
formed by the subject; but this action can only reach the object in*
directly ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is that the neu*
ter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu^un and
quelquechoMe cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never
be used in the passive voice.
8<«3rate paaea le dernier jour de
aa vie a meetmrir dtf rixnmortalit^
de Tame. L*AcadAmie.
Le feu qui semble ^teint, dort
aoovent soua sa cendre. — CoaifEiLLs.
Lea Plat^na citerent lea Jj^ie6d^
Okooiena a comparaltirc devant laa
Ampbyetiona. Lx Gknuxb.
Soeratet epent the laet day ef his
life in dUeoursing upon the immor^
tality ofthetouL
The fire which eeeme extinct sleepe
often under its athes.
The Plateana cited the Laeedtm^
nieme to mppear before the Amph^fo
tione.
f6.) The reflective or pronominal verb ir eo ijngated witn two ikr«-
14*
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
oojiiir«ATxov8 or rftftBs. — g 44, 45.
QomiB of the sune person; je me^iuteiUse, nous notci, wiu wus, «7t
je. (See { 56.)
j€ me fla^^e, IJlaUer myaelf. Vatu vow fSlmiez, ftm oomffrmht
late ycurselvee.
n ne tBLUi pas $e flatter^ les plus
expdriment^B ont fait dee foutes ca-
piUle& BoesuxT.
Les peuples se fUidterorU d'ayoir
nn roi qui loi reasemhle.
Massillon.
U ne faat paa permettre k VhoBcmB
de te miprUer enti^rement
BoflBDn.
We ihould notfiaUer ovreeivee : tke
moet experieneedhofoe committed «ap
ital errors.
The nations mil eongratulate them-
selves upon having a king who ro-
sembies him.
We should not allow a man to de
spise himself entirely.
(7.) The onipereonal verb can only be used in the third penon an-
galar: D plent, it raim; il gdle, it freezes; il tonne, it thunders,
Pook' bien juger ks grands, ilfanU To judge properly of the great, U
les approcher. Aubxbt. is necessary to approach them,
Ufaut rendre meillear le pauyre We should (it ts necessary to) vn^
qa'aa soiilage. Saiht-Lambbrt. prove the poor whom we relieve.
(8.) There are two verba called anxiliaiy, because they serve to
conjugate all others. They are — avoir, to have ; and 6tre, to be,
§ 44. — CoirjuoATiONS.
(1.) The French verbs are divided into four large classes or conju-
gptions:
Ist. The jSrst conjugation comprises all verbs of which the present of the
infinitive ends in sa ; as parler, to speak; aimer, to love, <bc.
2d. The second conjugation embraces all those of which the infinitive
ends in la ; as cfa^ir, to cherish ; punir, to punish, <S:c.
3d. The third conjugation ocntams all the verbs which, in the infinitive,
end in out ; such as recevoir, to receive; pouvoir, to be able, ^
4th. The fourth conjugation comprises all the verbs terminating with
ftE in the infinitive; as rendre, to render ; prendre, to take, Ac
(2.) The verbs are again divided into regular, irregular, and defeo*
tive :
Ist. The regular verbs are those which, in all their tenses, are ooojugated
like the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong.
2d. The uregular verbs are those which are not conjugated like tha
model verb.
8d. The defective verbs are those which want certain tenses or persons
§ 45. — ^MoDEs AND Tenses.
(1.) There are six modes : the indicative, the conditional, the iiii<
perative, the subjunctive, the infinitive, and the participle :
1st The indicative, whatever may be the tense, indicates or declares
in a positive, absolute manner : j'abandonne, / abandon ; j'ai abaadomid,
/ heme nh^^^nned ; j*abandonnerai, / will abandon.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
IfOt^SS AKD TBN818. — § 45. il2§
9dL Ifie eondkioDftl indieates a oonditian or a suppoutioti : j^aUmdon-
Beraifl si ... . Iwndd abandon if...,
8(L The imperative is uaed to express a command, prayer, or ezhorta-
lioD : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child.
4th. The subjanctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con-
tingency, or necessity : il est douteux que je rabandonne : iti^not csrUtin
that I may abandon him.
6th. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an uilimited
manner : abandonner see enfants, to abandon ont^s ehUdren.
6th. The participle, while retaining the power of the verb, at the same
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents,
abandoning hiM relaiivet; abandonn^de ses enfants, abandonea by ki§
Mldren.
(3.) The indicative has eight tenses:
Ist. The presea: : je parle, J speak ; je donne, Iffiw.
2cL The sunnltaneous past, or miperfect : je porlius, Iwat tpeaking.
8d. The past definite : je PvlAi* / fpoite, / did •peak.
4 th. The past indefinite : j ai parl^, Ihave spoken ; j'ai donn4, Ihavegintki,
5th. The past anterior, Teus parl^ I had spoken.
6th. The pluperfect, I'avais parl^, I had been speaking.
7 th. The rature absolute, je parlerai, I shall, wHl speak,
8th. The future anterior, ) v,„^.; ^^u r •*>,// *>...- m^i,^
or future perfect, \ jaoraiparl^, I shall have spoken.
(3.) The conditional has two tenses :
Isl Hie present or future, je parlerais, J should, wouid speeJe.
2d. The past, j'aurais parld, / should have spoken.
(4.) The imperative has one tense :
parle, speak.
(6.) The subjunctive has four tenses:
1st. The present or future, que je parle, that I may speak.
2d. The imperfect, que je parlasse, that I might speak.
8d. The past indefinite, que j'aie parl6, that I may have spoken,
4th. The pluperfect, que j'eusso parl6, tJuUJmig/ithavesp Jttn,
(6.) The infinitive has two tenses :
1st The present relative, parler, . to meak.
2d. The past, avoir parl6, to have spoken,
(7.) The participle has three tenses :
I si The present relative, parlant, speaking.
2d. The past active, ayant parl6, having spoken,
Sd. The past or passive, parl^, spoken.
(8.) Tenses are simple or compound.
1. Simple, w'len they are expressed in a single word: je parle, f
tpedk.
a. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb aT<Mr or
Itre ; j'ai parje, / have spoken ; je suis arrive, / am arrtteM
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
M4 OBX OT TBI AUXILIABT ▼JBMBI.^ 4C
g 46. — ^Usx or TBB AusuABT Vbbbs ATOni ▲»>
(1.) The acudliwy avoir is uaad :
1. In the conjugation of its own componnd tenses: fai en, JfttfM
3. In the eonjagstion of the componnd tenses of the verb him
f ai et6, / have been.
8. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : J'ai aim6« J havt
loved.
4. In the eofflpomd tenses of most neuter verbs ezprssdng an
action: fai mareh^ I have walked^ [See exceptions to this rule (8)
below.]
6. It is also nsed in the eonjugpstion of verbs which are always
nnipersonal : il a pin, it has tamed; 11 a gr61^ H has haXLedt dtc.
(2.) The verb etre is nsed in the conjugation of:
1. All the tenses of passive verbs : je snis aim4, lam Uned,
. 9. The componnd tenses of all reflective or pronominal Terbs : je ma
snis f!att6» / have flattered myself; je me suia promen6, / have VHtOced,
3. The compound tenses of the following neuter verbs, thon^^ the
samO) express action :
aller, to^o; naltre, to be bom;
arriver, to arrive; tomber, to fail;
choir, to fall; venir, toeome;
dMd&r, todeeeoM; parvenir, toeueeeed;
mourir, to die; devenir, to become;
revenir, to return,
4. A few unipersonal verbs, which are not always but occasionally
such : il lui est arrive un malhenr, a misfortune has happened to hitn.
(3.) A certain number of neuter verbs:
aoooorir, to rtm towards ; entrer, to enter;
dirparaltre, to disappear; earijac, 'to go out;
emiitre, to grow; passer, to pass;
cesser, to cease; V^^* to depart;
pCrir, to perish; Tieillir, to grow old;
mooter, to mount to ascend; grandir, to grow;
desoendre, to go down; rester, to rmmn, to dmeU^
take sometimes avoir ^ and sometimes Hre,
1. They take avoir when we have in view the action expressed by
the verb;
SL And Hre when situation or condition is the principal klea which
we wish to express :
FXiMfUBI.
WUhkToau n^inua
JEDe a diipsni •obnemenl fille est dispame depnis quins*
JoiirsL
Bhs disappear^ suddenly, fike Mas been oo%e afsrinigkl
Digitized
by Google
AVXtliIAll¥ TBEBf.-^ 4d. Mt
I* iHmm m t9m6 Uer. La fUbrre ut c$Mi% dApok ^mI-
C|Qe temps.
The fever eea$edye»terday. It i$ w/m time nne$ ih§ fmfer
eetued.
lie tMuromMn a deaeendn de HeH defloenda depois una bewra
pliuiour* degr^s eo peu d'heurea.
The barometer went dmm eeveral He hat leen down one Hotir.
ftegreee in a few houre,
11 • paM6 ea Am^rique en tel Les chaleuie eont paM^en
temps.
lie went to America at eueh a time. The heat ie paeL
Le trait a parti ayec impetuosity. Les troupes eont parties dopuis
L'aCAD^IS. six moil. ii'AOADXMIX.
The dart went with impetuoeity. The troope have been gone eix
Lb mog avait eesa<§ de coaler. Ce grand bruit eet cess&
BoisTS. Mmb. di SAyigx^
T%e biood had ceated to flow. That great noiee is over (Aoa
ceaeed).
(4.) Rester and demeurer, meaning to dwells to reride, take the
tnziliary avoir; when they mean to remain, to be lefU they take itre:
▲Tom. irai.
Tai T%M plus d'un an en Italle. EQe donnerait ipoot toqs sa Tie,
Moiimqinxu. le seul bien qui lui eoit restA.
Marmontkl.
/ redded mare than a gemr •» She would give, for you, her life,
Italy, the only poeeeseion which remains to
her.
n • demenrtf deux ans H la cam* Deoz cents hommes eont dtf*
pagna L'AOAniMEi. niear6s sur le champ de bataille.
L'AOAiNbai.
Be lived (dwelt) two years in the Two hundred men remained on
country. the field of battle.
(5.) £chapper, to escape, to pass wmolioed, to be forgotten^ takes the
aoziliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertendy^ it takes iire»
ATOIB. Aixs.
Oette difii6rence ne m'a pas 6chap- Ce mot m^est 6chapp6 ; pardtumos
p6. BomaiAU. ma franchise. VoLTAiai.
That diferenee has not escaped That word escaped my lipt; excuse
me. my frankness,
J'ai retenu le chant, les vers Ezcusez les lautes qui poarront
vConi ^cham)^. Voltairk m'Hre ^chappdes. Boilbau.
I retained the tune, but the verses Excuse the faults which I may
hesve escaped my memory. have committed inadvertently.
(6.) Convenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is used la
the sense of agreeing, or setting upon a price for an article it takes
Hre.
Ostte maison m*a «tMiv0nic NuasMMfMtcooTennsdu pri&
L^ACAIlilCW.
That house suited «a We agreed upon the price.
Digitized
by Google
9M
AUZIlimT VMRBS.-*-^ 49*
§ 4?. — Takadiqmb of thb Auxuxiat Ybbbs.
To fkmiliarize the student with the frequent use made by th«
PrBDohf of the indefinite pronoun an [} 41» (4.)], we have iatrodwed
k in our conjugation of the verbs.
(1.) AVOIR, TO HAKff,— AFFIBMATIV8LT.
Ihdigatxyb Mod£.
bimpub tkv8b8. oompouhd
PAST INnSFINIR.
r^
Ikave
J'aieu,
Ihavekad
tTm,
thmkoA
Taaaeu,
ihtmhasihad
11 •.
kekas
naeu,
hehashad
Oni.
Onaeu,
onehashad
Nous ETons,
toekaoe
Nous avons eu,
wehavehad
Vous ayes,
mm have
they have
Vous avea eu,
you have had
Ilsont,
Us ont eu,
theyhaoehad
IMPERnsCT. PLUPERFBCT.
J*ayais,/Aa^
was hAvkig, or I %utd
to have
J'avals eu,
Ihadhad
Tu avail,
Tn avals eu,
thouhadsthad
navait,
kehad
11 avait eu,
hehadhad
On avait,
one had, people had
On avait eu,
onehadhad
Nous avions,
loehad
Nous avions eu,
wehadhad
Vous avies,
ytmkad
Vous aviez eu,
vouhadhad
Dsaviaent»
theykad
Ss avalent eu,
iheyhadhad
PAST DKFINITg. PAST ANTBIIOR.
J'eus,
Ikad^mdUkave
J'cus eu,
Ihadhad
Tneus,
thou hadst, etc
Tu ens eu,
thouhadslhad
neut,
hehad
n eut eu.
hehadhad
Oneut,
one had, etc.
On eut eu.
onehadhad
Nous eiimes,
whad
Nous ei^mes eu.
wehadhad
Vous eiltes,
you had
Vous eAtes eu.
ymKadhad
lis eurent,
theyhad
lis eurent eu.
theyhadhai
FUTUaS. FimTBE ANTSIIOI.
Taurat,
IshaUorvnUhave
J'aurai eu, / shall, will have haa
Tu auras,
thou vnU have
Tu auras eu.
thou Shalt have had
Baura,
heioiUhave
11 aura eu,
h^wiUhamhad
On aura,
one will have
On aura eu.
one will have had
NousauroDS,
we shall have
Nous aurons eu,
wewiUhavehad
Vous auroB,
fouwiUhave
Vous aures eu.
youwiUhavehad
dsaruoot,
iheywOlhave
Us auront eu.
thovwOl have had
Digitized
by Google
▲ irk It. I AST 'H BBS ti-^^ '40^
ComnrmAL Modx.
SDIPLB TXN8ES. OOMPOUND TBHBX8.
PAE8BNT. PAST.
TuanraiB,
Daurait,
Onaaiait,
KouB amioitt;
V0118 aariez,
St auraient)
Iskouldhaoe
thou couidst have
he would have
€ne wtnUd have
loefooiddhave
you would have
tkey would haoe
J'aarais en, I should have had
Tnaamisou, thou wouldst haioe had
II aarait en, he should have iad
On anrait en, one should have had
Nons anrions en, we should have had
Vons anriea en, you should have had
Vb anraient en, they fhauld have had
Impbbativb Mode.
Ale,
Qn'U ait,
Qn'on sAt,
Ayona,
Ayei,
Qn'llsaient,
havethou
lethimhave
lei one. people, them, have
lelushave
have ye or you
let them have
SuBiuxcTtv£ Mods.
QneJ'aie,
One tn aies,
Qn'U ait,
Qn'on ait,
Que nons ayons,
Qne Yons ayez,
Qn'ib aient,
thailfnay^
that tkou mayest
thaihemay
that one may
that we may
that you may
thaitheymay
Qnej'aieeii, UuAlmay
Qne tn aies en, thai thou mayesi
Qn'U ait en, that he may
Qn'on ait en, * thaJl one may
Qne nous ajons en, that we may
Qne yons ayez en, that you wiay
Qn'ils aient en, thatthaymay
I
IMPBKPBGT.
QueJ'ensse, thatlmiSght'
Que tn euBKB, thai thou mighlest
Qn'iletlt, that he might
Qn'on eAt, thai one mtghi
Que nous ensslons, that we might
Qne vons enssies, that you might
PLUPERracr
QneJ^ensseen, thatlmsfhi
en, thai thou
i^iASf
Ay«i*.
It, ihat they mighty
Inruiixxvjs Mode.
to have \ Ayoir en,
PARTIdPLS.
Que tn
mightest ^
Qn'ileMeu, that he might J
Qn'on eAt en, that one might I ^
Que nons enssions en, that wefs
might "^
Qne Tons enssies en, that you
might
Qn'ils enssent en, CiWrfiA^M^At
PAST.
to hare had
€7MPOUirO.
having I Ayanten,
PAIT OR FimVE.
Digitized
by Google
AirsiiitAmT T•ft»^•.~^ 4I»'
(1) AVOIR, TO SAVE: OOKJUGATSD NEGATIVBLT
iHDICATnFB MODB.
SIMPUS TBNSB8.
COXPOtniD TSStSBM.
PAST INDErnnTB.
Je n'ai pts,
Tan'MpMi
Iln'apas,
Ob n'a paSi
Nous n^aYons pas,
Voiu n'ayes pas,
Di n'ont pas,
JJUnenot
thmkastnU
kehasnoi
enthasnot
wehanemoi
jfouhavefuft
theif have not
iMPsarECT.
Je n'aTafs pas,
Ta n^avau pas,
n n'avait pas,
On D'arait pas,
NoQs n'avioDS pas^
Vous B'aTte pas,
Us tfavaieMt pas,
Ihadnot
tktm kadst net
hehadnU
cnehadnot
wehadnot
tUyJuuLfMt
9AMt OBFItrmk
Ja n'eos paa,
Tnn'easpafl^
n n'eut pas,
On n'ent pas,
Kodsn'edmespas^
Tons n'e^tes pas,
Us n'earsiit tMUB>
Ikadna
Uuuhadstnoi
kehadnot
mt had not
vehadnei
ffouhadnot
rUTOBB.
Je n'ainml pas^
Tu n'auras paSk
D n'aora pas,
On n'aura pas,
ItkaUnot
OouwUnot
kewiUnU
cnewiUnot
Kaasn'aaroospas, we shall not
y ons n'aorea pa% ^en shall not
Ob ii'auront pas, they will not^
I
Je n'ai pas eu,
Tn n'as pas en,
n n'a pas en,
On n'a pas eo,
Nona n'aYons pas ea,
Tons n'aves pas en,
Ds n'ont pas en,
JAowl
thouhattl^
they have)
onehas \
wehave
PLUPEBTECr.
Je n'arais pas en, / had""
Tn n'avais pas en, thou hadst
n n'ayait pas en, he had
On n'ayait pss en, one had
Nons n'avions pas en, we had
Tons n'sTiez pas en, fou had
Ds n'aTaieat pas en, they had^
PAST AJITEBIOB.
II
1
Je n'ens pas en, / had
Tn n'ens pas en, thou hadst
II n'ent pas en, he had
On n*ent pas en, one had
Nons n'eumes pas ev, we had
Vons n'eAtes pas en, inim had
lis n'enrent pas en, they had
PUTDBB ANTEBIOB.
Je n'anrai pas en, / shall'
Tn n'anras pas en, thou shall
n n'anra pas en, he will
On n'anra pas en, one will
Nous n'anrons pas en, * wewiU
Vons n'anrea pas en, fou will
Us n'anront pas en, they will^
COKDXTIORAL MODS.
Je n'amais pasi / should
Tn n'anraispas, th^m wouldst
n n'anrait pas, he would
Ob n'BBimit pas, one would
Nons n'aniions pas, we would
Veas n'anries pas, you •
Ds B'ammlent pas, Aeif \
Je n'aorais pas en, / should
Tn n'anrais pas en, thoushouldst
n n'anrait pas en, he would
On n'anrait pas en, one would
Nons D'anrioos pas en, we would
yonsB'BBrieBpasen, you would
Dsn'aiizmleilpif eo. theywouU
H
I
Digitized
by Google
biwuisTB Mods.
ITalepas
Qo'iln'aitpaai
QQ'onii'aitiMa,
N'ajoDfl pas
K'ayesDM
iiraientpaa,
let on€ not imm
ktusnotkiwt
have nU fe Qt ym
mtiUmnatJUoM
SoBnnMxfn Modi*
iOIPLB TBN8BS. GOMPOimD
SJa n'aie pas, tkatlfnay
ta n*afea paa, thai thou
Qollm'altpas, tkatJUtma^
Qa'oB n'alt paa, tta4 one m«y
Qna noai njooB paa, <Aa^ wf
may
Q119 Toiia n'ayes pas, tJUU fm
WUt¥
Qa'nsn'aleiitpas, tJUaiheymay
QneJaiiV
Que ta nV
I
I
ptm,th4UImigU
I pu, that thatt
mighUet
Qn'il n'e^t pas, thatke migkt
Qa'on n'eAt pas, that mu might
Que nous n'aoiBioDS pas, that
wevii^ht
Que Tons n'enssiei pas, that you
might
QnHs n'aiiMexit jfu, that theff
might ,
\i
PAST.
Qaejen'aiepaseu, thatlmof
Qae td n'aies pas eu, that thou
mafeat
Qailn'aitpasea, thathemof
Qn'oD n'ait pas en, that one may
Que nous trayons pas eu, that
vemai^
Qua roQM n'ajai pas en, that
you may
Qa'fls n'aient ^ en, that they
maiy
nurEMncT
Qua Ja n'ensse pas eu, Wa r
Qaa ta n'ansses pas aa, Mat
CAtftt mightest
Qn'Hii'ett pas eu, Oo^ £ might
Qa'on n'etit pas an, that one
might
Que nous n'anssioiis pas ea, that
we might
Qua TOQS n'ensflieE pas eii, that
you might
Qn'ilsn'eiissant pas eu, Ma4 M^
might
Ihtuuiivb Mods.
PAST.
Vspaaarair,
riVWlpMb
««( ^ Aovf I N'aVoIr pas 00, neiUkmMkad
Pabtiqifu.
COMPOllMBb
ii0<U9iiv|K%7intpaae«i» usi l<a<nf JuU
Past or pAsmn.
ao. MW
Digitized
by Google
(a.) AVOIB,-INTERROaATIVBLT.
Ihdicatiyb Mode.
8IMPLB TSN8KS. OOMPOUHD TEKSBA.
Ai-Jel
Afl-tiil
A-t.I11(*)
A-t^an1(*)
AyoDB-nons 1
Ayez-Yoiu 1
have I?
kaske?
kasone?
havewe?
haoeyou?
kaioethey?
mnMFWGT.
AYftis-Jel
Ayaifl-tal
Avait.il 1
Arailron 1
Avions-Doasl
ATiefi-yoQsl
Avaient-ils 1
hadi?
hadstthou?
kadki?
kadone?
hadtoe?
had you?
hadthey?
Tin DJBFINITB.
£aft-j6 7
Eus-tat
£ut-U1
£at-oa1
Etkmes-noiis 1
Eiltee-Yoiisl
Eorent-ibl
JUil?
hAdstthouJ
kadhe?
hadone?
had we?
Aadyou?
hadthey?
PUTTUBB.
Anrai-jel
Anras-tal
Aura-t-ill
Aura-t-onl
Anroiu-noTiB 1
Anres-vouB 1
Auront-ilsl
shaUJhave?
skaU thou have?
wiUhehave?
shaUoTU have?
shall toe have?
will one have?
shall they have
PlflT INDBFmiTB.
Ai-Jeeu7
As-taea1
A-t-ileul
A-t-on en 7
AYOD8-nou8 eal
AYez-Yons eu 1
OntrilBeul
have r\
haslthau\
hashelf^.
has one Y'^
havewe I '^
have you I
have they]
PLUPBBPEGT.
Avids-Je en,
AYa&8-ta eu,
Avait-il en,
Avaitron en,
AvioDS nous en,
Aviez-YOUB en,
Avaient-ils en,
hadPi
hadstthou
hadhe
hadone
hadwe
had you
hadthey
I
PAST ANTBKIOE.
Eos-jeenl
£us>tu eu 7
£ut-il en 7
Eat-on en 7
£ Ames-nous en 7
Etktes-Yous en 7
Bnrent-ils en 7
hadn
hadstthou
hadhe
hadone
had
had you
hadthey
t
PDTUKE AMTEBIOK.
Anrai-Jeen7
Anras-tn en 7
Aura-t-ii en 7
Anra-t-onen7
AnroDs-nons eu 7
Aurez-Yous eu 7
Anront-ils en 7
AaUJn
shaUthou
shaUhe
shaUone
shaUwe
shaUyou
shaUthey^
3
I
Conditional Mode.
Anrais-Je7
Aarai8-tn7
Anniit-il 7
Anrait-on 7
Airions-nons 7
/viez-Yous7
/iiraient.i]s7
should thaoe?
shouidst thou have?
should he have?
would they have?
would we have?
should you have ?
shouUAeyhave?i
Aurais-Jeen7
Aurais-tn en 7
Aurait-il en 7
Anrait-on en 7
Aurions-nous en 7
Auries-Yous en 7
Anraient-ils en 7
^upuidr\
woouldstthou
would he
shoulione
shauldwe
should you
wouldlhey
(♦) See Lesson 4, Rule 6.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
AVXthlAKY TKmVft.-i-§ 49.
nt
(4.) AyOIB,-*BnCIAlVYXIiT AND INTXBBOaATlVXLT.
Ihsicativs Monx.
anfPIil TSHSX8. OOMPOUND TXNaBS.
N'aUJepMl
N'a»-tapa8l
ITa-t-on pas 1
N'avoDs-Doc8 pat f
N'avez-votis pas %
N'odUUs pas 1
hav^ Inot?
kast tJUnL not?
kaskenU?
has one not?
have we not?
have ffou not?
have they not?
IMPBSrSCT.
N'aTais-JepasI
N'avais-tupasl
FaTait-UpasI
K'avait-on pas 1
N'avioDs-Doos pas'?
N'ayiez-Yous pas 1
K^avaient-ils pasl
had J not?
hadathouTUft?
hadhenot?
hadonefuft?
hadvfenot?
had you not?
hadtheynot?
PAST DBFINITE.
ITens-JepasI
H'eus-tapasl
N'eut-Upasl
H'eut-onpasl
N'eAmes-nous pasl
N'eiites-voiis pasl
N'enrenUils pas 1
hadlna?
hadathounot?
hadhenot?
had one not?
hadwenot?
hadyounol?
hadtheynot?
FUTUKB.
N'anTai-Je pas ?
N'auras-tn pasl
R'aura-t-il pas 1
N'aura-t-on pas 1
N'auroDS-nous pas ?
N'aurez-rous pas 1
N'anront-ilB pasl
shaUT)
shaUthou
shaUhe
shaUoTu
shaUwe
shall you
shaUthey
PAST INSiEFWITE.
N'ai-j e pas eu 1 have r[
N'as-tu pas eul hast thou
N*art-Upaseu1 has he
N'a-t-on pas en ? has one
N'avoDs-noQS pas eu 1 have tee
N'avez-vous pas eu 1 have you
N'onUils pas eu 1 have they
PLUPSRFfiCT.
N*avais-Jepaseur had n
N'ayais-tn pas eu 1 hadst thou
N'avaiUlpaseul had he
N'avait-o& pas eu 1 had one
N'ayioDS-nous pas eu 1 had we
N'aviez-vous pas en 1 had you
N'ayaientril pas eu 1 had they^
PAST AMTSaiOR.
N'eua-jepaseul had I
N'eu»-tu pas eu 1 hadst thou
N'euUilpasenl had he
N'eut-on pas eu 1 had one
N'etkmes-nous pas eu 1 had we
N'edtes-voQS pas eu 7 had you
N'euient-Us pas eu 7 had they
12
I
I
FUTUKJB AKTSaiOR.
N'aurai-Je pas eu 7 shall Jr\
N'auras-tu pas eu 7 shall thou
N'aura.tril pas eu7 shaU he
N'aura-t-on pas eu 7 shall one
N'anroDs-nous pas eu 7 shall we
N'aurez-vous pas eu7 shall you
N'auront-ils pas eu 7 shaUthey
CoHDinoHAL Mode.
iraurmisjepas7 shatild r[
N'anrais-tu pas 7 shouldst thou
H'aurait-il pasl should he
ITaurait-on pas 7 shotdd one
K'aurions-noos pas 7 should we
N*auriez-yons pas 7 should you
N'auraienMlipasl ^ouUthey
N'anrais-Je pas en 7 should JTi
ITaurals-tu pas eu 7 shouldst thou
N'anrait-il pas eu 7 should he
N'aurait-on pas eu7 should onelL
N'anrioDs-nouspaseu7sibH^i0« ( §
ITauriezvous pas eu7 should you ^
N'auraieo^ils pas eu7 should 1
\ they
Digitized by V^jOOQ
AVZILIABT TB»9if g 4%
dk) ftiBB, TO ME,^AWWIEMJLTPnBLT
IXDKATmE MODB.
COKPOmiD
PUT IMIUUPlMira.
Jei
nest,
On est,
Nona fominei,
Voos Ates,
nisontk
tkauati
keU
MM if
IWOfV
fvorymoTf
tkeymt
iMFBirscr.
ntali,
Tii6tais,
Il«Ult,
On^tait,
Now ^tlooa^
VoQfl 6ties,
I]i4taieiit,
TafViB,
nfVit,
Onfht,
NoQB f&met,
VoQsf&togp
Qflfbreiit,
/mu or luted to he
Uumwati
kenfot
onetooi
2?
Iitas
Aevids
one V as
fVK
&ey
FQTOBS.
Jewnl,
To fens,
nsera^
Onaerk,
Nonsseroiis,
VoQsserei,
2liieroiift»
Jeienla,
Tnserftb,
nsenit»
Onieimlt,
IloQB ■eiiooig
III wraleiiti
iOdUbe^mabe
thouwOlbe
heskaUbe
onoskaUbe
weMUbe
fouAdUbe
tkepshaUbe
Ua6t6,
0Da«t6,
Nona aTOBi M,
Voiu aves 4t6,
Il8 0Ilft«t6,
J«aTml8 6t6,
Ta arais 6f6,
n avaH 6tt,
On avail 6t6,
Nona aviona 4tf,
Vona aviez 6t6,
Da aTaient 6t6,
/l«Ml«ni
Aoukasibetn
kek^bien
dnekasbeen
webaoebeen
^e% hdtoe been
tkefkavebeen
Ihmdbem
ihmhedstbem
lekadbeen
onehadbem
we badbeem
PAST nmnoK.
J'onaet^,
Ta ena 6t6,
IX eut 6tb,
On eat 6t6,
Nona eikmea 4t6,
Voaa eiltea 6t6,
Ha eorent 6t6,
tkenkadsibeen
be bad been
•nekadbetn
we ntuL been
fonbadbeen
Asfbadbem
FUTUBS ANTCBIOB.
J'aand 6tf ,
Ta aaraa 6t6,
n aara 6td,
On aatm 6t6,
Noos aarona 616,
Vooa aares 6t6,
Ila aarant 4t6,
IsAaU
th9»3baU
beebaa
ene^UUl
weshaa
fouwiU
ibeywm
CoRDtTuniAL Mods.
pAar.
Ithouldbe
(boutbofUdstbe
kewmldbe
eneabeuldbe
wewnUdbe
fou$bauldbe
tktfwautdbe
J'aorala 6t6,
Ta aaraia M,
n wirait «t6,
On aarait 6t6,
Nona aarfona 6t$t
Vooa aariex At^
naaaralentMt,
Digitized
ItbtnOd
i\mnkouldd
bewould
onewauld
onewewa »
tMskeuldl
jontbffM I '
by Google
AVSiLiAftv ▼imsfl.^l 4lT. IM
Bolt, lettM
Qa'Uiolt^ kiUmhi
Qa'on 8oit| la^nehe
Sojonsi M«f Ar
Soyez, beptw «»
SuJUUJICIiVE MODX.
iOmS TBNSX8. COMPOVlir
loo Je sols,
|ao tn sois,
1)a'a soit,
Qa'onsoit,
Qae HODS soyiyiw,
Que Tons soyei,
4ii'i]s soient.
ttof Imaybi
(hat ikou nuiyat be
that he may be
thiotcnemaybe
thmtwetnaybe
thatyoumay be
that they may be
IMPBSFECT.
Quejef\]tte, that 1 might be
QoetaftuMiy that thou mighteU be
Qo'il fit, (Aa< A< might be
Qa'oofftt. liWKmem^iUte
Que nous Ibsskmr, Ma< im m^A^ be
Que TOO! ftwtoi, (M)NWfl^grA<^
PAST.
QneJ'ale 6t6, thatjmay]
Que tatAes€t6,tkat thou moyest
Qa'nait^U, that he may \
Qn'on ait, 6t6, that one may
Que nous ayons 416, (Aot iw siay I
Qno Yons ayes 6U, that you may
Qn'fls aient 6t6, CA«< d^ » '
PLUPEBFBCT
Que J'ensse 6t6, that I might
Qne ta ensses «U, Ma< ttM
niighteit
Qn'a eAt 6M, Ooi V might
Qn'oneAt^tf, that om might
Quo nons enssioos 6t6, tAa< io»
Quo Tons enarifis €U, that you
Qalls eossant 6i6, tt«< thiy
migkt
I
i
IM,
bfUixi'fE Modi.
t$be\Aw^Uih,
PABiKaru.
asJii^lArttiftMft,
PAiT m pAsntx.
ratf.
Digitized
by Google
iw
.—§48.
§ 48.— Beckjlak Vjubs.
FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN ER.
MODBL TSBB.
CHANTBB, TO SINO.
Ihdicativx Mods.
SZMPLB TBKSX8. OOlrfoUHD
Jechante,
TadiantM,
nchante,
Onchante,
Nous chantoDS
Votui chantei,
Ds chanteut^
To chanUia,
nchantait,
Onohantait
Noua chantioDB,
Vooa chantiei,
III chantaieiit»
Idng
hedngs
onesmgs
vfesing
you sing
tkeysing
Je chantaii, / was singing, or /
used to sing
thou wasi sin^ng
he was singing
one was singing
we were singing
you were singing
t^ were singing
Faff uu iMiTa.
Je chantai, / sang or did sing
Ta chantaa, thou sangest
D chanta, ke sang
On chanta, one sang
Nona chantftmea, we sang
Vooa chanUtes, you sang
IJa chantdrent, they sang
ruTuaa.
J'ai chants,
liaoesung
Taaacbanttf,
tk^kastswng
nacbant6,
ke kassung
On a chant6,
one has sung
Nous aTons chants,
wekavesunf
Voufl ayes chaiitf,
youh4Mvesung
(key have sung
Ub ont chant6,
PLUPBHFaCT.
J'aTaiB chants,
Ihad'
Tu avaia chants,
thouhadst
1
11 ayait chant6,
hehad
On avait chanU,
tmehad
"■ft
Nous ayiona chant6,
wehad
1
Vons aviez chantA,
you had
Db avaient chantd,
they had ^
PAR nrraaiOB.
J*eiis chant6,
Ihadsung
Tn eoa chant6,
thou kadst sung
n ent chant6,
he had sung
On eat chantt,
Nona eikmes diaat6,
one had sung
we had sung
Voua etktes chant6,
you hdd sung
Da eorent chant6,
theyhadsung
FUTUaa ANTEaiOK.
Je chanterai,
Ta cbanteraa,
II chantera,
On chantera,
Kooa chantcronB,
Voua cbanterez,
Bachaateroat,
I shall or will sing
thouwiUsing
he will sing
one will sing
we shall sing
you will sing
they will sing
J'aarai chant6,
Ta aaras cliant6,
II aara chant6,
On aora chanU,
Nona aarons chant6,
Vona aorez chant6,
Ub aoront chants,
IwiU^
thoushaU
hewiU
onewUl
weshaU
youwill
theyshaU
r
CORPITIOHAL MODK.
Je chanteraiB,
Tu chanteraiB,
n chanterait,
On chanterait,
Nona chanterioDB,
VooB chanteries,
Da chanteralent^
shauldf wovldsing
thou shouldesl sing
he should sing
one should sing
we would sing
youwouldsing
theywouldsing
p>aT.
J'aoralB chantd, Ishould^
Ta aoraifl chant6, thou wouldest I
II aarait chant6, he would |
On aarait chant6, o-ne would
Nona aarionB chants, tw imicM
VooB aariez chant6, vou would
Da aanient chants, they would
r
I'
Digitized
by Google
mS0UI.AB TSBBt*— §48,
Junnxim Mods,
Oh«nte,
Qn'il chante,
Qa'on chanto,
Cbantons,
Ghantez,
Qa'ils chantont,
SuujuMcrivji Modi.
TBH8S8. * OOMPOUHD
letomsmg
let U9 sing
ttngyeoefm
let i^iem sing
Qae Je chmnte, that Ima/ysing
Que ta chantes, iluA ikim mayest sing
Qn'il diante, that he nunf sing
Qa'oQ chante, that ow may sing
Qae noiiB chantioiis, that we may sing
Que TOQS chantieB, that you may sing
Qu'Ub chantent, that they may sing
IHPSBFJBCT.
Que je chantaase) that I might sing
Que tu chantaaies, that thou mightest
sing
Qu*il chanUt, that he might sing
Qu*on chantttv that one might sing
Que nous cbantaadoDS, that we might
sing
Que Tous dumtaMJea, that you might
sing
Qn'ils chantaflsent) that they might
sing
PAST.
Que J'aie cbantt, that t may
Que tu aies chants, that thcu
mayest
Qu'U ait chant6, that he may
Qu'on ait chant6, that one may
Que nous ayons cliant6, that we
may
Que vous ayes chants, that you
may
Qu'ila aient chant6, that they may
PLUPSKPECT.
,Que J'eusse chant6, that I might'
Que tu euBses chant6, that thou
mightest
Qu'il eAt chants, (hathemijght
Qu'on e At chant6, that one might
Que nouB euaaioiiB chantt, Sukt
we might
Que TouB euBdes chant6, that
you might
Qa'ils eussent chanti, that they
might
r
r
IllFllliTlVK MODX.
Ohanter,
CluHitaittt
tchavesmig,
to stng I Avoir chant6,
Paeticiflb.
compouhd.
smgvng I Ayant ebasM, hkvimg
FAST OR PAiSIVX.
Chantft,
Digitized
by Google
•M raoutiAm tim»fl.^| M
§ 49^ — ^BSMAIUCB ON TB« PBOUUAltltlXS OV SOMX V]
OF TBS First Conjuoatioh.
(I.) In Torbs ending in ger^ in order to retain thf soft pronnnoifr
tlon of the g^* the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g
wonid eome before a, or o .*
Nous msngeoDS, v^mit instead ef nmuwumfonsi
Je Bumymi, I did eat; ** jemangan
Ji^eenft, pulgtngt fugmO.
(9.) In verbs ending in yer, the y ischanged into t, before «, ss^enlf
and s (fio( oocenteflOt followed by r, and one or more vowels :
Jepaie, /fay; instead of J*P^s
nseiaaient, thejitfy; *' Usessofm^f
Jepaiesai, JwOlpofi " jepm^feroL <
(8.) In verbs terminating in cer^j to preserve to the e its soft pfo>
onneiationt a cedilla (() is put under it, wben it comes before a or o .*
(jommen^ani, conuMficfii^ $ tnstead of omMi^iMMil /
NouspU^ODs, veplactf " nouspiacons,
(4.) In verbs ending in eter and efer, the < or Z of the infinitive is
doubled, when it comes before e^es^ent and e (not acceraei)^ followed
by r, and one or more vowels :
J*appeUe, /oifl; Instead of favpdt;
Jejetterai, Iwatkrowf « Jejeteraii
J'appellerais, IvxniUcaUs " fappdtrtd*.
{fi,) The following veibs form exceptions to the last rule :
Acheter, to kwft
Boumler, to torment ;
Coqgelsr, to'ttngmi;
CoUeter, to collar ;
Coqneier, to coquets
D6oeler, todeteetg
I>6geler, to tJUno,
Decolleter, ioMmemmriketkeoJt
Etiqueter, to tkket;
Geler, tofimxo $
Haroeler, to teaze ;
Peler, to pod (
Soraebster, toomrhitf.
In the above verbs, when the t or Zeomes before e,es^ eitf,or • (ser
steetitel) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave aeeent Q}
Is pnt over the e, which precedes the t or Z:
Jepile, Ipedf Jepilerai, JwiUmdi
J*acheto, J buy: J'acheterai, ImriUtrnf.
(6.) A grave accent is also used in verbs ending in
ener, ever s
• See L. 8, 0.
t This rule applies also to ^ and « in veibs of the thhd
esdliv in noir^ Je re^ois, irteeioe,' J*aper90is, iporodu.
Digitized
by Google
MMmVUAn VB«Sft.«*-S Ml
MV
md Ibe aovteMeent of tbe infinitive of thoM ondiqgiB
loer, £gler, 61er, irer,
ikhvtT, 6^er, 6m«r, 6ter,
6cheri ^grer, 6ner, 4trer,
Mor, ^er, 6qaer,
% ehanged into a grave one, when the eonsonant following the fini
• of these terminationB, comes hefore c, es, erU^ and e (not aecenUd)
followed by r and one or more vowels :
Je seme, / sow ; Je m&ne, / lemA /
Je c61dbrerai, IwiUodAraU; Urftgnera, kivriUreign.
(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregnhur, defective, and nnipersonal
verbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre-
ceding remarks, and also indade in the same table the names of the
principal verba coming under these remarks, with referenees to the
modela.
§ 50.- Reoulab Vkbbbw— CoNTnnrxD.
mCCXND OONJUGATIONr-ENDINO IN IB.
MODEL VBJIB.
VINIB, TO FINISH.
* Irdicativb Mode. *
nMPUl TBNSBS. COUPOUICD TBNSBi.
Past iicnBFijfiTS.
Jeftite,
Ifinith
^J^
iKoufinishest
nflnit,
hejiniskes
Ontbit,
onefiniskes
vfejinish
VoQs iinissei,
^&A
BsfliteeDt,
J'aiflni,
Tu as fini,
Ilaflni,
On a find,
Nous avoDs fini,
Voasavexfini,
IlsoDtflni,
Ihm^eJSmsktd
tkoukadjhiuhed
he kat finished
one hasjmished
we havejimshed
you have JhUshed
they hitveJMMhed
IMPIKPECT.
Je finissiUs, IwatfoUOing, or used
to/inish
Tu flnisaais, than waafaiisking
n flniisait, he was finishing
On flnisBait, (me was finishing
Kous flnissions, we were finishing
Vous finisttes, fou werefinishiaig
lb ibOssalent, they were finishing
FAST DEFINITE.
FLITFSnFBCT.
J'avaisfinI, IhadfieUshed
Tu avais fini, thetL hadst finished
n avait fini, he had finished
On avait fiiU, one had finished
Nous avioDB fini, we had finished
Vous aviea fini, tfou had finished
lis avaient fini, iheyhadfimOed
FAST &2«TEaiOR.
thMdidd finish
hefinished
me did finish
wefinished
wmfinitked
theyfieUshed
25
J'ens fini,
Tueusfiiii,
neutfini,
Oneutfini,
Nous e^Unes fini,
Vous efites fini,
lis <
Ihadfiedsked
i\eu hadst finished
hehadfinuked
ent had finished
^hadfimshed
they hsulfinitked
Digitized
by Google
ftaoVLAB TKRBt.-*-§M>
8DCPLB TENSES.
COXPOXnCD TBNtSCS.
FUTCriE.
Jeflidnd,
Taflniru,
IlflDira,
Onfinira,
Nous flmrons,
Tons floirai,
Ssflnimiit,
IskaUJlnuk
ikouwiUJSmsk
hi vnU finish
one wiU finish
we shall finish
jfouvriU finish
they wiU finish
tVTUMS ANTERIOK.
«raanu flzii, / shaU hazt
Tu aana &d, iho% vnU kave
n aura flni, he shall have
On aura fini, one will kave
Nous auroiis thii, we shaU have
YoQS aures flni, you wQl have
lis anront flni, they shall have^
\\
CCMDITXOIIAL MO^E.
PKESEMT.
PAIT.
Jeflniiais,
Taflnirals,
nflnirait,
On flnindt,
Nons fintrions,
Voos flniries,
IIa flniraient^
I would finish
thou shouldst finish
he would finish
one might finish
we wmdd finish
voumigki finish
they shcntld finish
J'aarata fini,
Tu anrais fini,
n anraH fini,
On aarait flnl,
Nona anrions flni,
Vona anriez fini,
Da auT'iient fini,
J should
ihouwotUdsl
he might
one shmUd
we would
ffflu might
(key shmdd
Ihpxeativb Mode.
Finis,
Qa*!l finisse,
Qa'on finisse,
Fioiflsons,
Finiasez,
Qn'ils flnissent,
finish thou
lot him finish
letoneinish
let us finish
finish ye OF yo¥
let thorn fini^
SuBJTTNcnvE Mode.
Qoe je finisse, that tmay
Que tu finisse^, thai thou mayest
QqII finisse, that he may
Qu'on finisse, that one may
Que noos fin issions, that we may
Que Yous flnissiez, tAot you may
Qa'ils finiasent, thai they may)
IMPEBPECT.
Qae je finisse, that I might^
Quetu finiases, that thou migMest
Qa'il flnit, that he migU
Qo'oQ finit, that one mi^ht
Qoe nons finissions. that we might
Que Tons flnissiez, that you might
Qa'Ui finiswBt. that they ft ,gUj
^1
One J'aie fini, that 1 may')
Qne tn aiea flnl, that thou maytst | '\
Qu'il ait fini, that he may 1
Qn*on ait fini, that one may W
Qae nous ayons fini, that we may j
Qae voos ayez fini, that wm may I j
Qu*i]a aient fini, that they may)
PLUPERFECT.
Que j'ensse fini, that I mioht
Qae tu eusaes fini, that thou
nUghtest
Qn'il eAi fini, (hat he mi^ht
Qa'on eiit fini, that one might \ »
Qae nons ensBiora fir I, that we i ^
might
Qae Tons eoasiez fini, that you
might
Qn'ils Cfosseut flni,Ma< they mighty
Digitized
by Google
BSOVLAR TXBBS^^iL
toueiTivB Modi.
BDfPLB T1K8X8. COMPOIOTD
nWBMT.
VlDfr
PAETICiFLB.
iokmmjbitkti
COMFOUMD.
Past ok Passite.
§ 51. — ^RsauLAR Verbs. — Contimukd.
THIRO CONJUGATION^ENDING IN OUt
MODBL VBSB.
KEGEVOIR, TO RE C EI VS.
Indicative Mode.
PEflBNT. PAST mOKPimTB.
Tare90to,
Ilre^t,
Nous reoeroBS,
Voiu reoeTes,
lb re^irent^
MftCtVOt
(kntreceiveU
he Ttctwts
one Ttotvoes
you receive
ikejf receive
J'ai re^u,
Tuasre^n,
II a refa,
On are^a,
Nous aYoos re^ a,
Voiu ares re^ii,
Hb oDt re^ a, .
I h&o€ received
tkoH had received
he hat received
one hat received
we have received
yon have received
they have received
nCPBBFBCT.
Tureceraifl,
DrecevaH,
Onreoevait,
Nom reoerfoM,
Vous receviex,
k receyaientj
was receivingt or /
need to receive
ihtmwasireeeivfytg
he was receiving
one was receiving
we wete receiving
yon were receiving
they were receiving
PAST BBFimTB.
PLaPBRPBOT.
Xayak refa, I had received^
Ta arais re^n, thou hadtt received
n avait n^% he had received
On avait ro9ii, one had received
Noos avionfl re^UtWe hadtvceived
Voufl ayi«z re^n, you had received
Ub BTaient re9ii, Aey had received
PAST ANTBBIOB.
Jerefna,
Tn ro9iiB,
nre^nt,
On re^ot,
Voas re^Atea.
tb re^uient,
1 recctved or did receive
thou receivedtt]
he received]
onerecewed\
we received i
received i
received]
^
J'ens refill
Tneoare^a,
II ent re^o,
On eat re^u,
Nous eilmea re^n,
Voos eiltes re^n,
lis enrent re^u,
I had received
thou hadsi received
he had received
one had received
we had received
yon had received
ihty hiul received
•8oeiioCetM9>(8.) Abo,ififi.
Digitized
by Google
IM
•1.
rtinniB
Jereoemi,
TareoeTns,
OoreceTFa,
Nods receTroDS,
Yoos reoeTres,
JtJUUlrterivi
tk^u wiU nceioe
ke MkaU receive
ome wiU reeefoe
wetkaUreceioe
feu vriU recevoe
tkefwUltecewe
ooMFonro
J'aiml re9ii, / skaU km^e
Ta aoTM re^Q, tkmwiUkaoe
Ilaiirare^a, iawiUkave
On anra re9ii, ene wiU have
Nona auroDS re^n^ we skaU hene
Yoiu anres re^n, «9« wiU hone
Conditional Modb.
PmBfEMT.
PA*r.
Jereoemis, /U^vZiireeave
Ta reoeyrmifl, thm wnUdst receive
n reoevrait, he skovU receive
Od reoeTialt, m^ iii^il4 fveeiw
Nona receTiioDS, you shmM receive
Vous noeTriez, ifo« «t^A< raomw
Ik reoeTFaient, uiey ihaidd receive
J'anrais 1690, / tkmM
Ta auraifl re^ii,
n anrait refU,
On anrait re^n,
Nona anrions re^ii,
VoQS anriex re^o, mm wiigkt
lis auraient re^a, (key shmUd
onevoutd
iBfPSRATivE Mode.
Becois,
Qn'il re^oire,
Qa'on re^oiTe,
BeceYons,
BeoeTez,
Qn'ilB refoivent,
receive tkau
lei him receive
lei one receive
letusi
receive ye or you
let f^
SUBJUNOTIVE Mobs.
PAIT.
Qne je re^oira, that J may'
Que ta rofolTes, that thott mayest
Qa*il refolTB, that he may
Qa*on resolve, that one may
Qae nous recerioM, that we may
Qne Tons reoeyies, that you may
Qa'Us re90iTent, that they may
IMPiaFBCT.
Qne Je rt^vaut, that I might
Qna ta ro9aflBe8, thai thou
mighiest
Qall re9ilt, that ke might
Qa'on Te9At, that tne m^ht
Qae noos refasidona, thai we
might
Qne Toas re9afl8ie8, that you
wight
Qn'i]sre9nMentk thattheymigkt
Qne J'aie re9a, that 1 may
Qne tn aies re9a, that thou mayest
Qn'U ait Te9a, that ke miy
Qa'on ait re9a, that one may
Qne noos ayoDS re9n, that we
Qne Tons ayes 1690, that mm may
Qu'ils aient re9a, that ihey may
PLVPraFEOT.
Qne J'ensse 1090, that I mi^ht"
Qne tn ensses Te^% that tkeu
mightett
Qn'fl eAt re9n, that he m^ht
Qn'on eAi re9a, that one might
Qae noas ensBions re9a, that we
might
Qne Toos eosidez 1090, that you
Qails eoMent ra9«, O^tkay
migkt
J
Digitized
by Google
BS««»A« TSBBI/-! '81,M.
ma.
IWIJUTiVl MODB.
COMPOVKD TMXJMB.
TAtrr,
■MClTljll'y
R60VfM%
Paetiofli.
Hy Atfw fwcrind
OOMPOraiD.
rin OE TAmm.
§ 62. — Remarks.
(1.) In tbe iFerbs of this eonjagation, ending with cevoir, in oite to
preserve to thee its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (() is pnt nnder it|
when it oomes before a> <h « : —
Jere^ois, Jrtetivtg J'^terpois, Iftralm,
(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. Tboy
are:—
Apercevoir,
tofereaiMs
Peroevoir,
tocOkaduiks^tmigt
Gonoevoir,
iocomoehMt
Reoevoir,
to receives
Dioevolr,
tadeeeoKf.
Redevoir,
toeweogfihi.
Devoir,
t^awes
§ 5B. — ^RbGULAB yBEBS.-r-OoNnNUXD.
FOURTH GONJUGATION^ENDING IN RE.
MODEL VBEB.
YBNDBE, TO SELL.
Ihdicativb Modb.
Je vends,
Tu vends,
II vend,
On vena,
Nous vendons,
Vons vondei,
Ssveodent,
lua
thffusdUst
enesdU
weseU
wmseU
AeyseU
Je vendais, Jvmu mUingf or used to
J'al vendn,
Tu as venan,
II a vendn,
On a vendn,
Nona avons vendn,
Vons aves vendn.
Us ont vendn,
/UsejiU
thouhadiM
kekassM
one has told
foe hdive»ld
youiaoesold
tkefhavetoU
Tn vendais,
Dvendait,
Onvendait,
Kons vendioDS,
Tons vendlex,
Os!
thou wast setting
hevassdUng
onewassetting
wewere sdUng
ffon were setting
thoff were setting
PLUPEmPBCT.
Jfavais vendn, J had foU or Ami «B-
Tu avals vendn, thm hadst sold
n avait vendn, kt had sold
On avait vendn, one had sold
Nona avions vends, we had sold
Vons avies veodn, yev had sold
Ds avaient vendn, i^fhadssld
Digitized
by Google
tit BBftVLAB ▼
sniPLB 1SN8B8.
BBB«<r-4M.
COMPOITHD TBNIBS.
PAOT DEFINin. PAW AMTKBIOR.
Jereiidis,
liMwdidsdl
J'enftyendn, Ihad$oU
Taeasyendii, thaukmdtiiM
Tn^mdiB)
HktmtdUea
Uvendit,
hesM
neatyendn, hekadtoid
Onyendit,
onatold
On ent yendo, imehadtM
Nous TendtiiieB, we toid
Nous eAmes yendn, we had told
Yons yendltos,
fousM
Yous e^tes yendu, fou had sold
Ds Tendireni,
theyteld
Useurentyeudu, ikefkadeoid
rUTUSB. FUTURE 'AMTBUOS.
Jeyendnl,
IshaUsdl
J'aurai yendu, / tkaU have told
TaTendns,
tkmtwiUidl
Tuaunsyendu, thou wiU have toU
HTelld^^
kewmsdl
n aura yendu, ke tkail have sold
(hiTeodra,
oneviUseil
On aura yendu, ^ne wiU have told
Koos yendrons,
weskaUaeU
Nous auroDs yendu, we shaU have sM
YoQs yeudrei,
ftmnnUseU
Yous aurez yendu, ytm wiU have told
I]8 y«iidroirt»
HufgwUlM
DsauTont yendu, iheythaUhaoetoU
CoNDincnrAL Mode.
PBBSIMT. PAST.
Jeyendrais,
JshoMsdl
J'aunis yendu, Ish4mU^
Tu aurais yendu, thouwoMett
TiiTendraiB.
tk^uwouidggtsea
IlTendrait,
htmighbieU
11 aurait vendu, he might
1
i
Onyendrait,
On aurait yendu, one thmUd
Nona yendrioDB, weskfiuldseUl
Nous aurlons yendu, wethould
y OQS yendrioi,
mumigAtaeU
SefwouldM
Yous auriea yendu, wmthovid
Us auraient yendu, theythould^
Imfebatzvb Mods.
Vends, satktm
Qa'flyende, IHkimsdl
<hi'oay«ide, letaneseU
Yendons, ktusseU
Yendes, seUyeotf^
Qa'ils yendent,
UtthemteU
SuJUUHUTlVK MODB.
PAST.
Que je yende, that I may tell
Que tuyendes, that thou mayett teU
Qa'n yende, tMat he may teU
Qu'on yende, that one may tell
One Bona yeadionB, tkatwemaytea
QneToosyendlei, that you may teU
Qu'ilsyeiidMil, that they may tdt
Que J'aie yendu, that I may
Que tu ales yendu^ that ikou
mayett
Qn'il ait yendn, that he may
Qu'on ait yendu, that one may
Que nousayoDS yendu, that we
wtatf
Que youa aywr yendu, that yon
wtatf
Qu'itaaientyeDdii, thatiheymay
1
i
Digitized
by Google
FAvmvB VB&as. — §54.
nMPLS TKHBX8.
OOMPOUHD rmsoB.
IMFEIFECT.
Que Je Tewliflse, tkai J might seU
(hie in vendlflses, that tkou niightest
sell
Qa*U Tendit, tJuU he might seU
Qu'oD yendit, that you might sell
Que DoaB TendiasioDs, thai we might
Que vooB Tendiasiez, Ma^ fou might
Qu'ils Tendiflsent^ (A«< they might $01
PLUFEaFBCT.
Quej'eusseyenda, thatJm<gkr
Que til eusses yendn, that tAou
mightest
Qu'Q eAt rendu, that he might
Qu'on eiltrenda, that one might
Que nous enssions yendn, &at
we might
Que TOUB eussiez yendu, Mot
Qu'ilfl eiusent yenda, that they
1
fi
Imfuhtivk Mods.
PAST.
Vendre,
Vendtnt,
ta um I Ayoir ypndo,
Paetigiflb.
compound.
»Miig I Ayant yendu, havmgMt
FAtT OR PAflSIYE.
Venda, seltd
§ 54. — Conjugation of a Passivk Vxrb«
£TEE AIMfi, TO BE LOVED.
In>CAnyE Mode.
PBBS£MT,
Je lois ftim^y m. aSiii6e,/.
Ta 66 aiiii6 ^almte,
ne8ta!m6,
Elle est aimte,
On est aim6,
Nona flommes aimte ^ aim^es,
Yens Ates aim^ or aim6ea,
Us sont aimda, m,
fillesfontaim^/.
ihouwrtlavid
he is loved
sheisloved
one is loved
wearelaoed
you are loved
they are loved
theyareloved
niPEBFECT.
T^ttM 9\m6y m. alm^e,/.
Tn 6ta[8 aim6 or aim6e,
n «toit aim6,
Elle 6tait aixute,
On 6tait aim6,
Kons 6tioD8 aimte or almto,
Votu 6tieE aim6a or aimAeti
Ua «taieni ainiAa, m.
Bites Ataientaimta,/.
/ tooj lovedf was heifuf loved
thou wast loted, wast being loved
he was loved, was being &ed
she was loved, was beinf loved
one was loved, was being loved
we were loved, were being loved
you were loved, were be&g loved
they were lovedf were being hvsd
they were loved, were being loved
Digitized
by Google
944
VASatlTB TSBlfl.— I 54»
riar
Ta All aimft ^r aiiato,
11 tat aim4,
Bite Alt aini4e,
On fht alm6,
KooB f&mes aimta «r ainiiei^
Voiu f&tes aimte ^
Us furent aimtfs, m.
BUesfVirentaimAw,/.
Om least lM«tf
kiwasloved
one was html
fpewenUved
fouwentaved
tkiy toere Icved
they wert loved
FAVr IHDEFINrrB.
J*ai M aims 4fr 9hn€e,
Tn as 6t6 aim6 <w aim4a,
U a 6t6 aimd,
Bile a 6t6 aimfie,
Od a 6t£ aim6,
Nou8 ayoDs ^U aim&i ^ aim6e8,
VoQS arez 6t6 aimte 4fr aimftes,
lis ont 6t6 aimia, m.
Biles ont 6t6 aim^es, /.
I hofoebcm uvid
thou hast been hvU
he has 6em loved
she has been loved
one has been loved
roe have been loved
you have been loved
they have been loved
they have been loved
PAST ANTEBlOa DBFINITB.
J'eos 6t6 aim6, m. aimto,/.
Tu ens 6t6 aim6 ^r aim^e,
n eat 6t6 aim6,
Bile ent 6t6 aim6e,
On ent 6t6 aimd,
Nous e^mes €t6 aimte i^ aim6ea,
Yous e^tes 6t6 aim68 or aim^es,
lis enrent iU aim6s, m.
BUes eorent 6U aim^/.
I had been loved
thou hadst been lovtd
he had been loved
she had been loved
one had been loved
toe had been loved
you had been loved
they had been loved
they had been loved
PLVPESPECT.
J'avids 6tb a{m6 or aim6e,
Tn avals 6t6 aim6 or aimie,
n avait 6t6 airo6,
Bile avail 6t« aim6e,
On avait €tb aim6,
Nons avions 6t6 almte or aim6ea,
Vons aviez <t6 aimte or alm^es,
lis avaient 6te aim^s, m.
BUes avaient 6t6 aimftes,/.
I had been loved
thou hadst been loved
he had been loved
she had been loved
one had been loved
we had been loved
you had been hved
they had been laved
they had been loved
FUTUBS.
Je serai dmi, m. aimAe,/.
Tn seras aim6 or aimi6e,
D sera aim<,
Bile sera aim j^
Onseraaim6,
Nous serons aimte or aimtes,
Vons seres aimte or aimftea,
tb seront aimte, m,
BUes seront aiaate^ f.
J shall or Vfill be loved
thou shaU or wiUb4lovi
he shall or will be loved
she shaU OTwill be loved
on£ shall or wiU be loved
we shall or win be loved
youshall OP will be loved
they shaU or wiU be loved
they shall or wiU be hved
Digitized
by Google
^AttlTB TBBBS^ 54.
MH
J'anni M tam6, «i. aimte, /.
Ta auras 6t6 aim6 m' alinia,
n aura 6^ aimd,
EUe aara €t6 aimte,
On aura 6U aim6,
Nona aaroDS 6t6 aim&i or aimSaa,
YouB aores 6tA aim&i #r aimtea,
Us auTont 6t6 aimte, »,
Ellei annmt «t6 aimte,/.
/sAafl, wiU kane 6$en hoed
tkou thaU, io(U Move been iotmi
he shall, will kave been lovsd
she shall, will have been l4ned
ow shall, wUlhave been loved
we shall, wiU have been loved
yon shall, will have been loved
they shaU,wmhmfe been loved
tkey shall, wiU have been loved
GaHDITXOVAL MODB.
Je serais aim^, m; aimte,/.
Tn serais aim6 or nlmlo,
U serait aim6,
EUe serait aimfie,
On serait aimA,
Nous serious almte or axmivB,
Vons series aimte or aimtes,
Us seraient aim6s, m.
Slles seraient aim6es,/.
PBESENT.
/ should, would, could, might he
thou shouldst, amidst, mig&est be
he would or might be loved
she might be loved
one could be loved
we should or would be loved
you would or might be loved
theymight or should be loved
they vSght,could, should be loved
J'aurais M aim^ m, aim^, /.
Tu aurais 6t6 aiai6 or almte,
n anrait 6t6 aim6,
SUeaurait6t«aim6e,
On aurait 6t6 aim6,
Nous aurioDs <U aimte or (
Vous auries 6t6 aini6s or aim6ea,
lis auraient 6t6 aimte^ m.
EUes auraient 6U almtes,/.
PAST.
/ should, would have been loved
thou wouldst have been loved
he would have been loved
she would have been loved
one wouldhave been loved
wemight have been loved
yon would have been loved
they might have been loved
they should m might have been kwd
Sois aim^, m. aim6e,/.
Qu'il soit aim6,
Qu'ellesoitaim^e,
Qn'on soit aim6,
Boyons aimte or aimfes,
Soyez aimte or aim^es,
Qu'lls soient aimte, m,
Qu'elles soient aimies,/.
Ibfbsatitb Modb.
bethonloved
let her be loved
let one beloved
letusbeloved
be ye or you loved
letth^beloved
let them U loved
SuBJURcnvB Modb.
Que Je sois tAm%, m. afmte,/.
Que tu sois aim6 or aimte,
Qu'il >oit aim6,
Qn'elle soit aim6e,
Qn'on soit aimi,
Que nous soyons aimte or aliii6es,
Que reus soyes aimis ^raimiSei,
Qu'ils soieni aiiB6s,
Qu'elles sotet aimiet,
PBESBNT.
that I may be loved
that thou mtwest be loved
that he mayoe loved
that she maybe loved
that one may be loved
that we may be loved
that yon may be loved
that they may be loved
that they may he loved
1** Digitized by Google
9U FAtoHlTB TBBBBJ^H'M.
Qa6jeftu8Qaiii6,«i.«liii6e,/ • thai J miglU i€ yo§i
<iue tQ Auset alm6 or aimte, that thou migJUn^ it yo§d
Qu'il mt aim6, thai ke migkl be lomd
'Qa'eUemtaim6e, iJUU ske migkt bi immt
Qu'on fit aim6, tkaiomtw^^U be loved
Que nouB fturioos aimte ^r aimtes, UuU we migJU beUmd
Qae YODs ftmiei aimte 0r aimies, tkai you migU beUved
Qu'ils fVufleni aimte, m. thai they n^JU be hmi
Qu'eUes fViasent almteB,/. <Vit ^ m^A< fo hved
Qae J'aie «tf aim6, m. aimto,/. <Aa< Inunyhave been laved
Qa9 tu aies 6t6 a!m6 or mlm6e, <Aa< <4<mifiayeitAatw d«n» loved
QaH Ait 6t6 aim6, thai ko may have been loved
Qa*eUe ait 6t6 aini6e, tkat ske may ham been loved
Qa'oa ait 6t6 aim6, tkaione may have been loved
Qaenons ayoos 6t6 aimte ^raimtes, thai we may have been loved
Qae TOTU ayez 6t6 aimbaor aimtfes, <*a< y^u may have been loved
Qu'ilfl aient 6tb almis, m. that they may have been loved
Qu'elles aient 6t6 aim^es,/. i&<i^ M«y may have been loved
PLUPEBPECT.
Que yenaae 6ib aim6, m. alm6e, /. that I might have been loved
Que tu eusses 6t6 aiin6 or ailnto, Ma< thou mightest have been
Qu'il eilt €16 aimd, <Aa< Ae vtight have been lomd
Qu'elle e^t 6t6 aiin6e; M^ sA« nSght have been loved
Qu'on eilt 6t6 aim6, iAot one might have been loved
Que nous euBsions €iA vSmU or that we might have been loved
aimies,
Que TouB euasies M alm60 or that yeumi^ have been lemd
aim6e8,
Qu'ilfl eussent 6t6 aim68, CAo/ <A«y mi^AI have been loved
Qu'eDes enseeiit 6t6 aimtes, that they might hme been loved
IllFUHTlVK MODB.
fitre aim6, m, a{m6a, /. to be loved
Pabhoflb.
PBBflSMT.
lEtant aini«, m, aimte, /. beinig loved
, COMPOUND.
Ayant6t6aim<,m.aiin6e,/. hmring been loved
PA«r.
AToir 6U aiai6, «. aimte,/. t^ ik«MlMi» JpMtf
§ 65-— RuLK.^
Hiere is only one eonjngation for paaaive verbs. It is foimed o/
the anziliaiy l(fv in all its tenses, simple and eonqioiind, and tiM pa»
tisiple paat of the active verb wtuch we wish to eonjogate in the pa*
iiTevoiee. Seei48,(4.)
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
S 56. — CoNnroATioN of Rbflkotivb Verbs [§ 48, (6.)].
MODEL YE&B.
SS FLATTBB, TO FLATTER ONE*S SELF,
iMDiCATiyx Mode.
/e me flftUe, liUaUr JMfsdf
Tuteflftttes, thm fiaUemt tk^sdf
Oseflatte, ke JUUters Mnueif
On 86 flatte, ow Matters UmaAf or mm's jh^
Nous nous flattons, vxfiatter owrsdves
Vous Tons flattei, fouJUUter yowrulves
lis 86 flattent^ iheyfiaUer ihemktoes
IMFBKFECT.
J6 me flattais, JvasJUttiering or lue^l toJltUef «|Pi
«//
Tu te flattais, Mw toast flaUering ik^sdf
II 86 flattait, A« v)m JUUterin^ himself
On 86 flattait, one was JUUtering one's tdf^ JUwuAf
Nous nous flattionB, toe toerefiatiering ourselves
VotBs Tons flatties, fou were /ottering fourselves
lis 86 flattalent, they vereJUUtering themtselves
• PAST DEFINITE.
J6 me flattal, IfiaUered or didJUsUer mga^
Tn te flattas, thou didst flaUer tlofsdf
II se flatta, hejlattered himself
On 86 flatta, onefiaUered one's sOf, kimmif
Nona nons flattAmes, wejlaUered ourselves
Yons T008 flattttes, you flattered yourselves
lis 86 flattdrent, they flattered tkemsslves
PAST DnttPIHITB.
Je me sals flatt6, m. flatt6e, /. I have flattered myself
Tu t'es flatta or flattie, thou hast flattered thyself
II s'est flatt6, he has flattered himself
Elle s'est flatta, she has flattered herself
On s'est flatt6, one has flattered himself or mm*! st^
Nous nous sommes flatt6s or flatt6es, we have flattered oursetoes
Vous Tous Ates flatt68 or flatties, you have flattered yowrsdves
Us 86 sont flattto, m. they have flattered themselves
Elles 86 sont flattdes,/. they have flattered themselves
PAST ANTBBIOR.
Je me fus flatU, m. flattie, /. I had flattered myself
Tu te ftas flatt6 or flatt6e, thou hadst flattered thysdf
n 86 Alt flatta, he had flattered himsOf
Slle 86 fht fiattde, she had flattered hersdf
Onseftitflattf, one had flattered himself, oti^Sitff
Nous Doos fames flattte or flatties, we had flattered oursetoes
Tons vous Mtes flattis 0f flatties, you had flattered yourselves
Bssefarentflattis, m. they had flattered themmttet
Digitized
by Google
Mt
BBytBOVfTB ^IBBt.^
fLumncT.
Tn t'«tai8 flatU «r llattfe,
Il8'6taitflatt6,
sue 8'6tait flattfe,
On B'itait flatU,
Koufl DOQt 6ti<MM ilattte m* fiatttet,
Vovs Tons 6tie2 flaKto or flattAei,
lis 8*«taient flattto, m.
EUes ■'6taie&t flatttet,/.
MkekadJUUUndken^
one kadfiaUend Mms^, 9mit fflf
<w kadfiaUered ourmkfn
ftu had jUUUftd yowndnu
tketfkadjUtUertdtkmtden
ihey hadfiaUertd tkenudva
rirnjRx.
Je me fUttenu,
Tate flatterai,
Uee flatten,
On le flattera,
NofiB HODS flatterans,
Yons TonB flattereXi
Df M flatteront,
JihaUoTwiUJlaUermii^
thou shaU or wiUJUtUer fiftOf
ktshdaixrwUlJlaUnkimiaf
one wULJUaUr klM»df, tmift wiii
wewUfiaUtr
fou wiUJUUter fonnelveg
they wUlJlaiter tkiwudves
rUTUBB AHTEKlOa.
Je me terai flatt6, m. flattie,/. J thaU have JUttend mfgtdi
Ttt te aeras flatlA or flattie, Tlum wiU haoeJlaUemd tknOf .
Il8eeeraflatt6, • HewUlhavejUueredkivubf
Slle se sera flattie, Ske wiU haveJlaUereAene^
Oo se sera fiattA, One wiU havefiaUered kimMf
Nous Doos serous flatt6s or flatt^ea, We vriU haveJUutered ounehes
Vous Tons serez flattte or flatties, You will havefiaUered yowrsdves
Us se seroiit flattte, m. They will haoe fieOUmd tkemaOveB
SUeaseseront flatties,/ They vriU have fiaUend (km$ebm
GoimmoHAL Mods.
Je me flatterais,
Tn te flatterais,
II se flatterait,
On se flatteralt,
Nous nous flatterions,
Vona Tons flatteries,
Us seflatteraient»
J should, would, cmOd, mighi fioMm
myself
thauwouldstfiaOertkyae^
he would flaUerhims^^
one would fialier htmkfj em/it wCf
we would Aaiterouirsdipet
youwoulifiaUeryomrmhu
they would fiaiterthemtelva
Je me serais flatti, m. flattie,/.
Ta te serais flatti or flattie,
n se serait flatti,
XUe se serait flattie,
On se serait flatti,
jTons nons serioDs flattis or
VoQs Tons series flattis or
Us se seralent flattie, m,
"^les se seraieal flattiea,/
/ should, would, could, mighi km
fiaUeredmymlf
thou wouldsl hanefiaUered tkyee^
he would havefiaUered kimsd/
the would havefiaUered hersdf
one would havefiaUeretl em£e je{f
we wight havefiaUermt ourmbm
you would have fiatteredyountbm
they would havefiattermt i'
they wouU have fioMerHi
Digitized
by Google
BSVLBOTITB TB^tt^ 56.
U9
IlOPlRATmi MODB.
FUtte-tol,
Qu'il se tette,
Qn'oD te flfttte,
FlattoDs-noiia,
FtetteR-Toiu,
Jf fff fur t\mdf
JolUmJuSr kmtdf
let ont fatter on^s ttlf,
let us fatter aunOoes
JIatter ftmrtdves
let them /otter tMemtekm
SuBJUKOnVB MODB*
riSlENT.
Qne Je me flatte,
Que in te flattee,
Qa*n se flatte,
Qa'on se flatte,
Qne Dons nous flattlooi,
Que Toos Tons flattlei,
Qu'ils se flattent^
Qnejemeflattasse,
Qae ta te flattasses,
Qn'il se flatUt,
Qa'on se flatUt,
Que nous ikDus flattassionS)
Qne Yons yous fiattassiez,
Qa'ils se flattassent,
that JmofJUater w§M
tkattkeunutuedJUUtertkmtlf
tkathemofjlatterkimt^^
that one majfifatterkimeaf
that we mayjtatier oiurMlvet
that you may JIatter fourstha
that they mayJUUter themtelmi
niRBricT.
that Imight Matter nmmU
thatth4mmightestJUUerthiytdf
that he might flatter hime^^
that one might flatter kimedf
that we might flatter oursdvei
that you nught flatter yowrsOoei
that they mtght flatter themsehet
Qne Je me sois flattf , m. flattte,/.
Qde tu te sots flatU or fiattAe,
Quil se soft flatt6,
Qu'elle se soit flattie,
Qu'on se soit flattd,
Que nous nous soyons flatt6s of
flatties,
Que vous YOUS soyez flattte or
Qu'ils se soient flattte, m,
Qu'eUes se soient flatttes,/.
that thou mayat have flattered tkym^
that he may have flattered himsdf
that she may have fluttered hanif
that one may have flattered himself
that we may have flattered ourselves
that you may have flattered your$dve$
that they may have flattered themselves
that they may have flattered themsdves
PLUPIIPECT.
Quo Je me fhsse flatt6, m. flatt6e,/.
Que tn te fhsses flattA or flattto,
Qu'il se mt flatt«,
Qu*elle se fdt flattie,
Qu'on 86 mt flatti,
Que nous nous fbssions flattte or
flatties,
Que vous vous Aissiea flatt6s or
flatties,
Qn'Us se fliMent flattte, m.
fK'ailaa •• Atssent ilattta,/.
that I might have flattered m^ndj
that thou mightest have flatted thy
self
that he might have flattered himsdf
that she might have flattered hersAf
that one might have flattered himself
that we might have flattered ourstlvsi
that you might have flattered youe^
selves ,
that theymight Wot Uttend them
tktU they night Ams fluttered IAsm-
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
tM>
BBFLXO»VB> TSBBS^ — ^•^t
iRTXBiriTB Mode.
'EBIINT. PA«T.
8e flatter, topObw tme's self | S'Atre flfttt6, ^0 haveflaUend ^n^s «i{f
Pabticifle.
Pa£0ENT. COMPOUND.
feflattoiit, JUUtmng one's sdf\ ^'h\Kki^Bl^,kamMgJUaUnd<meitai
PABT.
FlAttf, m. flAtt6e,/. flattto, m. ji.flaUdea,/. jr. faUered
§ 67. — ^Negative Form of the Reflective Verb.
N£ PAB 8£ FLATTER, NOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF.
IivDiCATiVE Mode.
PUMEMT.
Je ne me flatte pas,
Tu ne te flattes pas,
n ne ae flatte pas,
On ne se flatte pas,
Nous ne nona flattens pas,
Vons ne Tons flattes pas,
Ss ne ae flattent pas,
Ac dec
/ do not /oiler myself
thou dost noifiaJUer thyself
he does not flatter himadf
one does notfiaUer himself
tew do notfUUter ourselves
fou do not/Uuter yowr selves
they do notfiaUer themselves
We will add a compoand tense and the imperative conjugated ta
this form.
PAST I2a>EPINITE.
Je ne me ania paa flatte, m. flatt6e,/.
Tn ne t'ea paa flatt6 or flatt6e,
U ne a'eat paa flatt6,
Xlle ne a'est paa flattie.
On ne a'eat paa flatt6,
Nona ne noos aonmiea pas flattte
or flattiea,
Vons ne vooa Atea paa flattda or
flatt6ea,
Cla ne ae aont paa flatt6a, m.
fines ne ae aont paa flatties,/.
Ac dui.
I have notJUatered myself
thou hast not flattered thysdf
he has not flattered kimskf
she has not flattered hersdf
one has not flattered himse^
we have not flattered oursdves
you have not flattered yourselves
they have not flaUeredthemsOves
they have not flattered themsOvet
4^. ^.
Imperative Mode.
Ve te flatte pas,
Qu'il ne ae flatte pas,
Qa'on ne se flatte paa,
Ne nooa flattona paa,
Ne Yooa flattez pas,
Qu'ila ne ae flattent pas.
do not flatter thysdf
let him not flatter himself
let one not flatter himsdf
let us not flatter ourselves
do notfljUter yoursehes
let them notflitier themtOm
Digitized
by Google
BBVLSOTXTS TBEBB. — §58,50.
851
§ 58. — ^iKTB&BOOATiyB FOBM OF THB RbTLBCTIVB TbBB
Ihdicativs Mode.
• PRSSENT.
M« Ilatt6-je1 tr* est-ce-que Je me do IJlaUer myself?
flatte'?
Te flatfces-tn 1 doU ikouJlaUer thyself
Beflatte-t-Uit does he faUer hxiMaf?
Se flatte-t-on 1 does oneJUUter Jdnuelf?
Nous flattoDfr-noiu 'i do vfcJUUIer omrsdves?
Tons flattez-voQB 1 dofou flaUer ymnelves f
8e iUttent-ils 1 dotheyfiaUerthtmadoesl
dtc. Ac 4^, ^.
PAST Un>EPINITE.
Me Bni8-1e flatU, m, flattte 1/
T'es-tu flatt6 or flattte ?
S'est-il flatt6 ?
S'eat-elle flatt6e 1
S'est-on flatte 1
Nous sommes-noiiB flatt68 or flat-
1668?
YooB Atea-Toos fiattte or flatUea 1
8e sont-ils flattds 1 m.
8« sont-ellea flatties 1 /.
have IfiaUered mysdf?
host thmtfiaUered thyseU7
has heJUUtered kmself?
has skefiaUered herself?
has cnefiaUered himself 9
have vfefiaUered owrseives 7
have youflatUred yourselves?
have UieyfiaUertd themselves 7
have they JlaUered themselves 7
i^, 4<.
{} 59. — ^ThB Rb7LK0TIYB YbRB CoNJUOATBD NEGAnVBLt
AND LsTKIIROOAnYELT.
iMDicATiyE Mode. *
PBUEM^.
Ne me flatt6-Je pas 1 Eilroe qneje do IwAfiaUermysdf?
De me flatte pas 1
Ne te flattes-ta pas 1
Neseflatte-t-UpasI
Ne se flatte-t-on pas 1
Ne now flattoDa-nons pas ?
Ne vmu flattea-Tous pas 1
Neseflattent-Uspasl
Ac Ac.
dosi thounotJlatUr tkysOf?
does he notjCaOer himtelf?
does one not flatter ktmself?
dovfenotflaiter oursdves ?
do you not flatter yourselves?
do they not flatter themselves 7
PAST IHDBriNITE.
Ne me sais-Je pas flatte, ai. flat- have I not flattered myself 7
Ne t'ea-ta'pas flatt6 or fiatt6e 1
Ne s'est-U pas flatte 1
Ne s'est-elle pas flattie 1
Ne s'est^n pas flatte 1
Ne nous sommea-nous pas flatt6s
0f flatties 1
Ne Tons itea-yooi pas flattfs or
flattiesi
Ne se sont-Us pas flatttel m,
Ne so aoBit-elles pat flatties?/.
hast thou not flattered thys^?
has he not flattered himsdf?
has she not flattered herself?
has one not flattered himself?
have toe not flattered ourselve$7
have you not flattered yovneivtt?
have they notflattered themsehes?
•8oe«M,aiidL.tf.
t8eeL.4a.8.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
^ 60. TABLE
REGULAR TERMINATIONS
W09A-
— .
PRMBBT
Patt
pARTICirM.
1
bmoA!frrB.
liinBrM»
er.
aok
5tii^.
1
e,
•^
e, ifui5.
■it
et,
•ta,
tat
t
i
1 «e,/m.
i ^'
£«it,
nt.
g
1
8 ^'«^-
1
g WW,
g«<»i,
te, ffUU.
^1
w,
iei,
6ei,Jfeifi.
eni
•iMt.
!r.
Imnt,
Sing.
. 1
to.
taHiS,
it mas.
1;
^
taMii,
9d
t
g •
^ l6,/m.
:&**»
ib«it,
IB.
S Plur.
. 1
S itfOM,
Ctariou^
to, ffUM.
1 ^
8
iaaes,
tade^
i€«,/wi.
iBMnt.
taMiOBl.
«Toir.
evanl.
fi&V-
. 1
Ota,
evata,
a, mas.
*.^
Ob,
6T«b,
8d
i
i
A.iie,/m.
Aev.lt.
om.
1
SoTiOM,
n8,ffuu.
1^
eTwi,
erUa,
ttes,/m.
•^8
oirent
OTident
re.
■Hi
Sing,
. 1
«,
ab,
Utmas,
1
«,
•ta,
4th
t
1
6 ne./m.
gloni.
1U,IIMS.
«:
««.
let,
1
MfJbM.
cm.
•iMk
Digitized
by Google
OF THE
OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS.
Fatt
DinnxB.
FbWBS.
1
iBfiBAnfa.
JUflVllfB*
JBBBaVBOT*
•i.
emi,
ends,
«•
MW,
M,
eras,
eniMf
•,
«•,
aaBe%
fe*..
1 erm, .
i emit,
fee,
fe ^
giODS^
t^^
gtlMi,
g erobs,
g erions,
gODS,
a assioM,
ites,
eres,
eriea,
«,
ies,
assieBi
drani
eront
eralent
ent,
ent.
aaaent.
iB,
iral,
irais,
isse,
ine,
is,
iras.
fads.
top
isses,
taMI,
b irons,
jjjirait.
.fase,
^Isse,
a'*-
C irioDS,
5 isSODS,
S issioDS.
C iasfaHii,
Itei.
ires,
iries,
issez,
issiez,
iasiei.
Imft.
inmt
iraient
issent,
issent.
iamt
1M,
evrai,
eTrais,
Give,
iMse,
US,
evras.
evrais,
oto.
oives,
uwt,
8 teei,
^eTra,
m evroDs,
A evrait,
S evrions,
A. oire,
S evoos,
J oive,
« enons.
iitoi,
evrai,
evries,
evea,
eviee,
utiet,
urent
eyxxmtk
evraient
oirent
oirent
Visent
to,
ral,
lals,
«,
ine,
it,
ras,
rais,
•,
«,
iaMi.
S"^
^rait,
52 ODS,
g Of
glonii
Alt.
g FOBS,
grions.
ItoB,
rea.
riea,
w,
i«.
iMta.
Imt
raal
nlsiA.
sAt
iiii
iNMt
Digitized
by Google
864 VOBMATIOV OF THB TSHSX8. — | 61.
^ 61. FORICATION OF THB TsNUS.
(1.) Tbe tenies are ample or compoond.
1. We call those riiiple tenses, which do not borrow one of the
teases of the auziliariea avoir and etre,
% We call those compound tenses, which are composed of the
tenses of avoir and itrst uid the participle past of a verb.
(2.) Among the simple tenses, fiye are called piimitiye, beeanst
they serve to form the other teases. They are
1. The present of the indicative ;
a. The past definite ;
3. The present of the infinitive ;
4. The participle present;
6. The participle past
(3.) The other simple teases, called derived tenses, are foimed
from the primitive.
(4.) 1. The present of the indicative forms the imperative by sup-
pressing the pronouns : as, je chante, chanle ; nous chantons, voua
chantez, chanUrn^ ehantet. It will be seen that the third person of
the singular and plural of the imperative, is properly the third per-
soh of the singular and plural of the subjunctive, used imperatively.
(5.) The past definite forms the imperfect of the subjunctive, by
changing t into sse for the ficst conjugation : as, je ehantai, que j%
ehanUusej and by addmg se for the other conjugations : as, je finis,
qitejefimue; je refus, ^i«e>« T^u9$e ; je vendis, queje vendisie,
(6^) The present of the infinitive forms : —
1. The future absolute, by adding ai for the first and second con-
jugations: as, chanter, j« ctotfenn ; finir,ye jEntrat; and by chang-
ing oir and re into mi for the other two conjugations : as, recevoiTi
Je recevrai ; rendre, j's rendrau
. 3. The conditional present is by French grammariana formed from
the future by the addition of 5 ; as, je chanterai, je ehanterens ; je
^ni^jejinirais ; je recevrai, /e recevrais ; je vendrai, j> vendraie.
(7.) The participle present forms : —
1. The imperfect of the indicative by changing arU into ais : as,
chantant, je ehantais ; finissaot, je Jlniseaie ; recevant, je recevait ;
vendant, je vendait,
3. Tlie present of the subjunctive by changing emt into e: w^
chantant, queje chante ; finissant, quejeJlnisK; vendant, queje vende.
Exception: In verbs of the third conjugation the terminatiott
I is changed into oive : as, recevant, gfueje recak>^
Digitized
by Google
Y ATOtB. — ( 61-8. 856
(8.) This formation mut not prevent the change of y into t, ae-
cording to Rnle (3.) } 49.
(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of Terbs
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and itre : tui^foi chanti^je $uis
mmiyfowiM ehanUffSiais aUnL
( 61-2. PARADiaH 07 THB UkIPSBSONAL YeRB Y AYOIRy
To BE THEBS.
Tkdicatiye Monx.
FaBSBNT. PAST IMnanMITB.
Dya, iAen is i then art in ytken, then has been f tktn kmM
been
nCPBEPBCT. PLVPSBPBCT.
Dyayait) there wu g t^ere were \ Iky unit eOf th£re had been
PAST DBPINITE. PAST ANTESIOa.
flyent, there was ; there were \ B j eat wi, therehadbeen
FUTDBB. FDTUBB AimsiOB.
n y aura, there wUl be\lLj aura en, there will ham been
CoKDinoKAL Mode.
PBESEaCT. PAST
n y anrait^ there would fe [ II y auralt en, there wautdhavebeen
Imfbbazive Mode.
Qn'ilyait^ Lettherebe.
SuBjuHCTivE Mode.
PBBSENT. PAST.
QoHl y aft, tha there may be \ Qn'il y ait en, Ma< there may ham
been
IMPSanBCT. FLUPBBPBCT.
QnH y eAt, tkcU there mdght be | Qn'il y eilt en, that there migiUkaae
been
Ihituhtive Mode.
PBESENT. PAST.
T STOir, to be there \ T aydr en, U have been «lcn
Pabtkifle.
febsbht. comfodmo.
r iyant, there being \ Y ayant en, theie kaoing been
PAST Oft FAanVE.
So.
Digitized
by Google
§ 62 ALPHABET
OF TBDB mSEOULAB, DSFBCTTVB,
•n t 44, «u (S.)
IteflfamplsMd ■AvflMlnfliiitfTvortlwTHtf
n* taMM not glf«B ii
UFUHIVBa
numovLBt.
InMCJlTITR.
iMnafBOT.
PAfTDcnaiTa
ABATntB, 4. t»
abattant
J'abata
J'abattais
J'abatdi
puUdtnon
Amoudbb, 4.
abatttt./.6.
fWBATrBB
atMlTBOt
J'abBons
J'absolYBte
U^ahriw
abioaa
tnabMniB
tu absolvals
anx. avoir
abooat
flabioat
il abflolYait
defecUva.
n. absolvons
Y. abBolYes
ils abeolvent
n. absolYiom
Y. absolviez
i. absolvaieot
AsmHiB («')
s^kMeiiMit
Je m'absUens
JeDfabsteoais
Jeia'abatfu
2. toabsiMH
abrtenu,/.6.
reC feeTENiB
Abstrairb, 4.
abstrayant
abstrait, /. e.
acooarant
J*abatrai8
see TRAIRB
J'abstrayaiB
J'acoours
J'aoconndB
Jacoooms
fonmto
acooum, / e.
seecouRiR
AcCR0tTBB,4.
aocroinant
J'aocrois
J*aocroi88ai8
J'aocraa
to increase
aocrA, f, e.
see croItbb
also reflec.
AOCVBILLIB, 2.
J'aoeaeille
faocfieillals
J'aecneQHi
(0 t0e2eom«
accaeilli,/ e.
tee cubilub
ACRCTBR, 1.
achetant
J'achftte
J'achetafs
Uke CUANTEB
fachetal
iobuy
achet6, /. a.
tnachfttes
aoz. aroir
il achate
♦ 49, (6)
n. achetons
peculiar.
Y. achetez
i. achAtent
ACHBYER, 1.
aohevanl
J'achAYo
J'achevais
like CHANTBB
J'acheYai
iocomfleU
aeher^, a.
ta ach^Yes
avz. ardr
U acb^Yo
♦ 49. (6)
n. Mchercm
pecaliar.
Y. achevez
I achftvent
AcanfiRiB, 2.
aoqntrant
J'acqiiien
J'aoqnArais
j'acqulB
UMpif^
aoquii,/.a.
taaoqnieri
tu acqn^rais
ta aoqQ*B
aux. avoir
ilaoqniert
il acqtt6rait
il acquit
frrignlar.
n. acqctdrons
n. acqa6rioDB
n. aoqiiimes
Y. acqa^res
Y. acqa6riez
Y.acqoitea
i. acquitoeiit
ilBacqoAraiexit
ils acguiienl
J'a4Io«|mi
Abioindbb, 4.
adjolgiiint
J'a4}oiii8
J'a4|oisDaU
i0M»oeiaU,4»e.
a«fioint,/a.
seesQunvmE,
AmBITBB, 4.
aSmettaiit
J'admets
J'adiiMttali
fadalB
^Wtnl
admia/a.
MrMBrntB
Digitized
by Google
ICAL TABLE
PBOUIilAB AUD UNIFBB80NAL YSBBS.
t 48, BULB (7)«od$40,
Mieato the ooqJoestlooBio ivlilch theyMoiv
IhU T&ble we not used.
FUTUES*
OombriomaIm
iMriRATlTB.
Sdudmctitb.
Jabttttnl
J'abatttmla
abata
J'abatte
J'akwttSan
fabooudni
j'abaoadrmia
J'abaolre
taabsovdraa
ta abaoudrais
absooa
taabaolTea
ilabsoadra
U abaondnut
q. abaolTe
abaolYona
il abaoWe
0. abaondrons
n. abaoadriona
n. abaolviona
T. abaoDdreas
▼. abaoudries
abaolTez
T. abaolvies
1. abaondront
Labaoudraient
q. abaolvent
i. abaolvent
Je m*afaatieii.
Je m'abaUen-
Jem'abetieQLe
Jem'abetfMM
rdral
J*abetra&mi
[draia
J*abftimlnu8
abetieos-toi
abatrals
J'abatraie
J'aooouTai
J'aooowrals
aoooon
J'acooore
J'aooonniiie
J^aoeroltni
J'aoa^tnia
aoerois
aocoeiUe
J'aooroaae
J'aoonelUerai
J'aooueillen^
J'aoeaeflle
J'aoeoeilllflie
J'adiAteral
J'acbftterais
J'acbAte
J'achetaiM
in ach^teras
tn ach&teraia
achate
taach^tea
Uki
11 ach&tera
Uacbitendt
q. achate
il achate
CHAMm
n. achAteroDB
n. achiteriona
aehetona
n. achetioDB
T. ach&terea
T. achAteriez
achetez
▼. acbetiez
lis ach&teroat
i. ach6teraient
q. achitent
ilaachAtent
J'acbdverai
J'achdTerais
jVb*Te
J'acheraaM
taacMveras
ta achireraia
ach&ye
taachftTea
Wtt
U ach^Tera
U achAverait
q. achive
il achftye
n. achiTerons
n. ach^yeriona
acbeyona
n. acheyioDB
T. ach^Teres
V. achiveriez
acheyez
y. acheyies
iU acbdTeront
i.acbAyera!ent
q. achivent
i.acbftyent
J'acqaerral
J'acqnerrais
j'acqui&re
J'acqaiaae
tnaoqnerras
ta aoqoerTais
acqaiers
to acquidrea
ta acqniMaa
llacqaerra
{] acquerrait
q. acqniire
il acqai^re
0 acquit
IL acqaerrona
n. aoqnerriona
aoquArona
XL aoqa^rioDS
IL acqaiaiiQiil
n. acquerres
T. aoqalerriez
aoqu^rez
y. acquAries
T. aoquiaaies
Ua aoqueiToot
J'aJUdndni
L aoquerraient
q. aoquttrent
i. aoqaiArent
Laoqniaaeiift
J'a^Joiiidrab
a4|oina
J'a4ioIgDe
J'a4|oiciiliao
radnettcal
J'Bdmettnia
J'adaelte
fadniw
Digitized
by Google
858
Dsnomn, PMniOAB,
lanaRnrB.
Partkrpmi.
ImNeATITB.
IiinRrRCT.
Past. IlBnro
Allbe, 1. <0
allRDt
Jeyais
J'allaiB
J'allal
tnaUit
e^
aU6/ 0.
ta vas
tnallaia
anx.Atro
Ova
aallait
ilalla
irrtigultf.
]i.anoiia
aallioiif
n.aDiiii6i
"
r. aUei
▼.alliei
y. alUtes
flsyont
ilsaUaient
LaUftrent
AMENSK, 1. |0
amenani
j'amAiie
J'amenaiB
j*ameDai
ibiONCBLBB, 1
ameni /. e.
amonoelani
S *». («^
JWACHBTBB
J'amonoelaifl
J'amoDoeliS
tokiap
amonceM /; e.
jiHl'
»e APPBLBR
APPlftAlTRB,4.
apparaissant
J'apparainaiB
j'appaniB
to appear
apparu /. e.
SM paraItrb
APPAin'ENIR,2
appartenant
J'appartlenfl
J'appartenais
J*apparti»
t9 belong
appartenn/. e.
SK TENIR.
Appbleb, 1. to
call
appelant
appeM,/.e.
fappelle
taappelles
j''^r^
J'^«
anx. ayoir
ilappelle
CHAMTBR
CBAMTBR
4 «, (4)
n. appelons
pecoliar
▼. appelex
ib appellent
Apprendrb, 4.
apprenant
J'apprenda
J'appreoab
j'apprlB
<0 2ftini
appris /. e.
see PRENDRE
Apputbb, 1. to
appuyant
fappnie
j'appayalB
J'appuyBl
iupport
appuy6 / e.
ta appales
t appayais
Uko
aax. BToir
11 appaie
il appuyait
CHANTBR
♦ *\(2)
n. appnyons
n. appnyions
pecnUar.
T. appnyez
Y. appayies
aBsafllant ,
lis apptdent
J'anaUle
i. appuyaieni
J'assaillaiB
J'assaims
toassmuU
asaailli/.e.
ta assailles
tasaaillais
tassailUs
ilaflsaille
Lassaillait
i. aasaiint
D. assailloiiB
n. asBaillions
n. assaillimef
T. aasaillez
▼. BMailliez
y. assailites
il8 aasaiUent
i. assanUdent
i. assafflireDt
Abseoib, 8. to
aaseyant
j'assiedB
j'aaseyais
j'assis
tet something
assto/.e.
xe e'abseoir
down! to weal.
Asseoir,(b') 3.
s'asfleyant .
]. m'assieds
je m'asseyaiB
J. m'anis -
to sUdovrn
aaste,/.e.
t. Vasrieds
t. t'aaseyais
t. t'assftB
anx. Atre
i. s'assied
i. s'asseyait
t. 8'assit
irregular.
n. n. asseyoDB
n. n. asseyioDs
n. n. aMlmet
V. T. asseyez
▼. T. asseyieE
y. y. assltet
i. a'aaseient
i. s'asseyaietit
i. s'wsireat
Abtreindre,4.
astreignant
J'astreins
J'astreignais
J'aBtreigniB
to omipel
astreint,/. e.
see CBINDRB
Attbindre, 4.
atteignant
J'attelns
J'atteignais
J'atteignli
M»a^ii»
atteint,/ e.
see CEINDRB
Atteler, 1. to
attelant
J'attelle
J*attelai8
J'attjlal
pu/to,AAr7i«S5
atteW,/. e.
4 49 (4)
jWrals
ATTRAIRE,4.to
attrayant
J*attrayal8
o^eroc^
attrait /". e.
see TRAfRB
Atenir, 2. to
avenant
il avient
il ayenait
aayfnt
Atoir, to iUtw
ayeim
ommifdA%4a
iihofpont
iiwa kapjfea^
UkayftwA
Digitized
by Google
§•»
Fotkab.
iMPUATITa.
iMniavBoi.
find
teiras
jUrate
J'aille
J'allasse
tniraiB
▼a.
taaiUea
ta allasses
ilira
11 iralt
q. aine
AIOUB
11 aille
UallAt
iLiroDi
a Mods
n. aUions
n. allassiona
T. irea
▼. Iriei
allez
Y. alliez
▼. aUassies
ihiront
Llraient
^ aUlent
amine
1. anient
1. allassent
famtoeimi
J'amftiierais
J'amtoe
J'amenasse
J'amoDoeUe-
J'amonoeUe
(raU
amoocelle
j'appazaitni
J'apparaltraii
appania
J'appandne
J'ai^MHvaw
j'appartien-
J'awMii^
J'appartieime
j'appartlBsse
[dni
[dmls
j'appelleraiB
appartiena
i'appellerai
ta appelleraB
fappelle
J'appdaaso
t. appellerals
appeUe
tn appellea
Uke
il appellera
i. appelleralt
q. appeUe
appelons
i. appelle
CHANTBR
0. appelleroDfl
a appellerions
n. appellona
T. appellerez
y. appelleries
appelez
T. appellea
L appelleroDt
Liwpelleralent
q. appeUent
1. appeUent
J'appreDdrai
J'apprendnis
apprendfl
j'apprenne
J'appriase
J'appnierai
J'appnleraiB
j»appuie
J'appnyaflse
t appuieras
t appulerais
appule
ta appuiea
&e
i. appaiera
i. appulerait
q. appnie
11 appule
CHAMTEE
IL appnieroiia
a appnierions
appnyona
n. appuyloDs
T. appuierez
V. appnieries
*ppuye«
T. appuylea
i. appuieront
L appuieraient
q. appnient
lis appuient
J*a88aillirai
j'aflsaiUirais
j'assailUsse
t. amailliraa
t. assaillirais
assaille
t aieailles
t. assailllasea
LassailUra
L assaUUrait
q.aasaille
i. aasaille
LassalUt
n. aBsailUrons
a assaillirioDS
aaaailloiis
n. aasaillloDS
n.a88ailli88ionf
Y.aaaaUlirez
Y, aasailliries
aasailleB
Y. aflaaiUles
Y.assamissies
i. asaailliroDt
Lassailliralent
q.asaaillent
tassaUlent
i. assailllssent
J'aaaitod
j'aasidrais
aasleds
J'asseie
J'asslsse
Je m'aasMmi
J. m'a88l6ral8
Je m'aaseie
Je m'asfllsse
t t'asfii^raa
t. t'a88i6rala
assicdstoi
t. t'aneles
tVassisses
L s'asBiAra
1. B'assUralt
q. s'aaaeie
1. s'assele
1. s'assit
a a aaaitrona
a a a8ai6rioii8
asseyoDsa
n. a aaseylona
a a assisaloiii
Y. T. a88i6rez
▼. ▼. arai6riez
asseyes ▼.
V. T. aaaeylez
y. y. asslsslez
I s'a88i6ront
1. s'aaai^ralent
q. s'asaeient
1. s'asaeient
1. s'assissent
J'astreindrai
J'aatreiDdFais
.111
J'astrei«;ne
J'astreigDisse
fattehidrai
J'attelndralB
j'atteigne
J'fttteigniflse
JatteUerai
J'attellerals
J'attelle
J'attelasse
J'attnirai
J'attrairalB
J'attrale
-
attract
DaTleiidia
iUTiendnlt
UaTienne
Uayint
itwmkt^pm
i^ioU. Aofprn
U mg^. happen
•• Mkv* HUp^K^
Digitized
by Google
IPflXlllll*
TMTmrLMB,
btmcsmwrn^
Invrsfiot.
PAm>Bra>f&
AToi»(y)/4»«e
yajant
Uya
ilyayaH
ilyeut
ther9
ea (unip.)
tJiereu, are
t^ere was, were
tkerewu^wiH
Battu, 4. to
battant
je bats
Jebattais
jebattis
beai
battu, /. e.
tn baU
tabattais
tnbattis
waoLvnAt
ilbat
flbattait
ilbattift
Srrtgalar.
ILUttODS
abattions
abatUmea
Y. battes
Y. batUez
▼. batates
ilabatteni
1. battaient
Us batttreat
BmB, 4.<0
bwrani
jebois
Je bnvais
jebus
dHfU
bu,/e.
tabois
tn bovais
tubus
aiULftToIr
Uboit
ilbnvaH
ttbut
n. buTOOs
a buTions
a bAmea
y. buyes
T. buTiez
T. bdtea
ilaboiveot
i. bavaient
ils burent
BooiLUft, 2. U
bofuilfauit.
Jebooa
Je bouillais
JebouilUs
M
bOQilli, f. 6.
tubovs
tu booillais
tubouilUs
ilboat
U bottillaii ;
il bouillK
a bouillons
n. bouillions
n. boullliiiMi
v. booillez
▼. bouilliez
y, bouillltes
i. boniUeni
ils bouilUient
ilsbouUUrart
BOUBEELKE, 1.
bonrrehuit
Je bowT^le
Jebourrelais
Jebourretei
totormtfU
bovrreU,/. e.
^ 49. (6)
BftAiu, 4. to
irbiait
defective.
ilsbraient
Bbuiner, 1. to
bmhutnt
il braine
ilbmlnait
Ubralna
drizxU
bmiiiA
U drizzles
UwasdriZ'
UdrizzleJ
nnlpersonal.
[zUng
BSVIBB, 4. to
bmisMmt
U bruit
itbm7iat.«-
roiur.ruatio
Ubratssait
defective.
ils brujaieni
ils bruissaien^
Cachbter, 1.
cachetant
Jecaehette
Je cacheUis
Jecachetai
toseal
cacbeC8./.e.
449,(4)
Ceindre, 4. to
ceignant
Je ceiDS
jeeeignals
Je oeignxs
gird
oeiiit,/.e.
tuoeins
tu ceignais
tuceignis
aoz. RTolr
ilceint
ilcei^it
n. celgnions
ilce^it
a eeigninet
irregular.
n. ceignons
▼. oeignes
lis celgnent
▼. oeigniez
ils ccignaient
T. ceienites
ib ceignirent
Chancklbr, 1.
cbanoelant
Je chancelle
Je chanoelais
Jocfaancdai
to stagger
cbanoel6, /. e.
4 49, (4)
see APPELER
Cbanoer, 1. to
changeant
Je change
Je changeals
Je changeai
ckange
cbaog6,/. e.
tu changes
tuchangieais
tnchai^geas
anx. avdr
il change
il changeait
ilchangea
4 49, (1)
n. changeons
n. changions
acfaangetiMS
peculiar.
v. changes
T. ehangiez
▼.cbangefttea
ils cbangent
ilsehangeaient
lis chai^raBl
OmCOKBCRIRB,
cfrcooicrlvaiit
Je ciroonscris
Je droonscri*
J. circiOMcrirli
4. to drcum'
ue iteRiRB
{vais
[jerOe
[/.e.
OmCOIfTBNIR,
cfrconvMiaiit
J. arooDfieDi
le dxcottf^
JedreoovlH
1 todretm-
dxcoDvemi,
SMTBinR
(Mk
IwmU
[/••
Digitized by V
Google
Avb wrxptaMOtua.
ia
m
CONOITIONAU
IjIPSaATIVS.
SrajuHCTiTa.
iMnantcT*
II y aara
i1 y aurait
fl y ait
fly eat
there laiaU
tkertwouUbe
Oiremaybt
jebatt&e
jo battrai
J6 battrals
je batte
tnbattras
ta battrais
bats
tubattes
tubattisses
11 battra
il battrait
q. batte
fl batte
ii battit
a Uattrons
n. battrions
Uttons
n. battions
n. battissions
T. battrcz
V. battriez
battez
V. battiez
L battront
i. battralent
q. baUent
i. battent
i. battissent
feboirai
taboiras
J. boiraU
je boive
jebusae
tu boirais
bois
tu boires
tu busses
Uboira
il boirait
q. bolYO
fl boive
flbdt
n. boiroDS
n. boirioDS
buTons
u. buvlons
n. bussions
T. boirez
V. boiriez
buvez
V. buviez
V. bussiez
L boiront
i. boiraient
q. boivent
i. boivent
ils bussont
Je bouilHrai
Je bouilHrai^
je bouifle
je bouillisse
tu bouilliras
tu bouillirais
bous
tu bouiiles
tu bouiliisset
U boaillira
il bouillirait
q. bouflle
fl bouUle
fl bouillit
n. bottillirons
n. bouiUirions
bouillons
n. boufllioDs
n. boniflissioiH
y. bouillirez
▼. bonilliriez
bouillez
▼. boniUiez
▼. bouiliissios
« bouilliront
i. bouiUiraient
q. boulllent
fl bouiilent
i. bouflllssent
je boorrftlerai
JebourrileralB
bourrMo
je bourrAle
je bourrelasse
fl braira
il bralrait
Us bralront
lis biairaient
Ubrninon
il bruiDerait
q. braise
q. braiufi
q.brahilt
Uwm drizzle
U vU drizzU
MUdrizzU
a may drizzU
UmgLdrizzk
Je cftcIiottArfti
tocACbette-
[raia
caehette
Je caehette
Je eacbfllMW
feeeindna
tn ceindraa
Je oeindrais
Je ceigne
Je cefgnisse
tu ceindrais
ceins
tu ceignes
tnceignisses
iloeindra
fl ceindrait
q. ceicine
fl ceigne
fl ceifliit
n. ceignissioQg
n. ceindroQS
n. ooindrions
ceignons
V. ceindrez
▼. ceindriez
ceignez
T. ceigniez
Y. ceignissies
lis ceindroDt
ils oeindraicnt
q. oeignent
Us oeignent
i. ceignissent
.Je€hancel]eFai
Je cbanoelle-
[rais
cbaacelle
je chanoeUe
jechancelAMt
Jechangonl
Je changerais
je change
je changeasss
Utt
change
tu changes
tnehangeasset
CaAVTJER
q. cliange
changeons
like
CHANTER
il cbangeit
changeassioDS
■
cliangez
q. cbaugent
▼ changeassieai
Je droonscri.
Je drconscriTO
Je cUtx>nscrl*
(nd
[mis
circonscris
[wim
!• AOQBViflQ-
Je oiiooiifioi^
Je drooiiff"
jadrnmlmm
fdrai
(dnis
droonvwiii
[MM
tt
Digitized
by Google
a«3
mdtoinjut, ranoma, nouui*
innw Tiv«.
Parti cirLKs.
IwracATivt.
iMPKRFKCT.
Ta^t. DvrxniTa
0(.ORK: 4. to
je clos
clftse
clos
til clos
^.'fcclivo
il clot
COLLKTUH, 1.
colletRDt
Je crJI&te
Je colletais
je coUctai
to collar
coIlct6. f. e.
4 49. (6)
see ACHKTER
C!3MBATTRE,4.
combattant
Je combats
Je combattais
Je comUtUt
toamdat
combattu, /. e
xee BATTRE
C01IMETTRE,4.
commettaut
Je commets
je commettais
Je oommis
ioammU
oommis, f. e.
comparaissant
Xe MBTTRB
CompabaItre,
Je comparais
Je comparais-
Jecomparmi
4. to appear
comparu
see PARAITRE
I'f'^
COMPLAIRE, 4.
oomplaisant
Je.eomplais
Je complaisais
Je complos
to kumor
complu
see PL A IRE
CoMPtENDBE,
comprenant
Je comprends
je comprenais
Je compris
4. t0 under-
compris,/ e.
see PRENDRE
stand
COMPROMET-
compromet-
Jecompromets
Jecompromet-
Je oompromji
TRE,4.toC0fll-
[tant
jeeHETTRE
[tais
promit
Cjnclcre, 4.
ooinpromi8,/.e
concluant
Je c6nc1n9
Je conclnais
Je conclns
to conclude
condn. /. e.
tu ooncltts
tu concluais
tn conclns
aox. avoir
il conclut
il concluait
il conclut
.im^ular.
n. concIuoDs
n. concluions
n. concldmes
V. conclaez
V. conclniez
V. conclutcfl
i. conclnent
i. concluatent
lis conclurent
Goncovrir, 2.
coDconrant
Je concoars
Je concourais
Je concourus
|0 cmcttr
concoura,/. e.
see coDRiR
CONDUIRB, 4
condnisant
Je condnis
Je conduisais
Je conduixis
to conduct
oon^nit, /. e.
tn cfyndais
tn conduisais
tu conduisis
aox. avoir
il conduit
il conduisait
il condnisit
irregular.
n. condnisons
n. conduisions
n.condu{sic)os
V. condnisez
V. conduisiez
V. oonduisit^
lis condnisent
i. conduisaient
i. conduisinnl
GONFIRB, 4. to
eonfisant
Je confis
Je conflsais
jo conBs
conflt^/e.
tu confis
tu conftsais
tu con5s
auz. avoir
il conflt
il confisait
il confit
irre^lar
n. conflsons
n. confisions
n. confimet
V. confidez
V. conttsiez
V. coDfites
i. conflsent
i. conflssicnt
ils conHrent
CONGBLER, 1.
congclant
Je cong&le
Je congelais
Je congelais
to conceal
SS^ant^'
§ 49, (6)
CONJOINDRB, 4
Jo coi\ioins
Je conjoignais
Jecoi\joigiiia
to conjoin
conjoint, f. o.
see CEINDRE
C«wnaItre, 4.
connaissant
Je connais
Je connaissais
jeconnns
to know
connu,/. e.
tu connais
tu connaissais
tn connns
aux. avoir
il connj^
il connaissait
U connu t
Irregular.
n. connaissons
n. connaissions
n. coonAmea
V. connaisscB
V. connaissiez
V. conniitiai
i. connaiRsent
i.connaissaient i . connurent
CONQUfRIR, 2.
oonqitArant
Je conqniers
Je (jonqu/rais
Je oooquia
(ffcrm^i^tfr
conquis. f. e.
see ACQu^RiR
OONSBNTIR, 2.
coiisentant
Je oonsens
1c consentaif
JecoiaeBtti
tQcmunU
consenti. f. e.
Digitized
by Google
Aim trniPiMovAL mtm. { n
$M
Je clonii
tu cloru
II clfira. &c.
Jo colldterai
J6 combettrai
Je ocmmettrai
le comparmi-
[trai
Je oomplairai
Jfeoompren-
[drai
Jeoompromet-
[tni
Je coDclurai
ta conclnru
n conchira
D. omiclurons
T. conclurex
lis oonclnront
Je coDcournii
Je condairai
tn conduiraa
U oondiiira
n. conduiroDS
T. oonduirez
Ua condniroiit
Je confirai
to conflraa
il confira
n. conflroDs
T. coDflrex
i. confirout
Je eoDg61erai
^e conjoindrai
«Je eoimaitrai
Ri coniiaitras
il connaitra
n. eonnaitrons
▼. connattroz
Hi connaitront
Je eouquerrai
|e eomentlral
ikmrnnowAU IiirK«*TiTB. Bowpvcmm. Xxnaiaer.
je cinrais
tu clomis
il clorait, etc.
jtt collaterals
Jeoombattrais
je commet-
ftrais
je comparai-
rtrais
je oomplairais
je compren-
[drais
jecompromet-
[traia
je conclnraiii
ta conclurais
il conclorait
n. ooncluriona
y. conclaiiea
concluraient
je concourrals
je coDdnirais
tu condnirais
il conduirait
n. condiiiriona
V. conduiriez
i condalraient
je conflrais
tu conflrais
il conflrait
n. ceofirions
V. confirioz
lis oonflraient
je cong6Icrais
je conjoin-
[drais
je connaitrais
ta connaitrais
il connaitrait
n connaitrions
v. connaitriez
i.oonnaitraient
'je oooquerrais
iecoDsenti-
(nii
coUftte
combats
commets
oomparais
complais
comprends
compromets
conclns
q. conclue
condaons
concluez
q. concluent
conconra
condais
q. condoise
condnisoDs
condaisez
q. condoisent
confls
q. confise
confisons
conflsez
q. confisent
coDgftle
conjoins
connais
q. connaisse
connaiesons
connaiietez
q. connaissent
conqnieni
je collate
je combatte
je commette
je compa-
[raisse
je complaise
je comprenne
jeooUetasM
JecombattiiM
jeoommisse
JecompanuM
je complosse
jeoompriflM
je oonpro-
[mette
je conclae
tu conclues
il conclue
n. concluions
▼ . conclttiez
ils concluent
je concoore
je conduise
ta condnisea
il condalse
n. conduisions
V. conduisiez
ils conduisent
je conflse
tn conflses
il confise
a conflsions
V. confisiez
I oonflsent
je congAle
je conjoi|;ne
je connaisse
tu connaisses
il connaisse
n.oonnai8sions
connaissiez
ils connairsent
je oonquiAre
mi«e
je oonclnaw
tu condnssea
11 concIAt
n. conclussiona
conchissiea
ils condussent
jeconcourusse
je conduisisso
tnconduisissea
il conduisift
oondnisissions
y.conduiflissiei
i.conduisissent
jeoonfisse
tu conflssea
il oonfit
conflssioni
oonflssiez
ilsconflssent
je congelaase
je coi\|o{gciiM
je oonnusse
ta comiassea
il connAt
n. oonnussioni
v. counussiea
lis connossent
jeccfiquisse
Jo 31
Digitized
by Google
lUPIHI'tlf ■•
TkKnetnJoa.
IimCATIVB.
Tamt Dr««ht&
CoifanuiBR,4.
const ntl«iit
Je coQstniis
JecoDBtniisBli
Jeeoortrslik
ioc$nsiruU
construit,/. e.
see CONDOIBB
oontenant
je oontiens
Jeeontenais
jecoBUM
tocBfUmin
oooteDa,/.e.
see TEKiB
CONTRAINDBB,
oontraignant
Je contrains
Jecontraigiials
Je cooCraigBii
A.U»cinutrmn
ooiitraint» /.e.
see CBINDRE
CONTBBOIRB, 4
Je coDtredii
Jecontredisais
Je oootredis
Ucanlradia
coDtradit»/.e.
ta contredis
Ukemmm
UkSBUtM
MX. avoir
il contredit
n.contrediaons
V. contredises
i. contredisent
COMTKEFAIRB,
oontrefkisant
Je controfUs
Je contrefki-
Jeoootrefla
^, toeowUer-
OONTBETBNIB,
oontrofUt,/. e.
see FAIRS
[sais
contrevenant
Je contreviens
Je contreve-
Je ooQtreviM
2.Ufeat^lnh
oontrevenUj/.e
see TENiR
]iiais
vtn€
ComrAiNCBB, 4
oonvainqiiant
JeoonvaincB
Je coBvain-
je oonvainqoil
toamvinet
convaincQ,/. e.
[qnais
GONTRNIB, 2.
ooQvenant
jeeonviein
Je eonvenais
Jeoonvloi
iosmt,JU,4^.
ooDvenii,/. 0.
seeTBNiR
COQUBTBR, 1.
Je coqadte
Je coqnetais
Jee«iaetBl
to coquet
CORBOMPBB, 4
ooqaet4
corrompant
see ACBBTBR
tfeeuliar,
Jeoorrompais
je cofronpit
toeamimt
Gorronipn,/. e.
see ROMPRB
COUDRB, 4. to
oousant
Je ootids
Jeconsais
Jeooosis
mo
OOUBO,/. 0.
tacouds
tn consaii
tu oonslB
aux. avoir
ilcood
a conssit
ilcouslt
irregular.
n. coiuons
n. oooslons
n. coosimea
V. cooses
V. consiev
r. eottsiteg
ils consent
ils consalent
ilseoQrireal
3or«m, 8. to
oouniit
Jeoonrs
Jeoonrais
Jeoonnis
run
oonrii
tuooars
tn courais
ta counis
aux. avoir
il court
il conrait
il coantt
irregular.
n. conroDfl
n. cotiriofis
V. coures
V, couries
V. oonrAtet
Ils courent
ils conralent
ilsooururent
Coirntm, 2. to
oonvrant
Jecouvre
Jecouvrais
jecouvro
cover
couvert,/. e.
cralgnant
see ouvRiR
Craindbx, 4.
Jecrains
JecraigDais
Jecralgnb
toffor
eraint, f. e.
see CBINDRE
Croibe, 4. to
croyint
Jeerois
Jecroyais
Je crus
ieUne
ere,/, e.
tuerois
tneroyais
ta enm
fox. avoir
ilcroit
il croyait
ileroi
irregnlar.
D. croyoQS
n.oriiaMi
V. croves
v.crAtea
lis croient
ils croyaient
llscreieftt
OboItrb, 4. to
crolnairt
Je croissals
JecrAa
grow
vt,* •.
tu crois
tueroissais
ta erila
anx. avoirs
Uorott
Ucroissait
ilcr&t
Mm
n.crol88ons
Q. croissions
n. rrftnw
faiegnlar. |
V. onnssei
V. eroisBiei
v.crAtea
>
DfcroiMit
i]a«i«ai6iil
OtorAMl
Digitized
by Google
rA&
i«
nrtnub
iMpniATirB.
0owacnw«
wntafBCT*
JtflOMtniimi
jcooBstniirais
coDstrnb
Jocowtrnbo
Jo conatmisb.
[so
JeeoBtiendrai
Jo contieii.
[drais
Jo ooDtrain-
oontiens
JOOOOtiODDO
Jo coQtiniM
JteoaMii.
Jo contraigna
JeooDtfainb-
[dral
[draifl
contraina
lao
JtooBtiedini
Jeoontredirais
JoooDHodba
JoooDtxodlM
liiMMU
Ukt oiaa
ooDtrodb
q. coatredbe
controdbona
coBtrodiMS
q.caitredbent
Jeoontraftmi
JooQiitrollmds
costrolUa
Jo oontrefluw
JeooBlNiii^
jt eootrevleD-
Jo eontrerlen-
jo oontroTbiK
jocontnrvllMi
[dral
[drab
oontrevloDf
[M
JsttHiTwiicru
JeooBvaincraifi
convaincs
Jo cooraiiiqiio
Jo oonraln-
[qubM
Je oooTieiidnu
JocoDvion-
fdrais
Jo eoquitorais
conyioos
ooquAte
OOITOIBpa
jo eoBTbmio
JoeonviittBo
JecoqnAterai
Joooquftte
Ja coquotasia
JeooiToiDpnd
JO oonooDprais
jocoiTonipbM
Jeeoudnd.
Joeovdrais
Jo 001180
JOOOUSiflBO
tacoQdras
tn ooudrais
coada
tu couBoa
tu coussisMa
tlcoudra
il eondrait
q. ooQso
ilcouae
ilconait
n. ooiidrons
n. coudrions
cotnoDS
D. cousiooa
n. oousiiisioiia
V. coudrex
V. coudrioB
comea
V. coQsiea
▼. cousissiea
Usooudront
i. condraicnt
q.OOUKBl
i. cousent
Jo coumi
Jocooirab
Jecouro
Jooouniaoo
tU COUTFM
ta eourrais
conn
tu courei
tucouniswa
llconrm
il connaU
q.^coure
il couro
il courOI
ikoourrons
n. coarrions
conroiis
n^oouriona
D. coumiBioni
T. eonrrex
Y. couniea
courea
▼. conrioa
y. conmssioa
Ibooorront
Us counniont
q. ooQueiit
ib courenl
JoconTriraia
conm
Jo COUTTO
Jocouyrbso
Jocnindrai
Joendodnlt
crainB
Jo craigDo
JocrafgDlna
jo croind
tu croiras .
Jocrofrab
Jo crob
Jocmsso
^!i croirab
crob
tu croico
tu crusaea
ilcroira
n croirait
q. crob
il croia
11 crflt
n. crairons
n. crofrions
croyoDS
a croyiona
n. cruwiona
▼. croiroB
V. crolries
croyea
V. croyioa
ibcroient
V. cruasiea
Useroiront
ib croiraicnt
q. croiont
ib cnunent
Jocroiirai
til croftRM
jecroltrab
Jo croboe
Jo CTtm»
tu croltrab
tncrobsea
tucrAsMO
fleroitra
il croitiait
q. crobw
ilcrobso
UcrAt
B. croltroDS
iLcrottrioDS
n.crol»ioiMi
n. croanoBa
rcnltrai
v.orofftrioi
crobM
T.crotasiea
t, orterfMi
Ibcniltml
ibcrattniwl
q. moiwimi
ibcrabMil
ibaHbM*
Digitized^y VjOOQ IC
nuttootiABi mnotiYBi raoouiB
Iiimmvi.
P4RTICD*.Sa.
IiiMCATira.
IHPBRPBOT.
Pmy. DBrnnra
CUCITXIA, t.te
caeilUol;
Jecaeille
>> MeillaiB
jecooillia
g4Uker
cueilUj: e.
ta cueilicB
ta cuclllais
tu cueiltis
2 cueille
UcueiUatl
U cueillift
4
n. eneillons
n. cueillions
n. cueilHmeB
v. cheilitis
V. cueilUeB
V. caeillitea
Us cueillent
ilB cueillaicnt
ilB caeiUircofc
Cui«R, 4. to
cuisani
Jecuis
Jecuisaia
JecnisU
OtUXf coohy ^c.
cult,/ e.
see CONDUIBB-
Mmk-mut, 4.
d<batlant
Jed6bat8
Jed6batt^
Jo d4battia
to debaU
d6batta,/.e.
jee BATTRB
MCACBKTSS,
dtoichotanft
Jo d6cachette
1. to MnsetU
d6cacheU,/e.
4 49, (4)
DicHoiB, 8. to
^
jo ddcliois
je ddchoyaiR
jedtehdB
docay
d6chu,/.6.
tu ddchois
tn d6choyais
tudcchuB
anx. avoir A
il d6choit
il d6choyait
il dichut
4tre
n. d<^chojODt
n. d^choyioos
n. dtehAmea
defoctlre
{BesckerOe)
V. dochoyex
V. d6choyicz
V. d«chAtet
ib dechoient
il8d6ch(»yaieDt
il8d6cliurent
IMEcouMiB, 4.
d^consant
je d^couds
je decottaais
jed^Gousis
to rip
dccoiixu,/. e.
Me CAUDRB
PicoUTRIR, 2.
d^couvraiit
Je dicouvre
je dteoQvraia
Jedteoavris
/<9 discover
d6couvert,/e.
see ouvRiR
MCEIRE, 4. (0
decrivant
Je dficris
jed6orivai8
jedterivii
</4:scri6e
dicrit,/. e.
see icRiRB
P<DIRB,4.(0
d6disant
je d6di8
Je d4diBaiB
jedddia
im^ay
d6dit,/.e.
SeeCONTRRDIBE
jXDUIRfi, 4. to
diduiMint
jo ddduin
je d6daisalB
JedMoiBit
iUducl
d6duit, /. «.
see coN'DuiRB
P^PAlLLIR, 2.
dcfoillant
il dafaille
JedifaOlaiB
jed6Adllis,
l4>faHJabU
d^failli
n. d6railloii8
etc.
etc
defective.
(BtsckmMe)
V. dcraillez
ih d^failluot
D£PAiRfi, 4. to
d6fa'Miit
jedifkis
je ddfidsaU
jod4fls
Hndo
dt^lU.t,/. e.
MX Pairs
It^UKLBR, 1. to
defiant
ildogao
il d^lait
ild^cla
Ikaw
d6gol<S, /. a.
ddjoignant
dcoint,/. e.
I)bjoi!«drb, 4.
Je dcjoins
jo dijoignaiB
je d^joignli
di^n
see CKiNDRB
IXmrntir, 2.
d6montant
Je d6niens
je dementais
je d6mentlB
tif telie
ddmenti./. e.
see RKNTIR
Mmkttrb, 4.
d6racttant
Je ddmuts
Je dtoettais
jo dtoia
tu difjifinl
d6mis,/. e.
see MKTTRB
DiPKINHRK, 4.
ddpeignant
je d6i)uin9
Je d6peignai8
jc ddpeigniB
l4t depict
d6pcint, /: e.
see irBINDRB
IXPI.AJRK, 4.
ddplaisant
jc d£plai8
jo d<Splaisais
je depluB
to dispUase
diphi./. e.
see Pi.AiRB
D£SAI*PRKN-
doMippreiiant
jo dciuip-
Je disappre-
jcddaaiipris
DRB, 4, to itn-
d6iappritt,/.c.
[prends
[iiaia
feora
see pRRxnaa
Pehrrtir, 2.
Je dcaseTS
je dessenralB
JodeoerviB
UdeartMtth
DiTBIIflttB, 4.
doBservi, /. e.
Me Bsavia
d6tdgiiaikt
JedMeiBB
je dateienato
Jed4tB|fidi
<# rflwrff
ditdBt,/.^
MrnanM
Digitized
by Google
.«» vnnuMOVAi tsus. § 6S
M7
FVT0E>
jc caetlleni
tu cuiMlleras
il cucillora
n. cueillerons
Y. cucillercK
ik caeilleroot
}e ciuriu
JedAbattrai
jeddctchet-
[terai
Je dteherrai
In d^clicrras
il d6cherra
n. d6cherron8
▼. d^cleirez
ilt dicherront
Je dicoudrai
Je cuelilerais
ta cixolllenifl
il caeillcrait
n. cueillerioDs
V. coeilleries
i. cuoillcraient
Je coiials
je dAbatiiais
Je dicachet^
[terais
Je d6cherrais
tu dicherrais
il dicherrait
n. d^chenioDS
V. diclierriex
i. d6chenraient
Je dicoudraU
Je d^oouTrirai jed^conTrlrais
Jodi6crirai
Jed£dirai
Jed6dairal
tee BescherdUf
DielionHaire
Nalianal,
Jed6ftiai
a d«gftlera
Je d^ifoindrai
Je d6meBtirai
Je dimetlrai
Je d^peindrai
Jo d^plalrai
J< d6aappren-
[drai
tedMservira!
(iditeialni
Je ddcriraiB
Jed6diraii
Je d6dalraia
Je d^feraf
il digdlerait
Je ddJoindralB
Jed^mentirais
Jo dimettrais
Je d^pondrais
Je d6plairais
je diaapprcn-
[drais
Jodeaervirals
Jed^toindnifl
Impcsativc*
cucille
q. cucille
caei lions
cneillez
q. cneillent
cnifl
d«baU
d6cachette
dichois
3. ddchoie
^choyons
d6chojez
q. d6cboient
d6ooads
d6conTTO
d«crii
d6dif
d6dnis
difiiis
q. d6g^le
d^oini
dimens
demets
dipeins
ddplais
ddsapprends
de886n
SvWKCTin. iMFIRfBCT.
jo cneille
tu cue! lies
il cneille
n. cneillions
y, cuoilliei
{. cneillent
Jecnise
Jo dfibatte
Je d^cachette
je d6choie
tn d^clioies
il ddchoie
n. d£cho3ions
V. dtelioyiea
ils ddcboient
Jed6conse
Je dAcouTre
Je dtorlTO
Je dddise
Jed6dnise
Jed«fasM
nd6gdle
Je dijoigne
Je d£mente
Je ddmelte
je d£pcigne
Je d^plaiso
je disappren-
[ne
Je desserre
JedMdcna
Je cneillisse
tn cueillisses
11 cneillit
n. cneilllss4oDi
y, cuellliwiei
ilscueillissent
Jocnisisse
Je d^battlsM
JedAcacho-
[tassa
Je d^chnsse
tu ddchnsses
ild6chikft
n. dSchussioni
V. dddinsslei
ih ddchnssent
Jedteonsissa
JedAcouTriMt
Jed6criTifl8d
JedMiflse
Je dddnisisM
Jed^toe
Ud^Ut
Je d^joignlwt
Jed^menUsie
Je d6mis80
Je dipcignisaa
Je d6plnsse
Jed6sH>pri886
Je
Digitized
by Google
^Vd
OSfSORTBi PSOOUiJI
InnK-^mL
FlRTICmBI.
IxmCATITB.
iMrsBrBCT.
PATf Dsn*m
PiTRNIR, 2 io
d6texumt
Je d«tieiM
Je ddtenais
Jeddtias
detain
ddtenu,/, e.
me TKNiR
Dirsumc, 4
d^tniisant
Jed6trai8
Jeddtrolaab
Je detroIalB
io destroy
d*truit,/. 0.
set CONDVIRS
l^eVRNIB, 2. to
derenant
Je devlens
Je derenais
Jedevloi
hecome
darenu,/ e.
jee TENiR
UvtritL, 1 to
d«TAtant
Je ddvAta
Je ddvAtaii
Jed6v4til
<^tta^ ,
d*TAtu,/.e.
see yferiR
^ I>iBc,4.to
disant
Jedis
Je disais
jedlf
say
dlt,/.«.
tudis
ta disais
tadis
anx.a70iir
11 dit
il disait
ildlt
Irregakr.
n. dlsona
n. disiou
n. dimes
V. ditcB
V. disiez
v.ditea
ils disent
ils diiiaient
ils dirent
IhscotrBTR, 2.
diBcourant
je diacours
Je discomais
JedisconnM
to discourse
discoum
see couRiR
J>i8Para!trs,
disparaissant
Je dis]>araui
Je disparais-
Jedlspams
4. to disappear
disparu, / e.
set connaItre
[saiB
DlSSOUDRB, 4.
dissolvant
Je dissoiw
Je dissolvais
to dissolve
dissons, /. te.
set ABSOUDRB
IhSTRAlRE, 4.
distrayant
distrait, /. e.
Je distrais
Je dlstrayais
to divert
set TRAIRB
' - DORMXR, 2. to
dormant
Jo dors
Je dormais
Je dormis
sleep
dormi
ta dors
ta dormais
tu dormia
VOL RTOlr
il dort
il dorroait
il dormit
irregular.
n. dormoDB
n. dormions
D. dormimea
V. donnez
V. dormisR
V. dormttes
ilsdorment
ils dormaient
ils dormireDl
ficHOIK, 8. to
ech6ant
il «choit
il debut
/a// due
6chu,/.e.
or W debet
ficLORB, 4. to
il dclot
A«toA
6cl08
ficONDUIRB, 4.
6condulsant
J'icondnis
J^dcondnisato
Jdoondoiab
tore/use
6o<mdnit,/.e.
set CONDUIRR
^ ficRIRE, 4. to
6criTant
j'^cria
J-6cnva1t
j'dcrivis
imto
dcrit,/.©.
ta dcris
tn 6crivai8
tu dcrivis
anx. avoir
il 6crit
il dcrivait
il dcrivit
Irregular.
n. ftcrirons
n. dcrivions
n. dcrivlmei
v. derives
V. dcriviea
V. dcrlrlteR
ils ocrlvent
ils 6crivaient
ils dcrivirent
Slirb, 4. to
^lisanl
Jdlis
J'dlisais
J'Ana
^efcrf
«lu,/. e.
ste LIRB
SMETTSS,4.to
dmettant
J'dmeto
J'dmcttais
J'dmii
emit
«mis, f, e.
see MBTTRB
Xmmsnrr, l.to
emmenant
J'emmdno
J'emmenals
J'tmuneBRl
toile awaif
emmen6,/. e.
J^^roouds
see MBNBR
fiuoUDRE, 4.
imoulant
J'dmoulais
J'dmoulQS
tos*arpe»
dmoulu, /. e.
set MOUDRB
Smoctotr, 8.
dmouTant
J'toeos
J'dmoavaifl
J'dmua
ioexale,^.
toll, / e.
set MOUVOIR
SUPLOTBR, 1.
employant
J'emploie
J'employala
j'omployitf
ioempUnf
oinpTBi^iumi
/eM.
see APPUTER
"fPRBlNDBB,
J'empreigMli
J%Bpn%ili
\Uimgprimi
empreint,/.6.
MfCBIVDBB
Digitized
by Google
|M
$9i
Jed6Ueiidrmi
Je d6truiimi
Je deTiendni
JedivdtUiii
Jedini
tadiras
ndim ,
D. dirons
T. dires
fls diroDt
Jedisoournd
Je disimimltni Je dispant
[trais
Jediasondnd * " "• *
Jedistrairai
Je donnirai
tu dorroiraa
Udormin
n. dormrrons
V. doftnires
OoniNTIO^Al..
je ddtiendrais
Jed^trnirais
Je devtendnds
je d^vAtirab
je dirais
ta dirais
il dirait
_. dirions
y. diries
ilfl. diraient
je diaooumiii
iMrmtLATWU,
je dinondrais
je distrairais
je dormlrais
tu dormiraia
il donnirait
n. dormirions
y. dormiriez
lis dormiront ils donniraient
St ^.u u ^chermit
flftcheira
ilielora
J'^eondttiimi
fAcrirai
tu dcriras
il 6crira
n. 6criroDft
T. 6crirez
Qs ficriront
J'^lirai
J'«mcttrai
J'emmftiierai
j'toondrai
J'emploleial
ffmrnindral
d6tieii8
dAtrnis
devteDa
d^vAta
dia
q.diae
diaoiw
dites
q. dlMDt
discoim
diapaittia
dlaaons
difltraia
dors
qa'il donna
dormooa
dormes
q. domMnt
U telorait
j*6ooDdiilralB
j'4crirai8
tn 6crirai8
ilterirait
n.'6cririoii8
V. 6cririess
lis teriraient
j*61irais
j'6mettrai8
j'emmftnerais
j'^mondrais
j*4moaynd8
J'emploiemlB
J'aispreinditla
icondiibi
Aoria
q. icriye
6cri70ii8
q. 6cri¥eiit
6Ii8
£meto
emm^ne
dmonda
Amelia
SuBiVNcmra. Inrmmrmar,
je d6tieime
jed6tni]8e
je devieime
jed6Tftta
jediae
tu diaes
ildiae
n. diaiona
▼. di«l«8
ila disent
jedlBOOvre
Jedlapandaae
JediaM^ve
je diatraie
Je dorme
tu dormea
ildoime
n. dorraiovM
▼. doiviieK
ila dorment
q. 6clo8e
j'^conduiee
j'icriw
tn^crivea
il 6criYe
n. 6criviona
y. 6criyiea
ils ^crivent
j^dliae
j'teetta
j'emm^ne
j*6moiile
j'6meaytt
Jed6tiiiM6
jeditniiaiflae
Je devinaae
JedATAtisaa
Jedisae
tadissca
il dft
n. disdons
V. dissiea
lis dissent
Je diaoouniaaa
jediapaniaaa
je dorniiaaa
tu dormissea
Udormtt
n. dormissioM
▼. domisslea
ils donntssent
J'teondvisiaM
j'icriytsae
tu icriyisaea
il 6crivit
a teriyissioM
y. ^criyissies
ila ^criyisaent
J'61iiase
16«
Digitized
by Google
$n
DtElOtrLABi DSnOttfB} PSOOUAB
IiiniiinirB. pASTicirLBs.
Encix>»b, 4. to
ewclote
Encoukie, 2.
to incur
Endormir, 2.
to i-uU asleep
Enduirb, 4. to
plaster
Bnpreindrb,
4. to infringe
Bnpuir, (s') 2.
' to run away
Enjoindre, 4.
to enjoin
Ennuycr, (s')
1. uf be weary
EftaciRiR, (s')
2. to viquire
Entremkttre
(8')4.toii»-
terjfose
Entrrpren-
DRB, 4. to un-
dertake
Entretbwir,
2. to entertain
Emtrkvoir, 8
to elimpse at
EkVoter, 1. to
anx. avoir
irregular.
ftpkBNDRB,(t')
4. to be smU-
ten
SsMArBR, 1. to
try
fiTBiWDRB, 4.
to extinguish
Etincrlbr, 1.
to sparkle
EriauBTER, 1.
tolabel
£trb, a. to be
fiTRBINDRBi 4.
to press
EXCLCRB, i. /i<
exdude
BVTBAItB, 4.
^extraa
cnclos, /. e.
enooaimnt
encouru, /. o.
endormant
endormi. /. e.
endnisant
cDdait,/. e.
enfVeignant
enfreint, /. e.
s'enAiyant
enfiii. /. e.
enjoignani
enjohit,/. e.
B'eoDuyant
enimyfi,/. e.
s'enquirant
enquU, /. e.
s'oDtremettant
entremis,/. e.
entreprenant
entrepris, /. e.
entretenant
eQtretenu,/.e.
cntrevojant
entrevu, /. e.
envoyant
enToy*,/. e.
8*£prenant
6pri8,/. e.
essayant
e8say6, /. e.
6teignant
6teint,/.e.
6tincelant
6tincel6,/. e.
6tiqactant
6tiqaetd,/.e.
seemotlel
6tre{giiant
6treint,/. e.
exclnant
ezcla, excltiM
extrayant
•xtralt,/ e.
Imdicativb.
J'encloB
j'encoars
see couRiE
j'endors
see DORMIE
J'enduia
see coNDures
J'enfVeins
see CEINDRB
Je m'cnlVils
see puiR
J'enjoins
see CRINDEB
Je m'ennuio
500 APPUYRR
J. rn'onqniers
see Acau:iRiR
J. m'eDtremets
see METTRB
j'entreprends
see PEENDEK
j'entretieiis
see TENtR.
J'cntreTois
seeyoim
j'envoie
tu envoiea
il cnvoie
h. envoyons
V. envoyez
ils enYoient
Je m'6prend8
see PRENDRE
J'essaie
see APPOTER
J'6tein8
see CRINDRB
J'dtiQcello
see APPELEE
J'6tiqudte
see ACHETBR
4 47, (6)
J^treins
see CRINDBE
J'exclns
see CONCLUBB
J*extrai8
set TEAIEB
j'e
j'endorailt
j'e
iHrBRricr. Pact. Danjara.
J'eDCOuraia
J'endormaii
J'endnisaia
J'enfineiciiiaiB
J. m*enfayab
J'enjoignais
Je m'ennayais
« 49. (2)
J. m*eiiqu6rai8
Je m'entre-
[mettais
J*CDtreprexiaia
j^entretenais
J'entreToyais
J'enToyab
tu envoyais
il envoyait
a envoyioDs
V. envoyies
ils envoyaient
Je m'6preiiai8
J^eflsayais
J 49. (2)
j6teigQai9
J'dtincelle
^ 49 (4)
J 6t]quet«is
4 49, (6)
j'6trcignai8
J'excluais
J*extrayais
J'eafreiguiB
Je in'enftdi
j'cDjoigida
Je m*eiiimyal
Je in'enqniB
J. Di'eDtreiiili
J'entreprli
J'eDtretiiiB
J'entreTto
J'enToyat
tu envoyas
il coToya
n. envoylmet
V. euToyfttM
ils envoy^rent
Je m'6priB
j'e«Mtyal
J*6toi|;DiB
J*6UnoeUd
J*4tiqnetit
J*4ti!eigBlf
J'exelui
Digitized
by Google
Am wnnataaAL tsrbs. § 93
«n
FUTOES
J'eocloTftl
J'encoarrai
J'cDdormirai
fendulrai '
J*enfrcindrai
Je m'eDfuirai
J'onjoindiiu
Jem'eDDtticrai
Jemcnquerrai
J« m'entre-
[mettrai
J'entrepreii-
[drai
J'entretiendrei
J'entre^errai
J'enveirai
tn envcrras
U enrem
D. eoverroni
V. enverres
Us enverront
Je m'foreii-
[dral
I'esttienii
J'6teindrai
J*6tiDceUerai
J*6Uqoiterai
fMroiDdrai
fexduimi
J*«ztnind
Coin»moiiAL. Ihpreativi
J'enclorais
J'enooQrFab
J'endormirah
J'endairaia
J'eQfreindrais
jo m^enfuirais
j*cnJoindrai8
je m'ennuie-
[rais
je m'enqiier-
[rais
je m'entre-
[mettraia
j*entrepren-
[dnis
j'entreUen-
[drais
j'entreTerrais
j^enyerrais
tu enyerrais
il enverrait
n. enverrions
V. enyerriez
Us envcrraient
jo m'ipren-
[drais
J^easaieraifl
J'6teindrai8
j'itincellerais
J'itiqaftterais
J*6treiDdraSs
J'exdiuais
J'extniimii
I
enconra
endon
endnis
enfbeins
cnfala-toi
enjoiDS
ennuie-tol
enqnien-toi
entremets-toi
entreprends
entietiena
entreToia
enroie
q. enroie
enyoyons
enyoyez
q. enyoieiit
tprends-toi
(teios
6ttDGeUe
6tiqQdte
6treiiis
ezdna
ntnif
BoBJovcnya.
J'encoure
j*endonne
J'endniae
J'enfVeigpQe
je m'enftiie
j'eijoigne
je m'ennnie
je m'enquiAre
je m*entre-
[mette
j'entrepreime
j'entreUeime
j'cntreyoie
j'enyoie
tu enyoiet
il enyoie
n. enyoyioos
y. enyoyiez
ito enyoient
jo m'iprenne
j'essaie
j'6teigne
j'itiDceUe
j'etiqu&te
J*«trei«:ne
j'exdiM
j'estnto
inraanrcT,
J'endonntee
J'oDdulaiMe
J'eniVe^niMO
je m'eniViiflae
j'e^JoigiiiMd
je m'ennnyas-
je m'enqnttM
je m'entre-
[miaM
j'entrepriiie
J'entretinflM
j'entreylaBo
j'enyoyane
ta enyoyanea
il cnyoyU
nenyoyawiona
y. enyoyan^iei
ilseiiToyaasiiit
Je m'ipriaae
J'oflsayaase
j*6teigiiine
j'6tliicelane
J'«
Digitized
by Google
m
IfinxRiTa.
InncATtvs.
iMpaKFacT.
PAVf Damma
Faiiiir, 2. Ut
ikfllisaaat
J6 Iklllis
Je fkilllMlB
Jefldnii
fail
failli
%ovir€gMUar
set FiNiB, % 60
(New form)
lOldforro,
faiUant
Jefkns
Jefaillais
Je fklllla
fltill UBbd\
faiUi
tufanx
tu faiUais
tu fkfllls
Irregular.
(AMdhm)
il faut
a faillait
U fkiUit
n. fklUons
n. fitillioiiB
n. IkilHinea
T. faillei
T. faillies
V. fkilUtea
il fiiillent
Us fltiUaleiit
ilafklllireM
- — fkm,4utoiio.
fkisant
je&is
Je fliiftain
Jefis
to miki
fait,/.«.
tufals
tufliisaig
tufis
aus. avotr
il fait
il faisait
Ufit
irregular.
n. fkisoDS
IL fkisiona
iLfimet
T. faites
T. faiaiex
▼. ntea
lis font
ila fu'isaient
ilafiienl
... FiLLom, 8, to
flillant^
ilfkut
il fallait
UfkUat
htneassary
fkllu
anlpersonal
FB19tDR£,4. to
feignant
je ft;iiifl
Je feignalfl
Jel^lgnlf
feign
FiCELBB, 1. to
feint, / 0.
flcelant
set CRINDRB
Je ficelle
Je flcelala
JefloeUi
cord
flcel*,/. e.
see APPBLBB
4 49. (4)
FftiEB, 4. to
Je fris
fry
Mt,/.e.
tufHs
defectire
ilfHt,
..Fmm,2.l#
fbyant
jeAiii
Je niyals
Jeftili
y^ Jkt
ftU
tafUls
tu AiyaiB
tu Hiia
irAiit
il ftiyait
Uftiit
ii.fayoii8
n. fuyioDS
iLfulmct
V. Aiyes
V. Aiyiez
y. fultea
lis Aiient
lis ftiyaient
ilsftiireiii
Oblkii, 1. to
gelaot
Ugild
Ugelait
Ugela
ff0tS9, Ulip.
ArfiB, 2. to ^
^^
Jeglsais
tfeftctiTa
tu gisais
il gisait
ilgit
n.gi8on8,
n. gisioDS
T. gtsez
V. gisiez
ilsgisent
ila glsaient
Grabbbtkb, 1.
grasseyant
JegrasBeie
Je grawcyala
JegtaMeyai
to^tv
grassey*
we APPinrsB
§ 49, (2)
OuiLSB, 1. to
gr«lant
Ugt^le
Ugr61ait
ilgrtla
Aot/. UDip.
gr616
GitisiLLEB. 1.
gr6si11ant
11 grfeQIe
il gt^sillait
llgrftsfflft '
to s^Mf. unip.
^H*iB,2.to
haissant
Je hais
Je hafssaii
Jehals
---^ Aflto
hai, /: c.
tnhais
tu haissais
tnbidB
anx. avoir
il bait
il halssait
il bait
irrogclar
n. haissons
n. haissions
n. haimea
V. ha'iasez
y. hafasiez
y. haites
1. haissent
ils haiasaient
ilBhaiiviit
IUbosleb, 1.
harcelant
Je haro61e
JeharoelaiB
>bnedtth
totorMMf
haroeU./.a.
% 49. (5)
/.
Digitized
by Google
I«
ttl
Wwnmm,
OMMTIMAfc.
laraaATrra.
SOMUMOTITB.
tersaracv.
JeftUUni
Jo foiUirais
fiiillia
JefkiUlsse
JefidlUsie
Jefaadni
Je fkndrais
Jelkflle
JeikOlisM
tn (kiidras
ta faiidrais
etc.
etc.
11 fliadn
il faudmit
n. fAudrons
n. flindriong
▼. ikttdrei
T. fandriea
ill fiiudront
lis faudraient
Jefend
jeferato
Jeftsse
JefisM
toferas
tu feraU
fkh
tufassoa
tuflssea
llfera
il ferait
q.ftiM
Ufhsse
ilflt
IL ferons
n. feriona
fliisons
n.fks8i<m8
u. fissions
▼. feraa
T. feriex
fldtea
V. ftssiez
y.fissiei
Os feroQt
ila feraient
q. faasenl
ilsfkasent
ils Assent
ilfkadra
Ulkudrait
q. fldUe
q.fidlle
q.iUlM
Jefeindni
Je IbiDdiai
feins
fioeUe
Jefei^
Jefeigdisa
Je floelleni
Je ficelkraifl
Jeiicelle
JeficelasM
Jefrirai
JofHraia
tafHru
tu frirais
fVis
UlVirm^^to.
il ft-iralt, te.
Je Aiirai
je Aitrais
Jeniie
Jefbisse
tu Axlras
tu fuinifi « -
Alls
tnfhies
tu fhisset
ilAdra
il niirait
c|. fbie
niyons
ilftiie
ilfult
itAiirons
n. fuirioDB
n. fbyioDS
n.ftiissloM
T. fnifes
T. ftiiriea
Ibyei
▼. fhyiea
y.Aiissies
UsfUiroBl
il8 fttiraieat
q.fliieBi
Us Aiient
ils fbissent
flgftlm
ilsAleraii
qu'U g41a
qu'Ugile
q.feUt
Jepwwiend
Jegraiaeieraia
grasaal*
Jegrassela
JegraMQjrasw
Ogi^len
U grtleraii
q.grUa
qu'U grtle
qu'U fTilAt
Ilfr6tille]m
il grAsiUerait
q. 8r6siUe
q. grCsille
q. grCsilUft
Jehairai
tu halraa
Je hairais
Jebalsae
Jehalsso
tu hairais
hais
tu haisses
tu haisses
11 Iraira
il hairait
q. haiflse
Uhusse
U bait
n. bairoDs
n. halrions
hafsaons
L. haimions
a baissiona
T. hurea
V. haii-iez
haisses
v. haissiea
V. haissiea
flahairoQt
ils hairaient
q.baissenfc
ils haissent
Ils haissent
ithtzoUeni
Je haroftlerais
bareUa
JehtfcUa
Jeh«i«te»
Digitized
by Google
«n
UXOULAB| PlOmnVfEj PS0UU4B
tofimiivB.
PARTtCtrLBt.
Inoicatitb.
iHrBRrBCT.
Past. DcviRnv
Imforteb, 1.
importaot
il importe
il importait
il import*
to vuUter.
QDipereonal.
Inouirb, 4. io
imports
U mailers
induisant
J'induis
j'induisala
Jlndoina
indvM
induit./e.
see coNoaiBE
Inbcrire, 4. to
insert vant
J'in9cris
JMnscrirais
JlnscriTlf
inscribe
inscrit./. ©.
see ^RiRB
^ Instruire, 4.
instruisant
j'instruis
J'instmiaais
Jlnstmisli
to inslruct
instruit,/. e.
see CONDUIRE
Intkroirb. 4.
interdisant
JMnterdis
j'interdisais
J'int^rdis
to iTUerdUt
intcrdit,/. e.
5AfC0NTRKDIB£
Interromprb,
intcrrompant
J'interroraps
j'interrompab
j'interrompii
4. to interriLpt interrompu /le
see ROMPRB
lKrTKRVKNiR,2. intcrvenaot
j'iDtervieos
j'intenrenais
j'intervlna
to inUrvene intervenu./. e.
see TRNiR
Introdoirb, 4. introduisant
j'introduia
j'lDtrodnisais
J'introduirti
to iiUroditce
introduit, /. e.
see CONDUIRE
Jetkr, 1. to
jetaiit
jejette
je petals
Jejetai
thrtno
jet*,/.e.
tu jettea
tu jetais
tujetaa
aus. avoir
iljette
iljetait
iljcta
peculiar.
\ 49, (4.)
n. JotoDs
V. jetez
n. jettons
V. jetiez
n. jetlmei
v.jeUtes
ilsjettent
its jetaient
ils Jetdrent
-— JOINDHE, 4. to
Joignant
joint. /.e.
je joins
jojolgnais
jejolgui.
Join
'-Lire, 4.(0
see CEINDRE
luant^
jeliE
je lisais
jelna
fvoii
lu, /. e.
tulis
tulisaia
tu lus
aux. ayoir
illit
il llsait
illut
irregular.
nous lisons
n. lisions
n. Idmea
vous lisez
V. liaiez
V. latet
ils lisent
ils lisaient
ilslurent
Lntmc, 4. to
luisant
Jeluia
je Inifwifl
thin€
lui
see CONDUIRE
MAINTENim, 2.
maiatenant
Je maintiena
je maintenais
Je ffi>^f"t1'*ff
to maintain
maintenu,/. e.
see TENiR
Malpaire, 4.
malfkisaot
seldom
used except
in the
io do wrong
niainiit,/.e.
Macdire, 4. to
maudiasant
je mandis
je maudissais
Je mandis
curse
maudit,/. e.
tn maudifl
tu maudissais
likemwM
aux. avoir
11 maudit
il maudissait
n. maudissoDs
V. maudissez
ila maudlsaent
n. maudissions
V. maudissiez
i.maudissaient
MicONNAlTRE,
miconnaissant
je m6coDnais
je m^connais-
je m^comwi
4. to disown
m^connu, /. e.
see connaItre
[sais
M<DIRB. 4. to
mSdisaut
je ni6dis
je pi4disais
jem«dla
5^9t<tor
midit
JCffCONTREDIRE
^
MiPAiBE, 4. io
mifaisaot
je m6faia
jenk4(kisai8
jem^aa
tf ENER, f. to
miOiit
500 FAIRS
menant
jemtoe
Jemenaii
Jeme&al
kad^takt
men6,/. e.
ICehtib, 1. to
mentiuit
jemeBi
Je mentaia
Je mentis
ito
menti
JMBBMtm
Digitized
by Google
f e9
875
PirruEB
U importera
J'indnirai
J'iiucrirai
J'instmirai
J*interdirai
yinterromprai
J'taterviendFai
j'introdairai
Jejettera!
tu Jetteraa
UJettera
n. JotteroDS
Y. jetterez
ib Jctteront
jc jolndrai
Jelirai
tu liras
illira
n. lirons
Y. lirez
ils liront
Je luirai
Je maintieQ-
[dral
ien.%es
Jemandirai
like DiR£
Je m^connaS-
[trai
Jem^diiai
Jemftferai
Jemtoerai
JaaetiUi«i
CoMOiTior %u
il importerait
J'indairais
J'inacrirais
J'iostnilraiB
Jlnterdirais
j*interrom-
(prala
j^intervien-
[drate
J'introduirais
jejettemifl
tu Jetterais
il jtfttcrait
n. JetlcrioDS
V. Jettericz
Us jetteraicnt
y\ Joindraia
Jelirals
tu lirais
il Hrait
n. lirions
V. liriez
il8 Hraient
Je luirais
Je malntien-
[dralfl
given
Je mandirais
Uke DIRK
Je mtconnal-
[traia
Je midiraiji
je mitbiais
Je minerali
)) mentinli
Impkrativb.
q. importe
indob
ioBcrU
instniis
interdia
interrompt
intenrieos
introdnis
Jette
3. Jette
etons
Jetea
q. Jettent
Joiiu
lis
q. lise
lisoDs
lisez
q. lisont
maintiens
here
maudis
q. maudiue
maudisflODS
maudisaez
q. maudiasent
m6comiais
m^dis
m^fids
BUUUIICTIVB.
q. importe
J'lDduiie
J'ioflcrlre
J'instniiso
j'intcrdise
j'interrompe
J'iDtexrienne
J'introdoiae
je Jette
tu jettes
il jette
n. ietions
V. jetiez
lis Jettent
JeJoigue
Jelise
tu liset
illise
n. lisions
V. lisiez
ils liscnt
Je Inise
Je maintieime
Je niaudisse
tu maudifises
il maudisse
n. maudissions
y. maudissiez
ila inaudiBii^t
jem^coDDaissc
Je mediae
Jem^fhsse
Jemine
IiirBBrBeT*
q. importit
J'inacxiTJMe
J'iostniisiflae
J'ioterdisM
J'lnterromp-
[isae
J'interviuaao
j'introduiaiaaa
jejeta
tujcta
iljettt
n. Jetaaaiona
V. jetaaaiez
ilajetasficnt
Jejoigniaao
Je luaae
tu luaaca
il lilt
n. luaaiont
r. luaaiez
Ualnaaenft
Je maudiaae
like Diafi
Je mSconmiifi
Jem6diaaea
Jemtflaae
jei
Digitized
by Google
tlh
PlRTICffLBt.
ImMCATIYB.
iHnRracr.
Pait iMviam
IUfiicndic,4.
se m4prenant
J.m. m4pr6ndi
J. me m4pre-
Jemoiii4pris
(le) lo mis-
iii«|iria,y.e.
9t€ PEENDEK
[naU
take, ref
MsrriiB, 4. to
mettant
Jemets
Je metUis
Jemis
put
mis,/, e.
tu mets
tu metUis
tu mis
aoz. AToir
11 met
11 metUit
Umil
Irregular.
n. metUms
u. mettions
n. mioMa
V. mettea
T. mettles
V. mites
Us mettent
lis mettaient
Us mirenft
MOUDU, 4. t9
moulant
Je mouda
Je moulais
Je moulns
grind
moulUi/. e.
tu mouds
tu moulais
tu moulus
tax. aToIr
Umoud
11 moulait
U mouluft
irrepUar.
n. mouIoDS
n. moulions
n. moulAmes
▼. moulea
V. moulles
V. moulCites
lis moulent.
lis moulalent
Us moulnrenl
MouBia,2.to
momrant
Jemeurs
Je mourais
du
mort,/. e.
tu meurs
tu mourais
tu mourus
max. 6tre
il meurt
U mourait
U mourut
Irregnlar.
n. mourons
D. mourioDs
n. mouri^mea
T. mourei
T. mouriez
V. monriites
ik meurent
Us mouraient
Us moururest
MOUTOIE, 8. to
mouTmBi
Jemeus
Je mouvais
Je mus
muoe
mu./. e.
tumeus
tu mouvaia
tu mus
aux. aToir
11 meut
11 monvait
Umut
irregular.
n. mourons
n. mouvions
n. mAmei
T. mouvez
V. mouviez
V. m4tes
Us meuveni
lis mouvaient
Usmurenft
MouTOia, (le)
lemoaTam
Je |ne meus
J. me mouvais
Je me mus
8. tomffve.
mu,/. «,
9et IfOUTOIA
reflecUve.
KAiTRE.4.(p
naiasant
jeuals
Je nalssala
Je oaquls
AfAom
n«,/e.
tunais
tu nalssais
tunaquis
«uz.4tr«
Unait
U naiaeait
Unaquit
irregular.
aiiaissoni
n. oalseions
D. muiuimes
T. naisses
▼. naiasiez
▼. uaquites
Us naisseut
Us naissaient
Us naqnlreai
NiOLfORE, 1.
Digligeant
jen4glige
JeD4gligeais
JeudgUgOftf
toneglea
Neioer, 1. to
»/-^
% 49, (1.)
ilncige
Uneigeait
Uuelgea
tnow. unip.
neig4
KlTEUEl, 1. to
nivelaut
Je nivelle
JeniveUis
Jeniyelal
Uvd
ni^I4./. a.
nnisant
4 49, (4)
NCIRB, 4. to
je nuis
Je nulsala
JenniBia
in)ur€
nui
see CONDUIES
Obtenir, 2. to
obtenant
J*obtiens
J'obtcnais
J'obtins
obtain
obtenu,/. e.
see TENiR
Opfrib, 2. t0
ofifVant
j'oflfVe
J'offials
j'oiBris
offer
offert,/. e.
see ouTRiR
OiNDRI, i. to
oignimt
J'oins
J'olgnais
j'olgida
anoint
ofnt
Xe CEINDRC
0Msma,4
omett«ul
J'ometo
J'onaUalf
J'oniif
l#mml
oinii,/a.
SMMETnUI
Cull, 4. lb
t'onla
fiatft
iMT. die
«tf,/*.
1
Digitized
by Google
rA&
l«
•W
iemeoiApreii-
(dwi
Jomettrttt
tu wettrM
11 metira
. mettroos
. mettrez
Qfl mettrooi
Je moudral
in mondrM
il moudra
n. mondront
Y. moudres
ill mondroDft
Je mournri
tu mounras
il mourra
n. moiifroas
V. mourrez
Us raourront
Je xnoiiTrai
tu monvras
11 roouvra
n. mouvrons
V. mouTrez
lis mouTront
Je me monvrai
Je naltiai
-tu ualtras
II naltra
n. nattrons
▼. uaitrex
Ds naitront
Je D^Iigeiai
11 nelgera
Je nlTellerai
Jenulrai
fobtiendral
j'oflHrai
f otndral ^
JHmettnl
Coir»moii*ii. IiinKATnrB. Boaiviicnrv.
je mo m6preih
[drals
Je nettrali
tu uettraia
il mettrait
u. mettrioBfl
V. meltriei
lis mettralent
Je moudrais
tu moudrais
il mondrait
n. moudiioiis
T. moudriez
ils moudralent
Je mourrais
tu mourrais
il mourrait
n. mourrlonS
V. mourriez
ils mourraient
Je mouvrais
tu mouyrais
11 mouyrait
n. mouvrions
T. mouvriez
Ils mouTraient
Je me mouv-
[rais
Je naltrais
tu naltrais
il nattrait
n. naf trions
T. naltrlez
lis naitraient
jo n^ligerais
il neigerait
Je nlvellcraii
Jennitais
J'obUendraUi
J'oflHrab
J'oindrais .
J'omatkaia
m6prends-tol
mets
q. raetto
mettons
mettez
q. mettCBt
monds
qu'il moole
moulons
moulez
q. mouleut
meurs
q. menre
mourons
mourez
q. menrent
meus
q. mewe
mouvons
mouyez
q. meuTent
mewhtoi
nals
q. naisse
naissez
q. naisseni
neglige
q.neige
nlyeHa
nnis
obtient
offre
aim
J.memipreii-
[ne
je mette
tu mettes
il mette
n. mettlow
V. mettiez
ils mettent
je moule
tu moulet
il moule
n. moulioDS
▼. mouliez
ils moulent
je meure
tumeures
il menre
n. mourions
V. mouriez
ils menrent
Je meuve
tu meuyes
il meure
mouvi<His
V. mouviez
ils menrent
je me meure
je naisse
tu naisses
il naisse
n. naissions
y. naissiez
ils nais«ent
je D^gUge
qn*il neige
Jo nivelle
JenidM
J'obtiemw
J*olfi«
J'oigno
limarsoT*
Jemem^pri*.
Jemissa
tu misses
il mlt
D. missfeiv
y. missies
Usmfssenl
je monluss*
tu moulnsset
11 moulet
D. monlnssiona
y. mouluBsieg
lis moulussent
je nionmsse
tu monrusses
il monrdt
n. monmssions
y. monrussiez
lis monmsseDt
Je musse
turouHsea
ilmtit
n. mussioBS
y. muBsiez
ils mussent
jo me musse
Je naqnisae
tu naquissea
11 naqnlt
n. naqnissloDs
y. naqnissiez
ils naqnissent
Je Digligeasaa
q. nelgeAt
je nlrelassa
JeonlslsM
J'obtliMe
J'oAtoe
J'oigBhaa
Digitized
by Google
878
attdwvuB, ranoim, notnuB
IxrinfftvB.
pAtTiaPLBS.
Immcativb.
iMrBKricT.
Past. Dananm
N^ OoTBfB, 2. to
ouvrani
J'ouvre
jonvrais
J'oQvris
f|»m
ouvert,/. e.
tu ouvres
to onvrais
tu ouvris
anx. ftvoir
il ouvre
ilouvi'ait
11 ouvHt
irregulAT
n. ouvrons
n. oavrioiMi
n. ouvrimoB
;
v. ou\Tez
V. ouvriez
▼. oQvrites
ilB ouvrent
ils onvraient
ils ouvrirei^
"■^PAlTlt,4.I#
IMtiaaat
jepals
je iMissaia
graz€
pA
tu iwis
ta paiasaiM
•nx. •voir
il pait
il paUntait
defective
n. paissons
v. paiueB
il8 pai8i«ent
n. paisHions
V. paissieB
ils paissaient
PlRPAmR,4.to
parflUsjuit
Je parfaifl
jeparfaisais
JeparllB
ampUtt
parfiilt,/e.
see PAiRB
setdom used
PARAiTRfS, 4.
parainaot
je paraia
je paraissais
JoptniB.
to appear
paru
see CONNAiTBB
Paicouiii, 2.
parooarant
je parcours
je paroourain
Jopareooroi
to go tkraugk
}Nircoura, /. e.
see couBiB
Parti R. 2. to
partant
jo para
Jepartais
Je partis
depart
parti, /.o.
see aBNTiR
Parvknib, 2.
parvenant
je parviens
Jeparvenais
Jeparrint
to suca!ed,4^.
{Mtr^'ena, /. c.
see TENiR
PAYsm, 1. to
payant
je paie
je payaia
jepayai
pay
pay«,/.e.
see APPUTEB
je peig^nais
PlSlNDRB, 4. to
poignant
jepeins
Jepcignls
PfiLBB, 1. to
peint, f. e.
see CEINDBB
pelant
jep&le
Jepelais
j«pelai
>WZ
pel6,/.e. '
() 49, (6.)
PCBMRTTRB, 4.
pemiettant
je pemiets
je permettais
Je permis
to permit
permis, /. e.
see mi:ttre
Plainpre, 4.
plaignam
je plains
Je plaignals
Jeplaignis
to pUif
plaint,/, e.
see ceinork
Plaindrb, (se)
80 plaignant
Je me plaina
Jc me plai-
jemeplMgnli
4. to eompiain
plaint,/, e.
[gnais
reflective.
X Pl.AlBB, 4. to
plaisant
jeplais
je plaisais
Jeplns
please
pla
tn plais
tu plaisais
il pfaisait
tu plu»
aux. avoir
il plait
il pint
irregular.
n. plaisona
n. plaisions
n. plAmct
y. plaisez
V. plaisicB
V. plutcs
its plaisent
its plaisaiont
ils plurent
il plut
PLEUrOIR, 3.
plenvant
il plcut
il pleu\'ait
to rain, unip
pla
POINDRE. 4. to
il point
r/i2ir». def.
PouRsuivRe,4.
ponrsnivant
jeponrsnia
je poursuivaiB
Je pourstiiviB
to p»r.w<f
lioursuivi,/. e.
see BvwKR
Pour VOIR, ).
poarvoyant
je ponrvois
je pourvoyais
Jo |)onrvu8
to/rropu^
poarva,/. e.
tupourvois .
tu pourvoyais
tu pourvttS
anx. avoir
ii poarvoit
il pourvoyait
11 pourvut
irrefiilar.
n. poarvoyons
n. pourvoyions
n. pourvAmeg
V. pourvoyei
Ua ponrvoient
V. ponrvoyies
i.pourv<^yaient|
V. pourr^teB
ils poarniniii
Digitized
by Google
Am manmomut
870
FlITCM«
J'ouvrlril
ta oiirriras
II ouvrira
n. onvriroDS
V. ouvrires
ill OttTriront
Je iMitrai
tupaitras
11 paitn
D. paitront
▼. pftltrcz
il8 pAitront
je parfend
Je paraitmi
Jeparcourrai
jepartirai
CORPirtOHAL.
jVuvriraU
tu ouvriraifl
il onvrirait
n. ouvririons
V ouvriries
lis ouvriraient
Jo paitrais
ta paitraU
il iMii trait
n. paitrions .
V. pa! tries
lis paStraient
Je parferais
Je paraitrais
Je parconrrais
jopariirais
Je panriendraiijeparTieodrais
Je paicnd
Jepelndrai
Jepileral
Je pcrmettrai
Jeplaindrai
J«:
) plaiiH
[drai
Jo plairai
ta plairas
fi piaira
n. plairoDS
▼. plalrc;6
its plairont
il pleurra
II poindra
Je poursuirrai
Je pourvolrai
(q pourvoiras
11 pourvoSra
n. poanroirons
▼. ponrvoirez
Je paieiais
Je peiodral
Je pMerai
Jo permettrals
Je plaindrais
Je me plain-
[drais
je piaira 18
ta plairais
il plairait
n. plairioos
V. piairiez
its ]»lairaient
il pteuvrait
q. oavre
ouvrona
ouvrex
q. oaTrent
pals
q.paiaae
paisaent
paisaes
q. paiaaent
parikis
paiala
parconn
part
pairieos
paie
peioB
p^le
permota
plaina
plaiD8-tol
plaia
q. plaiae
plaiaona
plaiscss
q. plaiscnt
q. pltfUTO
II poindrait
Jcpourauivraia
Jo pourvoirals
to pourvoiraia
il poanroirait
D-poarroirioDs
T. poiarTolries
Ha pomroirnQtl LpowToiiaieiit
SwimOTITB.
poursnia
ponrvoia
q. ponrvole
pourroyona
pouivoyes
q. pouiToleiii
J'OUVTO
to oavrea
iioa^re
n. otivriona
r. onTrfes
ila dxvrent
Je paisao
ta paisaea
il paiaae
n. paiwlona
V. paiaaies
ila paiaaent
Je iMirfaeae
Je paraiaae
Je parconre
Je parte
Jeparrieime
Je paie
Jepcigne
Jep61e
Je permctte
Jeplaigoe
Je me plaigne
.|e plaiae
tu plaiaea
II plaiae
n. plaisiona
V. i>laiaiea
ila plaiacnt
q. plcave
Je ponraaiye
lllPBBreOT.
j'oUTTtaae
tu ouvrisaes
il ouvrit
n. ouYriaaioDS
y. on^riaales
ila ouvriaaent
Jeparflae
Jepamaae
Jeparoouman
Jepartiaae
Jepairiniae
Jepayaaae
Jepeigniaae
Jepelaaae
je permlaie
Jeplaignlas)
je me plai-
[gniaae
Je plnsae
tu pliiaaea
il plut
n. plusaiona
V. plusaiez
ils phiaacnt
q. piat
Je ponnrofe
tu ponrvoio
il pounroie
n. pourroyiona
T. pourroyieK
Hi poanroieiit
Jo ponrauivia*
[ao
Jeponrvuaae
tu iK>urvuaaea
il pourvAt
iLpounrusaiomi
▼. pounruaalat
Uapoor/naMHl
Digitized
by Google
tEBS«vtA% wnwmcttTMf rmcvhiAM
Unmn^
P4Rm«VU«.
ImneATiTB.
Pasv Danma
PoaRvofii,(se)
le ponnroyam
Je mc poar>
Je me p«xp-
Jeneponrrva
8. M propide.
pourva,/.e.
[yolB
[vovais
Joponvab
PovvoiB, 8. to
pourant
Jepubtr.'
Jepaa
heaUe
pa
tupeuz *
tu poavala *
tapna
aiix. avdr
ilpeat
il poQvait
ilpat
irregnUr.
n. potivcma
n. poartons
n. pAoMB
V. pouTei
▼. poQvlex
V pHUm
ila penveni
Ob ponvaient
ilapiiitAl
pRiDms, 4. to
prMbtai
JeprtdlB
Jepr6diBaia
Jepi^dia
fredia
pr*dU,/.t.
prenant
M^CONTRBSIBt
PKEimiB, 4. to
joprendj
Joprenaif
Jepria
take
pris,/.a.
tapreoda
tn preoaia
taprb
aux. avoir
Uprend
il prenait
ilprit
Irregular.
n. prenoQB
n. preniooa
n. primca
T.prenez
V. prcniez
V. pritca
ils prcnneat
its prcnaient
ib pnrcnt
Prrscrirk, 4.
preBOrlTBiii
Je prescris
Jcprescrivais
JdpretcnTli
to prescribe
prescrit. / e.
see 4cRiRR
PRKS«SKKriR,2.
praflsentant
Je pressentaiB
Jo prcBsentls
to foresee
pryiwenti,/. c.
see SKNTIR
PltivALOfR, 8.
prev'alani
Je pr6%'aux
Jepr6valab
JeprtTaloB
to prevail
pr6rala
see VAI.OIR
Pr4tbnir, 2.
pr6Tenant
Je pr6vieii8
Je prfiTcnais
JeprtTfaa
PrIvoir, 8. to
foresee
Prodoirr, 4.
prtvenu,/. e.
see TRNiR
prtvoyant
prtvii,/. e.
Jo pr6voi8
Uke VOIR
Je prtToyala
Uke Yoin
tike Toia
produiM&t
Je prodais
Je prodniaais
Jeprodnitla
to produce
produit. /. e.
see CONDUIRB
Projrtkr, 1.
Je ppojette
Je proJctaiB
Jeprcjetal
to project
see JKTRR
4 49, (4.)
pROM»rrTRB, 4.
promettant
Jo pron>et8
Jo promti
to promise
promis,/. e.
see MRTTRB
PROMOUVOfR,
promouvaat
Je promeus
Je proroonTais
JeprcwniB
8. I^f promote
promti./. e.
Me MouroiR
PRORCRIRK, 4.
proscrivant
Je proscris
see icRiRK
Je proscrivais
Je proscriTxa.
to proscTwe
proecrit/. o.
PR0VKNIR,2.
provenant
Je proviena
Je provenaia
JeproTliia
to proceed
Qvin\n,lofelck
provenn,/ e.
only need
intMcinJInilivt
except in the
Rabattrb, 4.
rabattanl
Je rabata
Je rabattaia
Je rabattia
to abate
rabattn,/ a.
see BATTRB
fiACRBTRR, 1.
rachetant
Jo rachdte
Jo rachetala
Jerachetal
to buif again
racheU,/ o.
see ACHBTRR
« 49, (6.)
Rapprlp.r, 1.
rappolant
Je rappelle
J© rappelaia
Jeiappelal
to recoil
rappcl6,/.«.
see APPRi«ER
4 49, (4.)
BAn»RRKDRB.4
rapprenant
Jo rapprenda
Je rapprenais
Jerapprta
to learn again
rappris. /". e.
IIatteindrk,4.
rattctgnant
Je ratteins
Je rattelgnais
Jo ratteigDii
to reach, again
ratteiiit,/. e.
Rbbattrb, 4.
rebattant
Jerebats
Je rebattais.
JerebatttB
iobeat again
rebattu,/. e.
m BATTRB
ItRCovmnRB,
Je recondtiia
Je recondiil-
Je?icMid«lrii
4. toan^dma
moBdaH./ a.
aMoriONnu
(talB
^«te
Digitized
by Google
AV» ir3rtv«»to*Aft^s»»«. f el
FtTms.
OMMTMSAk
Je HM ponr-
fyolraJ
Jeponmi
tu pourru
II {N>arra
Y. pourrejE
Qb ponrronl
JepiMlrai
Je prendrfti
til prendras
U prendra
n. prendrons
V. prendre*
lb prandronl
Jepreacrind
Jepreiseiitlral
Je pr^Taudni
Je pr^Ttendrmi
Je pr^Toirai
tike pouKTOim
Jeprodolral
Je projettera!
Je promettnd
Je promoiiiTei
Jeproicnnu
je proTieodral
oikir verbs
Jentettiml
Jenusfafttoni
jBnppelleral
Jenppmdrai
Je ntteliidnil
Je lebettmi
J« nepoof-
[voirais
jeponirals
tu ponrrais
11 pi nrrait
n. piHinioiis
T. poarries
ilfl pourraient
Je piMInk
Je prandrais
tn prendrais
n prendrait
n. prendrione
▼. prendriez
lie prendraieiit q.
Je preacrirais
powfola^tol
^'
^'
prCdis
prends
q. prenne
prenom
prene
Je preasentl-
[rato
Je prfiTaadrals
je prtvien-
[drait
je pr6Toirai8
like pouBTota
Je prodnliais
JeproJettenJ
Jepramettrais
Je prometi-
f^lii
Jeprotcriraie
je proTlen-
[dimis
JendMrttrids
JetmehAteraie
JemppeUeraii
JeratI
JeieteMimis
prewuis
pr6Yaiiz
prftTiena
prtTols
prodoia
projetto
[drais
Itelndrafe
(nil
prorknt
rabata
rachftte
rappelle
rebMa
Jemeponr-
[▼oie
JepnfMe
tapniiites
il puisse
fleaieiNiTiv e.
Jememar
tui
▼. polniei
lis pnlisent
jepiMlae
Je prepna
ta prennes
il prenao
n. ptenkns
T. pfcfites
lie pfenneiifc
Je preterite
lapsaraev.
ilpAt
n.
V. ptueiei
lis puflsent
JeprtdiHe
JepHMdi
taprisiea
llpHt
▼. priviea
lis piriflflent
je preflcri?ifl99
Jeppesmitteie
Jeprivala
Jeprirln
Digitized
by Google
MS
iBKBcviAa, »srBeTtTi^ rsevLtAB
lamnriTB.
PARTlCWbRS.
bmCATITR.
iMrSRPRCT.
Pait. Dsffumm
RKCON'NAiTRR.
recoDnRia^RiH
je reconnais
je reconnaiit-
je reoonnoa
4. to recaanize
rtNM>ntiu /. «.
.«» CONVAITRK
(saiM
RKcoNai'iRia,
recon<|iii'rRnt
jo recoiiiiuiors
je reconqn6-
[rais
jereconqnia
2. to cffH^uer
reconquu/. e.
soe ACatiRlR
RKiiONSTRITlRfi
reoomtniiflani
je reoonstmia
je reconstniir
ie leoonatral
4. to recoil
Uriui
reooii8truit,/.e
SOe CONDUIRB
[aaiR
[aia
Bkcoupek, 4.
Jereconds
jereconaais
Jereoonaia
to sew again
reconsu,/. e.
ESCOURIK, 2.
reooarant
je reoours
jereoonrate
je reoonma
to have re-
reooani
see couRia
course
Rkcoutrir, 2.
jereooATre
je recoaTrais
Je recovrrii
to cover again
reconvert/, e.
JWOUTRia
Recukillir, 2.
recneillRnt
je recQ«ille
j«recaeiUaia
je recaeillia
ioreap
reciiellli./e.
see cuRiLLja
Eedirk, 4. to
redisant
jeredU
jerediaais
Jerodia
soff again
redit f. e.
see DiRR
BiouiRR, 4. to
r6dnisRnt
je i^dals
Je r^duiaals
jer«dniai8
reduce
r6dnit, /. e.
see coN'OUiRS
RF.PAIRE, 4. to
refaisant
je refais
je rcfkiaaia
Jerefis
make again
refeit,/. c.
see PAiRR
Rejoindre, 4.
rejoii^nant
je rejoins
je rejoignaia
jerejoignik
to rejoin
rejoint, /. e.
see CBIKORB
Bblirr, 4. to
relisant
jerelU
Jereliaaia
Jerelna
read again
relii /. e.
see LIRE
Brluire, 4. to
relnisant
je reliiUi
jerolniaab
jerelnisia
skine
rehil
see LUiRR
Kemrttre, 4.
rcmettant
je remets
je remettaia
je rcmia
to remit
remis, f. e.
see METTRB
Brmoudre, 4.
reroonlant
je remouds
je rcmoulaia
je remouloa
to grind again
reinonhi, f. e.
renal«Aani
see Mou»RB
RENAiTRE, 4.
je renals
je Tenai«saia
je rcnaqoia
to revive
ren*. f. e.
see NAiTRB
Rendormir. 2.
rendormant
je rendors
je rendormais
je rendormla
to tuU to sleep
rendonni./. e.
rGtitra>'ant
see DORMIR
Rrntraire, 4.
je rentmis
je rentrayaia
to darn
rentralt, /. o.
see TRAiRB
Renvotrr, 1.
renvoyant
je rcnvoie
je renvoyaia
je renToyaia
to sen/i back
renvojrfi. /. e.
see ENTftYBR
^ 49. (2.)
Bepaitre, 4.
repaiflsant
jo repais
jerepaiaaaia
jerepna
to feed
repu
see PAiTRB
dbc.
Rbpartir, 2.
repartant
jerepars
Jerepartaia
Jerepartia
to set off again
reparti, /. c.
see aENTia
Rkpbindrr, 4.
repeignant
je repeifM
Jerepefgnaia
Jeiepelgnia
to paint again
repeint,/. e.
see CRtNDRR
Eepkntir, (se)
se repentant
je me repens
j,».«p
jemerepantli
repenti. /. e.
see ■ENTiR
Reprkndrr, 4.
reprenant
jo reprcnds^
Jereprenala
jcrepila
to take again
see PRRNDRR
Brpr9doirk,4.
je rei>rodiita
io rerrodoi-
Jaiipiadaliia
iet^roduoe
reprodnlt^/.e.
«f CONOOIU
[aah
Digitized
by Google
Aa» OVIPIBSO^AI.- TB»Bt. § «»
AM
Fvnms.
je rocounai-
|tiai
Je raoonqoer-
[nii
> rccoostrni-
[nd
Jereeoodimi
Jorecoiimi
jo r«comiai~
[tniis
jo recoiMjuur-
[rais
Je recoDstrni-
[raia
je reeoadraiB
Jereoourraifl
Je recenvrini je reooavrirais
je recueillerai
Jeredirai
JdiMnirai
Jerefermi
Je rejoindrai
JeTellni
Je rclnirai
Jeremettrai
Jeremondrai
je renaitrai
JereDdormirai
je reotrairai
je renverrai
je repaitrai
Joiepartirai
Je lepoindrai
Je me repenti-
Jt npiodviimi
OmilNTtOlfAL.
je recneille-
[rais
jerediraui
je rtdalrais
je referais
Je rejoindrais
JereliratB
Je relnirais
jo remetirais
je remoudraia
je renaitrais
je rendormi-
[rais
jo rentrairaia
Je renTerrais
Jerepaltrais
je repartirais
je repelndrais
je me repcntJ-
(raia
je reprondrais
Jereprodni-
"raia
Inpkii ATirs.
reconnais
reconquien
reconatrnia
reooads
reconn
reooayre
recneiUe
redU
r6dnia
refkia
rejoins
relia
relnia
remets
remoada
renaia
rendora
rentnia
reuToie
repaia
repari
repeina
repena-tol
Sovjuncrrra I IsmitrvcT.
reprodnla
je reconnaiase
je reconquiftre
Je reoonatiti-
[iae
Jereconae
jereconra
jerecouyre
jerecneiUe
jerediae
je r6daiae
jerefluae
Jerejoigne
Je relise
je relaiae
je remette
jeremoole
jerenaiaao
je rendorme
je rentraie
Je rexiToie
Jerepaiaae
jerepaiie
JerepeSgne
Je me repento
Jerepremw
J*repro^ii\N
Digitized
jo rcco&niuM
Jeteoonquiaae
Jereconstrai-
[aiaae
je recoQsiaae
Jereoonmsae
Je reoGorriai^
je rocoeilHaw
Jeredlue
je i<6dQiaian
jerefiaae
je rejoigniaae
Jereloaae
je relulaiaae
je remiaae
je remonliiaaf
je reoaqniaae
je rendormisae
j6 renTo^aaat
Jerep-oflae
je reparttoe
Je TOpeigniaao
je me repen-
[tiaae
Jerepriaae
jc repiodiii*-
by Google
xmsevii^By •srscfiT^ vsev&iAm
\
to rtqture
B^tOUMB, i.
toresolv€
Ressbntie, 2.
RlStORTIR, 2.
KlEMOUVftNIB,
(se) to remain
ber. ref.
BBtTBElNDRE,
4. to rei^rat j»
Ektknir, 2. to
reUUn
Bbtrairb, 4.
tc redeem
Brvbhib, 2. to
return
BicTtriB, a. to
Rrviybr, 4. to
live again
Bbtoia, 8. to
set again
Bibb, 4. to
irrefaUr.
BoMPu,4.to
anx. BToir
irrcgalar.
PumciruBt. iMMCATirB.
BOUTBIB, 2. to
BAIU.IB, 2. to
pntjeci
BATItrAIBB, 4.
to satisfy
0ATOIB, 8. to
kmiw
B«Z.«TOk
irregnbur.
reqnArant
requiB,/. e.
r6Bolvant
rtsolu, rtsooB
ressentant
reiM»ti, /. e.
reasortant
ressorti,/. 6.
86 renouTe-
[nant
sonvemi,/. e.
restreiginant
restreint,/. e.
retoimnt
retcna,/. e.
retim^Bnt
retrait,/. e.
revenant
revenu,/. e.
rcTtont
rerAtii,/. e.
reTlTant
reT6ca
revoyani
reTu,/ e
riant
ri
mnpant
rompa,/. e.
roiiTraiil
roiivert,_^ o.
Jllam
satMkhBak
satlsikit f. e.
Bu,/ e.
Je requlera
see Acautf BIB
JerStons
jef ABSODDBB
Je itsssens
see SBNTIB
Jerenoif
see 80BTIB
Je me reasoa-
[Tieas
seerwHiK
je restreiiiB
see CBINDRB
Je retieos
see TEirm
Je retrain
see TBAIBB
Je reviens
see TENiB
Je rey^ts
seertviw,
je reris
Je revoii
see TOIB
Jeris
turis
ilrit
n. rions
V. riei
ils rient
Je romps
ta rompa
il rompfc
n. rompoM
V. rompez
ilsrompettt
je ronvre
see ocnrmm
il aaflle
je satisfkifl
tee PAiBB
Jeaaia
taaais
ilaaift
n. aaraas
T. aares
ils aaTml
Jeaecoora
WvS^f.e^
farnHvacT. ^AtPs
jereqii4rais
Je vtoolvaia
Jereaaentaia
Je VBflaortaia
Je me reaatfii-
[▼enaia
je reatrei-
[gnaia
jeretenaia
je retfajaia
JereTeoaiB
JerarilaiB
jereTtvaif
JerenognaiB
Jeri^
ta rials
ilriait
n. rf iona
▼. riies
Ha riaient
jerompais
tu rompaia
Uroropait
n. rorapiona
T. rompieB
ila rompaient
JeroBTvua
ilasWaH
JdBBtk&iBBk
JeaaralB
ta aavaia
ilaavidt
n. aaviona
V. aavies
ila aavaient
JeaMvia
jeiwiviB
j6I«B0l«i
Je TfiBprntia
JereaaortiB
Jemereaaoo*
\ybm
JereatrcigDb
jeivtkiB
je rerlDB
jem^tis
JereTftcw '
Jenvla
jeria
taria
ilrit
n. rimea
n.TileB
ilarirent
jororapiB
tu rompia
il rompit
n. rompimet
V. rora{4teB
ila rompirem
JeroavriB
u
JefloB
tasoa
ilavt
n. attmea
▼. aatCB
ila attrent
Digitized
by Google
-a/va
|M
Jo ro^ipflmi
!•
Jereasortinl
J61K16 resson-
[TieDdtftI
Jenttzeiftdni
Jentfeodral
'Jentnini
J6 Fcrlfindnl
Js VBTifttini
Jo vevlvnd
JereTerrti
Jerini
tAiirss
flrim
n. ThtmB
T. rires
lit lirout
Jerompni
n rompim.
Q. romproDt
T. rompres
lis romproQi
Je rouTrirai
flMiUara
>ntSstofti
Jeiuxai
fii
J6 ra<|iioi'nu8
Jerteondivie
Je ressefntinii
Je refliortiimiB
▼. Mnres
OtMUVOIlt
>Meoiimi
OoMtnoiuk
rteons
[yieodrais
Jerestrein-
[dmU
Jeretieadmis
Jeretnlmii
Je rerieiidnis
JererAtirais
Je TeYiTrAiB
Jerevemis
Jerinis
tXL rimis
U riralt
n. rliioDS
▼ ririez
flsriraient
Jerompralfl
tu romprai*
Qromprait
n. wHiiprioiis
T. rompries
ill romprsient
JeronTriiais
ilMfflerait
Jentiiferaii
JeMurab
taiaoraifl
flitarait
n. aanrioQA
▼. sauries
Ussanralest
Je seconrrais
rMNQTieiM-toi
retleoi
retrais
Terete
reroli
ris
I
rie
ries
q. rieat
romps
q. rompe
rompons
fompes
q. rompeoi
sache
q.
sadums
q«aacheni
Jaiididiil jesldiilrtis
sMidi
It
Jeraquiire
Je r68ohe
Jeressente
Jerenorte
JemereMNi*
[Tienne
JeresMsne
Jetetlenne
Je retrale
Je reTiemie
Jers^te
JereTlve
Je reroie
Jerie
taries
Qrie
BLriiOBS
r. riles
ilsrient
Jerompe
ta rompes
ilrompe
a rompions
▼. rompies
Usrompent
Je ronvre
q. saille
Je satisfssse
Je sache
va saches
U sache
n. sachloDs
▼. sachies
tif aachfii^t
Digitized
Jereqitoa
Ac
Je lesti el'
JeretfaiSM
jersfinsM
Je ref^tlsw
Jei
Jei
|ei
a lit
lis
je
ta
Uromi
t^
T. TompkMiSB
Us rampiMeii
jerouvrisse'
by Google
XEUBf^uLAS, nsrsefiYB, TmovttAm
iNfUimvB*
PARTICCrLBI.
ImncATtfU.
iMPsarscT.
Past. Danatrac
Bembk, 1. to
scmant
Jo86me
Jescmato
je aemai
s^w. pec
semi,/, e.
8S2«TIR, 2. to
aentant
Je sens
Je aentafs
Jo sentia
f^
8enti,/.e.
tn sens
tn soDtaiB
tn sentia
auLSToir
ilaent
il sentait
il aenm
n. sentons
n. BentioDS
n. aentlmet
V. sentcz
V. aentSoE
T. aentilea
ilsaentent
ilB Bentaieot
iL5 aentirem
■foi»,8.toJtt,
seyant
ilBied
U Beyait
become
818
**
8£RYIR, 2. to
seirant
Josers
JeBctrais
tnae^
atrve
servi, /. e.
tn sera
tn Berrais
inqgDlar.
ilBcrt
il aervait
Qservit
n. servobs
n. aenrioQB
n. aen'imes
V. senres
V. servies
T. senritea
flBservent
lis aenraient
ilB aomreiit
BORTIR, 2. to
aortaot
Jesors
Je aortaia
Jesortis
|foUPFRIR,2.to
8orti. /. e.
IttSSNTIR
aouffhuit
Je8oaffre
Je BonflfVais
Jeaonffria
stifir .
Bonffert,/. e.
see OUYRIR
flOUMBTTRE, 4.
soomettant
je aonmets
Je Bonmettaii
jeaonmia
toM^t^
Boumis,/. e.
see METTRE
BOVRIRE, 4. to
soariant
Joaonris
JoBonriaia
Jeaonria
Mitto
aouri
see RiRB
BoUfCRlRE, 4.
sonacriTaot
jesonacris
Je BooacriTaiB
Jesonacria
Usiibscribc
sooscrit
see tfcRiRE
B0U8TRA1RB,4.
BOQstrayaat
soostrait, /. e.
Je BOQstrala
Je Bonstrayida
tosvJbtract
see TRAIRE
BOUTENIR, 2.
Boutenant
Je sontiens
Je Bontenaifl
Jeaontfns
tosudam
aoatena,/. e.
see TENiR
BOUTENIR, {«e)
re Bouvenaat
jemesouTieos
je me aovrtLt
%torememJber
souvenu,/. e.
see TENIR
[naU
BuBTsmR, 2.
subvenant
Je stibviens
je snbyeoaiB
Jeaab?ina
U relieve
subvenu, /. e.
see TENIR
BorriRE, 4. to
sufBsant
jeRnffis
JeBnAteiB
JeaaiBa .
jiii^
8Di&
tusnffis
tn snfBsats
tn Buffla
I MX. RTOir
ilsnfflt
il Buffisait
ilBnfflt
irre^lar.
n. auffisoDS
n. suffisioDB
ILBUffillMb
▼. sufHses
▼. Biiffisiez
V. anffitea
iU snffisent
lis BuflSsaient
lis saffireDt
BlTITRE, 4. to
snivant
je suis
Je BufvaiB
jeaulvU
foOow
BOiliJ. 0.
tn suis
tn Bnivais
tu anivia
wax. avoir
il suit
n Buivait
il snivit
irregulAr.
n. snivons
n. Buivions
n. Bul\imea
V. suivex
T.- sniviez
V. Buivftca
ils snirent
il9 Buiraient
lis anivirent
8vRPAmi,4.to
suHklsant
Je snrfais
Je BurlkiBaia
Jeaarfia
fSBfld
BUriklt,/ 6.
see FAiRR
BORPRBITDRR,
snrprenant
Je Burprends
Je Borprenali
JeamiKla
4. to fNfyrtof
§ttrpiiB,f,t, .
JMPRENOBS
Digitized
by Google
-Alri» C»X»SBBO«AL Ta»>& (M
»w
FtoTFRS.
CORDITIOIML. IMRKATITS. |
iMnaracT.
Jertmmi
je iteerals
sdme
JeB6mo
jesemasie
fe fentimi
tosentlnui
je Bente
JesentisBe
tu sentinls
Bens
tu BCntCB
tnsentlBsea
0 Motifft
il senUrait
q. Bente
il Bcnte
il sentit
D. S6DtlroilS
iLaentlrioBi
BentoDs
n. Bcntions
n. sentiBsiens
T. icntires
V. sentiries
Bentez
V. Bentiex
▼. sentisBiei
lb tentiroat
ilssentlnient
q.Be&te]il
ils sentent
ilssentissent *
Ilil6ra
iliS6ni(
q.Bi«e
Jeservlnti
JeserTimis
jeserre
jesernsBe
tvaerriras
tu seryirais
men
tu series
tu BeiTisses
ilserrirA
il servinrit
q. Berve
il serve
UseiTlt
D. wnrirons
n. aeiririons
Bervoms
n. servions
n. BerriBsiooa
V. serrxriez
Berres
V. servies
▼. servissiea
III Berviroot
ill terviiaient
q. Beryent
ils seirent
Us BerviBBent
JesorUrai
Jesortirais
Jesorte
jesQitlaM
Je lOttflHrai
JesoailHtais
son
sonifre
Boumets
Boorls
Bouscris
BOUBtrsIS
soutiens
Je sonffVe
jesonfiHsse
Je Kmmettrai
Jesonmettrais
jecoomette
jesoomlsse
Jeworlrat
je Kmiiraif
Je Bonrie
jesourisse
Je MUBcrirfti
je BOUBerifui
jesouscrire
JeioiMlndnl
je soQstrainuB
jesoustrale
JciKmtleiidni
je soQtlenne
jesootlnsw
JeueicniTien.
jemesoQTieD-
je me soQvieB-
jemeson-
[dral
7drai8
je nibTien<-
[draifl
Jeraffiraii
SOQTleDS-tol
[ne
[vinsse
Jerabrfendni
snbyieos
je subvienne
je suuvinsse
lemfflrai
tasuffiras
je Buffise
jesnfflsBe
tn snffiraifl
Buffls
tu Bufflses
tusuffisses
Oiiiffira
il sttfflrait
q. Buffise
il Bttffise
il rafftt
D. suffirona
n. saffiriona
BUffiSODS
n. suffiBions
n. snffissiont
T. sufllres
▼. raffiries
Buffises
▼. rafflsies
T. sufflssiez
i)t MiiBroDt
ill raffiraient
q. BuffiBeni
HsBuffisent
ils suffissent
JeBQivrai
Je raivrals
jesuiTe
jeraiviase
tutiti?ras
tu sniTTais
BUiS
tu Buires
tusuivisses
llniivra
il Buivrait
q. Buive
il Buive
il raivit
iLtaWroDB
n. BuivrioDs
suivons
n. suivions
n. Buiviflsfons
▼. BoiTres
T. raivriez
BuiTez
T. raivies
T. Buhrlssiei
lis nilTTont
IIb rairralent
q.suivent
Ils BttiTent
lis rafrlsBent
Jemirfemi
Jerarferaie
rarlUs
je sutftfcBse
Jesorlisse
)• MupreiidTal
jeraiweii-
je swpireiuie
JesvpriM
[dralB
Borprendi
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
88$ XEM#1TVA.«| l|r»t8«»»^'% MOIHlAm,
IHfUUXlTH*
Utupenedg
MX. ftT<^
irragnlMr.
PApmovuiib
BURTXHIB, it
SURTIYRB, 4.
Tairb, M) 4.
TbibtdrE) 4. U
. Tbnib, 2. t^
AM
RUZaBVOlf
irregolar.
TomvBR, 1. to
ikiMder, nnip.
Tbaduirb, 4»
TBAiaB,4.te
mitt
B11Z.BT0lr
defbetire
survoiiBiit
tanremi,/.
tnrviTBot
sairteu
se taisuoA
tu,/. e.
teignant
teint,/.e.
teiiBQt
tenu, /. e.
tomNnt
tonn6
tradaiaaiii
tradiiit,/.e.
travftnt
trait
T»aiibcrirb4«
t0 iratucribe
Tranbubttrb.
4. to transmU
Trbuailur,
- VaHCCRK, 4 <0
BOX. Bvoir
IrrcfoUr.
^ Valoir, 8. to
Uwortk
BUZ. BYoir
IncfiilBr*
Tbmibi X A.
lllBW4TtYB.
tTBOBOrlTBlli
tramcrit
traannettBiil
trBOsmis, /. e.
tressaniant
trenaUli
▼Binqnaat
▼Binoa,/. ew
▼BlBDt
▼Bin
▼wwij/. e.
Jeninois
tn sarBois
il snrsoit
n. ianoyoDt
V. saTSOTBB
OBSonoleBt
Je sarvieBfl
smtenir
je BonrtB
J00TITRB
Jeme tBiB
jae PLAiRB
je tefoB
see CEINSBS
je tiens
tutieoB
atiflnt
n. tenons
▼. tenez
lis tiennenft
il tonne
jetraduiB
see COKDUIBB
jetralB
ta trais
a trait
n. tiayoQB
y. trayez
UstraieBt
je transcris
see icRiRB
je transmets
JMMBTTRB
jetressaille
ate ASSAILLIB
je YBinos
tnyaincs
ilvainc
n. Tainqnoiis
▼. TBinqnez
ilfl yainqnent
jevanx
tu vanx
U vant
n. ybIohb
▼. tbIob
ibyalent
Je Tiens
PAn-
to snxBoyaiB
il sniBogfEll
B. sofsoyioiiB
soraojieB
Us BUBoyaieiit
jesnrfenidB
JbsmriTBlB
jemetalniB
JeteigBBiB
jetenaiB
tutenais
Utenait
n. tenions
V. tenies
ils tenaient
a toonalt
Je tradnlBBiB
jetmyaifl
to trayais
iltmyait
n.trayion8
▼. trayies
ViE trayaient
je tranacriTBlB >
taBurslB
ttSOTBlft
n^snnlflMB
T. sarslteB
ilB snniraiil
Je sarriiiB
JesnrrteBB
JemetUB
jet^SnlB
jetfaiB
to tins
ntint
attmnQB
T. tintflB
ilstinrent
il
jetraoBiiiettab
Je treBsailUdfl
JevainqualB
tn vainqnalB
il yainquidt
B. TBinqnioBB
▼. vainquifiB
JeyalflJa
tnvalais
Uvalait
n. vaHoBB
T. TBlles
Usvalaient
Je
JetreBMUHB
Je' TainqiiiB
to YBinqnla
Uvainqiiil
n. TainqniiMB
T. TainqniteB
ils vainqoaie&t ils vainqnlron
Je yalns
to tsIbb
ilTBlat
B.val^i»DB
T.yalftteB
UsTBhireDt
Jettea
Digitized
by Google
As» ••ifikftotr^l Titftt. f H
W
FUTVHB*
Jesuneoirai
ta sureeoiras
U turaeoim
XL mnedtrou
T. saraeoirez
Os snneolroat
JeinnrkAdnil
Je ffuriTral
Jetefaidnd
is ttcndnil
TO tiendru
Utiendra
B. tiendrona
T, tiendrea
Us tiendront
II tomiera
Je tmdnirai
Jatrairai
ta trairaa
lllaraira
B. trairont
▼. trairea
flatralrOnt
Je tramcriral
Je tranamet-
[trai
Je tteaaalUini
Oonmnonkh,
Je yafaicrai
tavaiDcraa
llTidncra
n. TalncroDa
▼. yaincrea
Hb Taincront
Je vaudiai
ta vaadnu
Uyaudra
tL Taadrona
▼. vaadrez
Ha Taadront
Je ntraeoirait
ta saraeoirais
il saneolrait
n. aaneoirioos
▼. saneolriez
LaaraeolTaleiit
Jeaonrleiidtaia
Je lanirraia
Jemetatrals
Je tehidraia
Je tiondrais
ta tiendrab
iltiendrait
n. tiendriona
y. tiendries
!la tiendralent
il toimeraH
Je tradoirab
Jetralrah
tu trairaifl
ntrairait
a. trairiona
V. trairiez
ila tndraient
je iraDflcrirala
Je traoamet-
ftrate
Jetrefsailliraia
iMFtMrntu.
Je yafncraJa
ta yaincraia
ilTaincrait
D. Taincrioiia
y. Taincriez
ila yafncraient
Je vaadrais
ta yaadraia
il yaadrait
n. yaadriona
r. yaodriea
iia Taadraient
JeTiendrala
ranoia
q. saraoie
saraoyotB
annoyea
q. sonofe&t
aorylena
tala-toi
tefau
q. tiena6
tenona
tenez
q. tieime&t
q. toime
tradola
trala
q. trafe
trayona
trayez
q. traient
tranicria
trananeti
treoBaflle
▼aiiica
q. Tainqne
yainqaona «
▼alnqaez
q. Tainqnent
q.yaille
▼alona
Talez
q. Tafflent
Je saraoie
ta saraoies'
il sanoie
n. aaraoyloiia
V. sanoylez
ila aanolent
Jeaoirienae
Je Biurvive
Jemetabe
BovvnoTirM.
IjcpKmrsoT.
je saniMe
tu saraiaaea
il surslt
n. sarsittioDM
V. aaniaslea
Ila saniaMiii
Jeaairi&sae
Jet
Jei
Je tetgne Je iAgdbm
JetiDMe
tatinaaea
uant
n. '^nniooa
V. tbiaaiei
ila tioaaent
q.tonoAt
Jef
ta tieonea
Utieaae
a. teniona
teoiea
flatiennent
q. tonne
Jetradulse
Je traie
ta tndea
fl tnie
n. trayiona
V. trayiea
ilatralent
JetranacriTe
Je tranamette
Jetresaaille
levafaiqae -
taTainqooa
il vafnqae
n. vainqaiona
▼. Tainqaiez
ila yainqoent
Jeyaille
tavaiUea
flyaille
n. yaliona
T. Taliez
flaTaOlent
Je Tienne
JetradoialM
Jetraoaoi-
[TiM
Je tranamiiae
JetreaMOllMa
JeTainqoiaBe
ta TainqniaBes
H Taioaalt
▼ainqauaiona
y. yahoqaiflaiei
i Tainqaiasenl
Je yalosBe
ta valaaaea
UvalM
yalaasfooa
Talawiea
OavalaaMBl
Je^
Digitized
by Google
BM imKB«vxAai dbvbctiti^ FSoir&tAB
ImnwrnfM,
PASnCtTLBS.
bmCATXVB.
UimrtcT.
Past. DsmRia
ytn», 2. <•
vdtant
Jovdts
Jo T4tala
jov«tu
eMiU
vdta,/. e.
tnvAti
tnvAtaia
tu TAtia
aux. aroir
ilT^t
UTdtait
il TAtit
Irrc^iUar.
n. vAtons
n. vAUona
iLT«amoa
V. vAles
V. vdtfea
T. vAtitca
ilSYAtont
ila vAUiont
ila TAtireot
VtT«.(ie)2.
sevAtaiit
le mo YAta
Jo movAtala
JooMTMis
l^eftfOc one*!
T6tu./. e.
Ac
&c
&c.
tdf. ref.
Vrro, 4. f9
TiTint
taria
JOTiTftia
joTAcna
Hvi
▼«Ga
tnviTftia
tUTteiia
•iix.aToir
fl Tit
Uvivait
ilv6cttt
inepikr.
n. virona
n. viyiona
iLTteilmoa
V. rivei
V. viviea
T. YAcAtea
^
ila TiTent
ila viTaient
iUV6ciu«iii
Tom, 8. t0
▼oyuxt
Jovoia
Je voyaia
Jo via
am
ni,/.e.
to voia
tuToyaia
ta via
anx. aroir
ilvoit
il voyaii
Uvit
irr^pitr.
n. Toyona
n. voyiona
n. vtmot
V. voyiea
T. vitea
ila voient
lis voyaicnt
ila viront
TouLora, 8. &»
Toolaat
JOTOIIX
Jo Toulala
Jo TonliyB
kmtftn^
Tonla
tQveux
tnvonlala
tu Toolna
M».aToir
ilTont
il Tonlait
11 roalot
taicfolw.
n. Tonlona
n. vonliona
n. voiildnMs
7. Tootes
V. vonliex
r. Tonldtei
.
UiToiila^
ilaTOQlatonl
UaTonloMBft
Digitized
by Google
▲"«]>. VirirtESOllJkL TBftBB.
«»«
in
FUTVllB.
COMMTIOMAL.
bWBSATIVB.
BDBJimc nvB.
IiirBarBCT.
je vdtirai
je vdtiraia
jevdto
je vAtisse
ta v6tiras
ta T6Hrais
v6tB
tu v^tes
tu vdtisses
U v6tira
a vdtirait
q. T^te
11 vdte
il vdttt
n. v6tirons
n. vdtirions
v6tons
n. vdtioDS
n. vdtissionf
T. Tdtirez
V. vAtiriejs
v6tcz
V. vdtiez
V. v6ti88iez
i)8 vdtiront
ils vdliraient
q. v4tent
ils v6tent
lis vMisseni
je me Yhtkai
je me vAtiraia
Je me vAte
jemevfttisst
&c.
dMS.
v«ts-toi
&c.
&c.
Jevimi
je Yimis
je Vive
jev^casse
tuTirru
tu vivraia
▼Is
tu vivei
tu vteusset
11 vivra
U vivrait
q. Tire
il Vive
Uv«cAt
D. vivroDS
n. vivriona
▼ivons
XL ViviOM
n. v^cussioDs
T. y\vnz
r, Tiyriei
▼ivea
V. viviei
V. v^cussiez
lis vivront
ils Tivraient
q. TiTcnt
lis vivent
Usv^cussenl
je verrai
je verrais
je voie
jevisse
tu Terras
tu verrais
v<^
tu voies
tu visses
il verra
U Terrait
q. vole
il voie
11 v!t
ii.TerroiM
n. verrioDS
voyons
a voyions
n. vissions
V. verrca
V. verriez
voyez
V. voyiez .
V. vissiez
Sl8 verront
ils rerraient
q. voient
ils voient
ils vissent
je roadrai*
je voudrais
. . '
je veuiUe
Je voulnsso
tu Toiidras
tu Toudrais
v<- " ' < ' c
tu veuilles
tu voulusse*
il vondra
il voudrait
il venille
il voumt
n. Toudroos
n. youdrions
n. voulioDS
n. voulussiona
T. voudrei
T. voodrlea
▼euOta
V. vonliei
V. voulussiei
QaToodront
Us ToudraieBt
Us veuUlent .
Digitized
by Google
M3' wmn FA^Aficxf iia<-^ia,M»M,M.
2 69.— Tat PAsnoiFLs.
(1.) T%» partidple is so-called, Tieeanao it puticipatM of the a^
tore both of the verb and of the adjeetiTe. It pertaikee of the natare
of the Torbi in' heviog its signifieation and regimen, and of the Da«
tore of the wiQective in relating, like the latter, to noons attd pro-
(S.) There aie two sorts of participles; the present and Hie past
§ 64. — Tm PAanoiPLi Pkrssjo!.
(1.) The participle present, which denotes conlSmianee of setion
answers to the English participle in vtg,
(3.) This particii^e is invariable ; alwajs teiuiiiBlifaig in «nf ; aa,
Shantaat, ttngv^ ; finissant, /itM^if^ ; reoerant, reetiving ; vendaat,
seCtf^.
nne dame marehmUj a laiiywOcmg;
des hommes marchml^ men walHng,
Jkavt seen ike winds rforimg mmr
those superb karoestSf rwi «jp ikt
grain, and contend for tke '
J'ai vn lea Tents grondani snr oas
moissona auperMa,
P^raciner lea bI6s, ae diapnter lea
gerbea. Pelille.
§ 65. — ^Ybbbal Amsotiteb indino in ant,
(1.) The verbal adjective in ant ezpreaaes merely the condltion»
the manner of being, the quality of the nonn. It never denotea ae>
ilon.
(a.) Thia adjective variea in gender and number. We give below
ezamplea of the same worda, uaed aa participles and as adjectives:-^
AdjecHves,
Une ftmme obiigeante eat aimie
4s tout le monde.
An obUging woman is loved by
wery person.
lies tribua errantes de T AfHqne.
The wandering (vibes of Afnca,
^pX aoient proprea k Tdtude
nature. Beenabdin db St. Piebrb.
AJedunuUe natwres {disposiUons)
mUy, are JU for the siudy of nabiiire.
Participles,
Une femme obhgeant tout )e
monde eat gen^ralement aimde.
A woman obliging every body u
generally loved.
Lea tribua errant daua rAfVi^ne.
The tribes wanderiTig in Afnca,
n n'y a que lee natures atmantes Lea naturea aimant la aolitade^
de de la ' aiment g6n6ralcment r^tude.
Natures {dispositions) loving sdi»
tude^ are in general fond of study.
§ 66.— The Pabticiplk Fast.
(1.) The participle past denotes the completion of the action,
(a.) It is susceptible of variations for gender and number.
(8.) The participle past, used without sn auxiliary, agrees in gen*
dsr Mid number with the nonn which it qualifies, whether tlie aomi
Digitized
by Google
preeedes or foDowv. In short, all that wa baTO uad of the agre^
ment of the a4ioetiTe with the noon, may bo a|yplied to thla par-
tkiple.
desenlhntBeMKi^ bdovedekOdnnf
dea fbinmea esfm^ . esUtmed^wpmin t
Comme una lan^e d'or dana ramr LUx a goldm lamp iu^endtd m
mspendvet the azun wnitt, the mooit Mmntn
La lone se tMdanoe aoz borda do hendf in ikt eoiifinet of ike kmaiont
lOtoriaon; her wtakmed rmys aUep m tkt imf,
Bea rayona afniHs dorment sor k
faaOQ. LlMASTIKB.
(4.) For fbrthorraloa on the partteiplepaat^aeo Syntax, { lH«i^
following.
g 67.— Ths Adtxr^.
* (1.) The adverb ia an invariablo woid Joined to verb% dQeetiTea^
or to other adTerba, to modify their signification.
(SL) Adverba are divided into aeven elaaaea: —
1. Of manner; doooement, softly ; Mement, trigdf ; dee.
9L Of order; premidrement, JMg a'abord, aiJMt enmilte, ^
tenMrds; dba
9* Of phwe; ici, ken i od, whent Ik, Umef affleon, ab»-
Vfkereg dpo.
4. Of tfane; bier, yesierdof! wj^oarA'htA, Uhdofg detiiain, to-
merromt &o.
5. Of qnantlty ; pen, HUkg trop. too wmtokf tani» eo mtMl; Aa
6. Of 60ii4»ri8on; plus, wtom moina, lessf trie, veij,
7. Of affiimatioii, ne- ooi, fee ; oartea, eertaktlfg non, no ; naOeaMn^
gation and doubt; bff no mtmntg pent-tee, ^fr^pi; ne, pea, >otot>
noig dte.
(8.) A fbw a4}ectbea are aometimea uaed adverbially. They aio
then invariable >^
chanter /MSte, to timfin iume ;
ooAtercAcr, toeoddean
parler hmU^ to speak loud.
(4.) Several worda united together, and having the force of an ad
forbt are called an adverbial phraae : —
tont-lir-ooap, suddentpg
pen-arpen, by degrees ;
VITm
tont-il-llieiire, immediately g
de-tempe en-tempe, now and tken, Ae.
§ 08. — ^FoRMATioir OF Advxrbs vrom Adjxcttvxs.
(1.) Adverbo ending in manf, may be finrned from a^jeetiveektho
following manner >-
(8.) When the a4jective ende in the ttMevlifte witl a voweli wm$
n added to form the advtib9—
^"^^ Digitized by Google
AdjeeHve, Adoerk.
QtUe^ useful i atilement, utefuUfi
poll, polUes polimont, poUtet^t
9ia6, easjfg ahdment^ easiiy,
(3.) Exceptions,
bean, beautiful: bellement, * beofuHfuUfi
foa, fooUaki follcment, fooUMiff
moQ, «;/{; moUement, sofUvs
noavean, uewf noaTellemcnt, newif r
teaitre, treaekenuii traitreosemeiiti treackeromdf,
4.) When the acy^^^^® ^^^ ^° ^^ mascaline with a conaonan^
the ayUable maU is added to its feminine termination : aS|
masc. fern,
boo, l)onne, good; bomieinent, m a good mtmner f
donz, donee, toft; doacement, MofUy;
henrenx, heurense, luippp; henrensement^ kappUy,
(5.) A^eetives endrng in itf, change that termination into awiotf >-i*
pradent) prudeiU; pnidemment^ prudenUfg
616gant, digmnl; 6l6gamment, degatUhf.
Exceptions^
lent, sbw; lentement, dowlyi
pr£flent, present; prfisentement^ presently,
(6.) The following adverbs require an acnte accent otw the a pN»
ceding mentt which e is mute in the fu^'ective :—
avengl6ment, bUndhf;
eommod^menti eommodioudy;
commun6ment, commonly;
coo(bnn6ment^ confrrmMy;
coiifbs6ment» eoyusedty;
diffus^ment, digusdy;
teorm^ment) enorvumdy;
ezpresrtment, expresdy;
importun^mcnt, tmportumeeUiy t
inooipmod^ment, incommodious g
obacurftment, obsoMrdy;
opiniatr6ment^ obStinaUiy /
pr6ci86ment, preciseby ;
profond6ment^ profoundly.
§ 69. — ^DxoRsxs or Signification in Advsbbs xNDXNa nr
liENT.
(1.) Adverbs ending in menly are, like all the adjectives from which
fhey are formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification \ the
positive, the comparative, and the superlative.
(2.) The first expresses the manner simply.
(3.) The second expresses it in a degree of equality, superiaritf,
or inferiority, by adding to the adverb the words, si, so; aussi, «f ,
plus, more; moins, less,
(4.) Tlie third, by the addition of the words bien, tr^s, fort, verf^
eanies tliat significi^on to the highest degree.
§ 70. — ^AdvSRBS making of THXMSELVBS a COMPASISOV.
S??2^ \i^ iks seme smu* I ^^ S^^'
d by Google
Digitized t
»BSP0tXTf0 9S«^72,
M6
Moms, las,-.
Mieiuc ' btUa-f
Pta, irtfr« / .
Trte, vtnt;
Ni plus ni moinf, neMer mort %ar
U9S;
ssr
A-pea-prd9,
Pour le plus,
Tout an plus,
A qui mieux
fiueax,
Al'envi,
Do mienx ei
mioQX,
fortkemjMg
atmutg
t vying wUkmii
I anatkers
§ ^1. — The Prkposition.
(1.) The prepoaitioD is an invuiable word used to express the M«
lations of things.
(3.) The preposition conreys by itself no distinct meaning; Thft
preposition and the word whieh it governs, form what is called an
indirect regimen.
g 92. — ^Tablb of ths P&incipal Pbzpositions.
• A cause de,
Aprds,
Attends, Tn,
Anprto de,
Antonrde^
Avant^
Avec,
Ches,
Contre,
Dans,
D'aprds,
D'aree,
Dek,ande]ide,>
DedeIa.pardeUL}
Depnis,
Derritee,
Dds,
Devant,
Dnrant,
£n,
Bn dcfi de,
Do de^i, par
de9a,
Eutre,
Envera,
A Pdgard de,
Environ,
to, aif in;
onaccpwUeft
ofUn
on aeeonni ofg
neort
aioulj around i
before {earUer) /
wUk;
at the houti off
againU;
in^tmlhim
fromr, afters
from;
of, from, wUh /
ieyond, on thai
^deofs
since, fort
behind s
from;
before, opposUe;
during;
in, at,tO}
"k this sides
ionthissides
between;
S towards;
about $
Excepts,
Hormis,
Hon,
Jnsqn'^
Jusques&j
Loin de,
Le long de,
Malgrt,
Moyennant,
Nonobstant
Outre,
Par,
Pardevant^
Parmi,
Pendant^
Pour,
Prdsde,
sofoe;
\%ntil, asfatroit
far from s
alongs
in spUe ofs
by means of s
nojwithttandit^i '
besides s
by, through s
before, {lawtorm}t
amot^, amongsis
darings
for;
neaTt dose by i
Proche, proche de,iitfar by;
Quanta,
Sans,
Saof,
8elon,
Sons,
Snivant,
Sur,
Touchant,
Concemont,
Vers,
Vis-arvis de.
asfor,wiihrespaett
wUhouts
according tos
vnders
according tot
iupon, on;
touching;,
eoncemifigg
towards, tag
opposOe,
(2.) The prepositions are divided into several elsises.
(8.) Among those denoting phiee are^
r Ce n'eit qa'mUaar de faii que vole la vlotoira^
{
M^l^^^gmJ ^^mm^ ^M^^^M &rfM^Hff# MAJKA0Sff
^■v^VIW MUM MfVIW MV^PtV vl^Vr^.
Digitized
by Google
3M
rWMTQ9l9lQM
»»^
ObM, inM;
iflD, «A«r lii eMtleni tat Mran foii lnoQ»
tM. OOBMBILU.
i ilnu^ Ckruiiam,Ji9uiayy ih» manmen Ofv iiHMeral.
Chez moD ptee, o^ myfatkn's k^ue.
Rome n'e^t pliifl itoiu Kome. Couibilu.
Rome U no tongff in Romg,
^Parmi les'rocfien, vers le mSUeQ de ow m<mUiCM«
e8Cftrp66t. Ptfi^MMi.
iiflum^ titf fwdkf, tMMTds tke mtddU of tkom Jtay
momUaini,
L'autel oovfwt d9 feux, tombo et fWt, imu ta
terre. Voltamb.
TIktf Attar «Mir«4t wUkfin^faUi mU Umppmrs «»-
<<er£Aeeara.
Lea riches ne Kmt jiir ta teire que poor fUre d«
Uml Finiunr.
7)U fifii «rv jri«af4 #» tff Mr<4 «cr«i|r <^ 4* /r«iML
(4.) Some, denoting time, aro—
Portnt^ (iliiri«r- (l>t<')Mi^tamdt^eQen'apolBldonBL Ooucbiua
Pendanl» ) *^Y» \ During the nigki ski has had «# jIm^ •
(6.) Some mark plaee and time, aa:*-
V^from; CDteOrMana; MiBaMoroe. L'
%i at the
{ofud^iksLaiin.)
nam, in;
Van, fiwardlf ;
floua, wulir;
Trma Orleans ; ^ma ito jMMve.
ii'bomme, <2a< ea naJMance, a le lentiment dn plaUr
et de la donlenr. MAasuxoN.
Man from his Hfth has the sensation o/pUasnre and
fUMMk 4^mm^ . «i.^ . \^ France 8^4tend dejnds le Bhin jasqu'a rOoten.
'V^fSLi\^ t'AciiAaa.
^'■**'^ I JVa9u»otead:i/rYm(A</2iUMt0lAeQ0iai».
En Orient, en Ooddent, depvis denx mifle ana on
H /iiMcA ne parle que d' Alexandre. MAiaiLLON.
\nmgg} ' inthe Sast,inthe West, since tmo tkousatid ffsan^
^ they speak continuaUy of Alexander.
Dttu, en, aona, vers, die, may alao be placed under thia head.
(6.) Some prepoaitiona mark order; aa:— -
Atant,fe/Sv«f
(at an earUer timef)4
Satie, htiwseng
VflRiiirei bMndf
iinfrmuifi)
La copaciepce novaaTertit, en aaal, awuU de nona
pnnir. Staxooljm,
, Consdenee foams ns, as a friend, before ptinishing «f .
' Je crahia Dien, et apris jMeo. Je oraina principale-
ment oelnl qni ne le eraint pas. Sadi.
Ifear Qod, and, after God, Ifea/r principally the mam
who does not fear him.
'Lliomme eat plao6 libre entre le vice etla yerto.
MlRMONTEL.
Man is placed free between vice and wrtue,
'11 ae met Untfonra derriftre oebii qoi parle.
Li BauTfiaa.
£Rr places himsdf aUoays behind the speaker,
Faia aMudier devant ioi Tai^ ezteimfaiatear.
,9tnd h^sn thee the mimmimKfimg ongeL
Digitized
by Google
tmiLF^MlttOWi^ fS.
(7) T!it pfepoatCionB marking unioa, are,
Oatre, Aouicir;
JbnepU, except !
Eon,exetpif
Baat^wiOMii;
Je yeuzTivre avec elle, avec elld ezpirer.
GoBauuA
^/ urtS livewith her, die icUh her.
Oulrt restime de 8oi-m6me, IlioimAte hcnmiM
pondde eneorid Testinie et la confiance unhwiw
Belles. IfARMOMTHi.
BesUeiKff-edeem.the honest mtm possesses waveruii
tskemand cot^^uitnos.
(8.) Thcwe of Bepaiation, exception, are :--
11 traTaOle tonte la semaiDe, excepU le dkaaaebi^
L'AcAstfma.
He works ike whole ideek^ except Sunday.
Hbrmu toi, tout le monde est content.
AU are pieased^ except yoti,
Nol n'ania de I'esprit, hors nous et nos amis.
MOLlfiRB.
No one skaU have wU but ourselves and ewrfritnds.
Point de verta jov religion, point de Donheiif
sans Tertn. Diderot.
No tirUu without religion, no happiness without
VlfftUOm
On pent tout sacrlfler k ramiti6, stsuf llionnAteti
et la Justice. M aetmontbu
We may sacr^UeoQ to fiioTidship, except honesty and
justice,
(9.) Tka prepoiitions of opposition are :—
Le travaU est nne meillenreressom'ce umln renanl
que le plaisir. Trublbt.
iMor is a tetter resource against ennui tham
pleasure,
Nona soivrons nuUgri nons le Tainqnenr de Lesboa.
Bacimb.
We shaU fiOow against our wiU the conqueror cf
Xjesbos,
La y6rit6 nonobstant le pr^ogi, Ferrenr et la
mensonge, se fkit jour & la fin. Marmontbu
TYuthf pr^udice^ error and faJMfiod notwOhstandm
ing, comes at last to Ught.
(10.) The prepoaitionB of conformity are : —
La terre, cette bonne mdre, mnltiplie sea dooa
sdon le nombre de ses enfknts. FtficiLON.
The earthy thai good mother ^ muiUpUes her gifts ac
cording to the nwmber of her children,
Les talents prodnisent suivant la cnltnre.
Mabmontbl.
^ Talents produce according to their cultivation,
(11.) Several woxda phoed together and performing the part 9i »
preposition, are called a prepositional phrase : —
1 regard da^ wUkngmrdtof
rfkvtnt de, in favor ^t
la reserve de, rsmrpingf ^,
Digitized byCjOOQlC
UB;iff€,imspiUofs
Kooobstant) notwUk-
iaeeording^
COVIVVOTIOVfl.— § TS.
§ 78. — ^Thb Conjunctioit.
(1.) 3onjaiictl >xia are invariable words whieh serve to eonnetl
words and sentences.
(3.) French grammaiiam divide the eonjonetiona into oiiie
I Copulative:
et, and; ni, nor; que, that ; de soite que, m
that; ^10.
vaia, but; qaoiqne, thovgh; cependanti
yet; dwj.
ouy or ; on Ijen, else ; ni, neither ; dtc
aavoir, namely; comme, as; c*est-di^-direi
that is to say; dtc. .
qnaod, lorsque, when; pendant qne, loAtZe,
si, ^; sans qnoi, vriihmd which ; aappos^ que,
supposing that ; iiu^
car, for; puisque, einoe; ponrqnoi, tpAy,
wherefore; dtc
or, done, therefore ; ainsi, tikm ; d'aiUeiii%
hesiAes; iic
^ qtte,/fta^
*
(8.) We here present a list of the conjunctions and conjonetive
phrases most commonly aaed in French. We ^dll divide them iote
two classes.
1. Conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which may be plaord la
the first or in the second part of a period :—
% Adversative,
8 Disjunctive,
4 £2xpIanatory,
6 Circumstantial,
6 Conditional,
"} Causal,
8 Transitive,
8 Determinative,
A cause que,
A moins que,
Aussitdt que,
Au cas que,
ipn
Ainsi que,
endu
Aprte que,
insi
Attendu que,
Afin que,
Au rcste,
Avant que,
Cependant que^
De crainte que,
De m6me que,
Pe peur que,
Dopnis que,
Desorte que,
Durant que,
En cas que,
Kacoraque,
because i
unless!
as soonas;
in case tkat^ if;
after that;
asy as well as ;
whereas:
in order that ;
besides;
before that, sooner
than;
aWumgh;
for fear that, lesti
in the same way as;
for fear thaif test;
since that;
so that;
whUe;
in ease thai;
Jusqu'& ce que,
Lors^ue,
Ou bien.
Outre que.
Pendant que,
Parce que,
Pourvu que,
Puisque,
Qnand,
Quoique,
§'•
Sans que,
Sit6t que,
Soit que,
SI ce n'est que.
Suppose que,
Tant que,
Tandisque,
YA que,
untUthatf
if when;
OTf dse;
besides that g
whUethat;
because;
provided ;
since ;
if when;
although, thought
unless;
provided thai;
beitthat;
unless;
supposing that;
provided that;
frmfidedthoL
Digitized
by Google
IV9B8JS0T10S8ir--| U.
8. Tlie eoDJiinctions and conjanctire phrases which nsaally cpiM
between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dii*
i momvatarily interrapted» are ^-^
Anssi bien qae, as well as ;
Aprds toat, neveriheless t
A condition qne, on condition (hatf
Au snrplnSi
C'est ponrqaoi,
Cependant,
C'ost-a-dire,
C'est-a-saToir,
^'
Done,
£n cfTet,
Et puis,
Mais.
Partant,
Par con86q«ent»
Ponrtant,
Sans quoi,
SaToir,
Sinon,
Toutefois,
besides i
therefore;
however;
that is to say:
that is;
for, becofULSe;
iherefori;
See (iesson 100— Examples on the different uses of conjunctiona»
in fact;
andthen§
but;
therefor$f
consequaUifi
however ;[
unless that;
to wits
unless;
neverlheless.
§ 14. — ^Intkbjbctions.
(1.) The inteijections indicate some sudden affection or emotion
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place
of entire propositions.
(S.) Some imply astonishment :^
( Beanx arts, eh I dans quels lieuz n'a?e»-voas droit
AH I *ii I A« t de plaire. Dblillb.
Aa.eni«c i Fine arU, ah !in what place have fou not aright ta
1 please,
(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, die. :— -
iMB^akOndeedi ( Ouais I ce maltre d'annes vous tient big w OBur.
Ooi da, truly, dec. lA^Undeed! this fencing master di^ileases yon wick.
(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : —
VA(n I n»iUL'u w/A A^ S Foiu du loup st do sa race I La Fontaimi*
^'^^^'"'^''^^XAwaywithSuwolfandkisTace!
ToatheiLXil softly! j Tout beau, monsieur; tout beau I
MOLlfiBB.
\SufUy, sir; softly!
(6.) We shall cany no further this classification, but content our*
selves with giving a ust of the most usual interjections :^-
Ah! ah! Oht oh!
AMI eigh! OuaisI aJi,indeed! a»,$ol
Bah! bah! OufI eigh!
Chut I silence! hist! Paf! crack!
Shi eh! St! hist!
Fi! fy! Sust quick^f!
Oare! taleecaret ZestI quickly!
Ha! ha! Fidonct fytheni
H61as alas! Ho 9a! hoUa!
Heul * Idas! H^bienl now then!
HoUl hoBa! Bhbien! weUthmt
Hoi ho! Ouidal tnOy!
Hem! hem! Or9&! quidilfi
Hdn! • €h! Tout beau! tofUy!
HnnI hmmt Bflenoe! Faix! WMf
Digitized
by Google
^.,'. ♦-'•
(1.) Syntax treata of the agrcementi gOTenmienti aad i
of words in twtonces.
(3.) One word is said to agree with another* when it takae the
same modifieation of gender, nnraber, and peraon.
(3.) One word govema another, when by the iniknue of tlw
former the latter ia made to aaanme a particular form or place.
(4L) Thi^prbper arrangement of words conaisU hi plaong them m
the order aanctioned by grammatical rules, deduced ftom the best
reputable cuatom.
(6.) For the cases adopted by the modem tVench grammarian^
the student is referred to ( 3, and ^ 4a, (2.) (8.) (4.) (5.)
§ 16. — ^Thk Nouk.-^Placs or Nouirs.
(1.) In French, as well as hi Engliah, a noun used m the sab|eet
or nonunatiye of an affirmative or negative seottenee, gepinliy pfo-
ithevetb: —
takes ^p^
proMtus,
.Vkomme le plus obsenr aims la
liberty. Ghatbaubkiand.
VejpSrance tient lieu des biens
q^u'elle promet La CHAxrsstfE.
(SL) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject is
pbced after the verb: —
Ome takes the flact aftk$ bn^
n n'est point de noblesBe, oik
manque la verttL CntauA/ns,
La fortune est k cralndre oik
manque la aageste. BouasAULT.
Wktrt wisdom is vanitmg, for'
Ums is to Ufiared,
(8.) In intoijected sentences, that is, in sentences which we^
while repeating the words of a person, ihrcitD among other sentence^
to indicate that person as the speaker; the subject, in French, nuul
always follow the verb : —
Heureuz, disaU Mentor ^ le peuple 1 Happy, said MetUor^ tko poopU
qui est conduit par un sue roi ! I who are governed by a win king,
(4^) In intorrogatiye sentences, the noun generally precedes the
verb which must be immediately followed by a pronoun eorreqK>nd»
Ing in gender, number and person with the noun : —
ItfflMriest-cBf unmall LatTtej IsdeaJtkwi^ ewU7 bUfralmn^
est-«Uf unbieni CsisiLLON. 1^7 lAUnXLj, thath^isUamevdi
(6.) When the aenteaee commences with one of the followh^
wvwds, oA, tD&erv; que, what; eombicn, haw wmA; qiurd* uihm^
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
%T»»4|C #F m^VM%'-ri1ik
4ia
jtwdiMe with tlM latt nik^—
aftor th« Mrik w to ae.
Mertyttrefdf*? or
Ot Totre ^^ est-il 1
Mail que lert «» low rignt, k
' qmil oe aoit beaaf
BomuuvLT.
Of vkai Kjv ii a Zmt mifik Imi-
JmUbtgloriausf
<e.) Th6noiin,iiaedaaadii«etregj«Mn»haatiiaauDefkeaiiitlia
aanteoff} in Franeh aa in English:—
La fi»oe fbnde, ateod et main- 1 Power fimnds, extauU amd wum^
tiant nn cMfirv. Savbin. | taint an emfire.
' La malheiir ijovie vn
btstm k la gloire dea grandu horn-
mea. Tistaos.
ATea-Tons donna let Uvres k men
Mrel QiEAULT DuTirxsa.
(7.) When there aroi in the same aentence, two novna, oi^ need
aa direet, the other aa indJreet regimen, and thoae noma with the
arorda qualifying qr modifyiag them»are of equal length, the dbreet
legiaien ehonld precede the indirect :— *
Mufrriunesaddanemliak9$$Uii
gUfry of great mei^
Bow fim gwen ike hooks to mm
brother?
(8.) When, however, the qaalifying or explanatory woida render
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the r^gune indirect ia
placed first:--*
ATea-vons donna d num frdre les
Uores qne Tons lui ayiea promis 1
Les hypocrites psrent dee dekors
^'UrexiXL les meet ki plus konieux,
NofiL.
Have you given my trotker tki
booitf WMck you had promited km?
ffypocrUet adorn loUh the appear*
once of virtue, the vtott thameful
vices.
(9.) The indirect regimen precedea the direct regimen, when tha
meaning would otherwiae be doabtful :— -
Tichez de ramener par la dou- 1 TYy to hrinf baek^ by miidiMfl^
eiuir oes esprUt igarSs. I these erring spiritt.
BaSCBEEELLB. ] 0
Any other conatniction would render the sentence oquiToeuL
(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes
the name of the object possessed; and the two are connected by
veana cf 'a (the old Saxon genitiTe termination). In French the
order ia ahraya diflTerent The name of the object precedea that of
the possessor, and the connecting link ia a prepoiition : —
LealbresdenMmaasL I My friend^t books.
Tons ayea tu la montre de ma | You have teen my titter^s vatol.
• TftdsmMlalBobel
Iha i«#Bsa diraelii shfirtat fkm
by Google
Digitized t
4m
MtSrXX 09 tBS JLKTtOlt.-*-^ 7T.
(11.) The name of an object always preeedea the taaine of Hn
rabataxjce o# which it is fonned, or which it contains. Tho prepoi^
tion de comes between them >—
A marble tdUe.
Pranu has many marUe quarria.
Une table de marbrc.
La France a beaucoap de ca
riftrcs de marbre.
Un boutcille de Tin. A botOe of i
(13.) The word representing an individual always precedes that
describing his particular occupation, or the meichandlae of which he
idisposes: —
Un mattre de dense. | A dancing master.
Vn maitre de langnes. | A teacher of langiM^es.
Un marchand de drap. | A draper , or dealer xn doth,
(18.) The name of a vehiele, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose
40 which it is adapted. The connecting i»eposition is generally d .«'—
Avind^miU,
A mstrmUt.
WaUr-ifniUs,
A steam carriage.
A steamboai,
A two horse carriage,
(14.) The name of an object precedes the noun representing its
particular produce, use, or appendages, &c. A generally connects
these nouns :— -
Un moulin-a-vent
Un monlin-a-fariue,
Des moiilios-a-eau.
Une voituro-Qrvapeur.
Un bati>an-&-vapeur.
Uno voiturc a deux choTaux.
Le goAt du iVnitde Varbre d pain
reasemble celui de I'artichant
Bernasdin de 8t. Pierse.
lie nom de vertu, dans la bouche
de oertaines personnes, fkittressail-
lir comme le grelot du serpent d
sanneties. Mme. NacKaa.
Les bUes d comes ne sont pas si
nombreuses que les bites a lauie.
La 8slle4i-manget.
Du bolvd-brikler.
Un verro-i-eau.
See ^ 81, (2.)
7T^ taste eftkefnat of the bread-
tree resembles that of the arUehabe.
The name of virtae in the motUk
tsertain persons makes one shud^
', like the noise of the raUk-snake^
Homed animals (neat cattle) tsn
not so numerous as sheep {wool ofii-
rntUs),
Tne dining room.
Fire wood. •
A water glass, L 9. glass for wattr^
§ 77. — ^Ths Article. — ^Uss of the Articls.
(1.) The article* must be used in French before every noun eik
ployed in a general sense, or denoting a whole species of oliiiects;
although in similar cases, the article is not used in English. Ex. >-«
* The student will recollect that the French have only one srtide, k,
the woid iM being by modem French frammaitons, veiy properly tHam^
ed with the numeral a4iectives.
Digitized
by Google
aVVTAX or TBS AKTZOIB^*-^ W.
Lcr biciifltitf peitTwt ftont snr
■nc ime bien o£e. Vultairs.
L'honneur, aux ^nds €0sar8, est
pliiH jher qae la vio. CoRKEiLrji.
La honto suit toi^ours un liche
d^vespoir. CRiBiLLON.
(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular senoe >—
Bene/Us am o/i p&mmfid wlA •
loeU disposed mind.
Honor istoUh maffnanimous kearti
more precious than life,
Skam/s always follows a cnnurdljf
despair.
' i> bonheur des m6chant8 comme
vn toreui 8*6coule. Bacins.
Ii-arbrissean lo plus sain a be-
■oiB de culture.
FaBBB D'fioLANTfNB.
/> moment du p6ril est celui du
courage. La Habpb.
TV happiness of the wicked nmi
away Uke a torrent.
ne hfiiUMfit dt^vb needs nfffiwi
tion.
Tie time ef perU is ike time fw
courage.
(3.) The article is used before the names of eountries, provineesi
rivers, winds and mountains:—
La Franco est bom^e an midi
rr ks Pyr6n6e8 et la M6diterraD6e ;
Test par la Suisse et la Savoio ;
an nord par la Belfiqae et k Tonest
parrOo6an. Bes pnncipales riYidres
•ont la Meuso, U Rhin, la Seine, la
Loire, la Qaronne et le Rhone.
Franceis bonnded en the south hf
the Pyrenees and the MediierrO'
nean: on the east by Switzerland
and Savoy; on the north by BeU
giuMj and on the west by Uui Onean,
lis principal rivers are ike Meuse^
the Rhine, the Seine, the Loire^ the
Garonne and the Rhone,
(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or
•ome other city within their boundaries, take no article: —
?iapUs est un pays d61icieux.
Venise 6tait un 6tat puissant
New York est un €tat sain.
Naples is a deUghtful country
Venice was a powerful state.
New York is a heaUky staU.
(6.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names i^
Le g6n6ral Cayaignac
Le president Bonaparte.
General Cavaignacf
President Bonaparte*
(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer-
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned
l>elow: —
Lamonarchie, monarchy f A I'^cole, at schools
Leparlement, parliament; Aucolldge, at college;
Le gouromement, government ; Au march6, at, to market t
Le christianisme, ChrisHamty g Aulit, mbed.
L*6piscopat, episcopacy; dec dec
Ar^gliso, at church;
(7.) Bdfore the names of the seasons, and the following
L'annie prodialne, next year; | L'autonme dernier,
Ltaite deinttre, lad spring; iLaapnai
Lspriatempsprochafai,iMai<j9PriNf /] Ae.
Digitized
taufatti
lattwttki
by Google
HM • #Tir f AX ojr fl ks jlmit toi. i.*^ H&.
(8j Hm mums of Mvwd cities Uko the nMo.
have genertlly^ a meaning, and indieate often natural ob|eeta »—
Le Hane, Jbvw; I LaBaobeUe, BoeUBet
La Hale, TkeHmgUie;\ Le Detroit, Ddrnttt
(9.) Inapeaking of the parte of the body or of the qualities of tbo
mind, the French uae the article in cases where the English use a
possessiTs adjeetive, or the indefinite article >^
Votre Mrs a Us cberenx w(An, Yow brdker kasHaek Uir,
IlB'estbleMAilamain. Be has kurt kis hand.
Charles a ia m6moire excellentsw Charles has ism exeeOsnl sirasf|r.
g 78. — Vsm OF TBM AjmciM bbvorii Words taksh nr ▲ Pa»-
Tinvs Sbjmi.
(1.) A word, when used to denote sn entire oliject or elsss of o1^
jeots, ia said to have a general sense ; when, however, it is emplojfed
to indicate a part of any tiling or class of tilings, eonsidsrsd in releiw
enoe to the wkoUj it is ssid to have a partitive sense. Before a woid
taken parthively, the word some or amfy is, or may, in Engliab, often
be employed. If^ for example, I use the words coun^ and wood,
abstractedly, I take them in the general eense : but if I say, give nm
loood, your brother has courage^ I use them in the partitive sense, that
is, I ask for a part of that substance called toood^ and attributs to your
brother something of that quality called courage.
(2.) The article accompanied by, or in combination with the prep-
osition ife, called by some grammarians the partitive article [} 13|
(10.)] is used before nouns taken in a partitive i
. Du petal et ds Teau Ini suiBseni
Bread and water are ei^fieientfir
himt that is, losie ^mki.
Bring us a$U and vimegars that
is, somesdlL
My native land has aksays (mm)
charms for me,
(3 ) The preposition de only is used, when the noun tsken in a
partitive sense, is preceded by an adjective :—
Apportei-iwus da wol et tf» vi-
nsigre.
Totyours la patrie a des charmes
pcur moi. La Hasps.
n-possdde de belles maisons.
ProposoDS-noos k nons-mAmes de
grands examples k imiter, plu-
t6t que de vatais mt&mes k snivre.
J. J. BOUSSSAU.
Lei ns propose to oarsdou rather $s
low vain systems.
. (4.) When, however, the noun preceded by the a^jeetive^ ia eoik
oeeted with it, and the two form a compound noun that noun takei
the artide aooorduig to rule (2.), as,
i| 4ttgnMrislMNm.j nmgpeepiei groat fmm{mml^
Digitized
by Google
• T»TAr a» Yss ABrrof»-s^M(Mi
4W
ride MB
4e
1 1 BOIUEAV.
(6.) The prepoaition alone ia naed before « noun, when it Is pi»i
ceded hf a c^llecliTe word er lyy am adveib of qwrntltj :—
ITne midtltado de peoples.
Beanoonp de penonnes.
A qnoi boD taut d^amia 1
Unsenl noaa suffit s'il noufl idme.
fL<Htti«.
A m/umude of nations.
MStowf ftfwon$»
Of what me are so many friends'
A single one suffices ifMl&otsus,
(6.) The article, howeTer* ia need, when the nom preceded hy a
coIlectiTe word, is limited by what follows. The worda la plnparty
the most ; bien, mamy ; and infiniment, infrntdy^ form also exceptions
16 the preceding rale : —
Un arand nombre des penonnes Many cf the persons wham I ham
qttsj*aiyiiea. NoBl.
B me reste pea des liTres qel
m'ont €t& donnfo. KoSi«.
Les mtehantsoBtbien dela pefaie
k demenrer nnis. FiniLON.
(7.) The prepoaition ie used alone before a noun plaoed after a
▼erb eoRJvgated Mgalively, but not interrogatively at the^amt
time:— "^
I have few lefi, of ike Mb wkkk
have been given me.
The wicked have mnck temMe ia
remain wiUed.
Jt ne TOQS ftrai pas de leproches.
L'on ne dit Jamais que Ton n'a
pofait iTeniit. Boursault.
On ne ikit Junais de blen d Diea
en ftiaant dn mal anx horames.
YOLTAIRB.
(S.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen-
tence:—
I shall cast nifon yonmo iipnwKAsa
Wsnefoer sasf^thaiwehavenfOwiL
IW never eon wf geomln tesfselta
CM, by doing evSL t» mm^
He doonea Jamais des oonseils qn*fl
soH dai^eienz de soiTre.
OttAm^T DuTiTica.
I Never give advifis which U is das^
\ gerons to fbO&m,
§ 19. — fiROLwn ImsFnriTB Aanois A oa Av.
The French nnmend adjective an, fnoae. ane, fern, aasweit to th
Uqfikh aitiele a or oa ({ 18» (4-) (H*)]*
The restiietioDS to ita me are specified in the lemarin en the aiw
tick.
§ 80< — ^Ripmnoa of thb AanoLB.
(1.) Oxnutu» KUI.X. The article* ia repeated befbre eveiy aoui
and every word used ae a noaa, havhig a eepaiate meaning >—
o This rale HVUes to the detenninattve a^Qecdvea, men, ton, son, cib
eetiAe.
Digitized
by Google
Mtmtxx ov «■» Amtso&s.-^M.
. Ltoamr, Ve&ptitt 'x moMnv, tout Tke kettri, tkt mind, tAv i
gtrae 4 U cttUnre. eveiy tJUng imptwes hv eulHvttumi
Le fiArc ct la mftre serDblaientez* 7%e /o/ik^ ««!< molker named U
citer luur ]>etite compaene a B*en «rcf/c Mnr litUe eomptmio^ U fma
rci^itre U premiere. Bufpon. j upon iljlrsl.
(3.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when otie<of tvo ad-
jectives united by the conjanetion e4| qnalifiea a noun expreaaed. uid
the other a noan understood >—
Lliistoire andeDne et la modeme. | AndaU and modem kistmy,
that is, rhistoire ancienne et rhistoire modeme.
Les philosophet andens et les mo- 1 Andenl €nd m&dem ^Mcmpken.
denies. I
Le premier et le second 6tage. | Thejirst and second stories.
(3.) Should, however, the two adjectives quHliQr the
pressed word, the article must not be repeated.
7%e wise -and pious FcnehnkssmeU
Le sage et pieox F6D61on a des
droits bien acquis a Testime g6n6-
rale. Girault Duvivibr.
▲ ces mots il lul tend le doux et
tendro ouvrage. Boileau.
(4.) When two nouns are joined by the conjunction ou, and tly
Pis merely a repetition or explanation of the first, the artid
not be repeated.
established rigkis to general «ii-
teem.
M these words he presents to Ata ikt
sweet and tender book.
l4ts Joues eu c6t6s de la tAte du
condor, soni oonvertes d'un duvet
noir. BuppoN.
On distinguaft parmi les nobles les
palatins ou gouvemeurs des pro-
vinces. J. J. Rousseau.
Tie cheeks or sides of the head eftL,
amdoTi aire covered witkblaek down,
T%ejf dtsUnpiished among the noUes
the palatines or governors ofproV'
inoes.
§ 81. — ^Miscellaneous Remarks on the Use of the Aktiolb.
(1.) I'he article is not used before numbers placed after the names
of sovereigns, to designate their order of succession [{ 26, ($.)]•
Louis diz-hmit, Charles diz. \ Louis the eighteenth, Charles thetentk,
(2.) The French put no artide before nouns placed in apposition
with, or explanatory of,,other preceding nouns : —
Louis treize/25 de Henri qnatre, tat
bton diiftrent de son p^re.
Le Tartufe, com£die de MoUdre.
Lamartine, c6l&bre po&te et prosa-
teur fhtn^is.
Je suis fVan9ai8, Tons Ates am^ricdn.
Louis the thirteenth, the son of Bnurf
the fourth^ was very different from
his father, .
The Tartufe, a comedy ofMoU^re.
Lamariane, a celebrated 'Prenek poti
and prose writer,
I am a FVenchman, yon eere em
Ameriemu
(8.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or rcftr*etttd \f$
•tfaer words, the vn is then pUced before it>—
Digitized
by Google
mri^f AS OF TMM' A%^tCVM.-^9i^ 40T
CM honmiA mt «• Fran^li
d'nne'ftmille illostro, mais malheii<«
reuse.
Ci^ inostieiin sont des marchanda
dtt Lycu.
T%tU num is a Fyaukmtm, df mp
T%Me gentlemen an merckanii
from Lyons.
(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed th*
words menUoned in { 76, Rules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) -^
une moDtre d'or, a gold watch;
un maitre de dessia, a drmmi^^muLer $
un moaliD-a-vapeur, a Ueam mill;
une chambre-d-coQcher, a bed-room.
(6.) Some exceptions to rule (3.) will be better explained by ex
amplea than by precepts: —
un magasln & fohii a kgyMii
une bonteille k Tin, a untte-loUle,
aie a loft intended for hay, a bottle intended for wine^ but not adn-
ally containing hay or wine.
un magasin au foin, ^ a kay4ofi ;
la bouteille au Tin, tke vfine-ioUle.
That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for
wine.
un magasiniie foln, aloft \ j^,jj ^r S hay :
une bouteille ^ Tin, aboUUi-^^J \wine.
(6.) Proper names of persons do not receiTO the article, unless it
forms It part of the name ; as, Ldiruny Lamarline^ La Harpc, Lik
FonUgine; as also in some gallicised Italian names;, as, Le Tatset
Tasso, Le Danle^ Dante, dtc. An adjectiTO, howeTer, coming before
proper names, is generally preceded by the article.
i> ban et naif Ia Fontaine. I 'ne good and candid La F\mUttne,
Le pieux F6n61on. | The pitms Fenelon.
(7.) It has been seen [{ 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article is
often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi>
viduals : —
Nous aTons tu ii la foil h. la t^te We have seen at once at the kfioi
dc8 escadrons impiriaux, les Mnrat,
les K^Uermann, les Laasalle, les Mod-
toma Lc CM NiaAL For.
(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the
prepoaition en, take no article: —
En France, en Am6rique. In FVanee, in Americt.
(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used Indetou
minately; or after the word m standing before a noon, whidi is th»
iireet d^giinMi of a Terb» praeeding thei imgatiTa >m
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
of the imperial squadronSy Mwrat^
ftlfyr^s or TSB A»Troxi.i fttt
Now n'ayoiiH ni or ni argent
11% tUU'fo im •
You art tn tmrnkk.
We have neither gM nor
(10.) The article is omitted before plus and moin$ in companllf%
•enteneea, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding piece, be
msertedr—
Plas une action
lie est lona'jle.
est utQe, plus I
Tke laam utefid an mdlxam U^ ike
wufre praisetporihjf U is.
(11.) The article precedes plus and moin$ to express amiparium
in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noon : —
Yotrs sosnr no plenrait pas, quo!- 1
qif elle f&t la phis affligto de tontes
oesdames.
Your sister did not weep, although
she was the most grieved of oXL those
ladies.
(13.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a so*
perlative, in which, however, no direct oompuison is intended >-
Yoftre BQsnr ne plenre pes lort
mdme qn*elle est le plus amigte.
NoKl.
TbttT sister does not we^, SMIS'
when she is moat grimmk
(18.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted
in a i«pid ennmeimtMn of individnals :•—
Citoyens, strangers, amis, emie-
mis, tons le r6vArent
Citizens, strangers, friends, s»^
mies, all reverence him.
8 82t-
iljoirter ibi,
▲voir besota,
Avoir chaud.
te give fidtht
toMveneed;
to be warms
Demander pardott,fo beg pardon r
Donner avis, { . .va— .
Fairepart,J «*»V*^;
Entendre raiUerie.* to bear wJtes .
Avoir contnme,
to be acciutomed s
A:^oir dessefn,
to intend,'
Faire attention,
to poa OMemee^mZ
Avoir dispute,
tohavedifculties;
Faire bonne obta,t0 Uve wdlf
Avoir envie,
to wish, to desire !
Faire crftdit,
to give credit s
Avoir appMIt,
tohaveatnappetite,'
Faire envie,
to excite envVm
Avoir ftdm,
tobekungrff
to be coils
Faire honnenr,
tohoners
Avoir ih>id,
Faire horrenr^
to inspire horrert
Avoir honte,
to be ashamed;
Faire peur,
tofrightens
ATdrmal,
to have a pom;
Faire mentiott,
iomeniiont
Avoir patioBoe,
to have patiences
to be a/raids
Faire naufVage,
to suffer shipwredii
Avoir penr,
Faire place,
tomakereomt
Avoir piti6,
teUikepU^s
Faire plaisir,
to oblige,
Avoir raison,
tobeHffhts
Faire prteent,
to present:
Avoir sommei^
tobeskepfs
Faire inflexion,
torefieds
Avoir soif,
tobethirO^s
Faire tort»
toUijwres
Avoir soin,
to take cares
Mettreiln,
toptUanend,
Avoir Bidet,
to have reason s
Mettre ordre,
to arranges
Avoir tort,
to be wrongs
Perdre courage,
to laee comrage i
Chercher fbrtnne, <0 seek on^e- for-
Porter envie,
toewofi
tunes
Porter malheur.
to cause mideem
toruntheriOtt
tones
Prendre congit
iotakeleam^i
« Rntendie to raillBttotsallNr said, l«tHttstaiB#*i
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
•rvtAX^w TBS AJ>jsoTiTa~9.«a, 84 4M
^^ fca, tQiMtekfins Tonirliaei, to Ukt the pUm i
Prendre Mrde, U tola cart ; Tenir parole, to k$ep mie^swordt
Prendre n«l«ifio, io iake healk ; Tronver moyen, toJSndmtmui
Prendre mMecine to take medicine ; Avec ardeur, Ac., wUh ardor t
Prendre racine. to take root; Par d^plt, Ac., through smUs
Rendre eorapto, to account ; Pour rdcompento.as « tnoardt
Rendrcjnstice, to render justice; Ac.,
Eeodre Berylce, toobUp; Sans peine, wiXmd diOcuU^i
Bendre Yisito, tovml; Sans soad, without torrow «r
Tudr coinpa|;nie, to accompany ; care.
§ 83.— TflE Adjbotivx.
(1 ) We have seen [} 18, Rule (3.)] that an adjeetive relating to
two Bubatantives of the same gender mast agree with them in gender*
and be put in the plural :
(3.) And Rule (4.) that an ad{eetiTe> relating to two or mora nomn
of different genders, must be put in the masculine pluraL
^3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the coxy'onction et^
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes aetually to
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly oocupiod
with the last noun, seems to forget the others; the adjective will
assume the gender and number of the last noun only.
Toute sa vie n*a €i6 qu'un travail,
qu'une occupation continuelle,
Massillon.
Je ne connais point de roman,
point de com6dio espaf(nole saos
combats. Florian.
Le fer, le bandeftu, la flamme est
iouteprite, Racinb.
HiswhoUUfehasbeennotkkightt
continual labor and occupation.
I know no romance, no
comedy, without combaU,
T%esword,theband,thelUmeUaU
ready.
(4.) Sometimes the adjective preceded by two or more aubetan.
tives joined by the conjunction e/, qualifies the last only. It i
then, of course, agree with that noun only.
Le bon goi^t des Egrptiens lew
fit aimer la solidity et la rtgularit6
toute mie. Bossmrr.
The rood taste of the Bgyptisau
made them like tolidity and %m»
adorned regvlariiy.
T%e sn& is a mark of good-wiB,
of apptamse^ amd of inward sati^ao^
tton.
Le sonrire est une marque de
bienveillance, d'applandissement,
et de satisikctlon intincure,
BUFFON.
§ 84.-— RbMARKS on TBI PXCITLIABITISS OW SSVSRAL AOJIOTITU.
(1.) The affective feu (2a2e, deceasei), is invariable, when placed
before the article or adjective determining a nonn. but vaiiea whan
plaeodt tfter the determining word : —
J%l oal dfre'i/n» ma scsur, que i J ham heard my late Mar my,
m file ei vol Moplmes la mtaie thai her damgkkr amd i wma ham
wmfU. jfoRmsamKU. I Iks mma ymr.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
4M
AVir»4X QlV THS 41>JS«VZTS.-^M.
J^dnede. . . doit& la MenyeQ-
lance dont VhoDorait la fevm reiqe,
Ics bonnes griccs de I'einpereur.
D£ Salvandy.
7^ iifiltf of . , , noe$ l# ttc^M^
w/tt of the uUe ra««» lamardi Aia,
/Af ^''0O(^ grace* of ike empervr.
(3.) The adjectivea nu, AoTM
placed before the nonn : —
n 6tait i»»-t6te ; lee picds chanss&i
de pctites aandales. Voltairs.
une denu-\i%wn aprto avoir quitU
le yai88eaa,Je fonlai le sol am6rl*
Cain. CUATEAUBRIAND.
and demi, half; are iiiTariable frfatea.
He was bare-headed ; he
feet small sandals.
Bdlfan hour after kacr
ship, Itrod the American
au
iU
(a) The acyectivea mi and <femv when coming after the n*iin
agree with it : —
Aooontamee tos entantsa demeii-
rer 6t6 et hlver, jour et nuit toi^jours
lAte mu. J. J. RousiiEAU.
Opimlas paya la t^te de Cains
Qracchns, diz-sept livres et demie
d'or^ YjcaTOT.
Aceustem your ^Udren to remm%
summer and vrinler, daif end night,
always bare-hecuted.
Opimiui paid far the head »f Caius
Gracchus, seventeen pounds and c
halfofgM.
(4.) The acljectives excepts, erctfpr; pass4,pa52; y-compria, tnelzol-
ing; ci-joint, ci-inclus, crmieoree?, tnc^oieci; franc-de-port, |ws2£^e/m;
come under the two last niles: —
Yons tronverez ci-joint la copie
da la lettre qua M. . . m'a 6crite.
J. J. BOUSSEAU.
Le dessin de cet oiseau m'a €il
•nroyi d'Angleterre, avec la des-
eripUoQ d-jointe, Bcffom;
Yons tronverez d-indtis, copic de
ma lettre. Dombrgues.
Jo vons recommande les cinq
lettres d-induses,
BsaNARDIN DB St. PiERRE.
J*ai re^Uj/ranc-de-port, une lettre
aaonyme. J. J. Rousseau.
Le Contrat social est imprim6,
et vons en recevrez dome ezcm-
plaires, francs de port
The same.
You will find annexed the copy of
the leUer uAidk M. . , has wriUen
to me.
TJie drawing of that bird came to
me from England^ with the descrip-^
lion here aniiexed.
You toill find inclosed^ a copy of
my leitiir.
1 recommend to you the Jive kUers
inclosed
I received^ postage free^ an anony-
mous letter.
The Social Contract is printed,
and you will ^ceive twelve oipiesfrm
ofpostagis.
(5.) An adjective nsed adverbially, that is, modifymg a verb, ia of
eonrae invariable [} 67, (3.)] : —
En Laponie, nne peau d*hermine
oonftte qnatre ou dnq sons; la
chair de cet aniaud sent tr&s maU'
vais. Regnaro.
De ma vie Je n'ai entendu des voiz
monter si haul.
M"M. DC SiviOMi.
In LupUtnd the sJnn of the herwnn
oasis four or five sousi the fksh of
this animal smells bad.
Never in my life hove M
women's voices enmd m. Intd*
Digitized
by Google
#
• T»vA» er mm Ajcxmcmyf^^ m*. All.
§ 85^ — Vlacm ox thx QpAUFzzKa AwKcaxvx*
(I.> No tnvariitlile rble can be gmnr fbrihrpiflee' of tii^ii^eeihv
ii» French, althongh it foUows the nottti much more freqiteBCijr*liuni
it precedes it: —
(3.) The adjectives which are generally placed after flie noim are :«»
1. All participles present and past used adjectively ;
xaaQuenanDoreconnaUsanUf a gralrfui penm g
nne liistoiro amusanUf an amusinr kitUny i
on enfant cheri, a beloved cSUd #
de la viando rdUe, roaU meaii
2. AUadjectivesexptesaiBgtiie form, the shape;
une table ronde, a round taNe;
une chonibrc. Carrie^ a square room ;
(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an objeot is eon^
posed;—
acide ndfturiqu^y mdfkime add .,
corps airien^ atrial body ;
(4.) Thoseezpressmg color, taste, or folatiiig to heaiingaiidtoaeli
toy;
rni- habit noir, a Hack eoat t
du flruit amtr, biUerfruU g
des sons karmonieuz, harmonunu pmadig
de la cire r.MUe, tofl waxg
(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively;
an homme riche, a rich mang
une femme aveugle, a blind wonan g
(6.) Adjectives representing nation ;*
une granomaire fran^aiae, a F^mck grammar g
une dictionnaire ailemand, a Oerman dieUonaryg
(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind;
un homnie boiteuz, a lame man g
un esprit ali6n6, an unsound mindg
(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in a/, able, ible, ique and if,
un homme liberal, a liberal man t
une nation paisible, a peacefiU nation g
un esprit fnnatinue, a fanatical spirit g
Utt loldat fugitif; ajugiUve soldier.
• Tlio French often um the name of the country instead of the ad>
|ective of nation ; particularfy when speaking of the produce of tte
De la kine tPEsptfne, • 5nntMft wooL
Da fronage d^AngkUnr§f Bnglitk 4km
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
4M
ttirtAatoy vaa ApjnejMrn^^ 9$.
(9.) It must not be inferred from the rales above that the a^jeetlTt
always comes after the noon. The deviations are quite frequent; and
no other reason t/ian taste ean be assigned for them. We give a
few examples, in which the same objective is, by different authors^
placed before and after the noun :—
Before the Noun.
Jamais nous no goAtons de par-
kuie ailfipresse. Cohnsillb.
enjoy per/ed {wnaOoyed)
We
fietmure.
U fallui r6vdllcr d'un frofond
Mouneil cet autre Alexandre.
BOSSUBT.
Ml was necessary to roust from a
ffofownd sleep that second Alexan-
der,
Craignez, d*un vain plaisir les
trompeuscs amorces. Boilbau.
Fear the deoeUful aUurements of a
vain pleasure.
After tie Noon.
Qu'a-t-n dit, qu'a-Ml Gtit,
Qui ne prometta i Rome un eo^
pereur parfaU? Bacinb.
IVhat has ie said^whal has ke dome
which does not promise to Rome a
perfect emperor?
bans un Bommell profond fls out
paaae leur vie. Bou^bau.
T%eif spent their life in a profound
sleep,'
Le mottde est une figure trempeuae
qui psflse. BurroN.
like world is a deceilfnl picteere^
which passes before us,
(10.) We find, however, in our best writers, few examples of a long
adjective placed before a short noun ; although they often place the
adjective before the noun to give variety or force to the diction, they
never, for instance, would say (in prose) d'imaginaim 26is, for dea
lois imaginaires, imaginary laws,
(11.) The following adjectives when used in a literal aonse, geiie>
nlly precede the noun : See { 144, Note : —
Beau,
♦Bon,
♦Brare,
Cher,
Ch6tif,
Grand,
Oros,
Jeune,
Joli,
Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table.
§ 86^ — ^LisT or Adjecuvxs bavino a Diffbbeitt MbanikOi
ACCOBDIKO AS THET PRKCBDB OR FOLLOW TBB NoUN.
fine, handsome s
Mauvals,
bad;
good;
orave ;
M6chant,
wicleedi
Meillcur,
betters
dear{loved)i
Moindre.
less;
mean;
Petit,
smaU;
UUl;
large;
Saint,
Vieux,
»'
youngi
Vrai,
true.
pretty:
tin bon homme, a simple^ artless
man;
Un brave homme, a worthy man;
Une oertaine histohe, a certain
story;
un Cher eniknt, a dear child;
0Be cwmwwne voiz, a
Vn homme bon, a good, beneveleni
man (un homme de bicn) ;
XSn homme bra^e, a brave man ;
Une histoire certatne, a rekabk
story;
Une robe ch^ro, an eagwumw dnm
Une voix oomaiiM, mi mdimmrf
Digitized
by Google
•TWAX 09 tsa A»jactxTt^ ft.
419
fro enwl liomme, « tiresome wum;
lift denii6.'Q Aiiii6e, Me last fear (of
a series) ;
Udc fatismc clef, a false- key; an, inU-
talionkeift
Un furiuux mentcar, an exceuixe
liar ;
Un gaUat homme, a jf«ii<toiuu»;
ITn grand homme, a .i?rea< man ;
Le erand air, the air of good society ;
he liaut ton, a kamghty torn ;
Un honndte homme, anhonutmang
Le Jeune Pllne, wung Pliny!
Un malhonndte liomme, a dishonest
man;
Manvais air, awkward appearances
Un ni6chant livre, a poor book ;
Morte eaa, lowest tides;
Un noovcau livre, a new book^ {ano-
ther book);
Un paavre historlen, a wretched his-
torian f
Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous
mauf
Un petit homme, a man of small
sizeg
Mc8 proprca mains, my own hands ;
Un seui enfant, a single child ;
Un simple sokiat a private soldier;
Un triste horomo. a pitiful man;
Un unique tableau, a single pic-
ture;
Un vilain homme, an ugly, unptea-
sant man;
Una naio histoire, a mere ftory;
Un homme crnei, a erud memg
L'ann6o dernidre, last year ;
Une clef fknssc, a key belonging it
another lock^ {the wrong key) ;
Un lion furieus, a furious lion;
Un homme galant, a man atteniim
to the ladies;
Un homme grand, a tall men; ^■
L'air grand, a noble appearances
Le ton hant a loud tone;
Un homme nonndte, a polUe man #
Pline le Jeune, PLiny the younger t
Un homme malhonndte, an unpo&§
L'air mauvaia^ malieious appeear*
anee;
Un livre ro«ehant, a biting, camsHc
book;
Ean morte, stagnant water;
Un Hvre nouveau, a book recenHy
published;
Un hbtorien pauvre, a kistarkm
without pecuniary means;
Un homme plaisant, an agrteabk
man;
Un homme petit, a mean man /
Mes mains propres, my dean hands s
Un cnfUnt seul, a child alone;
Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier;
Un lioramo triste, a sorrowful ntanf
Un tableau unique, a matchless pie»
ture;
Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserif
Une hlstobe vraie, a tnu history.
§ 87.— Reoimsn or Adjeotivbs.
(L) The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb
completing or defining their sense. Between the noun and the ad-
jective comes one of the prepositions, 2i, de, dans, en, sur, &c. :— •
Get homme est digne de louange, I T^his man is worthy of praise,
Cc gftndial ust digne de commander, | 7%U general is worthy to command.
In tliti fir:»t phrASC, Inuange^ in the second, commander, is the regi-
men of the Adjective digne,
{'I,) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It la
i to it only to give it a paiticuUr limitation : —
WUha^
WUhimt a regimen^
O0t homme n^est pas content
With a regvmen.
Get homme n'esi paa oo^limtii
iOBfilt.
by Google
Digitized t
€H
M^HrtAX VT ts« 'A»y»(n'AVJt*{tgi.
(V) As nmy be mm in Ihe last vsntniee, an sdjeetive isnot «1-
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond*
big a4ieetive in English. Tbas, aflt^ the. adjective rotuent^ the
French use the preposition de {of), while after its English represen-
tative {flea$ed)^ the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes*
«lie»lle and aeveral other Fieneh grammarians, while acknowledginf
the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that ** L'usage et lea
dictioumurcs les feront connaltre" (use and dictionaries will make %»
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after
the adjeetivea. As the student will scarcely be satisfaii de teta^ we
Ifhre a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add lists of a«||oetivw
with their proper accompanying prepositions.
(4.) When an adjective follows the verb ttre^ used unipersonaIly«
ihe preposition de is placed after that adjective, and before the vevb
following: —
Jt is sweet to die far fme*s amnirp.
It is easier to be wise for another thm
for one's self.
It is more glorious to conpur mm's
self than to courier others.
II est dotix de monrlr pour son pays.
II est plus aise d*6lre sage pour les
antres que pour soi-mdme.
La RoCHBPOirCAlTLD.
n est plus glorienx de se vaincre
tof-mtoe, que de vaincre les
antres. ScunisT.
(6.) It shonld be recollocted, that it is only when the verb itre m
imiperaonal, thai it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo*
sition. In other cases, the adjective must be followed by the prepo>
aition proper to it See { 88, 89, 90, 91, 93, below.
Cela est doox au toucher. I T^at is soft to the touch,
Cela n'est pas iUs6 d fairs. I T%at is not easy to be done {easily
I done.)
§ 86. — List of Adjsctives requuong thb PitSFOsmoir Dm,
Absent de,
Ambitieux de,
Amoureux de,
Avide de,
Approchant de,
Capable de,
Cbiri de,
Complice de,
Content de,
Cnrieux do,
D68iiT ax do,
DCdaigneux de,
Pi8ol« de,
DiffiSrent de,
Digne de,
Bntieux de,
fU>fgn6de,
aitenl(frmn)
ambUious of
inlovewili
eager for
approaching^ near
eapaJbte of^ to
beloved ip
accomplice in
pleased with
curimis to
desinnts to, of
disdaininf^ to
grieved with
different from
worthy of to
ewnous of
remote iftvr from
adoMte
Exempt de,
Fach6 de,
Fatign6 de,
Fler de,
Fort de,
Fou de,
Olorieus de,
Honteux de,
Ini{Mitiont de,
lucapablti do,
Inconsolable de,
Indig4ie de,
Indign6 do,
luquiet de«
Ivre de,-
Lasde,
Mecontent de,
Paremda,
Digitized
eocemptfrcm
sorry for
tired wilh^ of
proud of
confidcTiiirh
excessive*^ Jond of
proud of
ashamed of
impalienlof
iiuapable of
hiconsolabUfor
unworthy of
indignant wiSh
uneasy about
intoxicated wUh
weary of
dispieassd wiA
telatedU
by Google
tftVTAx ot ¥»t A]>jfteTirie.-^M,M. 41t
Pleio cU, /tiS 0/
Ravi do, glad to, of
Bassasid de, salialed with
Reconiuiufiftst de. grateftUf&r
Bcmpli de, )£^// wi/a
Kedovable de, iwidttedfor
Qui vit content de ricn, poss6de
tOQCe chose. Bojleau.
II o'c3t pas do Romain,
Qui ne fioit disireux de vous doimer
la main. Corneille.
Solg:iMiiz de,
86r de,
Sarpris de,
Tributaire de,
Viclime de,
Vide de,
sure of
surprised of
triSutary if
victim tOf of
void of
He who Uves corUent wil\ a hitk,
possesses oiL
There unoRomantkatisiiMde$i^
ous to reach you his hand.
§ 89. — Lun OF Adjbotivss Rsquiuko thb PaBPosmov JL
AcceasiVle k, aceessiUe to
Accoutumi &, accustomed to
Adhircnt a, adhering to
AgT6able a, aereeaJUe to
Ajnsti a, filed ftn
Anf6rieur &, prior to
Ais6 &,, easy to
Ardent &, zealous for
Asskln &, assiduous to
Attentif &, attenUve to
Bon a, good for
Cher A, dear to
Coofbrme &, similar to
Contraife &, contrary to
Crne] a, cruH towards
Plfficile a, diJficuU to
Bnclin &, pro-ne to'
Stranger &, a strainer to
Bxact &f e;z:a£< m
Facile it, easy to
Favorable &, favorable to
L*ignorance toi^ours, est prlte d
i'admirer. Boileau.
InsensiUe d la vie, ifuvn^i^^ d la
mort,
U ne sait quand il yeille, U ne salt
qnandil dort Racine.
Formidable &,
Faul a,
Importnn &,
Im{)^n£trab]e &,
Indispensable i,
Intdress^ &,
Invisible k,
Insensible &,
Natarel ^
Niceflsaire &,
Nuisible &,
Odieux a,
Posterieur a,
Prif^&raUe &,
Propice d,
Propro a,
RebeUe &,
Redoutable a,
Semblable d,
Blgeia,
fermUahte %o
faUdto
importunate to
impenetrable to
indispensabie ta
interested in
invisible to
insensible to
natural to
necessary ti»
hurtful to
odious to
posterior to
9 preferable to
propitious to
formidable to
similar to
subject to
Ignorance is always ready to ^i^^
mire itself.
Insensible to Ufis.ineensibU to death,
he does not know when he is awakOf
or when he sleeps.
§ 00. — ^ADJBCnVES REQUIRIKO A DIFFERENT PrePOSITIOK W
French and in English, not included in the above List,
TfflTH THE following SIGNIFICATION.
Bon pour, kind tmoards^ de-
voted to
C6hbre povLT,^T,celebrated for
Oivil enters, pUile to
Qnand on est bon pour tout le
mocdo, on ne Vest^&i^r personne.
C. Brlavignb.
n fht o6tthre par sa doctrine, aik-
im foejMir BB iMtiaitDoe.
BoaauBT.
Igjiorant en, not versed in
lndu1gi;nt pour, intlulgent towards
In84>Ient avcc, insolent to
Poll envers, pcUte to
When one is devoted to evorf hod§
one is so towards nobody.
Be wasceU\ratedfor hu daOrtm^m
wdlasforhuhkOi,
Digitized
by Google
41i •T.VVAS •W tHB ASlB^tlTa^Vlin^f^
^ § 91.— RSMARX.
It mnst not be forj^tten, that when the verb itre is used aiiip«r*
■onally before the adjeetives contained in the two preceding seetioiis-.
these adjectives become subject to rale (4.) } 87.
n est indispensable <f 6tudier 1 ItisindispenuMelottndfmuek^k
tenooap poor defenir MTant | becamt kam€d,
§ 92. — ^Importakt Rules.
(1.) A noon may be followed by two or more adjeetires, having
•ne and the same regimen, provided those adjeetives require th«
aame prepositions after them ; thus we may say :—
Ce pdre est utile et cher d sa fa- ThaifaJther is utefid and dear U
Biille. QiRAULT DuTivisa. kU family.
La religion est n^cessaire et na- Religion U necessary and naimrai
torelle d Phomme. Anonymous. to man.
These two sentences are correct, becaase the adjectives, ic/tZe, and
eker, in the first, and rUoessairt and naiurel^ in the second, require the
aame preposition, d.
(2.) We could not in the first of these two sentences, substitute
the adjective chim (beloved) for the word cher, and say as in English,
Thai father is useful to, and beloved bt his family. Such a construe*
tion in French, is never admissible. We mast say, That father is use^
ful to his f amity t and is beloved by them ; because the adjective cherif
requires the preposition de^ or its substitute, the relative pronoun en
[{ 39, (17./].* Ce p^re est utile k sa famille et en est cb^ri, i. & eat
•h^ri d*eUe.
§ 98.— Detbrminiko Ai>jectivb8. — ^Demoksteatitx Anjxc-
TIVBS.
The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with
the demonstrative pronoun [{ 36.], always precedes the noun, and
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender
nd number of the word which it determines [} 20, (1.)] : —
Cet- air pur, ces gazons, cetie votite
mobile :
Id tontplaitaucceur, toutenchante
les ycuz. Castel.
T^at pure air^ that turf thai dkaiu^
tn^ vaiUt ; here every thing picam
the heart and cknrms the eyes.
* The rale with regard to the rcalmen of verbs is equally imperative.
We could not say in French, as in £nelish, Every veek I write letters tO|
and receive letters raoM my brother. yTq must say, Evety week I write leb*
iers to my brother, and receive some from him. Tontes les semainea J'teili
das lettres 4 men fr^, et j'en le^ de Ini
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
iTirVA'Z or TSS A»JSCfITSdr-«|M,MI^ 41)
S 94. — ^AoRBXJiisKT, RxPEnrioK, and Place of thb Posaich
81 VB Adjective.
We have aaid [} 21, (3.)] that the possessive adjoctive assamea the
gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be
repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjeetivo
is the sane in French, as in English, that is, before the noun. These
adjectives must' not be confounded with the possessive pronouns
[}34,(2.)]:-
Mon Dire, ma mftre ot mes soBurs I Mvfatker, malMer, and titSmrt an
lont anivis. | arrived.
§ 95. — RSMARXS.
(1.) It has been said [} 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in-
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of tiM
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession to
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance :—
J'ai mal k la tAte. I M^ head aches (/ have a fain tn
the head),
Charles 8 W cas86 2e bras. | Charies has broken his arm,
because the possession is sufficiently explained by tlie pronotmi^tf
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say,
Je vols que mon bras s'enfle, I see that my arm swells,
because without the mont the possession of the arm would not b#
indicated.
(3.) The English expressions, a book oftntne^ a etmsin ofhiSf can*
not be translated literally into French. We must say an de mee
amis, one offnyfiierub; un de ses cousins, one cf his cousins.
Glnna et Carbon, undeses lieuiej^
anis, se campdrent tnr les bords dn
Tibre. Veetot.
Cinna and Carbo^ a HentenasU tf
his, eiuamped on the banks of $k$
Tiber.
(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessivs
pronoun, mten, ften, lioi, without the article, to express the same
relation :—
Through a meadow of mine «
A travcrs d'un mien pr6, certain
Inon pasaa. Racine.
Un mien cousin est Jnge-maire.
La Fontaine.
young ass passed,
A cousin of mine is judge and
mayor,
(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives * oi^
Mt, set, leurSf can be placed before the object possessed only whm
the possessor is the subject of the same proposition - —
La nampsfrne a ses sgrSments.
Oss langues ont leurs beantte.
The country has its j
Those languagts hofsetkesr i
IS Digitized by CjOOQ IC
4lt •TVVAS ov turn Anrw99trM^ t^ ft.
(5.) When the (ituasmuUe) pMsetsor is not the subjeet of fbm
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, biit of a preceding
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are need [{ 39, (17.)
jno.]:-
Ce lirre est bien imprlniC, U pa-
pier 9H est excellent.
J 'habile la campagne; les a(T6-
meuts en sont sans nombre.
Ces Ungues sent riches, J'en ad-
mire les beaat6s. Noel.
That book is veU-priitUd, Us paper
(jtke pamr of it) isexoetietU.
I inkeJbit tke country i ilspUesum
(lAe pleasures of it) are wiUumt nvm^
Thos^ianguages are riek, I oisitrv
ikeir deauUes {Ike beauties of th£m).
(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, m» ses^
Uurs^ although the possessor be not the nominative of the same
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo-
sition : —
Paris est une ville remarquable ; I Paris is a remarkable city, foreign*
les ^Strangers admirent la beauts de I ers admire tke beauty ofiis edifices.
ses Edifices. MofiL. |
g 06. — ^NCTMSRAL A]>JECnTS§»
(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indieato number^ ntl
order, precedes ihe noun.
(3.) When used to indicate older Q 36, (3.)], the cardinal nunbei
generally follows the noun (ezc^t when indicating the day of tim
month) [{36,(1.)] :—
L6on ^ix.— Ghapitre dix, Leo the tenth,^ Chapter ten,
(9.) The ordinal nomber is placed before the noun ^-—
La dixikne anB6e. Tke tenth |war.
(4.) It follows the words d^ptfre^ Uere^ atlidgj ftige^ ^iee. is tt»
Afisioiiofabook.
LIvre sixUme, chapitre dixiiine. Sixth book, tenth dieter.
§ 07. — ^Iin>ErarrrB Adjiotiyss.
(I.) Quelque is written in three ways : —
1. Followed by a verb, it is written in two words, qtiel que ; the
first, quely which is an adjective, agrees in gender and number with
the subject of the verb, and the second, que, which is a eonj unction,
is hivariable.
Mids quels que soient ton culte et
tapatrie.
Dors sous ma tente avec 86curit6.
Campenon.
Qeibamme quelle que ttit nn fbr-
tone ou son mArite, ae put rlusrir
BOMITACB.
But, fohatever ma/y be iky reHgien
or tkycoueUry^sk^ in security undee
my tent.
his merii might be, emdd nei .
inhisunderialnngs.
Digitized
by Google
BTVf AX oi ras AtijsoTtrx.-^ 97. 410
3. PoYloTred by a noun, it is then an adjective [ij 30, (13.)], and
iigrees in number with that noun : —
Princes, quelques raisons quo vous i Princes, whatever reasims you fnojr
pni&siez me dire. . Racink. | give me.
3. Quelque followed by an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable.
Games of chance, kotoevet tnfUng
they may seem, art altoayt expentivt
and dangerous.
Les jeux de hasard, quelque m6-
diocres qu'ils paraissent, sont tou-
Joors chers et dangereux.
Mme. DE Genus.
(3.) Mtme is an adjective or an adverb :
It is an adjective [\ 30, (6.)] :
1. When it precedes the noun, and means
Vous retombez toujours dans lea | Yau always fail into ike mmi ifN
wiimes alarmes. Racine. | prehensions,
2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of "kim^
tdfy herself themselws^ even, very, and cannot be turned into de k
mtoe mani^re, in the same manner :-—
Les dieux enx-mimes devinrent, I The gods tkemsdves became jealoui
Jsloux dtis bergers. FiN^LON. I of the shepherds.
Ces mnrs viintes, seigneur, pen- 1 These very wdlis, my lard, may have
vent avoir des yeux. Racinc. \eyes.
(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, sn ad-
jective, or a participle. It has tlien the sense of aussi, aiao ; qnoique^
although^ or de la m£me mani^re, in the same manner:— ^
Frappez, Tyriens et mime I8ra61-
lies. Racine.
Lenrs vertus et mime leurs noms
Ataient ignor6s.
Brrnardin de St. Pierre.
Exempts de maux r6els les hom-
mes s'en ferment meme de chimin-
qucs.
Strike, 7>rums ai^ IsradUes aht,
Tktlr virtues, as weU at tktir
names, were unknown.
When exempt from real misfor^
tunes, men create to themselves imagi*
nary ones.
(4.) We have seen that toutj when an adjective, that is, when aigw
nifying evefy^ ally is variable [} 30, (16,) (16.)].
(5.) Toutf when it means entirely^ quite^ nothing butj is an advaibt
nd, as such, invariable :-—
Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles.
BUPFON.
n montra pour rimer des chemins
teut nouveaux. Boilkau.
Lo chieii est tout zdle, tout ardeur,
tout obeissauco. BirrpoN.
77ie Hon is nothing but nerves and
muscles.
He showed us, in poetry, palhs en*
tirely new.
The do^ is nothing but zeal, ardoi
and obedience.
(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphmny
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an & an*
pirate:—- «
Les pUisanteries ne soot boDnest Jokes are anif good, wkm Cli|f mi
fue onand ellss sont servies teuUsx served up quUe tmrm
ehaades. Voltaibs.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
410
iTVVAX OV TBS PAOITOOV.^ M.
Tha followiiur extract (for the bwtorical accuracy of vliielLwe
cannot voneh) offen an example on the lost rale» waA on the <
lion :—
La vanity est sortie touU parte de
la t6te des femraes comme Minerve
est sortio tout arm6e de la t6te de
Jopltcr. Saint LiMBsaT.
Vaw'fy isstud guUe mdom€d from
vD07iian^$ headf as Minerva issued
quUe armed Jrom tkt head ef «M-
piUr,
§ 08.-*Tbb PaoNouN. — ^Plaob of tbs Pbbsohal PBOVotm,
SUBJBCT OF THB VeRB.
(I.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbe, are in French
as well as in English, placed before them in affirmative and negative
■entenoes: —
la
J'inventa! des coulenrs, j*armai
calomnJe,
J*hit6res8ai sa gloire; il trembla
pour sa vie. Racins.
/ invenied ee/Urrs^ I armed caU
unny, I touched his glory ; he Im^
bled for his Ufe.
(3.) In affinnative or negative sentences commencing with au
motns, d pfftne, ^ncors, feiUMre^ en vairty du motnf, comhient &c^ the
pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con-
struction is not imperative :—
Peut^tre vrez-vous raison. Norl.
PentF^trQ vous cntretiendrai-^
anssi de Tastronomie.
Aiui-MAanif.
Combien (lliomme} perd-i^ do
X, combien fait-if de pas t
La Fontainb.
Perhaps, you are right.
Perhaps, I will converse with yem
on astronomy.
How many wishes
many steps he takes I
he toms, tef
(3.) Li exclamations, the nominative pronoun is often plaoed after
the verb in French, as well fa in English :—
Pmssi-je de mes yenx y voir torn- I May I with s»y own eyes tee the
berlafottdre! Cosneu^lc. \ thunder cmshU!
(4.) In interrogative sentences the nominative pronoun is placed
immediately after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the
aoxlliaiy and the participle, in the compound :-—
Ob. sa\i-je7 qu'ai-^ fait 1 que dols- I Where am I? what have tdamef
je fkire cncorel | whdt have lyet to do?
(6.) In interrogative sentences with verbs having only one* sylla-
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with
some verbs having more than one syllabic, but in which that person
•nds with an s preceded by a consonant, the pronoun ^'« is not placed
* We may say, however, suis-Jel am I? ai-Je? have I? fAvJe 1 do i
mahefMMi^lshouIdJToughi /7 volsjel do i see? ^\^je1 da i go?
SBtc&ds*Je1 dot hear?
Digitized
by Google
•rVTAX OV TBS VBOVOOlTir— S W. 4tl
<]m verU In uneh case another constroetion must be gbftn
to tho aentenee .«—
Est^tg'Pie je coan 1
Esl-ee^que je dors!
EsA^e-queia comprendal
2>r' / run? litenlly, ii U tkai J
run?
Dolileep?
Do J understand ?
(6.) The same construction is admissible, though not deiiirahio
mith all the peraona and tensea which may be uaed intcrrcf utrvelT
g 00.— RSPSTITION AND OmISSION OF THK NoMINATU-B
Pronoun.
(1.) It ia proper to repeat the personal pronouns ^ Mb ti, iMm%
Us, before every verb >—
Je lis, /6cris, je me promtoe. | / read^ wriUf and walk,
(2.) The omission of the pronouns je^ <», t^ nousj voum^ iZs, before
the aeeond or third verb of a aentenee, is a matter of choice and
•ubjeet to the following restrictions :— >
Those pronouns must be repeated :
1. When the verbs are not in the aame tense :—
Jb pretends et je pr6tendrai tou- 1 I maintain and uriU oZaMfS mmt^
Jours. I tain.
3. When the first verb ia in the negative and the aooond in tha
afSrmative : —
Je ne pliepas et je romps. | I da not bend and 1 break,
S. When the propositions are connected by oonjanctiona othet
than et, emd ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; mats, hui .' —
Nous ditestoDs les m^chants, par- 1 We deteU tke tricked hecmtu we
eeque ncfue les craignons. | fear tkem.
(3.) Although we would adviae the student io follow the 1st mlo
of this {, particularly with regard to the pronouns je^ tu^ noua, vouSf
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examplea, whore
tiie pronouns after the first are<—
Repeated :
Je vcux qn*on diso un Jour aux
peiiples cffray^ft,
12 IVit des Jttifs, U Ait une Insolente
race. Racinb.
t wish that tkey may one day sajf to ike
fngktened nations, there were ^ws^
ikon was an insoUnt race.
OmitUd:
11 s'arrache les chereux, se roule
sur 1« sable, reprocho aux IMeux
Icnr rigueur, appelle en vain i .son
secours la cruelle mort.
FtfNfLON.
He (Tielewiackus) tears Hs kair,
rolls an the sand^ itpniaekes ike Ood$
witk tkeir rigor ^ and ea/h mi vani,
cmtl Dea$k it ku aid.
Digitized
by Google
4&t SrifVAZ Ot* TAB PROirOITlf. — § IM.
L'Bternel est son oom, fe
est son ouvrage,
n entend Ics sonpira de lliumble
qu'on outrage,
Juge tons les mortels avec d'^galei
lois, ^
£t du haot do son trAne interroge
les rois. Racine.
Tkc Eternal is his name^ the wcHd
is his work; he tistens to tke sighs
of the humble oppressed, judges all
mankind with equat laws^ and tV
terrogates the nughiy from his lofif
throne,
-Placi of Personal Pronouns used as RsoistENS ov
Verbs.
(1.) The personal pronoun used as rigime direct, (direct object or
accusative) [{ 42, (4.)]) and the pronoun used as regime indtrecl, (indi-
rect object) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in Eng*
iisb, (dative of the latins), [} 42, (3.)] are in French placed before
Ihe verb : —
B t^beoutt, il se plait, il s'adonise,
U 8'atmc. J. B. Roussrau.
He listen s tt» himsdf, he adorns him-
sdf he loves himself.
yaus avoDs dit, et nous allons
proQver, qu'il n*y a pas de bonheur
aans vortu. BeAcziis.
We have said, and we are govn^ to
ft eve, that there is no luippiness
wUhmti virtme.
gioo.-
Direct Regimen,
Je vous vois, / see you;
Vous les Toyez, you see tkem.
Madame, enfm le del prte de
vous me rappelle. Bacinb.
Madam, at last heaven recalls me
nearynu.
Panvre science bumaine I
Un fil «'arr6te hdlas, comma le
moucheron
Bu bon Jean La Fontaine.
AiMfi Martin.
' Poor human science ! a web stops
thee, like the gnat of the good Jean La
Fontaine,
(2.) 1st Exception : When the verb is in the second person stnga-
lar, or in the first or second person plural of the imperative nacd a^
firmatively, these pronouns must be placed after It: —
Indirect Reeimen.
Je vous parle, / speiut to you ;
Vous leur paries, you speak to tkem,
A ce prix je leur permets do
vivre. Racine.
On that condition I allow them to
live.
II fiiut compter snr Tingratitude
des hommes, et ne laisser pas do
leur fairc dn bien. FifiiLON.
We should expect ingratitude from
men, but not cease, on that account, to
do them good.
ParIez4CT<f , speak to them.
Make me a Christian and free, J
submit to every thing.
Let us divest ourselves from a vain
pride.
Go, conduct her into the next roem^
Xoyez-les, see them,
Rends-mot chr^tienne et libre, a
tont je mo soumets. Voltairb.
D6pouillon3-7Km5 auss! d'une value
flert6. BoiLEAU.
Allcz, conluisez-Zii dans la cham-
bre prochaiue. Racine.
(8.) Renutrk: Bat if the verb in those persons of the impcntivs
be used ne|atively, ths pronouns will bo placed sceording to
Rule (1.) :—
Te les Toyei pas, do not see them. | Nelnirparles v^B/lo nstspoaktotkewL
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
9*tittAX or f BB FBOBOVlTir^ lOa
4n
01 1 on TOQB pmpoM de fkire nne
manvaiar action, dq ia ikites pas.
Dis8i|io tea doulenre,
£t ne ms troublo pas par cea in*
digncs pleura. Boileau.
If ike^ propose to fon^ to CTrnmU 4
bad action^ do U not.
Dissipate thy grief, end trovhU mn
not by these unworthy tears.
(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the r%ime in^
direct'*' is a person, the pronoun representing it moat follow the re:b
Tbia mast also be the case with the following verbs:—
Aller h.,togoto^ towards.
Je m'adrcsse d /ui d eux,
Je vais d vous ou d eux.
Yous courez d lui ou d eUe,
Slle vient d moi ou d vous.
Vous pensez d nous on d jia.
Us soDgcnt d etu; et d vouj.
(5.) The pronoun used as the indirect regimen of the French,
which answers to the indirect object of the English preceded by a
preposition other than t<^ and to the genitive and ablative cases of
the Ltttin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded
by one of the prspositions de, cf; pour, /or; avec, wiih^ die.
Yenir 4, to come to,
Boire d, to drink to,
Penser a, songer A, to tkmk of*
J apply to him^ to them,
I go to you or to thern.
You run to him or to ker.
She comes to me or to you.
You think of us or of him.
They think of them and of you.
Je parle d£ lui et de vous,
J'dcris pour lui et pour eUe,
Qui rit d'autrui,
Bolt craindre qu'en revanche on
rie ausal de lui, MoLifiaK.
I speak of him and of you,
I lorite/or him and'for her.
He who laughs at others, must fem
that in their turn, they may also laugh
at him.
(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together
by the conjunction el, the pronoun regimen of the second may bH
placed before it, or after it, as in English : —
After the Verb.
Sortez et laissef-nkTi dormir.
Go ou/, and let me sleep,
Marche. et suis-nous du molns oil
rhonnenr nous appdle. Bon.BAU.
March and follow «3, at least, where
honor calls us,
Cessez, vous dis-Je et laissez-moi,
Madame, executor les volontos du
roi. Racine.
Cease, I toS you, and suffer me,
Maitanj to execute the commands of
IlW king.
Before the Verb,
Sortez et me laissez dormir.
Go out, and let me steep,
LahaeK-moi cette chaine, ou m'arw
rachez le Jour. La Ha aps.
Leatt ivbr this chain, or dcp^ve mM
of life.
vous attendez le roi; parlez ct Im
xnoDtrez,
Gontre le (Us d'Hector tous les Grecs
conjures. Racinb.
You expect the king: speak and de-
pict to him all the Oieeks conspiring
against the son of Hector,
* Object of the Terb preceded in SqgUsh by to, ezpreased or
Hood, dative of the Latfns.
Digitized
by Google
STytAS OV TBS r»ov«vv.«^10L
S 101. — ^RxsPECTivx Placx of toe Protcocns when two ocash.
vnrn one Verb.
{},) Whon two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and
the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indtreet, if not
in the third person singular or plural, mi^at precede the pronoun v^
ime direct :—
li nu le donnera.
II i€ le prAtera.
III nous ksB montreront
Vous notu le direz.
Qnand je puis obliger, ma Jole est
assczgnmde;
Pour n'attendro jamais que I'on,
me le commsnde. Boursault.
Je voHS U dis encore, vous n'aurez
Testlmo des borames que par une
solide vertu. M<u«- De Maintenon.
ffewillgive U to nte»
HeioiUiendittoiAee,
Tliey will show them to us.
You yjiU say it to us.
When I can oUige, mywif isgraU
enougk, vfUkont my wiAmg to w^U
until tkev command me (C e., Ocy
command it to me.)
J repeat it to you: you can oUahs
the esteem ofm€n only by real virtue.
(3.) When the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person aingu.
lar or plural, it must tbon be placed after the regime direct:-—
On te lui donnera.
Vous le hU pr6terez.
Nous ne le ieur prftterons pas.
Vous le Ieur Genres.
Le plus sikr appui de lliomme est
Dleu, et vous voulez le lui rmvir.
BOISTK.
They will give it to kim.
You will tend it to kim.
We wUl not lend it to tkem.
You wilt write it to tkem.
Tke surest support of man is Ooa,
and you wish to dqmee him of it.
If men think iU of each other, at
least they do not say tt to each other.
(8.) Remark: The reflective pronoun te, used as an indireet regU
men, makea an exception to the above rule, aa it takea precedenet of
the direct regimen :—
81 les hommes pensent mal les
mis des autres, du moins lis ne je 2e
disent pas. Anonymous.
(4.) The Rules (1.) and (a.)« ^^o the Exception (3.), apply to tiM
imperative used negatively ; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the impem*
tive used affirmatively.
Examples of the Imperative used N^aiivdy.
Ke nous le donnez pas JRnle (\M.
No le Ieur pr^tez pas [Rule (2.)1.
Qu'ils nesele disent pas [Remark
Do not give it to us.
Do not lend it to them,
Ld them say it to Ihemsetsfes,
Qu^i
(8.)J.
])n sang de tant de roSs c'est Tn-
nique heritage;
He me Tenvies pas, laksea-moi mon
paitage. Voltaiss.
(A.) When the hnperative need affirmative^ baa two regliimi^
Of the Uood of so many kings, U u
my onlv inheritance; do not envy H
(to me% kaoe me my portion.
Digitized
by Google
•THT4Z ow tmm PEovovir^ IM^ 1081 49$
the ^rtMiovn regime dlNct preeedM the r^ghne bdiieet in all the
persons >—
EnToyes4e-4R0i.
"Donner-U-notts.
QaHls le lui donnent
Moatxez-^ff-MM, oo^ mortel privi-
.^e. Ballanchr.
MotMJe-Ud dans Tesprit ; qui fait
muiX, trouTv maL Amomtmoos.
SeTid it to me.
Give it to us.
Let tkem giw U to Mm.
Show kirn to me, thai privileged
morUU.
Pujt this into tkjf wundi hi wh0
do€*fpit,JUds€rU.
§ 102.— B(7LS.
When two pitmonns in different eases, representing rational be-
fogs, occnr, and the pronoun in the r^me direct is in the first, or in
the second person, this pronoun mnst be phused aecordmg to the
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect mnst follow
the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition : —
11 nous a recommand^s d eux.
U Tous a pr6aent6 d die.
Nnl ne pent se comparer d Ivi, pour
iaire en pen de temps, un travail
fort inutile. La BaoTfias.
He has recommended us to them.
He has presented you to her.
No one can compare himtelfto Mm,
for doinjg in a short Ome^ m verk
useless piece of work.
§ lOd.-— RuLS«
(1.) The personal pronouns Zut, e22e, etur, e2Ie«, used as indirect re-
gimens of yerbs and preceded by a preposition, can only reUte
to persons, and not to things. The expressions q^or fram it; of of
from ihemf when reUting to things, should be rendered by en [} 39,
(17.)]:-
J'€fi parle; j^en donne.
J'aime trop laTaleur, pour en 6tre
Jalouz. La Hasps.
Cehii qui est dans la prosp^rit^,
doit cndudre d*en abuser.
FiNiLON.
/ ipeak of it, of themi Igive ofii
(some).
IprizevalortoQhighlf to be jealous
of it.
He who is in prosperity should feae
to abuse it.
(8.) The relative pronoun y [} 39, (18.) { 111], is need in French
bi relation to things, yor the indirect n^'m^ expressed in English by
mt or to (dative). It means at or to it ; or to them ; (hereto, &c :—
J*y songeral, / wiU think of iL \ Faites-y attention, Pa) aUentwn to U.
C'est lorsque nous soromesiloign^s
do notre pays, que nous sentons
surtout rinstinct qui nous y at-
tache. Chatraubsiand.
Tons noe jonrs vont a la mort, le
domier y arrive. Montaignk.
Lea chof es de la tenre ne valent
fii qu'cn h*y attache. Nicout.
It is when we are far from our eoun-
try thai we feel^ above all, the in*
stinct which attaches ustotL
AU our days travel toKords deaUk^
the last one arrioiS at it (reaehea
TtethingsoftheeartkmtnAweM
- tot'
Digitized
by Google
•Tttil ow TBB tkotorv.— S 104,105; 106L
§ 101. — Placs or Eir aitd T.
^1.) TU^ place «f«ii mid y is the same as that prescribed by Rah
(1.) M^> ^^' ^® peraonal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex«
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the aame }. See examples above.
(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns H*
gimes:^ —
n neus en a parU.
II ^' ei» a dit quelque chose.
Parles*/«t-«».
Ne wnu en paries pas.
Jeryai reBvo}'6.
RoDvoyes-BMis-jr.
JNe nous y rcnvoyez pas.
He has spoken taus cfU.
He has told him anuMmg of%k
Speak to him of U,
Do not speak to us ofU.
I have refencu him to U.
Refer, or send %s back ioiL
Do not refer usto U,
§ 105. — ^RKPKTmdK OV THE pRONOUNS, RfiGIMBS.
These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb
Ah 1 mon enflint, que Je vondrais
Men vous voir iin pen, vous enten-
dre, vous embrssser, vous voir pas-
ser. Moe. DsSdvioNi.
Jo veux U voir, (0 prior, le preiser,
rimportuner, le fl^coir.
BESCffEftELLB.
Ah! my child, how 1 ioouid Wbe tm
me you for a short time, to ktar yM^
einbrace yon^ see you pass.
I will see him, entreat him, frm
him, importune Aim, bend Aim.
§ 106. — ^Thx P08SB8SIVX Pronottv.
(1.) The possessive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by
the article [} 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as the pronoun itself, agree*
in gender and number with the noun represenud [} 35, (I.)] : —
Neither ambition nor smoke haoa
power on snch a heart as nine.
Instead of bewaiUng the death iff
others, I vnm to learn from you htm
to render my own holy.
L'ambition ni la ftim6e ne tou-
chcnt point nn cceurcomme 2? mt^n.
J. J. Rousseau.
An lieu de diplorer la mort des
autres, Je veux apprendre de vous
k rondre la mienne sainte.
B0S8UET.
(2.) The pronouns le noire, le voire [} 34, (3.)], &c., unlilce th«
a^ectlves notre, votre, &c., always take the circumflex accent :—
La musique des anciens Qrecs
ttait trds diterente de la notre.
Voltaire.
7!W music of the ancient Greeks
was very different from ours.
(3) When the English possessive pronouns, mine, thine, ftot
eome after the verb to be, they are often rendered into French by thi
Indirect pronouns d mot, d toi:-^
Ce Bvre est d mei. \ T%at bwk a mine,
Ces plumes Mat>s06ad«Mwt | Ah these pens fmrsf
Digitized
by Google
«nT'^:ilS Of tftft ^ubK^v'to^Wr. 4n
§ 107. — Turn Dbmonstrative Pronouit.
(1.) Th3 demonstrative pronouns [} 36] eon never bo placed be-
fore nouns. They merely represent tliem : —
T%e beU kt$m u thai ^fijuuMfia.
La meillvare le^on est ctllx des
exempies. La Harpk.
K'oublie Jamais les bienf aits quo
ta as re^us; oublie promptemeat
ACKo: que tu as accord^s.
BOISTS.
Never f&rget the heneJUst itkUh Uum
host received; forget qvSekly thaM
VfhicA thou hast wiyferred.
(2.) The pronouns ce/ut, ceUe^ cetix, ceUes, as has been said [} 37*
(2.)]f Af® 0^^^ u^ absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also
in the regime8,direct and indirect They have then the sense of h9
uha, kirn wham^ of whom ; thai whieh^ ofvhieh. They apply, in this
tense, as well to things as to persons ;-~
Celm qui comi^te dix amis, n'eD
a pas un. Malkshbrbbs.
On Be saurait forcer tdui qui ne
veut pas.
L'harmoDie la plus douce est la
▼oix de ceile ^*on aime.
La BamrftRE.
Be who reckons ten friends^Xas not
one.
J^ca/nnot^mpAhim'iohowiUiuL
T%B sweetest harmony is the voice
of her whom loe love.
(3.) The French use celuit eelJe, ceu±, eeUes, Indifferently for this^
(hot When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix the
adverbs* ci (id) and 2d to the pronouns [} 37, (3.)] :—
Oomeille nous assi\)ettit h ses
caractdres et a ses iddcs; Bacine
se conforme aux nutres. Celui-fd
peint les hommes, comme ils dev-
raient 6tre, oeluirci Ics peint tela
qu'ilssont. La BauYtas.
ComeiUe subjects us to kis charac-
ters arid to his ideas; Racine con-
forms himself to ours. That one {tks
^foTTner) pahUs men as they shotUtt be,
this one (the loiter) paiiUs them as
they are.
(4.) Celui^iy ceUe-cij cettx-cij ceUes-cij may be used absolutely in
French in the sense of thisom^ thsU one, &c. : —
On la vit, toutes les semaines, ea-
suycr les larmcs de celui-ci^ pour-
▼oir aox bcsoins de celui-ld.
FiJcHIER.
Every week^ ske was seen wiping
the tears of this one^ providing for the
wants of that one.
(6.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to
point out things only. Tliey can, of course, never be prctixed to a
noun [} 37, (6.)] : —
* The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the
iemonstralive adjectives ce, cct, &c They are not placed immediately
' after those ac^ectives, but after the nouns which they determme : cet
iomme-ci, this man, cet homme-l&, thai man. The commencement of
aumark (8.) applies also to the s^ecthres c«, eei, oetU^ aei, Ae^
Digitized
by Google
4tS
•TirtAX ov VBS »to«oirir.«^10&
Tnt quo 1e kmr eit long, fl gronde
entrc ses dents,
Fats ceci, fnU oio, va, Ticng, monte,
desoeiKU , Bkisn a r p.
Jo suU un pea sorprw de tout ced,
Mamillon.
Voos n'arez pa dteavoiier ccU.
Pascal.
Us teeiA, 4a this, tU iUl, g; cmmc^
g0 «/», sssie down.
I tma UUU iurpriMi: €U tOl ttu.
Yau have n^i been obk to ttiattwm
ikai.
§ 108. — ^Rbmarks oh the Dbmonbtratits Prokolai Cs.
(1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoan, is almost alwayi
construed with the verb ttre^ or followed by a relative proiiuun :—
C^est an poids bicn pcsant qa'nn
frand nom A sontenir.
MoNTKSaCIEU.
CSr qui me plait c'est sa modestie.
LtfviZAC.
Agrtainanu is a very kumf weigU
to sustain.
esly,
(3.) Ce is used for fte, she^ they, preceding any part of the verb to
he, when that verb is followed by a noun, or an adjective used snb>
stantively and preceded by <ft€^ a or on, or a possessive or demonstra>
live adjective.
(3.) Observe^ that the verb clre foUowinj^ the pronoun oe» Is put io
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro-
noun ee, however, remains unchanged.
Cest un trompeur.
d»i la femnie que je cberche.
Cetaient mes amis.
Ce sersient paroles exquises.
Si c*4tait un grand qui paritt.
MoLlfiRE.
N'itaient-ce pas les mAmes hom-
mC8 ? CUATBAUBRIAND.
All those sentences are elliptical ; a noun being understood alter
the ce ;—
I T%at man is a deeeitfid me
Thai woman is (Ae woman wham M
He is a deoeilfiU man.
She is the woman whom I seek,
T%qf were mv friends.
l\ey would be exquisite words.
If a great man were to speak then.
Were they not the same men 7
Cet homme est un trompeur. 1
CetU fcmme est la femme que Je
cherche. |
(4.) This t5, that is^ theee are, iho$e art^ may also be rendered by
iest icif ee sont ici :-—
Tiki J is the place.
7%tse aremny children,
Voici^ vtdlilj are, however, to be preferred to cV^'tct, die:—
This is the place.
T%>se are my children,
(6.) Ca answers to the English pronoun t^ when this latter wurd
\ the nominative of the verb to 6e, without defjiite referenei
Cest id la place.
Ce soul la mes cnfants.
Void la place.
VoildL mes enfants.
Digitized
by Google
trvfAx p9 tai ri|ovov]r^i(Mi
499
d n'ett qne ptr In wnB que Vline
fciii f 'iostruiio. Fontanb**
Ce Alt d'uno retraite de |4lrc8 ct
d'avoiituri ore, que aortiront leu con-
qnftmutii de rimiyers. Rolmn.
C'est UD difltiil QApital qu'il faut
MtoT dans quelqae fiujec que u soil.
V0LTA1R£.
mind can receive indruetigi,
il was/ram a refuge far ske]tkerdt
and adventurers, thai emerged tks
amqiurort of Ike world.
T^tM is a capital defeeltrhiekekovtd
be avoided in ichaUver subject U may
(6.) When the verb e/r?, however, is used nnipeirsonally, and fol
lowed by an adjective [( 87, (3.)]» the pronoun il is not rendered by
ee, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verba (U) :—
// est n6ce8tiaire d'6tudier. Jl is necessary to stndif.
It est pins ditBcile pour les na-
tions que pour les individus, de re-
oouvrer I'estime de leurs voisins
qwuideika Tout perdue. Boistc.
II is more dijficuU for nations ikon
for individuals to recover Ike esteem
of their neighbors^ mhitn tkef ham
IntU,
The jnraises {which) me five^ have
always in someway arelalion ta omr-
selves.
§ 109. — Taz Rblatiyb Pronouv.
(1.) 1 He relative pronoun que, whomt tchiehj can in Freneh nerer
be supp/Msed like the correaponding English pronouns :*—
Les W ranges qne nous dounons,
se rap^portcnt toi^urs par quelqne
chose ft nous-mAmes.
BCassillon.
(^ } The pronouns quelj que^ quoij leqwd^ repretent the English
lir&qoQna whkh or what uaed interrogatively.
I. Qiie{ is used before a noun in a detenninalive sense :—
Quel llvre llrons-nousl I What wwhiek book shaU we rmdf
Quel est done votre mall What then is your aitmeni t
MoLifias. I
8. QtM is used before a verb:-*
Qwrdites-vonsi | Whatdefonmnyf
IL Qtioi is used as an exclamation : —
Quoit est-cevousi | Whallisityauf
4. Lequdt used interrogatively, means whieh cm :-*
Volcl deux phimes; kjitettr vou- 1 Ekre are two pensf which {whuA
les-vottsl I on^ will yon have ?
(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, an
preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect It then means
whomf qfwhom^ to uikcnit whoee^ dtc. :—
QiM aves-vous vu 't I Whom have von seen 7
Voqtti tenex-vous oetle nonvelle 1 Prom whom have ym this nernf
A gut est oe livre 1 | Whose book is this?
* The eoidunctioa,<U<, is often omitted hi Bq^lsfa; Iti equtvaknt fM^
talwaya'be expressed in
JecroisfM' fleet Id.
Hdie9tithai)heiiher%
Digitized
by Google
4W sTMAroy iv»8 «^»«D«tva^SUt^ia
g 110.-*.Tb» PROPOUir Bir.
(I.) Wo have already [} 39, (17.) } 95, (6.) { 103, Rale (1.)]
■evcrni remarks on Uiis pronoan
<9.) En signifies ff id, from ii, tc«A tf, about it^ tfthem^from fhem
&«., expressed or understood. Though en u by some French w riten
. oilen used in relation to persons, their example should be imitated
n sncfi cases only as that presented by the example [} 92, (S.)]-
(3.) £n, used as an equivalent for the English some or any^ ex-
pressed or understood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen^
and has, in the same manner aa the French article placed before m
noun used partitivcly, the aeose of of U^ of them; t^ woid fortk
being understood >~
Avcz vous des pommesl | Have fou appUs 7
That 18, Mome^ or rather, ofikey a fart (ftht appU*,
J'en sL I / kaiee, I kaoe some; I kave ef
I tJUm or Ikste {apart) efikm,
(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a pr^^iositton :—
L'on ne saurait voir, sans en 6tre
piqu6,
Poeseder par on autre un b!en qa*on
a roanqu6. MoLitaE.
N'en disputons plus ; chacun a aa
penafie. MoufisK.
We cannot see, vitiofU being
pifued, anoiAer person in possession
of^ goods which we have faited in 00^
taming.
IM US no longer argue aboul then
every one has his otsn opinion.
§ 111.— Tms Pronoun Y.
8ume remarks have already been made on this pronoun [{39i|
(18.) { 103, (2.)]. Y means to ii, at it, to them, at them. It is seldon
used in relation to persons or animals, but frequently in relation to
things :—
Jo Fe9oi8 votre lettre, ma ch&re
enfant, et J*y fats rlponse avec
precipitation. Mn>«. dk SsviGNtf.
Tirvr vanity de quelque chose,
r.*est prottver, qu'on n> est pas
accouturad. Boiste.
Cbargez-vous de oette affaire;
donucz-y tous vos soios.
Boniface.
/ receive your letter ^ my dear chila,
and answer it (make answer thereto)
in haste.
T^f feel vanity on account of any
thing, is proving^ that we are not
accustomed to it.
Take this affair upot^ yem^t
give all your care to it.
§ 1 12. — Placs of Tn« Pronouns En and T.
See i 104,(1.) (9.)
§113. — The Ikdefinitr Pronoun On [§ 41, (4.)"|.
(1.) On, which is very extensively used in the French hiflguage, m
taid only of persons. The verb, of which it to always U e nomim-
Digitized
by Google
■ T9VAX 09 TJIX 9S0II4^Xr«.^U3.
Ml
tive, miiift he in the dngalar. This pronoun is of the masenline
gend<Hr. [See (3.)] On is nsod in French for people^ one^ stnne me^
loe, fkey^ whenever these words have a general and indefinite meaiiiiig,
had do not refer to any portivalar word:-^
On pardonne aisiment le mal
involontaire. D£ la Boptraye.
O:* cherche les rieurs, et moi Je
•9 cvlle. La Fontaine.
We, {people^ they, <^c.) easily fir»
give invobuUary injuries.
People (theff, ice) seek laughing Of
merry people, and I avoid Hum,
Anotlier translation of the above sentences, will show us that thd
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voicoi
which they always prefer to tlie passive.* Thus the two examples
lost given, may be rendered as follows :—
Active Voice in F'rench.
On pardonue Ois^ment le mal
Involontaire.
Oil cherche les rieurs, mais moi
je les 6vite.
Passive Voice in EnglisX.
luvoUntary injuries are easily jor*
given.
Merry c/r joyfidpeople are genernliei
sought ; for my part, I avoid them.
A few more examples, from some of the best French anthorsi
olucidaling the use of this pronoun, will be useful to the student :—
Qaand on est chr^tien de quelqne
sexc que Von soit, 11 n'est pas permis
d'etre ISche. FisiLON.
On peut 6tre honndte homme, et
filire mal des vers. Moli£bb.
On aime peu celui qui n'ose
aimer personne. Dklillb.
A'tron Jamais pleur6 d'avoir fait
son devoir 1 Champort.
Quand on a mdme but, rarement
on s'accorde. Lebrun.
Aitistos, 6crividns, podtes, si vous
Tous copicz toujours, on ue vous
copiera jamais.
Bernardin db St. Pierre.
A Christian of whichever sex he masf
be, is not allowed to be cowardly.
One may be a weeihy mae^ amd
make bad verses.
We fed but UtOe love for him who
dares love nobody.
Have we ever grieved or, account
of hating done our duty?
Those who have the same aim,
rarely agree.
Artists, writers^ poets 1 if jnw at-
ways copy each other, no person wiU
copy you.
(2.) If the word, on, denotes definitely a fbmole, the adjective re*
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : —
Qnanl en est bdte, on ne I'ignore I When one {a lady) is handsome,
paa. L' AcAO^MiB. \ she it not ignorant of iL
(3.) The pronoun, cji^ must be repeated before every verb:—
TTiey raise the anchor, they depart.
On Idve I'ancre, on part, on ftilt loin
de la terre,
On d^convrait d^il les bords de
VAngleterre. Voltair*.
they flee far from the land, already
they discovered the shores ofE^iglema,
* On dit, 4)^ 15 said; on rapporto, it is related f on craint it is feared,
*«. (U^W9M%$llmA,monnj, that mates iieey^ thus, Ikai is mOeisktl^
■i ■ M II I ■ ■ Am
»«mi<r,dce»
Digitized
by Google
4n
■TyTAS or TBS Yaft&t*-glli»
I 1U.— ThB V£RB.-
-AoRSBiCKBT OF TBS Vkbb wrrs
SCBJXCT.
(1.) Th« verb agrees with its nomiiiatire or enljeet, wfaetlMr thit
Mminative precedes or follows :«-
VhMMM ai vk poar r^gner wax
Urns les animaas. Voi.ta i be .
Ijs% komma toni eoeore enfanU k
■oixante ana. Aubest.
Par cet portes wrUdnU lea fi6ros
Ugimu. Saint Victob.
Man is bom to rtign over oil im
mUmaU.
Men ore sUU ckiUreu (mm) ^
tixlf.
nrokgh tkoee gales issued ike
pvud legions.
(3.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatiTOseonneeted
by the conjunction €f, the verb is put in the plural :«-
La eolire et la pridpiUUion sonl
deux choses fort oppoi^es & la pru-
dence. FfKiLON.
La rnoUnee et la wrtu ne pcnvent
rien Tuna sur Tautre. Pascal.
Anger and preeipUation are Hm
things very m««4 opposed to pr^tF-
denee.
Violence and virtue have no power
over each other.
(8.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected
by et^ it is put in the singular or in the plural according to cireum*
1. It is put in the singular, If the nominatives are in somo way
synonymous :—
La donoewr, la bonU du grand
Henri, a £t6 c6l6br6e de mille
lonanges. PiLissoN.
D'oa peut venir cet ennui, oe
dfigoiitl
CouK d'Haslevillb.
T%e mildness, the goodness of tie
great Henry, has been odebraUaby a
thousand praises.
Whence can proceed that enrnd^
thai disgust?
9. When, In a series of nominatives, the last has more foiei
or interest attaehed to it| and therefore, makes us, as it were, overlook
the others:—
Ce aacriaoe-— votre Vhiktbi, votre I This saerifice^-four intered, your
honneur, Dieu vous le commande! \ honor, Qod commands it t
8. The verb is put in the plural, when the affirmation is Intended
to be made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of <
In particular; —
La douceur, les soupirs de cette
(Wmme infortun6e ne ptirent Ic
fltehir. Wailly.
Saves voui, si demaln,
Ba Ubertd, ses jours, seront en votre
' 1 1 Bacine.
The sweetness, the sighs of that u%^
fortunate woman could not wwv§
him.
Do you know, if to^morrow^
his liberty, his Ufe, wiu be in yew
power?
(i.) Ob tho Ibms of tho vuba wboa
Digitized
byM.Se6l«.H
by Google
BtntAS OF TBP TBS9.-^ llff| 114
§ 115.— NnicBBB OF THX Vkbb aftsb a CoixionvB Vovn.
(1.) Every verb having, as its sabjeet, a general eolleetivo nom
H h (6.)lf preeeded by the article, such as ki taUdiU^ Tin/Mlit &e^
takes the number of that noan : —
TV amy of tke ii^ideU wu m-
Ur^ destroffea,
i%e miUtaude of thtpod tkingi
wkuk we find in a work, makes ui
losesigaioftkemmmpiicUffo/ikeiad
JUarmie des faifidMes>< enti&re-
Bent dfttruite. L'AciotfMiB.
La muUiMe des bonnes choses
que Ton tronve dans nn ouvnge,
laU perdre de vne la multipUdM
oas manvaises. Camikads.
(a.) When a partitive collective noun [} 8, (6.)] oeenrs as the snb>
ject of a propositioi:, the verb agrees with that noon, if it oeenpiea
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer.
The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plnral noon following
the collective word, if the collective acts only a seeondaiy part, or
if it is employed only to add an accessoiy idea of number : —
Agreement with tke foXUnoing Nmm.
Une troiqM de iiefmphes conroB-
nftes de fleurs, nagtiieiU autonr de
son char. FiMiLON.
A tnop ofyowng mympke, crowned
wiik Mowers, were ewtmmmg around
Une nute de baeiares dSaoUrenl Is
pays. L'AcAD^MUB.
AeloudofUrbarimisdesoUaedtke
eomntrf,
Cette esptee de ckiens qu'cn ap-
pelle chiens de Laccmle, ne vivenl
que dix ans. Bon.BAV.
That sfedes of dogs wkuktkeifeaB
Laeonian dogsjice onkf Un yean.
Agreement wUk the CoOecUve.
Une troupe d'asiassins erUra dans
la chambre de Coligny.
voLTAna,
A gemg ef aesastins entered Co-
kgnf^ ckamier,
Une nmSe de tails okatreU Fafar.
A doudif arrows darkened the air.
Cette espiee de paoos Mroi^ avoir
6prouv6 MS mftmes eiibts par la
mftme cause. Buppoit.
ham experienced the same ejfects
through the same eamm.
§ 116. — NUMBXB OF TBB YmXA ftHUB AFTSB THX nM>VOUy Cl«
(1.) The verb itre preceded or followed by oe^ as the gnunmatiesl
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with tfesi
pronoun [{ 108, (3.)] ."—
Ce sont les umbuts qui ftmt la
bonne oompagnie. La CfHAUssis.
Sont-ce des reliaieux et des pr6-
tres oui parlent auuil sont-^ des
efartftiens 1 Pascal.
n is wuraU whiJi form good eom*
At tkejf monks and miests who
speak so? arethep Chrimams?
(i.) The verb itre may also be put In the plursl, when the pva-
■ou&s sii« and iibt are put in apposition with the pioDona ca This
fsle, howsverv la c^ptiimal, as the exanples will show. Beftwe mm
10
Digitized
by Google
434 BTVTAX OF TBS TB&B.— { 117, 118.
tnd vmu similarly placed, the verb is always in tlie singnkr: c^tH
nous; cVsl vous: —
Stngiifar.
CeU cox qui anl biti oe siiperbe
Ubyrinthe. Bosnuer.
// is tkey who havt buiU that stir
firb Ubyrinth.
Plural.
Ce simi enz qui vieiiiMtnt
BsacBEasLLE.
li is they who came.
§ 117. — ^ThK TxRB RELATIKO to SEVSKAL No758 I2T DlFVEBlHT
Persons.
A verb having several subjects in different persona, is put in the
plural, and assumes the termination of the first person in prcferenct
to that of the 8econd, and tiiat of the second in preference to that
of the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the
person preferred, recapitukling, as it were, all the other subjects : —
Votro pftre et mn, nons avons €t€
Iongtem|)B ennemis Tun de Tautre.
FCn^lon.
Allez; vous et vos semblables
n*iUs point ikits pour dire trans-
plant6s. MoifTESduiEU.
Yimr father and J hate long been
enemies to each other.
€fo; fou and SMck as yon are nai
JU to be Iranspianted.
§ 118. — ^UsB OF THE Tenses. — The Present of the IxDirA-
• TIVE.
(1.) This tense denotes what exists, or 4s taking place at the time
we spedk : —
Je lis ; vous paries. | / read ; yoii speak.
(2.) The French have only one form of the indicative present :^-
Je lis means, therefore, Jreadj do read^ or am reading.
(3.) Tlie indicative present is used in French, as well as in Eng.
Ksh, for expressing things which are and will always be true -.— -
God is eternal, his power is bound-
lesSf and his clemency is great.
Dieu est itcrnel, sa puissance est
sans homes, et sa c16mcnoe est
grande. QiraultDuvivies.
(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future : —
/ shall be back in a momenta.
Je suis de rctonr dans un mo-
ment. Moi.iKre.
8i Titos a parl6, s'il Vepovse, Je
pars. Racing.
(5.) riie present is frequently used for the past, to awaken atten-
tion, and plar': the event, as it were, before the reader:—
If TMus has .yoken, if he mmrfim
her, I go {will go).
J*ai vn, Skn^iHMir, j*al vu votre
malhourenx tils,
TrafnA imr Ics chevanx qae sb main
a nourris:
Q vent les rappeler, mids sa voix
^ Im effraie. Eacins.
/ saw, my lord, I saw your unr
fortunate son dragged by the horses
wAiek his own hand has fed; hi
wishes to recall JAcxt, but iis vaUe
frightens them.
Digitized
by Google
■ TVTAZ 09 TBS TBBB^ 119. ISO. 48#
§ 110.— The Imperfect.
(1.) The roperfeet, or simulUneoas paat^ is used to ezpreas some-
thing which was in pi ogress, while another thing leas taking place.
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter*
mined:—
J^ierivais, quand Je re^us rotre | / was wnling, t«Ac» / rtoewtd
lettro. I yow Utter .
(2.) The French imperfect^ as may be seen in the above example,
represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be^ and
the participle present of a principal verb.
(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary
action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive
of the verb preceded by '* used to" : —
When I icas in London^ I walked
Lorsque j'etots a Londres, jfaUais
me promener le matin, ensuite Je
dinais, et Je passais le reste de la
Joumde a lire et a terire.
{used to walk) in the maming^ after'
wards dined {u^naliif dined), and
spent (usnaitif) the remainder oj the
day in reading and writing.
(4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next
Section.
§ 120.— The Past Definite.
(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en-
tirely past : —
/ wmt to London, where I saw
your father; I finished my business
TaUU a Londres, oHJe vis votre
p^re; Je finis mes ainiires dans
eette ville, ct revins aussildt let
in that city, and returned hither
immediaiely.
Mr, snci-a-<me wrote last evening
sixversesto Miss such^a-one.
M. un tel icrivit hler au Boir un
sixain k MadeuK^selle uno telle.
MoufiRis.
(2.) Tlie past definite can only be used, as we have seen above,
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed.
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to<tay^lhi$
mornings this week^ ihie month, this year, dtc. [See { 121, Past Indefi-
nite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last wedc, last yearf
&c. :—
Jo ▼ous envoie, mon cher flrire, I I send you, my dear brother, a let-
une Icttrc que yicrivis hier pour I ter which I wrote yesterday for Ma-
Madame de Laval. FisftfLON. | dame de Laval,
(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by
Uie pArtieipic present of the verb and the auxiliary to le; or by pre-
fixing ^used to*" to the infinitive mood. The preterite dttfinito eaa
Mver be so rendered.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
4M trVTAZ 09 TSB TBEl-^T-l IMi
(4.) The impeifeet might be oalled the de$enftim teme of Urn
French.
(6.) TIm pest definite roif ht be ealled the nwrstiTe tenae. It es>
ptegseo that which took place at some time fhlly past We will
endesTor to illnstimte this difference between Aeae two teneea. — A
traveller has entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage ; he
wishes to describe what he saw there, and makes use of the impels
feet or descriptive tense ; he says : —
Un vieiOard se promenaU sons lea
arbres ; U tenaU an livre & la main ;
de temps en temps, il UevaU les
▼eux vers le del, ou les ctmvraU de
la main, et setnilaU s'abimer dans
nne profonde reverie. Devant la
porte de la cabane iUtU assise une
iemme qni dergaU on enflmt snr ses
pnonx ; elle SlaU pAle ; ses ehevenx
MiaitTU an gr6 du vent ; dee larmes
cmlaiaU le long de ses Jones, &c.
AnM man was %Ddlking under ike
trees; he held {vmu kddin^) a hook M
his hand ; from time to time he teased
his eyes towards heaven^ or concealed
tkem with his hand, aetd seemed io
sink into a profewnd revery, JDefere
the door of the hut, sat {was sitting)
a female rocking {^howas rocting\ a
cJuld on her knees i she was foles ear
hair waved (was waving^ ai tik
marep of the wend; tears jQwed (wsrv
fiofoing) down her cheeks.
The traveller has here drawn a picture of what presented iteelf te
his eyes, as he approached the cottage. Not content with re^<e>ent.
ing merely the then present situation of things, ho wishes also to
narrate what took place. He has described the theatre on which
the occurrence took place, which he is going to relate ; he now pro-
ceeds to the narrative, and uses the past definite or narrative tense :-«
Je m'approehai du vieillard ; lors-
qn'Sl m*aperguJLy il s^ava/nfa vers moi,
me salua, et me ftria de ne pas trou-
Uer cette paisible retraite du mal-
heur. n tetewma a la cabane, prit
Tenfiuit dee bras de la &mme, et
renira ; eUe le siUvU, &c.
I approached the eld man ; when ks
perceieed me he came towards mm,
greeted me, and beseughl me not te
disturb this peaceful retreat of fhs
unfortunate. He returned to tie cot-
tage, took the child from the woman's
arms, and wetU f»; shefoOawed him.
Another example mj|^t be taken from Ia Fontaine^s well-knowB
ftUe:—
LB COBBBAV BT LB aENASn.
Mattre corbeau snr un arbre per-
che,
7)mai< en son bee un fromaee /
Maitre renard, par Todenr ifitehe,
hoitieUk pen prto ce langage.
THE SAVBM Aim TUB FOX.
Master raven perched upon a tree,
held (was holding) in JUs beak a
cheese; master fox, attracted by the
lowhig words.
Here the poet uses the imperfect of tenir in describing the aitn*-
tien in wfaieh tae f jx found the raven, but in relatir^ the action of
fhe foB, Ia Fontaine usee the nanative tenae of the same twK
Digitized
by Google
TIm eommeDeemmt of the first book of T&kmaquu^ offers tn ex-
sellent illustration of what we have here advanced on tbe im of the
.mperfect and the past def nite.
§ 121.— Ths Past iNDsniriTB.
(1.) The post indefinite expresses an aetion entirely eonqileted,
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet ehipaed» as 1^
day^ this nunuh^ this year^ &p*.
The kimg appmniid «w fmimy
arckbiskop tf Cam^Of,
This morning I found tke dreH »
sUppetyf thai I UumgU in eate 1
haipptMd to fcM on my right tmn^ I
sh4nUdtkmbocampielolfAdpk»,
'* I have forbidden tha a knndred
Umes to scrape thf wretched vioUnf no-
verthdess^ 1 heard thee this morning"
*' This momingt Do yon not f«-
coOectthat you broke il to pieces ye$»
terdayr*
Le rot m'a nemmi autoard'hui
archeTlque deCambray. FiNtfLow.
Ce matin j'at trouvi le paT6 si gUs-
sant, que yai pensi que si Je Tenais
k tomber rar le bras droits Je serais
tout 4 fkit d£sempar6.
Bernardin OB St. Piebrb.
Je Vai difendu (see (2.) below)
oent fois de racier ton m6cbant
violoD ; oependant, Je Vai erUendu ce
sM/in— Ce matin 7 Ke vons souvient-
U pas que vons me le mtles [( 120
(2.)] bier en pieces 1 Palaprat.
(2.) The past indefinite is, slso, used with regard to a time en
tirely past, but not specified : —
Les fimits de U teire ont M\n
premiere uonrrltnre des hommes.
QlRAULT DUVIVIER.
Les Franfais omit gagni la bataiUe
de Marengo.
The fruits of the earth were the
first oHmeiUs ofmankind.
The FWnch gaitted the batHe of
Marengo,
(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in-
definite is by many of the best French writersi used indifferently
with the past definite: —
Past De/iniie:
Hnit Jonrs aprto son depart, U
m*icrivU nne lettre.
Bernardin db St. Pierre.
A week after his departure, he wrote
me a letter,
Je fus bien flch£ hier, ma chdre
coosine, de vous avoir qnitt^e aveo
tant de pr6cipitation. FiiciLON.
/ was very sorry yesterday, my dear
eeusin, for having left you tn so much
Past Indefinite.
Je vons ai ierily 11 y a qnbiie
Jonrs. THsBAiia.
I wrote to you a fortnight ago.
Hier en travaillant k men qna-
tri6me dialogue, J'ot iprouvi nn
vrai plaisir. Mirabbau.
Yesterday ^ whUe working at my
fourth dialogue, I experienced real
pleasure.
(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite,
every other verb of that sentence, and of the senteaeea refeiring to
it| ahoold be in the same tense : —
Ok avesf-Yoxm iti }
Tai d'abord M d r«^ise, eMmifte
fs enis venu diner.
Where have you been f
I firsl went to ehmekf mid i
Digitized
by Google
48t •TVTAZ aw IBS TBKB.-^ 122, 12S, 124.
§ 122. — ^The Past Anterior,
The* paai anterior expresses what took place immediately before
another event wliieh is also post: the latter event being nsiially the
rrsult of^ or dependent upon the former :»-
J^ken I MadjKreeived sty emr^ 1
was askamed of wof hmd aitd%ci $0
wardMJum,
Qiiand feus namnu mon erreur,
le fiw honteux de maavais proc6d6s
que J*avatt cos pour lai.
QiaAULT DmrrriEB.
8m (ft.) of the (below.
§ 123.— The Plupebitect*
(1.) The pluperfect marks on event not only past in itself bat •■
pest with regard to another past event : —
yacms d6jeAn€, quand vons I / had breakfasted, t^ien fou ame
Tintes me deniander. lo inquire for me,
GlRAb'LT DCYITIEa. I
(2.) Tho pluperfect having as its aoxiliary the imperfect of the
verbs acotr, or itre, partakes of the signification of that tense. It
may, therefore, often be used to denote customary action :-^
D^ que yatais lu quclques pages, | As soon as I had read a few pages,
je me promenais. | / used to take a walk.
In such cases, it generally precedes or follows another verb in the
imperfecta
(3.) WhoFi the action is not a customary one, and the sentence
eommences with one of the adverbs quand^ lorsque, aussiiol que, dit
que, die., the past anterior is generally used :-—
Dis que J*eM lu quelques pages Je I As soon as I had read a few pages,
•ortis. I / wetU otU.
§ 124.— The Two Futures.
(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will be, or will take
place, at a time not yet come :~-
Votre fWre partira demain. | Your brother will go to-morrow.
(-2.) The future is used, iu French, after an adverb of time, in caaet
where the English use the present of tho indicative : —
Qnand vous viendrez, vous appor- | ll'^en you come, you will bring wnf
tcress mon livrc. | hook.
(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like
the following:—
Croira qui voudr% llilstorien Ca-
pftolin ct quelques autres 6crivain8
qui font denser les iUphants sur la
ooide. fVaAun.
Bdiset who wiU the kistenan Cs*
pitotinus and several other tnrtlBn^
wko male elephatUs donee en a repe.
Digitized
by Google
STVYAZ OV THX TBBB.— § 125, 126, 127. 489
(4.) Tfea fnture anterior is used to sigrnify what will have heen al
A future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases wheru
die past indefinite is used in English :—
Quand raurai fitU mes afTaires, Je | \Vhen I have finished my affavSj I
Tous irai voir. Qira jlt DuYiviiiK. | will go and see you.
§ 125. — ^Thb Two Conditionals.
(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under
a certain condition :—
Nous goiiUridms bien des Jouls-
mnccs, SI nous saviooa fa ire un bon
asago du temiw.
QlRAULT DUVIVIER.
Wt should June many enjoymenUf
if tee knew how to make a good um
of time.
(2.) The conditional post denotes what would have taken place,
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been fuU
fiJIed:—
II serail aUe a la campagne, si le I He icotdd have gone into the coun'
temps le lui avait pvrmis. | try, if the weather had atlovxd him.
(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French,
follovv the conjunction xt, meaning in case that. The indicative pres-
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel-
dom by the Americans or English who havo acquired a good know!
edge of the French language.
§ 126. — ^ThB LfPERATIVB.
(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation,
permifision, or enL *»aty :—
ConnaiS'moi tout entidre.
OoRNKTLLK.
Ah ! demeurtz, seigneur, eXdaignez
m'6couter. Racine.
Ne tnrdons plus, marchons et s'il
faui quo Je mcure,
Mtmrons. Racine.
Know me enUrdy.
Ah I remain^ my lord^ amd deign
to listen to me.
Lei us tarry no longer; let us pr^
ceed i and^ if J mvsf di*^, let us die.
§ 127. ^TlIB SUDJUNCTIVB.
(1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision :—
Ob^ls si tu vcux qu'on t'obeisse | Obey, if thtm wishest thai one dey
in Jour. Voltaire. I others may obey thee.
(3.) A vsrb, which is governed by the conjunction qu€^ most 1m
Digitized
by Google
440
ntWtAX 09 TSl tlEB.r-{lST.
fot In tk« fQljuiMtiye dMde in IVsneh, though H mtj bft ir fht m
dlMtive or coDdiUonal in EngliBh :*—
1. When the part of the sentttnee, which preeedet ^itf^beiig intMk
rogative or negative, ezpreeees a donbt:—
PenaeB-Toua qne toqs riustissiez
dans cette afBdre 1
Je ne Tondraia pai aMvrer, qn'oa
k tUnve 6crire. Boiubau.
Croyea-Tona qn'fl vitnne?
Do yon think HUU you wiH sucemi
in ikis affair?
Jwmldnai q/br7n,tJkaiU ^kamU
hewiUen,
DoyoubtHnekiwUcQmttl
9. When the verb preceding que ezpreaaea cmueM^coimmmi^Amki
itiirf, iurpriaef warU^ duLy^ neeestUy^fear^ apprehension >-
Je permdt, Je touhaUet Je douU.je
V€uXt fordonn€t Je suis surpris que
Tons venkz.
Die ce niAme moment^ ordoimes
qne Je parte. Racinb.
Ta veux, qu'en ta fkvear nona
€rojfums rimpoesible. CoaNBiLLE.
Je mis ravit que nona Unions en-
semble. Destouches.
Ipermit, Iwitk, I dmM, I dm^
I order, I am svrpriaedf thai you may
or should come.
Order, that I may depart iktetenf
moment,
T^kdni vrishest thai for thy sake we
may believe in imposswHilies.
I am delighted that we happen ta
Uve together.
3. When the firat verb ezpreaaea fear or iqjprehenaion, the verb
preceded by que, moat alao be preceded by ne ;—
Je craina, Je tremble, J'appr6- i / fear, J tremble, I apprehend, i
hende, J'ai penr, qu'il ne vienne, I am afraid he may come,
QlEAULT DOVIYIER. |
(3.) The prononns qui, que, lequd, dont, and the word od, meaning
in whichj should be followed by the subjunctive, when that part of
the sentence which precedes them, expreaaea an interrogation, or im-
plies a wish, a doubt, or a condition. They muat also be followed
by the verb in the subjunctive, when they are preceded by a aoper-
lative relative [{ 14, (9.)] :—
Y a-t-il quelqn'nn fui ne retpeOe
lemalheurl
La meiUewre choee qne vonajniis-
siez ibire.
Choisisses nne retraite ^ vons
oyez tranquille.
Is there any one «*« dees net tv-
^fect misfortune.
The best thing that you eon de.
Choose aretreat in which you may
enjoy repose.
(4.) A verb preceded by que, and one of the uniperaonal verba
falloir, importer, convenir, tuffire, valoir mieux, or by the verb itre^
naed unipersonally in connection with the adjectivea fdcheux,juttet
* When two verba are united b3rthe ooiynnction que, the second !a pnl
In the indicative, if the first expresses something certahi, positive :—
On m'assure que voua ai/ez re^ I T^ assure me that you haee fa»
vne lettre de votre pftre.
I ceived a letter frrm your father,
d by Google
Digitized t
• TVTAX OV TBI ▼!&&—{ 13a
441
*^futiet nifiremm^ posMej or with d prcpos^ iemp$^ d ilStirer, d
aoukaiter, ^., must be pat in the subjunctive [seeh,lZt IL 1.] :—
UfaiU que tous venUz, You mud eome^ orU is neeessarf
that you should came,
Uesttem^<lxtdYOXiaparHez^xa It is time that you should go to
Rome.
It does not fkaumie that you should
go there,
Itisnotoertmi^ihatyoumnrigkt,
\k. L ACADiMIE.
II nVjf pas oertidn, que tous a/yez
mSson.
(6.) After the expressions quelque . . . que^ qud gue, tt
fue, ^ftoiqtte, the verb is always put in the subjunctive :—
Qi«29«'eflfbrt qaefassent les horn-
Aes, leaf n«szit pnrait partout
BoasuET.
Qui que ce wH^ parlez et De le
tnifiBes pas. Racinb.
Bn> mince qn'il fuiise 6tre, un che-
>ea flik de rombro. ViLLEPsi.
WkBd€9or effort men may mate,
their nothingness appears everywhere.
Whoever he may be^ speakt and do
not fear him.
However thin it may be,mhmr hoi
a shadow,
(B,) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the
subjunctive, see } 14S.
§ 128. — ^Thx iNnNTnvB.
^1.) The infinitive lepresents the being, action or passion In an
indefinite manner and without number or person :—
Tb wish to deceive Heaven,1sfoOy
in men.
Vouloir tromper le del, c'est folic
IL la terre. La Fontaine.
L'ardeur de tMitnor, oMe 4 la
penr de mourir. Cosnsillb.
Hair est nn tonrmeot.
BiGUR.
TV ardor of conquest (to eonqner)
yields to the/ear of death (to die).
T}f hate u a torment.
I Or rather, why cnn I not ai ike
I sweet close of the day 7
(3.) The infinitive is often used substantively : —
On plut6t, que ne puis-Je au doux I
tomber du jour 1 Lamaetikb. |
(3.) The infinitive present is used in French after certain TeriMi
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjnnetioB
Allee thercher mon pdre. | Go and fetch my father,
(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre-
ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and ^tre excepted) or by
a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive :«^
ILON.
Tout ce qn'eUo B'imag:inait temr^
lai 4diappait tout-a-oonp.
FfNii
Yes ralflons sent trop
i'elles-mtoes, sans ^^appuy6eBde
ees secoui'S strangers.
Racinb.
AU that the fancied that she heU
escaped her tuddenly.
Your rec»n$ art too good iiitktmt
sOves to need that foreign t
Digitized
by Google
448
■ TVIAX 07 THX TBBB.— § 129, 130.
VoQS peuei Umt pneir,
PlRTRE.
Croit-Q le^Mcnnr rempre?
Th. COXNEILLE.
i^5 he edieve he can break U 7
(5.) The French language preferring the active to the pasaiit
voice, requires the use of the active verb in the following and atmilA
<uises wherein the English use the passive roice :~^
Cette dame est bien d pUUndre. Thai lady is muck to he pitied^
Cette maison est a vendre, 7%t5 htmse is lobe sold.
La chose est do trop pen de con- T%e matter is of loo tiiUe u%
■fiquence pour la traUer sdrieuse- sequence io be treated serunulijf.
mont
Voltaire.
§ 120. — GOVERNMEKT OF YbRBS.
Some verbs are in English governed by prepositions different from
those which connect or govern the same verbs in French. Some,
again, which are in English, joined by prepositions, require none
between them in French. We give below, lists of verbs with tho
appropriate prepositions, according to the best French authoritiea.
§ 180. — ^VXRBS BBQUIRINO NO PREPOSITION BBTORE AKOTBEB
Verb in thb Infinitive.
Acoourir,
Aimer mleuz,
Aller,
Aperoevoir,
Assurer,
Avouer,
Compter,
Confessor,
Conrir,
Croire,
Daiener,
IMcTarer,
D^irer,
Devoir,
ficonter,
Entendre,
Knvoyor,
Esp6rer,
Faire,
Falloir,
Imagiiior (s"),
Laisscr,
Menor,
Hier,
to run
to prefer
logo
to perceive
io assure
to confess
to intend
io confess
to run
io believe
to deign
to dedare
io desire
iibe obUged
io hear, to listen
to hear
io send
iohope
to make
to be necessary
toimagvne
io lei, to suffer
io take, to Had
todeny
Observer,
Oaer,
Paraitre,
Penser,
Pouvoir,
Pr^tendre,
Prtftrer,
Protester,
Rappeler (se),
Rapporter,
Reconnaitre,
Regardcr,
Retonmer,
Revenir,
Savoir,
Sembler,
Sentir,
Souhaiter,
Soutenir,
Timoigner,
Valoir mieuz,
Venir,
Voir,
Vouloir,
to notice J ioobsenm
to dare
to seem
to think, tofanem
tobeaUe
to pretend
to prefer
to protect
torewumber
to report
toacknowkdff
to look at
to return
to comeback
to know
to seem
tofed
to 19154
to maintaisk
to testify
tobe&Uer
tocome
to see
tobeuraUng
Jo prStendi tods traitor oomme
Km proyre ffiiL Bacine.
/ intend to treat you at my tmm
Digitized
by Google
SYNTAX or TBS VXRB. — § 131
448
tt 1e Hbin de les fiots ira grassir
la Loire,
A.>'ant CI lie tes fkTcura Rortent de
ma m^moiitr. Doilgau.
And the Rhine wiU go and s»eU
ike Loire v:UA Us iMttKt, before (At
rcDumbrance of thy goodtiesi leavw
my meiihory.
§ 131. — ^V£RBS RSQUiaiNQ TUB l?AEPOamON A BSjroaB AV
IXFINITIVE.
Tho («') pliced after the verb ^ows it to be reflective.
Abaisaer («'),
Aboutir,
Accordcr (s'),
Accoutiimer,
Acharnur (»*),
Ailni'^ttre,
A^uerrir (s'),
Aider,
Aimer,
Appliqucr (a*),
Apprendre,
Apprftter (a'),
Aspirer,
Asslg^rier,
Assi^ettir {%%
Attacher fs'),
Attcndre (a*),
AttcDdre,
Augmenter (a'),
Antoriser,
Avilir (8'),
Avoir,
Avoir peine,
Balancer,
Bomer (se),
Cbercher,
Complaire,
Conconrir,
Condamner (le).
Condeaoendre,
Consdbtir,
Consister,
Conspirer,
Consumer,
Contribuer,
C Olivier,
Cotter
Determiner,
Determiner (se),
Di&poaer («e),
Divertir (se),
Employer,
Encourager.
Enl
Inpger,
Innardir,
io stoop
to end in
Uagree
to accustom
to strive
to admit, to permit
to beanne inured
to help in
to tike
to endeavor Jto app^
to team
to prepare
to aspire
to summon
to subject one's self
to apply
to^cjifeet
to put of
to increase
to autAorize
to debase one^s self
to have
to have dijicuttfin
to hesitate
to confine on^s self
to enaetmor
to delight in
to oh^perate
to condemn one's
tocondescend
to consent
to consist
to conspire
to destroy
iocontriiute
to invite
to cost
to induce
to resolve
to prepare one*s self
to amuse one^s self
to employ, to devote
to encourage
toind^ue
to encourage
ioieach
re, 6treAlire, ^to
k icrire, dec. {
Entendre (a*),
fivcrtner (»'),
Ezceller,
Exciter,
Ezhorter,
ExpoAcr (»*),
Fatigiier (se),
riabitnerO
Ua^rder (ae\
H«siter,
Instmire,
Infdressec,
Inviter,
Mettre,
Mettre (se),
Montrer,
Obatlner (a)*,
Offrir (a'),
Pencber,
Penser,
Per86v6rer,
Persiater,
Plaire (se).
Prendre pfaisbr,
Pr6parer (se)
Porter,
Provoqner,
Poosaer,
lUdnire,
lUdnire (se),
Renonccr,
R5pugner.
R^signer (ae),
Rester,
Rdussir,
Risquer,
Servir,
Songer,
Snffiro (not uidp.),to suj/lce
Tarder, to tarry
Tendre, to tend
Tenir, to intend, U mlm
Travailler, to Uier
Vlier, to aim
Voaer, te
be readily,
writing, ^
tobeexperi vn
to strive
to excel
toexdte
toezhort
to expose on^s ee^
to veary one*s sdf
to become used to
to venture
to hesitate
to instruct
to interest
to invite
to set, to put
tocommenee
toshow^ to teach
to persist in
toojfer
to incline
to think, to intend
to persevere
to persist
to delight in
to take pleasure
to prepare
to induce, to excOtf
to urge
to urge
to constrain
to tend, to end
to renounce
to be repugnant
to be reconciled
to tarry too long
to succeed
torisk
to serve
to think, to 1
Digitized
by Google
444
• TVTAX 07 TMS TBKB.— f 1S9.
LIhmbim ft'mir point d s'ooca-
per de aoo ii6aiit, et da m bMsease.
Massillon.
Aves-TOiis jamuB jpefi«< d ofrir &
Dieu toatefl oei loammDoeB 1
Ths same.
Bne ytm ever tMangki ^efmm$
all these sufferings te Chd?
to beikink one's sdf DiseoDTenir,
ItoU&oisf
to ilcSWMJf
togneve
todisnutde
toputof
iosasf^teU
iodmvif
to discoiUiiifii€
todtsfenm
toforvear
toapologizi
to distnude
todoM
to endeavor
tobefrigkkmed
toprioeni
tokasten
§ 1924 — VSBBS BSQUIBINO THS PRXPOflXnOV Db BBVOM All
ImriNiTiTB.
AbHtenir (t*), to abstain IDteaocoatimierl
Accnaer (a'), to accuse ont^s sdf (se),
Acherer, tofinish Dtehabitaer
Aflbcter, to affect (se),
Affliger (s*), to grieve Bteespirer,
A^r (8'). xa&D,, to be the question D60okr (so),
i^pUnair (s'}, to rejoice D6toiinier»
Apprtfaender, to apprehend Difl&rer,
Ayertir, to vam Dire,
Avi8er(B').
Aroir besofn, to want
Avoir eoQtame, to be accustomed
Avoir demein, to intend
Avoir envie, to tcish^
Avoir carde, to take care
Avoir honte, to be ashamed
Avoir intention, to intend
Avoir l6 tempi, to have Ume
Avoir le ooorage, to have courage
Avoir pear, to be afraid
Avoir raisoo, to be right
Avoir regret, to regret
Avoir tort, to be wrong
Avoir sqjet^ to have reason
Avoir soin, to take care
Blimer, to blame
Brdler, to wish ardentlf
Gensnrer, to censure
Cesser, to cease
Ghagriner (se), to grieve one's self
Chaiger, to desire^ to intrust
Cbarger(se), to take ot
Choisir, to choose
Commander, to command
Conjurer, to beseech
ConseiUer, to advise
Gontenter (se), to be satiated
Convaincre, to convince
Gonvenir, to become^ suit
Gorriger, to correct
Graindre, to fear
D6ooarager, to discourage
D6daigner, to disdain
Mtedre, toforbid
Mlbndn (se) to decUne
IMfler, tochallenge.todate
Mpiclier (se), to hasten
to take on one's self 06mir,
Discontinner,
Dispenser,
Dispenser (seV
Disculper (se),
Dissnader,
Doater,
Eflfbrcer (s'),
Kffrayer (s'),
Bmpichor,
Empreaser (s*),
fipottvanter (s*), to be frightemed
Entreprendre, to undaiake
^ tobevexed
towonder
toavoid
to excuse emfss^
to congratulate
tofeign
toiaiierone^t seU
to shudder
totakeeare
toUment •
to pride otui*s mlf
toventure
tohasten
tobeindignant
to take into m^
head
to inspire
to swear
to fail
to thinks to in
to meddle
tothreaten
to laugh ai
Jtonner (s*),
fiviter,
Excnser (s*),
y^llciter,
Feindre,
Flatter (se),
Frtmir,
Garder (se).
Gloriflcr (se),
Hasarder (se),
Htter(se),
Impnter,
Indigner (a*),
Ing«rer (s'),
Inspirer,
Jnrer,
Manquer,
MMiter,
MAler (se),
Menaoer,
Miriter,
Moqner (se).
Digitized
by Google
• YVtAZ OV TBB VIBB.— $ 188.
446
lf<MBir(l|gu},
Ni?r,
PardoBnor,
Parler,
Paiser (so),
Permettre,
Persuader,
Piquer (se),
Plaindre,
Plamdre (se),
Prendre garde.
Prendre soixi
Prescrire,
Preiser,
Presser (ae),
Pr^smner,
Pricr,
Promettre,
Propoeer,
Proposer (se),
Protester,
Punir,
Kebuter (se),
Becommander,
tohntg
to deny
toeztmm
to speak
todowUhovi
topervUt
to persuade
to take pride in
to pity
toixmplain
to take eare^ heed
to take care
to prescribe
to urge
to ktuten
to presume
to desire
to promise
to propose
toitUe'nd
to protest
*o punish
tobeweaary
toreammend
BeAiser,
B6joair (se),
Remerder,
Repentir (se),
Reprendre,
Riprimander,
Reprocher (se),
R^sondre,
Ressouvenir (se),
Rire,
Rongir,
Scandaliser (se),
Seoir (nnip.)}
Sommer,
Soupfonner,
Souvenir (se),
Suffire (unip.),
guggfrer,
Supplier,
Tenter,
Trembler,
Vanter (se),
torefim
toreiprH
torejoiee
tr thank
tojfpent
tocensure
toteprtmamd
to reproach fM*
toresoboe
to fejnenwer
to laugh
to Uu^
to take 0 fines
to become, sMt
to summon
to suspect
toremember
to suffice
to suggest
to b^ech
to attempt
to PremUs
toboast
n Taut mieux hasarder de smwer
nn coupable que de condamner un
famocent Voltaire.
Le monde se vante de faxre des
beureuz. BiUssillon.
ItisVelUrtorwiiihevisk ofsparvng
a guilty person^ than to condemn an
innocent one.
T^ loorld boasts that it can rendef
W/On happy.
§ 133.— RuLB.
(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided
they require the same regimen :—
Nous ai$HonSj nous instnusons, et | We love, we tnstruet, and we praise
nous louons nos onfants. \ our children.
This sentence is correct, because iitm«r, instruire^ and louer^ being
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen.
(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot
govern one and the same noun ; and therefore another form roust be
giren to the sentence. We could not say in French,-^ Ju gran
nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tons les mois«— A
great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every numthj be-
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition
dansy and sorftr by means of the preposition de. We should say >—
Un grand nombre de vaisseaux en- 1 A large number of vrssets enter tkU
trent<toiuue port et «» sortent tons \ port and teem it every wumA»
hmwM, I
See i M, (U) (3.), slso nota, and { 140.
Digitized
by Google
446
srvTAx or tbs pabtioipls. — § 1S4
§ 154. — ^Thk Participle Past.
(1.) We have seen [} 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not aooom
imnied by an auxillarj, assumes tlie gender and number of the doub
which it qualifies : —
Les iniinili6s sourdes et cachees | Quiet and concealed enmity it
■OfDt plus a craindre que les baines I mare to be feared tkan open and d^
0»vtrUs ct diclarees, No£L. | dared hatred.
(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary eire^ agrees
in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the sub-
ject be placed before or after it [See } 135, (1.)]
Le far est emousse; les buchers
8ont eleints. Voltairr.
La vertu obscure est souvent
m€prisee. Massillon.
Les Qrecs 6taient persuades^ que
] ime est immortelle.
Barth^lp.mt.
Quand il vit Purae ou 6taient
renfermSes les cendres d'Uippias, il
versa un torrent de larmes.
FiKtfLON.
(3.) The participle past, having avoir as its auxiliary, never agreea
with the nominative: —
Vous riez 1 ficrives qu'elle a ri.
Racine.
T^ke sword is blunted ; th£ piles art
extingtiisked.
Humble virtue is often despised,
T%e Greeks were permad^d, lUf
the soul is immortal.
When ke perceived ike um in
which were enclosed the askes of Hi^
piaSf he shed a torrent of tears.
Mes amis ontparUs Icurs cceurs
sont attendris. Voltaire.
Mes oousines ont lu,
Bescherblle.
You laugh? Put davfn thai ski
laughed.
Mtf friends have ^okeng that
hearts are moved.
Mjf cousins have read.
(4.) The participle past, having avoir for an auxiliary, agrees with
its direct regimen, when that regimen precedes the participle:—*
La lettre pte vons aves Scrile.
Pddro, qu'as tu fait de nos mon-
tures ?— Seigneur, jo les a! aUncKies
k la grille. Lb Sage.
Les meilleures harangues sont
celles que Ic co2ur a dictees.
Marmontel.
Je les ai ekerchis dans tous les
eoins, et Je ne Us ai pas trouvis.
Mn«. DeQcnlis.
The teller which you have wriUn.
Pedrot what hast thou done with
our horses ? My tord^ I have fast-
ened them to the grate.
The best addresses axe those wAidk
the heart has dictated.
I have sought them in every comer,
but have not found them.
(5.) But, if tlie direct regimen is placed after the participle, this
participle remains invariable :-~-
Ihave received wnur liiter.
J'ai reyu votre lettre.
C'est la viritS eUe<m6me qci loi
s dicti oes belles pwdes.
Bosfoxr.
dyawr kiter,
n is truth itself whieh hm
to him those fau words.
Digitized
by Google
■ THTAX OV TnS P A RTIOXPLE.— § ISff. 447
Les dicnx ont aiiache presque I The gods have attached <
Mitani de malAeurs a la liberty, qu'd many misfariunes to liJbert^, as to j
la BervUudc. MoNTissauieu. 1 vUude.
§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules.
(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal
verbs [} 43, (6), } 46, (2.), i 66] take itre as an auxilinry, tbe past
participle of thase verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding
Boetion; but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen cornea
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds:—
Your sister has bought {hersdf)
handsome dresses^ i. e.,^ herself.
That toomau has reiutered hzradj
uiUiAppy.
AchetS in the first example does not vary, because se, placed before
it is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or acca-
sative, robes^ is placed after the participle. Rendue in the second ex*
ample varies, because the word se, representing femmet is ft direct
ragimen, and precedes the participle.
We will add a few extracts as examples: —
REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS
Yotre soenr s'cst achetS de belles
robes.
Cette femmo s'est rendue mal-
heureuse.
Used as indirect Objects.
Hb ne se sont proposi^ pour exem-
pie, que la constitution la plus sim-
ple des anciens. Yoltairb.
Tliey have proposed to themselves,
as an example^ only the most simjde
constipation of the andents.
II est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous
nous sommes parU des yeux.
MOLlfiRE.
B is true^ that she and I have spih
ken to each other with our eyes.
N6anmoin8, il 5'6tait conserve
Vautoritft principale. Bobsuet.
KevcttkelesSf he hcd preserved to
himself the prindpal authority.
Used as direct Objects.
Elles se sont proposees conmie del
mod&les de douceur.
Quoted bt Bcbches.
T%ey have proposed themselves as
patterns of gentleness.
La langue latino et la langne
grecque se sont longtemps parlies,
Lbmabb.
7)le Ijatin and Qreek languages
were long spoken.
La vie pastorale qui s'est conser^
vie dans TAsie, n'e&t pas sans opu-
lence. Voltaire.
The pastoral Ufe which has been
preserved in Asia^ is not without opu-
lence.
(2.) Wlien pronominal or reflective verbs, of* which the second
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun,
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees witli this
latter pronoun or noun when it is preceded by it, and remains inviu
riaUe, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (I.) (6.) of the
preceding section w
Digitized
by Google
44S STVTAZ OV TBX P AETXCI VI»S^-*§ 180.
Nous nous sommes reprochA lift*
di8cr6tion.
IFe Aaue leproaektd owrseUu wUh
the indiscretion.
L'indiflerStioa que
MMnmefl reprochto.
Tfi* indisaretion foiik tokich
kmve reproached ourselves.
Or to render in English the relations the same as in French :— -
77k« indiscretion which we have | We have reproached to
reproached to ourselves, \ the indiscreUon.
(8.) The partioipl6 past conjugated with enxntj and preceded Iry m
dkeet regimen, is sometinies followed by an IniSDitiYe. In such
eaaea, when the direct regimen is nnder the govermnent of the in^ai-
tive rather than of the participle, the latter of eonrse remaina tin*
changed:—
La rdgle qne J'ai commenU k ex- I The rule which 1 commenced ie
pUquer. | expUdn.
(4.) The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood ; yet the
participle mast follow the same role, as if it were ezpresaed. The
participle /oi^, followed by an infinitive, and laissSj followed by the
infinitive of an active verb, are always invariable : —
BUe a obtenn tontes les fkvenrs
ftt'elle a vouiu (obtenir).
La maison que J'ai fait bfttir.
Ces hommes se sont laissi battre.
She olHained aU the fisvon wkUk
she wished (to oUain),
The house which I have had buiU,
These men have sujered themsdves
to be beaten,
(6.) In some cases, it may be difficult to ascertain whether the
regime direct ia under the government of the participle or of the
infinitive.
If the regime direct is to be represented as performing the aetion
expressed by the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that
regime in gender and number : —
Je Us tiivus secourir leurs enne- I / saw them reUecing their enemtas,
mis. I
In this example it will be seen that Us (the rSgitne direct) is repre-
sented as actually doing what is expressed by the infinitive, and thad
the infinitive itself is translated by the present participU,
If, however, the regime direct is to be represented as snfiering the
action expressed by the infinitive, then the participle will remain tuw
•hanged, and the infinitive will be translated as a passive. Thus >-«
/ saw them reUeved by their ene-
mies.
Further examples:-^
Je Us 9i vu secourir par leurs
ennemis.
VmiaHe.
Je fat ai eMf reponiMr les enne-
mis.
/ saw them repel {repeOing) the
InvariabU,
ai vu reponsser par Im
Je Us
ennemia.
J saw them repMtd
i^ the em
Digitized
by Google
«T»VAt OV TSB FASriOlPLl^-*) ^'^ ^^
J« to «i 9itf prendre U ftdlB.
/ Mw tton taking jUgkL
Je ^j ai vus iVapper.
/ *ww tkem striking.
Lee peraoDiies que J'a! mUndim
tbanter.
7%« penens whom Ikemrd nng»
(6.) The purtio^les paet of neuter yerbe, conjugated witk cm«p
and thoee <tf nniperaonal verba, are alwaya invaiiaUe >^
Je to a! vw prendre aw to fttt
/ torn them taken in the a'eni.
Je to ai vu ftmpper.
1 sant tkem stfmsk.
Lea riianiona qne J'al
chanter.
Th£ s^ngs whiek I ktatrd mng.
Qne de bien n'a-t-elle paa fkit^
pendant le pen de Jonrs qn'elle a
rSgniS FiJcBiBR.
Lea chalenre ezoeeaives qu'il a
' ' , ont can86 beanconp de nuda-
CONDILLAC.
^'
How niKcA good has skonoi d!ra#,
during the fsw days tkat ski fwtgntdi
T%s excessive heat vfhkk we tovf
(7.) The paat participle never agreea with en, becanae en can haw
no other relation to the participle than that of an hidirect regimen.*
Th« preaence of en doea not of eonrae prevent the agreement of the
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb >—
Avea>vona mang& dea finite 1
Ten aS mai^L
Tont le monde m'a offert dee
iervloea, et persoone ne m'ei» a
rendu, Mm^ de Maintbnon.
Ha/oeyoneaUnof tke fmiiU? t
have eaten of ikem.
Every body tendered me sermces^
aind no person rendered me anf.
EVypreoededky the Oreet Regimen tf ike ParikipU.
Caaslni natnrellement fler et im-
p6rienx, ne cherchait dans la perte
oe Ctear qne la vengeance de qnel-
qnes injures qu*il en avait revues,
Vbrtot.
Bandea grioee an del qni nous en
a vengis, Corneillb.
Cassius naturalif proud and vm^
period, sought in the death of Cesar
onhf revenge for some injuries which
he had received from Am.
Render thanks to Heaven wUeh has
revenged us for it,
(8.) Le pen haa in French two meanings: it aignifiea a smaU
quantity^ or the toant of.
When it signifiea a smdU qwantity^ the participle agreea with tto
nonn which follows le pen : —
Le pen d'ailbctSon qne vons Ini I TV MU aj^aum which you hop
aves tSmoignie, In! a rendn le con- I shown him, has restored his course.
gMgO' I
* No6l and Cbapsal, page 166. Several grammarians call en at times a
rtglme direct We thhik with Bescherelle {Dictionnaire noHond, page
1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, bnt only a
part of it, or rather merely refers to it; the direct re^en being itself
uiderstood. Bx. Avez-vons des livresl J'enai. Have you books? i
have some. In the latter sentence, the word qnelqnea-nns, the direet objed
Is nnderstood after the verb. J*en at quelques uns, and en is rather a ie>
feranoetoit^thanasnbetitntelbrit The Itteial traadatioo of tbe as»»
tenoe will show this : I have of them a fern.
Digitized
by Google
4M STJTTAX or THl ADVKftB.--§ 136, 197.
WLen Je peuin used in the flense of the wtnt tf, the partii^ple rec^
mains unaltered.
Le pm d'affection ^aerons lui | The ica^U of afection v*kick wn
avez tlhtoi^nS, I'a dico iragi. | have ihoiffn kini, Ads disumraged Aim.
g 13C. — The Advsrb.—>Kules. — Place op toe Adtsrb.
(1.) In Frc^idi the adverh used to modify a verb in a simple tense
is generally placed after the verb :<—
Qae de gens prennent kardimeiU | How many people assume hoUSjf
le masque de la vertu ! I ike mask of virtue I
ScuDiai. I
(2.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogations, have the
same place in French as in English : —
0& est vbtre fr&re 1 11 est id, \ Where is ffour brother? He is here,
(3.) In compound tenses the adverb is placed between the aoxi-
Uary and the participle:—
Tons avez mal (hit. | You have done wrong.
11 nous a bUn rc^us. | He received us teetl.
(4.) Adverbs of manner ending in menl, may, in componnd tensesi
be placed before the participle or after it, when they are not very
long, or followed by other modifying words. When, however, tJiey
are followed by such words they must be placed after the par-
/iciple : —
c!!la wt exprimfi heu^l^L^. \ ^^^^ " ^^^'^V expressed.
II est venu heureusemieni a temps, ] He came fortunalely in time,
(5.) The adverbs aujourd*hui, Khday; demain, lo-morrnw; bier,
yesterday^ may be placed before or after the verb, but never between
the auxiliary and the participle. The adverb davantage, more^ must
always follow the participle : —
Nous soromes arrives aujourd^hui.
Votre frtre s'est blc886 Aier.
AvjottrU^hvi il fait beau-temps j
iemain il plcuvra.
GlKACLT DUVIVIER.
We came to-day.
Yttur brother Atirl himsd/yesferday,
'l\t-day, it is fine weather t /#•
morrow U will rain.
§ 137. — OoSERVAnONS.
(1.) Tk e adverbs of comparison, plus^ moins^ must be repeated h^
fore every adjective which they modify : —
n est mains paressenx 3t moins I Heisless idU end steuMrtr ttM
obstin6 que son tktn. \ his brother.
Digitized
by Google
■ rwAz or THx adtsiib.^ 138
461
(9.) These adverbs and the adverbs of quantity, need not bo re-
peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must alwKVS
rome between ;)eu, tnyp^ beauctmp, iaTU, plus, mmns, and a noun oi ar
adjeeiive, used substantively, must be repeated in overy case : —
Tkere wo\dd not be so much trotk^
ble ami misery in the tooriil. . . .
This bookseller has many good and
bad works in his eslablishmeiU,
II n'y aurait pas lanl de peine ct
de niisdro dans cu monde. . . .
Ce libniirc a bcaucoup de bona
et d€ mauvais ouvragus dans son
laag^iiu.
(3.) The adverbs mienz, better; pis, vforse, must not be confounded
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note (14, (7).
§ 138. — ^Adverbs of Negation.
(1.) Tlie negation is eomposed of ne placed before the verb, and
pas or poirUj after it in the simple teases. The second negative comes
between the auxiliary and the verb, In the compound tenses: —
Le ciol sur nos souhaits ne rftgle
pas Ics choses. Cornkillk.
Rome fft*attacho point le grade a
la noblesse. Cornrillb.
L*estime est le vrai pnncipe de
la ooiisideratfon, qui n'est pas tou-
jours attache aux dignit«8.
FONTISNRLr.B.
Les rois ne sent point prot^s
^ar les lois. Oaisintt,
Heaven does not regulate things
according to our wishes.
Rome does not by any means con-
finx officer to the nooitity.
Esteem is tAe true principle of con-
sideration, which is not always aU
tached to offices.
Kings are by no m/eans protected by
laws.
It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative, point, is
stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in fact
substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, wiL
sufficiently explain this :
N'allez pas means n^aUez un pas, do not go or move one pace or
step. N'lillez point means rCallex un point, do not go, or move a
poini or dot.
(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou*
voir, oser, savoir and cesser ;—
N on, decsse ; jc ne puis souflVir,
qn'un de luurs vaisseaux fasse iiau-
fra^. Fisii.os.
l)ans son appartement. ulle n'osait
rentrsr. Voltaire.
Qui vit ha'i do tous, ue saurait
Ioiigtfm{ffi vivrc. Corneili.k.
La liberte ne cease d'etre aima-
tle. Corneille.
No, goddess ; I cannot suffer Lhat
single one of their vessels perish.
She dared not re-enter her apart-
ment.
He who llces hated by all, cannct
exist long,
Uberly cannot cease ta be wartkf
of love.
(8.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is mcdified by an.
•Cher negative word, such as jamais, guht, nu^ nuUementf «ueii%
Digitized
by Google
401
STITTAS OV VSB ADTIBB^— ^ IM
IwrtoiUM^ itt, M^ or followed by fucy meudng on^ and fwvt vaad
negatifely; —
il«iMli0», my lord, hu Ktucehf
iMMf Itittiit.
So one is hoffffi w^^^^m ^ m*
csteew hitufflf.
No ont KJta to rtctim «Moi.
A tDufoi flWW MMT AhMPI AM9 i9
(4.) N€ u$ei MMomaUeaUff.
The negative m it need without any negaftiye aenae alter the
eonjanctiona i moina qne, vnleu ; de peur que, de crainte que ; far
fearthat:^
L'ambiticn, aelipienr, n'a guire
de Kraltra. BouaaAULT.
Nul m'est heureux, a'U ne Jonit
de sa propre eatime.
J. J. RouaaBAV.
Fertomo n'aime 4 reoevoir de
conaella. Da Siooa.
Un mtehant no aait jamais par-
MoSl.
A moina que voua no lui parlies. I
De peur qn'on no Toua trompe.
L'AcAniMK.
Unless fou spook to kim.
Forfewr, or Vssi ynt mi^Ai bo do^
coivod.
(6.) Ne ia uaed in the aame manner after autre, d^eraU ; autre-
ment, otherwise; plua, moina, mieuz, forming a eompariaon, and after
the verba craindre, avoir peur, trembler, appr^hender, empdeher:-^
n eat tout autre qu'U n'etait
n parte autrement qu*il n'agit
n est plus modeate qu'U no le
parait.
Je craias presque, Je crainaiqu'un
aonce no m'abuse. Bacinb.
>^U8 avez bien peur que je no
change d'avis. Mariyauz.
La pluie emp6cha qu'on ne ae
promenit dans lea Jardins.
Kacinb.
He is very diferenl from wkoi hs
was.
Be speaks and acts very differenUff.
He u more modest than ke appears.
I am almost afraid IkOt (lesQ a
dream is deceiving me.
Yon fear mmch^ test I masf dUmgt
my mind.
The rain prevented their taking «
walk xn the gardens.
(6.) Remark, — Ae ia not uaed when the verb of the preeedlng pre*
poaition ia accompanied by a negative :— -
n ne parle paa autrement qu'il
agit.
11 n'eat paa ploa modeate qu*il
le parait
He does not speak otherwise them
he acts.
He is not more modest than Ac op*
pears.
(7.) After craindre^ apprihenderj avoir peur^ trembler^ we put pn
after the ne when we wiah for the aecompliabment of the action ex*
preaaed by the aecond verb :—
Je cralna, qn*fl no vienne pas. I t fear, thai ho may noti
TaH peur, que men flrire Vanlve I iam afiraii, that my krotker e^y
Digitized
by Google
•rVtAX or THB P&SPO8ITX0V^lM> 4U
§ 180.— *Thb P&B?oimoy.«-BxoiMXN ov iHuBPOsmovs 4n
Prepositiohal Phrabbs*
(1.) PrepositioiiB may be divided according to their regimen, into
three classes:—
Ist. Prepositions governing nonns witlioat the aid of another
preposiiion. They are:* —
A,
a<or<0
Hon,
iexeeptJseehonbe^
De.
of, from
Honnis,
Dte,
from, as toon at
Malgr^,
in^riteof
Apite,
after
Moyennant,
by means of
Attendn,
Joignant^
joining
Avmnt,
before
Nonobetant,
Avec,
wiA
Outre,
besides
Chea,
wUh^ ai the kouae
Pour,
1»~^
Concerasnt,
Contre,
taudUng
agminJ
Parmi,
Pendant,
Pans.
M
Sans,
withoui
Depnis,
since
Sauf.
strfe^sam
bekind
Selon,
according to
Deeras,
above
Sous,
nnder
Pessoos,
fmder
Snivant,
according ta
Devers,
towards
Sur.
vnon
Devant,
Durant,
oejore
tinng
Touchant,
A travers,
tmuMi^
tkrongS
Sn,
t»
Vers,
towards
Entre,
between
Void,
kereis
XDveIt^
towards
VoilA,
there u
SxcepU,
excepi
Vu.
eansideriag
ad. Propositi
Ions requiring the i
^reposition de after them :f—
Anprte,
near
Alartoerve,
reserving
Autour,
euround
A Texceptltm,
ezceptutg
Ensuite,
fir want
A rexclusion,
Faute,
A regard,
wUhre^
Hon,
ouSof
A rinsu.
vnlcfufwn
Loin,
far'
A I'opposite
conirarff
Prts,
near
Amoins,
unless, for lets
: ;roche,
near
Araison,
bp reason^ ai A
.Lcanse,
onaceowU
rate
. Lo6t6,
bytkende
Aarsx,
on a level
%nder cover
AudlS!*
thiswaf
i i fleor,
evenwUA
ynuU 1vwV| ^VJWNB
J force,
by dint
Andefisous,
nnder
t i la (kveur,
lly means
Audessus,
above
< . raw.
under Mier
Au dedans,
within
4 LUmodB,
according to the
An dehors.
wUhant
faskwn
Au devant.
before,ttmeti
* €knreming the aocosativeu
t ^kifenfaf the fdillre or nUiftlfei
Digitized
by Google
454 srstAx or thk p&bpo8ZTXov.--§ 140, 141.
An railien,
A.a lie Q,
All nioyen,
Au niveau,
Au peril,
Au jirix,
An risque,
3d. The prepositions followed by d are : —
Attenant, joining I Par rapport,
Jusque, as far as \ Quant,
in Lie middk
Au travcTBi
insUad
Aux ddpena,
by means
Aux cnvirauf,
on a level
£n d^pit,
alike per a
Via-i!^
at Ihe price
atUierisk
tkrougk
alike taqpenae
in IXc ^eizktorktod
in spite of
along
ojposUt
teiii regard
as to
(2.) Many of the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are
formed from active verba. Almost all the prepoailions requiring ek
before the regimen, are formed of a pn^position and a noun. Those
requiring the preposition d, have a relation of tendency, of aim, &c
§ 140. — Remark.
The rules which we have given, [) 92, (1.) (2.) note, and
{133], with regard to the regimen or government of verbs and adjeo-
tives, apply also to prepositions. When tw^o prepositiona require
the same regimen, it is useless to repeat this regimen after each one,
but, if they require a different regimen, it is necessary to give to
each its proper object It would, therefore, be incorrect to say, — ^Un
magistrat doittoujonrs juger suivant et eonformement aux lois: — A
magistrate should always judge in accordance toilh,and ctrnformably tn^
ike laws ; because the preposition suitant governs the noun in the
regime direct, that is without the aid of another preposition, and
conformemenl governs the noun in the regime indirect by means of d.
We should say:—
Un roagistrat doit toujours juger
mivanl les lois, et conformiment d
ce iu*elleB prescrivent.
Maumontel.
A magistrate should akeaifs judge
in accordance with the laws and an»-
fomiably to what they prescribe.
§ 141. — ^Repetition of Prefositxoks.
U The prepositions d, de^ en and sans^ must be repeated befbfi
very regimen, be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb :—
T%is world is bvt a lottery oj
goodSf of rankSf of dignities, of
rights.
Eloquence is n very important en,
destined to inst "vct, to repress pa**
sions, to lorrect manners^ to support
the lawSj ^c.
Such is t/^ mtdtUmde, mlkm rv-
siraint attd wHAtstt laeoMm
Co monde ci n*est qu'uue loterie
ae biens, de rangs, de dignit£s, de
droits. VoLTAisB.
L'^loquence est un art trds
s6rieux. dcstin6 d instruirc, a r6-
primer les passions, d conigcr Ics
UOiuiv, d soutenir les lots, &c.
FiN^LON.
Telle est la multitude, et sans
fMa et sans liM, La Haajpi.
Digitized
by Google
■ tirtAZ or THB PBSPOSiTioir. — § 142, 143. 455
9. Th« other jirepoBitloas must also be repeated before avery
Donn, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as rog^iineiis, have
a simihirity of meaning ; in which case the prepositions may be
placed before the first regimen only, or Lefore ail, at tlie option of tin
speaker:—
Je Tons doime oed powr yous et
ocmf 7otre fn&re.
II pcrd sa jeunesse dans la mol-
esse ot (dans) la Tolupt6.
/ frwe you this far you smd for
your brolker.
Ho wastes his youth vu eftmiuaey
and voluptuousTUss,
§ 142. — Obsrrvations on setbral PREPOsrnoNS.
(1.) AvotU marks a priority of time and pkce ; — Devant meani
limply opposite^ in front qf:^
C I walk before you, i. e. / walk
\ eariier than you, or / have the precO'
fdence of you in walking,
I walk in front of you.
Je marche avanl yous.
Je marche devant yous.
(2.) £71, d, dans, — ^The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten-
sive ti;an that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a
division of the earth, a kingdom, &4i. ; d before the name of a town,
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative
Adjective : —
En Europe, en France, d Paris,
dans nia chambre.
En Am6iique, co sent les bisons
qui ont nne bosse sur lo dos.
BUPPON.
Dans rAmirique miridionale lo
boeuf itait absolument iuconnu.
BUFFON.
(3.) Chez might be rendered in English hy at ihe house qf^ mtht
amongj &c. : —
In Europe^ in Prance, in Paris,
in my room.
In America the bisons have a
bunch on their back.
In Sifuth America the ox was «i»-
tirety unknown.
Chez voire pdre ; chez vous.
La condition des comddiens 6tait
inAme chez les Romains, et hono-
ra'^le chez les Grecs.
La Bamr^BB.
At your father's ; at your house.
The condition of comedians «pi'4
infamous among the Romans, and
honorable with the Oretks,
§ 143. — Thb Conjunction. — Governmbnt of Conjunctions.
{See § 127.]
(1 ) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infimtive,
the indieative, and the subjunctive modes.
1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction whrh ia
followed by the preposition de^ and after all thoae whieh ditfer Irom
Digitized
by Google
4M ■TVtAz or Tsa eovjevctsov^*-} 14a.
prsp^slttoiM, only baeaate tber v* ibllowed hj ft TeA JnrtMit of ft
nonn :— »
£tadlez dilifemmeDt afl.n ie snr- 1 Studff ddigenSf t4ttf 91m mf (m
paner ros oompignons. | order io) turpaas your eampmiUom.
We think with M. Beaeherelle thftt the words described in the pre*
Mding rule, belonf more properly to the prepoaitionft than to the
onj unctions.
(2.) The following eonjanetions always require the sabjunctire
after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English.
Those marked with an asterisk require ns before the verb [{ 188,
(4.)]:-
A fin que,
*A moins que,
Au cas que,
Avant que,
Bien que,
*De crainte que,
*I>e peur que,
Sn ess que,
Encore que,
Jufiqu'i ce que,
Iioinque,
in order thai
MalgrS que,
although
wUeu
Nonobstant que.
if
Non que,
nolthat
before that
Non pas que,
nUthat
P066 que,
supposing that
^fea.
Pour que,
that, in order that
Pourvu que.
provided OuU
inciue
Qnoique,
aUh^mgh, though
although
Sans que,
vrithoutthat
tiU,wUathai
Soit (^e,
whether
far from, not thai
8uppos6 que,
9uppoaeiha$
Q:u&(pi*d peine k met mauz Je
piMiae rooster,
J'aime mieuz les soufiHr, que de
les m6riter. Bacine.
En cos ou£ Tous persistiez, fL Iku-
dra que j all6gue au prince et au
roi mi&me votre mauvaue 8ant6.
FiNiLON.
Although I can searedy hear mp
mufortunes, I wmtd rather snfir
under them, than deserve them.
In ease you persist, / unul men^
Hen your bad health to the prinoe
and even to the king.
(3.) The following conjunctions :— De manidre que, de aorte qpB^
en sorte que, so that ; tellement que, in suck a manner that ,' si ee n^esS
que, sinon que, unless ihaif but that; goyem the following verb In
tlie indicative or conditional modes, when the preceding verb ex*
presses a positive assertion ; but they govern the subjunctive, when
She preceding verb expresses a desire or a command :—
n se oonduisit tr^s mal, de sorte
qu'il /tt< contraint de se.retirer.
Fattes en sorte jw'on soit content
de V0U8.
He behaved very iU, so that he was
obliged to withdraw.
Behave in such a manner that
people may be pleased with you,
(4.) When there are in a sentence two or more verbs governed by
a conjunction, qtte must be placed before the second and the follow*
big verba, or the conjunction itaelf may be repeated :-^
Puisau*on plaide, ^'on meurt, et
^Vm devtont malade.
n 'fktit des mMedns, fl fiiut des
avooals. La Fomtaikb.
Since we plead, we die and we !»>
come siekt we must haos
we rnnst have lawyers.
Digitized
by Google
ooL&ooATioir ov woitftSd— { 144. 4ilr
Bei me prmidre areo vooi. I fmiw
BUCHBBKLLI. |
(5.) The other conjunctions genonllj govern the eiine teuae In
French as in English : —
Do good i^-iiWff^ tifOM ikt% ftt
Hv6sL
NoUUnfdMZM^ mtU mmds, be
comae fiMimg it kigker tlUm thtif.
Fais da hien aijoard'hni pwbmiM
ta vis encore. YiLLEPii.
Rien n'6bloait les grandes Imes,
MTOfffM rim n'est plus haut qn'ol-
ks. Masbillon.
(6.) With regard to tiie conjunction, «t, see { 136, (8.)
§ 144. — COLLOOATIOK OV WORDB.
(1.) The pUuse of the different parts of speech has heen jnentfoned
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts
of the work. A risunU of the principal rules of construction maj,
however, not he unacceptable here.
(2.) The collocation of words is the order sccording to which the
several words which form a sentence should follow one another.
This order is fixed for the seversl forms of sentences, sffimiative,
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the
pnetiee of the best writers.
(8.) The construction of the affirmative sentenee is as simple in
French as It is hi English. The following is the anangement of the
words:—
1. The Su^eeL S. 79^ Vtrk 8. The Aivsrk
Lemarchand est ScL
TVeMTcAMl if here.
(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an a^jeetlve, or aaelher
attribute, the order is as follows :—
K The Std^ect. 9. Jfo AUrUnUe* 8. T3be Verh. 4. The Admk
Le msrchand anglais est Id.
ThemenkmU EngUsA is hem.
Leffls devotrssmi es( UL
TVfPn ofyourfnetui u Iken,
• •/•
Lemaiteau dete est kL
Hkhmmer ofiro% w km.
Le bateau ivapeur est VL
TUboel Hmwi u there.
* Borne s4ieetives K 86, (ll.)]sre genendly pboed befttethe bo«b,
when uMd akme with a noun; but when another ad|eetlve comes with
them, th^ fi)llow the noun:— un petit homme, • WUtmmt m bommii
MtH et gios, • sik^, j<Mi< ASM/ ottaM have a diflhient me«iipi(beto^
SiMttorellitlltiae.] ^^
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
4M OOLLOOATXOir OV irORBS.^ 14i«
((^0 When ^ attrHiote i« plneed in nfipotition with Ike tmhittt, tks
eoDstruetion is the some in the two lonjj^gi^s : —
1. The 8ulifaU. 2. The Verb. 3. The Auribuie.
Lc marchand est anglain.
Tke mercianl is J£nglis?i,
(6.) When the verb is in a componnd tense, miinj ndrerbs art
placed between the amuliary and the participle :<—
1. The Subject. % The Auxiliary. 3. The Adverb. 4. TheParlicipU.
Nous avons sonront la.
We have ojlen read.
(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in men/, other long adverbs,
and the adverbs of time and place, aujaurd^hvi^ demain, hier, ici, /tl,
are not placed between the auxiliary and the participle [( 136,
L.41,5.]:—
Nous avons icrit ai\jourd'hai, We have KnUen Uhday,
(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed
after tiie verb ^-*
1. Subjecl. 2. Aitribuie. 8. Verb. 4. Adverb. 6. lUgime DireeL
L'^colier attentif apprond toiijoura sa le^on.
7%tf scholar aUaUive learns alicaijs his lesson.
(9.) When there are two regimens of equal length, or nearly so,
the direct precedes the indirect:—
1. SubJeeL 2. Verb. 3. Dirtfcl Regimen. 4. Indirecl Regimen.
Jean a donn6 le livre a men p6rc.
John has given the book to vuj father.
(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun,
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, tlie
latter is pUced first : —
1. &ubj, 3. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen^ 4. Direct Regimen.
Jcau a donn6 d men |)^re lc 1i\TC qu^il lui avait prorois.
John has given to my father the book which he had pnrmised him .
(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those
representing the indirect regimen, preceded by /o, expressed or nn^
derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French : —
1. Subject. 3. Direct Reg. 3. Verb, i 1. SubfecL 3. litH. R^. 3. Verb
Nous les voyons. I Nous Icur parlons
We them see. \ We to then* speak.
(13.) In the imperntivo nscd affirmatively, thone pionouns follow
the verb:—
1. Vrb. 3. Direct Reg. i 1. Verb. 3. ImL R^.
V69«B- les. Farlei. lenr.
Sipeak .i0tkm
Digitized
by Google
coht^cktz^M OS ▼ai.]>«.«^| 144* 4M
(13.) When Uco personal pronouns «ro nsad as n^fimnMi in a sen*
tence, the indirect, if in the fin( or aooomi pipMUOw pcweooa tho
direct:-*
1. SuhjecL % Ind. R^. 8. Vireel R^. 4. FcrZu
]*anl nons le donne.
i^uv/ Uus it gica.
Paul Tons le donne.
Favi to you U gives,
(14.) Should, however, the indirect regimen be in the third persoQi
it la pUced after the direct:—
1. SmI^'ccL 2. Direct Reg. 3. IruL Reg. 4. Verb.
Tatii lo lui dpnno.
Paul U to him gtva,
(15.) In the imporative used afiirmatiyely, the direct regimen pro-
cedes always the indirect : —
1. Verb. a. Dir. R^. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. Verb. 3. Dir. Reg. 3. lad.R^.
Ponnez- Ics nous. [ Donnez- les- lul.
Give them tow. \ Give them i& him.
(IG.) The pronoun representing a noun in the obnque cases, gen-
erally preceded in English by a preposition other than /o, is, in French,
placed after the verb :—
1. SubJ. 3. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. Svly. 9. Verb. 3. fndL Reg.
Je parle de lui. I Je psrie avecluL
/ speak of him. \ I speak wUhhisit.
(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is phiced ioMMdiailely b^
fore the verb, and pas^jamaiSy ritn^ dtc after it :—
hSubf. 2.NegaL 9. Verb. 4.NegmL
Je no vols pas.
I nU s» na.
Jo ns lis Jamais.
I not read never.
(18.) When tho verb is In a componnd tense, the first negatiw b
placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxiiiaiy
and tlie participle:-*
1. fin^rcBlL 3. Ai^flt 8. R£g. 4. Atut. 5. ^egoL 6. P^tie^
Je no P al pas Tu.
Jo no loor ai Jaauiis parUS.
/ ' met to them have never tpohen.
Jo ne Icnr al rien
/ nol to them have nothing given,
><iaj Tlw pioastoi wdna diwet aeguasas, and aa iadigact i^
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
460 OOLLOOATXOV 07 W0EP8.—- f 144
liiiii, are placed before the impentlTe, ued negalhely. Ther urn
M^eet to tlie nilee orpreeedeneo, (18.) and (14.)
1. NegtO. %. lUg. t. Rig. 4. Verlf. 6. NegmL
(Biile(lS.)J No noiia le doiuMB poa.
Na te«f U give %aL
(Bii]e(14.)J No le Ini doones paa.
Noi U to km give nti,
(90.) The oonstroetioii of an interrogmti?e eentenee, whieh baa •
aoiin for ita inbject, differa in the two langoagea. The following
ttamplea will ahow the oMer of the woida in French : —
1. TU Subf. 2. Verb. 8. Ih^^lkate 8ubf. 4. RegiamL
Lemarchand rB9oit- il aonai^gentt
Tkemerchani rtoeivet ki kUmoneff?
MoDfrira torlt- II dealetti«a1
Myhndker wrUa he kUenf
011.) When the eentenee eommeneea with oft, where; qae, whai;
quel, whatf whidi; combien, how Miicft, how many; the noon may be
placed after the yerb :—
Oft eat YOtre amil I Where is feur Jriemd?
QneditTotrepftrel | Whtasaytffourfaiher?
(S9.) ThB conatmetion of interrogative aentenoea, in which the
anbjeet of the verb ia a pronoun, la veiy aimple. The prononn ia
plaeed after the verb in aimple tenaea, and after the audliarjin
eomponnd tenaea :—
1. Rigimenhid. 3. Verb. 8. SubfecL 4. Dtrecf J^gr-
Nona envoyei- Tona notre argent 1
Thus ernd ytm eurwumeff?
I. Reg. hid. %Afix. Z. Su^. A. Part 6.DireelRtg.
Lenr area- Tona denn6 cetaigenti
7^£lMft kaoe you given Ualnumey?
(38.) The order of the worda in a aentenee, at onoe negative aai
nterrogatiye, ia aa followa : —
h lUNeg. 3. R^. Pm. 8. Verb. 4. Shdff. 6. 2d N(^. 6. DireelRig.
Ne nooa envoyea- Tooa paa del'aigent'
Nti tew etnd you nU money?
(34.) In a compound tenae:—
1. htN0g. 3. Reg.Pm. 8. Verb. LSebi. h.%il^. 6. Pmri. I.Dtr.Reg,
Ne nona avea- vona paa enyoyideraigenll
Met tone have yen not eent money?
(36.) The firat peraon aingnlar of the preaent of the indicative of
aoal v«bai wfaioh hare ia that pefioa only one q^fadilei and of a ftw
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
VMM 0Jr.9A:PITAL ISTflBi.—^ 145. Ml
\ hftTing more than one syllabla, bat ending in 9, cannot admit
of the eonatrnction mentioned in the 22d rule of thia^ Section. To
fender the aentence interrogative, est-cc-^jUf ia prefixed to the a£Sr-
matite form of the verb :-—
Est-oe-que vons paries 1
Xs U that fou speak?
Do you spook?
Bst-oe-qne Je pr6tenda Ini parlerl
Is U thai I pretend to speak to km?
Do I pretend to speak to him ?
(36.) Every peraon of a tenae anaceptible of being eoigngated i»>
lerrogatively, may be rendered ao by prefixing est-ee^que to tha
affirmative form: — '
Bat-oe-qne voaa liaez 1 | Do you read?
Sat-ce-que votre iVdre eat arrivi 1 1 Is your brotker aerited?
(27.) In poetry and in elevated proae, the aubjeet of an affirmatlfi
aentence ia aometimea jdaced after the verb : —
Suddenly to the vhid and briaum$
day of the torrid zone^ suecteds «
universal and profound nigkl { totka
attire ofaneternal spring, the ndkedf
ness of the saddest winters.
Tout-lb-conp an Jonr vif et brll-
luit de la zone torride, anccdde
une nwU uniyerselle et profonde ; k
la pamre d'lm prtntempa 6temel,
ia nuditi dea plus tristte hivers.
Batnal.
(28.) The article, the demonatrative, and the posaeaaive adjective
are repeated before every word which they determine [L. 86].
(29.) Pronouns, used aa aubjecta of verba, may be repeated before
every verb [J 99, L. 87].
(30.) ProDouna, uaed aa regimena of verbs, mnat be repeated be-
fore every verb [} 105, L. 87].
(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word wUeh
they govern [{ 141].
§ 145. — ^Usx OF Capital Letters.
The only important difierence exiatingin the two langnagea, inthe
nae ot capital lettera, ia that the French do not use a capital for an
adjective, unless it be uaed aubatantively, and applied to a peraon or
persona, or unless it form an integral part of a name .-^^
Ge monsieur eat-il/raitfois?
C'est UD Francois,
Bst-ilfVan^isl
Oette dame eat-elle anglaiaeY
O'eat une An^laise.
Xlle est anglaise.
Appreuea-vous lo iVan^aist
Je n'msfpteoAn i«b Fai^^bdB.
h that geniUman Prendi?
He is a Frenchman,
Is he French?
Is that lady EngUtk?
She is an EngUsk lady.
£%« is EngUsk,
Doyou learn Prtndi?
idoneikam Bi^Utk.
Digitized
by Google
MS 4VAlt>»Y •T MWmttBU AVO y«M«v.— g 147.
JhkllaidsleFmi9il8qitid€noii»[ I mmiaaiiiug fir tki F^-mukmrnm
id t I wko lives here.
he d^iMrt^mcnt de« Basncs-Alpes. j The deparlme^U of ike l^wcr Alps.
Lc ixo'iiuiiie des Payfr-ites. | Tke kingtUnn of the NetheriantU,
§ 14G.^EusiON
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vowel of a woid, and
the suWitution of an apostropuf ('; before words commencuig with
A vowel or an Ji mute :—
▲ is only elided in 2a, article or pronoun — L*imc, the soulj instead
of la dme; rhiimiiit^, ^untt/i/y, instead of la humHiU; jo
Tadniire, jo Thonore, I admire her, I hotwr her, instead of y«
la admire^ je la honor e,
S is elided in 2e, article or pronoun, in je, it, me, se, ce (meaning
a, dem. pm.)t de, iw, que, pareeque, quoique, yuisque^juMque,
quelque, — rami, the friend; riiomme, the man,
I is only elided in n oomix^ before il, he ; ils, the^.
V is never elided. ' *
(3.) Althou^fh the words onxe and onzUme eommcnco with a
vowi'l, tlic article is not elided before tiiem, le anze, le amieme,
§ 147. — ^AKALOOr BETWEEN MANY KvGLISH AXD FrBNCH
WOIIDS.
(I.) Most words ending in al, ce, de,ge, le, me, anthem, ion, mn Dm
aoiiM in both languages :—
▲L Mineral, g6n6ral, animal, principal, fatal.
CI Race, prudence, notice, sacrifice, edifice.
DB Parade, gnido, ambuscade, parricide, prelude.
»s Courage, page, vestige, orange, deluge.
LB Docile, capable, table, possible, fertile, ridicule.
BE Doctrine, mine, sc^ne, famine, machine, heroino.
A»T Dormant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant.
EKT Present, content, accident, president, resident
loa Question, fraction, legion, pension, religion.
(3.; Most words ending in ffry, ory, gy, ncy, ty, out, or, tw, tat
become* French by clinnging : —
ARY into AIRE Necessnire, militaire.
ORV •* CURE Mcmoire, gloire, victoire.
OY ** OfB £ncrgie, geologic, clligie.
■CY •* RCB Clemence, d^ence, excellence
TY « rf Charite, alaoril^ di\'ioil6.
we « .SOX iBdustrienzy ouiieux, famenx.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
SBrOMATZC PBRASXS.— § 148.
in
OR Sato XXTB Candour, ordcur, aetoiir.
HIE ** 15 Afusculin, feiiiinin, clandestin.
rrc **' IF Actir', passif, iiiaa^if.
§ 148. — Gallicisms on Idiomatic Phrasss.
Ganu-isms, or idioina peculiar to the language, are very numeroiit
In French. We have already in the first part of this work, piesentod
% considerable number of such expressions, and will here give «
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ox*
ercijies. In proverbial sayings, we' have endeavored to give the equi-
valent Knglish phrase. We would advise the student to analyze
carefully the following idiomatic sentences, and particularly those
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro-
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and custom!
of n nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the ao*
quisitiou of a language : —
T^is piano is out of Ume,
Settle thai business amietMf,
We agree upon ihai ptnnt.
Haw old would you take UuU mam U
be?
That will suit me exactly.
Lei us come t/f Ike poinl.
You exhaust my patienee.
'Pkey are both of the same mtnd,
Vuu always use those expressions.
Co piano n*efit pas d*accord.
Arrsng^r. cette afiHire a I'amiable.
Nous sonimes d'accord snr ce iwlnt.
Quel ige donncriez-vous a cet
hommc t
CHa fora Men mou aflkire.
A lions au fait.
Voiis mettex lua fMitience a bont.
Cu soiu deux t6t(8 dans un bonm*t.
Vous aver tot^ours ces pruiios a la
Ixmclte.
Entre nons soit dit, cc n'est pas la
nier a boire.
VoiiH nc savcz plus de quel bois
fairu ti^cbo.
J*avaia ce mot sur le bout des
Idvres.
C'cbt son bras droit
II nous a fcrmi la porte au nex.
Vons allez toujours droit u\\ but
£n tout cas, Je leur remettrai votre
icttro.
No voyez'vous pas qu'il rit sous
cfliicl
Nous avons piqn6 dos deux.
Nonfl iiW fioinmes Kur ce chapitre.
0!) ! |MMir le coup. vou8 avix rai:ion.
Cut orateur bat la camiMigtiu.
Parlez-mi»i a cceur ouvcrt.
£)ou!i avunscouclie A la belle AtoUe.
Je n'ai quo faire du son argent
J'ai fait si bten mon compte, que
J'ai obtenu cet argent
Of la ne me fldt rien da tout
Between ourselves^ the thing is not m
vcnj diffiailt.
You are put to your last shift, Yc%
are at your wit's end,
1 had that word at my tongues end.
He is his ri^ht hand.
He shut the door in our fau.
You come always to the main paink
At ail eventSj / will give tMm ymnr
letter. ^
Do yon not see that he laughs in kii
sleeve?
We put spitrs to our horses.
We are speaking about iXis matter,
Oi I for this time, you are right.
'IViat speaker wanders from his sub^
jcd.
Speak to me without reserve^ openi^
We slept in the open tar.
I do not want his money,
I managed matters so weU^ that I n^
tained that money,
T%at is nttking al <tf l» iw.
Digitized
by Google
464
I0IOMATIO PHRASS8.— § 149.
F«ite84iionrlee dfi tons oes dttaili.
C'en «8t ftik
Comme vous voila fliit !
n m'a priA de tous foire ses amitifis.
Eo attendant, faitM-lui met com-
pliiQentfl.
dMmin ikiMnt, nom to ranoon-
trftmea.
Le plua fort eft &it
> loldat n'a Jamais m le fen.
II s'est bien tart d'affiure. ^
Nona Bommes an fort de lliiver.
Qu'allaH-il fidre dans cette galdrel
C'est on homme oomme il fiiat.
Ce drap est hors de priz.
D se fit Jour k travers les ennemls.
Je Tois oela dans un autre jour.
Pitea-mol an Joste ce qu'il en est.
n DO laisse pas de dfipenser bean-
coup.
C'est nne autre paire de nianches.
C'est un tour de son mdtier.
Vous Tavez mis au pied du mur.
Voil& qui va le mieux du monde.
Keyenons a nos moutons.
Cela est d'an bon naturel.
Ces arbustes grandissent a Tue d'oeil.
Je regarde cela d'un autre ceil.
II a vendu sa montre pour un mor-
ceau de pain. .
Yous lui avez donn6 la monnaie de
. sa pi6ce.
n a trouv6 a qui parler.
Vous 4te8 un homme de parole.
Je lui al coupe la parole.
Vous avez cela sur le coBur.
II se creuse la cerveUe.
X«e Jen n'en vaut pas la cbandeUe.
Vous avez pris le change.
Chansons que tout cela.
Les bons comptes font les bonsamis.
II met la cliarrue devant les boeuft.
Vous b£/issez des chateaux en £s-
pagne.
Je suis an comble de la joie.
Ce n'est pas a vous de lui reprocfaer
sa faute.
II est tomb6 de Scylla en Chaxybde.
Cet homme cherche a vous en oonter.
Kous sommes en pays de connais-
sance.
La sentineUe nous concha en jone.
Ce malade n'en reviendra pas.
Nona sommes au conrant de tout
Spare me aU theeepartietamrt.
Itis all over, AUitgtme.
What a amdUMn ^ ar^ m/
He wished me to give his love to jtfv^
In the mean vfhile, present mijf cimm
pUments to him.
Going along f we mH him.
The most dificuU part is dome.
That soldier has never melt gmt^
powder.
He casM off very well.
We are in the depth of winter.
What Imsiness had he there?
He is a gentleman.
That doth is extravaganUp dear.
He forced his way throngh theenmf,
I see that in a different UghL
7>U me exactly how the matter standii.
He spends a great deal^ nevertheless
Hiat is guile another thing.
That is one of his tricks.
You left him no excuse.
That is going on finely.
Let us resume owr sulyect.
TTiot bespeaks a good disposUwn.
Those shrubs grow perceptibly,
J look upon thai in a different U^
He said his walchfora mjere song.
You paid him in his own coin.
He met with his match.
You are a man of your word.
I cut him short.
You cannot digest thai.
He racks his brain.
The toll is mare than ike grtst.
You started upon the wrong scenl.
Thai is all nonsense.
Short reckonings make long friends.
He puts the cart before the horse.
You build castles xn the aiar.
I am overjoyed.
It does not became you to reproeuA
him with his fault.
He fell from tie frying pan into Ike
fhat man is trying to deceive yoeu
We are here among acquaintancu.
The sentinel levelled his gw^ at m.
That sick man wHl not recover.
We aire perf Jf acfuainled wiAeM
Digitized
by Google
IDIOMATIO FHBABBB. — g 148.
466
Oela fidt droMer les cheyeuz.
Bs chaDtent sur une autre note.
Ce vera est f>app6 an bon coin.
Je Ini ai domi6 ie clef des champs,
n ne sait ou domier de la t6te.
Yous vous donne^ toi\joitr8 raison.
n a donn^ dans le pidge.
Gela lul donne de rhuineur.
Je n'entre point la dedans,
n entre dans yos int6r6ts.
Je m'embarnune fort pen de cela.
8<m amiti6 est k tonte 6preaye.
Yos propos m'dchanffent les oreillee.
Finisses oe badinage.
Roposez-Toos-en sur moi.
Cette marchandise n'a point de d6-
bit.
n est toiiriours sur le qui-vive.
Oette maison est a yendro au plus
offhmt et dernier ench^risseur.
De quelle part ce domestique yient-
ill
DoubloDs le pas; il se fkit tard.
jy yais de ce pas.
Passe pour ced.
II fkut en passer par UL
Yous m'ayez peint ayec de beaux
traits.
Pour moi, Je m'y peids.
Peu s'en fallut qu'il ne me frappit
Dites-moi nn peu ce que yous en
n nous Jette de la poudre anz sreux.
Yous series bien embatrassd, si on
yous prenait au mot.
Ne yous en prenez pas k moi.
Le malade n'en pouyaitplus.
Je I'ai enyoyd promener.
Le bon homme que c'est 1
Brisons la dessus.
n en Alt quitte pour la peur.
Yous en dtes quitte i bon march6.
Cela n'cst pas de refos.
Je I'ai entreyu oe matin.
Je ne m'en soucie gvAn.
n a des afbires par dessus la tAte.
Qu'a cela ne tienne.
A la bonne heure.
Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est titnnp6.
Ce n'est pas 1& nn trait d'ami.
Trftye de compliments.
Je yous yois yenir, monsieur.
YoUA comme yous Ates.
Tout cela ya le mieux da rnonde.
Yous n'y *tes pas.
V<NiB yoilH Mil ayanc^
That makes one's hair stand on ond.
They have changed their tone.
That verse bears the right stamp.
I sent him about his btainess.
He does not know ii^dch way to imn^
Yon pretend to be alioofs in the righk
He fell into the snare.
That puts him out of temper.
That is no busifhess of mine.
He interests himsdffor von.
1 care very UtUe about that.
His friendship will stand any tesL
Your expressions provoke my ange
Put an ejul to this trifling.
TVtut to me about this matter,
7%is article has no sale.
He is aboays on the watek.
That house is to be sold to the kL*tsi
bidder.
Who sent that servant?
Let us mend our paces Uisg*ewmg
late.
I am going thither this mom-nL
Let this pass.
We must submit to those terms.
You have given a fine account of was*
As for me, I cannot see into iL
He came very near striking «f .
Just tea me what you think of iL
He casts a mist before ow eyes.
You would be at a great loss, if yon
were taken at your word.
Do not blame me about this.
The paHent was qutie exhamsled,
J told him to mind his buttnesi.
What a simple man he ist
No more of this.
He escaped^ though irightened.
You came off cheaply.
That is not to be refused.
I had a glimpse ofiim this mommg,
I care but little about it.
He is over head and ears in business.
That shall not make us disagree.
Well and good.
Cunning as he is, he made amittak§»
T%at is not acting tike a friend.
No more compHnunts.
I see what you are about^ sir.
That is the way with yen.
AUgoes on as wdl as possible.
That u not U.
Yon are mneh the better fnrM,
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
R£AD1N6 L£SSONS.
L— FABLES.
1. LE cii£ne et le stcomore.
Vh chine ^tait plants pris d^nn ayeomore. Le dernier pooaaa dee
[f 78, L 13. 3.] feuillea dds )e commencement da printemps, et m^
priaa Tinsenaibilit^ du [L 5. 1.] premier. Voisin, dit {dtre, fr.) le
eh^ne, ne compte pas trop ear les caresses de ci.Hque zephyr incons-
tant Le froid pent {poutair, 3. tr.) revenir. Pour moi, je ne attia
(erre, 4. tr.) pas prees^ de pousser des feuilles ; jVttends que la cha*
lear eoit (Ore) constante. II avait raison : [L. 8. 1.] une gei^ d^
tmisit (dStruire^ 4. tr.) lea beant^s naissantes [L. 13.] du aycomom.
Eh bien! dit I'otitre, n*avais-je pas raison do ne me pas pressor!
Ne eompiez ni anr [} 77, (1.) (2.)] lea caresses ni sur les protes-
tations execssives ; [L 13. 6.] elles sent ordinairement de courto
dur^e. PEEjinc.
z LE LOUP Dficnnse.
Un lovp, la terreur d*un troopeau, ne aavait (sovotr, 3. tr.) con^
neni faire poor attraperdes [L. 12. 3.] moutons; le beqpor 6talt con*
tLnuellement aur ses gardes. Uanimol voraee s'avisa ^e se d^gniser
[) 43, (6.)] de la peau d'une brebis qu'ii avalt enlevee H 134, (4.)]
qnelques jours anparayant Le stratagems Ini [Lb 27.], reusstt pen*
dant quelque temps ; mois cnfin, le berger d^couvrit rarlifiee, aga^
les chiens contre lui ; ils lui [L. 27.] arrach^rent la toison de dessos
les 6panles, et le mtrent (mettre, 4. tr.) en pidces.
Ne vous fiez pas toujours ^ I'exterieur. Un homme de jngement
•i d* penetration ne joge pas selon les apparenees. Pxnui.
8. L'Ara ET SON MAlTRE.
[L
lis]
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Un 4ne tionva par basard one peau de lion, [L 0. 3.] et 8*en f } 83^
OT)] ntHHik, (fwMv2.tr.) Aind d^goM 11 alia duisles IMti^
mX4DXirG LXBSOITB. 4jB7
et rispandit partout la [L. 8. 2.] terreur et la coiisteniatiolu Tout
les aiiimaux fayaient (/uir, a. ir.) devant lui. Enfin ii rencoD-
tra Bon niaitre qu'il voulut epouvanter nussi; mais le bon tommo
tperv^vant quelque chose de [L. 18. 3.] long, aux deux c6t48 de U
t6te de I'aniiaal, lui dit : maltre baudet, quoique vous sojer. [L, 7S.
i.] v6ta coDime un lion, vos oreilles voas trahiasent et montrent qiu
roue n'^tes recllement quVn ftue.
Un sot a toujoura un endroit qui le deconvre et le roxid ridicala.
L'affectatioa est on juste sujet de xn^pria. Pkrbih.
4. L'AIGLE ET LB HIBOU.
Laigle et le hibou,apr&8 avoir [L. 21. 2.] fiiit longtemps la gaene,
eonvinrent d'une paix ; Ics articles pr<^liminaires avaient ete prealable*
meat signes par des [L. 12. 3.] ambassadears : Tarticle le plus esseo*
ticl ^tait que le premier ne mangerait pas les petits de Tautre.— Lea
connaisficz (connailrey 4. ir.) vous, demanda le hibou ? — Non, r^poiw
dit I'aigle.— Tant pis.— Peignez, (peindre, 4. tr.) les moi [L 28. 4.] oo
me les montrez ; [} 100, (60] foi d*honn^te aigle je n'y [{ 39, (18.)]
toucherai jamais. — Mes petits, repondit Toiseau nocturne, sent mi«
gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont la voix douce et m^lodieuse [L 18.
6.] ; vous les reconnaltrez ais^ment k ces marques. — ^Tr^ bien, j« ne
Toublierai pas. 11 arriva un jour que I'aigle aper^ut dans le coin
d^un rocher de [L. 8. 4.] petits monstres tr^s laids, rechign^s, avec un
air triste et lugubre. Ces enfants, dit-il, n'appartiennent (apparienir^
2. tr.) pas k notre ami ; mangeons les : aussit6t il se mit k en [L. 16.
7.] faire un bon repas. L'aigle n'avait pas tort [L. 8. 1.] Le hibou
lui avait fait une fiinsse peinture de ses petits ; ils n'ea avaient pM le
moindre trait
Les parents devralent (cInM>tr,3.f^),6viter avec soin ee faible en-
vers leurs enfants, il lea rend souvent avengles snr leurt d^fauta.
PSBBIR.
6. LE PATSAN ET LA COULEUVRE.
(In payaan, allant au bois avec un sac pour y [} 39, (18.)] mettre
ies noiHettes, (c*etait [L 82. 1.] la saison,) trouva une couleuvre.
Ah ! ah! dit le manant, ju te tiens (foniV, 2. in) & present; tu ne
m^^chnpperas pas : tn viendras (ventr, 2. ir,) dans tie sac et tu mourras
{mtntrir^ 2. tr.) L*aniiaal pervers, ( je veux dire [L 32. 5.] la cou*
leuvr), et non pas Thomme,) lui dit : qn'ai-je fait pour m6riter un
pareil traitement ?-*Ce que tu as fait ^. Tu ea le eymbole de Fingia*
titnddi le plua odieox do toua lea vie«8»— S'U lant C/tfMr, 8. tr.) qpw
Digitized
by Google
BSAftlVa LBS80VB.
1m ingnto m^vrent, r^pliqna hardiment le reptite, toiu Tout eoDoam*
nez TOUB m^ine': de tons les ftiiinuiiui lliomme est le pins ingnt.— >
Lliomme ! dit le pajaan, auipris de la hardiesae de la covleuYre ; je
pourraia (pourotr, 3. tr.) t'^raaer dana I'inatant, mala je venx (ixm-
lotr, 8. tr.) m'en rapporter k quelqne juge. — Ty eonaena [} 39, (18.)]
Une vache ^taii iL qnelque diataaee : on [} 41, (4.) (6.)] Taf^Ue, elle
▼lent (vertSr, 2. tr.) ; on lui propoae le caa. — C^tait bien la peine de
m'appeler, dit-elle ; la choae eat elaire ; la coalenvre a raiaon. Je
nooiria lliomme de mon lait ; il en fait du benm et da fromage ; et
pour ee bienfait, il mango mea enfanta. A peine aont-ila n^a (naitrCf
4. tr.) qv'ils aont 6goi^ [i 134, (3.)] et coup6a en mille moreeanx.
*Ce n*e8t paa tout : qnand je sola vieille, et que je ne lui donne plus
de lait, I'lngrat m'aaaomme aans pitt6 ; ma peau m^me n'eat paa ^
I'abrl de aon ingratitude ; il la tanne et en fait dea bottea et dea aou-
liera. De li, je conclna que Thomme eat le Trai aymbole de Pingnu
titude. Adieu ; j'ai dit ce que je penae.
Lliomme, tout 6tonn6, dit au reptile : je ne croia paa ee que oetta
radoteuae a dit ; eile a perdu I'eaprit : rapportona-noua en ^ la deei-
aion de cet arbre.— De tout mon ooeur. — ^L'arbre 6tant pria pour juge,
ee Alt bien pia encore. — Je meta lliomme ^ Pabri [L. 69. 1.] dea
oragea, de la chaleur, et de la plnie. £n 6t6, il tronve aoua mes
branehea une ombre agr6able; je prodnia dea fleura et du fruit; ce-
pendant, apr^a mille services, un manant me fiut tomber ^ coupa de
bache : il coupe toutes mes brancbes, en fait du feu, et reserve mon
corpa, pour 6tre 8ci6 en planches. Lliomme ae voyant ainsi con-
▼aineu : je snis bien sot, dit-il, d'6eouter [L. 21. 2.] une radoteuae et
«n jaaeur. Anasiioi l .oUiu is couleuvre auz pieds et TScrasa.
Le plna fort • i^ujonrK raiaon, ii cpprime le plua faible. La foiee
•t la paaaon aont MudM it la Toix de la joatioe et de la v^rit^
PSBRDI.
e. U 8IR0B.
Un ▼ienz abge maUn 6tant mort, aon ombre deacendit dana la aom
ore demeure de Plnton, oQ elle demanda ^ retouroer parui lea vivanta.
Plnton voulait [{ 119.] la renvoyer dans le corps d'un &ne pesant el
stupide, pour lui Ater aa [{ 21, (2.)] souplesse, sa vi?acit6, et aa ma
tSee. Maia elle fit tant de toura plalsanta et badins, que rinflexibie
rai dea enfera ne put [} 138, (2.)] e'emp^cher de rire, et lui loissa le
flhoix d*nne condition. Elle demanda i entrer dana le corps dVin
perroquet — ^Au moina, diaait-elle, je conaerverai par llL quelqne r«a-
Moiblaiiee avec lea hommes que j'ai longterapa imit6a. fitant niqir*
Digitized
by Google
ftXADI«0 LB8BOKS. 460
J6 fidsais det gestes tomme eux ; ot, 6tant peiToq let, je parieni avea
euz dans lea plna agr^ables conversations.
. A peine I'ombre da sin^^ fut introduite dans ce nouvean m6tier,
qii*une vieille femme causense I'acheta. II fit (Jairty 4. tr.) ses d6»
Jaes; elle le mit dans une belle [L. 13. 6.] cage. II faisait bonne
ch^ et diaooorait toute la journ^e avec la vieille radoteuse, qui ne
parlait pas plus sens^ment qne lai. H joignit (joindre^ 4. tr.) k son
nouveau talent d'6tourdir tout le monde je ne sals {savoir, 3. tr.) quoi
de son ancienne profession. II remoait sa t^te ridicolement, il fai^
sait eraquer son bee, il agitait ses ailes de cent fa^ons, et faisait de
888 pattes plusieurs tours qui sentaient encore les grimaces de Fago-
tin. La vieille prenait k toute heure ses lunettes pour Tadmirer ; elle
6tait bien &eh^e d^^tre un pen sourde, et de perdre quelquefois des
paroles de son perroquet, auquel elle trouvait plus d'esprit qu'^ per*
Sonne. Ce perroquet g&t6, devint bavard, importun, et fou. J\ se
tourmenta si fort dans sa cage, et but (boire^ 4. tr.) tant de vin aveo
la vieille, qu'il en mourut
Le voilk revenu devant Pluton,' qui voulut (youlcnry 3. tr.) cette
fois le faire passer dans le corps d^un poisson. Mais il fit (/aire, 4.
tr.) encore une farce devant le roi des ombres; et les princes ne
r^aistent gu^re [L. 17. 6.] auz demandes des mauvais plaisants qui les
flattent Pluton accorda done^^ celai-ci,quMI irait (aUer, 1. tr.) dans
le corps d*un homme; mais eomme le dieu eut honte [L»21, (4.)] de
i'envoyer dans le eoips d'un homme sage et vertueuii, il le destina
an eoips d*un harangueur ennayeox et importun, qui mentait, qui se
vantait sans eesse, qui fiusait des gestes ridicules, qui se moquait de
tout le monde, qui interrompait toutes les conversations les plus
polieset les phis solides, pour dire rien, ou les sottises les plus gros-
sikos. Mercure qui le reeonnut [Lb 61.] dans ce nouvel 6tat, lui dit
en riant — ^Ho ! ho 1 je te reeonnais ; tu n'es qu'un compost du singe
et du perroquet que j'ai vus [L. 43. 7.] autrefois. Qui [\ 30, (5.)]
t6terait tes gestes et tes paroles apjHrises par eoeur aans jugement,
ne laisserait rien de toi. D'un joli singo et d'un bon perroquet o
nV n fidt qu'iin sot homme. Fek^loic.
Digitized
by Google
4f0 BSABXKO Z^XftflOV*.
n.—ATOLOGUES ET ALLfiGQRIES.
0. L£ BERGER £T L£ TROUPEAU.
Qoand \ ous voyez quelquefois un nombroux troupcaa qui, r6paTid«
HI une collino vers le declin d'un beau jour, patt (/Mi/re. 4. ir,)
ranquiilemtint le tiiym et le serpolet, ou qui broute dans une pmitie
luie herbe menue ot tendre qui a ^chappe k la faux dn moissonneur,
le bt^rger, soi^eux et attentif, est debout aupr^s de scs brebis ; il ne
les perd pas de vue, il les suit (suivre, 4. tr.) il les conduit, il les
[L. 27. 7.] change de paturage ; si elles se dispersent, il les rasscmble ;
si un loup avide paratt, il liche son cliien qui le met en fuite ; il les
nourrit [L. 87.] il les defend; Taurore le trouve dv}\ en ploine cam-
pagne, d*oi^ il ne se retire qu'avec le soleil. Quels [\ 30, (10.)] soinal
quelle vigilance ! quelle servitude ! Quelle condition vous paratt la
plus delicieuse et la plus libre, ou du bcrger, ou des brebis? Le
troupeau est-il fait pour le berger, ou le berger pour le troupcau ?
Image naive [L. 13. &] des peuples, et du prince qui les gouv. ne,
9*il est bon prince. La BRinrtRS.
2. LES PARVENUS.
Ni les troubles, Zenobie, qui agitent votre empire, ni la guerre que
rous soutenez virilement centre une nation pKisaante, depaia la morl
da roi votre ^ux, ne diminnent rien de votre magoifieence : vous
avez pr§f<§r6 [{ 134, (6.)] k toute autre contr^e les rives de rEupbraie
pour y elever un superbe Edifice ; Pair y est sain et temp§r6, la sttu-
Ation en [} 39, (17.)] e^l riante, un boia sacre Pombrage du c6t6 du
eouchant ; les dieux de Trid qui habitent quelquefois la tenv, n'jr
auraient pu choisir une p a belle demeure : la campagne autoor, est
oouverte [} 134, (3.)] d'hommes qui tail lent et qui coupon t, qui vont
(aUer, 1. tr.) et qui viennent {venir, 3. tr.) qui roulent ou qui charrient
!e bois du Liban, Pairain et le porphyre ; les grues et les machines g6*
mtssent dans lair, et font esperer k ceux qui voyagent vers PArabie,
de revolr k leur retour en leura foyers ee palais achev^, et dans ectto
splendeur o(i vous desirez le porter, avant de Phabiter, vous et lea
princes vos enfants. N*y [} 39, (18.)] ^pargnez rien, grundo reiae
eniployez y Por et tout Part des plus excellents ouvriers ; qua lea
Phidias et les Zeuxis de votre si^de d^ploient [} 49, (3.)] toute leur
seienee sur vos plafonds et sur vos lambris : tracez y de vastes et
d^licieux jardins, dont Penchantement solt tel, qu*ils ne paraissent pas
fittta de la main des hommes. fipuises voa tr6sora et votie indnstite
Digitized
by Google
mr cot onvrnge incomparable ; ct, apr^s que voas y aarei [L. 61. 6.]
miSy Zt>nobic, la derni^ro main, quelqu^un de ces p{ttres qui habiteiit
leA sables voisins de Piilniyre, devenu riche pat les peagea de vos ri*
Ti^res, acbetera [} 49, (6.)] un jour k deniers complants cette royalo
roaison, pour rembellir ot la rendre plus digne de lui ot de sa for-
tune La Bauy^bb.
8. LE PALAIS DE LA RSNOMMfiB.
Attx eztr^Diites du monde, sous le p6le, dont [L. 31. 8.] rintr^pido
^''Cok mesura la circonfercnce k trovers les vents et les tempdtea; au
milieu deaterres australes qu*une barri^re de glace ddrobe k la curio-
aitc de<4 kommes, s'el^ve [} 49, (6.)] une montagne qui surpaase o&
hauteur los sommcts les plus Aleves des Andes dans le Nouvcao-
Monde, ou du Thibet dans Taiitique Asie.
8ur cette montagne est b&ti un palais, ouvrage dea puisaancea in-
femalea. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruita
Tiennent (vemr, 2. tr.) f rapper lea d^ea de cet Edifice, dont le ailenciT
n'a jamais franchi le' aeniL
Au centre du«*nonument est une voftte toum^e en apirale comma
ane conque, et faito de sorto quo tous les sons qui p^n^trent dans
le palais, yabotttissent; maia,par un effet du g6nie de rarchitecte
dea mensongea, la plupart de ces sons ae tronvent [Lb 36. 2.] fiiuaae-
ment reprodulta; aouvent une leg^ rumeur a'enfle et gronde on
entrant par la voie pr^paree anz^lata du tonnerre, tandia que lea
roulementa de la foudfo expirent en pasaant par les routea ainueoaea
\1U 13« 5.] deatin^ea aux faibles bruita.
C'eat 14 que, Toreille plae^e k Touverture do cet immenae 6cbo,
est aaata anr un tr6ne retentiaaant, un demon, la renommte. Cetto
pHiaaaate iille de Satan et de Torgueil, naquit (naiire^ 4. tr.) autrefoia
pour annonoer le mal Avant le jour oH Lucifer leva Tetendard
contre le Tout-Puiaaant, la renommee 6tait inconnue. Si un monde
venait k a'animor ou 4 a*eteindre ; si Tfitemel avait tire un univera
4u n^ant, ou replong6 an de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; a'il avail
jete un aolttil dans reapace,cr66 un nouvel ordre de seraphina, eaaay6
H 49, S.] la bont6 d^une lumiere, toutes.ccs choaea etaicnt ans^itCt
coanuea [Lb 42. 6.] dans le ciel par un sentiment intime d'admiration
et d'amour, par le chant mysterieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Maia,
aprda la rebellion dea mauvais anges, k renommee usnrpa la place
d* cette iutention divine. Bient6t, pr^cipitee [{ 06, (3.)] aux enfers,
• «[L.81. 1.] fut elle qui pnblia dana Tabyme b naiaaance de notio
. ^boi «t qui porta renaemi de Diea k tenter hi ch&te de rbomuMu
Digitized
by Google
4fS BBADXVO LBSBOITB.
Elle fint rar U tern aveo la mort, et d^s ce moment ello toUit m
demonre aar U montagne, oi^ elle entend et r^p&te conftu^ment oe
qui se paaae ear la tern, aux enfers, et dans les cieux.
CHATEAtJBUAnX
4.-L'ACADfiMIB 8ILSNC1EUSB OU hlSS EMBL^MBa
n J avait [) 61, 3. ] k Amadan one c^l^bre acad^mie, dont le premiei
tatttfc 6tait con^a (concev&ir^ 8.) en oes termes : Les €Kademicien$
ptiuerant heaucoup^ ^criront peu^ etne [h. 19. 2.] parlerani que k mohu
fosnUe. On [i 41, (4.)] I'appelait VAcaitme sUencieuse, et U n'6tait
point en Perae de vrai savant qui n'eiit Tambition d*y 6tre admia.
Le docteur Zeb, anteur d'on petit livre excellent, intitaU le BdiOen^
apprit (apprendrej 4. tr.), au fond de sa province, quHl («mp.) vaqoait
nne place dans TAcad^mie silencieuse. H part anssitAt ; il arrive &
Amadan, et, se pr^sentant k la porte de la salle od les acad^mieiena
Bont assembles, il prie Thaissier de remettre an president oe billet .
Le doctenr Zeb demande bumblement la place vacante. Llmiafliei
a'acquitta sur-le-champ de la commission ; mais le doctear et son bil-
let arrivaient [{ 119.] trop tard, la place 6tait deji remplie.
L'acad^mie fut d6soI^ de ce contre-temps ; elle avait re9U nn pev
malgr6 elle on bel [L. 13. 6.] esprit, dont [L 81. 8.] I'^loqnenee yive
at I^g^re faisait Tadmiration de la coor, et elle se voyait (voir, 3. tr.)
r6dnite k refnser le doctenr Zeb, le fl^n des bavards, une tdte si
bien faite, si bien meabl6e ! Le president charg^ d'annoncer an doe-
tear cette nouvelle d6sagr6able [} 86.] ne poavait presque s'y r6-
sondre, et ne savait comment s'y prendre. Apr^s avoir un pea r^r^
11 fit [L. 83. 3, 4.) rempUr d'eau une grande coape, mais si bien rem-
plir, qa'ane goatte de plas ei^t fait d6bofder la iiqaeor; pais il fit
eigne qa*on introduislt le candidal II parut {paraUrey 4. tr.) avee
eet air simple et modeste qni annonce pvesqne toiQours le vrai nit-
rite.. Le president se leva, et, sans prefer nne seule parole, il Ini
montra d'on air afllig6 la conpe embl^matique, cette coape ai exacte-
ment pleine. Le doctear comprit (comprendre, 4. tr.) de reate, qa*il
n*y avait [} 61, 2. ] plus de place 3l I'acad^mie ; maia, sans perdre ooi^
ng^ il songealt k faire comprendre qu'an acad^micien sunram^raire
n'y ddrangerait rien. H voit k ses pieds nne feaille de rose [} 76, (1 1.)]
il la ramasse, il la pose d^licatement snr la sarfaoe de Tean, et fidt al
Uen, qu'n n'en 6chappe pas ane seole gontte.
A eette r^ponse inginieuse, tont le monde battH dea maina, en
iaiaaa donnir les r^les poor ce joar-Ii, et le doctear Zeb ftit re^
par aeelamation. On lui pr6senta sar-le-ebamp, le regiatre od tea
iMplendairea devaient (ievotr, 8.) afnscrire ^vx^iteea. H a^ iaa-
Digitized
by Google
•rivit doDOv et Q (icft^.) ne lai restait plot qn-i prononeer aehm
l*iiaage une phrase de remerctment Mais, en acad^micieii vniment
ailencieuz, le doeteur Zeb remerda sans dire mot U toivit (^crtf^
4. tr.) en marge le nombre ceitf, c'6tait [{ 108, (1.)] eelni de ses non-
▼eanz eonfrdres; pais, en mettant nn z^ro devant le ehiffre, il derivit
an dessons : Hf n'en vaudrmU (valoir, 8. ir.) m mains ni jlus (0100).
Le president r^pondit an modeste doeteur avee antant de politesa*
qua de prtonee d'e^rit D mit le cbif&e un devant le nombre cent
et i] toiTit: iZt en vauirma dixfoU davantage (1100).
L'abb6 Blascbbt.
nL— ANECDOTES.
1. LB BON MINISTBB.
Le pviaaant Aaron-Rashid conunen^ait k sonp^onner qne son vi-
sir Giafar, ne mdritait pas la confiance qu*il Ini avait donn6e [{ 184»
(4.) j las femmes d' Aaron, lea habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, lea
derviohes, oensuraient le visir avee amertume. Le calife aimait Gia-
far; 11 ne voulttt point le condamner aur les clamenrs de la ville et
de la eonr [} 141]. II yisita son empire; 11 vit partout la terra bien
eultivee, la campagne nante, les hameaux opulents, les arts utiles en
honneur, et la jennesse dans la joie. II visita ses places de gnerre et
ses porta de mer ; il vit de nombreuz vaisseaux qui mena9aient [{ 1 1^]
les cdtes de I'AfHqne et de TAsie ; il vit (voir^ 3. tr.) des guerriera
discii^in^s et contents. Ces guerriers, les matelote, et les peuples
des campagnes s'^riaient : O Dieu ! b6nissez les fidMes en prolon-
geant les jours d' Aaron-Rashid et de son visir Giafar; ils maintien-
nent dans Tempire la paix, la justice, et Tabondance ; tu manifestes,
grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fiddles, en leur donnant un ealife
comme Aaron et un visir eomme Giafar ! Le calife, touchy de ces
aeclamationsi entre dans une mosqu6e, s'y pr4cipite ^ genoux, et
a'6erie : Grand Dieu I je te rends graces : tu m'as donn6 un ministre
dont mea oourtisans me disent du mal, et dont mes peuples me diseut
da lien. Saint-Lambxbt.
2. BONAPABTB BT LA SBNTINBLLB •
Aprte avoir gagn^ la bataille d'Areole, qui avait dur6 [} IS6, (8.)]
troia jonra, Bonaparte, toujours infittigaLle, pazcourait son camp^ i
» -■■ I ' ■ " I I ■ ■ ■ . I I ■■ I ...
* The word tnUindk is always fbndnto.
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
474 mSADIHO LB8SOV&
on T^tement fort nimple, qai ne decclait point en lui le g^n^ra. en chtJ^
i. iVflet d^cxnminer par lui-m^inc .si leu fatigues de trois journres ausa
pciiibleH que x»tte Uataille, nVvnicnt rien fait |)erdre it scs soldats de
leiir discipline et de leur surveillAnee habiluellee [} 18, (3.)]- Le ge-
neral trouve [{ 118, (5.)] une ficntinelle endonnie, lui enleve douce-
ment son fusil suns Teveiller, et fuit faction k aa place. Quelqucs
[L. 88.] momenta apres, lo soldat ae reveille ; se voyant aiuai d^
aarme et reconnaiasant aon general, il 8*6crie : Je suia perdu ! — Raft-
aore toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, aprea tant de fatigues, fl
pcttt £tre permis k un brave tcl que toi de auccomber aa aommeil
mala une autre foia choisis mieux ton temps.
8. BIENFAISANCE.
Le dne de Montmorenei, qui fut decapit^ k Toulouse, aimait k r6«
pondro des bienfaita. Ce aeigneur, voyage:uit [} 49, (I.)] en Lan-
guedoc, aper^ut dana un champ» quatre iaboureura qui dinaient ft
Tombre d^un buiaaon. Approclions nous de cca bonnes gens, dit-il
ft ceux qui le suivaient, et demandona lenr s'ils se croient heureuz.
Troia r^pondirent, que bomant leur feiicite ft certaines commodity
de leur condition, que Dieu leur avait donneess [L. 42. 7.] ils ne soii-
haitaient rien dans le monde. Le quatriSme avoua francheroent
qn*une choso manqiuit ft aon bonhenr : c'etait de pouvoir acqnerir
certain heritage quo sea peres possedaient. — ^Bt ai tu lavais, [L. 83.
6.] ret heritage, dit M. de Montmorenei, serais4u content?— Autant
que je le [U 46.4, 6.] pais 6tro, r.'pondit le pnysan. — Combien vaut-
(Miiotr, 3. if.) il ? demanda le due — ^Deux mille francs, repondit la
payaan. — Qu'on [L. 38.] lea lui donne, reprit lo due, et quil aoit
dit que j'ai leodu on homme beureux en ma vie.
Li Vassob.
IV.— MAXBIES ET REFLEXIONS.
I.f La religion donne ft la vertu lea plus donees esp^ranres, au viee
Impenitent de [{ 78, (3.)] justcs alarmcs, et au vrai repentir lea plus
puiasantes consolations; mnis eile t&ehe surtout d'inspirer anx
hommea de Tamour ({ 78, (3).], de b douceur, et de la piti^ pour lea
kommes. MoxTEaQOiBU.
t This extract and several of the following, ftimlsh excellent i]Iu£tr&-
tfona of the Bolea on tixe use of the article.
Digitized
by Google
3. Almez et obscrvez la religion, le rcate meurt, elle no menu ji^
Buiio. F^.NiLoy.
3. Lea vertna neoB dc la religion, sc cachent dans la religion niciu^,
Lacketellr.
4. La religion est encore plus n^ossaire k ceux qui eoinmnndenty
qu*i ceux qui ob6i.«:sent. Bossuet.
6. Prier enseiubie, d:infl qnclque langue, dans qnelque rite quo co
icit, c*est la plus touchanto fraternite d*csperance ct de sympathie
que les liommes pulssent contracter sor eette terre.
Mme. de Sta£l.
6. La conscienee est nn juge plac6 dans Tint^rieur de notre £tre,
StGVR,
7. La conscience est la voiz de T&me, les passions sont la votx da
corps. J. J. RoussRAU.
8. La vertu obscure est sonvcnt m6pris^e, parccque rien ne la re-
Uvo k nos yeux. Massillon.
9. La vertu est nn cf!brt fait sur nous-m£mes, pour lo bien d*au«
trui, dans Fintcntion do plaire k Dieu seu).
Berkardtn de St. Pierre.
10. n y a une amitie ehretienno que la philosophie humainc ne
comprcnd gu^re; c^est Tassociation de deux &mes qui metient en
commun leur foi ct leurs pri^res, et s'el^vent ensemble vers Dieu.
Laurektir.
1 1. La modestio est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dan^ un
tableau ; elle lui donna do la force et du relief. La BKUvkRE.
12. I A verite n*a jamais besoin de rerrour, ot los ombres n*ajoutcnt
rien k la lumiere. - Lamartine.
13. On n*est pas digne d^aimer la verite, quand on pcut aimer
quclque choso plus quVIle. Massillon.
14. La flatterio est une fausae monnaie qui n'a de coura que par
notre vaiiit6. La Rochefoucauld.
15. On ne triompho de la calomnie qu^cn la dodaignant
Mme. de Mairterox.
16. Ce nVat que pour Tinnocencc, que la aolitude pent avoir dt-a
elmrmcs. Leczi^cska.
17. Les conseils agreables sont rarcment des conscils utiles
BIassii.lor.
18. Ceux qui donncnt des conscils sans les a(«ouipagnor d exem-
ples, resscmblent k cos potcaux dc la cionpagDe, qui indiqucnt lea
ilicmins sans lea parconrir. RiyAAix^
Digitized
by Google
4T9 BiA»tv« titaovf.
v.— POfelE.
HniNE DE L'ENFANT A BON ReYHL
O P^ra qn'adore mon p&re I
Toi qtt'on ne nomme qtt*& g«noiix,
Toi dont le nom terrible et donx
Fait conrber le front de ma m4re ;
On dit que ee brillant soleil
ITeat qu*iin jonet de ta puiasanoe,
Quo soua tea pieda il se balance
Comme une lampe de yenneil.
On dit que e'eat toi qui faia naltre
Lea petita oiaeanz duis lea chan^^
Et qui donnea aaz petita enfanta
Une &me auaai pour te connattre.
On dit que c'eat toi qui produia
Lea fleura dont le jaidin se pare ;
Et que eana toi, toujoura avare,
Le verger n'aurait point de frultiL
Aux dona que ta boni6 meaore,
Tout Punivera eat eonri^ ;
Nul inaecte n*eat oubli6
A ce featin de la nature.
L'agneau broute le aerpolet;
La ch^vre a'attache au cytiae ;
La mouche, au bord du vaae, pmm
Lea blanchea gouttea de mon lait*
L*Alouette a la graine am^re
Que laiaae envoler le glanenr,
Le paaaerean auit le yannenr,
Et Fenfiuit a'attache k aa mire.
Et, pour obtenir ehaque don
Que ehaque jour tu faia ^e.ore|
A mid], le aoir, 4 Paurore,
Que fkut^l f— prononoer ton noa.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
O Utaatf oia bouebo ImIMm,
Ce nom, des uiges redonte,
Un enfant mftme est 6coat6
Dans le chosnr qni te glorlfie !
Ah ! puuKia'il entend da ai loin
Lea TOBoz que noire bonehe adraaie ,
Je Teux Ini demander aans eeoae
Ce dont lea autrea ont beaoio.
If on Diea ! donne Tonde anx fontahiM
Oonne la plome auz paaaereaux,
€t la bune auz petite agneauz,
€t rombre et la roa^e auz plamea.
Donne anz maladea la aant6
An mondiant le pain qu'il plenre,
A Torpbelin une demeure,
An priaonnier bi liberty
Oonne nne famille nombrenae
Att pdre qui cTaint le SeigneuTt
Donne k* moi aageaae et bonbeor
Pour que ma m&re aoit beureiiae. Laiubxhl
2. LA FEUILLB.
*De ta tige d6tach6e
Panvre feoille dteatebtei
O^ yaa in ¥— Je n*en aaia rien.
L*onge a bria6 le ebtae
Qni aenl 6tait mon aoutien.
De aon ineonatante baleine
Le z^pbyr on Taquflon,
Pepnia ce jour me promtae
De bt forAt k bt pbune,
De la montagne au yallon.^
Je Taia oii le vent me mhtubt
Sana me pbundre on m*ei&ayWf
Je Taia otk va tonte oboae,
Od Ta la feuille de rooe
Etlatoillodebuiitor. Amumit
>no4lnllUsllMliftpoeliQd]
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
4fXm BBADIV* LBfS«Hti
8. LS UOZfTAGNARD fiMIOBB.
Combien j*ni douce sonveiuince
Dii joli lieu de ma n«t9fiBnc« I
Ma aosur, qirils 6tuient beaux co« jovn
Dc France!
O mon pays, sois mcs amours !
Toujoars.
Te souTiont-il quo notro m6re
An foyer de noire chaumi^ro
Nous prcssait sur son sein joyeuz.
Ma chero !
Et nous Uaisions ses blonds chev^ttT ,
• Tous deux.
Ma sOBur, te souvient-il encore
Du chateau que baignait bi Dora
Et de cctte tani vieille tour
Du More,
UA rairain soimait )e rctoiir
Du jourt
Te somicnt-il du lac tranquille
Qu*cfHcurait Hitrondclle agile,
Du vent qui courbait le roaeau
Mobile,
El du soleil couehaxit, sur VetM^
Si beau 3
Te 60uvient-il de cctte amie,
Douce comiMgne de ma vie !
Dans les bois en cueillant la fieur
Jolie»
Hel5ne appuyait sur mon ccenr
Son eoQur.
#
Oh ! qui me rcndra mon II6f&no,
Et la montagne ct le grand cYidne !
Leur souvenir fait tout les Jours
Ma peine :
Moo pays sera mos amotuH
Digitized
by Google
msABis^ LSfsova. iff.
4. STANCEa
hi j*ai dit dnns roon cosur; que fairo do la visi
Imi-je enror, stiivnnt coitx qui m'ont d«v&no6,
Coioine I'ligneau qui posao oi^ an ro^re a pBsrti
[miter des mortels, rimmortelle folie ?
L un chcrcho ftur les mere Ics trSsora de Mcmcon
Et )a vngne engloutit aes voeux et son navire ;
Dans le acin dc la f^loire otk son g6nie aspiro,
L*autre meurt, emvr6 par Techo d*an vain nom.
Av*e nos passions, formant sa Taste trame,
Celui-iji Ibnde un trftne, et nionte pour toniber ;
Dans des plages plus doux aimant a succomber^
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d*une femmo
Le paresscnx s'endort dans les bras de la folm ,
Le labonreur conduit sa fertile charrue ;
Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue :
Le mendiant s*assied sur le bord du cliemin.
Oi^ vont-ils ccpendant ?— lis vont oi^ va la feuiUe
Quo cbasse devant lui le souffle des hivers.
Ainsi vont so flgtrir dans leure travanx divers
Ces generations que le temps s^me et eueille.
Us luttaient eontre lui, mais le temps a vainca;
Corome un fieuve engloutit le sable de ses rives.
Je Tai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives,
lis sont n6s, ils sont morts : Seigneur, ont-Us vteu f
Pour moi, je cbanterai le mattre quo j'adore,
Dans le bruit des citds, dans la pnix des deserts,
Coucli6 sur !e rivage, ou flottant sur les mors,
Au declin du soleil, au lever de Taurore.
Ija terre ni*a crle : Qui done est le Seigneur ?
•— Cchii dent T&roe immense est pnrtout r^pAnda%
Celui dont nn seul pas mesure Petendne,
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa sptendeor;
Celuj qaiilit n^ant a tir6 la mati^rei
Ceiai qui sur le yUU • fonU ronivti^
Digitized
by Google
4M B8A9XV» XiSttOXt.
Celvi qui muia rivage a renlbrm6 les mfln»
Celni qui dkin regard a lanc^ la lumi^ ;
Celoi qui ns connait ni jour, ni lendemaln,
Celoi qui de tout temps de aoi-^ntoie 8*en&iili«i
Qui Tit danB TaTenir comme k Theure pr^aente^
Et n^iielle lea temps 6chapp^ de sa main.
Cast lui, c*eat le Seigneur I Que ma langue redlaa
Lea eent noma de sa gloire aux enilknta des moKeis !
Comme la haipe d'or pendue i ses autels,
Je cfaanteni pour lui« juaqu'i oe qu^ me briae ! . ..
L
ft. LAFATBTTE EN ABlfiEIQUB
R^publieains, quel eortdge s'avaneet
^-Un vieuz guerrier d6barque parmi nous.
— Vient-il d*un roi tous jurer ralliancet
— n a des rois allum6 le courronz.
— Est-il puissant f — Seul il franchit les ondoa.
— Qu'a*t-il done fkitt— H a bris6 des fers.
Gloire immortelle k l*homme des deux moodet!
Jours de triomphe, 6olairez Puniyers!
Eidrop6en, partout snr ee rivage
Qui retentit de joyeuses elameurs,
Tu Toia r^gner, sans trouble et sans senraga^
La paix, les lois» le traTail« et lea moaurs.
Des oppiim6s oes bords sont le refbge ;
La tyrannie a peupl6 nos deserts,
Lliomme et ses droits ont id Dieu pour jugib
Jours de triomphe, 6clairez runivers !
liaia que de sang nous coftta oe bien-Atre t
Nous suecombions ; Lafayette aoeourut,
Montra la France, eut Washington pour maltm.
Lntta, Tainqnit, et TAnglaia diaparut
Pour aon paya, pour la liberty aainte,
n a depuis grandi dans les revers.
Des fers d*01muts, nous eflhfona r«
lowm de triomphe, Mairex runhwal
Digitized
by Google
ESADIKO LBBBONB. 481
Ce Tieil up' qne iani dIvreMe awqeittd
Par un b6ro8, ce hcros adopts
B^nit jadis, k ba premiere feoille,
L'arbra naiaaant de noire liberie.
Maia aujourd'hni, que Tarbre et aon feoillaf*
Bravent en paix la foudre et lea hiveia,
II vient sVaaeoir bous aon fertile ombrage.
Joora de triomphe, 6clairez Tanivera !
Aatoor de lai, voia noa chefa, voia noa aafeai
Noa vieuz aoldata ae rappelant aea traita ;
Voia tout un peuple, et cea tribua aauvagea
A aon aeul nom aortant de leura for^ta.
L'arbre aacr^, aur ce concoura immenae
Forme un abri de rameauz toujoura verta.
Lea Tenia au loin porieront aa aemenee,
Joora de triomphe, ^lairez TuniTera!
L'Europ^n que frappent cea parolea,
Servit dea roia, auivit dea conqu^ranta;
Un peuple eaclave encenaait cea idolea ;
Un peuple libra a dea honneura plna granda.
H61aa, dit-il, et aon ceil aur lea ondea
Semble chercher dea borda lointaina et ehera.
Que la yertu rapproehe lea deux mondea I
Jonra da triomphe. 6clairez runlTera \ BtmAMiB.
6. LA MARSEILLAI&B.
AUona, enfknta de la patria :
Le jour de glolre eat arriy6 :
Contro noua de la tynuinie
L*etendard aangUnt eat lev6.
Entendez-Toua dana lea campagnea
Mugir cea ferocea aoldata!
Ua Tienneut juaque dana voa braa
flgorger voa fila, voa compagnea.
Aux armea ! citoyena ; formez voa bataillons;
linrrhcTt qn'nn aang impur abreuTe yoi aiUonal
Chcxub.
Aux annea 1 citoyena ; formona noa bataiUona ;
ManhoM ^--qu'un aang impur abreufe nm afDoMt
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
lit RlSADIKO I;X8»OVt.
QuD vent tette Iwrde cP6selave%
De IraHres, do ro» eonjorfis?
Pour qui cea ignoblesentrnyea,
Cos !«frs dea loogtemps pr6parta !
— Fnui^aia, poor nous, ah ! quel oving$
Quels transports il doit exciter t
Cest nous qu on ose menaeer
De rendre ^ 1 antique esekvage I
Auz annes, etc
Quo! ! des eohortea ^trang^s
Feraient la lot dans nos foyers I
Quoi ! ces phalanges mercenairea
Terrasseraient nos fiers gnerriers!
Grand Dieu ! par des laains enchatnfi*
Nos fronts sous le jong se plieraieiit T
De vils despotea deviendraient
Lea maltrea de noa deatin^ea !
Aux armeS) ete.
TrembleZy tjrans! et rona, pmGdm
L'opprobre de toua lea partia ;
Tremblez . . . vos projets parrieidM .
Vont enfin reeevoir leur prix.
Tout est soldat pour vous combattm
S*il8 tombent, nos jeunes h^ros,
La France en produit de nouveaux,
Centre vous tout pr^ts k se battr*.
Aux armes, eU.
Franyais; en gnerriers magnanif
Portoz on retenez tos coups :
fipiirgncz lea tristes victimes,
A regret s'armant centre vous ;— -
Mais ces despotes sanguinaires,
Mais les complices de Bouille . . •
Tons ces tigres qui, sans piti^,
D^cbirent le sein de leur m^re . • .
Aux armes, etc
Amour aaer^ de la patrie,
ConMs, mmtimiB wm hnm vnngiw
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ESADIHO LBftSOVa^ 4i8-
Libort6, liberty ch^rie
Combats aveo tes dSfensenra.
SouB nos drapeavx, que la rietoin
Accoure 2i tes mUes aeeents;
Que nos ennemis expirants
Voient ton triomphe et notre ^ofrel
Anx armes, etc Rouost ds jJmLt
7. LE RETOUB DANS U ^ATBIK.
Qvi'il va lentement 1e navira
A qui* j'ai confi6 mon sort !
Au rivago ou mon ctBur aspire,
vlu*il est lent k trouvor nn poitt
France ador6e ! «
Douce conti^e 1
Mes yeux cent fois ont era te i6oo»«*iF.
Qu*un vent rapide
Soudain nous guide
Aux bords sacres oii je re^ii^iie i
Mais eniin le matelot crie :
Terre, terre, li-bas, yoyes I
Ah ! Ipus mes maux sont oabiietb
Salut k ma patrie 1
Oui, voilk les rives de Franee ;
Qui, voila le port vaste et stTt
Voifun dtB champs oHi mon enflmoe
S'ccoula sous un chaume obacor i
France ador^el
Douce contr^e I
^ pr^s vingt ans, enfin je te revois ;
De mon village
Je vols la plage,
Je vois fumer la clme de mes toits.
Combien mon &me est attendrie I
Ul furent mes premieres amours;
{A ma m^re m*attend toujours,
Salut k ma patne ! !
« ApoettcalUoeDse; thto ihoald be aaipeL i » (S).
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
An bruit des transports d'ali^ierMMi
Enfin le luvirB enUe an port
Dans oetto barque oik Ton ae pram
H&toDS-nons d*atteindre le boid.
France ador^e !
Douetf contr6e I
Puisaent tes fils te revoir ainai tons 1
Enfin j'arrive
Et snr la riye,
Je rends au ciel, je rends grftee ^
Je t'embrasse, 6 terre chene (
. Dien ! qn'un exil6 doit souflUr !
Molt d6aormaia, je puis moniir.
8al«t9tMpitfTisI nil
Digitized
by Google
VOCABULABT FOR THE READING LESSONS.
▲BBREYIATIOITB.
ac^ecthre. p. participle.
. y. Yorbal «4I^^^0* P^* plaraL
adv. adverb. pro. prepoaition.
art article. pm. pronoun,
ooij. ' conjonctioo. y. a. active verb,
f. feminine gender. v. a. dt n. active and nentcr
ind. p present ofindicative. v. aux. auxiliary verb,
int inteijection. v. unip. unlpersooal verb,
m. mascuUne gender. v.ir.orir. Im^Iarverb.
n. noun. ▼. n. neuter verb,
p. d. past definite. v. r. reflective verb.
The numbers after the verbs indicate the coi\JugatioiL
▲-▲D.
▲D-AM.
A, k (tnih agrave aceerU), pre. at or
to.
Abondacce, n. f. aitmdancef fflenty,
Abouttr, V. n. 2. (0 eiul in, to come
to.
Abrenver, v. a. 1. to water j ioJiU.
Abyme, n. m. aiyss, depth.
Abti, n. m. shdter.
Acaddmicien, n. m. AeadenUcum.
Acad6mie, n. f. academy.
Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice.
Acclamation, n. f. oedamAUon.
Accompagner, v. a. 1. to accomvany.
Accordcr, Y.tLl.to grant, (a') v. r. .
to agree.
Accourir, v. n. !r. 2. ^ run, to has-
ten to.
Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to wekome.
Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy.
Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com^
plete.
Acqu^rir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire.
Acquittcr (s'), v. r. to aequU on^s
self of, to discharge.
i dieti, int d& n. m. adieu, farewell,
leave.
Admettre, v. a. Ir. 4. to admit.
Admiration, n. f. admiration.
Admirer, v. a. 1. f^ adrntre.
Adopter, v. a. 1. to adoff..
Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore.
Adresser, v. a. 1. to address, (f\
ref. to apply.
Affectation, n. f. affectation,
Affiig6, p. & a^T V. grieved, Mf»
fUded.
Agacer, v. a. to entice, to tease,
Agile, adj. nimhle^ light.
Agitcr, v. a. to agitate.
Agiiean, n. m. Umt.
Ah ! int Ah.
Aigle, n. m. eagle.
Aile, n. f. wing.
Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to Hie,
Aiosi, adv. thus, so.
Air, n. m. air.
Airain, n. m. brass.
Aifl6ment, adv. easily.
AJouter, v. a. 1. to add.
Alarm, n. f. alarm.
All6goTie, n. f. aUegory.
Aller, V. n. ir. 1. (ind. p. Je vala,)
to go.
Alliance, n. f. alliance.
Altnmer, v. a. 1. to Ught, kindle,
Alonette, n. f lark.
Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador.
Ambition, n. f. ambition.
Ame, n. f. soul.
Amer, e, adj. bitter.
Amertume, n. f. bitterness, ssrrwm.
Ami, e, n. m. dk* t /fiend.
Digitized
by Google
486
▲If-AV.
A1^-BU
AteOQTi D. n. love.
An, n. m. mim6e, f. year.
Ancfen, m. adj. anciaU, oLL
Ange, a. m. «iv«/*
Animal, (pi. auz,) n. m. aninuU,
Animer, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite.
Annonoer, y. a. 1. to announce.
Antique, a4j. andetU, antique.
A peine, adv. tcarcdif,' hardly.
Apercevoir, v. a. 8. Uipersewe.
Apologue, n. m. apologue.
Apparence, n. f. appearance.
Appartenir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. J'ap-
parUons), to belong.
Appttler, y. a. 1. to call.
Apprendre, y. a. 4. (p. appris), to
learn.
Approcber, y. a. 1. toiringnear, (f)
y. r. to approach.
ADpuyer, v. a. L to lean.
Api'es, pre. after.
Aquilon, n. m. north wind.
Arbra, n. m. tree.
Architecte, n. m. architect.
Armer, v. a. 1. to arm, (s*) y. r. to arm
one's self.
Arracher, y. a. 1. to tear.
Arrlver, y. n. 1. to arrive,
Avt, n. m. art.
Article, n. m. article.
ArtKice, n. m. arU/lce, cunning,
trick.
ABpirer, y. n. 1. to aspire.
Assembler, y. a. l.io assemble.
ABseoir, (»') y. r. ir, 8. (ind. p. je
m'assieda, p. assb), to sU down.
Association, n. f. assodatum, com-
pany.
Assommer, y. a. 1. to striie down, to
kill.
Atteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j*at-
teignis), to reach, to kit.
Attendre, 4. to awaity to expect.
Attendri, e, a. v. p. moved, grieved,
Attentif, ve, sAyatlentive.
Attrai)or, v. a. 1. to calch,
Au, art. at, or to Ike.
Ai\)ourd*hui, adv. to-4ay.
Auparavant, adv. before.
Aupr5s, pre. &> adv. near.
Aurore, n. f. daien, aurora.
Aossl, coiy. &> adv. as, so, also.
Aussitdt, adv. immediately.
Austral, e, aiQ, austral.
Autant, adv. as mmch, as many
▲utel, n. m. attar.
Anteur, n. m. author.
Antour, pre. 6l adv. round, arouM^
Autre, a^U. other.
Autrefois, Bdr.frrmerlf.
Autrui, pm. other, others.
Avancer (s'), y. r. 1. to advanea,
approach.
Avant, pre. before.
Avare, n. dc a^}. miser, avetriclous.
Avec, pre. with.
Avenir, n. m. future.
Aveugle, a^j. Hind.
Avide, adj. anxious, eager.
Aviser {s!) y. r. 1. to think, to tefei
into mFS head.
Avoir, y. aux. &> a. Ir. (p. d. few).
tohrce.
Avoucr, y. a. 1. to confess.
Badin, e, a^j
Baigner, v. a. 1. to bathe.
Baillon, s. m. gag.
Baiscr, v. a. 1. lokuA.
Balancer, y. n. 1. to balance,
tale.
Balbutier, v. a. dt n. 1. to
Barque, n. f. bark, boat.
Barridre, n. t.gate.
Batallle, n. f. battU.
Bataillon, n. m. battoKen.
B&tir, y. a. 2. to build.
Battre, v. a. ir. 4. fp. batta,) to betA-
Baudet, n. m. donkey.
Bavard, e, n. &. adj. talkative, prmt^
tier.
Beau, bel, t belle, aclj. fine, hand^
some.
Beauconp, adv. much, many.
Beauts, n. f. beauty.
Bcc, n. m. beak.
Bel esprit, n. m. wit.
B^nir, v. a. 2. to Ness.
Bergcr, n. m. shepherd.
Besoin, n. m. wed, want.
Bcurre, n. m. biUler.
Bicn, n. m. property, adv. wdk
Bicn-dtre, n. m. vxlfiire, amforU
Bicnfaisance, n. f. beneficenos, l»
nevolence.
Bienfait, n. m. ben^.
Bientdt, adv. soon.
Billet, n. m. note.
Bkmc, blanche, a4}. white.
Digitized
by Google
CfB-OO.
W!
Boiro, y. a. It. i. (p. d. Je bos, p.
bu), to drink,
Bois, n. m. wood^ forest.
Bon, ne, a^. good^ kind^ simpie.
Bonheur, n. m. happiness,
Bonne-chire, n. f. good living,
Bont^, n. f. goodness, kindness,
Bord, XL m. border, shore.
Borner, y.a,l.to con/ine, to bound.
Botte, n. f. boot, bundle.
Bouche» n. f. nunUh.
Branclie, n. f. braTick.
Bras, n. m. arm.
Brave, a<y. brave, worthy.
Braver, v. a. 1. to brave, affront,
Brebis, n. f. skeep.
Brillant, e, adj. shining, brilliant,
Briser, y. a. 1. to break.
Brouter, y. a. & iLl.to browse, to
graze.
Bruit, n. m. noise,
BuisBon, n. m. busk.
C\ pm. it.
Cacher, y. a^l. to hide, conceal, (se)
v. r. to kuu one's self.
Cage, n. f. cage.
Calife,^xn. caUf.
Camp, n. m. camp.
Campagne, n. f. country, campaign.
Candidat, n. m. candidate.
Caresse, n. f. caress.
Causenr, se, a^j. talker.
Ce, pm. &, acy. this, that.
C6l6bre, adj. celebrated.
Celeste, adj. celestial.
Celui, pm. this, that.
Censurer, y. a. 1. to censure.
Cent, adj. num. hundred.
Centre, n. m. ceiUre.
dependant, coiy. however.
Certain, a^J. certain.
Ccsse (sans) without ceasing.
Chaleur, n. f. keat.
Champ, n. UL^ld. .
Changer, v. a. Sen. I. to change.
Chant, n. m. song, singing.
Chanter, y. a. &, n. 1. to sing.
Chaos, n. m. chaos.
Chaque, a<y. each.
Charger, v. a. 1. to chatge, load,
Charme, n. m. charm.
Cbarricr, y. a. 1. to tnauy^, emry.
Chaner, y. a. db u I. to Aim/, to ckuet
to drive away.
Chiteau, n. m.' castle, villa,
Chaume, n. m. thatch.
Cbaumidre, n. f. cottage.
Chef, Q. m. chief.
Chemin, n. m. way, road,
Cl)4^ne, n. m. otUs,
Cher, e, m^. dear.
Chercher, y. a. to seek.
Cheveux, n. m. pi. hair,
Ch^vre, n. f. goat,
Chien, n. m. dog.
ChiffVe, n. Tn.&wre.
ChoBur, n. m. cKoir, chorus,
Choisir, y. a. 2. to choose.
Chose, n. f. thing.
ChAte, n. t.faU,
Ciel, n. m. (pi. deux,) ktmotn,
Cime, n. f. peak, top.
Circonfirence, n. f. dreunrferenet,
C\t6, n. f. aty.
Citoyen, n. m. citizen,
Clair, e, ady. dear, n. m. Ught.
Clameur, n. f cry, clamor,
Cceur, n. m. heart.
Cohorte, n. f. cohort.
Coin, n. m. comer,
Colline, n. f. hiU.
Commander, y. a. 1. to comwtand, to
order.
Combattre, y. a. & n. i. to comiai,
tofi^U,
Comblen, ady. how mtuch, how many,
Commo, adv. Sl coq). as, like, when.
Commencement, n. m. beginning,
Commencer, y. a. 1. to b^n.
Comment, adv. how.
Commission, n. f. commission.
Commodity, n. f. convenience,
Commun, e, a^. common, nsuoL
Compagne, n. f. companion.
Complice, n. m. accomplice.
Composer, y. a. 1. to compose.
Comprendre, y. a. ir. 4. ta undtr*
derstand, to comprise,
Comptant, ad^SLtidy. ready, for cash.
Compter, v. a. 1. to count, to intend.
Concevoir, v. a. 8. to conceive.
Conclure, v. a.'ir. 1. to candude,
Concours, n. m. concowst, assembly,
Condamner, v. a. 1. to condemn.
Condition, n. f. condition,
Conduire, y. a. ir. 4. to cond^d,
Confianoe, n. f. c&^^denee,
denu.
Digitized
by Google
4S8
OO-OIT.
ConMre, n. m. kndker.feUcw,
CoDf\u6iDent, ady. confusedkf,
Coqjttrd, a. v. moom together.
Conxiaitre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Je cod-
nu8, p. coana), to knaw^ to be ac-
quainted mtk.
Conque, n. f. sMeU.
Conqu^rmnt, n. m. conquerwr,
CcQBcience, n. f eoHKi£nee.
Conaeil, n. m. advice^ amntel.
Consentir, y.n. 2. to consent^ agree,
CoDsenrer, v. a. 1. to preserve.
Consolation, n. f. consolation.
Constant, e, ac^. consUint.
Consternation, n. f. consternation.
Content, e, adj. pleased, content.
Continuellement, adv. continnaUy.
Contracter, v. a. 1. to contract.
Contre, pre. against,
Contr6e, n. f. country, district.
Contrc-temps, n. m. disappointment.
Convaincre, v. a. ir. 4. to convince.
Convenir, r. n. 2. to agree, to suit,
to cmifess.
Conversation, n. f. conversation.
Convier, v. a. 1. to invite.
Corps, n. m. body, corps.
Cort^, n. m. retinue. *
Cote, n. f. coast.
Cotd, n. m. side.
Conchant, n. m. West.
Coucher (se), v. ref. 1. to lie down.
Coulenvre, n. f. snake, adder.
Coup, n. m. blow.
Coupe, n. f. cup, vessel.
Couper, y. ti. I. to cut.
Cour, n. f. caurt.
Courage, n. m. courage.
Courber, v. a. 1. to bcTid, to bow.
Courroux, n. m. anger.
Court, e, adj. short.
Cours, n. m. course.
Courtisan, n. m. courtier.
Coiiter, v. n. 1. to cost.
Couvrir, V. a. ir. 2. to cover.
Craindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je craignis,
p. craint), to fear.
Order, v. a. 1. to create.
Crier, v. n. 1. to cm
Croire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je crus, p.
cm), to believe.
Croquer, v. a. 1. to eat greedily.
Cuefliir, v. a. ir. 2. to gather, to
pick.
Cultiver, y. a. 1 to euUivaU.
CtirfosiU, n. f. e^HM^f
Cytise, n. m. cytuw.
Dans, pre. in, into.
Dayantage, ady. more.
De, pre. of or from.
Ddbarquer, y. a. A n. 1. t^lemdi
D6border, y. n. 1. to run ever^
Debout, ady. standing.
Ddcapitcr, y. a. 1. to behead.
D^celer, y. a. 1. to discover.
D^chirer, y. a. 1. to tear.
Decision, n. f. decision.
Ddclin, n. m. decline, fall.
D6couvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to discover, imn
cover.
D^daigner, y. a. 1. to disdain.
D6faut, n. m. defect.
Defcndre, y. a. 1. to defend, to foML
Dcfenseur, n. m. defender, protedar,
IMguiser, y. a. 1. to disgviu.
Dejd, adv. already.
Delicat, e, ac^. delicate.
Delicatcment, ady. deUcatdy.
Ddiice, n. m. delight.
Deiices, n. f. pi. ddignts.
Delicieux, se, aclj. deligklful, deh»
cious. ^
Demande, n. f. request, quemon.
Demander, y. a. 1. to ask, to request
Dcmeure, n. f. abode^ dwelUng.
Demon, n. m. demon.
Deniers, n. m. p. money, meafis.
D^ployer, y. a. 1 . to display.
Depuis, pre. since.
D^rangur, v. a. 1. to disturb, to pmi
out of order.
Dernier, e, adj. last, latter.
Ddrober, v. a. 1. to steal, to coneettL
Derviche, n. m. dervise.
D6s, pre. from.
D6sagrcable, adj. disagreeaUe.
D6sarm6, ac^j. v. disarmed.
Descendre, y. n. 4. to desandf i»
come doion. ^
Desert, n. m. desert.
D6sirer, y. a. 1. to wish, desire,
Dcsormais, adv. hcncefoiih.
Des86cher, y. a. 1. t day wp^ i^
drain.
Dessous, ady. un^ter.
Dessus, adv. above,
Desti&6e, n. tfaU.
Digitized
by Google
4S»
OMtlner, r. a. 1. to daOne,
Detacher, t. a. 1. ^ dtUich, to sepa-
rate,
D6truire, r. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Jo d6-
truisifl), to destroy,
Devancer, v. a. 1. /o tnitstrip, to come
before,
Devant, pre. before^ opposite,
Devenir, v. n. 8. to become.
Devoir, v. a. ir. 8. to owe.
Divorer, y. a. 1. to devowr,
IHeii, n. m. Chd,
Digne, a^j. wortky,
Dimlnuer, v. a. 1. to dtsninish.
Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit), to say, tOt,
Disconrir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse.
Discipline, n. f. discipline.
Diapai-aitre, ▼. n. ir. 4. to disappear.
Disperser, v. a. 1. to disperse.
Distance, n. f. distance.
Divers, adj. diverse, different.
Divin, e, a^}. divine.
Doctcur, n. m. doctor.
Dome, n. m. dome,
Don, n. m. gift.
Done, codJ. therefore, then.
Donner, v. a. 1. to give,
Dont, pm. of which, of whom.
Dormir, v. n. ir. 2. to deep.
Doncement, adv. softly, sweetly.
Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness.
Douz, ce, acU- soft, sweet.
Drapeaux, m. p. colors, standards.
Droit, n. m. righi.
Droit, a<y. straight.
Due, n. m. duke,
Dur^, n. f. duration.
Dorer, v. n. 1. to last^ to eiuture.
Eau, n. f. water.
£chapper, v. n. 1. to escape.
§cho, n. m. echo.
Eclairer, v. a. 1, to light.
Eclat, n. m. brightness, splendor,
Edore, y. n. ir. 4. to hatch.
ficonlor (»*), V. r. 1, to elapse, to
pass,
icouter, y. a. 1. to listen, to hear.
eraser, y. a. 1. to crush.
T (8'), y. r. 1. 1» exclaiM,
e, V. a. ir. 4. to writs.
Be, n m. edifiee,
Sflkeer, y. a. to effaa.
Hffyt, n. m. effect.
Bffleurer, y. a. 1. to g.-asse, to tomck
slightly.
Effbrt, n. m. effort, endeavor.
Effhiyer, v. a. l.to frighten, (a') reH
to be frightened.
'figorger, y. a. 1. to daughter, to wmt-
der, to cut the IhroaL
Eh bien ! int. weUl
filever, v. a. 1. to raise.
Embraaser, y. a. 1. to emhraos, to
kiss.
EUe, pm. she, it,
filoquence, n. f. eloquence,
Embellir, v. a. 2. to emMUsh,
EmbUmatique, adj. emUewuUieal,
^migr6, n. &> adj. emigrant.
EmpAcher, v. a. 1. to prevent
Empire, n. m. empire.
Employer, v. a. 1. to mptov, to use
Empreinte, n. f. mark, print.
Emprunter, v. a. 1. to Sorrow,
En, pre. in, intd, at, to.
En, rel. pm. of it, of them, Ac
Encenser, y. a. 1. tojlatier, to adore,
Snchainer, v. a. 1. to chain,
Encbantement, n. m. enchantment^
charm.
Encore, adv. yet, still, agai'n.
Endormir, v. si. ir. 2. to put or luU
to deep, (b*) ref, to go to deep
Endroit, n. m. spot, jMce,
Enfant, n. m. child.
Enfanter, v. a. to produce.
Enfer, n. m. hdl.
Enfin, adv. at last,finaSf.
Enfler, (8')y. r. 1. to swell, to increase,
En^loutir, y. a. 2. to swallow up,
Enivrer, y. a. 1. to intoxicate.
Enlever, y. a. 1. to take or emry
away,
Ennemi, n. m. &• ai^. enemiy, !»•
imical,
Ennuveux, se, a^j* OrtsfffM, weari-
some.
Ensemble, adv. together.
Entraves, n. f. pf. bands, obstadeM^
stocks,
Entrer, v. n. 1. to enter, togeim^
Envers, pre. towards, to.
Bnvoler (s*), y. r. 1, to fly away.
Envoyer, v. a. 1. to send.
fipanner, y. a. 1. to spare.
fipaiue, n. £ shoulder.
Bpoayaater, y. a. 1. tofiieUe%,
Apoax, ae, iL m. db £ *yj0M»tf,«i^
21*
Digitized
by Google
4M
i9-^i»
rk^mA-
fipnitcr, ? a. 1. to exka^ist.
Erreur. ii. f. error.
Esclave, n. m. slave.
Espace, n. m. space.
Bsp^nmce, n. f. hope.
£8p6rer, v. a. 1. to hope.
Esprit, n. m. wit, mind.
Essayer, v. a. 1. to irif, aUempt.
£t, coDJ. and.
fiublir, V. a. 2. to esUtUish.
ft tat, n. m. stale, cendiUon^ trade,
fit6, n. m. summer.
fiteiDdre, y. a. ir. 4. (p. d. J'6tei£;n]s),
to exUnguish^ptU out.
^tendard, n. m. standard.
Ktendne, n. f. exterU.
fiterael, le, adj. & n. eternal.
fitonner, v. a. 1. to astonisk.
Ktourdir, v. a. 2. to sftm, to <ets«fir5.
Etre, V. auz. & n. ir. 4. (ind. p. Je
suis, p. d. Je ftis), to Ac.
£tre, B. m. teing^
£urop6en, ne, n. dt^a^]. Ewropean.
' Eux, pm. m. pi. them.
jfiveiller, ▼. a. 1. to aieake.
£yiter, r. a. 1. to avouf.
Ezactement, adv. e2ȣ%.
Examiner, v. a. 1. to examine.
Excellent, e, a^j. exceUent.
Excessif, ve, adj. excessive.
Exciter, y. a. 1. to excite.
Exemple, n. m. example.
ExiI6, n. m. &> a^j. eaale, exiled.
Expirant, a^. v. expiring^ dying.
Expirer, v. n. 1. to eo^rire.
Ext^riear, n. m. outside, exterior,
Extdrienr, e, stdj. exterior.
Extr6mife6, a f. extremitf.
F&ch6, e, a4J. ▼. angry, sorry.
Fa9on, n. f. fashion, vfay.
Faction, n. {.faction, walch.
Faible, a<y. weak, feeble.
Faim, n. f. hunger.
Faire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Je fls), to
make, to do, to cause.
Falloir, v. unip; ir. 8. (ind. p. il
fant), to be necessary.
Famllle, n. f. family.
Faroe, n. t farce, trick.
Faronche, a^j. wild, stem.
Fatigue, n. t fatigue, wet
Fanawment^ adr. falml^.
Fanx, se, md^. false.
Felicito, n. f. happmess, feHettf,
Femme, n. f. woman, wife,
Fers, n. m. pi. chains, irons.
Fertile, adj. fnUlful, fertile.
Feu, n. m.jlre.
Feuillage, n. m. foliage.
Feuille, n. f. leaf.
Festin, n. m. sumpt/uous meal, rtpmei
Fiddle, n. m. & s^.faiihffU.
Fier, e, acU- proud, formidable,
Fier (se), v. r. 1. to trust, to cot^/Ue.
Fille, n. f. daughter, girl.
FOs, n. m. 'son.
Flatterie, n. t flattery.
Flean, n. m. scourge.
Fldtrir, v. a. & n. 2. to fade, wOkm,
FleQr,n. t flower.
Fleuve, n. m. river, stream..
Flotter, Y. n. 1. tojloat, to vmve.
Foi, n. f. faith.
Fois, n. {. time.
Folie, n. f.foUy.
Fond, n. m. bottom.
Fonder, y. a. 1. to found.
Fontaine, n. t. fountain, spring.
Force, n. f. strength, force.
Fordt, n. f. forest, wood.
Former, y. a. 1. to form.
Fort, e, adj. strong.
Fortune, a t. fortune.
Fondre, n. f, thunderbolt.
Fon, foUe, acy. & n. m. & f. foeiL^
foolish.
Fouler, y. a. 1. to tread underfoot.
Foyer, n. m. hearth.
Foyers, n. m. pi. hearth, home, ne^
live country.
Franchement, sAy. frankly.
Franchir, y. a. 2. to step over, topmx
over.
Frapper. y. a. 1. to strike.
FratemiU, n. f. brotherhood.
Froid, n. m. cold.
Fromage, n. m. cheese.
Front, n. m.fi»rekead, brew.
Fruit, n. m. fruit.
Fugitif, ve, 9^^^. fugUioe,
Fuite, n. f. flight.
Fumer, v. n. & a. 1. to j
Fnsil, n. m. gun.
G.
Gagner, v. a. 1. to «!», gedm.
Digitized
by Google
•A-«0.
Bo-n;.
49t
Ckrde, n. f. guaird, wtUck, cart.
Git6, adj. T. spoiied,
GtjMe, n. i. frost.
G^niir, v. n. 2. to moan^ groan,
Qen^ral. n. m. & adj. general,
G6n^ratioQ, n. f. ^etieratum,
G6Die. n. m. genius,
QcDou, n. m. knee.
Gens, n, pi. people,
Gcstes, n. m. pi. gestures.
Glace, n. f. ice, l4foking'glass.
Glaneur, n. m. gleaner.
Globe, n. dl gii^.
Gloire, n. f. glory.
Olorifier, v. a. 1. to gl^fyt praise,
Goutte, XL f. drop.
Gouverner, v. a. 1. to govern.
Grftoes, a f. pK graces, thanks.
Graine, n. f. ftuw.
Grand, e, a^]. great, large.
Grandir, v. n. 2. to grow.
Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces.
Groiider, v. a. &. n. I. to scold, to
roar.
Gros, se, a<y. large.
Grossier, e, aiy. coarse.
Grue, n. f. crane,
Gufere, adv. but HtOe, but few.
Gaerre, n. f. war.
Guerrier, n. m. warrior.
Guide, n. m. guide.
H.
Habitant, n. m. inhabitant,
Habiter, ▼. a. 1. to inhabit,
Habituel, le, a^j. usuid, kahitual.
Hache, n. f. axe.
Hatnean, n. m. hamtet.
Haraiigueur, n. m. orator,
Hardtesse, n. f. boldness,
Hardiment, adv. boldly,
Harpe, n. f. harp.
Hasard, d. m. ckanxx.
Hauteur, n. f height, haughtiness.
Herbe, n. f. herb, grass.
Heros, n. m. hero. «
Heure, n. f. hour.
Heritage, n. m. inhetitance, property.
Heureuz, se, a^. happy, fortwuUe.
Hibou. n. m. owl.
Hirondelle, n. f. swaUaw.
Hirer, n. m. witUer.
Homme, n. m. man.
UcfODAie, a4). ktmest, peUte,
Honneur, n. m. hmor,
Honto, n. f. sha$ne.
Horde, n. f. horde, troop,
Huissier, n. m. doorkeeper, oitendMU^
Humaiu, e, a^j. human, hiaiume,
Humblement. adv. humbly.
Uole,Ji.f. idol,
Icnoble, adj. mean, low, debatittg.
II, lis, pm. he, U, they.
Image, n. f. image, resemtbianee.
Imiter, v. a. 1. to imitate.
Immense, atQ. immense, vast,
Immortcl, le, a^. immertaL
Imp6nitent, aclj. impenitent, rtmira^
pending.
Importun, e, a^j- impvitunaJU, (ro%'
Impur, e, a<y. impure.
Incomparable, adj. ine^mpmrabk,
matchless.
Inconnu, e, a<y. unknown.
Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant^
changeable.
Indi(^uer, v. a. 1. to indicate^ tc
point out.
Industrie, n. f. industry.
Infatigable, a^j. indefatigaNe, imi»
tiring.
Infernal, e, a^J. infernal.
Inflexible, a^j. vnfiexUfU^ unbend
ing.
higifinieaz, se, adl). ingenious, .
Ingrat, e, adj. & n. ungratefui.
Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude.
Innocence, n. f. innocence.
Inscrire, v. a. ir. 4. to inscribe,
Insecte, n. m. is^sect.
Insensibility, n. f. insensibility.
Inspirer, v. a. 1. to inspire.
Instant, n. m. instant, momerU.
Intention, n. f. interUion, meaning,
Intirieur, e, adj. & n. interior, in*
side,
Interrompre, v. a. ir. 4. to tntof-
rupt.
Intime, acU. intivuUe, dose.
IntituU, a^. v. entitled, caUed.
Intrepide, adj. intrepid.
Introduiro, v, a. Ir. 4. (pi d. J'lntro*
duisis), / ) introduce,
Ivrease, n. f. UUoaicatwi^ ceecnlw
Digitized
by Google
4V%
lAHU.
Jamais, adv. never.
Jardin, n. m. garden.
Jaseur, se, D. m. & f. talker, ffrat-
tier.
JeJ', prn. /.
Jeter, v. a. 1. <« <*«w, cajf.
Jcunesae, n. f. youth.
Joie, n. f. ;(»y.
Joindre, v. a. ir. 4. CP- d. je j.')igri»,
p. joint), to join, to ccnfieU, to add,
Joli, e, a4i. pretty.
Jouet, n. m. piaytkin^, tport.
Joag, n: m. yoke, suMeclion.
Jour, n. m. day, lig/u.
Journ6e, n. f. dutf, day's toork.
Joyeux, se, acU. joyftU, glad.
Jugo, n. m. jtLdge.
Jugement, n. in. judgment, deciian.
Juger, V. a. 1. to judge, to decide.
Jorer, ▼. a. d& n. 1. to swear, tcpromise.
Josqne, pre. as far, as far as.
Juste, a4i. &ii..^.
Justice, D.f.j«4to.
La, r, art the.
La, r, pm. her, U.
La, adv. there; la-bas, y<m<fcr.
Laboureur, n. m. hu^bandMan,
Lac,am. ^«. , , ^
Lac^icr, V. a. 1. to toaje ludd of, to
let go.
Laid, e, a^j. ugly.
Laine, n. f. «woi.
Laisser, v. a. 1. to foav^, to /^^
Lait, n. m. mxLk.
Lambris, n. m. wainscot.
Lampe, n. f. lamp.
Lancer, v: a. 1. to dart, to send forth
vnth violence, to launch.
Limgue, n. f. tongue, language.
' Laurier, n. m. la^urel.
Le, 1', lea, art. the.
Le, ivies, pro- ^^ ^^^^'
Uger, e, a<y. Ught.
Lendemain, n. m. next day, morrow.
Lea, art. pi. the, les, pm. them.
Leur, a^j. pi. their.
Leur, pm. to them.
Lever, r. a. 1. to raise, Xae) v. r. to
rte, to «rutf.
Lever, n. m. rising.
Libert^, n. f. liberiy,/mdmk
Libre, adi.free.
Lien, n. m. place, spot.
Lion, n. m. lion.
Liqueur, n. f. liquor, Mpnid.
Livre, a m. book.
Loi, n. f. tou7.
Loin, adv./ar.
Lointain, e, adj. remoUj
Long, ue, aclj. /wij?.
Long-temps, adv. long, long
Loup, n. m. wolf.
Lufubre, acy. mournful, sad.
Lui, pm. to him, to her.
Lumidre, n. f. light.
Lvtnsttes, n. f. pL ^^ectacles.
Lutter, V. n. 1. to conUnd wUk, U
wrestle.
M.
Ma, «4j. {^. t m/y.
Machine, n. t machine.
Magnan5mo, a.-y. magnanimaui.
Ma|;niiicenoe, n. f. vtagnificenee.
Mam, n. f. hand.
Maintenir, v. a. ir. 2^ (ind. p. Jt
maintiens, p. d. je maintiDs), to
maintain.
Mais, coi\j. but.
Maison, n. f. house.
Maitre, n. m. master.
Mai, n. m. evil, adv. badly.
Malade, n. & a^. patient, sick.
Mile, adj. manly, dignified.
Malgr6, pre. in spite of.
Malice, n. f. cunning, mtUce.
Malin, gne, adj. sarcastic, dy.
Manant, n. m. peasant, down.
Manger, v. a. 1. to eat.
Manifester, v. a. 1. to mamfesi, to t*9»
tify, to show.
Manquer v. a, ft n. 1. to miss, to faU
Marge, n. £ margin.
Marque, n. f. mark.
Marsiullaise, n. f. MarseiUaift .^ymn
Matelot, n. m. sailor.
Matidre, n. f. matter.
Mauvais, e, adj. bad.
Me, pm. me, to me.
M61odieux, ae, adj. melodious.
M6me, a^j. &> adv. same^ sdf, r
Menacer, v. a. 1. to threaten.
Mendiant, n. m. beggtr.
Digitized
by Google
VA-^yr.
If cner, t. a. to Uad^ to lake,
MensoDgfe, n. m.faUehood,
Meotir, v. n. ir. Z to He^ to tell a
falsehood.
Menu, e, acy. mall, short.
Mepris, n. m. c'tUempt. • .
Aldpriscr, y. a. 1. to despise,
Mer. n. f. sea.
Mercenaire, adi. mercenaey.
Mdre, n. f. mother,
M6rite, n. m. jnerU.
M6riter, v. a. i.to merit, to deserve.
Mes, acU. pos. pi. my.
Mesurer, v. a. 1. to meayitre.
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation.
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets,
p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to
set
Menbler, v. a. 1. to furnish, •
Midi. n. m, south, noon,
Mignon, ne, acU. delicate, pretty.
Milieu, n. m. middle.
Millo, acy. num. thousand.
Ministre, n. m. minister.
Mobile, adj. mova^, light.
Modesto, adij. modest:
Moenrs, n. f. pi. morals, manners.
Moi, pij). me.
Moindre, a^J. lesser, less.
Moins, adv. less, (au) at least.
Mois, n. m. month.
Moissonncur, n. m. harvest-man,
reaper.
Moment, n. m. momeTU.
Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le)
everybody.
Monnaie, n. f. money, change.
Monstre, n. m. monster.
Montagnard, n. m. mountatrieer.
Montagne, n. f. m4funtain.
Monter, v. a. dt- n. 1. to ascend, to
mount.
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point
out.
Monument, n. m. monument,
Moquer (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to
mock.
Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel.
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead.
Mosqu6e, n. f. Tnosque.
Mot, n. m. word.
Mouche, n. f.Jly.
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die.
Bf outon, n. m. sheep.
Mngir, v. n. 2. to roa/r.
liyiUrienx, a4}. mysteriom.
N.
Naif, ve, a^). arilest tmafieted,
simple, innocent,
Naissance, n. f. birth.
Naissant, e, adj. v. rislr^g, growing,
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. ie sa»,
p. d. je naquis, p, d6), to be tarn
Nation, n. f. TuUion.
Navire, n. m. ship, vessel.
Tfle, adv. not.
N6, p. bonh.
Ne — pas, adv. not.
Ne — que, adv. orUy, but,
Ndant, n. m. nothingness.
Ni, conj. nor, neither.
Nocturne, adij. nocturnal, nighJOy.
Noisette, n. f. hazeUnut,
Nombre, n. m. number,
Nommer, v. a. 1. to name, to ceM.
Nou, adv. 9147.
Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed; to nowish.
Nouveau, nouvel, n^uvelle, a4|.
new.
Nonvelle, n. f. news.
O.
Ob6ir, V. n. 2. to obey.
Obscur, Q| a4). dark, obscure.
Obsierver, v. a. 1. to observe, to tale
notice of,
Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (Ind. p. j'ob-
tiens, p. d. j*obtin»), to obtain.
Odieux, se, a^. odious, haJtefid.
Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes.
Oiseau, n. m. bird.
Ombrage, n. m. shade.
Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shade^ to shelter.
Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow.
On, pm. indefinite, one, they, im,
people ; on dit, il is said {one says).
Onde, n. f. wave, water.
Opprim6, adj. v. oppressed.
Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame
Opulent, e, acy. rich, wealthy .
Or, n. m. gold.
Orage, n. m. storm,
Ordmairement, adv. commenbf,
Ordre, n. m. order.
Oreille, n. f. ear.
Orgueil, n. m. pride,
Qrphelio, e, n. m. & f. orphans
6ter, T. a. 1. to take m^, to 4^
of.
Digitized
by Google
4M
0V-4«.
Ou, cwij. or.
(W, wU. wktrt, in wAiM, MiihertVh
Oublier, ▼. a. 1. to forget, to nerlea.
Outrage, n. m. oiUrage'^offence^ shame.
' Ouverture. n. f. &pening.
Ouvrage, n. m. rcork.
Oavrier, n. ni. workman.
P.
Paitre, v. a. & n. 4. to graze,
Paix, n. f. peace,
Palais, n. m. palace.
Par, pre. by.
Paraitre, v. n. Ir. 4, (p. ^vi), to ap-
pear.
Parcoiirir, v. a. ir. 2. to travel over^
to croxs, to look over.
Paretl, le, 9Ai. equal, similar.
Parer (se), v. r. 1. to adorn one*s
self,
Paresseux, ae, a6j. uUe^ lazy^ indo-
lent.
Parler, ▼. n. 1. to speak,
Parmi, pre. among^ amongst.
Parole, n. f. word.
Parricide, adj. parricidal.
Parti, n. m. part^ party, resolution.
Partir, v. n. ir. 2. to set otU, to leave^
to depart. • •
Partoat, adv. everywhere.
Parvenu, adj. v. (used as a noun),
upstart.
Pas, adv. not., n. m. step^ pace.
Passer, v. n. 1. to pass.
Passereaa, n. m. sparrow.
Passion, n. f. passion.
Patre, n. m. herdsman, shepherd,
Patrie, n. f. eount/ry^ TuUive country,
Patte. n. f. paw,
Pfituraf e, n. m. pasture, pasturage.
Pays, n. m. coimtry.
Paysan, n. m. pe:asant, countryman.
Peage, n. m. toll.
Peau, n. f. skin,
Peindre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je peins,
p. d. je peignis), to /Miin^, describe.
Peine, n. f. IrovbU, pain.
Peine (a), adv. hardly, scarcely.
Penible, adj. laborious, painful.
Pendant, pre. during.
Pendre, v. a. 4. to hang.
Penetration, n. f. penetration,
P6n6trer, v. a. 1. to penetraU,
Penaer, v. n. 1. to thbnk.
», n. m. fax
Perfide, adj. perfidious, trmekerwm,
Perdre, v. a. 4. to lose,
Permettre', v. a. ir. 4. to permUfmk
low.
Perroquet, n. m. parrot,
Personne, pm. ind. nobody,
Pervers, ac^j. perverse.
Petit, e, adj. smaU, lUtie.
Pesant, a^. v. heavy,
Peu, adv. little.
Peuple, n. m. people,
Peupler, v. a. 1. to people.
Phalange, n. m. phalanx,
Philosophie, n. f. philosophy.
Phrase, n. f. phrase, sentence,
Pi6ce, n. f. piece.
Pied, n. m.foot,
Pidge^n. m. trap, snare.
Pis, adv. worse, tant pis, so meuk ike
worse.
Piti6, n. f. pity.
Place, n. f. place, spot.
Placer, v. a. 1. topiaoe.
Plafond, n. m. ceiling.
Plage, n. f. shore, betuh.
Plaindre (se), v. r. ir. (ind. p. Je bm
plains, p. d. Je me plaigiii8)| to
complain.
Plaine, n. f. plain.
Plaire, v. n. ir. 4. (p. d. Je plos, p.
pin), to please.
Plaisant, n. m. wag, joker.
Pleiu, e, acy./tt/i, open.
Pieurer, v. a. & n. 1. to weep, to
motim.
Plier, V. a. 1. to bow, to bend.
Plnie, n. f. rain.
Plume, n. f. feather, pen.
Plupart (la), n. col. the most, whmL
Plus, adv. more.
Plusieurs, a^j. several.
Point, n. m. poijU, adv. not,
Poisson, n. m. fish.
Pole, n. m. pole.
Poll, e. adj. polite, polished,
Politesse, n. f. poliieness.
Porphyre; n. m. porphyry.
Port, n. m. port.
Porter, v. a. 1. to carry, to bear,
Portique, n. m. portico.
Poser, V. a. 1. to lay, tt set,to \
Poss6der, v. a. 1. to possess.
Possible, adj. possible.
Poteau, n. m. ftolv, posu
Pour, pn. for.
Digitized
by Google
«iO~B«»
4»<»
Pomnet, y. a. 1. (d jm«*, to Aoiton.
Ponvolr, V. a ir. (ind. p. je puto, p.
d. Je pus, p. pui to be able.
Prairie, n. f. meadow,
Pr^alablement, adr. previously.
Pr^cipiter, v, a. 1. to hasten^ prectpi-
tote.
Pr6fi5rer, v. a. 1. to prrfer.
Pr61iminaire,B. & ac(j. preliminary.
Premier, e, acy. fira.
Prendre., v. a. if. 4. (p. d. je pris, p.
pris), to take, (s'y) ref. to go abotU
it, to ope% the maUer,
Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare.
Prds de, pre. near, nearly.
Pr€sidentj n. m. president.
Presence, n. f. presence.
Present, n. m. present.
Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to present
one's self.
.Presqne, adv. almo^.
Presser, v. a. & r. (se) to hasten, to
press.
Prdt, o, adj. ready, prepared.
Prier, v. a. & n. 1: to prof, to entreat.
Pri6re, n. f. prwer.
Prince, n. m. pn.iee.
Printemps, n. m. spring.
Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner.
Prix, n. m. price, prize.
Produire, r. a. ir. 4. to produce.
Prof^Srer, v. a. 1. to niter, to speak.
Profession, n. f. ^ofessum.
Projet, n. m. project.
Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about.
Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce.
Protestation, n. f. protest^ protesta-
tion.
Pjovince, n. f. province, district.
Publier, r. a. 1. to pubUsh.
Puis, adv. then.
Puiser, y. a. 1. to dip, to find.
Paisque, coi\). since.
Puissance, n. f. power.
Puissant, e. acU. powerful.
Quand, adv. when.
Quatre, a<y. num. /<mr.
Qu', que, conj. that, pm. which,
whom.
Quel, adj. what, which.
Quelque, acy. some, ady. however.
Qnelqne chosei n. m. sometkhig.
Quelquefois, ady.
Qui, pm. who, xohick.
Quoi, pm. which, what.
Quoi ! int. what J
Quoiqne, conj. although, thougK
Radotenr, se, n. m. &l f. dotard,
Raison, n. f. reason, right.
Bamasser, y. a. 1. to jnck up,to cdU
led.
Rameau, n. m. branch.
Rappelcr, y. a. 1. to recaU, to f«-
mifhd, (se) y. r. to remember, to
recoUeet.
Rapporter, y. a. 1. to bring back, to
relate.
Rapprocher, y. a. 1. to briTig ntm
or together.
Rarement, ady. rarely, -seldom.
Rassembler, y. a. 1. to coUeet, to
• bring together,
Rassurer (se), y. r. 1. to ttske amt-
age, to cheer up, to settle.
Recevoir, y. a. 3. to receive.
Rechign*, a<y. gruff, awkward, re-
pulsive.
Ricipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one
chosen to a post.
Reconnattre, y. a. ir. 4. to recognixe^
know again.
Redire, y. a. ir. to say again, rw'
peat.
Redoutd, a^j. y. dreaded, feared.
R6duire, y. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Je rftdnl-
sis), to reduce, to compel.
R^ellement, ady. really.
Refuge, n. m. refuge, asi
Reiltser, y. a. 1. to refuse.
Regard, n. m. look.
Rcgistre, n. m. register, book.
R6gner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevaU.
Regret, n. m. regret.
Reine, n. f. queen.
Religion, n. f. religion.
Relever, y. a. 1. to raise again.
Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em*
bossed.
Remerciment, n. m. thank.
Remettro, y. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Je ra-
xnis, p. remis), to replace, to gim^
to hand, to deUver.
RempUr, y. a. 2. tofiU, tofulfiL
Remuer, y. a. 1. to move, to iMr.
Digitized
by Google
40«
BB-BX.
Benccntrer, t. a. 1. to med,
Bondre, y. a. 4. t<» render^ to return^
to give dock,
Ben&rmer, y. a. to inebsej to eon-
tain.
Ronomni6e, n. tfame, report.
Renvoyer, y. a. ir. 1. to send back^
to send again.
E6pandre, y. a. 4. to spread^ spill^
' shed.
Repas, n« m. repast^ meal.
Bepentir (se), y. r. to repent,
R6p6ter, y. a. 1. to repeat.
Rcpliquer, y. a. 1. to reply.
Replonger, y. a. 1. plunge^ or cast
again.
R^pondre, y. a. 4. to answer^ reply.
Rdponse, n. f. reply.
Reproduire, y. a. ir/4. to reproduce.
Reptile, n. m. reptiU.
R^publicain, n. & a^. republican,
R^serYer, y. a. 1. to reserve j to keep.
R6Bister, y. n. 1. to resist.
R6soadre, y. a. & n. ir. 4. (p. d. jo
r6solus, p. r^solu), to resolve^ to
decide,
Ressemblance, n. f. resernblance,
likeness,
Re8te, n. m. rest, remainder, remnant:
Reate (de), adY. sufficiently, f^y^
besides.
Rester, y. n. 1. to remain, to dwell.
Retentir, y. n. 2. to resound,
Reteiitiasant, ad), y. resovmding.
Retirer (»e), y. r. 1. to retire, with^
draw.
Retour, n. m. return,
Retounier, y. n. 1. to return, to go
back.
R6tt8sir, Y. D. 1. to succeed.
R^Yeil, n. m. act ofawaJcing,
RdYciller (se), y. r. 1. to awake.
Bevenir, y. n. ir. 2. to return' come
back,
RdYer, Y. n. 1. to dream, to think.
Revers, n. m. reverse, lerong side.
Revdtir, y. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. jo re-
YAta), to clatke, invest,
Revoir, y. a. Ir. (p. reyu), to see
again.
Riant, a^. y. laugHng, smiling,
pleasant, cheerful.
Rfche, adJ. rich, wealthy.
Ridicule, n. m. ridicule, adj. ridicu-
lous,
Ridioalement, adv. HdicuUmOy,
Rfen, adY. notktng.
Rite, n. m. rite.
Riyage, n. m. banik. shore,
RiYe, n. f. bank, shore,
Rire, y. n ir. 4. (ind. p. ]e rii, p
ri\ to laugh.
Rocuer, n. m. rock.
Roi, n. m. king.
Rose, n. f. rose,
Roseau, n. m. reed,
Roe6e, n. f. dew.
Route, n. f. road, way, patk,
Roulement, n. m. rouing.
Rouler, y. a. 1. to roll.
Royal, c, adj. royal, kingly^
Rumeur, n. f. rumor, r^ort, i
SL
Sa, adj. p068. f. his, her, its.
Sable, n. m. sand.
Sac, n. m. sack, bag.
Sacr6, e, acy. sacred, holy.
Sage, a^j. wise, good.
Sagesse, n. f. vrisdom.
Sain, e, adi. healthy, whoUtomt,
Saint, e, aqj. holy,
Saison, n. f season,
Salle, n. £ hall, parlor, room,
Salut I int Hail! goodhukt
Sang, n. m. blood,
Sanguinaire, adj. bloodthirsty, SMi
guinary.
Sanglant, e, adj. bleeding, Uoodf,
Sans, pre. without,
Sant6, n. f. health.
SauYage, adj. wild, savage.
Sayant, acy. d& n. m. leartud, leomck
man.
Sayoir, y a. ir. 8. (ind. p. je aaia, p
d. je BUS, p. su), to krufw.
Science, n. f. knowledge, scienes*
Scier, y. a. 3. to WW.
Se, pm. him, her, himseU, kettdf.
Seigneur, n. m. Lord,
Sein, n. m. bosom.
Selon, pre. according to,
Semblcr, y. n. & unip. 1. to Mm, k
appear.
Semence, n. f. Kcd.
Semer, y. a. 1 . to sow, So scatter.
Sentiment, n. m. .sentiment, thougH
Sentinelle, n. f. sinUnd.
Sentir, y. a. ir. 2 (ind. p Ja mm\
to feel, smeU.
Digitized
by Google
4gf
Wnpiiiii| II. in. ttnpkitiL
Berpolet, n. m. vUd thfmt,
8erva^, n. m. bondagt,
Servir, y. a. & n. (ind. p. Je len), to
serve f to be uted.
Senitude, n. f. servitude, donmy,
Ses, adj. pos. pi. his, her, its.
Seuil, n. m. threshold, door*step, siU.
8i, codJ. if, adv. so.
8idcle, n. m. a^e, Ume, ceniury.
Bigne, n. m. sign.
Signer, v. a. 1. to sign.
Silence, n. m. silence,
Silcncieux, w, a^. silenl, not loqua-^
cious.
Snion, JL m,fiim>w.
Simple, adj. simple.
Singe, n. m. ape, monkey.
Sinneux, se, a^j. sinuous, winding.
Situation, n. f. situation,
Soigneuz, se, adi. carefid,
Soi-mAme, prn. hmsdf, one's se^,
Soin, n. m. care,
Soir, n. m. evening,
Soldat, n. m. sold&r.
Soleil, n. m. sun,
Solide. a4|. strong, solid.
Solitude, n. f. soUlude.
Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad.
Sommeil, n. m. sleep.
Sommet, n. m. summU, top, pinnade.
Son, u. m. sound.
Son, adi. V^' ^- >• ^^t ^t ^*
Songer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think,
Sonner, v. n. 1. to ring.
Sort, n. m. lot, f ale.
Sorte, n. f. kind, de sorte, adv. so
that,
Sortir, T. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. Je tors),
logo out.
Sot, sotte, n. & h^i. fool, foolish.
Sottise, n. f. nonsense.
Soudidn, e, adj. sudden, unexpected,
adv. suddenly.
Souffle, n. m, breath, wind.
SouffHr, V. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear.
Souhaiter, y. a. 1. to wish, to desire.
Soulier, n. m. shoe.
SoQpconner, y. a. 1. to suspect.
Souplesse, n. f. suppleness, docHily.
Sourd, e, adj. deaf.
Sous, pro. under.
Soutcnir, y. a. ir. 8. (ind. Je son-
tiens), to sustain, to support, to
bear, to maintain^
floutieii, n. m. support.
Sonyviiaiice, n. f. rttumkremm, to
collection.
Souyenir, a m. remembrance, rsosU
lection.
Souyimir (se), y. r. Ir. 2. (ind. p. Je me
souviens), to remember, recoJest.
Souvent, adv. often.
Spirale (ei^, winding.
Splendeur, n. f. briUtaney, splendor,
Statut, n. m. statute.
Stratagdme, n. m. stratagem, trick,
Stupide, acU. stupid, silly.
Saccomber, y. n. 1. to fall.
Sui?re, y. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. Je snk),
tofailow.
S^Jet, adj. & n. subject.
Superbe, acy- proud, stiperb, mag^
nificent.
QAr, e, b/^. sure, certain, safe,
Snr, pre. on, upon.
Sur-le-champ, ady. immediatety.
Surface, n. f. surface.
Snmumiraire, adj. supemumerarf,
Snrpasser, y. a. 1. to surpass.
Surprendre, y. a. ir. 4. (p. d. Je fur-
pris, p. surpris), to surprise.
Surpris, e, adj. y. surprised,
Surtout, ady. above aU.
Surveillance, n. f. waUh, care.
Symbol, n. m. symbol.
Sycomore, n. m. sycamore,
Sympathie, n. f. sympathy.
Ablean, a m. m^, picture,
Tichcr, y. n. 1. to endeavor, to try,
Tailler, y. sl. I. to cut, to shape.
Talent, n. m. talent,
Tandis, adv. while.
Tanner, y. a. 1. to tan.
Tant, adv. so much. ,
Tant mienx, ady. so much the better
Tant piB, adv. so much the worse,
Tard, adv. late,
Te, prn. thee.
Tel, telle, a4{. such.
Tcmp6r6, e, a^i- temperate.
Temp^te, n. t tempest.
Temps, n. m. time, weather.
Tendre, adj. tender, kind.
Tenir, y. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. Je tieoi, p.
d.Jetin8, p. tenu), toAo/tf.
Tenter, y. a. 1. to tempt, to ( '
to try.
Digitized
by Google
AM
Tenae, n. m. term, tnd^ exprtssion,
TerriAser, v. a. 1. to throw dow%,
Terre, n. f. fand, earik.
Ten cur, n. f.fear, terror.
Temble, adj. terrihU,
TAte, iL f. head,
Thym, n. m. tkifme,
Tige, n. f. staUc, stem,
Tigre, n. m. tiger,
Tirer, v. a. 1. mt araiff to extract, to
Jlre^ to shoot,
Toison, II. f./leece.
Toll, n. m. roof.
Toniber, v. n. 1. to fall.
Toanerre, n. m. thunder.
Tort, n. m. yB\'ong.
Toucher, \.%,\.to touch,
Toujoars, adv. always.
Tonr, n. f. tower.
Tour, n. m. tricky turn.
Toarmenter, ▼. a. 1. te tormeni, to
tease,
Toamer, v. m. 1 . to t/wm.
Tout, e, adj. aU; every.
Tout, adv. erJirehj, pvUe.
Tracer, t. a. 1. to trace^ to mark.
Trahir, ▼. a. 2. to betray.
Trait, n. vti.fuUure, traU, arrow,
Traitement, n. m. ireatrnfttU.
Traitre, n. m. & a^i. trailor, treacher-
ous.
Trame, n. f. woof, plol,
Tranquille, acU. qiiet^ tranquil.
Tranquillem3nt, adv. quietly, Iran-
quilly.
TraDS|K>rt, n. m. transport^ carriage.
Travail, n. m, work, labor.
Travers (a), pre. through, across.
Trembler, v. n. 1. to tremble, shudr
der,
Trfts, adv. very.
Tr6sor, n. m. treasure,
Tribu, n. f. tribe.
'Triomphe, n. m. triumph.
Triste, adj. sad, sorrowful.
Trois, acy. num. three.
Trone, n. m. throne.
' Trop, adv. too much, too many.
Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, dis-
turbance.
Troupean, n. m. flock, herd.
Trouver, v. a. 1. to fiitd, (se) v. r.
to happen to be, to be present, to
appear,
Tuer, v. a. 1. to kill, day.
Tyrannie, n. f. tyranny,*
U.
Un, one, adj. num. ont, «, am.
Univers, n. m. universe.
Usage, n. m. custom, use.
Usurper, ▼. a. 1. to usurp.
Utile, a4j. useful.
Vacant, e, a^j. ffocant, unoccupied^
Yache, n. f. cow.
Va^e, n; f. wave, bUlow,
Vain, e, acU. vain.
Vaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. j^ Taiiiot.
p. d. je vainqnia, p. vaioca), t$
vanquish, to conquer, to, overcomt.
Vaisaeaa, n. m. vessd, sh^.
Vallon, n. m. valUy, vale,
Valoir, v. n. ir. 8. (ind. je vaBZ, pi
d. Je valus), to be worth.
Vanit6, n. f. vanity,
Vanneur, n. m. winnower,
Vanter (se), v. r. to boast.
Vaquer, v. unip. &,n. to be vacam
Vase, n. m. vase, vessel,
Vaste, adj. vast,
Vengear, n. m. avenger,
Venir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. Je jkaM, p
d. je Tins), to came.
Vent, n. m. wind.
Verger, n. m. orchard.
V6rit6, n. f. truth.
Vermeil, n. m. silver gilded.
Vers, pre. towards.
Vert, wdj. green.
Vertueux, se, adj. virtuous,
Vdtcment, n. m. garment.
VAtir, V. a. ir. 2. to clMhe.
Vice, n. m. vice,
Victime, n. f. victim.
Vide, a^j. empty, n. m. em^ space.
Vie, n. f. life.
Vieux, vieil, vieille, a^i- old, amtk
qiLoted.
Vif, ve, adj. lively, quick.
Vigilance, n. f. vigilance.
Vil, c, adj. vile, mean, low.
Village, n. m. village.
Villo, n. f. Umm, city.
Virilement, adv. manfuOiy,
geoudy,
Visir, n. m. vizier.
Visiter, v. a. 1. to vidi,
Vivacit6, n f» vivadkit.
Digitized
by Google
4M
Vivre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p.
d. jo v6cua, p. T6cn), to live.
Voeu, n. m. vow, vnsh,
Voici, pre. here is, Utis i$.
Voila, pre. there is, that is.
Voler, V. u. 1. to fly, v. a. 1. to sUal.
Voir, V. a. ir. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), to
see, to perceive.
Voisin, n. m. neighbor.
Voix, n. f . voice,
Vorace, a^. greedy, voracious.
Vos, a4j. pos. pi. your,
Votre, adj. p. your.
Vouloir, V. a. &l n. ir. 8. (ind. p. je
veux, p. d. je touIiui, p. Tonla),
to wish, to be willing.
Vous, pm. yaii,
Voiite, n. £ vauU, arch.
^foptgfST, T. B. 1; to trmsd.
Vrai, e, adj. tru€.
Vraiment, adv. trvly,
Vae, n. f. view, sight.
Y, adv. there.
Y, pm. to it, to their., §UU,at t4«m,
in it, in ihem.
Y avoir, v. wiip. fl y a, there is,
there are; 11 y a un aD, a year
ago.
Teax, n. m. p. (plural of ceil), ryes.
Zephyr, n. m. Ught wind^ *tpmfr
Z6ro. a. m. xtro^ futMghk
Digitized
by Google
■^ ■>■»•■■■■» »w>ww*»»»»»»»»»»»»**»>w»»—»**»»*»»**»*»i^»»»*»»<^»<*« 4
PUBUBHED BT lYISON AND PHmKET, NSW TOBK.
GERMAN.
0)tbnrs's CffmifUtt ^ttmnn Sittitt. \
L WOODBURTS NEW METHOD WITH
GemuuL |1 6a
IL WOODBURTS SHOBTER C50URSE WITH
GemuuL 76 cento.
DL KEY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER' CJOTJRSK
60centoL
IV. WOODBURTS ELEMENTARY GERMAN
Reader. 76 cents.
V. "WOODBURY'S ECLECTIC GEBMAN
Bflad«r. $1.
VL WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND
English-Qemun Reader. 26 eenti.
Vn. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER-
mans to Learn English ; or, Neue Metb'^de zur Erlemung der
Englitichen Sprache. $1.
Vm. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A
New and Complete American Dictionary of the 'Englialf and
German LangaageSi with the Pronunciation and AecentttatiMi
according to the method of Webster and Heinsins. Bj Wdl
Odell Elwell. New SUreo. Edition. |1 60.
The attention of thoM Interested In the itudy of German It specially InTited to the
seroral works eomposini^ IhU i»eries.
t They have been subjected to n rigid examination on the part of the most com-
} petent Judves, and rnlly tested in the clasR-niom by the most able teachers. Siicli, in-
I deed. Is the favor everywhere accorded to them by those fully oonversant with Iho
German tongue, and such uniformly their efflciencv In Iho band of the sludonL, as to
Jostlty tho ntmoat ei>nfkieooe In commomling U^m as forming decidedly the bert
Germaa Goune erer yet offered to the public
»»*>»»»»^^ »»,,., >■>>» *.«»%*»>»»»»%>»» ■ >%»i.>^
61 .
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
PUBUSHSD BT ITISOK AKD PHINKET, NSW YORK.
WOODBUBT'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES.
I. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD WITH THE
German Langnage; einbracin|^ both the Analytic and Syn-
tiietie Modes of Instrnction ; being a plain and pracUoal tray
of acquiring the art of Reading, Speaking and Compoeing Ger*
man ; containing likewise a cnoice selection both of PMe and
Poetry; to whieh a complete YocabnlaTy it appended. By
W. H- Woodbury. |1 50.
VOTI0E8.
firam tJk§ WmUkmmn amd R^fUetmr, (Btsttf^ .
* III plan 1i highly approved by eompetent judgoik «• ■Impto and phllMophtad, as
taadiiHr to the knowledge of the teienoe and the art or the language, Ums niaklog pio
greia thorough."
r^om W, H, AIU»^ PrtidnU 9f Ohwrd CUlegt.
■*The New Method with Genrnw cnntalna all that Is neoesmry to make the ae<|al-
altioQ of German easy and deHght^il to the student, lis style Is perspleaona, Ita ai^
langement nataral, and its method, combining as tt does the praettcal whh the
theoralie» la well adapted to all classes of learners. The *■ Edeetie German Beador/
and "Shorter Course with German,* I consider deserriag onqnalUled praise.**
liy«ai O. Aoitfc» AJU^ Principal •/ Okia fTu. FtmtU§ CM«g«,
•• After a carcAil examination of Woodbary*s Blethod with GermaB; I ameoii?taesd
cfits saperlorlty OTcrany other that I hare seen on thai BafedceL** «
JWw PnfusmrJ. C PUsrd, IUUmU CalUg§,
«I haTO examined earsAdly Woodbnrys Method, and haTO no beritatten hi
pronoonelag It deeldedly superior to any other German grammar of which I hate aar
knoiwledgft It meets the wanta which 1 hare Mt as stodeBt and as leaehar.*»
JWw a§ WtrteaUr {MstM.) PallMdhm.
^'Thb phm of this book Is phlloeophlcal aad practical, more so than aay dlMr
which has been provided Ibr learners or the German language. Beginning with the
etamento of the study, U prssento a plain ' . ^ . .. . .
rMidlogi speaking and composing German,
\ of the study, U prssenia a plain and practical way of aoquiring the art cf
'
Firtm Us JVhlisMl JCiffstiiui,
* Mr. Woodbnry*S Text-Books hare recdred general saataioii ; they are ftel dls-
phKing others In om^wademlc InstitwUons. We will guaraalM Ibr the prsftrsoce d
any teacher who will test them.**
JVmi a, B, IfydCf A.M^ Prof, •f LtMgnttgea in Owtidm Gni. Stmu
**I have carefully examined Woodbury's New Method with German, and am de>
lighted. It Is for the best scheme of langnajse-leamlag with which I have ever beoeiBe
afloualated.**
JVmi a. S. Hut€kmi^ A.M^ PrincipMl 0/ Jfitrwalk (OUs) ImatitmU,
MB la with fbellnp of real pleasure that we greet Mr. Woodbury's New
Method w'.Ji the German, as a valuable addition to our means of acquiring lois
noble language^ Be^ has struck out a new and indepeadeat coarse^ aad has Ml
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
i 9 happy method of tieatlag Hie
7t
r
•i»-^
PUBLSSHXD BY ITISQN AKD PHDTKSYy NSW TOBX.
WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMA5 SERIES.
N0TICX8 OF WOOBBVBT'S KBW XBTHaB.
F^om truu Xa»ty D.D^ Editor ef Dmr CkriMtiieka ^pologtU.
**t haT« froqueatly been naked which was Ibe beat method of leamlnc German,
■nd Traa therafore greatly delighted when Mr. Woodbiiry'a Now Rlethod (bfl Into my
handa. 1 waa on the point of describing ita merita, -when the following review in the
New York Trlbaae met my eye, which eaqpreeMa AiBy what I wiahed to hATe aaid
Byaeir.**
fVom the AVio T&rk Tribunt,
ibrma
**Thia work ia diatingulabed for the extent and eomprehenalTeneae of ita plan. The
M of the language, jvhich are of the airopieat and moat rarailiar character, are llrat
lented to the aUeniidB of the atudent, wltbont any ftlglitAil array of grammatical
bombiaaliona. for which he la not yet prepared. A falthfol atudy of the eacerciae«» of
which tbore la a great variety in the first portloa of the work, plaoea the atadent In
poaaeaaion of a practical knowledge of the language; while the aynthetle aummary
which occupiea the latter part of the volume, preaonta the aubjcct In new relailoiia,
giving • view of the elementa of the language aa a compreheaalve wholes"
n. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH
Gorman ; embraciiig a brief and eomprehenaiTe ooune of
study, recognizing throughout^ the laws that govern the
1*DKUA|^ >uAd by clear statements, and appropriate exercises^
renaenxig them thoroughly praeticaL By w. H. Woodbury.
96e«ttts.
•
Avm Jotepk W, Jvnke^ PntfeMecr of Ijang%ag§ in the UrhmM Univerwitf^ Oki*.
**I know of no belter introduction to the German language than Woodbury's
Shorter Coune. The more I examine and uae it, the better am 1 aatlafied with It.
To the numerous t«8timonia1a tha book haa ao rapidly gained, permit me to add mine
In reapect to the cleameaa of ita arrangement, and the veiy interealli^ aaannerin which
It preaeota and treata iu aubject-mattera, combining almplicity with comprohonaiveneaa
and depth. Theae merita are enliaooed— and It la no triflingpraiae for a achooUbook—
by great excellenoe in paper, typography, and binding.*'
JFWm tk$ BiUietkecA Saera and Biblical lUpMittrif,
** Mr. Woodbufy'a ftmdamental idea la to unite the practical and the>Net(cal, to
blend the principle and the application, the doctrine and the illuatration. (n conclu-
sion, we can confidently commend this grammar as one of the beat we hare aoen on
aiqr modem language. It beara the marks of intelligent and conadentiotts hibor oo
every page." ^
m. KEYTO WOODBUKY'S SHORTER COURSE.
f»0 cents.
IV. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN
Reader : consisting of Selections in Prose and Poetry, chiefly
from Standard Oeman Writer$ ; with a full Vocabulary, copious
References to the Author's German Qrammars, and a series of
Explanatory Notes ; designed for Schools and private Mtudenta,
By W. H. Woodbury. 75 cents.
Digitized
by Google
PUBUSHSD BT lYISON AND PHINKEY, JXJEW YOBK.
WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GlflMAN SERIES.
^ ■■ ♦ »i ^
VCmCES OF WOODBtTBrS SLEMENTABT .4EBMAN BSADXB.
with
Avm ike JV«» York TViftirac
Mr. Woodbiinr*8 prevkras puhlleatloM, hti Eleroontiry
••In eonnection
German Reader forms a complete and eflbctire apparatus for the stndj of Germaiit
and may be unhealtatlDgly recommended for its breTlty, simplicity, end practical
adaptation to the wants of the learner.''
Fi'om tke IVetternJBKftmau JiipoeaU.
**IfyoahATe an intelligent German in your employ, and want him to learn the
English, get Woodbury's Neue Methode zur ErlemungderEnglischen Sprache for him.
And if you have childien who want to learn German, order, with the above, Wood-
bury's Shorter Gburse with the German, tM. his English German Reader, and you will
•ee that the German In your employ will soon
th0 German language.''
the English, and your diUdran
Frvm tk9 Km Ttrk Obnrver.
**Tbe Gnmmatleal works of this author upon the German language have a wide
and weD-deserved reputation, which will recommend the present volume. The plan la
eneeUent, comprising selections flnom every department of the wide Held of German
litanture, with copious Grammatical Refbrenoes and Vocabulary."
V. WOODBURY'S ECLECTIC GERMAN
Reader; contaming a lar^e and choice collectioii of pieces
from the best German wntere, for advanced Students; with
copious References to the Author's OrammarSk aad a complete
Vocabulary. By W. H. Woodbury. |I.
F^rom Harpet^a Jfew JUonlklf Magazine,
**Th1s Is an admirable manual for German students, combining the oroellenelet of
' pie text4>ook for b^miere, and a copious and autbentle#rork of raferanee for
advanced pnplla. li has already been extensively adopted by Judicious teachen "
FVa/m tke JV«io York Commareial Jidvantiaar,
** This volume win be very useful to those who have begun to acqiflra a knowledge
of the German. The selections have been taken from Goethe, Fichte, Klopstock, Heine,
Riehtor, Lesslng, and others, among the most celebrated German authors, and mostly
relate to snbjeeu which will interest the student, and repay him for the drudgery or
tniMlBtion."
f^om tke LiUrarff MvaHiaar,
<*Woodbury'sGrammara are highly esteemed for the manner in which the oki-
fUhioned analytic method of studying a langtuge^ and the synthetic way have been
happily combined. The peculiar advantage of this Reader, which contains ooploua
seieeUons fiom standard German writers, is Its frequent reforences U> the Author^
Grammara. A ftiU Vocabulary is added to the volume. The book Is worthy of general
adoption.**
^Vmk tka JWw York DnUff Tiwua,
<*It Is a meet uaefol eompend, and will do excellent service.**
fVvfli H. 8, JIToye^, A.M^ Principal of Kawharry CaUagintt Inatituta^ VU
<*Slr. Woodburv's textbooks in German are so deeMedly superior to those wkldi
we are at present using, that I shall adopt them forthwith, to be used in my German
dasses. IfoChlng couM better suit my ideas of a proper qraitem for teaching that lan-
guage.**
Digitized
by Google
PUBUBBSD BT IVISOir AND FHINinCT, NSW TOBK.
I WOODBUUT'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES.
^ ■■ » ■■ ^
i VI. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND
English-German Reader, for the use of German and English
Simday-Schoolsi Families and Priyate Learnera. Containing
complete References to th? '* Shorter Course** and ** Neue Me*
thode^" supplying the learner of either lan^age with erery
aid necessary for acquiring a critical acquaintance with tlie
text By W. H. Woodbury. 26 cents.
votij;E8.
{Vom tht /few Ytk EvangduL
** Woodbary^t Gernum-Eoffllah mad Englitb^erman Raader is an Ingenloiu method
oTlMniing elth«r Germftn or English, by imuis of parallel translations, noting all dif-
, ferMices of Idiom and strocture. References are made conUnoally to the grammar for
explanation of all the principles occurring. It Is small and comnact, but appears to u
veiy convenient for Its puipose. The Aathor Is a practicaUteacber, whoso elemertaiy
works have done much to facilitate the study of this best and most uaeAiI of the modem
Vn. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER-
mans to Learn English ; or, Neue Methode sur Erlemung der
Englischen Sprache, is on the same plan as the corresponding
works for those who desire to learn German. By W. £
Woodbury. |1.
Hr^m A, SkuTM^ PrincipMt •/ R^p^knuoek Atadnmif^ Cmrtiiam Gs Fa.
<*Woodbary*s Nei» Method Is an admirable work; dear In staiementa of prtn-
; di^les; predso In Its deflnltlons; and most happy In Its combination of the amdytle
and synthetic methods of Instruction. The stody of German with such a guide mwl
become rather a recreatloa than a toiL"
•
IV»m Prof, P, H. Bmrmdnn^ TVsf t\ntaU Sssiincry.
**Mr. Woodbury is entitled to the warmest mUtude of teachers and pnplti tbr
thia work, and to that of the Geman public for bis * Engltsche Grammatioi* wUab I
hate used with good success in teaching English to my countrymen.**
fVem Ans^n J. Upson^ A.M^ Professor sf RksUrU and Oratsrjh *nd fsnmmrlff
Ttaeker of Ctorman tn HamilUm CoUego,
** There are two methods of teadilng the German language In this country, wfateh
; are quite diverse. Mr. \Y00dbu17, as I think, has snccessAilly united these two
; methods. He has made a book which is good theoretically, and which, I tldnk| Is w«B
; adapted fi»r the use of all students of the German langqage."
Vm. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICmONARY. A
new and complete American Dictionary of the English and
German Languages, with the Pronunciation and AecentuatioB
according to the method of Webster and Heinsius. By Wm.
Odell ElweU. Kew Stereo. Edition. |1 60.
Digitized
by Google
Digitized
by Google
I Digitized by VjOOQ IC
L
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Digitized
by Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11